JP2018086035A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having characteristics in display means.SOLUTION: A Ninja character NJ4 is a display of a character related to a display of a reservation icon in a read-ahead display mode. An in-preparation image RDY is a display indicating readiness to start a mini game. After a start of a reservation change prior performance display by the Ninja character NJ4, the reservation icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode. Display of the in-preparation image RDY may start in a state where an UI part UI3 is displayed. Regarding the in-preparation image RDY whose display has started, the display may end in a state where the UI part UI3 is set to non-display. The mini game may start in a state where the UI part UI3 is set to non-display after the in-preparation image RDY ends. An iron plate image TP may be displayed after the mini game is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 391

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

  In pachinko and other game machines, the game area of the game board is provided with an obstacle that changes in the direction of the falling of the game balls, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. It is common. When the game ball wins a prize, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 etc.).

  In addition, in such gaming machines, those equipped with display means are known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game console characterized by display means.

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that the display start of a certain preliminary display is awaited.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the third display may be started, and
The third display whose display is started in the first state is configured such that the display may end in the second state,
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state,
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect is configured to be started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
Configured to be in the second state after the first state;
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at pachinko machine 100 concerning a 1st embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the same pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure showing an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the presentation which tangled the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means A, and the effect which tangled the operation means B. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means. It is a figure showing gradually an example about an effect which tangled operation means A (chance button 136). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example in the case where the production which entangles the operation means A (chance button 136) is performed through big SP reach production, and a big hit is performed. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 16 step by step. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIGS. 16 and 17; It is a figure showing gradually an example in a case where it becomes a loss, although the production which tangled the operation means A (chance button 136) is performed through strong SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure showing an example in a case where it becomes a big hit, when the production which entangles the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed after strong SP reach production, and it becomes an example in case of becoming a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure showing an example in which a chance button 136 which is operation means A starts vibration according to operation of penetration section 191 which is operation means B in a step. It is a figure showing an example in which the chance button 136 which is operation means A is also operated after operating the penetration part 191 which is operation means B in a step. It is a figure which shows an example in case a timing which operates the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is later than the example shown in FIG. 24 in an example in a step. It is a figure which shows the example which the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates by vibrating a housing | casing. It is a figure which shows the example which the permeation | transmission part 191 itself rotates in the front-back direction, and vibrates strongly. FIG. 17 is a view showing in stages an example of a case in which a scene in which an enemy player has won is temporarily displayed after strong SP reach production but becomes a big hit by resurrection production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 28 in steps. It is a figure showing one example of the third production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of the advance notice effect started according to operation of penetration section 191 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which tangled the pseudo ream. It is a figure showing the example of the other production which tangled the pseudo ream in steps. It is a figure showing in stages an example in which the big hit symbol is decidedly displayed from the fluctuation variation display, and the effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 36 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the fourth production and the fifth production. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39 in stages. It is a figure for demonstrating further the relationship of button A (1st chance button 136) and button B (2nd chance button 137). It is the figure which showed three examples of promotion production. It is the figure which showed two other examples regarding a promotion production. It is a figure for demonstrating a general timer notice. It is a figure showing in steps an example etc. which may show timer notice display T according to button operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the timing of back button operation, and the timing of a pending | holding increase. It is a figure which shows two examples about button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the method of the display including the timer advance notice display T. FIG. It is a figure showing an example in case a timer notice overlaps with other productions with a countdown of remaining time. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer advance. It is a figure which shows the example by which timer advance notice display T is displayed on the device different from the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure showing gradually a situation of change display of a decoration pattern in which animation of reservation icon is performed. It is a figure showing gradually an example of a simultaneous change of a reservation icon under symbol stop. It is a figure showing gradually an example of a simultaneous change of a pending icon when there is a pending increase while symbol stop. It is a figure showing the example of the simultaneous change of the reservation icon when the number of reservations increases by two during symbol change in steps. It is a figure showing the example of the simultaneous change of the reservation icon when the number of reservations increases by two during symbol stop in steps. It is a figure for explaining winning a prize change. It is a figure showing gradually an example of a simultaneous change of a reservation icon when a reservation increases in winning a prize change. It is a figure which shows an example when a pending | holding increases during a stop display in a prize order fluctuation | variation, and it becomes a pending | filled full tank. It is a figure which shows the example in which simultaneous change production | presentation is not performed according to the kind of the pending | holding icon currently displayed. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change presentation at the time of becoming a reservation full-tank in a prize order change. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 2nd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 in stages. Fig. 78 (h) is a diagram showing the example of the effect in the other case in a stepwise manner, following Fig. 78 (q). (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorized by RAM408, (c) is a notice icon It is a figure explaining an example of digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon before change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after change. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 in stages. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 in stages. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 in stages. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 in stages. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 in stages. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 95 in stages. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 96 in stages. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 in stages. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which a notice icon changes gradually. It is a figure showing the example of a display at the time of power failure and power recovery while displaying a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation and a digestion presentation in steps. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 in stages. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation and a digestion presentation in steps. It is a figure showing the modification of the increase production of a notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation in steps. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 in stages. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure showing in a step-by-step manner another modified example of the digestion presentation effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of a production using movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation gradually. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation gradually. It is a figure showing gradually another modification of the increase production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation gradually. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation and a digestion presentation in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect which can be performed in decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure showing gradually the example of presentation of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 step by step. It is a figure showing gradually the example of presentation of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 in stages. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of another presentation concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and tutorial display. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the presentation apparatus 206 in the game board 200 applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about an example of a pending change notice effect as a prefetch notice effect by a pending icon applicable to an embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 139 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. FIG. 140 is a view showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing another variation of the effect shown in FIG. 140. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of pending change notice effects. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of the symbol change display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of expansion production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 5-9 of this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of production of a mini game applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 171. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of the presentation of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning a 3rd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at a game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (A) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 64, (b) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a menu screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a display in the menu screen shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of a pseudo series effect. It is a figure explaining an example of chance eye production. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a pending change notice. It is a figure explaining an example of the production which used the production movable body. It is a figure explaining an example of production by single operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of production by single operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of production by single operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of production by continuous hitting operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that long press auto continuous hit is performed in production by continuous hit operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that long press auto continuous hit is performed in production by continuous hit operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of production by continuous hitting operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that a holding change advance notice is performed during production | presentation by continuous hit operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that continuous hitting operation is performed in production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a concrete presentation in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a concrete presentation in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a concrete presentation in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure shown about an example of production which operates a production button according to a rhythm. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a concrete presentation in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a concrete presentation which used two presentation buttons. It is a figure explaining an example of character selection presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of character selection presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of character selection presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of character selection presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection effect performed during symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure explaining an example of production by continuous hitting operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of back button production. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a concrete presentation in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of chance eye production. It is a figure explaining the other example of a display of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows a mode that the initialization of the production | presentation movable object is performed. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button production. FIG. 248 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 248. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 251. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of false continuation production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a specific presentation shown in FIG. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of a false rendition. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button continuous hitting operation production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button continuous hitting operation production. It is a figure showing gradually about an example of reservation continuation notice generation performed during a big hit game. It is a figure showing gradually about other examples of reservation continuation notice generation performed during a big hit game. It is a figure showing gradually about other examples of reservation continuation notice generation performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button continuous hitting operation production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a specific presentation shown in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows another example of a decorative symbol, (b) is a figure explaining the combination of the symbol used as the eye of a chance of a prior notice. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of an effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 274 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 274. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of an effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of an effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 277 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 277. FIG. 278 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 278. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of a false rendition. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. (A) is a figure shown about the other example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment, (B) is other than the pseudo link effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment It is a figure shown about the example of. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 17 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 1000 as a game console according to a modification of the present invention, as viewed from the front. FIG. 17 shows a game console according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a casino machine 2000, and (b) shows a portable telephone 3000 equipped with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the invention, and (d) a home television comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the invention A game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning a 4th embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure X, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure Y, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example for the special drawing X and the special drawing Y pre-reading result storage part. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part image control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st structural example of the rendering apparatus 206, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd structural example of the rendering apparatus 206. FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 304 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 304 step by step. FIG. 305 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 305 in stages. FIG. 306 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 306. It is a figure showing an example of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which used the chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the aspect of a change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure showing the other example of button production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 339 is a view showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 339 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about another display example of timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 346 in a step-by-step manner. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 349 in stages. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 350 in steps. FIG. 350 is a diagram showing the example of the effect sequentially from FIG. 350 (24) step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 353 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 353. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 357 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 357. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawings 360-361. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawings 360-361. FIG. 363 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 363 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawing 363-Drawing 364. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawings 360-361. FIG. 366 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 366 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 368 in stages. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 368 to FIG. 369; FIG. 370 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 370 step by step. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 341; It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 373 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawings 373-374. FIG. 375 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 375 step by step. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawings 375-376. FIG. 377 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 377 in stages. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 379 in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of an effect following FIG. 379 (18). It is a figure shown gradually about another example of timer notice production shown in Drawing 379-Drawing 380. It is a figure. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 385 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 385 in stages. FIG. 386 shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 386 in stages. It is a figure shown about an example of an effect in a big hit game performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure showing gradually about an example of a display when an error display is displayed in timer advance production performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer advance notice display. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows gradually the example of a display in tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of timer notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button continuous hitting production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production by the explanation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 409 shows in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect shown in FIG. 409. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 412 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 412. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the false continuation production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining another mode of the example of an effect shown in Drawing 154 (b-1)-the figure (b-5). It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 52 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 21 is a view showing a game console according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a supporting machine 2000, and (b) shows a portable telephone 3000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention A home video game console 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail using the drawings. Note that the enclosed type refers to an enclosed type game machine or the like that cyclically uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 has an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3) as an external structure. . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Moreover, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, the light source as an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like is a lamp if it emits light. , And one that emits light corresponds to an example of the light emitting means.

  The game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the door opening sensor 609 (refer FIG. 4) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmitting unit 190. The transmitting unit 190 includes a transmitting portion 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmitting portion 191 can be pivoted in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the lower part. In addition, the transmitting unit 190 incorporates a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transmitting portion 191 functions as an operating means (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball firing handle 134 for launching to the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for giving a change to the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136 are issued. It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of the operation means. The chance button 136 is also an example of the movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, this chance button 136 is capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launcher 110 is attached below the main body 104, and is not shown in the figure, where the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player to pivot the launcher (not shown) and the gaming ball is struck at the tip of the launcher. And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 can play a game by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the disabled person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called game board of a right-handed machine. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. In a game board of a generally known right-handed game machine, changing the strength to launch the game ball by the operation of the player allows the general drawing start port 228 and the second special view start port 232, which will be described later, and It can be divided into 1 special figure starting port 230. Specifically, with respect to the game area 124, the game ball rolling on the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special view start port 230 by the arrangement of the game nail 238 or the like is the second The game ball rolling on the second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special view start opening 232 is configured such that entering the special view start opening 232 is difficult or impossible, and vice versa 1) It is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 equipped with a right-handed game board, and can be widely applied to pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". Details of the rendering device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in this case, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs here. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). Here, holding a common drawing fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, two) Is possible. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) which are being held, and here, the predetermined number of special view fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning openings 226 are disposed on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning openings 226 (when winning in the general winning openings 226) The payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls into the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be referred to as being distinguished as the "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be distinguished from the "rental ball". It may be called a ball (game ball).

  The general drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, one on the right side of the game board 200 It is arranged. For this reason, the common view starting opening 228 is expected to enter the game ball by hitting the right. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  Only one first special view start port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  Only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view starting opening 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting the right. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning opening) provided at the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special view start opening 230. In addition, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special view starting opening 232, and entering the ball by hitting the right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 also has a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 which can be opened and closed by the solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game is started when the big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between the open state and the closed state repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 maintains a closed state until a big hit game is started when a big hit occurs in the power support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state repeat. That is, in any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the second open / close state (here, open) in which the game ball is easier to win than in the predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and the first open / close state. The variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one of the states) to the other, winning the special figure fluctuation game in the non-power support state, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the big hit symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the power support state, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of times. Open and close. The closed state does not necessarily have to be completely closed in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and it may be a state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult even if it is slightly open. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the center variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball for the upper dish Discharge to 126. The ball entering the central variable winning hole 234 and the ball entering the right variable winning hole 235 are also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the gaming island side.

  According to the arrangement of the common drawing start opening 228, the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the power support state, the right A hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player, and in the non-power support state, a left hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable) Whether to win in the winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) or without winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or Only by passing through, it reaches the out port 240.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The above-mentioned chance button 136 capable of performing the advancing and retreating operations and the transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect movable body.

  Further, as the effect movable body, a not-shown family crest 247 (see FIG. 14 etc.) and a pair of combined articles 248 (see FIG. 22 etc.) united with the family crest 247 are prepared here. The family crest 247 corresponds to a first effect movable body, and the combined character 248 corresponds to an example of a second effect movable body. The family crest 247 is disposed at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When the family crest 247 starts its operation, it falls from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A pair of combined goods 248 are arranged at initial positions on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. When the combined product 248 starts its operation, the left and right each advance from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined features 248 sandwiches the family crest 247 from the left and right respectively, and combines with the family crest. Whether the family crest 247 or the pair of combined characters 248 is in the initial position, it is less visible to the player than in the overlapping state on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is in.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  Here, although the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be one common circuit board other than the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub-control means (400), second sub-control means (500). ), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as the control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One combination of the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as a second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the sensor and the bottom plate full-tank sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a common view display device 21 Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the various status display unit 328 (for example, general drawing hold lamp 216, first special view holding lamp 218, second special view holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222, etc.) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member such as blade member 2321 of second special view starting port 232, door member 2341 of central variable winning hole 234, door member 2351 of right variable winning hole 235, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 which are driven to open and close is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, which indicates that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, and the main control unit 300 constantly transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 The first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, detection unit 710 for detecting that chance button 136 has been pressed, shielding device sensor 430, and the chance A sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 and the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402 and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 Read data etc. and use the work area of VRAM 436 And it generates an image for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 502, drive control of various movable bodies (chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the back and forth direction, a household crest 247, and a combined character 248) Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248, and sensor circuits for outputting detection signals from various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. And 518 are connected. The basic circuit 502 further includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542; A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248. However, the second sub-control unit 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit 400 may control various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248, or either One sub-control unit may perform both control.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 is also performed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. In addition, even when there is a payout error or the like, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door open command, the detection signal of the door open sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without passing through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Alternatively, the door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first auxiliary control unit 400. The emission control unit 630 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via the other control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, etc.) and respective devices. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via each of the other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage substantially simultaneously from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 or at least one of them.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation sales office, the 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24 V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with 24 V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300 into a 12V DC voltage. The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit (not shown in FIG. 4), and the DC voltage of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5 V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit. Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12 V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9 V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, through which a 12 V DC current flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. It corresponds to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the inputted 24 V AC current as it is or converts it into a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 reaches the voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, the CPU 304 outputs a reset signal from the WDT 314. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error, or a case where the CPU 304 can not perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraud, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure and immediate recovery, ie, automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is performed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. Subsequently, security check processing is performed. The security check process recalculates whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct or not. If the authentication code is correct, extension processing is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained at the state before reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2. After that, a confirmation display for maintaining the display is performed for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms).

  Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the finalization of the final display, or after the "variation display of special figure 2" is started The period from the stop display of the stop symbol form of 2 to the end of the confirmation display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 5A, ten types of special views from "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decorative 1" to "decorative 10" as the decorative designs here. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". At the beginning of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol changes at high speed (scrolling display) for each symbol display area. And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 3 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is a counter for generating a big hit special decision random number counter initial value, a big hit special shot determination random number counter, and a small hit special win for each special view 1 and 2. Counter for generating random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, counter for small drawing special drawing determination, counter for generation of random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, random number counter for special drawing determination for lost time special drawing timer, and special drawing timer Each counter of the random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, in the RAM 308, the number of reservations, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for big hit special figure determination, the random number value for small hit special figure determination, the special time special figure decision for each special figure 1 and special figure 2 A random number value, a success / failure predetermination result, a special figure predetermination result, a success / failure decision result, a special figure determination result, and a special figure timer determination result are stored. Furthermore, in the RAM 308, the reserve storage unit of the special figure divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas that can reserve the start of the determination of acceptance (lottery) separately is made separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is prepared. In the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 1 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 1 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 1 random number value for decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored one set at a time in the winning order (holding order) for each area. In addition, in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2, for the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 2 decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6A according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initialization of the I / O 310, and various kinds of storage in the RAM 308 as initialization 1. It initializes variables, permits operations to the WDT 314, and sets initial values. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 causes the power management unit 660 to operate via the second sub control unit 500 as the main control unit. It is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to the WDT processing, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), Perform setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  Next, in step S103, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process here, three initial values for generating initial values of the random number counter for big hit special figure determination, the random number counter for small hit special figure decision, and the random number counter for lost special order decision Update the value generation counter. After the basic random number initial value updating process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer number determination for each of the special and common figures, and any of these counters is capable of determining a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate random numbers for In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After completion of the effect random number update processing, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of this timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, or WDT 314 is periodically (for example, once in about 2 ms which is the cycle of main controller timer interrupt). ) Or restart.

  First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before the previous time, presence of a previous detection signal, and presence of a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special view start opening 230, and the second special view start opening 232 entering the ball, or It is determined that the drawing start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. In addition, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal) is stored. Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value updating process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number updating process (step S205), the values of various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. For example, every time the random number counter for big hit special figure 1 determination makes one rotation, the value of the generation counter is set to the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same applies to other random number counters.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special view display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the prize determination process (step S209), first, when there are prizes in the prize openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 provides an award for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the ball number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set as the original ball number storage area.

  Subsequently, in the prize determination processing, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has a prize, and the number of the special figure fluctuation games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) And stores predetermined start information. That is, if the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random number value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special drawing determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 which performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the start information deriving means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (order of holding) in the holding storage unit of the special view provided in the RAM 308. The reserve storage unit of this special view has a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this case) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232. It corresponds to an example of the start information storage means which can be stored up to. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view. In this case, the temporary area is started It may be used as information storage means, or it may be used as a start information storage means for the suspension storage unit and the temporary area of the special view. Also, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations of the special view stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reservations of the special view increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, and the number of common drawing fluctuation games being held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the common drawing wins at that timing. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area different from that for special drawing provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing win random number value which is start information.

  Also, in this winning determination process, to a first special view start opening 230, a second special view start opening 232, a common view start opening 228, a central variable winning opening 234, or a right variable winning opening 235 by a predetermined ball detection sensor The first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common view starting port 228, and the center variable in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400 when a winning (entering) is detected. The winning a prize reception information indicating the presence or absence of a winning (entering) of the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  If the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

  When the winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the pre-reading process is called. In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased since the pre-reading process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of pending calls (the number of pending calls at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which will be referred to as the old pending number). The number of holdings at the time of executing the pre-reading processing of this time after the winning a prize judgment processing (step S209) is compared with the number of old holdings, and it is determined whether the number of holdings increases. If the number of reservations has not increased, this prefetch process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations is increased, the amount of increase in the random number value for the special view 1 jackpot determination in the special storage 1 of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read ahead, or The amount of increase in the random number value for the big hit judgment in Figure 2 is read ahead. In the look-ahead reading here, only the amount of increase may be read ahead, but all may be read ahead. In addition, although pre-reading here means reading start information prior to the pass / fail determination (this lottery), but in the subsequent pre-reading processing, the word “pre-reading” is the result of ahead (the result of pass / fail determination (this lottery) Sometimes used in the sense of reading).

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in the control state of either the special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low or the relatively high special figure high probability state. Being in the special figure high probability state is called probability fluctuation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a positive change flag is prepared. When this probability fluctuation graph is set to ON, it is a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and when the probability fluctuation graph is set to OFF, it is a special figure low probability state.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-qualification decision table used in the pre-reading process. In this success / failure predetermination table, a random number range is defined by being divided into the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is finished, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value It is determined as to which random number range in the table for belonging. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the random number value for special figure 1 big hit determination or special figure 2 big hit determination random number read ahead is a predetermined numerical range. At times, the success / failure predetermination result is pre-determined as "big hit", and when other than that, the success / failure pre-determination result is pre-determined as "loss". In the special drawing related process described later (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), the special determination variation game is again determined using the same determination table using the same determination as the content of the preliminary determination table, The determination result here is the result of the prior determination.

  If the judgment result of the success or failure is "big hit", the big hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2 A big hit special look 2 random number value for decision is preread. If the success / failure predetermination result is "small hit", the small hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserve storage of the special figure 2 Look for a small-hit special figure 2 determination random number value in the department. If the result of the pass / fail judgment is “loss”, the random number value for special figure 1 determination at the time of loss in the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of special figure 2 When reading out, the random number value for determination of the special figure 2 is read ahead. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special-image prior determination table used in the prefetching process. A random number range corresponding to each of 10 types of stop symbol forms (“Special figure A” to “Special figure J”) shown in FIG. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. In addition, the determination result of the special view here is also a result of the prior determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the special view is also performed again in the special figure related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. .

  The pre-reading of the start information described above and the prior determination using the pre-read start information are performed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special-pattern related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information prefetching means, and the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value and various The main control unit 300 for prefetching the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of the second start information prefetching means. In addition, the main control unit 300 performing predetermination based on the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first prior determination means, and is for the special figure 2 jackpot determination The main control unit 300 which performs the prior determination based on the random number value and the random numbers for determination of various special views 2 corresponds to an example of the second prior determination means.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 1 divided into areas for each hold, and a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 2 similarly divided into areas for each hold. It is done. Information representing the special-figure preliminary determination result (also information representing the special-figure and hereinafter referred to as pre-reading information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the pre-reading information temporary storage unit.

  It should be noted that if the number of reservations has not increased, the prefetch information “no suspension” is stored in the corresponding suspension area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Also, in the pre-reading process, when a big hit is in progress, and when the current control state is the power support state (the short time flag is on), pre-reading and pre-judging of start information of the special figure 1 is performed. No, in these cases, "undetermined" information indicating that the predetermination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the special view 1 that has been read is not performed, the corresponding hold area of the read-ahead information temporary storage unit Remember to That is, based on having entered the starting opening where the pair of wing members 2321 is not provided (the first special view starting opening 230 whose state is a fixed starting area), it is acquired during the big hit game and during the power support Pre-judgment based on the start information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading advance notice) of the pre-judgment result is not performed. By doing this, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, pre-reading of starting information itself is not done, but pre-reading does not do pre-judgment and the result (the pre-reading notice) it does not do pre-judgment and pre-judging. The notification (pre-reading advance notice) of may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6 (b), a general drawing related process is performed following the winning determination process of step S209 (step S211). In this common drawing related processing, first, as common drawing state update processing, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state is performed. For example, in the process during the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting / lighting drive control which repeats turning on and off of the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeated. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  In the processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol updating timer changes from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (common drawing A shown in FIG. The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is performed so as to display any one display mode of the common view B shown in FIG. 5 (c). Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas are prepared in which various settings are performed in various processes, not limited to the general drawing related process here. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either symbol pattern of the hit symbol or the lost symbol. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the hit symbol displayed in a definite manner is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, the common drawing loss flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set.

  Subsequently, in this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuating game and the second special drawing starting opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the common drawing being held. When the number of fluctuation games is one or more, the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is won or not by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number value stored in the above random number storage area In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed subsequent to the general drawing related process of step S211 described above. In this special drawing related processing, first, special drawing status update processing (special drawing 2 status update processing) for special drawing 2 is performed, and then, the special drawing status update processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 status update) Process). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233), and then the process is ended.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory time elapses (the time when value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), in special figure related lottery process which it mentions later The 7 segment LED constituting the second special view display device 214 is turned on / off drive control based on the special view determination result (the special design stop symbol form), and special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308 Make settings to represent things. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special figure C), and a short time symbol (special Figure D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first lost symbol (special A finalized display of any one of the figure I) and the first lost symbol (special figure J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. In addition, when the value is set in the number-of-charges storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shorts, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state) or during the small hit game, the time saving flag is turned off. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-power support state (first approach rate control state) when in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special game state).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in command setting transmission processing (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping variable display is The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that it is special view 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

  A big hit flag is also prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect presentation start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning hole 234 or the right variable winning hole 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning hole 234 or the door member of the right variable winning hole 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 308 (for 1.5 seconds, for example) to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) The effect waiting period is indicated in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for a period displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is finished. Set the information.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit gaming state (special gaming state) It corresponds to an example of the variable winning combination control means which controls. The open / close patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the ROM 306 to select the open / close pattern according to the success or failure determination of the special view fluctuation game. get.

  In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol aspect represented by the special drawing determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on when the special drawing determination result is “special drawing A” or “special drawing C” in the special drawing lottery process described later. . Further, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing E", only the definite change flag is set to ON among the definite change flag and the time saving flag. Furthermore, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing B" or "special drawing D", only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON and the number of times of electricity support stored in RAM 308 is stored. Set the number of charge support times 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special view start opening 232 (variable start area) is controlled, It corresponds to an example of the approach rate changing means for changing between the non-power support state which is the approach rate control state and the power support state which is the second approach rate control state.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, a lost flag is prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, it is made to shift to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special view 2 state update process is completed, the special view 1 state update process is performed. In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure related lottery process, a process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first, and thereafter, a process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this manner, the main control unit 300 performs the special view 2 related lottery process prior to the special view 1 related lottery process, thereby achieving the same timing (the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at a predetermined timing) In the case where the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special view start opening 230 in S209) and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special view start opening 232 Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied at the same time, or the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied Even when there is a special figure 2 variation game is moving first, the special figure 1 variation game does not start to change. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special view fluctuation game by the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and the winning of the second special view start opening 232 Based on the result of lottery based notification, it is carried out prior to the result notification of the lottery based on the winning to the first special figure starting port 230, as starting information and special drawing 1 of the special figure 1 as starting information where the lottery is not performed When only the start information of the special view 1 among the start information of 2 remains, if the start information of the special view 2 is newly stored, it is based on the start information of the special view 2 which is newly stored. Notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special view 1 already stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the lottery means (the pass / fail judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, execution of a lottery (judgment determination), determination of a special view to be stopped and determination, and determination of a timer number are performed. First, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not established. Here, it is determined whether the second special view display device 214 is in the special view variation display or in the stop display, and when any of the display is in the main control unit timer interrupt processing If the display is not in any display, it is judged whether it is set during special drawing operation or not during special drawing operation, and if it is set during special drawing operation, main control unit timer interrupt processing If it is set in the special view non-operation state, it means that the yes / no decision prohibit condition is not established, and it is then decided whether or not the predetermined yes / no decision condition is met. The determination here refers to the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether the number of holdings of the special view 2 variation game is greater than zero. If the number of reservations is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and if it is 1 or more, the predetermined yes / no determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, a random number value for one set, which is start information stored most in the past, from the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308 The random number value for big hit special figure 2 decision, the random number value for small hit special figure 2 decision, and the random number value for lost time special figure 2 decision) are extracted and the start information (randomness) still stored in the reserve storage unit Move the set of numbers) from the area currently stored to the next area. In other words, if the start information stored in the past is taken out from the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2 and if the start information is stored in the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2, then the Nth oldest start information is held It is set as the (N-1) th oldest start information in the storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. One set of random numbers from the reserve storage section of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, big hit special figure 2 decision random number value, small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and lost time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of the second start information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a table for deciding on a pass / fail is also stored. The contents of the success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the success / failure predetermination table described above. In this success / failure determination process, the random number value for the special figure 2 big hit determination is in the table for determining success or failure according to the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 Based on which of the random number ranges of the above, "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is derived as the result of the pass / fail determination. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving "big hit", "small hit", or "lost" is equivalent to a success or failure judgment (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the success or failure judgment processing here is a lottery means (a probability judgment means). Corresponds to one example. Also, "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific result of the pass / fail judgment.

  When execution of the propriety determination processing is completed, it proceeds to the symbol determination processing of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing determination table. The contents of this special drawing determination table are the same as the contents of the special drawing prior determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the success or failure determination result is "big hit", the random number value for big figure special figure 2 determination belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table, when the big hit. The special drawing determination result is determined to be "special drawing A" to "special drawing F". In addition, when the success or failure determination result is "small hit", the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table belongs to the small figure special figure 2 determination random number value. It is determined to be “special figure G” or “special figure H”. Furthermore, if the result of the success or failure determination is “loss”, the special drawing determination result is “specially determined based on which random number range in the special drawing determination table belongs to the special drawing 2 determination table. Decide on figure I or "special figure J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special drawing corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

  Subsequent to the symbol determination processing of the special drawing, in the fluctuation time determination processing, the fluctuation display period in the fluctuation stop display of the special drawing is determined. In this fluctuation time determination process, the timer number determination random number is acquired from the timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation start, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. A timer number determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each of the special figure determination results. The timer number is the time from when the second special view display device 214 or the first special view display device 212 starts changing the symbols until it displays the stop symbol representing the result of the pass / fail determination, that is, the special view changes display Represents a fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), but may be a fluctuation table time period of a decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers of timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, and the super-shortened special figure fluctuation time is reached. It means to become. In addition, what is determined by timer 1 or timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special drawing fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 represents that the special drawing fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as normal reach. With normal reach, in general, decorative symbols whose two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal are stop-displayed (strictly, temporary stop) (first stop and second stop are performed) ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area being variably displayed is a specific symbol (symbol display area being stopped) It is a state where it will be stopped and displayed the combination of a predetermined big hit symbol if the stop indication (the third stop or the final stop) is the same as the symbol. The timer 5 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, the variation pattern of the decoration symbol in the decoration symbol display device 208 is selected as Super Reach. The Super Reach is a product that improves presentation effects by adding a special variable display etc. to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, the variation pattern of the decoration symbol in the decoration symbol display device 208 is selected as the special variation. Special variations include special multiline reach, full turn reach, special full turn reach, etc. When the timer 8 is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as full turn reach. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is extremely lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the Premier Reach.

  In addition, when it only says reach, it means the change pattern of the decoration design including normal reach, super reach, and special change.

  The reach is determined after the success or failure determination that the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special drawing related process is a specific success / failure determination result (a predetermined result with high player's degree of advantage) It is a notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure.

  In the fluctuation time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired random number for timer number determination belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number in accordance with the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the current special figure 2 as well as the timer number determination random number is also available. The timer number may be determined based on the above.

  The timer number representing the special drawing fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In addition, before special figure lottery related processing is executed (for example, the above-mentioned winning a prize decision processing S209), from the plural types timer selection table which includes the timer number which is 1 or plural period information, to the special figure advance decision result Alternatively, one type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. Also in the determination of the timer number here, a lottery may be performed by a dedicated random number (for example, a timer number determination random number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined already without performing the lottery. . Further, the timer selection table may be selected in the special view lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

  When the fluctuation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process is ended.

  Subsequently, in the special drawing related processing, the special drawing 1 related lottery processing is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds per minute specification command, big winning opening open command, big winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type), such as a clear command, a special figure hold increase command, and a general view hold increase command, which can specify the type of command).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information representing a special figure stop symbol, information representing a control state (information representing a setting state of a time saving flag and a probability variation flag), and information representing a timer number in the command data In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes information representing a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc., and in the case of a prize effect start command and an end effect start command In the case of the hit round number designation command, the control state information is included, and the hit round number is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning to the central variable winning opening 234 And the presence or absence of a winning on the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 as command data (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, information representing a timer number, hold The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are done is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc. is set as command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information representing a special drawing determination result, information representing a control state, the number of pending first special drawing fluctuation games or second special drawing fluctuation games, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to a big hit game start command. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data represents the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, Information is set to indicate information such as the number of the first special-character variation game or the second special-character variation game that is held. The first sub control unit 400 having received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the end effect control command displays an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit on the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the decorative symbol display device 208. Ends. The end effect start command said here corresponds to a big hit game end command. In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening opening setting transmission processing, the information which shows the information which shows the number of rounds which are stored in RAM308 the present round number and control state etc as a command data of big winning opening opening command . In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening closing setting transmission processing, the current round number which is remembered in RAM308 as the command data of big winning a prize opening closing command, the information which shows control state, the 1st special figure fluctuation game which is suspended Alternatively, information is set that indicates the number of second special figure change games and the like.

  At step S215, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, the special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 as command data of the special view reserve increase command, control state And information representing the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (the special figure prior determination result).

  Further, in step S215, general command hold drawing increase processing is also performed. In this general command draw increasing process, information representing a control state or the like is set in the command data of the draw increasing command. In addition, a common drawing fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing has been started (is performed) is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as the common drawing related command. It should be noted that from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a common drawing fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing is stopped, and the pair of blade members 2321 has started opening (done) It is also possible to transmit an electric chew open start command indicating that, or an electric chew close command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 is closed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the rounds based on the number of rounds included in the command and the number of current rounds.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be outputted to the payout control unit 600 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, the power on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), Bits 4 to 5 of this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 after encryption processing It indicates the number of requested payouts.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step S201 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the underfill error, etc. When an error or a bottom plate error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330 Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 is completed, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. However, before the return, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are stored in the original registers. Make settings, set interrupt permission, etc. Also, before returning, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not, and when the low voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the state at the time of power failure is restored Save a specific variable or stack pointer to the specified area of the RAM 308 as return data, perform power-off processing such as initialization of the I / O port, and then return to the main control main processing It is also good.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 7. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect involving the operation means described below is also controlled first in this effect control process. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information on the variation time of the symbol is received, whether or not the effect involving the operation means is to be executed according to the length of the variation time in this effect control process If determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read out from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read out here, the image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313, and for the movable body control, the second sub control unit 500 controls according to the effect data read out here The command is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub control unit 500 in step S 713 described later.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination here, when pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data according to pressing operation of the chance button 136, pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is effective, processing such as preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, this The setting for outputting the control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. When the door open command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, in step S321, the door open command is set to be output to the second sub control unit.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle.

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, movable body control processing is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control process here, various movable bodies (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the front and rear direction, a family crest product 247, and a combination character) are When a control command related to the object 248) is received, various processing corresponding to the control command is performed, and operation control of each of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248 is performed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process in a predetermined cycle. Run with

  In step S901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Subsequently, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect in stages. In FIG. 9, time passes in the order of alphabets and the like described in parentheses (the same applies in the subsequent drawings unless otherwise specified). In addition, the time interval between the alphabet etc. written in parentheses and the alphabet etc. written next in parentheses may be equal intervals or may be different intervals in one figure. The intervals different from the equal intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the subsequent drawings).

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, the variation icon display region 208e is provided in the central part of the effect display region 208d, and the hold icon display region 208f is on the right side of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the variation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area, or when it is displayed in the opposite direction), further reach effect is performed. May be displayed only when the Note that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or more pending icons can be displayed in the pending icon display area 208 f. Four decoration icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9A. These four suspension icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles by dotted lines indicates that the suspension icon is not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing or the start of the judgment of the special view is held, and the number of the hold icon displayed is basically that of the special view fluctuation game It is the same number as the number of reservations. However, before and after the hold processing, there may be timing when the number of display of the hold icon does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes the hold icon of the special view 1 and the hold icon of the special view 2. The hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to be display areas for both icons. In addition, the hold icon can be previewed and notified of the hold status according to the display mode. The animation associated with the hold icon is, for example, an increase animation executed when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed, or the order of the hold fluctuates due to the previous hold being digested, and the hold is performed. Movement animation performed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position next to the left), change animation performed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-reading result, etc. hold is digested Erase animation that is executed when the reserve icon is erased, and save animation that is executed when the reserve icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is evacuated when reserve of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine Etc. In addition to the animation described above, a stand-by animation that can be executed alone during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease in hold and no change in the hold icon). There is. An example of this standby animation is an animation (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed scale animation) performed on the spot without changing the display position. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of animations of increase, movement, change, deletion, evacuation, and standby of the hold icon are executed in a plurality of overlapping manners.

  One fluctuation icon can be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9B, a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special drawing fluctuation game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or expressed as a change icon moves. May be Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the change icon display area 208 e is completed may be referred to as a change icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the change icon display area 208e when the hold is digested, the hold icon with the oldest start winning timing being displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. There are a moving animation for moving as a fluctuation icon, and a changing animation for changing from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. These animations may be combined and performed simultaneously. If the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation that is executed during the execution of the special drawing fluctuation game, an erasing animation that is executed when the special drawing fluctuation game is ended and the fluctuation icon is erased, and the fluctuation icon There is a change animation etc. which are performed when changing a display mode of in the middle. These animations may be performed simultaneously in combination with one another. Also, the waiting animation of the variation icon may be performed simultaneously with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special view 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth pattern 2081 of the special view 1 is a round display, and the fourth pattern 2082 of the special view 2 is a square display. In any of the fourth patterns 2081 and 2082, gray represents fluctuation, black represents stop display (final display) of big hit symbols, and white represents stop display of final symbol (final display). It represents that it is.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 9, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special view hold lamp 220 are shown. ing.

  In addition, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, the white display indicates the white light on or off of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display is the Indicates a red lighting condition. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Moreover, although it was set as "lighting" here, it may be "flashing" (following, the same).

  The background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is a background image of the castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is the castle town mode among the prepared effect modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9 (a), both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a discolored appearance " The decoration 3 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 1 "is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are also displayed in white during stoppage. While four first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9 (a) are on, four black circle holding icons which are special symbols 1 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, symbol variation display of the special figure is started in the first special view display device 212, and variation display of the decoration symbol is also started in the decoration symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, updating (variation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, only the first three special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and only three holding icons (pending icon h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed, a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208 e. In this example, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 6A, the hold icon h1 having the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. It is the result of having moved to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th design 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changing to the display (gray) while it is fluctuating.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9C, reach effect is started. Up to this point, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is reduced in size at the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3 .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button effect here is the effect that tells the development of Super Reach. Also, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach to be developed. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 3) with the arrow display 136b and the character display of “press” as a prompt display for prompting) and the remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as a valid one. One is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136 c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Also, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) after a while (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 which has been lit in red is switched to being lit in white or is turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in notice indicating whether it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display of "CHANCE" is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then it is developed into the super reach A as shown in FIG. 9 (h). There is. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (h), the characters Super Reach A are displayed, indicating that the effect of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the super reach A presentation is also performed on the background of the castle town. In addition, when the effect display of the super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, the frame-like image which shows the position of 4th design 2081, 2082, the fluctuation icon c, and the fluctuation icon display area 208e is continuing being displayed. The fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may also be erased and not visible. The Super Reach A is not a jackpot-confirmed Super Reach, and just because it has developed into a Super Reach A does not always mean a big hit. In addition, even when the display is made to expect that "CHANCE" is likely to develop into a super reach, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost design is stopped and displayed without the super reach being started. In some cases. Further, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed when the chance button 136 is not operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ') showing another example continued from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), a display of "sorry" is made on the decorative symbol display device 208, and thereafter As shown in (h '), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not develop into a super reach, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Loss 3"-"decor 1"-"decor 3" is stopped and displayed. It is done. In addition, even if the display of "sorry" is made, it may be a big hit by the reversal production.

  Although the operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, the operation outside the effective period of operation is ultimately treated as an invalid one, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state in the operation valid period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation valid state) in which execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for describing in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation and a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10 (a) shows that both the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are at their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmitting portion 191 is also in a substantially parallel state with the transparent plate member 118. Even when the chance button 136 is in the initial position, it can be operated (pressed), and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked. Also, the chance button 136 may vibrate and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the depressed position.

  FIG. 10 (b) shows that the transmitting portion 191 is provided at the lower part from the initial position and is pivoted about a drive shaft (not shown) and inclined forward. The drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. In the transmitting unit 191, the LED contained in the transmitting unit 190 turns forward while turning on or flashing, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Also, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 10 (b), it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or in the lateral direction. In addition, the transmission part 191 may turn in small increments in the front-rear direction as strong vibration with a large swing width of vibration. Even when the transmitting part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmitting part unit 190 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The state (second state) of the transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player is operable to manually push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of the operation means. Even when the transmitting unit 191 is operated and pressed, the LED built in the transmitting unit 190 is lit or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows that the chance button 136 has started to move upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, (d) in the figure shows that the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also stop at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum exit position. Therefore, it is possible to advance into multiple stages. In addition, the chance button 136 which has advanced (projected) from the initial position is also capable of vibrating, and vibrates in the lateral direction or in the vertical direction in the state of having advanced (projected). Also in this case, the chance button lamp 138 can be lighted or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output an effect sound or an effect sound. Furthermore, the chance button 136 advanced (projected) from the initial position is operable to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pressed, the chance button lamp 138 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. In addition, the chance button 136 may be configured to automatically retreat to the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  The vibration of the chance button 136 or the vibration of the transmitting portion 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is exhibited by setting by the effect customization function by the player or setting of a switch on the side of the game shop clerk. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be no vibration at all or only a partial vibration.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is entangled.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. Here, when the operation means A and the operation means B are compared, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. There is a difference that the means B can not be operated at the initial position, but the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, or both may be operation means of the same size, or the initial position The operation means may be operated together or may not be operated together. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. It is also good.

  In addition, the operation means described as the transmission unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with another operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operating means B (the transmitting portion 191) is more striking than the effect involving the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). The degree of expectation of is high. Further, both of the functions A are provided, but the functions B are provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of lighting. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, although the function B is provided only in the operation means A, the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function that can perform strong vibration.

  In the operation means A and the operation means B, the number of functions may be the same.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the decorative symbol display device 208 is “liquid crystal”, the operation data in the family crest 247 and the combined character 248 is “movable body”, the sound output data from the speaker 120 is “sound”, the frame lamp 122 or The light emission data of the LED and various built-in lamps are displayed as "LED", and the vibration data of the operation means A are displayed as "Vibrate". "..." in a figure represents abbreviation | omission of data. Production No. The data of “Vibrate” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” represents that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 2 is "E1", and "E1" represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound" and "LED" in 2 becomes effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated According to each of these effect data, the effect after the operation is started. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" represents that the operating means A is vibrated after the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 become effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. No. 2 data and effect No. The data of 3 may also be called up when the operation means B (the transmission unit 191) is operated. This is because there may be cases where each effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound” and “LED” can be used as effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. No. 2 data or effect No. The presentation according to the "liquid crystal", the "movable body", the "sound" and the "LED" in the data of 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, for the effect No. Data 2 includes data (E1) for vibrating the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" become data after the operation of the operating means A, but the operating means B The operation No. When the data of 2 is read out, the data of “Vibrate” is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as “Liquid Crystal”. In addition, production No. No. 2 data and effect No. In the case of the data of 3, the data of at least "liquid crystal" is different as "A1" and "A2", and the data of "liquid crystal" of "A1" is used after the operation means B is operated. Is the effect No. It is not the data of 3, but the effect No. It is necessary to read out the 2 data.

  The effect data on the operation means B may also be called up when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable body” in the effect data on the operation means B, The presentation according to each presentation data of "Sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "Vibrate". However, the effect data regarding the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an execution timing regarding an effect involving the operation means A and an effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time passes from the left to the right of the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c), "operation means B related effect" started from the top according to the operation of the operation means B (transmission part 191), the operation means B is operated "Operation means B operation effective state" in which the operation means B related effect is started, "operation means B operation" indicating that the operation means B is operated, and operation means A (chance button 136) "Operating means A related rendering" started according to the operation, "Operating means A operation enabled state" in which the operating means A related rendering is started when the operating means A is operated, the operating means A is operated “Operating means A operation” is shown to indicate the event. The "operation means B related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. The "operation means A-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the “operation means A-related effect” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. In the "operation means B operation valid state", there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B is performed and cases where it is not performed. Even in the "operation means A operation valid state", the operation is performed. There are cases where notification (operation promotion notification) for prompting operation of the means A is performed and cases where it is not performed. If these notifications are performed, the player can know that the operation is enabled, but if it is not performed, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation enabled state, but the operation means B related effect is started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation enabled state. Thus, the "operation means B related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effect” may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means B related effect” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means B. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A related effect is started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the "operation means A-related effect" may also be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A-related effect” may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means A related presentation” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means A. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation enabled state, the operation means B operation effective state is executed to the execution of the operation means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state, the operation means B operation valid state is executed to the execution of the operation means B related effect Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) The vibration of A (chance button 136) is simultaneously started, but after the vibration of the operation means A ends first and the vibration of the operation means A ends, the vibration of the operation means B ends.

  The start time may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start time is different, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. May be Also, conversely, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. Further, the end time may be the same, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together Alternatively, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may end together .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 12 (a), when the operation related to the operating unit B is executed without operating the operating unit B, for example, the operation related to the operating unit B is the operation effective of the operating unit B If the mode is to be executed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state, the operation time of the operation means B related effect may be longer as the operation means B is operated earlier. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an execution timing regarding an effect involving operation means. Arrows in each of FIG. 13A to FIG. 13C indicate a vibration period of the operation means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 13A is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation promoting means B is operated in a state where the operation promoting notification of the operating means B (transmissive portion 191) is performed, the operation is performed The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the judgment effect is started. When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, fluctuation fluctuation display of three decoration symbols is started as fluctuation indication of the decoration symbol. The vibration of the operation means A is continued to the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation display. Soon, the fluctuation display is finished, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Period of time is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A will be continued until just before the end of the period of time of the reduced fluctuation indication.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, before the notification of the result regarding the player's profit such as the finalized display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result regarding the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means A The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the judgment effect is started. The judge in the judgment presentation here is a judge that leads to whether or not to shift to a definite change state. When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that aiming at a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operation means A is continued halfway through the execution period of the notification. Soon, the next round is started, and it is notified again that aiming at a specific winning combination (for example, V winning combination).

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (b), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the specific winning opening is aimed at the next round because the maximum allowable time for one round is already determined. The execution period for notifying that is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until slightly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. Moreover, the round which should aim at a specific winning a prize mouth is limited, and if it can be made to win a specific winning a prize mouth in the round, it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, the round which should aim at the specific winning a prize opening is an important round leading to the player's profit, and before the start of the round leading to the player's profit, the effect such as the vibration of the operating means A is ended and the player We are focusing on aiming for a specific winning combination.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B, even when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A does not change but becomes constant.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (c) is an example of the pseudo-series effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means B operates Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is started. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished, and the vibration of the operation means A is also finished at the same time when the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished. Then, the next pseudo variation display is started, and the number of times of pseudo run is the nth time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is performed also in the nth pseudo variation display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the stop display of the pseudo run symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A is ended simultaneously with the end of the stop display of the shortened pseudo run symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operating means B changes, the vibration period of the operating means A also changes.

  In summary including what has been described above, the operation means A can vibrate in a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is at least performed. In addition, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating in at least a part of a period in which a judgment effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being performed. For example, the vibration may be ended simultaneously with the end of the judgment effect, the vibration may be continued even if the judgment effect is ended, or the vibration may be ended before the end of the judgment effect. Moreover, the vibration period in which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, and may differ according to the presence or absence of operation of the operation means B, and operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge regarding whether or not to be a big hit in the variable display during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or a judge showing the end of the reach production (the reach production of the final stage such as strong SP reach) It is In this upper example,
The period in which the operation means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operation means A is handled as effective, and when the operation means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long. In addition, even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a fixed period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect become simultaneous, and the period length between them becomes zero. However, while the operation means A is vibrating, it can be ensured for a fixed period. In addition, while the final judgment effect is started according to the operation of the operation means B, the vibration of the operation means A is upward when it is started by operating the operation means A after the operation of the operation means B. If the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing one example related to the effect in which the operation means A (chance button 136) is entangled in stages, and FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  Descriptions of matters described above in the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 9 will be omitted. In addition to the chance button 136 which is the operating means A, the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B is also shown on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each drawing of FIG. The chance button 136 which is the operation means A shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is in the initial position at any stage, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is in the initial position at any stage.

  In FIG. 14 (a), both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a discolored eye " The decoration 3 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 1 "is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are also displayed in white during stoppage. While four first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14 (a) are on, four black circle holding icons, which are the special pattern display of the special figure 1, are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 14B, symbol variation display of the special figure is started in the first special view display device 212, and variation display of the decoration symbol is also started in the decoration symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, updating (variation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, only three first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14B light up, and only three holding icons (pending icon h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed, and a variation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208 e. Furthermore, the 4th design 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changing to the display (gray) while it is fluctuating.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (c), reach effect is started. Up to this point, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is reduced in size at the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3 .

  Here, as in FIG. 9, when reach effect is started, button effect is started. The button effect here is a kind of judge effect, and it is an advance effect which judges whether or not to develop into a super reach. The button effect may be an effect of judging the type of super reach to be developed. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red and urges pressing. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 which has started to light up in red, and an arrow display 136b and an acceleration display as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136. Three characters, “PUSH” and “Remaining period meter display 136c” as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as a valid one, are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136 c is a display representing a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of the second notification. Note that the three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display "PUSH" may not be included, but may be the initial position display 136X. For example, the initial position indication 136X may not include the remaining period meter indication 136c.

  FIG. 14 (e) is in the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated at the timing of FIG. 14 (e). When the chance button 136 is operated, what has been lit in red up to that time is switched to lighting in white, or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated within the operation effective period, the crest 247 drops on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 14F). The family crest 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, and also covers a part of the variation icon display area 208e, and also a part of the variation icon c. The falling of the family crest 247 is a manifestation of the judgment result of the development to the super reach, and as shown in FIG. 14 (g), the super reach presentation is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background image changes. . After the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, it remains unlit at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 14 (h), the family crest 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to a background image of a rose. For Super Reach production, the first Super Reach production (weak SP reach production) with relatively low probability of big hit and the second with relatively high potential for big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed The super reach effect (strong SP reach effect) is prepared, and the background image of the eyebrow corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach effect. Judge production is performed even in this weak SP reach production. Judge production here is the production to judge whether or not to be a big hit, and corresponds to the final judge production, if the princess character appears from the middle of the opening of the bag, the symbol variation display currently being performed is displayed It will be a manifestation of the judgment result that it is decided to be a big hit. In FIG. 14I, a cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 14 (j), in FIG. 14 (j), a shade and some shade are visible in the cloud-like effect display e1, and in FIG. 14 (k), the effect is displayed While e1 disappears and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, a character display of "Relieve the princess" is displayed on the upper right. In addition, the character display of "Let's rescue the princess" may be displayed from the timing of FIG. 14 (h). The shade of something described in the explanation of FIG. 7J is the shade of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 shown in FIG. 14 (i) and FIG. 14 (j) corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and from FIG. 14 (k) where the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification starts to be displayed Although it is started, it can also be seen from FIG. 14 (i) that the final judgment effect has been started.

  FIG. 14 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated again at the timing of FIG. 14 (l), and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (m) following FIG. 14 (l), no one is in the open eyelid, and the result of the judgment here is likely to be lost. . Even during the execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is located at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  In addition, even if the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is not operated within the operation effective period, the judgment result of the final judge may be displayed, and the chance button 136 is not operated but the chance button 136 The final judgment result may be displayed even when the operation means (for example, the second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following example). This may be the same as an instruction judging whether or not to advance to the super reach, or may be limited to an instruction judging whether or not to reach the super reach, It may be limited to the final judge directing to be a direct judge on the big hit.

  When the final judge effect is finished, the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is started as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (n), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" are displayed with fluctuation.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display of the special drawing is finished in the first special view display device 212 and when the final display is displayed, the decorative symbol is also finalized display, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. "-" "Decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is displayed.

  FIG. 16 is a view showing in stages an example of a case where an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through a weak SP reach effect and a big hit is performed, and FIG. 17 is an example shown in FIG. Is a diagram showing the continuation of step-by-step.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 will be mainly described, and the description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 16D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button effect here is also an effect that judges whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 begins to light up in red, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (e), when the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated within the operation effective period, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 16 (f), of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the front side, the family crest 247 falls, and the judgment result of developing to super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 16 (h), the family crest 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image is further changed to the background image of the brow, and the weak SP reach effect is started. Here too, as shown in FIG. 16 (i), a cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed, and in FIG. 16 (j), a shade of something is seen in the effect display e1. . Further, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red and the chance button 136 itself starts to vibrate. That is, the chance button 136 executes the advance operation (protrusion operation) while vibrating. The vibration may be started after the protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches a position just between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the intermediate position. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and the chance button 136 with the chance button lamp 138 lit in red in the state advanced to the middle position is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Three imitated button images 136a1, arrow display 136b and remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an intermediate position indication 136Y of the operation promotion notification. The intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of the second notification. In addition, even if all the three images 136a2, 136b, 136c are not included, the intermediate position indication 136Y may be used. For example, the intermediate position display 136Y may not include the remaining period meter display 136c. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate even after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period for which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted becomes zero or the chance button 136 is pressed. In addition, the advance start timing of the chance button 136 may be any time during weak SP reach effect, for example, it may be before the display of the effect display e1 or the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification And may be simultaneous with or after that. Note that only one of a plurality of examples of the start timing of the advance of the chance button 136 listed here may be applied, or a plurality of examples may be applied, or all of them may be applied. Types may be applied. In addition, the timing of the advance operation completion (stop) of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as the weak SP reach effect is being performed, or may be simultaneously with the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification, and thereafter. It is also good. In addition, the vibration start of the chance button 136 may not coincide with the advance start of the chance button 136, may be before or after the advance start. In the latter case, for example, the vibration may be started simultaneously with or after completion of the advancing operation (stopping) of the chance button 136. Furthermore, the chance button 136 may end the vibration as long as it is pushed in, or may continue the vibration until it is pushed in to the initial position. The effect display e1 in FIG. 16 (i) and FIG. 16 (j) also corresponds to the prognostic effect of the final judge effect, and from FIG. 16 (k) where the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification starts to be displayed Although it is started, it can also be seen that the final judge effect has been started from FIG. 16 (i), and it can also be seen that the final judge effect has started when the chance button 136 has started to advance, or the chance button 136 It can also be seen that the final judge presentation has been started from the point when has reached the intermediate position.

  FIG. 16 (l) shows the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 which has advanced (projected) to the intermediate position, which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. 16 (l), is pushed down to the initial position and the final judge Judge results of the presentation are displayed. In FIG. 17 (m) following FIG. 16 (l), the chance button 136 is at the initial position, and there is no vibration, and the decorative character display device 208 displays the character GC of the princess like in the back of the bag. The judgment result here is determined to be a big hit. The effect that the princess character GC appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (m) is a preliminary effect and corresponds to an example of a second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 which is the operation means A. The notice effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time as the operation of the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is started, and the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. May be started at the same time, or may be started at the same time as the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, and another second condition (e.g., the first condition) that the chance button 136 is operated. It may be started when the first time elapsed after the start of the weak SP reach effect is satisfied.

  The effect (second effect) to be started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a liquid crystal display or lighting or blinking of an LED. In addition, the second effect may be an effect including N (plurality) effects of a plurality of types of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. It may be configured in a certain manner, or the chance button 136 may be configured to vibrate.

  In this example, although the chance button 136 has advanced, it may be a mode in which it stays at the initial position and vibrates, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  When the final judgment effect is over, as shown in FIG. 17 (n), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” in a fluctuating manner, and then FIG. As shown in), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are displayed in a definite manner and become a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the display is a blank screen with no pattern from the fluctuation display to the final display, but in the case of a big hit, the background screen is a background screen in which the guests are gathered. In the case of a big hit, a promotion effect of a big hit type (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without a definite change to a big hit with a positive change) may be performed during the swing fluctuation display (the same applies to the following).

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example different from the examples shown in FIG. 16 and FIG.

  The figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG. 18 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIGS. 16 and 17. Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 will be mainly described, and the description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 18 is an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (the effects of FIG. 16D to FIG. 16G). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (i), the effect display e1 is displayed, and in FIG. 18 (j), a shade of something is seen in the effect display e1. Also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A lights up in red from the initial position and starts to move forward while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advancing position and stops at the maximum advancing position. In addition, after advancing to the maximum advance position, it may stop after returning to the initial position by the first amount. At the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (k), a button image 136a2 imitating the chance button 136 with the chance button lamp 138 illuminated in red in the state advanced to the maximum advancing position, and the display of an arrow Three display 136b and remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as the maximum advancing position indication 136Z of the operation promotion notification. The maximum exit position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of the second notification. In addition, even if all the three images 136a2, 136b, 136c are not included, the maximum advancing position indication 136Z may be used. For example, it may be the maximum exit position indication 136Z not including the remaining period meter indication 136c.

  Since the button image 136a2 is large, the maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification hides part of the character display of "Relieve the princess." Since the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, the jackpot is expected to have a high degree of expectation compared to the case in which only the intermediate position is advanced or the case where the initial position is not reached at all. .

  FIG. 18 (l) shows the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. 18 (l) and which is advanced (projected) to the maximum advance position is pushed down to the initial position. The judgment result of the judgment effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (m), the princess character GC is displayed at the back of the brow, and it is determined that the judgment result here is a big hit. Further, in FIG. 18 (m), the chance button 136 continues the vibration at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136 vibrating at the maximum advancing position vibrates even after returning to the initial position even during the pressing operation, and the vibration continues. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by the pressing operation. For example, the chance button 136 may temporarily stop the vibration if it is pushed even a little, return to the initial position and then resume the vibration, or temporarily stop the vibration upon returning to the initial position, and then vibrate You may resume In addition, regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 has advanced (projected), and regardless of the amount of advancement of the chance button 136, at least a part of the execution of the notice effect in which the princess character GC appears (all The chance button 136 vibrates in the period, or may be only a partial period such as the first period. In the example shown in FIG. 18 described above, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A vibrates in the advance notice effect in which the princess character GC appears, which corresponds to an example of the second effect.

  Also in this example, the chance button 136 is advanced, but it may be a mode in which it stays at the initial position and vibrates, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  In addition, the display mode of the character GC of the princess in the advance presentation effect may be changed according to the type of the big hit and the expectation degree of the big hit with the probability change. For example, in the case where the expectation of the jackpot with probability variation is high, the display mode (second display mode) in which the fan is spread and dance may be used.

  FIG. 19 is a view showing in stages an example of a case where a loss occurs while an effect involving operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after a strong SP reach effect, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples described above will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 19D, in the reach state, the button effect is started. The button effect here is also an effect that judges whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 begins to light up in red, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (e), when the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated within the operation effective period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the front side, the family crest 247 falls, and the judgment result of developing to super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the family crest 247 returns to its initial position, and the background image changes to a battle between the main character and the enemy. The background image of the duel scene corresponds to the background image of the strong SP reach effect. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production of whether or not to be a big hit is performed, and if the main character Tonosama wins, the appearance of the judgment result that it is decided that the big hit will be made in the symbol variation display currently being performed. become. As shown in FIG. 19 (i), an effect display e2 such as a flash is overlapped with a display in which the lord and the enemy player cut each other. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains at the initial position. In FIG. 19 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 is not vibrating. The effect display e2 of FIG. 19 (i) and FIG. 19 (j) also corresponds to the prognostic effect of the final judge effect, and from FIG. 19 (k) where the initial position display 136X of the operation prompting notification starts to be displayed Although it is started, it can also be seen from FIG. 19 (i) that the final judgment effect has been started.

  FIG. 19 (l) shows the operation effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (m) displays a scene where the enemy character has won, and the result of the judgment here is highly likely to be lost. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 20 (m) is in the off state at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  When the final judge effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 20 (n), in the decoration symbol display device 208, "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is displayed on the background screen of no pattern, and it is swayed, Next, as shown in FIG. 20 (o), a combination of losing, "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is finalized and is lost.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the effect involving the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed after the strong SP reach effect, and it becomes a big hit, and FIG. 22 is shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example in steps.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 will be mainly described, and the description of the same points may be omitted.

  After the judgment effect of developing to super reach (FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. (G)), in FIG. 21 (h), strong SP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 The background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 21I, the display of the effect display e2 such as a flash is performed.

  In FIG. 21, even if the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the transmitting portion 191, which is the operating means B, turns forward from the initial position and falls to the player side. Note that the transmission part 191 may be rotated forward simultaneously with the display of the effect display e2, or the transmission part 191 may be rotated forward before the display of the effect display e2. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, and at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transmitting part rotation image 191a imitating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmitting part 191 is rotated forward, An arrow display 191b suggesting pushing in 191 and a character display of "press down", and a remaining period meter display 191c representing a remaining period for accepting the operation of transmitting portion 191 are displayed as one set. . Hereinafter, the three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display of "push-in" are generically referred to as a transmission portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. The transmission section display 191X corresponds to an example of the first notification. In addition, even if the three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display of "push-in" are not included, the transmission part display 191X may be used. For example, the transmission section display 191X may not include the remaining period meter display 191c. Note that the transmission part 191 may be rotated forward simultaneously with the display of the transmission part display 191X, or the transmission part 191 may be rotated forward after the transmission part display 191X is displayed. Even when the transmission part display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. Moreover, although the transmission part 191 rotated to the front is not vibrated, it may be vibrated. The effect display e2 of FIG. 21 (i) and FIG. 21 (j) also corresponds to the prognostic effect of the final judgment effect, and the final judgment effect is from FIG. 21 (k). Although it is started, it can also be seen that the final judgment effect has been started from the time when the effect display e2 starts being started, or it can be seen that the final judgment effect is started from the time when the transmitting portion 191 is turned forward. .

  FIG. 21 (l) is within the operation effective period, and at this timing of FIG. 21 (l), the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is pushed down to the initial position. In this example, when the transmitting portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 22 (m) following FIG. 21 (l), the family crest 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As it comes, the background image changes. Further, a pair of combined characters 248 advance from the left and right toward the family crest 247, and as shown in FIG. 22 (n), the pair of combined characters 248 sandwich the crest 247 from the left and right respectively. Combine with family crest. The effect that the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is pivoted forward may itself be an effect that suggests a big hit, or a effect that suggests that a family crest 247 falls will be a big hit It may be an effect that suggests that it will be a big hit to combine a pair of combined characters 248 with the family crest 247. In addition, only one example of a plurality of types of examples of effects suggested to be a big hit listed here may be applied, or a plurality of examples may be applied, All types may be applied. Thereafter, first, the pair of combined prize 248 is returned to the initial position (Fig. 22 (o), then the family crest 247 is returned to the initial position (Fig. 22 (p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed in a state where there is no obstruction, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In this scene where the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed, the variation display of the decoration symbol displayed in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. However, it may be a combination (eg, "333") of the decorative symbols, ie, the combination of the decorative symbols will be displayed smaller along with the display of the final judgment result. Ri, then, may have a structure in which a combination of the jackpot is displayed large decorative pattern.

  The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 22 (q) is in the off state at the initial position, and does not vibrate.

  When the final judge effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 22 (r), in the decoration symbol display device 208, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" shakes and fluctuates on the background screen where the lords gather. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are finalized and become a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 described above, the family crest 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIG. 21 (f) to FIG. (G)), Although the family crest 247 is operated in the final judge direction (FIG. 22 (m) to FIG. 22 (o)), the family crest 247 is not operated before the final judgment stage is started, and the final The operation may be performed only by the judge effect.

  In this example, there is a scene (FIG. 21 (j) to FIG. 21 (l)) for operating the transmitting portion 191, but instead of the transmitting portion 191, other components such as a second chance button 137 described later will be described. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button 136 which is the operating means A starts to vibrate in response to the operation of the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B in stages. The figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG. 23 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 will be mainly described, and the description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 23 is an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects of FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (j)). After the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 23 (k) is displayed, that is, after the final judgment effect is started, when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position as shown in FIG. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 automatically starts vibrating (see FIG. 23 (m)). In this example, the chance button 136 also starts to vibrate at the same time as the final judgment effect is started, and the chance button 136 ends the vibration before the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed (see FIG. 23 (p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is performed only during the period from FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 23 (p), which is a part of the execution period of the final judgment effect, and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (q), there is a possibility that the judgment result can be focused on without vibration. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judgment effect is completed. In this case, the vibration of the chance button 136 is always the entire period of the execution period of the final judgment effect. In addition, the chance button 136 may continue the vibration even after the final judgment effect is finished, and the vibration continues after the final judgment effect is finished, the initial position of the operation promotion notification to the decorative symbol display device 208 The display 136X may or may not be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, it can also be seen that the chance button 136 is vibrating as a part of the final judge effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23 described above, the final judge effect in FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 23 (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect, and is an advance notice effect started in response to the operation of the transmitting portion 191. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, although the vibrating chance button 136 is not operated, when the vibrating chance button 136 is operated during execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued, Depending on the operation, first, the crest 247 and the combined character 248 return to the initial position, and then the judgment result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the timing of operating the chance button 136, the faster the judge result can be seen. When the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m) which are the same judge effect are not started. That is, even when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the chance button 136 (second operation means) is vibrating during execution of the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. The effect (second effect) shown in (m) and FIG. 18 (m) is not started. Also, the effect (second effect) shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m) is configured not to be executed simultaneously with the final judge effect (first effect) described using FIG. It is an effect.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button 136 which is the operating means A is also operated after operating the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B in stages. The figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG. 24 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 23 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 24 is also an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects of FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at a relatively early timing (FIG. 24 (l)). That is, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification decreases by about 1⁄5.

  In this example, after pushing the transmitting portion 191 to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation means A is pressed this time. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts to vibrate in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191, and directly starts to vibrate in response to the pressing operation. In addition, while the chance button 136 is pressed, it continues to vibrate, but after starting to vibrate, when the predetermined maximum vibration time has passed, it ends the vibration even if it is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, even if the final judge effect is over and the swing fluctuation display is started, the chance button 136 continues the vibration (see FIG. 24 (r1)), but the fluctuation fluctuation display is started After a while, the maximum vibration time is reached, and the vibration is ended even if it is pressed (see FIG. 24 (r2)). The vibration maximum time corresponds to six frames in FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (r1). The fluctuation display is continued for a while thereafter (FIG. 24 (r3) to FIG. 24 (r4)), and the chance button 136 does not vibrate until the first time (FIG. 24 (r2) to FIG. 24 (r4)). After the time corresponding to the frame) continues, as shown in FIG. 24 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are finalized and displayed as a big hit. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation display is executed over a period corresponding to four frames in FIG. 24 (r1) to FIG. 24 (r4).

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, it can also be seen that the final judgment effect has been started in response to the operation of the transmitting portion 191 which is the operation means B. That is, when the final judge effect is started, the family crest 247 drops. Also, when the final judgment effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24 described above, the final judge effect of FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example in which the timing at which the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is operated is later than the example shown in FIG. The symbol numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG. 25 correspond to the symbol numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 25 is also an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects of FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 25, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the transmitting unit 191 is operated with a delay of one frame from the example shown in FIG. 24 (see FIG. 25 (12)). As a result, as compared with the example shown in FIG. 24, the start of the final judgment effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is also shifted backward, and the timing when the predetermined vibration maximum time elapses is also 1 I slip behind the piece. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the vibration maximum time corresponds to six frames in FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 25 (r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (r1). The shaking fluctuation display continues in the second time (time corresponding to two frames in FIG. 25 (r 2) to FIG. 25 (r 3)) after the chance button 136 stops vibrating, and then in FIG. As shown, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are finalized and become a big hit. As described above, the fluctuation display is a period corresponding to four frames in the example shown in FIG. 24, while in the example shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 25 (r1) to FIG. 25 (r3) And the execution period of the fluctuation display is shortened by the delay of the timing of operating the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B.

  FIG. 26 is a view showing an example in which the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B vibrates due to the vibration of the housing. The figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG. 26 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 26 is also an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects of FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (j)). In this example, as shown in FIG. 26 (k), the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B vibrates at a second position (forward inclined position) rotated forward from the initial position (first position). There is. The transmitting portion 191 vibrates by vibrating the housing to which the transmitting portion 191 is directly or indirectly attached, even if the transmitting portion 191 itself does not vibrate. The housing referred to here is the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmitting unit 190. In this example, the operation of the transmission part 191 can be prompted by vibration of the transmission part 191 in addition to the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 26K, and in FIG. The part 191 is pushed to the initial position. When the transmitting part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the case is ended, and when the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is pressed, the chance button 136 starts vibrating.

  The vibration of the casing, that is, the vibration of the transmitting portion 191 may start when the transmitting portion 191 reaches the front inclined position from the initial position, or the transmitting portion 191 starts to rotate forward from the initial position. It may start from the time when the transmission part 191 reaches the front inclination position, and may start when the transmission part 191 is not operated even if the first time has elapsed. In addition, the vibration of the casing, that is, the vibration of the transmitting portion 191 ends not only when the transmitting portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, but may end when the transmitting portion 191 is pushed a little from the front inclined position. Even when pressed, the vibration may be continued or the first vibration period may be continued with the chance button 136 after the vibration is started or returned to the initial position.

  Further, as with the transmission unit 191 of this example, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A also has a case (for example, a case where the chance button 136 is directly or indirectly attached) even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate. The door 108 with the ball storage plate may vibrate as it vibrates.

  Furthermore, the transmitting portion 191 itself may be configured to vibrate in the front-rear direction or in the lateral direction.

  23 (m) to FIG. 24 (q), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. The aspect of the final judgment effect shown in) is different from the aspect of the judgment effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) described earlier. That the aspect of presentation is different means that the background screen is different, the appearing character is different, or the color of the displayed character is different.

  Further, although any of the examples shown in FIGS. 23 to 26 is an example of operating the transmitting portion 191, in place of the transmitting portion 191, another operating means such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be an example.

  FIG. 27 is a view showing an example in which the transmitting portion 191 itself is pivoted in the front-rear direction and strongly vibrates. In this FIG. 27, another example is shown on the left and the right.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects of FIG. 21D to FIG. 21G). The state shown in FIG. 27A is the same as the state shown in FIG. 19K. The initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (A) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 27 (A), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 19, the judgment result of the final judgment effect is not immediately displayed, and the family crest 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. At the same time, the background image changes. Furthermore, in this example, as the crest 247 drops, the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B is pivoted from the initial position to the front inclined position (see FIG. 27 (c)). Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (D), the family crest 247 is sandwiched by the pair of combined articles 248 advancing from the left and right, and the pair of combined articles 248 and the family crest 247 unite and the transmission part 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 27 (E), with the pair of combined members 248 returning to the initial position and the family crest 247 remaining, the transmitting portion 191 pivots again from the initial position to the front inclined position. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the family crest 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmitting portion 191 returns from the front inclined position to the initial position again.

  As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 27, the transmission unit 191, which is the operation means B, repeats strong rotation between the initial position and the front inclined position at the same time as the final judgment effect is started. I do. This strong vibration can be viewed as being performed as a part of the final judge production, or can be viewed as a production other than the final judge production.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects of FIG. 21D to FIG. 21J). The state of FIG. 27 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 24 (k), and the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is pivoted to the forward inclined position doing. The chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (i) is within the operation effective period of the transmission part 191, but in this FIG. 27 (i), the chance button 136 which is not lighted at the initial position but the transmission part 191 is operated.

  Even when the chance button 136 is operated, the final judgment effect is performed as in the example in which the transmitting unit 191 on the left side of FIG. 27 is operated, and the transmitting unit 191 is set to the initial position and the forward inclined position. Strong vibration is repeated between the two. That is, the transmitting portion 191 returns from the front inclined position to the initial position in FIG. 27 (u), rotates from the initial position to the front inclined position in FIG. 27 (e), and in FIG. It returns to the position again, and in the same figure, it pivots again from the initial position to the forward inclined position. Therefore, the chance button 136 is a so-called back button. However, after the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 27 (i), the chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position without vibrating.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a scene in which an enemy player has won is temporarily displayed after strong SP reach production but becomes a big hit by resurrection production, and FIG. 29 is shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example in steps.

  The example shown in FIG. 28 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 21, and in the case of FIG. 28 (h), it is judged whether or not to develop into super reach (FIG. 28 (d) to FIG. 28 (g)). The strong SP reach effect is started, and in the figure (i), the display of the effect display e2 like a flash is performed.

  Also in FIG. 28 (j), in a state where the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmitting portion 191 which is the operation means B is pivoted from the initial position to the front inclined position. At the timing of, the effect display e2 disappears, and the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transmission part 191 remains at the front inclined position.

  In FIG. 28 (l), the transmission part 191 is pressed. In FIG. 29 (α) following FIG. 28 (l), a scene in which an enemy character similar to that in FIG. 20 (m) seems to be a judge result of the final judge effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As indicated by reference numeral 29 (β), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of the loss of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is once started.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (γ), a progation display is performed when the resurrection effect is started, and the resurrection effect is executed from FIG. 29 (m) to FIG. 29 (p). The resurrection effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIG. 22 (m) to FIG. 22 (p), and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest 247 and a pair of combined characters 248 Will appear.

  When the resurrection effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 29 (r), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is immediately started, and in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the combination of the big hit of "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is determined and displayed.

  In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 29 (α), which was considered to be the judge result of the final judge effect, is a false display. Further, neither the chance button 136 which is the operating means A nor the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B vibrates, but whether it is true or false, the display of the final result (display of the judgment result of the final judge effect) If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit at the displayed timing or later, if the chance button 136 or / and the transmission part 191 vibrates, the top player will be a big hit It is possible to convey that it is determined, and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, using the vibration of the chance button 136 and / or the transmitting portion 191, the judgment result (true result) of the final judgment effect may be notified.

  Also in this example, there is a scene (FIG. 28 (j) to FIG. 28 (l)) for operating the transmitting portion 191, but instead of the transmitting portion 191, other components such as a second chance button 137 described later will be described. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 30 shows an example of the third effect in stages. The numeral numbers of the alphabet in parentheses in FIG. 30 correspond to the numeral numbers of the alphabet in parentheses in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30C, reach effect is started, and also in this example, when reach effect is started, an effect involving operation that is a kind of button effect is started. The production involving the operation here is also a kind of judge production, and it is the advance production for judging whether or not the development to the super reach is made. In FIG. 30 (d), the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the front inclined position as the effect involving the operation, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. In addition, although the transmission part display 191X 'shown to the same figure (d) is a little different from the transmission part display 191X demonstrated so far, it is a display with the same function. The chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains unlit at the initial position without vibration.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the transparent portion 191 is pushed and operated within the effective operation period of the transparent portion 191, and in FIG. 30 (f), the family crest 247 is on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It's falling. Further, while the background image shown in FIG. 14F or the like is a non-patterned background image, an effect display e3 with a shadow is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30F. Note that a part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the family crest 247. Again, the fall of the family crest 247 is a manifestation of the judge's outcome of developing into super reach, which subsequently develops into super reach. The effect shown in FIG. 30F described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is the advance effect effect that is started in response to the operation of the transmitting portion 191.

  Also in this example, there is a scene (FIG. 30 (d) to FIG. 30 (e)) for operating the transmitting unit 191, but instead of the transmitting unit 191, other devices such as a second chance button 137 described later will be described. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the advance notice effect started in response to the operation of transmission portion 191. In FIG. The figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG. 31 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets in parentheses in FIG.

  The example shown in FIG. 31 is also an effect that is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects in FIG. 21D to FIG. 21F). Judgment of whether or not to develop into super reach ends in FIG. 31 (g), and from the figure (h '), super reach presentation is started. This super reach effect is an effect different from the strong SP reach effect described so far and the weak SP reach effect, and is the effect selected by the effect drawing. However, the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission part display 191X of the operation prompting notification remains 1/2 or more of the transmission part 191 rotated to the front inclined position shown in FIGS. 21 (j) to (k). The final judgment effect shown in FIG. 23 is executed when the operation is performed at the same timing, and the final judgment effect shown in FIG. 31 is performed when the operation is performed at the timing when less than 1/2 remains. It is also good. That is, even if one of the final judgment effect shown in FIG. 23 and the final judgment effect shown in FIG. 31 is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B. Good.

  A background image in which the main character of the hero is chasing a bad merchant is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 31 (h '), and in the figure (i'), the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed. Ru. Even when the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (j '), the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is pivoted from the initial position to the front inclined position, and is displayed on the effect display e2 at the timing of FIG. Instead, the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. FIG. 31 (l ′) is in the operation effective period, and the transmission portion 191 is pushed to the initial position.

  The final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started in response to the pressing operation of transmission portion 191, and in FIG. 31 (m '), the townscape of the castle town different from the background image shown in FIG. The background image is displayed, and the family crest 247 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (n '), the family crest 247 is sandwiched by a pair of combined characters 248 advancing from the left and right in front of the background image of the town of the castle town, and the pair of combined characters 248 and Family crest 247 unites. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (o ′), the pair of combined characters 248 returns to the initial position, and the family crest 247 remains in front of the background image of the town of the castle town, and further, FIG. As shown in (p '), the family crest 247 returns to the initial position from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the background image of the town of the castle town is displayed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not blocked In this state, the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (q ') displays a scene where the lord has caught a bad merchant, and it is determined that the judgment result here is a big hit. During the execution period of the final judge effect in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′) corresponding to an example of the third effect, the chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position without vibrating. . The mode of the final judge effect in FIG. 31 (m ') to FIG. 31 (q') is shown in FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. Unlike (j) and (m) in FIG. 26 (m) to (q), the final judgment effect is not performed simultaneously with the final judgment effect. Also, unlike the aspect of the judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m), it is not executed simultaneously with this judgment effect.

  Also, in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. (Q ′), the chance button 136 which is kept off at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is It will not be a so-called back button. The operation means (for example, the second chance button 137 described later) different from the chance button 136 may be a so-called back button.

  Also in this example, there is a scene (FIG. 31 (j ′) to FIG. 31 (l ′)) for operating the transmitting portion 191, but instead of the transmitting portion 191, a second chance button 137 etc. Other operation means may be operated.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example different from the examples described above. Another example is shown on the left side and the right side of FIG.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 32 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect which is not executed unless it passes through a certain effect (effects of FIG. 21D to FIG. 21J). In this example, the LED lamp 139 is provided near the chance button 136. The LED lamp 139 is a light emitting means different from the chance button lamp 138.

  In FIG. 32 (a), as in FIG. 24 (k) and the like, the transmission symbol display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. It is moving. Further, in FIG. 32A, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position without vibrating, but the chance button 136 is operated. In this state, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 does not vibrate, and the chance button lamp 138 neither lights nor blinks, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. In addition, even when the chance button 136 is operated, the final judge effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 32A, the final judge effect is started in response to the pressing operation of the transparent portion 191, and the family crest 247 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image changes. Although the chance button 136 which is the operation means A does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position until just before the pressing operation of the transmitting unit 191 is performed, after the pressing operation of the transmitting unit 191 is performed, The chance button 136 starts to vibrate when operated. The chance button 136 may be continuously vibrated during the execution period of the final judge effect, or may be vibrated only while the final judgment effect is executed. The vibration of the chance button 136 may end simultaneously with the end of the final judge effect, or may end before the end of the final judge effect. Even when the chance button 136 starts vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 remains off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 lights up or blinks again. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may continue from FIG.

  In FIG. 32C, the final judgment effect is finished, and the fluctuation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judgment effect is finished, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, here too, the LED lamp 139 is lit or blinking. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may continue from FIG.

  Also in this example, there is a scene (FIG. 32 (A)) of operating the transmitting portion 191, but instead of the transmitting portion 191, another operating means such as a second chance button 137 described later may be operated. You may

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 32 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 32A, instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, a button image 136a3 imitating a chance button 136 which lights up and vibrates in red is included. The initial position display 136X 'is displayed. In addition, the real chance button 136 also illuminates in red and vibrates. In addition, even if the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 which is not vibrating is displayed, the chance button 136 of the real thing may be vibrating.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example different from the example described using FIG. In FIG. 33, four examples are shown on the left side and one example is shown on the right side. The example shown in the upper two on the left (the example shown in FIG. 33 (a) and the example shown in FIG. 33 (A)) also passes through a certain effect (the effects shown in FIG. It is an effect that is not executed unless it is from.

  First, in FIG. 33 (a) which is the first example, the transmitting part 191 which is the operating means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the duel scene and the lower left , A transmission portion rotation image 191a imitating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission portion 191 is rotated forward is displayed. In addition, a character display indicating that the glass button pointing to the transmission portion 191 is on standby is also provided. The transmission part rotation image 191a and the character display in standby state become a notice display that the transmission part 191, which is a glass button, is rotated to the front inclination position. When this preliminary display is made, the transmitting portion 191, which is a glass button, is always rotated to the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 33 (A) which is the second example, the background image of the duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 33 (a), and the remaining period is displayed by digital display at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a notice that the transmitting portion 191 is pivoted to the forward inclined position, and when the remaining period by this remaining period display is 0.00 seconds, the transmitting portion 191 which is a glass button is inclined forward. Always turn to

  In FIG. 33A, which is a third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to a first display means, and a second display means 209 different from the first display means is also provided. The second display means 209 is a liquid crystal display device which has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208 which is the first display means, and which is movable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be elevated from the initial position. When the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is operated by a button effect such as a final judge effect, movable objects such as a family crest 247 and a pair of combined objects 248 are operated, and the second display means 209 is at an initial position. And the second display means 209 at least partially overlaps a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second display means 209 may entirely overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 or may only partially overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. While the second display means 209 is operating or after the operation is finished, the chance button 136 which is the operating means A may vibrate or the transmitting part 191 may vibrate. Alternatively, the second display means 209 may be a touch panel, which may correspond to an example of the third operation means. In this case, the second display means 209 is a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may vibrate in the overlapped state.

  A fourth example, FIG. 33A, is also an example provided with the same liquid crystal display device as the second display means 209 shown in FIG. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33 (A) can perform stock display of the button image B, and here, six button images B are displayed. One button image B represents that one button effect is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 33A, the final judge effect is performed with the button effect corresponding to the third button image B, The button effects corresponding to the remaining three button images B are executed during the big hit game. The three button effects in the big hit game may be, for example, three promotion effects for the number of big hit rounds. Further, as button effects corresponding to six button images B, button operation may be prompted in each of six cut-in effects.

  In addition, the second display means 209 displays the suspension icon instead of the button image B, and the display mode of the suspension icon is the display mode of the button image B, and the display mode of the button image B is operated by the button operation. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. Also in this case, the operating means (for example, the chance button 136 and the transmitting portion 191) receiving the button operation may be vibrated.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 33, an effect involving long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (α), a button image 136a4 imitating the chance button 136 in the extinguished state, and an arrow display 136b as a prompting prompt for long press operation of the chance button 136. And, a character display of "save meter by long press" and a remaining period meter display 136c indicating a remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as one set are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "store meter by long press" are collectively referred to as a long press display 136L of the operation promotion notification. Note that the three images 136a4, 136b, 136c and the character display of "store meter by long press" may not be included, but may be the long press display 136L. For example, the long press display 136L may not include the remaining period meter display 136c. In addition, at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a level display L1 is also displayed. The level display L1 is a display that is leveled up in accordance with the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG. 33 (α) is the 0 level.

  After that, the chance button 136 is operated, and before the remaining period of the operation effective period disappears, the level indication L1 reaches the full level and the level indication L1 starts the button effect in response to the full level. Here, the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B (not shown) is pivoted to the front inclined position, and as shown in FIG. 33 (β), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification. It is displayed. The operation of the chance button 136 is originally required to be a long press operation, but here, even if it is an operation (a single press) in which pressing of a short period which can not be said to be long press is repeated slowly (long press operation). Even if it is a so-called continuous hitting operation, it is treated as a long pressing operation, or it is handled in a short time. In addition, even when the continuous hitting operation is required, the long press operation or the single pressing operation may be treated as the continuous hitting operation (the same applies to the following examples). And although illustration is omitted, when the transmission part 191 is pushed and operated within the operation effective period, the judgment effect is started.

  Subsequently, an effect in which so-called pseudo-links are involved will be described. The effect involving the pseudo link is also executed when the player is elected to “execute” by the executability lottery in the first sub control unit 400. The decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the symbol variation display of the special drawing, but in the pseudo serial effect, for the symbol variation display of one special drawing (that is, one start winning) Temporarily stop the variable display of the decorative symbol in part or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (in the state where the updating of the decorative symbol is stopped but it is in a state of not being determined and swinging And so on), the re-variation display is performed one or more times in which all the decoration symbols are variably displayed again. For example, in the state in which the decorative symbol is updated (variation display) in the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. The variation display may be started, or the variation display of the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in all the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then the re-variation display may be started. In addition, if temporary stop is performed, symbols and patterns other than a decorative pattern may stop temporarily. In this pseudo-series effect, it is decided by the lottery in the first sub-control unit 400 as to how many times the re-variation display is executed for the symbol fluctuation display (that is, one start winning) of the special figure for one time Be done. The pseudo-series effect may be a jackpot notice effect (so-called regular advance effect effect) of the variation that predicts that it will be a big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure currently being performed. It may be a reach notice effect for giving a notice of developing into a super reach by the symbol variation display of the figure. Alternatively, it may be a previewing notice effect for previewing that a jackpot will be made in the symbol variation display of the special figure started later than the symbol variation display of the special figure currently performed. In any of the preview effects, the more the number of re-displays is changed, the higher the degree of expectation (the reliability of the notice) and the more hot the effects are. In addition, when the re-variation display is performed for the first number of times (for example, four times), the jackpot determination or the super reach determination may be performed. Further, in the case of pre-reading advance notice effect, a step-up advance notice may be incorporated in which the number of re-variation display increases as approaching the start of the symbol change table of the special drawing to be the advance notice target. For example, when the symbol variation table of the special figure after three times is targeted for advance notice, one re-variation display is performed in the pseudo-series effect in the symbol variation table of the first special figure, and the second special figure Two re-variation display is performed in the pseudo-series effect in the symbol variation table, and three re-variation display is performed in the pseudo sequence effect in the symbol variation table of the third special figure, and the special figure target In the pseudo-series effect in the symbol variation table, four re-variation displays are performed.

  In the pseudo series effect, the first pseudo series notification is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. The first pseudo linked notification referred to here is to report that a simulated linked effect is started or a simulated linked effect is continued. For example, one or a plurality of symbols or all symbols (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-series symbols”) among combinations of symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspond to an example of the first pseudo-series notification Do. That is, the pseudo-series graphic is a decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 7") shown in FIG. 5 (b) or a combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" , So-called chance eyes), or other symbols or patterns may be used. In addition, the pseudo run symbol may be a symbol that is finally stopped (third stop) in the temporary stop, may be a middle symbol, or may be a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. In addition, only one example of a plurality of types of examples of the pseudo run symbol listed here may be applied, an example of a plurality of types may be applied, or all types are applied. May be In addition, the first pseudo-series notification may be character display, lamp lighting, or sound output, which is started simultaneously with temporary stop. Only one of a plurality of types of examples of the first pseudo-announced information listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types are applied. You may

  FIG. 34 is a view showing in stages an example of an effect in which a pseudo ream is involved.

  In the example in FIG. 34, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the transparent display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in which the variable display is continued in the reach state shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B is pivoted to the forward inclined position. At this stage, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 34 (c) is in the operation effective period, and the transmission part 191 is pushed and operated to the initial position. Then, in response to the operation of the transmitting portion 191, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the transmitting portion display 191X disappears, and this time the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance button lamp 138 begins to light red and the chance button 136 starts to vibrate at the initial position. In (d) of FIG. 34, the pseudo continuous effect is started, and a part of the pseudo continuous symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 34 (d) is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo run symbol N whose display is also started at the timing of FIG. 34 (d). As a result, a part of the pseudo run symbol N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues vibration during the operation effective period, and when the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the initial position display 136X disappears and the pseudo run symbol N remains and the temporary stop is There is a case where it is performed and a case where the pseudo run symbol N disappears together with the initial position display 136X, and a temporary stop is not performed. That is, the effects shown in FIG. 34 (d) to FIG. 34 (f) are judged effects of whether or not the temporary stop is performed. In FIG. 34 (f), the pseudo run symbol N remains and the first temporary stop is performed. The first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 34 (f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 are also displayed during change, and the change icon c is also displayed.

  In (g) of FIG. 34, the pseudo run symbol N disappears, and updating (re-variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in all of the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Note that the symbol variation display of the special view is still continued, and the first special view display device 212 and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 are also displaying during variation, and the variation icon c is also displayed. However, the start of the re-variation display here looks as if the start of the special-pattern change display was performed. Moreover, the character display of "x 2" is made | formed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 34 (g). Here, although the re-variation display is the first time, when it is viewed as the symbol variation display of the special figure, it looks like the symbol variation display of the second special figure by the start of the pseudo-sequence effect, In the meaning to represent, the character display of "x 2" is made. That is, the character display of “× 2” is a notification representing the number of times related to the start of the pseudo connected effect. The character display of “× 2” corresponds to an example of the second pseudo-announcement.

  In FIG. 34 (i), the symbol variation display in which the first temporary stop is performed continues in FIG. 34 (f), and the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transmission part 191 is displayed. When the transparent portion 191 is rotated to the front inclined position and the transmission portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, a judge effect of a second temporary stop is started.

  Also in this example, there is a scene (FIG. 34 (b) to (c) in FIG. 34) of operating the transmitting portion 191, but instead of the transmitting portion 191, other components such as a second chance button 137 described later The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 35: is a figure which shows in steps the example of the other production which tangled pseudo run.

  In the example in FIG. 35, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b which continues the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B is pivoted to the forward inclined position. Also, the transmission part display 191X whose display is started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b) overlaps the gray temporary pseudo consecutive symbol N 'whose display is also started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b). As a result, in FIG. 35 (b), a part of the gray temporary pseudo continuous symbol N 'is also displayed.

  FIG. 35C is within the operation effective period, and when the transmitting portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the judgment effect is started according to the operation of the transmitting portion 191. The judgment effect here is that when the transmission part 191 is operated, the transmission part display 191X disappears, and the gray temporary pseudo continuous symbol N 'is changed to the white pseudo continuous symbol N and temporary stop is performed, Even if the transparent portion display 191X disappears, the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N 'does not change to the pseudo continuous symbol N, and even the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N' disappears, and a temporary stop may not be performed. In FIG. 35 (d), the first temporary stop is performed by changing to the white pseudo continuous symbol N. The change from the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N 'to the pseudo continuous symbol N is a change in the display mode, but may be changed to a completely different symbol. In addition, the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 35 (d) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 are also displayed during variation, and the variation icon c is also displayed.

  In this example, even if the transmission unit 191 is operated, that is, even if the result of the judgment effect of FIG. 35D is displayed, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is extinguished at the initial position without vibrating. As it is, the chance button 136 may start vibration at the initial position or may start vibration while advancing in response to the transmission unit 191 being operated, or starts advancing You may vibrate after reaching the advanced position. Also, the chance button lamp 138 may be lighted or blinked.

  Also in this example, there is a scene (FIG. 35 (b) to FIG. 35 (c)) for operating the transmitting unit 191, but instead of the transmitting unit 191, other devices such as a second chance button 137 described later will be described. The operating means may be operated.

  35 (b ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′) are modifications of FIG. 35 (b) to FIG. 35 (d). FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′) show a scout effect in which the temporary stop is not started yet and the pseudo-sequence effect may be started. That is, the pseudo run symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo run symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 35 (b '), the chance button 136 which is the operation means A vibrates, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 35 (c'). In addition, the chance button 136 may have started the vibration from before FIG. 35 (b '). According to the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 35 (d '), the pseudo run symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position, and the temporary stop is performed. Conversely, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo run symbol N may disappear, and in this case, the pseudo run effect will not be started. As described above, the effects of FIGS. 35B 'to 35D' in which the chance button 136 serving as the operation means A is entangled is a kind of judge effect and corresponds to an example of the second effect.

  FIG. 35 (b ′ ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′ ′) are modified examples of FIG. 35 (b ′) to FIG. In FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′), the chance button 136 as the operation means A vibrates, but in FIG. 35 (b ′ ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′), the chance button 136 Does not vibrate, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is pivoted to the forward inclined position. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 35 (b ′ ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′ ′) as in the case of FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. ing. Then, the transmitting portion 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. In response to the pressing operation of the transmission portion 191, as shown in FIG. 35 (d ′ ′), the second pseudo continuous symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position, and temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo continuous symbol N2 is a symbol different from the pseudo continuous symbol N. On the other hand, here too, the pseudo run symbol N may disappear in response to the pressing operation of the transmitting portion 191, and in this case, the pseudo run effect will not be started. Also in this example, when the judgment effect is executed and the pseudo-sequence effect is started, when the operation means (the transmitting portion 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, a temporary operation is performed according to the operation of the chance button 136. The pseudo run symbol (the second pseudo run symbol N2) different from the pseudo run symbol to be stopped is temporarily stopped.

  Although the description of the specific example of the effect so far is an example in the symbol variation display of a special figure, it is the same except for the symbol variation display of a special figure.

  FIG. 36 shows an example in which the jackpot symbol is determined from the fluctuation variation display, and an effect in which the operation means is engaged during the jackpot game is executed step by step. FIG. 37 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. Are shown in stages.

  In FIG. 36 (a), in the central area of the background screen on which the guests gather, the fluctuation variation display of the combination of "decorative 2"-"decorative 2"-"decorative 2" without a big hit (usually a big hit) is performed. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started while the fluctuation display is performed. The promotion effect here is the promotion effect (probability change promotion effect) of the type of jackpot, and as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the fluctuation variation display is once reduced and displayed on the upper left on the background screen where the lords gather. At the same time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the central area, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position. The definite change promotion effect here is a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect.

  FIG. 36 (c) is within the operation effective period, and when the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears according to the operation, and the fluctuation variation display of the combination of the decorative symbols is re-displayed. In this example, the probability change promotion fails, and as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the probability change no jackpot (usually a big hit) of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" which is a combination of even decoration patterns The combination fluctuation fluctuation display is displayed. On the other hand, in the case where the promotion of the probability change is successful, the fluctuation variation display of the combination of odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is displayed again. Ru. However, whether it is a jackpot with a definite change or not is decided by the judgment (lottery) at the time of winning, and the success or failure of the definite change promotion here is according to the judgment of the judgment (lottery) at the time of winning The same applies to the probability variation promotion effect during the jackpot game described below. After that, the combination of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed as the swing variation in FIG. 36 (d) is confirmed and displayed (see FIG. 36 (e)).

In the same figure (f) following (e) of FIG. 36, a display of big hit start effect is made on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a big hit game is started. In the big hit game, it is suggested to perform a right hit, and a display of a strike suggestion notification 110X is made on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the number of consecutive big hit is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "first" is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (g). Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (g), the probability variation promotion effect is started again. The probability change promotion effect here is also a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect. In FIG. 36 (h), the chance button lamp 138 begins to light red at the initial position, prompting the user to press. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has started to light up in red, and an arrow display 136b and "a continuous hit as a prompting prompting a continuous hit operation of the chance button 136 Three characters are displayed as one set, a character display of "Shiro" and a remaining period meter display 136c representing a remaining period for which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "drop continuously" are generically referred to as a continuous hit display 136R of the operation promotion notification. Note that the three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "double hit" may not be included, but may be the double hit display 136R. For example, it may be a continuous hit display 136R that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c.
In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a level display L2 is also displayed. The level display L2 is a display that is leveled up in accordance with the number of consecutive hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG. 36 (h) is the 0 level.

  Thereafter, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and in FIG. 36 (i), the remaining period of the operation effective period disappears. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 36 (i), the chance button lamp 138 is extinguished, and the level display L2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached 3 levels, but has not reached the MAX level, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (j) following (i), the continuous hit indication 136R and the level indication L2 disappear, and a letter indication "defense failure" is displayed, which indicates failure of definite variable promotion.

  Furthermore, during the big hit game started in FIG. 36 (f), as shown in FIG. 37 (k) following FIG. 36 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the transparent part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. While being displayed, a character display of "push in and return to life" is also performed, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is pivoted to the front inclined position, and the button effect is started also here. This button effect is an effect of judging whether it is possible to aim at a specific winning a prize opening V (for example, V winning a prize opening) in a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning a prize opening V will be in a winning possible state. The chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 37 (l) is within the operation effective period of the transmission part 191, and the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position. In response to the pressing operation of the transmission part 191, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A starts vibration at the initial position. The chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may be left unlit. Also, although the chance button 136 starts vibrating, it may not start vibrating.

  Furthermore, in response to the pressing operation of the transmission part 191, the effect movable body (movable combination) operates. That is, family crest 247 falls on the front side of decorative symbol display device 208, and then, a pair of combined bowl 248 is advanced from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. 37 (m), family crest 247 has a pair of union Sandwiched by the character 248, the pair of combined character 248 and the family crest 247 merge.

  Next, the family crest 247 and the pair of combined prizes 248 return to their initial positions, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (n) displays the result of the judge effect, and the specific winning opening V is displayed in the specific round. The word "Successful return to life" is displayed to indicate that the player is ready to win. Although the chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing of FIG. 37 (m), it may vibrate at this timing. Further, at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is also displayed a star with the word "GET". Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 37 (o) following FIG. 37 (n), it is suggested that the next round is a specific round and aim at a specific winning hole V (for example, V winning hole). Letters are displayed. In FIG. 37 (q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the character display of "V aim", and the game ball passes the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in the figure (q), the character "V" is displayed large on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special winning opening V is won, and a benefit (for example, transition to a definite change state after the big hit game ends) Is notified that it has been granted. Then, the end effect of the big hit game is executed (see FIG. 37 (r)), and the big hit game is finished.

  Also in this example, there is a scene (FIG. 37 (k) to FIG. 37 (l)) for operating the transmitting unit 191, but instead of the transmitting unit 191, other devices such as a second chance button 137 described later will be described. The operating means may be operated.

In the above description,
[First operation means [for example, transmission unit 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]
Second operation means [eg, chance button 136 etc.]
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 24 (q), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. (M) to the final judge effect shown in FIG.
The first effect is configured to be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [eg, FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. (P), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (P), FIG. 25 (m) to the same figure (r1), FIG. 26 (m) to the same figure (r2), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Even if it is a lever, a touch sensor, a touch panel other than button-like things, such as a chance button, another chance button, cross key, glass button, whether it is the first operation means or the second operation means. Good. That is, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be appropriately combined. The operation means includes, in addition to those operated by direct contact, those operated by holding the hand even though direct contact is not possible.

  Also, the first operation means is a chance button (for example, chance button 136), other chance buttons (for example, button B (second chance button 137)), a cross key (for example, cross key 181a), transparent It may be any one type selected from button-like parts such as the part 191, etc., a lever, a touch sensor, and a touch panel, or only any one type is applied, and the other ones are not suitable. It may be applied. For example, the chance button (for example, the chance button 136) may be applied to the first operation means, and the remaining other chance buttons, the cross key, and the like may not be applied.

  Furthermore, as long as the first operating means and the second operating means are different operating means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be combined as appropriate. Note that the operation means includes, in addition to those operated with direct contact, those that can be operated by holding the hand even if direct contact is not possible (for example, non-contact type).

  In addition, even if each operation means has the same function (for example, vibration), the aspect may be different depending on the operation means, such as strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke or pitch. For example, the first operation means may be capable of performing the vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operation means may be capable of performing the vibration according to the second aspect.

  The preliminary announcement effect may be one preliminary announcement effect of a plurality of types of preliminary announcement effects. The notice referred to here may be a big hit notice, may be a development notice to super reach, may be a pseudo run start notice, or may be a notice of the pseudo run number. . Alternatively, one or more preview effects of the plurality of types of preview effects may be applied, and the other may not be applied. Furthermore, only one of the plurality of types of preview effects may be applied, and the other may not be applied.

  In addition, the execution period of the first notice effect, which is the first effect, may be from the display start of the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop (swing fluctuation) of the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol is determined It may be up to the display. Alternatively, the moving means may start moving from the first position to the second position and then return to the first position again, or until moving to the first position, It is also good. Also, only one of the plurality of types of execution periods exemplified here may be used, or multiple types of execution periods may be applied, or all types of execution periods are applied. You may Furthermore, specifically, in the case of the final judgment effect, when the first effect is the final judgment effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) from the start of the notification etc. performed for the first time after the button operation. It may be the execution period of the first effect until the end of the button operation (in particular, the result in the case of success) is displayed.

  Further, when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like, the second operation means vibrates, for example, in a state where the movable means is located at a second position (for example, a final reaching position). Alternatively, it may vibrate in a state where an effect display or the like to be executed along with the movement of the movable means is displayed, or the state where the movable means is located at the second position and the effect It may vibrate in a state where an image is displayed. Further, only one of the plural types of examples listed here may be applied, or plural types of examples may be applied or all types may be applied.

  Furthermore, the phrase "the first effect is started according to the operation of the first operation means" may start the first effect according to only the operation of the first operation means. The first effect may be started in response to the satisfaction of the operation of the first operation means and the other conditions (the operation of the other operation means, etc.). Further, the first effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means, or even if the first operation means is not operated, another condition is satisfied. The first presentation may be started. For example, when a predetermined time has passed, the first operation means may not operate, or the first effect may be started. Conversely, if the first operation means is not operated, the fixed time may not Even if it passes, the aspect which the said 1st presentation is not started may be sufficient.

  In addition, the first effect may be configured to be able to be started in response to an operation of the first operation means. In this case, it may always be started or may not be started, and may be started other than the operation of the first operation means, or may be started only by the operation of the first operation means It may be started.

  Further, when the first operation means is operated in the first state, the first effect may be performed. The first state referred to here may be a state in which a notification prompting the operation of the first operation means is performed, or a state in which such a notification is not performed.

  Alternatively, when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may be performed. The satisfaction of the first condition mentioned here includes the fact that the first operation means has been operated.

  Furthermore, "in the first effect" may or may not extend to the first effect.

  In addition, “in the first effect, the second operation means vibrates” also includes starting the vibration by itself, and also includes starting the vibration when the condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second operation means may be one that does not vibrate unless operated continuously, or may be one that vibrates continuously without being pressed, or is not continuous, and is not continuous. May be oscillated. Further, only one of the plural types of examples listed here may be applied, or plural types of examples may be applied or all types may be applied.

  Furthermore, even after the first effect is finished, the second operation means may be able to vibrate. In this case, the second operation means may always vibrate or it may be vibrated. There may be cases where it may not be performed, or operations other than vibration may be performed, or only vibration may be performed.

  Furthermore, vibration may be continued from the first effect, or may be resumed after being stopped once. Or conversely, after the first effect is finished, the second operation means may not vibrate.

  In addition, even if the first operation can be divided into a plurality of effects, the second operation means is configured to vibrate during execution of at least one of the effects. Alternatively, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during the execution of the effect to be executed with an interval among the plurality of effects, and the second operation means may be configured to perform all of the plurality of effects. The second operating means may be configured to vibrate.

  Furthermore, during execution of the first effect, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate. Furthermore, "the second operation means is configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect" means that the vibration in the second operation means is related to the first effect. It may be configured to be performed regardless of whether or not to do so.

Also,
"One of the multiple types of effects is the second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a judgment effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) or FIG. 18 (m)],
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The second effect is configured to be started in response to the operation of the second operation means [for example, the pressing operation shown in FIG. 16 (l) or FIG. 18 (l)].
Before the second effect is started, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 16 (j) to FIG. (K), FIG. 18 (j) to FIG. (K) etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, an aspect which differs at least one part may be sufficient as "an aspect different from the aspect of said 1st presentation", and the aspect which is entirely different may be sufficient as it. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be a mode in which the second movable means is also moved, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is It may be a different aspect.

  The second operation means may be configured to start vibration after the start of display of an image prompting the operation, or may be configured to start vibration after the start of the operation reception state. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate simultaneously with the second effect. The vibration may be configured also after the end of the second effect.

  Further, an effect (second effect) to be started according to the operation of the second operation means is prepared, and the second effect is an effect of N (plurality) of a plurality of types of effects. The second operation means may vibrate before the second effect is started.

  Furthermore, everything performed by the operation of the second operation means may correspond to the second effect, and for example, all may be included such as a liquid crystal display, lighting or blinking of an LED. However, the second effect may be directed to only the effect executed by the liquid crystal display means.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means performed in the first effect continues until the predetermined vibration time elapses even when the second operation means is operated, and the vibration time has elapsed Then, the process may end, or may be ended when the second operation means is operated, or may be ended together when the first effect is completed, or the first effect is completed. Even if it continues, you may continue until the stop display of a decorative symbol is performed (it may complete immediately before the stop display of a decorative symbol or simultaneously with the stop display of a decorative symbol).

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means performed before the second effect is started may be ended when the second operation means is operated, or the second effect is started. It may be finished at the same time. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operation means is the same, the vibration end condition is performed in the case of being performed in the first effect and in the case of being performed before the second effect is started. Will be different.

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means, which is performed before the second effect is started, continues until the predetermined vibration time passes even if the first operation means is operated. The vibration time may be ended, or may be continued even if the first effect is ended, and may be continued until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol) Alternatively, it may be ended simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol). In these cases, the vibration end condition is the same in the case of being performed in the first effect and in the case of being performed before the second effect is started.

Also,
[A second display means capable of displaying an image [e.g., a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The first effect is an effect by the display of the image,
The second effect is an effect by the display of the image,
If the second operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means vibrates during execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there is a case where no effect is newly started even if the second operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means is vibrating while the first effect is being executed. The second effect may not be started, but a seventh effect (for example, for music output from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

  In addition, the second display means may display an image without fail.

  Further, the second operation means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect.

  Furthermore, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be performed simultaneously with the first effect.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect based on only the display of the image, and the second effect may be an effect based on only the display of the image.

Also,
“In the second effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [eg, FIG. 18 (m), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The second operation means may vibrate from before the start of the second effect, and may vibrate continuously in the second effect, or may restart after being interrupted once. Alternatively, before and after the start of the second effect, modes of vibration (for example, strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different. More specifically, the vibration of the second operation means before the second effect starts may be performed during the reception state period of the second operation means.

  Moreover, it is a game stand provided with the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means, Comprising: It is comprised so that execution of multiple types of effects is possible, and the effect of one of the said multiple types of effects is A first effect, one effect of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, the first effect is a notice effect, and the second effect is a notice effect And the first effect is configured to be started in response to the operation of the first operation means, and the second operation means is configured to vibrate in the first effect. In the second effect, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate.

Also,
“When the second operation means vibrates more than when the second operation means does not vibrate [eg, FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. 14 (l) etc.]” [eg, FIG. Diagram (l) etc.] is configured to be easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player [eg, a big hit gaming state, a probability change state thereafter, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, “a state advantageous to the player” means a gaming state of a big hit (small hit) and a big hit among the loses, a definite change and a definite change of time and time, a 15R big hit and a 4R big hit It may be a game state of 15R big hit (big hit of the number of rounds) among them, or it may be a state where 100 times of electric support 100 times and 100 times of 50 times are granted.

  In addition, “to facilitate transition” may be to shift to the big hit gaming state without fail if the advantageous state is the big hit gaming state.

  Furthermore, the vibration of the second operation means in the first effect may be a big hit, or in the first effect, the second operation means may always vibrate.

In addition, first display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special view display device 212, second special view display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] are provided,
The case where the second operation means vibrates more than the case where the second operation means does not vibrate [eg, FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. 14 (l) etc.] [eg, FIG. (L) etc.] may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is more likely to be connected to the big hit, and may be further configured to be more likely to be connected to the big hit with probability change.

Also,
"One of the multiple types of effects is the third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect or the like shown in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′)],
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate [eg, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. (Q ′) etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, an aspect “different from the aspect of the first effect” may be an aspect different at least in part, or an aspect in which all may be different, or an aspect in which only a part is different. May be For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be a mode in which the second movable means is also moved, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is It may be a different aspect.

  Further, the second operation means vibrates before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes the vibration when the third effect is finished. It may be one.

Also,
"The third effect is an effect configured not to be performed simultaneously with the first effect,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, during the period in which one of the third effect and the first effect is being performed, the other effect may not be performed.

  Furthermore, according to the operation of the first operation means, one of the first effect and the third effect may be started.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification prompting the user to operate the first operation means [eg, FIG. 23 (k) and FIG. (L), FIG. 24 (k) and FIG. 25 (l), FIG. 25 (k) (L2), FIG. 26 (k) and FIG. 26 (l) show a transparent part display 191X etc. of the operation prompting notification shown in FIG.
The first effect is a first period [e.g., the period of FIG. 23 (k) to FIG. 24 (l), the period of FIG. 24 (k) to FIG. 24 (l), FIG. 25 (k) to FIG. It is an effect started when the first operation means is operated in the period (12), the period in FIG. 26 (m) to the period (l), etc.
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the first period is a period in which the first notification is performed.

Also,
“The second operation means is at least a part of a period during which the first effect is being performed [eg, the entire period in the example of FIGS. 24 to 25 and FIG. 26, and in the example of FIG. Since it does not vibrate in the figure (q), it is a means comprised so that it may vibrate in a part period etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first operation means is a means configured not to vibrate [for example, the cross key 181a],
The second operation means is a means that is configured to be able to vibrate [e.g., a chance button 136].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that "vibration" means direct vibration that the operation means itself vibrates, and does not include indirect vibration in the case of indirect vibration caused by vibration of other members. However, depending on the case, indirect vibration may be included.

  In the state where the first effect is not executed [for example, not the final judge effect but the state during execution of the pseudo connected effect shown in FIG. 34 (d) to FIG. 34 (e), etc.] The operation means of (1) may be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to always vibrate.

Also,
“The game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  Subsequently, the back button effect in which the start timing is changed by the operation will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a view showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38 (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the configuration of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In the following description, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as the reference numerals given so far. In addition, the description may be omitted for items overlapping with the items described above.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38A has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance button described above is referred to as button A or the first chance button 136, and the chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as the button B or the second chance button 137. The button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the ball firing handle 134 than the button A (first chance button 136). That is, while button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position spaced apart from the ball firing handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), button B (second chance button 137) Is provided at a position LB away from the ball emission handle 134 at a linear distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another perspective, button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the center position of pachinko machine 100 in the left-right direction than button A (second chance button 136). There is.

  The positional relationship between the button A (second chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Further, the button B (second chance button 137) is also a kind of movable means like the first chance button 136, may be vibrated, and may be further advanced (projectable). On the contrary, the button B (the second chance button 137) may not be movable but may not be vibrated and can not be advanced (projected). Furthermore, the chance button lamp may or may not be built in the button B (second chance button 137). In addition, a third chance button and the like, and a plurality of chance buttons and an operation means different from the chance buttons may be further provided.

  In each of the examples described up to FIG. 37, a button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 (A) can be applied instead of the transmitting part 191 described as an example of the operation means B. Similarly, although the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied instead of the transmitting portion 191, the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 does not have a vibration function, so it is necessary to provide the vibration function. There is.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 38 is a view showing an example of the button effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 (A).

  In FIG. 38 (a), both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a discolored eye " The decoration 3 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 1 "is displayed.

  In FIG. 38 (b), symbol variation display of the special view is started in the first special view display device 212, and variation display of the decoration symbol is also started in the decoration symbol display device 208, and in FIG. Has been started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to an operation valid state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, operation promotion notification (for example, initial position display 136X) for prompting the user to be in the operation valid state (for example, the red lighting or blinking of the chance button lamp 138) or the button A (first chance button 136). ), And the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, a person who knows from the information of the bacchinko magazine etc. that the reach effect may be activated when it is started tries to operate button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button A (first chance button 136) is , Corresponds to the so-called back button.

  In addition to the button A (first chance button 136), the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is displayed according to the operation of the button B (second chance button 137) or the transmitting portion 191. It may be done.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing one example of the fourth performance and the fifth performance in stages.

  In each drawing in FIG. 39, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B (second chance button 137) are vertically arrayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described using FIG.

  In (a) of FIG. 39, both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a discolored eye The decoration 3 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 1 "is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), four black circle suspension icons, which are suspension display of the special view 1, are displayed, and no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. .

  In (b) of FIG. 39, symbol variation display of a special figure is started in the first special view display device 212, and variation display of a decoration symbol is also started in the decoration symbol display device 208. In addition, the hold icon is reduced by one and displayed three (hold icon h1 to h3), and the change icon c in the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 39 (c), reach effect is started. Here, the button effect is started according to the start of the reach effect. The button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 39 (d) is starting to light up in red. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (d), a button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) which has started to light red, and the button B (second chance button 137) Arrow display 137b and letters "PUSH" as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) and remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding the operation valid period of button B (second chance button 137) The three are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, the three images 137a, 137b, and 137c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as a button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the button B is operated at a relatively early timing (FIG. 39 (e)). That is, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1⁄5.

  When the button B is operated, in response to the operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord in place of the button B display 137X (see FIG. 39 (f)). ). When the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, it returns to the light-out state. An effect in which the image C of the cut-in advance notice is displayed according to the operation of the button B is a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fifth effect. The display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is an effect display displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the button B display 137X for the operation promotion notification corresponds to an example of the third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period from FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 39 (e)) It corresponds to an example of three periods.

  In addition, the display (the fifth effect) of the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord may be an effect that is not started unless the button B (second chance button 137) is operated. Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, the effect may be started when the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, when the button B operation valid period has elapsed, or after the period has elapsed It may be an effect to be started. Further, only one of the plural types of examples listed here may be applied, or plural types of examples may be applied or all types may be applied.

  In addition, after the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lady displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed, the second period is started. That is, the second period is a period started in connection with the operation of the button B (second chance button 137), and here, after operating the button B for a while (the time for one frame Is started, and starts from FIG. 39 (g). On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (g), the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is still displayed, and the operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) The initial position display 136X of is not displayed. Further, the button A is in the state of being turned off at the initial position. However, button A is operated at the timing of FIG. 39 (g). In response to the operation of the button A here, the image G of the character of "superheat" is displayed so as to overlap with the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord. The image G of the character of "super heat" is a cut-in notice image that it is determined that a big hit will be made in the symbol variation display currently performed, and it will be a manifestation of the judgment result of the final judgment presentation. Further, since the effect is the effect involving the button A, it is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fourth effect started in response to the operation of the button A. The image G of the character of "superheat" is different from the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord and the display mode. In addition, the image of the cut-in notice that there is a high possibility of losing due to the symbol variation display currently performed becomes the image of the character of "sorry".

  The second period started from FIG. 39G is the operation valid period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed, and the notification that the operation valid period is not performed. The button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display (the fourth effect) of the image G of the character of "superheat" is an effect which is not started unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord (the fifth effect) may be started when the button B is not operated, but the button A corresponding to the back button If not operated, the fourth rendition is not started. Further, the end timing of the second period is either the timing when the button A is operated or the timing when the operation valid period ends, whichever is earlier.

  In this example, the execution periods of the button effects in FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 39 (g) and the execution periods of the back button effects in FIG. 39 (g) to FIG. All may overlap. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation effective period of the back button effect overlap in at least a part of the period. In addition, conversely, the effect period after the button operation of the back button effect and the operation effective period of the button effect may overlap in at least a part of the period.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example in the case where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39 in stages. The timing of the symbol numbers of the alphabet in parentheses in FIG. 40 corresponds to the timing of the symbol numbers of the alphabet in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 39 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is decreased by about 2/5. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 39 (see FIG. 40F). As a result, compared with the example shown in FIG. 39, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started according to the operation of the button B is also delayed by one frame, and the button B is operated to perform one frame The start timing of the second period, which is started after the lapse of time, is also delayed by one frame. In the example shown in FIG. 40, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), button A is operated following the operation of button B, but at the timing of FIG. 40 (g), the second period is started. The operation of button A here is accepted but not treated as valid. The player operates the button A again at the timing of FIG. 40 (h) because the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change at all even if the button A is operated at the timing of FIG. 40 (g). . In response to the second operation, the image G of the character of "superheat" is cut-in displayed, and the fourth effect is started.

  As described above, the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 39 (FIG. 39 (g) corresponding to an example of the first period) is the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 39 (b) 40 after the time (corresponding to an example of the first time) for four frames has elapsed, while the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 40 (corresponding to an example of the second time). (H)) is after the time for 5 frames (corresponding to an example of the second time) has elapsed from the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 40 (b)), and the start timing of the second period is It is variable (indefinite).

  Although the example of FIG. 39 and the example of FIG. 40 are examples of effects involved in the operation of two types of chance buttons, operation means different from these types of effects from the two types of chance buttons ( For example, the effect may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transparent portion 191, the third chance button, and the like.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137).

  Two examples are shown in FIG. 41. In the example shown at the top, the chance button lamp of button A (first chance button 136) is lit in red, and button B (second The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. The lighting of the chance button lamp prompts the operation. In this example, the button A has a vibrating function (first function), and the button B has a rotating function (second function).

  Of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated in FIG. When operated, the button A exerts the first function to start vibration. The non-operation button B is maintained in the lighted state.

  Of the buttons A and B, only the button B is operated in FIG. When operated, the button B performs a second function and starts rotation. On the other hand, in response to the operation of the button B, the non-operation button A exerts the first function to start vibration. In this example, the function (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed by only one operation (here, the operation of the button B). Further, in this example, even when the button B 137 is operated in a state where the operation prompting of the button A 136 is performed, the button A 136 vibrates, and the operated button B is further rotated.

  In the example shown in the lower part of FIG. 41, both the button A 136 and the button B 137 are on. In this example, the button A 136 has a vibrating function (first function) and a rotating function (second function).

  In FIG. 41 (A), of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated. When the button A is operated, the button A exerts a first function and starts vibration, and also exerts a second function and starts rotation. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating according to the operation. The non-operation button B is maintained in the lighted state.

  In FIG. 41 (B), of the buttons A and B, only the button B is operated. When operated, the button B remains lit, and neither vibration nor rotation starts. On the other hand, in response to the operation of the button B, the non-operation button A exerts the first function to start vibration. In this example, with only one operation (here, the operation of the button B), it is possible to enjoy only some of the functions (first function) of the plurality of functions of the other (button A). Further, in this example, the button A 136 vibrates even when the button B 137 is operated in a state in which the operation promotion notification of the button A 136 is performed.

In the above description,
“The game console has a second operation means [eg, button A (chance button 136), etc.]”, and
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notification,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a fourth effect [for example, a cut-in notice of “superheat” shown in each of FIG. 39 (h) to FIG. (I) and FIG. 40 (i)] And
The fourth effect is configured to be started in response to the operation of the second operation means,
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a second notification,
The second notification is a notification [for example, an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, etc.] for prompting the operation of the second operation means,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol [for example, 3 3 3 etc. displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 respectively] ,
The fourth effect is an effect that starts as the second operation means is operated in a second period [for example, FIG. 39 (g), FIG. 40 (h), etc.],
The second notification is configured not to be performed in the second period,
The second period is a period that may start at a first period in the variable display [eg, the period of FIG. 39 (g), etc.],
The second period may be a period that may start at a second time [for example, the time of FIG. 40 (h)] in the variable display.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Note that multiple types of effects may always be performed or may not be performed, other types of effects may also be performed, or only multiple types of effects may be performed. .

  Further, the fourth effect may be an effect that is necessarily performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
[A third operation means [eg, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]],
The second period is a period started in relation to the operation of the third operation means [for example, after the start of a cut-in notice by a character display on a character after a button B operation is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“One of the effects of the plurality of types is the fifth effect [eg, a cut-in notice by a character display of a lady starting from FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a third notification,
The third notification is a notification [for example, a button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification, etc.] for prompting the operation of the third operation means,
The fifth effect is configured to be started in response to the operation of the third operation means,
The fifth effect is the third operation means in the third period [for example, the period of FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 40 (e), the period of FIG. 40 (d) to FIG. Are operated as [eg, FIG. 39 (e), FIG. 40 (f), etc.],
The third notification is configured to be performed in the third period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the third period is a period in which the third notification is performed.

Also,
"The aspect of the fifth effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the fourth effect,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The fifth effect is an effect that is performed when the variable symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed [eg, FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect which is not started unless the third operation means is operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect started when the third period has elapsed, or may be an effect started after the third period has elapsed.

Also,
"The fourth effect is an effect which is not started unless the second operation means is operated in the second period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  By doing this, there is a clear difference from the case where the fifth effect is the effect started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period, and the operation means It will be possible to give a wide range of effects involved.

Also,
“The first time is a time after the first time [for example, the time for four frames] has elapsed from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 39 (b)],
The second time is a time after the elapse of a second time [for example, a time of five frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 40 (b)],
The second time is different from the first time,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Subsequently, an example of the icon change display different from the icon change advance notice will be described by taking the promotion effect as an example.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing three examples of promotion effects.

  In the example shown on the left of FIG. 42, during the variation display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 42A, the promotion effect is started at the same time as the reach effect is started or after the reach effect is started. That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, as shown in FIG. 42A, the display AT (first display) of the matter to be noticed appears in the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42A, it is reported that attention is paid to the variation display of the decoration symbol that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the decoration symbol display device 208. That is, the state ("2 2 2") of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the reach state currently performed is directly displayed to notify that attention is given. Next, in FIG. 42 (C), the display AT of the item to be noticed disappears, and "decoration 7" is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and high speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. You will see how you are doing. A pattern combination of three even-numbered decorative patterns ("decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is a pattern combination of normal big hit without probability variation, while a pattern of the same odd-order decorative pattern juxtaposed Since the combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is a special jackpot symbol combination with a definite variation, it is likely to be successful here with a definite variation. In the example shown on the left of FIG. 42, the attention target in the display AT of the matter to be noted matches the one changed thereafter with the decorative symbol. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (i)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) coincide with each other. In an effect in which a symbol such as a decorative symbol changes, the advance notice display about the symbol may be configured to always coincide with the actual change display.

  In addition, in indication AT of the matter which should be noticed, although the state ("2 2 2") of the change display of the decoration symbol of the reach state currently performed is directly displayed, of the change display of the decoration symbol after change The state ("7 (7") may be displayed directly as a preview of the effect.

  In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, in the display AT of the matter to be noted in the promotion effect, attention is paid to the icon on the right side among the four displayed icons. The four icons displayed in the display AT of the matter to be noted are icons corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, although they are not displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a kind of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42 (b), attention is paid to the fourth hold icon h4 on the right side among the four displayed hold icons. In the display AT of the item to be noted shown in FIG. 42 (b), while the four suspension icons are displayed, the variation icon is not displayed. On the other hand, although only the reserved icons h1 to h3 of three black circles (the default display mode) are displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, the black circle (default) is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. The variation icon c of the display mode is displayed. Further, in the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42 (b), the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 to be noticed is the display mode of hatching (the first display mode and the display mode of the advance notice). It is changing. Next, in FIG. 42C, while in the reach state, the display AT of the item to be noticed disappears, and only three black circle reserved icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed. However, in the variation icon display area 208e, the variation icon c of the display mode of hatching (the display mode of the advance notice) is displayed. Although the display mode of this hatching is the same display mode as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the display AT of the noteable item in FIG. 42 (b), in this example, the attention in the display AT of the noteable item The target (the fourth hold icon h4) and the one changed thereafter (the change icon c) are different. That is, while giving advance notice that the hold icon (the fourth hold icon h4) changes in FIG. 42 (b), the change icon c in FIG. 42 (c) actually changes, and the type of the icon changes. Are different. Moreover, the change icon itself is not displayed in the display AT of the noteworthy item in FIG. 42 (b), while the fourth hold icon h4 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Inconsistencies such as not being displayed are also generated. This example corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) do not match. In the example shown at the center of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the item to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual variation shown in FIG. 42 (c) The icon c corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of the matter to be noticed corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42C corresponds to an example of the second display. In addition, in FIG.42 (d), the change display of a decorative symbol is complete | finished and the combination of the loss of "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is finalized and displayed. In the variation icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d), the display mode of the variation icon c is changed from the display mode of hatching to the display mode of black circles. In addition, there is no winning in the first special view start port 230, and the fourth hold icon h4 is not displayed.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the display AT (FIG. 42 (B)) of the noteworthy item of the promotion effect is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. Attention is paid to the rightmost icon (the fourth hold icon h4). Further, the icon to be noted (the fourth hold icon h4) is displayed in a hatched display mode (first display mode). The display mode (first display mode) of this hatching is a display mode of the advance notice of the big hit with relatively low reliability. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, four default display mode holding icons h1 to h4 and a default display mode variation icon c are displayed. In this example, the number of pending icons matches between the display AT of the attention item of the promotion effect and the actual pending icon display area 208f. In FIG. 42C, while in the reach state, the display AT of the item to be noticed disappears, and only three suspension icons h1 to h3 are still displayed in the suspension icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although not displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is changed to the display mode (second display mode) of the face of the lord. The display mode (the second display mode) of the face of the lord is a display mode of the pre-reading notice with a relatively high reliability of the big hit. In this example, the attention target (the fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the matter to be noticed and the one changed thereafter (the first hold icon h1) are not only different from each other, but the change content is also the display mode of hatching It is different in (the first display mode) and the display mode (the second display mode) of the face of the lord. In the variation icon display area 208 e, a variation icon c of a default display mode is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (C ') is a modified example of FIG. 42 (C) and shows a state where the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42 (B) disappears. Further, FIG. (D ′) is a view showing a state at the time of stop display of the decorative symbol following the same view (C ′). The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 42 (C ') and (D') is the same as the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. The display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in 42 (C ') and (D') is the same as the display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in FIG. The figure (E ') following FIG. 42 (D') shows that the pending corresponding to the pending icon which has been the first pending icon h1 is digested and the new variation display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. When a new variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the moving animation of the shift display of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Is displayed as a fluctuation icon c. Also, although the hold icon which has been the second hold icon h2 is displayed as the first hold icon h1, it is simultaneously with the start of the move animation, during the move animation, or simultaneously with the end of the move animation. After the end of the moving animation, the display mode changes to the display mode (second display mode) of the face of the lord. That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the example described above, and the symbol fluctuation display (the first symbol fluctuation display) on which the display AT of the matter to be noticed is made (the first symbol fluctuation display) Promotion display is executed in the second symbol variation display). The first hold icon h1 that has been changed to the display mode of the domed face may be displayed in the display mode during execution of the second symbol variation display (for example, during reach effect execution), and the display mode is further changed It may be out, and it may disappear at the time of super reach production execution.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 42 also corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (B)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ')) do not match.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the item to be noticed corresponds to an example of the first icon, and FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. The actual first hold icon h1 shown in ') corresponds to an example of the second icon. In addition, the display AT of the item to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42C and FIG. It corresponds to

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing two other examples of the promotion effect.

  In the example on the left side of FIG. 43, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed above the hold icon. This mini icon is an icon smaller than the hold icon, and the notice of the effect to be executed in the symbol change display started when the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is digested and started, or about the big hit in the symbol change display It represents pre-reading advance notices and the like. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A) and FIG. 43 (B), the mini icon of A is displayed on the leftmost first hold icon h1 among the three displayed hold icons. Two mA are stacked. The mini-icon mA displayed on the A, for example, is used to predict that one pseudo-series effect is started. In the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 43 (B), one mini icon of the C display displayed on the leftmost icon (the first hold icon h1) among the four displayed icons. Attention to mC has been reported. The mini icon mA on the C display is, for example, a pre-reading notice that suggests that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 43C, while in the reach state, the display AT of the item to be noticed disappears, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the mini icons mA and C displayed on the first reserved icon h1. Mini icons mC are stacked. That is, as the promotion display, the upper mini icon changes from the mini icon mA in the A display to the mini icon mC in the C display, but the lower mini icon does not change, the mini icon in the A display It remains as icon mA. As a result, although the number of times of pseudo run is reduced from 2 times to 1 time, it is predicted that it will become a symbol fluctuation display that it is determined that a big hit will be made, and promotion has succeeded. In this example, the attention target in the display AT to be noticed is a mini-icon in which only one is displayed, whereas in reality displayed after that, two mini-icons are displayed, Changes in the first mini-icon (mini icon mC in C display) and the first mini-icon (mini icon mA in A display) that was the target of attention in the display AT of the items to be noted The contents are also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 43, the mini-icon mC in the C display in the display AT of the item to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the mini in the actual first row A shown in FIG. The icon mA corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (C) corresponds to an example of the second display.

  In the example on the right side of FIG. 43, in the reach state, a promotion effect selected from among three types of promotion effects is executed. The three types of promotion effects referred to here are the promotion effects shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (c), the promotion effects shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (d), and FIG. 42 (A) (C) or FIG. 42 (A) to FIG. 42 (C)) to FIG. 42 (E). In addition, a plurality of types of effects for which one effect is selected (here, three types of promotion effects) are all displayed in advance as shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (c). ) And the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be the same type of effect, or a prior notice display (as shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (d)) FIG. 42 (b) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be the effects of the unmatched type, or both the effects of the matched type and the effects of the unmatched type are included It is also good.

  In FIG. 43 (b), the display AT1 of the item to be noted noted as "promotion chance A" as the promotion effect A, and the display AT2 of the attention item noted as the "promotion opportunity B" as the promotion effect B The display AT 3 of the item to be noted noted as “promotion chance C” is displayed as the promotion effect C, and any one type of promotion effect is selected and executed by the internal lottery. The selection operation may be performed by operating the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137).

  In the above description, the promotion effect is described as an example, but the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.

In the above description,
A game console provided with “display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the icons of the plurality of types is a first icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b), a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (B), FIG. Mini icons mC etc shown in
One of the icons of the plurality of types is a second icon [for example, the variation icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ') , The mini icon mA shown in FIG. 43 (C), etc.],
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
After the display of the first display is started, the second display may be displayed.
The first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon changes [eg, attention should be given to each of FIG. 42 (b), FIG. 42 (B) and FIG. 43 (B). Display AT, etc.]
The second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon changes [for example, for each of FIG. 42 (c), FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ') and FIG. 43 (C) Actual display etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the display means may be means for displaying the plurality of types of icons without fail, may be means for displaying the plurality of types of icons, and may display other than the plurality of types of icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of icons may be displayed.

  In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the second display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
“The second icon [for example, the variation icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c)] is an icon of a type different from the first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b)] is there,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[It is equipped with symbol display means which can display symbol variation display,
The first icon is a hold icon [eg, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b), etc.],
The said hold icon is an icon showing the number by which the start of the said symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one pending icon is an icon indicating that there is one pending event,
The second icon is a fluctuation icon [eg, a fluctuation icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c)],
The variation icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display when the symbol represented by the suspension icon is digested and the symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The symbol display means may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, or may be a unit which may display the symbol variation display, or may be other than symbol variation display. It may be good, and only symbol variation display may be performed.

Also,
[Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The first icon is a first hold icon [eg, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (B)],
The second icon is a second hold icon [eg, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ′)],
The said hold icon is an icon showing the number by which the start of the said symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one pending icon is an icon indicating that there is one pending event,
The first holding icon and the second holding icon are icons having different times when the holding is made.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first icon is a display of a first type of mini item [for example, a pre-notice notice mini icon mC indicating that a big hit is confirmed, etc.],
The second icon is a display of a second type of mini item [for example, a mini icon mA or the like that announces that pseudo sequential effects are started once].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The said 1st display is a display displayed during display of the variation display of a decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first display is a display displayed during execution of reach production,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second display is a display that is displayed during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second display is a display displayed during execution of reach production,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Subsequently, a timer advance notice for starting notification by button effect will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram for describing a general timer advance notice.

  In each drawing in FIG. 44, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed next to the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 and the like has a circular operation surface, the button B here has a rectangular operation surface, and the operation surface is hereinafter quadrilaterally distinguished. The button B is referred to as a button B (operation button 137 ′), but is not limited to the shape of the operation surface, and may be called a chance button.

  In (a) of FIG. 44, both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a discolored eye The decoration 3 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 1 "is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are also displayed in white during stoppage. While four first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44 (a) are on, four black circle holding icons which are the special pattern display of the special figure 1 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 44 (b), symbol variation display of the special figure is started in the first special view display device 212, and variation display of the decoration symbol is also started in the decoration symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, updating (variation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44B light up, and only three holding icons (pending icon h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed, and a variation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208 e. Furthermore, the 4th design 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changing to the display (gray) while it is fluctuating.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (c), reach effect is started. Up to this point, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is reduced in size at the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3 .

  The first sub control unit 400 receives, from the main control unit 300, a symbol change start command of the special view or a special view hold increase command. The symbol variation start command includes information indicating the variation time of the symbol variation display to be started from now. Further, even when the information indicating the fluctuation time is not included, the information indicating the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the fluctuation time from the information indicating the stop symbol. When the main control unit 300 pre-reads up to the fluctuation time, the special view reserve increase command includes information representing the pre-read fluctuation time, but even if it is not included, the information representing the pre-read stop symbol And the first sub-control unit 400 can know the fluctuation time from the information representing the stop symbol read ahead. When the fluctuation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery for executing timer notices.

  If the timer announcement has been won (if the lottery result is an execution result), the timer announcement is started when the reach effect is started. The timer advance notice includes a display representing the remaining time until the new effect is started, and is also a kind of advance notice effect that suggests that the new effect is started. The new effect referred to here may be a notice effect of a big hit, or may be an advance effect of whether a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect or the like) is started. In addition, as the notice effect of the big hit, there are a normal notice effect which gives notice of making a big hit with the symbol change display currently performed, and a pre-reading notice effect which gives notice of giving a big hit with the symbol change display thereafter. Further, the display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display, but in this example, it is a numerical display. Note that only one of a plurality of types of display examples representing the remaining time listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. It may apply. In (d) of FIG. 44, the timer advance notice display T is displayed on the left of the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and it is notified that the remaining time is 30:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. The remaining time displayed here is displayed as a countdown as time passes, and is 0:00 seconds in FIG. When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (f), a character of the lord is displayed on the variation icon display area 208e. In the variation icon display area 208 e of FIG. 44 (f), the variation icon c of the display mode (default display mode) of black circles is still displayed. Further, a timer advance notice display T of 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area 208e, and the first effect display here (display of character of the lady) ends the timer advance notice. It is an effect. However, it is possible to view the first effect display (display of the character of the princess) also as the start effect of a new effect whose start is notified by timer notice. In particular, the timing at which the timer advance notice display T disappears at 0:00 seconds may be the instant at which it reached 0:00 seconds, or may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. Alternatively, although the timer advance notice is ended when 0:00 seconds are reached, the timer advance notice display T may be a mode in which a new effect is started or the display continues for a certain period.

  In FIG. 44 (g) following FIG. 44 (f), although the timer advance notice display T disappears, the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lady) is displayed above the fluctuation icon display area 208e. The normal notice effect is started as a new effect which has been notified by the timer notice. In this normal preview effect, the change icon c, which was the default display mode until then, changes to the display mode of the princess's face, and there is a possibility that a big hit will occur in the symbol change display continuing in reach state at present. I have a notice.

  In FIG. 44 (h), the first effect display (the character display of the princess) also disappears, and the fluctuation icon c of the display mode of the princess's face continues to be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. continuing. After this, it develops into super reach production, and the fluctuation icon c disappears (becomes invisible) together with the reserved icon, becomes a big hit or loses, and further loses without developing into super reach production Do. In addition, even in the case of developing into a super reach effect, the variation icon c of the display mode of the princess' face may continue to be seen without disappearing.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the timer advance notice display T may be displayed according to the button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when it is determined that the timer advance notice is executed, internal counting by the counter timer is started. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of symbol variation display of a special figure or before the start of symbol variation display, but in the example shown in FIG. 45, at the same time as the start of symbol variation display, Internal counting is started. A count value is set to the counter timer before the start and is counted by the countdown method. The time represented by the count value is a time less than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be a time more than the fluctuation time of the special figure. In FIG. 45, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 4 is described in a pseudo manner. In the example shown in FIG. 45, a value of 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and internal counting is started from FIG. 45 (b) when symbol variation display is started.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to a state (operation valid state) in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is effectively received simultaneously with or immediately after the start of the internal count. However, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (the first chance button 136) remains off even when transitioning to the operation valid state, and the operation promotion notification of the button A (for example, the initial position display 136X) is also performed. The player is not aware that the operation is enabled. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer advance notice display T is displayed according to the operation. In the example shown in FIG. 45, button A (the first chance button 136) is operated after a while after the reach effect is started (see FIG. 45C). Although the display of the timer advance notice display T is related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 44, it is irrelevant in this example. Further, the button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Although the timer advance notice display T is not displayed even if the button B (operation button 137 ') is operated, it may be displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e), a timer advance notice display T is displayed, and it is informed that the remaining time until the start of a new effect is 20:00 seconds. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed immediately, so that the player starts counting down the remaining time as if the button A was operated. Although it looks like, internally, the countdown of the remaining time is started before the button operation.

  In this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponds to a so-called back button, but an operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the button A may be performed. It ends when the is operated. Therefore, if a certain period of time is provided between the time when button A (first chance button 136) is operated and the timer advance notice display T is displayed, the operation promotion notification is It will not be done.

  Further, since the timer advance notice display T is displayed in response to the button A operation, the length of the remaining time at the beginning of the display varies depending on the timing of the button A operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 45A, if the button A operation is performed a little earlier, the display of the timer advance notice display T is held from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, even if the button A operation is performed after the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 becomes equal to or less than the first remaining time (here, 5 seconds or less), the timer advance notice is displayed. T may not be displayed. In this case, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer advance notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A operation is not performed. May be In the example shown in FIG. 45, although the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, it may be intermittent. For example, if the operation valid state continues for 5 seconds, transition to the operation invalid state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  45 (f) and later are the same as FIG. 44 (e) and later, so the description is omitted, but button A (first chance button 136) is the back button, so the beginner does not press button A. The remaining time may have passed. Even in this case, after the remaining time has elapsed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess's face without performing the first effect display (the character display N1 of the princess). As in the case where the operation is performed, after the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed, the display mode of the variation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess's face.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the back button operation timing and the hold increase timing.

  When symbol variation display is started in FIG. 46 (b), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and internal counting is also started simultaneously with the start of symbol variation display here. That is, when the symbol variation display is started, it is decided that the timer advance notice is to be executed, and the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is in the valid state.

  In FIG. 46C, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer advance notice display T is displayed. In the state where the timer advance notice display T is displayed (the remaining time is 5:00 seconds), there is one ball winning on the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one, As shown in 46 (d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. All of these three suspension icons h1 to h3 are display modes of black circles (default display modes).

  Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see (f) in FIG. 46), and as shown in (g) in FIG. Is displayed. Even in this state, three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this example, on the first effect display (Donama character display N1), a new effect to be started from now, that is, a suggestion for a new effect whose advance notice was made by the timer advance notice, is given. It is notified that the display mode of the target hold icon changes. In this example, the object of the pre-reading notice is also determined in the determination step of the execution availability of the button notice in control. Therefore, if the second hold of special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol variation display one time before the symbol variation display currently performed, the control object is that the prefetch notice object is this The second hold, and the winning portion after the execution of the timer advance notice is determined (here, the third hold) can not be the advance notice target, but from the player's point of view, before the start of a new effect All the three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed on the screen seem to have the possibility of the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 out of the three hold icons h1 to h3 is the display mode of the face of the tombstone from the display mode of black circles (default display mode). It changes to (display mode of pre-reading advance notice), and pre-reading advance notice production is started as a new effect announced in advance by timer notice. In this example, the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord) continues to be displayed until the symbol variation display currently performed is ended.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46 (c '), when the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is not performed without operating the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button. When the button A (first chance button 136) is operated (see FIG. 46 (e ')) after the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, the player tends to expect that the third hold, which has been increased before the button operation, is also subject to the advance notice, but the hold increases after the execution of the timer notice is determined even before the button operation. In the control, the third hold can not be the preview notice, and the display mode of the second hold icon h2 changes to the display mode of the preview notice.

  In addition, when the first suspension is also increasing with the second suspension of the special figure 1 during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display one time before the currently executed symbol fluctuation display, the first suspension icon h1 There is a possibility that the display mode changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. In this case, it is not known in advance whether the prefetch notice object is the first hold, the second hold, or both. .

  In addition, if control is performed to determine the prefetch advance notice target in response to the operation of button A, the number of prefetch advance notice targets changes according to the operation timing of button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, with the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (c), only the first hold and the second hold are targeted for the advance notice, but with the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (e '), the first hold to the third hold Is the target of the advance notice, and the target that can be expected differs depending on the timing of the button operation.

  Furthermore, the pre-reading advance notice target may be determined immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  FIG. 47 shows two examples of button effects in stages.

  The example on the left side of FIG. 47 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, the button is in the reach state from FIG. 47 (a) to FIG. 47 (d), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (b) is a button imitating the chance button 136 in the unlit state at the initial position. 3 of an image 136 a 4, an arrow display 136 b and a character display “press” as a prompting prompting operation of the chance button 136, and a remaining period meter display 136 c indicating a remaining period for which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as one set. Hereinafter, the three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "press" are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. In FIG. 47 (c), button A (first chance button 136) is operated in a state in which the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. 47 (d) is performed according to this operation. The symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in notice image C1 displayed as a chance.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 47 is an example in which the start of timer advance notice is awaited. Since FIG. 47 (A)-the same figure (C) are the same as FIG. 47 (a)-the same figure (c), description is abbreviate | omitted. Also in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer advance notice is not executed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. However, at the stage of receiving the special view hold increase command when each of the three holds being held here is held, each variation time is calculated from the information representing the stop symbol of the prefetch read that was included in each command If it is possible to know that among these three reservations, the fluctuation time is longer than the first time, the timer notice is stocked until the reservation is digested and the symbol fluctuation display is started. Keep it. As shown in FIG. 47 (C), when button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation effective period, the timer advance notice is not started in the symbol variation display currently performed, but after this As a display for giving notice that the timer advance is started in the symbol variation display to be started, the display T 'of "standby" is displayed at the position where the timer advance display T is displayed as shown in FIG. It is displayed, and the remaining time is displayed instead of "waiting" when the timer advance is started.

  FIG. 48 is a view showing a modified example of the display method including the timer notice display T. In FIG. In FIG. 48, three examples are shown on the left side and two examples on the right side.

  First, in FIG. 48A, which is the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer advance notice display T (hereinafter referred to as time display T1) is displayed on the display position of the timer advance notice display T. (First chance button 136) has already been displayed before the operation. This time display T1 is also displayed as a countdown as time passes, but in FIG. 48 (a), 10:00 seconds are displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 48A is 30:00 seconds, and the two do not match. At the timing shown in FIG. 48B when the counter timer 412 has reached 25:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and in response to this operation, the time display T1 is displayed. , The timer advance notice display T is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 48B, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer advance display T is the same 25:00 seconds as the counter timer 412.

  Also in FIG. 48 (A) which is the second example, the time display T1 is displayed on the display position of the timer notice display T as in the case of FIG. 48 (a) which is the first example. The chance button 136) has already been displayed before the operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the timer advance notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer advance notice display T shown in FIG. 48B is 25:00 seconds which is the same as the counter timer 412. Further, on the timer notice display T, a difference between the time of the time display T1 which has been displayed until now and the time of the newly displayed timer notice display T is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (B), the time of the time display T1 displayed so far should have been 5:00 seconds, while the remaining time displayed on the timer advance notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, a difference display T2 of "+20" is made.

  Also in FIG. 48A which is the third example, the time display T1 is displayed on the display position of the timer advance notice display T in the same manner as in FIG. 48A which is the first example. The chance button 136) has already been displayed before the operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing shown in FIG. 48A, which is also the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 48A, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the word "LOCK" is displayed to overlap at the top of the time display T1, and the countdown in the time display T1 is paused. Even if the countdown in the time display T1 is paused, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues, and the character display "LOCK" is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds of the time display T1. And the countdown on the time display T1 is paused. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display of "LOCK" disappears and the time display T1 is replaced with the timer notice display T, and thereafter the countdown as the timer notice display T is continued. Ru. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues to count down and eventually becomes 0:00 seconds, and the timer notice It ends without replacing with display T.

  In FIG. 48 (α), which is the fourth example shown in the upper right, an arrow representing the passage of time is displayed, and a state in which symbol variation display is in progress is shown. Generally, it can be said that the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer, the higher the expectation of the big hit. In addition, when the timer notice gives notice of the start of the final cut-in notice in the currently displayed symbol variation display, the longer the execution time (remaining time) of the timer notice is to execute various effects. Becomes possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo run. In addition, after the normal reach is started, it is possible to execute the development to the super reach (SP) and the change of the title color of the reach. In addition, chance-up presentation during reach that the expectation of the big hit goes up is also feasible. For these reasons, internally, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed, but the display of the remaining time in the timer notice display T is initially displayed in a small amount, and the countdown appears temporarily. The fun of the game may be improved by stopping or adding the remaining period later. Also, as the number of remaining time displays such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. 48 (a) increases, the number of times having expectation for change in presentation when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds increases. The interest of gaming may improve. Then, in the final cut-in notice, a character whose jackpot is determined to be finalized is made to appear. It should be noted that even if the timer advance notice display T is 0:00 seconds in accordance with the 0:00 second counter timer 412, a new effect is not started, even if a false timer notice can be executed. You may be configured not to give a false timer notice.

  In the fifth example shown in the lower right of FIG. 48 (A), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here The timer notice display T in which 30:00 seconds is displayed is displayed. In FIG. 48 (i), the operation of button A (first chance button 136) is performed again. The button A corresponding to the back button is also in the state of accepting the second operation as valid, and the timer notice display T displayed in the first mode (for example, single frame) up to this point is the second operation. In response, it is displayed in the second mode (for example, a double frame). The timer notice display T, which has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue) until now, may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) in response to the second operation.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example in which the timer advance notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by a countdown of the remaining time.

  Two examples are shown in FIG. 49, and the example shown at the top is an example in the case where the timer advance notice overlaps with the island simultaneous rendering. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (a), "25 seconds until simultaneous effect on island" is displayed large. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and timer notice display T is not It is a display. In FIG. 49B, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time (here, 25:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 is displayed on the left of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. The timer advance notice display T is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (b), "20 seconds until simultaneous effect on island" is displayed in the same size as the above. In this example, the difference between the time when the timer announcement last time is 0:00 seconds and the time when the island simultaneous production starts is only 5 seconds, but the timer announcement is affected by the countdown of the island simultaneous production In accordance with the countdown of the counter timer 412, the remaining time is displayed without receiving any

  The example shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 is an example in which the timer advance notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49A, mission display M is made obliquely upward to the right of the variation icon display area 208e, and it is displayed that the remaining time is 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and timer notice display T is not It is a display. In FIG. 49A, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed next to the left of the variation icon display area 208e. The timer advance notice display T is displayed. In the mission display M shown in FIG. 49A, it is displayed that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, since both the mission display M and the timer advance notice display T are displayed in a similar display mode surrounded by a single frame, there is a risk that they may be misidentified at first glance. It also has the effect of getting you to

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another example of timer notice.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 50, the timer advance notice display is not a numerical value display but a meter display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red. Encourages them to operate. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (b), a tutorial description is made on the display of the chance up meter, which is a type of timer advance notice display. In FIG. 50 (c), the red light is urged to operate the button A, and in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CM is displayed according to the operation. The chance up meter CM has a start S at the left end and a goal G at the right end, and as time passes, the arrow mark moves from left to right. The arrow mark represents the current time, and when the arrow mark reaches the goal G on the right end, the remaining time is 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Furthermore, this chance up meter CM not only indicates the remaining time, but also various kinds such as the change of the pseudo link and the hold icon shown in FIG. 48 (α), the change presentation of the reach title color, the chance up presentation during the reach The execution timing of the rendition is also marked. In addition, only the execution timing of an effect is marked, and it may be non-display until what kind of effect is performed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 50 is an example in which the effect to be performed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red to urge operation, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. In addition, a mark JI is attached to the remaining period meter display 136c of the normal display 136N displayed, and when the remaining period meter approaches the mark JI, when the button A is operated, the effect of the special aspect is displayed. It is started. In FIG. 50 (A), the operation of the button A is too slow and the effect of the special mode is not started, and as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in chance and black letters is displayed It is done. In FIG. 50A, the operation timing of the button A matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50A, the image C2 of the cut-in notice displayed with chance and gray characters is displayed. ing. The cut-in notice image C2 shown in FIG. 50 (A) is the same as the cut-in notice image C1 shown in FIG. The type of base and the type of base may be different, or an image such as a character may be added. In FIG. 50A, the button B (the operation button 137 ') for which the operation promotion notification is not performed is operated. Also, the button B here corresponds to the back button. The operation timing of the button B also matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (i), a cut-in notice image C3 of the special mode in which the princess character is displayed is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the effect is different according to the operation timing, or the display mode of the effect is different according to the operation means to be operated. In addition, not only the display mode of an effect but the kind and start timing of an effect may differ. Further, even if the operation means to operate is the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of the effect, and the start timing may be different when the back button is used.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which the timer advance notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer notice display means 209 'with a shutter, which is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. The panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the timer advance notice display means 209 '. 51A, the shutter is closed, and as shown in FIG. 51B, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer advance display means 209 '.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display means 209 'becomes 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the first effect display (a character display N1 of a royal crown) is displayed not on the timer notice display means 209 ′ but on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the decorative symbol display device In the variation icon display area 208 e of 208, the variation icon c changes to the display mode of the princess's face, and the normal notice effect is started. After the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer advance display means 209 'continues to display 0:00 seconds without closing the shutter.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (A), the same display as "standby" shown in FIG. 47 (D) is made. “During standby” shown in FIG. 47 (D) is a display for giving notice that the timer advance is started in the symbol variation display started after this, but “during standby” shown in FIG. 51 (A) is This corresponds to a display for giving notice that the timer advance notice is started in the symbol variation display currently performed. In FIG. 51 (B), the "standby" of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer notice display means 209 'opens, and the remaining time same as the remaining time set in the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed. (Here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed. The release of "standby" may be released automatically upon arrival of the release timing, or may be released by operating the button A or the button B again.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a) is in a reach state, and is a timer in which the remaining time (here, 25:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the left of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. The notice display T is displayed. Then, in the timer notice display means 209 ', the shutter is opened, and the character display of "chance" is made. Thus, the timer advance notice display means 209 'can also display a display other than the display indicating the remaining period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (A) is developed into super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208, and instead, the remaining time (here, 20:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is the timer notice display means 209 '. Is displayed on. By doing this, a part of the super reach effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped by the timer notice display T, and on the other hand, the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51 (A), the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is also displayed on the timer notice display means 209 '. However, while the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer notice display unit 209 ′ displays 24: 95 seconds, and the counter timer 412 (not shown). Although it should be showing the remaining time of, there is a very slight difference. Since this is a different device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ', some time lag occurs in display control and the like, which is a difference due to this time lag. The timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 'may be intentionally made to have a difference as a part of the effect.

  Although the timer advance notice display means 209 'is used here, the second notice means 209 capable of operation (raising and lowering) shown in FIG. 33 may be used instead of the timer advance notice display means 209'. The second display means 209 may always operate (elevate), may not operate (elevate) in some cases, may operate other than the elevating operation, and performs only the elevating operation. It may be one.

In the above description,
“Second operation means [eg, chance button 136 etc.]”
Display means [eg, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the timer notice display means 209 ', etc.];
A game console equipped with
The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is a first notice display [eg timer notice display T etc.],
The third display may be a display according to the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e) and 25:00 shown in FIG. (C) of the cut-in notice displayed in black letters and the image of the cut-in notice in a special aspect displayed in gray letters and the chance shown in FIG. Is a display,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Note that the third display indicates the operation timing of the second operation means [e.g., whether the remaining time is less than the first remaining time or does it coincide with the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. Display mode [eg, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e) or the non-display shown in (a) of FIG. The display may be started by the image C1 and the image C of the cut-in notice of the special aspect displayed in a gray character and the chance shown in FIG.

  Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, may not display them, may display other than a plurality of types of displays, or may display a plurality of types of displays. It may be displayed only.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display for prompting the operation of the second operation means [eg, a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification, etc.],
When the display of the third display is started by operating the second operation means [for example, in the case of an operation within the operation valid period] and when it is not started [for example, the operation valid period In the case of operation before the end of the operation effective period, etc.]
In the second case, the fourth display is a display which is not displayed between the time when the second operation means is operated and the display of the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The fourth display may be a display not displayed in the second case.

Also,
"The first notice is a timer notice,
The timer notice is a notice including a display [eg, timer notice display T, etc.] representing a first remaining time [eg, time remaining of counter timer 412, etc.],
Prior notice effect after the first remaining time becomes zero [for example, the normal notice effect that the display mode of the fluctuation icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) changes to the display mode of the princess's face, or FIG. Is configured such that a pre-reading notice effect or the like in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG.
The “display according to the operation timing of the second operation means” described above is a display representing the first remaining time,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first remaining time may be the remaining time until the advance effect is started.

Also,
“The notice effect on the notice about the symbol change display performed when the display of the third display is started [For example, the display mode of the change icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) is the display of the princess's face It is the production of the usual notice etc. which changes to a mode],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  More specifically, as the advance notice, so-called pseudo-sequence, second reach effect [for example, super reach effect, etc.] developed from the first reach effect, and suggested improvement in the jackpot expectation degree in the reach effect Effects such as, for example, a change in the character color of a title or line, a cut-in effect, such as a cut-in effect immediately before the symbol is stopped, and the like.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display indicating the number of holdings according to the number of the holding icons to be displayed,
The preview effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the pre-reading preview [for example, the read mode of the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. Notice production etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that the display means may always display a display indicating the number of reservations, may not display them, may display other than the number of reservations, or may display only the number of reservations. It may be

Also,
“When the number of reservations increases while the third display is displayed, the display mode of one or more of the suspension icons representing the number of reservations before the increase is a display mode of the preview notice. [E.g., the change of the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 46 (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of hold icons") are displayed when the display of the third display is started, one or more of the plurality of hold icons may be displayed. The display mode of the plurality of hold icons may be changed to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice.

Also,
“When the number of reservations increases while displaying the third display, the display mode of one or more of the suspension icons representing the number of reservations after the increase indicates the display condition of the prefetch notice. May change to
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as "several hold icons") are displayed when the preview effect is started, one or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are displayed. The display mode of may be changed to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [eg, time display T1 shown in FIG. 48, etc.],
The sixth display includes a display representing a second remaining time different from the display representing the first remaining time [for example, 25:00 seconds in the timing of FIG. 48 (b)] [for example, The timing in FIG. 48 (b) is 5:00 seconds],
The third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The third display may be a display that is necessarily displayed together with the sixth display.

Also,
[Counter [eg, counter timer 412 etc.] is provided,
The display representing the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, symbol display means [for example, special figure 1 display 212, special figure 2 display 214 and the like] which can execute symbol fluctuation display, first control means [for example, main control section 300 and the like], and the second Control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 etc.], and the second control means is a control means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, The first control means is a control means capable of controlling the symbol display means [e.g., a control means for executing a special view state update process], and the second control means is a control of the display means [e.g. , And effect control processing etc.], and the second control means may be means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control means may be a control means composed of a plurality of control means [for example, the basic circuit 402 and the VDP 434 and VRAM 436 etc.].

  The symbol display means may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, or may be a unit which may display the symbol variation display, or may be other than symbol variation display. It may be good, and only symbol variation display may be performed. Further, the second control means may be means for executing control according to a command from the first control means, or may be means for performing the control, or Control other than the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed, or only control according to the command from the first control means may be executed.

Also,
“The third display indicates that the operation timing of the second operation means matches the first timing [for example, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 50]. This is a display whose display is started in the display mode [for example, the special mode shown in FIG.
When the operation timing of the second operation means does not coincide with the first timing, the third display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, the chance shown in FIG. The display is started with the image C1 etc. of the cut-in notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[Third operation means [for example, a button B (operation button 137 ', etc. shown in FIG. 50 (A))],
The third display may be started even when the third operation means is operated. [For example, a special mode in which a princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. 50 (i) And so on of the image C3 of the cut-in notice of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The third display means [for example, decoration symbol display device 208 etc.] which can execute the change display of the decoration symbol,
The display means [eg timer announcement display means 209 'etc.] is a means separate from the third display means,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The third display means may or may not always execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and may perform other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol may be performed only.

Also,
“The game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Finally, an example will be described in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of suspension icons start to change.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram gradually showing the state of the change display of the decorative symbol in which the animation of the hold icon is being executed.

  In FIG. 52 (a), the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 both display a stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a discolored eye " The decoration 3 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 1 "is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are also displayed in white during stoppage. While three first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (a) are turned on, three black circle holding icons which are the special pattern display of the special figure 1 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 52 (b) shows that the symbol variation display of the special drawing is started in the first special view display device 212, and the appearance immediately after the change display of the decoration symbol is started also in the decoration symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, updating (variation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. While only two first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (b) are lit, there are three pending icons in the pending icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 (a pending icon h1 to h3) are displayed, and the fluctuation icon is not yet displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This is the result of the time lag that has occurred because it was just after the start of the fluctuation. Moreover, the 4th design 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round-shaped display is changing into the display (gray) under fluctuation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (c), the moving animation of the hold icon is started. The move animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then to the lower right, and the hold icon that was the first hold icon h1 now moves toward the change icon display area 208e. The hold icon, which has been moved until now, is the second hold icon h2, moves toward the position where the first hold icon h1 is displayed, and the hold icon, which has been the third hold icon h3 so far, is the second It moves toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

  In FIG. 52D, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c in the same display manner as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Further, in the pending icon display area 208f, only two pending icons (pending icons h1 and h2) are displayed.

  Here, there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting opening 230, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by one, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is increased by one. Pieces are lit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation for increasing the holding icon is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (e), the upper end portion of the increase holding icon hi starts to be seen from the bottom of the display screen.

  Also in FIG. 52 (f), the animation for increasing the hold icon continues, and the increase hold icon hi tries to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed, and in FIG. 52 (g), the hold icon is increased. The animation ends, and a black circle third hold icon h3 is displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (h), while the stop symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed on the first special view display device 212, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 which is a round display changes to a stop display (white) doing. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Holiday 2"-"Decorative 1"-"Decorative 3" is stopped and displayed, but the variation icon display area In 208 e, the fluctuation icon c still remains. In the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 52 (i), the confirmation display of the stop symbol of the loss is performed, and even in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" The combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is displayed and the fluctuation icon c is also disappearing.

  In FIG. 52 (j) to FIG. 1 (l), symbol variation display of the next special drawing 1 is performed, and in FIG. 52 (m), stop display is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In this case, the combination of the decorative designs of the "Holiday 4"-"Modification 1"-"Modification 2" is displayed.

  FIGS. 52 (a) to (n) in FIG. 52 are the castle town stages, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the town of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. Stage change starts at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure, and at the same time as the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started in the figure (o), the background image is meshed with the decorative symbol display device 208 The background image is once changed to a background image in which the princess character is displayed in the center of the toned background image. This background image is a background image dedicated to stage change that does not belong to any stage. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the pending icon which has been displayed, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the variation icon c itself disappear, and the variation display of the reduced-displayed decorative symbol is on the upper left While being displayed, it will be in the state where only the 4th design 2081 and 2082 is displayed on the upper right. In this state, the player does not know which stage changes to, and the player is interested and pays attention to the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 52 (p), the background image switches to a dark background image, and the stage change is completed. Here, the castle town stage has been switched to the dark stage. When the stage change is completed, the display of the reserve icon, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the variation icon c itself is also restored, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also displayed on the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right. It is performed in the symbol display area 208c. In the castle town stage, the default display mode is circular and the default display mode is a square. On the dark stage, the default display mode is a quadrilateral, and in FIG. And the black square fluctuation icon c is also displayed. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may change depending on the stage. In addition, the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol may be changed according to the stage.

  The stages described above have a plurality of stages prepared in addition to the castle town stage and the darkness stage, and stage change depending on the control state (for example, positive change state / non positive change state, and electric support state / non-electric support state) Is performed, or stage change is performed according to the number of times of symbol variation display.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram gradually showing an example of simultaneous change of the holding icon during symbol stop.

  During the symbol change of the special figure 1, there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 after the movement animation is finished, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 increases by one to three. That is, the third reserve is increased here. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is increased by one and turned on three. In addition, although the illustration is omitted in the decorative symbol display device 208, the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ~ H3 is displayed. Here, the increased third reserve is a target of the advance notice, but is displayed in the default display mode (black circle display mode) while the symbol in FIG. 53 (b) is changing. In addition, although increase animation of a pending | holding icon may be abbreviate | omitted and shown also in subsequent figures, increase animation is performed unless it refuses.

  In FIG. 53 (c), the stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. The combination of is displayed. During the finalized display, an effect (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) of the third pre-read advance notice increased during the symbol variation display is executed. In this effect, the display mode changes together with the increased third hold icon h3 and the hold icons (first hold icon h1 and second hold icon h2) displayed when the third hold increases. The first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2, and the third holding icon h3 shown in FIG. 53 (d) are all display modes of black circles (default display mode), but in FIG. 53 (e), The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the effect display e4 overlaps the three hold icons h1 to h3 so that the three hold icons h1 to h3 become invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), all the three suspension icons h1 to h3 are changed to the display mode of the face of the lady (the display mode of the advance notice). Here, the change in the display mode is simultaneous and is the same change in the display mode, but may be sequentially changed one by one or may be changed to a different display mode (following The same applies to the simultaneous changes described).

  In FIG. 53 (g), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 53 (h), the holding icon of the display mode of the face of the lady has started moving animation, and FIG. 53 (i) Then, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c of the display mode of the face of the lady, which is the same as the hold icon, is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Also, in the holding icon display area 208f, two holding icons h1 and h2 of the display mode of the face of the lady are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the period from the start of symbol variation to the end of the movement animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period, and when there is a hold increase in the first period, Within one period, an effect of simultaneous change of the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as simultaneous change effect) is performed. On the other hand, when there is no increase in suspension in this first period, and there is an increase in suspension in the second period after the end of the first period (period from immediately before FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (c)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed in the second period during symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed in the period (FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 53 (f)) during the final display. The end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  FIG. 54: is a figure which shows in steps the example of the simultaneous change of a pending | holding icon when there is a pending | holding increase while symbol stop.

  In FIG. 54 (c), the stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (d) to FIG. 5 (f), the decorative symbol of "losing 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" The combination of is displayed. Note that since the finalized display is also displayed during the stop display, in the following description, the finalized display is also referred to as the stop display. During this stop display, there is a one-ball winning at the first special view starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special view 1 increases by one to three. That is, the third reserve is increased here as well. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53 (f) is increased by one and turned on three. The third hold increased here is also subject to the advance notice. In the case of the hold increase during stop display, the decoration symbol display device 208 does not execute the increase animation of the hold icon described using FIG. That is, the execution of the increase animation is canceled. However, only part of the increase animation may be executed, or all may be executed.

  In FIG. 54 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 which have been displayed so far in the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode), and includes two hold icons h1 and h2 Become invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 54 (g), the third hold icon h3 increases. The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the display mode of the face of the lady (the display mode of the advance notice). In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2 which have been the display modes of the black circles (the display modes of the default) until now, the display mode of the face of the lady (the display mode of the prefetch notice) At the same time. That is, all three hold icons h1 to h3 including the increased third hold icon h3 are displayed in the display mode of the face of the lady (the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice). In (g) of FIG. 54, symbol variation display is started, and the subsequent description is the same as the example of FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the suspension increases during symbol stop, and simultaneous change presentation using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased suspension icon is displayed. That is, simultaneous change presentation is performed immediately after the increase in the hold or with the increase in the hold.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram gradually showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when hold is increased by two during symbol change.

  From (a) to (c) in the figure, (c) shows symbol variation, and among these, there is a single-ball winning at the first special figure starting opening 230 at the timing of (b) in FIG. The number of reservations shown in FIG. 1 increases by one to three. That is, in this case, the third hold increases, and this third hold becomes a target of the pre-reading notice as a result of the execution notice lottery of the pre-reading notice in the first sub control unit 400. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (b) is increased by one and turned on three, and the third hold icon h3 of the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode) is increased, and three hold icons are displayed. h1 to h3 are displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (c) thereafter, there is a one-ball winning at the first special drawing starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is further increased by one to four (full). That is, although the fourth reserve is increased here, this fourth reserve is not a target of the prefetch notice as a result of the execution notice lottery of the prefetch notice in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (c) is increased by one and turned on four, and the fourth hold icon h4 of the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode) is increased, and four hold icons are displayed. h1 to h4 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (d) to FIG. 55 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the "loss 2"-"decor 1"-"decor 3" is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, simultaneous change production is executed as an effect of the third reserve pre-reading advance notice increased during the symbol change display, and as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f. After the entire reserved icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize, as shown in FIG. 7G, the effect display e4 disappears, and the display of the reserved icon resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (g), the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold) already displayed when the third hold increases, together with the third hold icon h3 targeted for advance notice. The icon h2) is also changed to the display mode (the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice) of the face of the lady, but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold increases, is displayed The mode is not changed, and the black circle display mode (default display mode) remains. As described above, even if the simultaneous change presentation is made, not all of the displayed hold icons are necessarily changed.

  Also in this example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the end of movement animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period, and when there is a hold increase in the first period, the first period Simultaneous change production is performed within the period. On the other hand, when there is no increase in suspension in this first period, and there is an increase in suspension in the second period after the end of the first period (period from immediately before FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (d)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed in the second period during symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed in the period during the stop display ((d) to (g) in FIG. 55).

  In addition, the period of the first half from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (for example, the period before the reach effect is started) is the first period, and the period of the second half until the end of the variation display (for example, the first period The second half period) may be used as the second period. The end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  In addition, the first period may be from the display start of the variable display to the variable icon display, that is, a period until the first hold icon h1 moves to the variable icon display area 208e, or from the display start of the variable display It may be a period until one of the plurality of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped (a so-called first stop or first temporary stop in a pseudo continuous effect), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of the variable display It may be a period until it reaches a reach state. Note that only one of the plurality of types of examples for the first period listed here may be applied, or two or more types of examples may be applied, or all types are applied. You may

  FIG. 56 is a diagram gradually showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when hold is increased by two while symbol stopping.

  From (c) to (g) in FIG. 56 (g) symbols are stopped, and among them, there is one ball winning at the first special view starting opening 230 at the timing of (f) in FIG. Is increased by one to three. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and this third hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (f) is increased by one and turned on three, but the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon is displayed. The entire display area 208 f is difficult to view. The increase animation of the hold icon with the increase of the third hold has been cancelled.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (g), there is a one-ball winning at the first special drawing starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is further increased by one to become four (full). That is, although the fourth hold increases during execution of the simultaneous change effect which is the advance notice advance effect, the fourth hold is not a target of the advance notice. Although the first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (g) is increased by one and four are lit, the effect display e4 is continuously displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is held. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to view. The animation of the increase of the hold icon due to the increase of the fourth hold is also canceled.

  In FIG. 56 (h), the effect display e4 disappears, and the display of the hold icon resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (h), the third hold icon h3 targeted for the advance notice is displayed in the display mode of the face of the lady (the display manner of the advance notice), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold are displayed. The icon h2 also changes to the display mode of the face of the lady (the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold increases is the display mode of the black circle (Default display mode) is displayed. In this manner, when the suspension increases while the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change presentation is immediately started as the pre-reading advance notice effect, but when there is a suspension increase during the execution of the simultaneous change presentation, the suspension is performed The increase is excluded from the target, and the pending icons before the simultaneous change presentation are simultaneously changed. In addition, while the symbol stoppage, simultaneous change production is executed immediately when the reservation of the special figure increases, but even if the fourth hold is increased before the simultaneous change production starts, the third hold is the advance notice If it is an object, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, if the fourth hold is the target of the prefetch notice, both the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  As described above, in FIG. 56 (f) and in FIG. 56 (g) as well, the animation for increasing the hold icon is canceled, but for the hold increase after the start of the simultaneous change production which is the preview advance notice effect, An increase animation of icons may be performed. In FIG. 56 (f '), as in the case of FIG. 56 (f), the effect display e4 appears by the start of the simultaneous change presentation accompanying the third hold becoming a prefetching advance target, and the entire hold icon display area 208f is It is difficult to see. In this state, although there is an increase in the fourth hold, after the start of the simultaneous change presentation, the increase animation of the hold icon is started. In FIG. 56 (g1 '), the upper end portion of the increase retention icon hi starts to be visible from the bottom of the display screen. Since the layer in which the increase retention icon hi is displayed is behind the layer in which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase retention icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In the same figure (g2 ') following FIG. 56 (g1'), the increase reserve icon hi of the display mode of the black circle partially hidden by the effect display e4 is shown.

  In addition, as the animation of the increase of the hold icon according to the increase of the third hold, the increase hold icon hi of the display mode (the display mode of the pre-reading notice) of the face of the lady may appear together with the effect display e4.

  Subsequently, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon in the winning order variable machine will be described.

  The explanation so far has been described in Special Figure 2 Priority Variation. That is, it was the description of the reserve increase of the special figure 1 in the case where the symbol variation of the special figure 2 is given priority. In addition, even if it is a reservation increase of the special figure 2, it is the same.

  Here, in the case of the winning order change machine which starts the symbol variation display from the timing of the winning timing earlier among the winning to the first special view starting opening 230 and the winning to the second special view starting opening 232 explain.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a winning order change.

  In the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57, eight holding icons can be displayed in which four holdings of the special drawing 1 and four holdings of the special drawing 2 are combined. In addition, the variation icon display area 208 e is provided at the lower left corner.

  In FIG. 57A, six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. Each of these six reserved icons h1 to h6 is a display mode of black circles (a default display mode). Further, the suspension corresponding to the first suspension icon h1 among the six suspension icons h1 to h6 is the suspension of the special view 2.

  In FIG. 57 (b), the suspension of the special view 2 is increased during symbol variation, and the seventh suspension icon h7 is added to the suspension icon display area 208f. Also in this case, an increase animation similar to the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, but is not shown. After a while, the symbol variation ends and the symbol is stopped (FIG. 57 (c) to FIG. (D)). In this example, the simultaneous change presentation of the hold icon is not started due to a loss in the execution notice lottery of the pre-reading advance notice for the seventh hold.

  Next, the suspension of the special view 2 corresponding to the first suspension icon h1 is digested, and as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the symbol variation display of the special view is started in the second special view display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is displayed. The device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), movement animation similar to the movement animation of the holding icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started, and in FIG. 57 (g) movement of the holding icon Is completed, and the variation icon c in the same display manner as the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208 e.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram gradually showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when hold is increased in the winning order fluctuation.

  In FIG. 58A, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. Each of the seven reserve icons h1 to h7 is a display mode of black circles (a default display mode). The hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 among the seven hold icons h1 to h7 is a hold of the special view 2. The state shown in FIG. 58 (a) is the state after the end of the moving animation.

  In FIG. 58 (b), the suspension of the special view 2 increases during symbol movement after the movement animation ends, and the eighth suspension icon h8 is added to the suspension icon display area 208f, and the suspension is full. In particular, the full display F of pending MAX is also made. In this example, it is won in the execution notice lottery of pre-reading advance notice for the eighth suspension, the simultaneous change effect of the suspension icon is executed after this.

  Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the stop display is in progress (FIG. 58 (c) to FIG. (D)). In this example, the simultaneous change presentation of the hold icon is not started during the stop display.

  Then, the suspension of the special view 2 corresponding to the first suspension icon h1 is digested, and as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the symbol variation display of the special view is started in the second special view display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is displayed. The device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f), movement animation similar to the movement animation of the holding icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started, and in FIG. 58 (g) movement of the holding icon Is completed, seven pending icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the pending icon display area 208f, and a variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. Note that the display mode is the display mode of black circles (the default display mode), regardless of the seven reserve icons h1 to h7 and the variation icon c.

  When the movement of the hold icon is completed, the simultaneous change presentation of the hold icon is started. That is, simultaneous change presentation is started at the end of the movement animation of the hold icon. Even in this simultaneous change effect, the effect display e5 appears. However, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), the effect display e5 is a display that overlaps the pending icon display area 208f and the variable icon display area 208e. In addition to the seven hold icons h1 to h7, the change icon c is also difficult to view. In the effect display e5 shown in FIG. 58 (h), the position at which the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed does not overlap, but may overlap to this position. In addition, the variation icon display area 208e may be an effect display that does not overlap.

  In FIG. 58 (i), the effect display e5 disappears, and the hold icon becomes visible and the fluctuation icon c also becomes visible. The simultaneous change effect here was a prefetch notice for targeting the eighth suspension at the time of suspension increase (FIG. 58 (b)), but the eighth suspension is the seventh due to the fact that one suspension has been digested. The eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed in the first place. Therefore, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the change icon c are displayed, and the display modes of all the displayed icons are changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change presentation here, the display mode is changed to a plurality of display modes instead of changing to one common display mode. Note that the display modes of all pending icons that have changed simultaneously may be different.

Moreover, simultaneous change presentation may be performed at the timing when the moving animation of the hold icon is executed. In FIG. 58 (d '), the stop display is in the same manner as in FIG. 58 (d), and in FIG. 58 (e'), the symbol variation display of the special view is started as in FIG. In the apparatus 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the previous example, immediately after this, the moving animation of the holding icon was started, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol or immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The simultaneous change production has been started. In FIG. 58 (f '), the effect display e5 disappears, and the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the change icon c are displayed, and all of these displayed are displayed. The display mode of the icon is changing. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example when the hold increases during the stop display in the winning order change and the hold becomes full.

  The stop display is performed from FIG. 59 (a) to FIG. 59 (b), and there is one ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing between FIG. The number of pendings in Fig. 1 increases by one and the pending becomes 8 (full) For the pending increase during the pause display, the animation of the pending icon increase is canceled and as shown in Fig. 59 (b), The first special design pattern holding lamp 218 is increased by one and four lights are turned on, and the eighth holding icon h8 of the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode) is increased. In the case of an increase and a full fill, full fill indication F described in Fig. 58 is not displayed, that is, full fill indication F is displayed only during symbol variation. Is a short, full-time display F at a certain time Thus, while the full display F is not displayed, the next symbol variation display is started (see FIG. 59 (c)), and although not shown, the moving animation of the hold icon is displayed. Then, the simultaneous display of the hold icon is started, the effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 59 (d)), and in the figure (e), the effect display e5 disappears, and the seventh hold icon h7 The first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6 and the change icon c are redisplayed, and the display mode of all the redisplayed icons is changed.

  Note that the full display F may be displayed during stop display even in a short time. Also, the moving animation of the hold icon may be omitted. Furthermore, if the reserve does not increase during the symbol change or the reserve is not full, the simultaneous change presentation of the reserve icon may not be started.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example in which simultaneous change presentation is not performed or is performed depending on the type of the holding icon being displayed.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60 (b), the second hold icon h2 changes to a hold icon of the display mode (second display mode) of the character of “Heat”. This display mode (the second display mode) may be a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice having the highest reliability (expected degree of big hit), or may be a display mode in which two or more are not displayed simultaneously. The rare display mode may have the lowest appearance rate. Note that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the second display mode listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied. It may apply. Even if the hold increases while the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change presentation is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 60, the second reserve icon h2 changes to a reserve icon of a display mode (first display mode) in which the second reserve icon h2 is illuminated in FIG. This display mode (first display mode) may be a display mode of pre-reading notice with the lowest reliability (expected degree of big hit), or may be a display mode in which two or more are displayed simultaneously. The display mode may have the highest appearance rate next to the default display mode. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the first display mode listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. It may apply. When the hold increases while the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed (refer to the third hold icon h3 in FIG. 60C), if the increased hold is a target of the prefetch notice, simultaneous change An effect is executed (see FIG. 60E).

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the simultaneous change effect when the game is full on reserve in the winning order fluctuation.

  The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is changed to the display mode of the program leader character. The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, the game may appear in the display mode of the Bancho character from the beginning at the time of winning, or may be changed to the display mode of the Bancho character only at the start of the next change. In FIG. 61 (d), the eighth hold icon h8 increases while the symbol changes, and the hold is full. When the display is full during the symbol change, the full display F is displayed during the period from when it is full to the stop display of the symbol change display currently performed (FIG. 61 (c) to FIG. (D)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the full display F disappears when the final display is shown. Then, even if the display mode of the hold icon is changed due to other effects, if the hold becomes full, the figure after the animation of moving the hold icon in the next change (see FIG. 61 (g)) is completed. As shown in 61 (i), the simultaneous change presentation is started, and as shown in FIG. 7 (j), the display modes of all the icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon c change. . In this example, the simultaneous change presentation is executed in response to the holding full, regardless of the display mode of the holding icon as described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) to (e). . Therefore, in this case, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is the display mode of the character of the length, but even if it is the display mode of the character of "heat" shown in FIG. 60 (b), When the reservation is full, simultaneous change presentation will be executed. However, the simultaneous change presentation may not be performed when the hold icon of the display mode (second display mode) of the character of "Heat" is displayed even when the hold is full.

  In FIG. 61 (A), the display modes of the hold icons of all of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 have already been changed to the display mode of the domed face by the simultaneous change effect. Even in this case, the full display F is displayed when the display is full during symbol change. Then, even after the simultaneous change presentation has already been executed, the simultaneous change presentation is executed again in response to the full reservation being made (see FIG. 61C). That is, if all the pending icons whose display mode has changed due to the simultaneous change presentation is filled up before all the pending icons are consumed, the simultaneous change presentation is executed again.

  In addition, the example of the winning sequence change machine described in FIG. 58, FIG. 59 and FIG. 61 can be applied to the case of full reservation even in the case of the special figure 2 priority change machine and the alternating change machine. It is an example.

In the above description,
A game console provided with “effect display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the pending icons according to the pending number,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol [eg, immediately before FIG. 52 (b) to FIG. 52 (h)],
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the effect displays of the plurality of effect displays is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of pending icons change, respectively.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started in a first period in the variable display (for example, a period from the start of symbol change to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon, etc.) Yes,
If display of the first effect display is not started in the first period in the variable display, a second period in the variable display [e.g., until immediately before FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (c) The first effect display is configured not to start to be displayed during the period, or the period from immediately before FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (d),
The second period is a period after the first period,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Note that “effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of reserved icons change respectively” may be effect display in which the display modes of all the plurality of reserved icons change simultaneously, or effect display which changes one by one. It may be an effect display that changes a plurality of times. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of effect display listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types are applied. It is also good.

  Also, for example, when the number of reservations is increased in the first period, the first effect display may be started to be displayed in the first period. In addition, when the retention increases during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first effect display is started to be displayed during the first period in the variable display started subsequently to the stop display of the decorative symbol. May be

  Furthermore, the effect display means may be means for displaying a plurality of hold icons without fail, may be means for displaying the hold icons, and may display other than the plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.

Also,
“The first period is a period in which the start time is the time of the start of the variable display [eg, the period of the first half including FIG. 52 (b)],
The second period is a period in which the end is the end of the variable display [for example, the period of the second half until just before FIG. 52 (h)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, when the display of the first effect display is not started at the start of the display of the variable display, the display of the first effect display is not started during the display of the variable display. That is, the display of the first effect display is started only at the start of the change during the display of the change display.

Also,
"The end of the first period is the start of the second period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The said effect display means is a means which can display the stop display of the said decoration pattern,
The first effect display is an effect display that has a case where the display is started during the display of the stop display [eg, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e) or the case shown in FIG. 55 (f), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, if the hold increases while the stop display is displayed, the first effect display may be started to be displayed while the stop display is displayed. In addition, even when the hold increases while the variable display before the stop display is displayed, the first effect display may be started to be displayed while the stop display is displayed.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for surely displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be a means which may display the display, and displays other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be means, or may be means for displaying only the stop indication of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“When the number of reservations is increased while the variable display is displayed, the first effect display is started after the variable display [eg, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e) or FIG. In the case shown in f), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first effect display is the first period in the variable display started next to the variable display (hereinafter referred to as“ first variable display ”) in which the number of reservations is increased [for example, FIG. This is an effect display that may start to be displayed during the first half, including (h).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is always started in the first period in the variable display started after the first variable display.

Also,
"The number of the plurality of suspension icons whose display modes are respectively changed by the first effect display is the number before the increase of the number of suspension increased during the display of the first variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. Example]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"One effect display among the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display,
The second effect display is a movement animation of the hold icon [eg, an animation shown in FIG. 52 (k), etc.]
The movement animation is an animation whose display is completed before the second period starts.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a first display mode [for example, a display mode in which the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60 (B) is lit].
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of characters of "heat" of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60 (b)],
Even if the plurality of suspension icons include the suspension icon of the first display mode, the display of the first effect display is configured to be started during the first period,
When at least one hold icon of the second display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the first effect display is not started even in the first period. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first display mode may be a display mode of prefetching notice, and the second display mode may be a display mode of previewing notice, and the first display mode and the second display mode. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot is higher than that of the first display mode. On the contrary, the display mode may be low.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for displaying the hold icon in the first display mode without fail, or may be means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, or may be a means for displaying the hold icon only in the first display mode.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for displaying the hold icon in a second display mode without fail, or may be means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, and may be a means for displaying the hold icon only in the second display mode.

Also,
“The game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Note that
"A game console provided with effect display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the pending icons according to the pending number,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the effect displays of the plurality of effect displays is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of pending icons change, respectively.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started in a first period [for example, a period from the start of symbol variation to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon, etc.],
In the case where the first effect display is not started to be displayed in the first period, a second period [e.g., a period from FIG. 53 (a) to a position immediately before FIG. 55 (c), FIG. Also in the period until immediately before the same figure (d)], the first effect display is configured not to start being displayed,
The second period is a period after the first period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

further,
"A game console equipped with effect display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the pending icons according to the pending number,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a stop display of a decorative symbol,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of pending icons change, respectively.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during execution of the stop display,
The first effect display is an effect display that may not be started during execution of the variable display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during execution of the stop display. In addition, the first effect display may be an effect display that is not necessarily started during execution of the variable display.

further,
“The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display when the hold display is increased during the execution of the stop display,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during execution of the stop display to be displayed next to the change display, when the hold increase is performed during the change display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first effect display may be an effect display that must be started during the execution of the stop display when the hold display increases during the execution of the stop display. Furthermore, the first effect display is an effect display that is always started during the execution of the stop display displayed next to the variable display when the hold increase is performed during the execution of the variable display. It is also good.

  9 to 61 described above may be an example in one pachinko machine, or may be an example executed in each different pachinko machine.

  FIG. 62 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 62, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  The invention is also applicable to slot machines.

  FIG. 63 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 63) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown in FIG. 63) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being played. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three sheets are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is performed to perform a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not. It is determined whether to make the player relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Also, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. The operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. At the upper part of the front door 1002, a rendering device 1080 is disposed. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of the door member 1063 (shown in FIG. When the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1000 It has a structure that appears on the It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, and it comprises, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as the operation means, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means or the third operation means And effect buttons 1091 (an example of the second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, a display panel 1070 displaying a title or the like of a device can be protruded toward the front side. In addition, a light emitting diode (LED) is incorporated in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 63 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operating means (button) like the transmitting portion 191, and an example of the operating means (for example, It corresponds to one example of the operation means, and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091 and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other gaming machines applicable to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) which can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 64 to 200 are basically used only for the description using FIGS. 64 to 200, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 200, the reference numerals shown in FIG.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk in a store (game arcade) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, the one in which the light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board The ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of the game, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 66) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting an exit button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and returning the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. The specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 64, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 64 as viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 which constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 67) for performing control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 Second sub substrate case 166 which houses the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (refer to FIG. 67) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 67) and a payout substrate case 172 for housing a payout substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; 67 includes a launch substrate case 176 housing a launch substrate 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing relating to the power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 67) that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices. And a power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 When the player wins a prize, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper dish While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls as game balls pass or enter, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 64, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 66 correspond to rendering means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like) and various movable members for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 via the external terminal board 349 The gaming information (for example, gaming state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 And an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137 and detection signals from these sensors to the basic circuit 402. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 are read out based on signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404 A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350, through the external terminal board 349, rental ball information etc. indicating that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects the front frame door 106 when it is open, and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1. In FIG. 68 (a), nine types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 68 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be extinguished, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. "Special figure H" shown to FIG. 68 (a) is a small hit design. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. In FIG. 68 (b), six types of special drawings of "special drawing a" to "special drawing f" are shown, of which five kinds of special drawings are big hit symbols ("special drawing a"-"special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 68 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 68 (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67, a special figure random number value, a special figure round determined random value, a special figure electric support decision random number value, and a special symbol design determined random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter which generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special drawings, special drawing winning random number values, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area for storing the number of reservations of the special view in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a storage area for the number of special drawings suspension. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special drawing divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas for which the start of the success / failure determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for common use is also prepared. In the start information storage unit for special drawing, as described later, a plurality of types of start information are made into one set, and the start information is stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 69 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like at a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 includes a timer circuit 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 67 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals representing that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area, respectively. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information of the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects entry of the ball into the first special view start port 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special view It is determined that there has been a prize in starting opening 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium which passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in first special drawing starting slot 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 thereafter. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control symbol random number value and the random number The random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the common pattern display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 Special figure display symbol update timer for clocking the time to display the fluctuation / stop, various timers including timer for clocking predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined closing time, predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234 and 226 and starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening in RAM 308 is calculated. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning reception process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, plural types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an open area according to the winning order (order of suspension) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 67 are composed of 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 68 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 68 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 3211, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a common drawing timer random number value, and the common drawing display device 210 is generally selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value. One time for fluctuating display of a figure is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later. Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 5R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure a, the special figure b, the special figure c, or the special figure d shown in FIG. 68 (a), the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special probability e flag is turned off and the special probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special flag f is turned off when the lost flag is turned on. The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), lost symbol ( The finalized display of any one symbol of the special figure f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is driven to open and close (a part of various solenoids 332) until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls. Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set the information indicating the closing period to. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and ends at a predetermined timing Storage area for a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set a standby period for displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended. The information which shows the presentation waiting period to is set to. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the general drawing low probability state (electric Chu open spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 opens more easily than in the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a departure (decision determination) is performed using the qualification table stored in the table. Next, main control unit 300 uses the special drawing determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special drawing 2 random number value in the acquired special drawing 2 start information, the determined success or failure determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area Subtract 1 the number of reserved areas. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of special figure 2 variation game with high degree of advantage and special figure 1 variation game with low degree of preference, special figure change game pertaining to the suspension of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 start starting prize winning It may be starting opening winning combination order fluctuation which starts in order. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the pending limit.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure which has stopped the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special figure which stops the variation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data contains various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special pattern probability change flags, timers selected in the special drawing related lottery process In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the number etc., and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a prize effect start command and end In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figures stored in the command data in the RAM 308 [2] Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. being held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 69 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. And then go into the HALT state.

  FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 72A to 72C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support state), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the success or failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 71, prefetching is always executed for the start information of the special figure 2 that has increased, and prefetching is always performed for the start information of the special figure 1 that has increased, except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 72 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 72A shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (a), "special figure I" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure I" as stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 72 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (b), "special figure f" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and the stopping symbol is in the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 72 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 72 (c) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit in power support. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), "not determined" information is stored in the storage area "pending 1" instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group to be described later are determined in advance, and such information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result It can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as information.

  Next, FIG. 73 is referred to for the table for determination of acceptance used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 70. While explaining. Here, FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, referring to the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. Referring to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 73 (b). And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 change game, the big hit, the small hit or the release is selected as the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Similarly, in the special view high probability state, the special view low probability state shown in FIG. 73 (a) is referred to when the special view high probability state of special view 2 is determined. In this case, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 73 (b) is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a jackpot or an omission is selected as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIG. 73C is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. If the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is lost, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 73 (c) is referred to, and the referred small hit judgment table indicates the numerical range indicated and the acquired random number value. , Select the success or failure judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected.

  Next, a stop is performed based on the result of determination of success or failure determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A special drawing determination table used for symbol determination will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 74 (a) is a view showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 74 (b) is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When deciding the stop symbol of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (a), the special figure is based on the result of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number. Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  In addition, when deciding the stop design of the special figure 2, referring to the table for special figure 2 design decision which is shown in Figure 74 (b), on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of random number, We draw the stop symbol of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, various initial settings are performed in step S401 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the depression of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data according to the depression of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 75B is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 75C is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 75 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. If not (step S703: No), the process waits for the input of the transfer end interrupt signal.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes). The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, various initial settings are performed in step S801 in FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S801, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 807 following step S 805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S809 following step S807, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S 807, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by effect movable body 224 or effect data by lamp) corresponding to this command is performed from ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 76 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 76C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S 803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 77, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special view 1 holding lamp 218, a special view 2 holding lamp 220, and a drawing The hold lamp 216 is shown.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or while the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the notification area during symbol fluctuation of the common figure, the notification region during symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 , It becomes a notification area during symbol change of the special figure 2. While a figure of a square is lit and displayed while the symbol of the common figure is stopped, the figure of the square is blinked or extinguished while the symbol of the common figure changes. While the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, a round figure is lit and displayed, but while the special figure 1 symbol is fluctuating, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the special figure 2 symbol is stopped, a triangular figure is lit and displayed, while the special figure 2 symbol is changed, the triangular figure is blinked or extinguished. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position, but also in display mode (shape in this case), so that the determination can be made only when the player looks at first glance. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 77 is the non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area 280. In addition, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  A reserve icon representing the reserve of special figure 1 is displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and a reserve icon representing reserve of the special figure 2 is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 . The number of reservations for Special Figure 1 is also represented by the number of suspension icons for Special Figure 1 in addition to the number of lights for Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218, and the number of reservations for Special Figure 2 is the number of illuminations for Special Figure 2 Hold lamp 220 In addition, it is also represented by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the right side becoming the hold icon with older prize winnings, and in the reserve icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserve icons are displayed vertically The lower the pending icon, the older the winning icon will be.

  In FIG. 77 (a), two reserve icons h11 and h12 for the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 for the special figure 1, and both reserve icons h11 and h12 for the two special figures 1 are displayed. , And the default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 77 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four suspension icons are displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the suspension icons which are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special view 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 77 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult to open the power chute and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start opening 232 This is because In addition, although the line which delimits an area | region is not actually displayed, the line which demarcates an area | region is specifically displayed in the pending | holding icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, ie, the pending | holding icon display area provided in the right end of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. Are shown in dotted lines for clarity. It should be noted that a line defining the area may be provided, or a line defining the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Moreover, in order to make it clear that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons which are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, according to the control state (playing state), the reserved icon display area of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 which is easy to win is the left side of the variation icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the reserved icon display area of the other special view is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special view 2 An area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserved icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the display position of the special icon 1 is different from that of the reserved icon. Here, the shape is also different, and the determination can be made at a glance of the player. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is a row in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the blinking start or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decoration symbol Although this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 77 (b), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the turn off of the fourth symbol is further performed. There has been no change in the design yet.

  In FIG. 77 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 is started. The movement animation here starts the movement of the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 toward the variation icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1. At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 77 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 77 (e), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. The hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but still at this stage, The variable display of the decorative pattern has not been started. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P prompting the user to depress the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. Although the variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 77 (h), the effective period is reduced, and in FIG. 77 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 77 (j), a reach state rush notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state rush notice image 2071, a character display “chance” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 77 (k), the reach state rush notice image 2071 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 77 (l). Although the reach state rush notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but it may always be entered.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect serving as a trigger for an advance notice regarding the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 77 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variation icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. , Has developed into a super reach (Swordsman reach). 77 (n) displays a large image of the sword sword master of the enemy character, and in the subsequent ornament pattern display unit 208 shown in FIG. 77 (o), the main character of the main character and the battle battle between the enemy king sword The animation of the scene is displayed.

  It should be noted that the reach state rush notice image 2071 may be not only a notice of rushing into the reach state but also a notice of development to super reach.

  FIG. 78 shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 in stages.

  In FIG. 78 (p) continued from FIG. 77 (o), animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 78 (s). In FIG. 78 (s), the main character of the hero wins the swordsman of the enemy character, and in FIG. 78 (t), all is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a background image different from before. Soon, as shown to the figure (u), the fluctuation | variation fluctuation | variation of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a different background image. Further, the display of the variation icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of 15R probability variation big hit confirmation of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown to FIG. 78 (v) is on. Although the background is hidden in FIG. 78 (v), a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Before long, in FIG. 78 (w), as a jackpot game start effect, a character display of “probably variable jackpot” is made together with a background image (omitted here) for celebrating the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the case of reach condition with different decorative symbols in FIG. 77 (l) (symbol combinations that are actually 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), another figure continuing from FIG. 78 (t) In 78 (u '), the fluctuation variation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in Fig. 78 (v') following Fig. 78 (u '), "decoration 6-decoration The combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit of 6-decoration 6 "is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 78 (w ′) following FIG. 78 (v ′), the character display of “big hit” is performed together with a background image (omitted here) for celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 79 shows, in a step-by-step manner, an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 78 (q).

  In FIG. 79 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 77 (o) continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 79 (b). In FIG. 79 (b), the main character of the hero is defeated by the swordsman of the enemy, and in FIG. 79 (c), as in FIG. 78 (t), all is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Soon, in FIG. 79 (d), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" starts. Here, the display of the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (e), the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special figure 1 lights up, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" stops It is displayed. Next, during the finalized display period of the special view 1, in the variable icon display area 280, the deletion animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In the figure (f), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started, and in the figure (g), the deletion animation continues, and the fluctuation icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). In addition, before the finalized display of the special view 1 is performed, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 may be executed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. Here, FIG. 80 (a) is a view for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 80 (b) is a view for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a view for explaining an example of the digest timing of the advance notice icon, and FIG. 7D is a view for explaining an example of the increase timing of the advance notice icon. FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 81 (b) is a view for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed in the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, the notice icon fourth display The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of pending icons that can be displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is four (or the number of available pending icons when the additional icon display area of the special view 2 is further displayed) Is a total of eight), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 differs from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the number of preview icons that can be displayed and the number of pending icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the advance notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to any number of two or more. Also, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon I6 of a hat consisting of a symbol of a hat is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2 of A notice icon I9 of a box consisting of symbols is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of a fan consisting of a fan icon is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. A notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken consisting of the design of the shuriken is displayed, and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon consisting of the ribbon design is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 is It is blank. As to which notice icon is to be displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285, based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 80 (b). It is determined. In this embodiment, one notice icon is displayed for one area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed for one area.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (c), for example. To be controlled. The control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 in accordance with the progress of the game, and read and executed as appropriate. That is, eight seconds after the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 80 (a), the notice icon I8 of the ribbon is digested, and then it is displayed as the notice icon I8 of the digested ribbon. A corresponding effect may be performed. Thereafter, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and when the change display of the decorative symbol (symbol change corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed after the start of the symbol variation, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 of the digested shuriken may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends, the hold icon h11 of special drawing 1 (in FIG. 80A, the hold icon h12 moves to the hold icon h11) moves toward the change icon display area 280 When the variation display of the decorative symbol (symbol variation corresponding to hold 2) is started and 4 seconds have passed since the symbol variation was started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and An effect corresponding to the digested hat advance notice icon I6 may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed after the SP reach is started, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of the one thousand boxes digested may be executed. Thereafter, when 2 seconds have passed after all the decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped, the fan announcement icon I10 may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested fan announcement icon I10 may be executed. . As described above, it can be said that the digesting of the advance notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the advance notice and the effect are to be executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 80 (d). It is controlled to be increased by The control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 in accordance with the progress of the game, and read and executed as appropriate. That is, four seconds after the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 80 (a), the crown pattern appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the tousame effect of increasing the notice icon is executed. Be done. In this hall effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, DJ effects appear on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice icon is increased. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I9 of the one-man box in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. After that, the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished, and after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the second pseudo-sequence effect, the hall effect is executed and the fan An effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I10 of the second notice icon 10 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Here, the pseudo-series effect is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a departure. For example, it is possible to set the number of notice icons to be increased up to one in symbol fluctuation display to be out, and to increase the number of notice icons to increase in symbol fluctuation display to be a big hit.

  Next, the effect contents corresponding to the type of notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As the advance notice icon, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), there are one where the content of the corresponding effect is not clear and the one where the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 81 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the notice icon (the notice icon before change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear includes the first notice icon I1 of the first lord and the second notice icon I2 of the second lord. , And the third icon for the notice icon I3 and the first button notification icon I4. The first hallmark's notice icon I1 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the hall in white, and the jackpot has a low degree of reliability. In addition, the second icon of condolence announcement icon I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the statue of honor in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. In addition, the third hallmark's notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the hall in red, and the jackpot has a high degree of reliability. Further, the first button preview icon I4 is a preview icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the jackpot is either weak or strong. The first hallmark notice icon I1, the second hallmark notice icon I2, and the third hallmark notice icon I3 are displayed at predetermined change display timings (for example, timing of the increase display of the notice icons). It changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in 81 (b). Also, the first button preview icon I4 changes to any of the preview icons after the change shown in FIG. 81 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button preview icon I4 may be changed to any of the pre-change preview icons at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first tonome preview icon I1, the second tonosho notice icon I2, the third tonosho preview icon I3 and the first button preview icon I4 start to change symbol patterns to be read ahead. May be displayed before the event, and may function as a pre-reading notice. Also, in the present embodiment, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, there may be a case where a character indication is displayed accompanying the notice icon, which will be described later. When the notice icon I2 of Tonosama 2 and the notice icon I3 of the third donkey are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), for example, a notice icon (a notice icon after change) of a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I7 of a shuriken, and a ribbon There are a notice icon I8, a notice box I9 of one thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 of a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notification icon I6 is a notification icon that imitates a hat worn by the character of the captain, and the jackpot has a high degree or a low degree of reliability. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be performed only once. Here, there are a strong pattern, a weak pattern and a cassette pattern in the pseudo-series effect. For example, as described later, when a pseudo-sequence effect starts, a character of a bancho appears, but the display mode of the character of the bancho is different from the normal (for example, a bancho is an aura). By displaying the wrapped display mode, it is notified that the reliability is a strong degree. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-series effect, it may be notified that it is the third pseudo-series effect to indicate that the reliability is high. Further, the pseudo-series effect of the weak pattern informs that the reliability is about the weak degree by displaying the appearing leader character in the normal display mode. Further, as described later, the pseudo-series effect of the cassette pattern is an effect of performing the off-set display while making it appear that the pseudo-series effect is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter display is displayed accompanying the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the degree of reliability is a high degree, “continuation” is displayed as red pattern or black character as A pattern. May be Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Also, if the degree of reliability is weak, it may be displayed as “continuation” with “continuation” or “question mark” in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-series effect may be always performed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I7 of the shuriken is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the gardener (ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a high degree, the case where the notice effect under execution switches to a highly reliable strong notice effect via freeze effect may be executed. Yes (Freeze Notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol are notified in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern if the degree of reliability is high. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is low, "A-ch" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested, either one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I8 of the ribbon is a notice icon imitating the ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the jackpot has a high degree or a low degree of reliability. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a high degree, an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the pre-reading mode or the change notice mode may be executed (stage change Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect may be executed to change the displayed background to any one of a plurality of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (weak stage change) Production). Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter display is displayed accompanying the notice icon I 8 of the ribbon, “Steachen” is displayed in red or black as “A” pattern if the degree of reliability is high. May be Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Also, if the degree of reliability is weak, black letters “Stéchen” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is digested, either one of the stage change strong presentation and the stage change weak presentation may be performed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I9 of the one thousand box is a notice icon imitating a thousand box thrown by the character of the lady towards the peasant, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be a big hit, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a strong degree, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach production, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an instruction to shift (promotion) to strong reach effect with high reliability is performed (reach transition effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notice, and then the highly-reliable strong cut-in notice is executed (notice promotion Production). In addition, if it is a big hit decision, either reach transition production or advance promotion production is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed in addition to the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes, in the case of the big hit confirmation, “Ball behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is high, "promotion" may be displayed in red or black as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is weak, black letters “promotion” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, one of the finalization effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance promotion effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the jackpot reliability is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice notifying in advance that the big hit has been decided, or a premier reach where the big hit is decided (premium effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after reach is displayed, and a resurrection effect that is a big hit is performed (resurrection effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed accompanying to the notice icon I10 of the fan, "blessing" may be displayed. In addition, when the advance notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, either one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the contents to be produced are different depending on the timing at which the fan advance icon I10 is digested, but the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button preview icon I11 is a preview icon imitating the effect button 136, and the jackpot reliability is either the weakest or the jackpot finalized. When one second button preview icon I11 is digested, a button effect for urging the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, when the operation reception period is started and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest display of the second button preview icon I11 is the hat forecast icon I6, the Shuriken forecast icon I7, and the ribbon The corresponding presentation may be performed by changing to any one of the preliminary display icon I 8, the preliminary display icon I 8 of the two-tiered box, and the preliminary display icon I 10 of the fan. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing to any of the notice icons.

  In the present embodiment, when the notice icon before the change changes to the notice icon after the change, the change display of the notice icon is performed. However, the change icon of the notice icon before the change is displayed It is also possible to perform display for deleting the advance notice icon (notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 81 (b): effect of deletion). In this effect, it is informed that the change is out. That is, it is a preliminary notice indicating that it is an outset confirmation pattern. Naturally, reliability is the weakest. In addition, even if the elimination effect is executed, it may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 82 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 82, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a general drawing display device 210, a first special view holding lamp 218, a second special view holding lamp 220, a general drawing A graphic reserve lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 77, and displays the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. It is possible to The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of the game board 200, and is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a notification region during symbol variation of the general drawing, a notification region during symbol variation of the special drawing 1, and a notification region during symbol variation of the special drawing 2. While the symbol of the common figure is stopped, the LED of the area where the rectangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the common figure. While the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, the LED of the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or extinguished while the special figure 1 symbol is fluctuating. While the special figure 2 symbol is stopped, the LED of the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or extinguished while the special figure 2 symbol is changing. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position, but also in display mode (shape in this case), so that the determination can be made only when the player looks at first glance. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 82 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), symbol variation display is performed in the first special view display device 212, and in response to this, in the decoration symbol display device 208, variation display of the decoration symbol is performed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special view 1 is performed. The advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed or may not be displayed as needed.

  Further, in FIG. 82 (1), the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, The two reserved icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are displayed in the default display mode (round no-pattern and white display mode). Although the display of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is omitted in this effect example, the second reserved icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2), when the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, the number of lighting in the first special view holding lamp 218 is increased by one and becomes three. It is shown that the number is three. In addition, a third reserved icon h13 of the special view 1 is also displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1. The third hold is a pre-read target hold, which is a trigger that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon as described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is hatched and shown, but it is actually the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1 It is a display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, in FIG. 82 (4), symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and further, the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 82 (5), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area 280 And the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special view It becomes one second holding icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. This is an effect to be executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  Then, after the main character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (7), the notice icon I6 for the hat held by the user is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (8). An effect display for throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character of the lord YM succeeds in displaying the advance notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notification icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it can be said that it is indicated that the pseudo-series effect will be performed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (11) to FIG. (12), display is performed in which the character YM of the crown pattern is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step.

  In Fig. 83 (14) continued from Fig. 82 (13), the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and further, the fourth symbol is turned off, but the change to the reserved icon or the decorative symbol is It has not happened yet.

  In FIG. 83 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and fluctuates. It becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 83 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of the pre-reading of the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I9 of a box, and a notice icon I10 of a fan.

  Then, after the tomoku character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (17) and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the one-man box is the notice icon third display area The notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as shown in FIG. 82 (10) to FIG. 82 (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the off is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, in FIG. 83 (21), symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and further, the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 83 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and changes to the fluctuation icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 83 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. As shown in FIG. 83 (23), for example, when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two notice icons I6 of hats are displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is preset to preferentially digest the displayed preview icons, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the preview icons. Further, which notice icon to use may be determined randomly, or may be set to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the right. That is, the order of digesting the advance notice icons can be set appropriately as limited to those described above.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "CONTINUE" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo-series effect will be performed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode of the display of the fluctuation icon h0 to the display mode of the advance notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE" at the timing of FIG. 83 (26), and then as shown in FIG. The left symbol and the right symbol are displayed stopped. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left pattern, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right pattern. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  FIG. 84 shows, in stages, the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 83.

  In FIG. 84 (28) continued from FIG. 83 (27), in response to the consumption of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed right The effect display is performed to push up the symbol, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo-series effect may be started. In the present embodiment, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again after the bancho character BC lifts the right symbol, but for example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ As a decoration 1 ′ ′), a reach state may be formed, and reach effect may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the pseudo-series symbol in which the character is represented is The display moving at a low speed is performed from the upper side to the lower side.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. In addition, when the pseudo run pattern is frame-displayed downward without being stopped and displayed, the pseudo run is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the off state is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo x 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decorative 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not been started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (34), the display in which the hat notification icon I6 displayed in the notification icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is moved from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "CONTINUE" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo-series effect will be performed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE" at the timing of FIG. 84 (37), and thereafter the hat is displayed in FIG. In response to the finalization of the notice icon I6, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display is performed to push up the right symbol being stopped and displayed, and the second pseudo-sequence effect is performed. Is notified to the player that there is a possibility that

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the bancho has pushed up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is “decoration 1” The decoration is changed to “2”, and a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208 b, a display in which the pseudo-connected symbol moves at low speed from the upper side to the lower side is performed. At this time, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" is deleted, but the display may be continued. Moreover, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be displayed in another area. Moreover, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the display mode of the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be changed. In this example of production, after the character BC of the Bancho has pushed up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display including the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. In this embodiment, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit as the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested in one time of symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and the pseudo-sequence effect is performed only once, and in the case where the two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-sequence effect is performed twice, the hat It is easy to become a big hit if the two previous notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the two hat announcement icons I6 are digested, and the three hat announcement icons I6 are digested. It can be said that it is easy to become a big hit if three preliminary announcement icons I6 of the hat are digested, in the case where the pseudo-sequence effect is performed three times.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo x 3” is displayed, which indicates that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has been started.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 step by step.

  In FIG. 85 (43) continued from FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbols of “decoration 1” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Here, reach effect is to be started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (44), it develops into the above-described super reach. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed so far in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. Is displayed. The image of the sword sword master of the enemy character is displayed large on the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (44), and the battle battle between the hero of the main character and the sword sword of the enemy character is continued in the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (46), the display in which the notice icons I9 of the one and two box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one-hand box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I9 of the one-man box moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enlarged icon is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. The word "promotion" is displayed as a reminder to shift to a highly reliable presentation. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the one-two box advance notice icon I9 is displayed enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing of FIG. At the timing of 85 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display being executed becomes slightly darker, and a character of the lord appears in the cut-in display, A display is made to turn off the reach effect display in progress, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 85 (50).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability is started. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display “is it too hot” is displayed on the darkened background, FIG. 85 (52) At the timing shown in, the character display "NO" is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (53), the character display of "one blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 is possible, to the player The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (55), as shown in FIG. 85 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased. It is shown that the button reach production has failed.

  In the end, in FIG. 85 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 1".

  FIG. 86 shows, in stages, the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 86 (58) continued from FIG. 85 (57), all including the advance notice icon display area 285 are temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 86 (59), the swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the temporary symbol stop display, display at which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the fourth notice area YA4 of the notice icon is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. . That is, display is performed such that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan advance notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (61). At this time, for example, below the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in an enlarged manner, a letter display of "blessing" may be added to notify that the big hit is determined. In addition, in the case of appending the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after being enlarged.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased at the timing of FIG. 86 (62) and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward. To be displayed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (63), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols that were fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed and re-variation effect is started . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. The notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in reduced size. Ru.

  In the meantime, as shown in FIG. 86 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown in FIG. 86 (66), the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit decision of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special view display device 212, the "special view A", which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern display device 284a, the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special view 1 Is on. Thereafter, although not shown, a big hit game is started after the above-mentioned big hit game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the re-variation effect is executed and becomes a big hit by digesting the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285, but the notice icon I10 of the fan is the notice icon display area When the display is not displayed at 285, the display result of the removal may be derived without performing the re-variation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect performed by digesting the one-two box notice icon I9 is performed and becomes a departure, this reach transfer effect can be said to be a false advance effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if reach transition effect as a false notice of a type corresponding to the last notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is executed, the result of the symbol variation display It can be said that the The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 for the shuriken, and the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I8 for the ribbon.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice effect can be performed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the advance notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the advance notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, although the preview icon is digested only during execution of the symbol variation display which is the target of the preview preview, and the effect corresponding to the digested preview icon is executed, it is the target of the preview preview. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested to execute the effect corresponding to the notice icon. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched notice and the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display to be executed prior to the symbol variation display to be prefetched notice are made different. It may be the same or may be the same.

  Next, another example of the effect of the above-described increase in the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 87 to FIG. 89 are diagrams showing in stages the other effect examples of the increase effect of the advance notice icon. In FIGS. 87 to 89, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  Figs. 87 (8a) to (10a) show other examples of the effects shown in Figs. 82 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 87 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9a-1), the thrown first preview icon I1 of the first crown is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (9a-2), the display shown in FIG. 87 (10a) is performed after the display of the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the advance icon display area 285 exploding is performed. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first tonome who has exploded is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and an effect display is performed in which the tonome character YM is happy to be displayed increasing the notice icon. Also according to this presentation example, the player expects that the presentation corresponding to the hat notification icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 87 (8 b) to (9 b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8 b), effect display is performed in which the first button preview icon I 4 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285 instead of the hat preview icon I 6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9 b), the thrown first button preview icon I 4 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA 1 of the preview icon display area 285. If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button preview icon I4 is displayed in the preview icon display area 285 and before the first button preview icon I4 is digested, the first hallmark's It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2 of the second hall, and the notice icon I3 of the third hall. As described above, in this example of the effect, since the reliability of the big hit indicated by the advance notice icon is difficult to recognize until the effect button 136 is operated, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the reliability of the big hit There are cases where it is possible to improve the stage effect. Note that the period from when the first button preview icon I4 is displayed in the preview icon display area 285 until it is digested may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button advance notice icon I4 is displayed across a plurality of times of symbol variation display, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol Even during the stop display period, the operation of the effect button 136 may be enabled. In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, a notice icon that is to be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated at the time of finishing the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button preview icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136 The effect display corresponding to may be performed. In addition, when the button effect is performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, the first button preview icon may not be changed to another preview icon even if the effect button 136 is operated until the first button preview icon I4 is digested.

  FIGS. 87 (8 c) to (9 c) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8 c), as in the case of FIG. 82 (8), effect display is performed in which the hat forecast icon I 6 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 87 (9 c), it is shown that the hat advance notice icon I 6 does not reach the advance notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the case increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. In addition, a garbled increase presentation may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, as the notice icon with the higher jackpot reliability, the caster increase presentation may be performed more difficult.

  FIGS. 87 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (7d), as in FIG. 82 (7), a state is shown in which the character YM of the lady with the hat advance icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position. After that, in FIG. 87 (8 d), an effect display is performed in which not only one hat notification icon I 6 but also three hat notification icons I 6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notification icon display area 285. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9 d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of the plurality of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of presentation may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (9 d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I 6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. It is also possible to give notice that the jackpot will be decided because it is guaranteed that the effect will be executed three times. Also, a highly reliable notice icon is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and a notice icon with low reliability is easily displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easily stocked). Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d ′), a part or all of the three notice icons I6 of the thrown three hats do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area It is also possible to execute a partial increase increase effect or a full increase increase effect which causes a frame out.

  FIGS. 87 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (7), the character YM of the lady like having a notice icon I9 of one box and a notice icon I10 of a fan in addition to the notice icon I6 of one hat. Is shown moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest degree of reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest degree of reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected may be displayed. You may make it display only. After that, in FIG. 87 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other. For example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9e), the three notice icons thrown in the notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon third display area YA3 of notice icon display area 285 Each will be displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of a plurality of types of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, the expectation for the increase in the number of times of execution of the notice can be improved by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, and the sense of expectation for the execution of a plurality of kinds of notice can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9e ′), a part or all of the thrown three notice icons does not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is also possible to execute a partial increase increase effect or a full increase increase effect which causes a frame out from the left of the area.

  FIGS. 87 (12f-1) to (12f-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in FIG. 87 (12f-1), as in the case of FIG. 82 (12), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the state where the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (12f-2), the decoration symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. Ru. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be performed even in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 88 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8 g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode (the display mode by the character of Sabohani) of the advance notice, the character YM of the ladylike hat is the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon display area 285 There is an effect display that throws in towards the. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the increase presentation of the notice icon even during the execution of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase presentation of the advance notice icon and the advance notice by the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 88 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8 h), the decoration icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the presentation holding lamp 286 is set to a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208) to display the number of reservations. The effect holding lamp 286 is provided with, for example, a full color LED, and is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting according to the default light emission mode (for example, lighting in white) It is possible to perform drive control in an aspect (for example, lighting while switching 7 colors). In FIG. 88 (8h), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is hatched and shown, but in fact, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similar to the hold lamp of, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 88 (8 i) and (9 i-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) and (9). That is, in FIG. 88 (8i), as in the case of FIG. 82 (8), an effect display is performed in which the hat advance icon I6 is thrown toward the advance icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 88 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat advance notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (9i-2), the hat advance notice icon I6 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and the display mode of the prefetch notice. The effect display (hold change effect) changing to is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat advance notice icon I6 may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the advance notice by the hold icon. Note that the on-hold change presentation may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat advance notice icon I6. For example, the on-hold change presentation may be less likely to be performed as the notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 89 (9i-2 ′), the decoration symbol display device 208 does not display the variation icon display area 280 and the reserve icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and is placed on hold using the presentation hold lamp 286 In the case of displaying the number, the light emission mode of the hold lamp of the first special drawing 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the preview advance notice after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area.

  FIGS. 88 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8j), unlike FIG. 82 (8). It is shown that the character BY of the DJ having the notice icon, not the character YM of the lord, appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat announcement icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (9 j), the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, and the notice icon I 6 of the hat it holds is the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display will be performed. The number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the increase effect of the advance notice icon by one DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the advance notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and a second advance icon increase effect by the character BY of the DJ). By configuring, there are cases where it is possible to diversify the effects and enhance the effects.

  FIGS. 88 (8 k) to (9 k) show other effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8 k) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8k), the DJ character appears with a box of notice icons I9. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (9k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lady is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icons I 9 of the one thousand boxes are placed in the notice icon second display area YA 2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ′), the DJ character passes the back side of the notice icon by arranging it on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as it is. In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ′ ′), the character BY of the DJ is a thousand-piece box so that it is superimposed on the notice icon I6 of the hat which is thrown by the character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, the overwrite effect of the advance notice icon may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 88 (12 l) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 88 (12 l), the letter notations respectively corresponding to the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed together. For example, the letter of "continuation" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon I9 of the two-piece box displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. The word “promotion” is displayed as a note on the screen, and the word “blessing” is shown as a note on the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed on the notice icon third display area YA3. In the notice icon I7 of the Shuriken displayed in the area YA4, the letter "Chan eyes" is additionally displayed, and in the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, "Steachen" is displayed. In the notice icon I6 of the hat that the text is displayed as a note and displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, the question The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect for which the execution is predicted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (12l ') and the same figure (12l' '), part or all of the characters additionally displayed on the advance notice icon are set as "question marks" to clarify the corresponding advance notice effect. It may not be displayed on the screen. This makes it possible to give expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is to be executed, which may improve interest.

  Further, it may be possible to give notice that the effect display in which the big hit is decided is executed by the combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of the notice icons displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in (12l ′ ′ ′), when three hat notification icons I6 with the word “continuation” attached are displayed in the three notification icon display area 285, four times of the simulation in which the big hit is determined It may be notified that effect display including a series of effects will be performed. If the letter added to the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, if the letter “promotion” is added to the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat The result of the symbol variation display at the time of being digested may be a premier notice display that gives notice that the result is a big hit (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the example of presentation described above, the announcement icon is increased by the appearance of the character BY of the character YM or DJ of the lord, but in the example of presentation shown in FIG. It is something to do.

  In FIG. 89 (A1), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

  After the reach effect starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (A2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 89 (A2), the notice icon icon of the hat imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat is stopped and displayed. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon symbol of this hat, the wording of "stock" is appended, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the notice icon is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (A3), a display for changing the notice icon icon of the hat to the notice icon I6 of the hat and moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a display result of detachment. In this embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 89 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 89 (A1), the decoration symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. , Production of normal reach is started.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first notice icon pattern simulating the first notice icon I1 of the first hall is stopped and displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the letter "stock" is added to the first notice icon pattern of the first lady, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, whereby the notice icon display area is displayed. In 285, it is notified that the notice icon is displayed in an increased number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (B3), the display for changing the notice icon symbol of the first hallmark to the notice icon I1 of the first hall and moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 Is performed, and as shown in FIG. 89 (B4), the decoration symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is "off". At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lady has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It goes without saying that the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 of the hat, but may be another kind of notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol variation display is being executed, for example, the notice icon may change during the execution of the symbol variation display after the next time, or the notice You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In this embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of effect of the above-described advance notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 90 to FIG. 93 are diagrams showing in stages the other presentation examples of the advance notice icon digested presentation. In FIGS. 90 to 93, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 90 (38m)-(40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 84 (38)-(40). In FIG. 90 (38 m) to FIG. (39 m), the same effect as in FIG. 84 (38) to FIG. (39) is performed, but in FIG. 90 (40 m-1), the middle symbol display area 208 b is slow The variable display appears and the pseudo run symbol appears, but then, as shown in FIG. 90 (40 m-2), the variable display becomes high-speed just before the pseudo run symbol becomes the stop display position of the decoration symbol, and the pseudo run symbol Is scrolled out below the display area, and as shown in FIG. 90 (40 m-3), the display of temporary stop is displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed. The stop display is notified that the result is out. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 90 (23 n) to (24 n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23 n), the display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started, but as shown in FIG. 90 (24 n), the notice icon 16 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. Alternatively, a display may be performed that is erased as it is, and it may be notified that the digested effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 90 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23o), the display in which the hat notification icon I6 is digested is started, and the hat notification icon I6 is enlarged at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (24o-1). As shown in FIG. 90 (24o-2), the combination of the decorative symbols of the outset (FIG. 90 (24o-2) indicates that “decoration 1—decoration 2” as shown in FIG. 90 (24o-2). -Display of temporary stop display by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then stop display and it is informed that it is the result of out. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 90 (22p) to (23p) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the far left side of the notice icon display area 285 (notice icon in FIG. 90 (23p) An effect may be performed in which the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1) is digested. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 90 (23p), an effect is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one-man box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested. Thus, in the present embodiment, there may be cases where the advance notice icon is not digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons stored later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be hard to be a big hit. In addition, regardless of the order of stock, the digest order of the notice icons may be determined. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may not be affected, and the digest order of the notice icons changes depending on the digest order of the notice icons. You may do it. Further, it may be possible to give notice that the big hit will be decided by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, for example, a notice icon I6 of a hat, a shuriken A rule may be set in which the big hit is determined when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order. As a result, an incentive for the player to find the rule of the digest order of the notice icon to be a big hit works, and the player's motivation may be improved.

  FIG. 90 (24q-1) to FIG. 90 (24q-2) show another example of effect of the effect shown in FIG. 83 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are respectively moved to the left side You may At this time, for example, a moving animation may be performed to move the display position of the advance notice icon to the left, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing at which the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is changed may be simultaneous with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. It may be after the digest presentation of the advance notice icon is started, or after the finish production of the advance notice icon is ended.

  FIGS. 91 (Aa) to (Ae) show an example of effect when an increase effect of the advance notice icon is performed after the advance effect of the advance notice icon is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing indicated by 91 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and it is informed that it is the display result of the off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ac), after the suspension is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ad), the increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM of the lord is line When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ae), the notice icon No. 3 becomes blank because the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, a notice icon may be displayed to be displayed in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested.

  FIG. 91 (B) shows an example of effect in the case where the notice icon is increased after a plurality of blank spaces are generated in the notice icon display area due to the plurality of notice icons being digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and then the character YM of the tousame character is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Among them, it is displayed in order from the left side. In this way, display may be performed to increase the notice icon. In the case where there are a plurality of blank spaces in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. Moreover, in this example of presentation, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed, but depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of displayed advance notice icons are different. For example, when the notice icon increasing in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 on the right side among the display areas which are blank in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, at least six notice icons are notice icons. It may indicate that it is displayed in the display area 285, and may also indicate that the jackpot reliability is the highest.

  FIG. 91 (C) shows an example of effect in the case where the digestion effect of the advance notice icon and the increase effect of the advance notice icon are executed during one execution of the symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), during the effect that the hat advance icon I6 displayed in the advance icon first display area YA1 of the advance icon display area 285 is being digested, An increase is produced for the notice icon by the character YM, and it is displayed that the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display is performed. In this manner, the staging effect of the advance notice icon and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may be performed during the execution of one pattern variation display. At this time, there may be a case in which the period in which the preliminary effect icon is performed and the period in which the preliminary effect icon is performed overlap with each other. In addition, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the end effect of the notice icon is started, or the end effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon The staging effect and the increasing effect of the advance notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area which is blank at the start of the symbol change display, or after the symbol change display is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be an area scheduled to be blank before being started.

  FIG. 91 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 91 (59r), the effect of asking whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed before the digesting effect of the notice icon is started. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether the notice icon that is the target of digestion starts to fluctuate or not, and whether the notice icon is digested or not I am trying to scold me. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. If not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the display of the notice icon may be maintained and the digest of the notice icon may be suspended. In the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased without being digested, the stop display is then performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the off, and the display result of the off is displayed. You may alert that.

  91 (59 s) to 60 (60 s) show another example of effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 86 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 91 (59s), in the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, one-and-a-half box notice icons I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed. Of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1". When I10 is digested, it will be a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 91 (60s), when another notice icon (eg, hat notice icon I6) is digested, it will be left as it is. It may be notified that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of.

  FIGS. 91 (23t) to (32t) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (23t), in this example of presentation, in the notice icon display area 285, an in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying a digested notice icon is added. As shown in FIG. 91 (23t) to (25t), when the staging effect of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digest notification icon display area YA0. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is continuously displayed after being digested as shown in FIG. 91 (28t) to FIG. It will continue to be displayed until the end of). The timing at which the display of the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is started may be after the start of the preparation of the notice icon, or even before the start of the preparation of the notice icon. It may be simultaneous with the start of the digest presentation of the advance notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the digest notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted may be after the end of the end effect of the notice icon, or even before the end of the end effect of the notice icon. It may be good, it may be simultaneous with the end of the digestion production of a notice icon, may be after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon finished It may be, may be simultaneous with the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is started, or may be It may be simultaneous with the end of the corresponding effect, or it may be deleted at the end of symbol variation where the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure) or during digestion When the notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, in FIG. 85 (44), the notice icon display area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased, or only the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one pattern change display, the notice icon a in the notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A which is first digested is a digest of the notice icon A. It may be erased after the end of the rendering or with the end, and there may be no preview icon displayed in the digest preview icon display area YA0, or the digest rendering of the preview icon B to be digested next is started It may be erased after being displayed simultaneously or when it is displayed, or it may be erased after it is displayed simultaneously with or when it is displayed. For example, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, super reach effect or big hit effect, simultaneous effect on islands, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, and a notice is given during digestion The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be erased and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the during-digestion advance notice icon display area YA0 may be erased.

  FIG. 92 (Aa) to FIG. 92 (Ae) show an example of effect in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are simultaneously digested. That is, in FIG. 92 (Aa), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. The ribbon preview icon I8 is displayed, and the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in the fourth preview area YA4. Then, among these notice icons, the notice icons of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are respectively digested The production is started. Here, the start timings of the digest and presentation of each advance notice icon may be simultaneous or different. In this case, the digest order of the advance notice icons may be set to correspond to the execution order of the effects.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. . Specifically, the character display of "CONTINUED" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "STECHEN" is added near the lower part of the notification icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, stage change presentation is started in response to the consumption of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ac), after the closing of the shoji character and the character CH of Princess Chibi appears on the front side, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ad), the shoji opens and the moon The display of the background (moon surface background) showing how the space is viewed from the surface is started. In addition, during the execution of stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 Move to and zoom out.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ae), the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size is enlarged at the center of the display area and displayed, and then, in response to the digest of the notice icon I6 of the hat, Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and effects are displayed to push up the stopped right symbol, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo connected effect will be executed thereafter. .

  In this example of presentation, a plurality of effects corresponding to the digested advance notice icon are different in start timing, but may be simultaneously started.

  FIG. 92 (66u-1) to FIG. 92 (66u-3) show another example of rendering of the rendering shown in FIG. 86 (66). That is, in FIG. 92 (66u-1), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", and it is notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed It has been shown that there is a warning icon that has been and yet has not been digested. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (66 u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (66 u-3), even after the round game of the big hit is started, undigested continues The notice icon is displayed. In the example of the effect, the advance notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during execution of the big hit game, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undivided notice icon may be used, for example, as a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, a effect for notifying that it is a probability change big hit decision, etc.), for example, FIG. In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during execution of the big hit game, a notification that it is a definite variation big hit decision is given, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested May be notified that it is a 15R big hit decision. In addition, when other advance notice icons are digested, for example, it may be made to have a meaning indicating that there is a possibility of promotion. As described above, even if the same advance notice icon is digested during the execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. That is, you may prepare a notice icon specific to a big hit. Also, the notice icon displayed during the big hit game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, or only some notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 92 (Ba) to FIG. 92 (Bc) are display examples before and after stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop indication is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". When the display is started, stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 92 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, although the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, all notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage change is performed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or even if it is not deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 92 (22 v-1) to (23 v) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22 v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 92 (22 v-2), the character YM2 with the placard appears and is digested The type of notice icon is notified in advance. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (23 v), the digest presentation of the notice icon is started, in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is digested. In addition, even if advance notification of the type of notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, and a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested. It may be done. If a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may indicate that the jackpot is highly reliable.

  FIG. 92 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22 w), after the symbol variation display is started, the player is made to pay attention to the digestion of the notice icon by highlighting the notice icon which may be digested or the like. It is also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, by digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character Banccho BC appears and the pseudo-series effect is executed, and the other effect is not executed. The effect corresponding to is performed, and other effects are not performed, for example, the character BC of the leader does not appear although the preliminary icon I6 of the hat is digested, and the character of the princess appears The jackpot may be determined in such a manner that the jackpot is determined when the effect not corresponding to the digested advance notice icon is executed (so-called, the rule collapse) such that the jackpot is settled by the jackpot.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and can not be selected by the player, but for example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. It may be selectable.

  Also, if a big hit occurs while the previous notice icon is displayed in the previous notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the previous notice icon is carried over when transitioning to a definite change state or time saving state. It may be configured not to be. Also, when a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, once the big hit game is started, it is temporarily not displayed, and is displayed again after the definite change state or the time saving state is finished. It may be configured as follows. In addition, it may be configured not to carry over even after the definite change state or the short time state ends.

  Next, a rendering example will be described in which the content of reach rendering to be shifted thereafter is previewed according to the type of preview icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Aa), when "decorative 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-1), the enlarged character BC2 of the screen leader is displayed. It appears, and then it shifts to the reach of the leader corresponding to the character that has appeared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-2), when the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-2), the enlarged display of the character YM3 of the lord. It appears, and then, it shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-3), when the fan's notice icon I10 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-3), the enlarged princess character HM is displayed. It appears and then transitions to Princess Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. In addition, in this production example, it corresponds to the reliability of the big hit that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the big hit of these reach production is constituted in order of princess reach> toll you reach> bancho reach There is. It should be noted that if a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a so-called character of enlarged display appears after the notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested) (a so-called law break has occurred) May be configured to determine a big hit. In addition, a plurality of preview icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may be displayed corresponding to the plurality of preview icons to be executed. In addition, a unique effect (digestion-specific effect) for digesting a plurality of preview icons may be executed, and it is a big hit if the plurality of preview icons are digested rather than the single preview icon is digested. May be configured to be highly reliable.

  Next, a button effect to be executed after the second button preview icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ba), a second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. 93 At the timing shown in (Bb), the display in which the second button preview icon I11 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the second button preview icon I11 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 is moved from the preview icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button preview icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter as shown in FIG. 93 (Bc). It informs that it is possible to accept the operation, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another rendering example of the button rendering performed after the second button preview icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ca), a second button preview icon I11 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described button reach effect is performed, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (Cb), the display in which the second button preview icon I11 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the second button preview icon I11 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 is moved from the preview icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button preview icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 93 (Cc). As a result, the effect button 136 changes to a protruding button image 136b that is displayed in a protruding manner. That is, it is shown that the jackpot has been promoted to a higher button reach effect.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 94 is a view showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 95 in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 97 is a drawing showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 step by step.

  In FIGS. 94 (1) to 95 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon is the notice icon I6 of the hat changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lady. Since this embodiment is the same as FIGS. 82 (1) to 83 (14) except for the points, the description here is omitted. Further, with regard to the effects performed between FIG. 95 (14) and FIG. 95 (20), all of the notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon have been changed to the notice icon I 1 of the first tonome. Except for FIG. 83 (15) to FIG. 83 (19).

  In FIG. 95 (20), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the result of the detachment is definitively displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 95 (21), symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and furthermore, the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the reserved icon and the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 95 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and changes to the fluctuation icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the first icon of the first president's announcement is digested is started. That is, display is performed such that the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), for example, when a plurality of the same notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four first notice icons I1 are displayed. Although it is preset to preferentially digest the notice icons displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icons. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right may be preferentially digested. That is, the order of digesting the advance notice icon is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. As shown at 95 (25), below the notice icon I 6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of “continuation” is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the character display of "CONTINUED" attached to the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (26) and the notice icon of the hat After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be redisplayed at the original position. Note that when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, it may be displayed so as to be recognizable, for example, the display area in which the digested notice icon is displayed. It may be grayed out, or text information "Done" may be added. Alternatively, after the digested notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be deleted.

  Thereafter, as for the effect contents shown in FIG. 95 (27) to FIG. 96 (33), the digested hat announcement icon I 6 is displayed in the announcement icon first display area YA 1, and the announcement icon second display area YA 2-announcement icon This is the same as FIG. 83 (27) to FIG. 84 (33) except that all of the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the first notice icon I1 of the first lady. Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (34), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first martial arts displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is moved from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 96 (36), below the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of "CONTINUED" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the character display of "CONTINUED" attached to the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (37) and the notice icon of the hat After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as for the effect contents shown in FIG. 96 (38) to FIG. (45), the notice icon I 6 of the hat having been digested is displayed on the notice icon first display area YA 1 and the notice icon second display area YA 2 respectively. 84 (38) to 85 (with the exception that all of the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA 3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA 4 have been changed to the first hallmark notice icon I 1. This is the same as 45), so the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (46), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first martial arts displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, display is performed such that the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is moved from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the one-by-two box notice icon I9 at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (47) and is enlarged and displayed. Above the displayed notice icons I9 of the two-tiered box, a letter display of "promotion" is displayed as a notice of anticipating the transition to the rendering with a higher degree of reliability. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the one-two box advance notice icon I9 is displayed enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the one and two boxes is deleted and the notice icon I9 of one and the two boxes is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. Then, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. In the present rendering example, when reach transition rendering is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after rendering is displayed such that a power failure has occurred, strong reach with high reliability The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in the present effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (50-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display "is a chance" on the darkened background At the timing shown in FIG. 97 (50-2), character display "NO" is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (51), after the character display of “Is it too hot?” Is performed, character display of “No” is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (53), the character display of "one blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 is possible, to the player The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (55), as shown in FIG. 97 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a, as shown in FIG. It is shown that the button reach production has failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 97 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

  In FIG. 97 (58), everything including the advance notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 97 (59), the swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the temporary symbol stop display, the display shown in FIG. 97 (60) is a display in which the notice icon I1 of the first condolence icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is digested. It is started. That is, display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (61) and is enlarged. At this time, for example, below the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in an enlarged manner, a letter display of "blessing" may be added to notify that the big hit is determined. In addition, in the case of appending the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after being enlarged.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the notice icon I10 of the fan is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 98 (62), the original display position, ie, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. A display for moving to YA4 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (63), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols that were fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed and re-variation effect is started . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in reduced size. Ru.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 98 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown in FIG. 98 (66), the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit decision of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special view display device 212, the "special view A", which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern display device 284a, the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special view 1 Is on. Thereafter, although not shown, a big hit game is started after the above-mentioned big hit game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the effect of the above-described advance notice icon increase effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 99 to FIG. 101 are diagrams showing in stages the other effect examples of the increase effect of the advance notice icon. In FIGS. 99 to 101, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 99 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the third hallmark notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first hallmark notice icon I1. In addition, it can carry out similarly about the preliminary announcement icon I2 of a 2nd lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (9a), the thrown third hallmark notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 99 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8b), as in FIG. 94 (8), an effect display is performed in which the first condolence's preview icon I1 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9b), it is shown that the first condolence's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to carry out the case increase effect using the notice icon of the lord.

  FIGS. 99 (8c) to (9c) show other effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8c), an effect display is performed in which not only one notice icon I1 of the first hallmark but also three first hallmark notice icons I1 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 at the same time. ing. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (9c), the three first dunning notice icons I1 being thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon They are respectively displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of the plurality of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of presentation may be enhanced. In addition, a highly reliable advance notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third hallmark) is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (it is difficult to be stocked), and a notice icon of low reliability (for example, first hallmark manner The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (is likely to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285 or vice versa. In this example of presentation, the same notice icon (the first notice icon I1 of the first temple) is increased by three, but a plurality of notice icons with different degrees of reliability may be simultaneously increased, for example, Alternatively, the first toll notice icon I1 and the third toll notice icon I3 may be simultaneously increased.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 99 (9c '), a part or all of the three first hallmark notice icons I1 that have been thrown do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is also possible to execute the partial gasse increase effect or the entire gasse increase effect in which the frame is out from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

  FIG. 99 (8e) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode (the display mode by the character of Sabohani) of the pre-reading notice, the character YM of the lady liker notices the first notice icon I1 of the first lady. An effect display for throwing toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the increase presentation of the notice icon even during the execution of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase presentation of the advance notice icon and the advance notice by the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 99 (8f) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8f), the decoration symbol display device 208 does not display the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, and the number of holdings is displayed by the effect holding lamp 286. In FIG. 99 (8f), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is hatched and shown, but in fact, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similar to the hold lamp of, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 99 (8g) to (9g-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8 g), as in the case of FIG. 94 (8), an effect display in which the first condolence's preview icon I1 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9g-1), it is shown that the first condolence's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (9g-2), the first hallmark notice icon I1 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, and the prefetch notice is displayed. The effect display (hold change effect) is changed to the display mode of. That is, in the present embodiment, the first hallmark notice icon I1 may not be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 as a notice icon, and may appear as a trigger of the start of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the on-hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the first tonosama's notice icon I1. For example, the on-hold change effect is less likely to be executed as the notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability. Good.

  FIGS. 99 (12h-1) to (12h-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in FIG. 99 (12h-1), as in FIG. 94 (12), the decorative symbol is displayed in a state where the first hallmark notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The variable display of is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (12h-2), the decoration symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. Ru. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be performed even in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIGS. 100 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8i), unlike FIG. 94 (8). It is shown that the character BY of the DJ having the notice icon, not the character YM of the lord, appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first grandchild's notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (9i), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first hallmark notice icon I1 held by the first hallmark icon of the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. An effect display to be placed in the display area YA1 is performed. The number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the increase effect of the advance notice icon by one DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the advance notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and a second advance icon increase effect by the character BY of the DJ). By configuring, there are cases where it is possible to diversify the effects and enhance the effects.

  FIGS. 100 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8j) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8j), the character BY of DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9j), the first condolence notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 and While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first hallmark icon I1 held by the character BY is placed in the second notice area YA2 of the second notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 100 (9j '), the rear side of the notice icon is arranged by arranging the DJ character BY in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. You may display as passing.

  FIGS. 100 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ further having the notice icon It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third hallmark notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9 k), after the first condolences notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon of the foremost icon displayed on the announcement icon first display area YA1 being thrown by the foreword's character YM while having the third icon of foretelling icon I3 possessed by the character BY The effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the preview icon I3 of the third lord in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the preview icon I1. That is, an effect of promoting the game may be performed by overwriting the low-reliability notice icon of the big hit on the high-reliability notice icon of the big hit. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, this promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by the symbol variation display of multiple times. Further, the promotion effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed.

  FIG. 100 (12 l) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 100 (12 l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the letter notation of “question mark” attached thereto. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first hallmark is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second hallmark is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area The first hallmark notice icon I1 is displayed on YA3, the second hallmark notice icon I2 is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the third hallmark icon is displayed on the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first temple is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of "question mark" is added thereto. According to this presentation example, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the notice icon after change.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (121 '), the type of the notice icon after the change may be notified by a letter notation for the notice icon before the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first statue displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second statue displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth The second hallmark notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 has the text of “question mark” appended and can not recognize the notice icon after change, but the notice icon third display area The notice of “Chan eyes” is added to the notice icon I1 of the first tonome displayed on YA3 to be notified that it changes to the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and displayed on the notice icon fifth display area YA5 In the notice icon I3 of the third tonnage being held, the wording “continuation” is appended and it is notified that it will be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. The notice of the first condolence icon I1 displayed in the icon sixth display area YA6 is appended with the text of “question mark” together with “continuation” and it is notified that it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat There is. These letter notations may be notified at once for all or part of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (12 l ′ ′), all or part of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are made notice icons after the change, and the notice icons after the change are displayed. The corresponding letter notation may be added only for things.

  FIGS. 101 (8m-1) to (9m) show other effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101 (8 m-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the one-two box notice icon I9. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8 m−2), after the first condolence notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 101 (9 m), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the one thousand boxes possessed is thrown by the character YM of the dojo and the notice icon first display area An effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the notice icon I9 of the one-man box in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1 of the first statue displayed on YA1. According to this presentation example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten on the notice icon after the change. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, this overwrite production may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by multiple times of symbol variation display. Also, the overwrite effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed.

  FIGS. 101 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the character BY of DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8n-2), a notice icon I9 of a box of one thousand boxes thrown by the character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at a timing shown in FIG. As shown in 9n), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon of the first hallmark icon I1 possessed is thrown by the character YM of the hallmark and the first icon area of the notice icon An effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the first condolence's preview icon I1 in the preview icon first display area YA1 in such a manner as to overlap the preview icon I9 of the one thousand box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, this overwrite production may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by multiple times of symbol variation display. Also, the overwrite effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed. Also, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lady) is digested, the notice icon after the change is the notice icon before overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of the first and second boxes) May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured that the reliability of the jackpot may be higher if digesting the notification icon after overwriting rather than the warning icon before overwriting is digested, or the reliability of the jackpot is configured to be lower. It may be configured such that the jackpot reliability does not change.

  Next, an example of the effect of changing the advance notice icon will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the effect example in which the notice icon changes in stages. In FIG. 102, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Note that these two hold icons are both in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of pre-reading and hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold The aspect is the same. In addition, the first icon of the first on the notice icon I1 is displayed in the first notice area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and in the second notice area of the notice icon YA2, the third notice icon I3 of the third on earth Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the character YM2 of the statuette who held the placard appears during the change display of the decorative symbol. In this placard, the wording "change" is attached, and it is predicted that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon changes.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, as shown in FIG. 102 (B1), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to a notice icon I9 of a box of 1,000. Note that the display mode of the first hallmark's preview icon I1 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both of the preview icons may be changed. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 102 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Change to Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, or any display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0 May change. As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect being performed, the hold is not performed. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, although the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, it is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Note that these two hold icons are both in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of pre-reading and hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold The aspect is the same. In addition, the first icon of the first on the notice icon I1 is displayed in the first notice area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and in the second notice area of the notice icon YA2, the third notice icon I3 of the third on earth Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a Chibi princess chance effect is performed. Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-described spread map fluctuating game is executed. Chibi Princess Chance production is a production imitating Amida lottery, and the character of Chibi princess chooses one from five starting points, moves along the route of Amida from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point It is to predict that an effect corresponding to the indicated icon is to be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it predicts that the wing member 2321 of the second special view starting opening 232 will be long open, and the "super hot" If it reaches the goal point where the character notation is shown, it indicates that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and if it reaches the goal point where the cross icon is shown In advance, it is predicted that the fluctuation display result of the common drawing is out.

  Furthermore, in the present rendering example, when reaching the goal point where the grandchild's preview icon is shown, as shown in FIG. 102 (D1), of the preview icons before the change displayed in the preview icon display area 285. At least one of the changes to the notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third lady who has been displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the one-man box. Note that the display mode of the first hallmark's preview icon I1 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both of the preview icons may be changed.

  In addition, when the character of Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 102 (D2), at least one of the default icons in the default display mode in the pending icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed. One changes to the display mode of the advance notice. For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 102 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, or any display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0 May change.

  As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect being performed, the hold is not performed. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case of power failure / power recovery while the advance notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 103 is a view showing in stages the display example in the case of power failure / power recovery while the advance notice icon is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Of the two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a default display. It is an aspect. In the notice icon display area 285 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of a fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 103 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 103 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the instantaneous power recovery. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (C), the character display "Restore while please wait for a while" is displayed. At this time, the first special view display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the symbol variation display is ended, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays “special view I” which is a display result of detachment. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the display is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment. Then, when power failure / power recovery is performed, any notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased. Further, when power failure / power recovery is performed, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, also becomes the default display mode. In this embodiment, when power failure / power recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “not determined” information. It may be configured to be Here, when there is at least one pending message including "not determined" information in the sub-command including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, "not determined" information is included. It is possible not to give the advance notice including the end effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon until all the pending items are consumed. Also, no pre-reading advance notice is given for a newly increased pending after power-off / power recovery (the pre-reading result is saved), and pre-reading advance notice is given after all the pendings containing “not determined” information are digested However, with regard to a newly increased suspension after power failure / power recovery, it may be possible to make a prefetching notice before the suspension including the “not determined” information is digested.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 step by step. In FIGS. 104 to 105, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 104, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIG. 104 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 82 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed large in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c at the center of the display screen. This is different from FIG. 82 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display area is formed above the reserved icon display area 281 and the 3-digit second decorative symbol is displayed small. The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured to continue the variation of any of the symbol patterns of the symbol row until the determination is stopped after the variation starts.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. Here, unlike the character shown in FIG. 82 (6), the character YM of the lord has a notice icon I21 of "house" in which the characters "house" are circled.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (3), after the character YM of the lady moved to the predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (4), the notice icon I21 of the "house" possessed is displayed as a notice icon An effect display for throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (5), the thrown notice icon I21 of "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (6) On the decorative symbol display device 208, effect display is performed in which the character of the majesty character YM succeeds in displaying the advance notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, by displaying the notice icon I21 of "house" in the notice icon display area 285, it can be at least suggested that a family crest effect described later may be performed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (7) to FIG. 8 (8), a display is performed in which the character YM of the crown pattern is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the off is decided. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are respectively moved by movement animation. The hold icon displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes a change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is a special view 1 Of the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of the pre-reading of the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character of the royal crown YM has a notice icon I22 of "print" in which the characters of "print" are circled.

  Then, after the tomoku character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (12), the notice icon I22 of the “print” held by the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing towards the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (14), the thrown notice icon I 22 of “print” is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA 2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, after the same effect display as that of FIG. 104 (6) is performed, the same effect display as that of FIG. 104 (7) to FIG. 104 (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the off is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decorative 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c respectively, and the reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (19) following FIG. 104 (18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon A display in which the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of "home" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and Display moving to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the notice icon second display area YA2 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print" are digested. The timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the digest of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the digest of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. In addition, the timing to start moving of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" may be simultaneous, or the movement start of notice icon I21 of "house" is notice icon I22 of "print" The movement start of the notice icon I22 of "print" may be earlier than the movement start of the notice icon I21 of "house".

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in 21), a family crest 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest on which an effect image to that effect is displayed A fall effect is performed. In addition, at this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (22), it develops into a super reach (a sword reach). In addition, since the presentation content of a swordsman reach is as having shown in FIG. 77-FIG. 79 and having mentioned above, the description here is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding notice effect (family crest fall effect) is performed by digesting the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”). Is configured. In addition, even if these advance notice icons are digested, there may be cases where the family crest fall effect is not performed, or there may be cases where other effects are performed. Further, when the family crest fall effect is performed, it may be promised to be a big hit in the symbol variation display, or there may be a case of losing. Further, the case in which the family crest fall effect is performed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the family crest fall effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display serving as a big hit may be configured such that the family crest falling effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display serving as a loss. In addition, it is easier for the symbol variation display that is a big hit to be more easily digested by the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print") than the symbol change display May be configured.

  FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 are diagrams showing in stages the other presentation examples of the advance notice icon digested presentation. In FIGS. 106 to 107, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In FIG. 106 (a1), unlike in FIG. 104 (5), the notice icon I22 of “print” appears before the notice icon I21 of “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and thereafter As shown in FIG. 106 (a2), the notice icon I21 of "house" appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a3), it is displayed in the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the "home" being used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and Display moving to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the advance notice icon second display area YA2 is performed. In addition, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the reach state by "decoration 1" is formed, and the reach production is started.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I22 for "print" and the notice icon I21 for "house" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1). Ru. At this time, the display order is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order in which the "houses" and "prints" are arranged), not the order in which the "prints" and "houses" are arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of the "print" and the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be enlarged in the arrangement order of the "print" and the "house". In this effect example, even if it is shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1) or in the case shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the above-described family crest fall effect is performed thereafter. For example, when the advance notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of the "house" and "print" (ie, the correct arrangement order), the family crest falling effect is performed, and the arrangement order of the "print" and "house" (ie, When the advance notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the incorrect arrangement order, the family crest fall effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of "mon" and "house", it is more difficult for the family crest fall presentation to be started than in the case where the advance icons are enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of "house" and "mon". May be configured.

  FIG. 106 (b 1) to FIG. 106 (b 6) show another effect form of the family crest fall effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b1), in the state where only the notice icon I21 of "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, "print" It is shown that the user is digested without waiting for the notice icon I22 of the warning icon to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106 (b3), The object 224B descends slightly from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the front side of a part of the notice icon display area 285 disposed at the top of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, It operates as if it vibrates in the direction (stirring operation). At this time, in the center upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "in preparation for family crest preparation" is performed indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest fall effect will be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 And, the hall effect production has been started. At this time, the character YM of the lord has the notice icon I22 of "print". Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b4), when the character YM of the lady moves to the predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I22 of "print" is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the off-set display result is determined. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. The notice icon I22 of "print" remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest 224B is once retracted to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol has been determined and stopped, but it is not retracted to the initial position, and the crawling operation is continued. It is also good. On the other hand, the character display of "in preparation for family crest" is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 106 (b6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the family crest 224B that has been evacuated descends again and restarts the whistle operation. In this effect example, for example, when the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, for example, the family crest 224B is lowered, as shown in FIG. The family crest falling effect shown in (21) is performed. It should be noted that there may be a case where the family crest falling effect is not performed because the notice icon I22 of "print" is not digested. Further, in FIG. 106 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" may be displayed in an enlarged state until the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed later is digested. At that time, the notice icon I22 of "print" may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  FIG. 106 (c1) to FIG. 106 (c2-3) show another example of the presentation of the advance notice icon consumption effect. In this presentation example, it is shown that a background notice whose background changes is given by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of "don" in which the characters "ten" are circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. And the notice icon I32 of "hime", in which the character of "hime" is circled, is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I33 of "爺", in which the character of "爺" is circled, is displayed It is displayed in the icon third display area YA3.

  FIG. 106 (c2-1) shows the state of the background display after the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which the face of the eyebrows has been uploaded from the left side of the display screen, and A background display in which the uploaded image and the image in which the face of the princess is uploaded are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are all digested, the reliability to the jackpot in the symbol variation display Is configured to display a background display indicating that is the highest. Also, three preview icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability for the big hit may be made different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. "Predictive icon I32> It may be made most reliable if it is digested in the order of" notice "predictive icon I33, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability against the big hit can be set appropriately .

  Also, in FIG. 106 (c2-2), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺", the notice icon I32 of "hime" and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which the princess's face is up from the left side of the display screen, and the face of the wolf A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two notice icons out of three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display is displayed to indicate that the reliability to the jackpot in is relatively high, but the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the notice icon I32 for "Hime" and the notice icon I33 for "爺" among the three notice icons are digested, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The notice icon I31 of "" and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of "To" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" may be digested. Also, the reliability for the big hit may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested, for example, if the notice icon I31 of "Tono" and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" are digested, "Tono" The big hit reliability is higher than when the notice icon I31 for the notice, the notice icon I33 for the "爺", the notice icon I32 for the "hime", and the notice icon I33 for the "爺" are digested, and the notice icon I31 for the "don" And when the notice icon I33 of "爺" is digested, the jackpot may have higher reliability than when the notice icon I32 of "hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested. These can be set as appropriate.

  Also, in FIG. 106 (c2-3), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime", and the notice icon I33 of "爺", only the notice icon I33 of "爺" It shows the appearance of the background display after digestion of. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background in which the image with the face of the eyebrows up is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The reliability to the jackpot in is configured to display a background indication indicating that it is less reliable than if the two advance notice icons were digested. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I33 of “33” is digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the notice icon I31 of “「 ”is digested and It is good, and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" may be digested. Also, the reliability for the big hit may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested, for example, when the notice icon I31 of "Tono" is digested, the notice of the notification icon I32 of "Hime" or the notice of "爺" The jackpot confidence is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the jackpot confidence is higher than when the "hime" notice icon I32 is digested if the "hime" notice icon I32 is digested. These may be set appropriately, though they may be set as appropriate.

  Moreover, although this example demonstrated about the example in which all the three advance notice icons are displayed, only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the type of the notice icon to be displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Tono" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "hime" or "爺" The big hit reliability is higher than when the previous notice icon I33 is displayed, and when the previous notice icon I32 of "Hime" is displayed, the higher hit reliability than when the previous notice icon I33 of "爺" is displayed If the notice icon I31 of "Toen" and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "Toen" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" may be displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are displayed, and the notice icon I31 of "殿" and "爺" are displayed. If the notification icon I33 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the notification icon I32 for "Hime" and the notification icon I33 for "爺" are displayed, but these may be set as appropriate. can do.

  Further, in this example of the effect, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but the background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, it may be notified that the big hit has been decided as a so-called broken law.

  In addition, when displaying three notice icons, one notice icon may be displayed in one symbol change display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time symbol change display is performed You may In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the order of display.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the notice icon I31 of "Toen" is digested, the character of Tonosama appears and Toe Reach is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "Hime" is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the whale character may appear and the hat reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I33 for "爺" and the notice icon I32 for "姫" are digested, the "爺" character and the princess character appear to start "爺 & princess reach", and the "予 告" notice icon When I31 and "Hime" notice icon I32 are digested, the Tonosama and Hime characters appear and Tono & princess reach is started, and "To" notice icon I31 and "Tsubaki" notice icon When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the coffin may appear to start the coffin & coffin reach. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested, the character of princess, character of princess and character of princess appear Princess & Princess reach may be started. In this manner, reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested advance notice icon may be performed.

  Moreover, what these alert icons are digested and displayed is not limited to the above-described reach effect or advance notice of background display, and, for example, it is possible to change the effect mode in the big hit game or the mode during symbol variation. Other notices (eg, various notices such as a character for increasing a notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the effect that is performed when the advance notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music etc.) corresponding to the digested advance notice icon may be performed. An effect may be performed by the corresponding light emission pattern.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, an example may be produced in which effects for each when the notice icon I21 of "house" is digested and when the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (d1), the notice icon I21 of "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of "print" I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state by the "decoration 1", and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (d2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only the notice icon I21 of "house" out of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the notice icon I21 of "home" is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of "home" is digested to be changed to the special symbol which is a chance symbol.

  After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in relation to the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), a family crest with the effect image. There may be a case in which a family crest fall effect is made to cause the character 224B to fall. After such an effect is performed, for example, there may be a transition to the above-described sword strike. It is also possible to shift to the sword reach after performing effects to cause the family crest 224B to fall without displaying the effect image, or to bring the sword image to the sword no reach with neither the effect image nor the family crest 224B falling. You may make it shift. Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-3), there may be a case where normal reach effect is started without performing any effect due to the notice icon I21 of "house" being digested.

  In addition, it may be made to shift to another super reach (family crest challenge reach) along with the chance symbol being stopped and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after being stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1", at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (d4-4) In the decorative symbol display device 208, character display of "family crest challenge" indicating that the family crest challenge has been shifted is performed. In the first decorative symbol, the swing fluctuation is performed while maintaining the combination of “decorative 1-chance symbol-decorative 1” in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 107 (d5-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the character YM of the royal crown pulls the notice icon I22 of the “print” with a rope, and the notice of the “print” is displayed. The attraction of the icon I22 suggests that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4), when the tomoku character YM succeeds in drawing in the notice icon I22 of "print", the family crest 224B falls as shown in FIG. At the same time, a family crest fall effect is performed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. That is, it can be said that the warning icon I22 of "print" has been successfully digested. In addition, after the family crest fall effect is performed, for example, it will shift to the sword sword reach described above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the character YM may be broken, and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of "print" may fail. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the process may shift to the above-described sword strike. In this case, the reliability with respect to the big hit may be lower than when the pulling-in of the notice icon I22 of "print" is successful. Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4b), in the case where the rope pulled by the character YM is broken and fails to draw the notice icon I22 of "print", the process shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of losing may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested first. In addition, when the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested may be configured to be more likely to cause crest fall effects than when the notice icon I21 of "house" is digested, It may be reversed.

  In addition to the notice icon I21 for "house", the notice icon I22 for "mon", the notice icon I31 for "don", the notice icon I32 for "hime", the notice icon I33 for "爺", and the like. For example, a notice icon of “U”, a notice icon of “鮫”, a notice icon of “old”, a notice icon of “object”, a notice icon of “object”, The notice icon etc. may be prepared. For example, even if it digests the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "鮫", it may be arranged that the fall of the family crest is not performed, and the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "mon" are digested The family crest falling effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the "home" notice icon and the "chow" notice icon are digested than when the game is performed. In addition, a notice icon of "Gaze" or the like may be changed to a notice icon such as "print".

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, one word is formed by two characters of "house" and "print", and the predetermined effect is performed by satisfying the requirement that the word is formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more characters may be used for this presentation example. For example, a notice icon of "suspicious", a notice icon of "similar", and a notice of "run" When the three icons of the icon are digested, the pseudo-series effect may be performed.

  Further, in this example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print", for example, when there is only one vacant space in the notice icon display area 285, Alternatively, the notice icon I21 for "house" may be configured not to display any notice icon I22 for "print". In addition, only one of the notice icons of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not be displayed is indicated by the notice icon. The display may be increased when there is a space in the area 285. If there is no space in the notice icon display area 285, the warning icon displayed in the first place may not be digested. Further, even if a space occurs in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon may not be stocked but may be digested as it is.

  In addition, for example, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed until the notice icon I21 for the "house" and the notice icon I22 for the "print" are digested, for example, When digesting the preview icon I21, the preview icon I22 of "print" may be digested together, or the preview icon I21 of "home" may be digested.

  FIG. 108 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 108, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 108 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon which is a target of the pre-reading notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and it is a display mode of the advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In addition, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. In this effect example, the second reserved icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, shows that various parts are given, and in the example shown in FIG. The second reserved icon h12 being configured constitutes a first notice part P1. The first preview part P1 is an image imitating a torso portion of a snowman. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1) shows that the character EC of the vice merchant is in the frame from the left side of the display screen. The second notice parts P2 to be given to the notice parts P1 of are carried. The second preview part P2 is an image imitating the head of a snowman.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the evil merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the crown pattern effect starts. Here, your character YM is in possession of the third preview part P3. The third preview part P3 is an image simulating a bucket to be put on the head of the snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character EC of the evil merchant is out of the frame, and an eye and a mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the domino character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e4), an effect indication in which the third preview part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. After that, the character YM of the lord is framed out as shown in FIGS. 104 (6) to (8) and described above.

  In (e6) of FIG. 108, the display result of losing is derived, and it is shown that one variation display of the special figure 1 being suspended is digested and symbol variation display is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance through-let display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The channel display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, or the display mode of the hold icon which is already the display mode of the pre-reading notice is more reliable It notifies that the display mode is changed to a high degree. In addition, the big hit announcement indication in the design fluctuation indication which is under execution is done. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the advance notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e7), variable display of symbols is started in the chan-throughlet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third preview part P3 is digested. The third notice part P3 moves toward a first holding icon which is a display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. The character BY of this DJ carries the fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image imitating a muffler wound around the neck of the snowman.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second imitation of the head constituting the first reserved icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. While being put on the upper part of the notice parts P2, and the DJ character BY flying toward the upper left corner of the display screen, the fourth notice parts P4 possessed by the notice icon display area 285 in the notice icon display area 285 [2] The effect display to be placed in the display area YA2 is performed. In the chan-throughlet display area 287, the variation display of the symbol is still performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e10), the display result in which the character of “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived in the chan-throughlet display area 287. That is, it is notified that the fifth preview part P5 is displayed. The fifth preview part P5 is an image imitating a pair of twigs that function as arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first preview part P5 imitates the trunk forming the first reserved icon h11 in the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 108 (e11 '), the first notice icon 1 in the notice icon display area 285 where the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately attaching the fifth notice part P5. It may be displayed (stocked) once in the display area YA1. In this case, the display may not be displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1, and may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3).

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (e12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" The display result of is confirmed. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this example of presentation, at this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is still displayed, but may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 108 (e13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e14-1), the decoration symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variation icon h0 which is a display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wound around the neck of the change icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman (or the hold icon ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the said symbol fluctuation display is high. In addition, when the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading advance notice, and it is informed that the reliability to the big hit in the change is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, and may be attached, for example, when super reach effect is being performed, for example, FIG. 108 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 108, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth preview part P4 is digested in the sword master reach, and is attached to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e15-2). You may Here, with the transition to the super reach, the fluctuation icon h0 causes the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 to be framed out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this example, all displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon which is the target of the pre-reading notice, but for example, the indicated notice parts are digested but attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the big hit reliability may be reduced. In addition, when the displayed preview parts are digested, they are attached to the hold icon other than the hold icon which is the target of pre-reading, and function as another pre-reading notice of the hold or attached to the fluctuation icon which is not the target of pre-reading , It may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 109 is a view showing in a step-by-step manner a modification of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, wherein the increase presentation of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the modification of the digestive effect in stages, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 in steps. In FIGS. 109 to 110, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold for the pre-reading advance notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used. 109 to 110 are different from the above-described embodiment in that the first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and the second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Some overlap on the front side. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol display device 208A The variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. As shown in FIG. 109 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the character YM of the lord appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the token effect is started. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the advance notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas of a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the advance notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. Also, for example, although the maximum number of display areas in which the advance notice icon can be displayed is eight, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas smaller than eight are displayed, the second When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display to increase the display area is performed, and further notification is given that stock of the notice icon is possible. Well, for example, the display area may be increased by one each time the display area being displayed is filled with the notice icon, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that were not displayed. Further, when the character of the lord YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the character of the lord YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and the four display areas are filled with notice icons. In the case where the hall effect is started, if the hallman character YM possesses one notice icon, the display area is one when the action of the hallman character YM throwing the notice icon is performed. The number may be increased, or all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. In addition, when the character YM of the majesty has three notice icons, the display area may be increased by three when the character YM of the majesty casts the notice icon. Alternatively, all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Also, for example, although the maximum number of display areas in which the advance notice icon can be displayed is eight, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas smaller than eight are displayed, the second When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice) including four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed The icon display area is reduced and displayed, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) consisting of four new display areas where the notice icon is not displayed yet is displayed, and this second notice icon is displayed. A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second preview icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first preview icon display area is full, or it may be the timing at which the preview icon is newly stocked. Good. Also, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or changed to the notice icon display area 285 to display the stock number of notice icons. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be possible to give notice of pre-reading by switching from background display to display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (3), after the character YM has been moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. There is an effect display that throws towards the. In this rendering example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the royal crown is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat advance icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B may not straddle, for example, the first decorative symbol display device After the notice icon displayed on the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A appears on the predetermined position of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be displayed on the notice icon display area 285A.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (6) In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which the character YM of the grandchild has succeeded in displaying the advance notice icon and is happy to have an expression. As a result, by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285A, it is indicated that there is a possibility that the pseudo-series effect production will be performed in the future. Thereafter, the character YM of the lord is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In FIG. 109 (7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the off is decided. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first special image 1 variation display, as shown in FIG. 109 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, “decoration 7-decoration 6 -Display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2", and the display result of the off is decided. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued as before, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (9), the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved by the movement animation in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 109 (10), the first notification icon of the warning icon display area 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B The display in which the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat advance notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It should be noted that when digesting the advance notice icon, the advance notice icon may be displayed so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A do not straddle. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is moved to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and then enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (12). Be done. The timing at which the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched to the background display is shown in FIG. 109 (11), and the digested notice icon shows the first decorative symbol display. It may be the timing when it has moved to the center of the device 208A, or it may be the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (12) is enlarged and displayed.

  In FIG. 110 (13) continued from FIG. 109 (12), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged display hat notification icon I6. The timing to switch from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the character display of “continue” is additionally displayed, “ It may be the timing after the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE", and the second decorative symbol display device 208B gives a notice The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left pattern, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right pattern. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (16), the enlarged character BC2 of the displayed screen leader appears and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and then FIG. 110. As shown in (17), in response to the consumption of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display pushes up the right symbol displayed in the stop. The player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo-series effect may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the bancho character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 110 (16), it may not be necessary to display the character BC2 of the chain-length over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "displayed across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. May be Alternatively, the display may be integrally performed by the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, display may be performed to move from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (18), the pseudo-connected symbol is framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208 B, and the display moving at a low speed toward the lower side is performed. At this time, the pseudo run symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo-series effect is performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG.

  FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner another modification example of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 113 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestion production in steps. In FIGS. 111 to 113, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 111 and 112, with regard to the holding icon which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice in the holding icon display area 281, hatching is provided for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  FIGS. 111 (a1) to (a7-2) are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction, The difference is that when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be able to overlap with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a through-throughlet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and variable display of symbols is performed. The contents displayed in the channel through-let display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays a notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chan- nellet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered to overlap substantially the center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect image surrounding the periphery of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. The advance notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 111 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 109 (2) and described above, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B ascends and returns to the initial position. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the variable display of the special view 1 ends, and the stop display is performed by the combination of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2” which is the result of the loss. At this time, although the fluctuation icon h0 is not deleted, it may be deleted at a timing prior to the end of the fluctuation display of Special Figure 1. Also, in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the result of losing is displayed only with the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but the first decorative symbol is displayed, and this first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be easy to recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable during symbol stop display. In addition, regardless of the symbol stop display and the symbol variation display, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lifted even after the notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A. Alternatively, the overlapped state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are consumed is ended. It can be set suitably about raising 2 decoration symbol display device 208B. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the variation display of the special view 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the result of losing. The stop display is displayed in combination with Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 111 (a6-2) shows that two reservations are digested thereafter and symbol variation display which is a target of prefetching is started. Specifically, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display is being done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is digested, as shown in FIG. 111 (a7-2), the hat notice icon I6 expands. And the second decorative symbol display device 208B is projected to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, the character display of "CONTINUED" for giving a notice that the pseudo-series effect is to be performed is from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed over. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily viewed by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may thereafter be lifted and returned to the initial position, or may be maintained in the lowered state until the symbol variation ends.

  In FIG. 111 (b1) to FIG. (B4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, display of the number of notice icons displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a lower position near the decorative symbol display device 208). An example is shown where a device 288 is provided. The notice icon display number display device 288 includes, for example, two 7 segments, and can display the number (stock number) in which the notice icon is displayed.

  FIGS. 111 (b1) to (b3) have the same effect contents as those in FIGS. 83 (17) to (19), but in the preview icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, It is shown that the numerical value changes in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 111 (b1), since only one notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, "01" indicating the number is displayed in the notice icon display number display device 288. There is. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b2), the character of the hero YM is throwing three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, one-two box notice icon I9, fan notice icon I10), but any notice icon Since the warning icon display area 285 is not displayed yet either, the value shown in the warning icon display number display device 288 remains "01". Note that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM of the lord casts the notice icons. Also, a number different from the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called display is displayed). Then, when the above-mentioned three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays "04". Be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of warning icons being displayed is reduced by one, the value is updated and "03" is displayed on the warning icon display number display device 288. The timing at which the value of the notice icon display number display device is decreased may be the timing before the digest of the notice icon is performed, or may be simultaneous with the digest of the notice icon, or the notice icon It may be timing after being digested. Note that, as indicated by the broken line, the value is not decreased even if the advance notice icon is digested, and the total number (4 in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do so. In this effect example, the number displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments in the notice icon, but, for example, the operation by the light emitting means such as LED or the moving means such as the effect movable body A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light to a predetermined pattern, a voice, a decorative symbol display device (a decorative symbol display device in which a notice icon display area 285 is displayed, or the like The display number of the advance notice icon may be notified by a decorative symbol display device or the like.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9) are two display devices (a first decorative symbol display device 208C and a second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 109 to 110. There is a difference, however, in that they use display devices of the same size. In FIG. 112, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 112 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of the symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but it is displayed The mode is, for example, a default display mode as in the case of the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are It is arrange | positioned so that it may overlap substantially. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special view 1 second suspension number display H1 and the special view 2 second suspension number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special views 1 and 2 are suspended. “2” and “0” are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Also, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, as shown in FIG. 112 (c1) At the timing shown in, the variation display of the decorative symbol is in progress. In the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-mentioned channel display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c1), the state of the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed It is shown. In addition, the background display is also displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, background display is performed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the channel display area 287, as shown in FIG. 112 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208D is the first decorative symbol. It descends to a position covering the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed on the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the display mode when the notice icon is displayed is changed in the first decorative symbol display device 208C. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol decreases and it is displayed only by the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 112 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . Since the number of reservations is one at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c3), the special view second holding number display H1 displays "1" indicating that.

  FIG. 112 (c4) shows the state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. That is, the warning icon I7 of the shuriken is digested to notify that a chance eye warning is to be made. At this time, the effect display in which the advance notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variation display of the special view 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 112 (c5), in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, stopping is performed by the combination of "decoration 7-decor 1-decor 1" which is a result of losing. it's shown. However, the combination of the result of this loss is a chance, and it is informed that the symbol variation display which is likely to be a big hit is being suspended. That is, when this chance is displayed, the advance notice is made.

  FIG. 112 (c6) shows a state in which the second hat warning icon I6 has been digested after the symbol variation of the special view 1 has started. That is, it is predicted that the second pseudo-announcement will be made. As a result of the second hat icon warning icon I6 being digested, no warning icon is displayed in the warning icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c7), the advance notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And the second decorative symbol display device 208D is displayed on the entire two screens.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat's notice icon I6, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the stop display is displayed. The effect display for pushing up the right symbol being performed is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo connected effect is started. At this time, the banner character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed large, for example, a large symbol in which the symbol of the numeral and the character image are integrated is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When the small decorative symbol is displayed, the small symbol consisting only of the numeral symbol is displayed, and the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed in different display modes, but the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Alternatively, both of the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be respectively moved in the direction of separating from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display When the devices 208D are separated, they may be configured to be able to visually recognize the accessories placed on the back side, and further, the accessories may be moved so as to project forward. You may Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are digested.

  FIG. 112 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 112 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display disposed at the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G disposed on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but have a slightly smaller width. The three decorative symbol display devices may have the same size.

  The variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across the three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notification icon I6 displayed on the screen is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Further, a notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and a notice icon I10 of a fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Also, the decorative symbols are displayed by one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display It is displayed on the device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the advance icon display area 285C is not displayed. In addition, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the effect display related to the advance notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described above and in the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 113 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 113, the first decorative symbol display device 208H disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208I disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J disposed on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. As compared with the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but have a somewhat shorter length in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with a frame part projecting at the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side and the right end side. Each frame part is provided projecting. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, respectively, and when the positions are closest to each other, A display can be performed as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 113 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 85 (47), and covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. It is shown that the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in FIG. 113 (e1), during execution of swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the box of one thousand boxes displayed in the advance notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and it is notified that it shifts to the rendering with higher reliability. Is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in the direction in which they approach each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, it is difficult to visually recognize the display state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by the digestion of the advance notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the closest position to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H can hardly be visually recognized It becomes a state. At this time, the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 85 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display being executed is slightly darkened across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the character of the crown appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed is The display is turned off. This display is rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (e3) to FIG. (E5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to rotate.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (e6), the button acceptance time meter and the button image 136a are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is received. To the player to promote the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 113 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are displayed. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the decoration 1 ".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (e8) to FIG. (E9), once all is not displayed, in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotates clockwise by 90 degrees along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e10), The display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e11-1), the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 1" which was fluctuating The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed and derived and displayed as a result of the loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e11-2), the display in which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the fourth notice area YA4 of the notice icon is digested is started. That is, display is performed such that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. Thus, there are cases where the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J do not operate even if the advance notice icon is digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size and displayed to the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and re-variation display is performed, and then a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" 1) A combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 1" is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 113 (e7 ') shows an example in which the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 113 (e6) is performed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (e7 '), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the indigo character is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the display result of the big hit without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J and returning them to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 113 (e7 ′ ′) is configured such that, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together It shows an example of rendering when it is done. That is, as shown in FIG. 113 (e3) to FIG. (E5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also performs these operations. It is also possible to make it rotate with it. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured or separately It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can be rotated in a state in which visual recognition is made difficult by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The devices 208J move away from one another. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears to be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike the case of FIG. 113 (e7 '), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third It can display in the state which the horizontal width of each display screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 308J was equal.

  FIG. 114 is a view gradually showing another modified example of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 114, the transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by overlapping two layers of panels in the depth direction, and predetermined lens cuts are applied to transmission regions of the respective layers. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission area has a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to appear to be emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the first layer panel disposed on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6 and is disposed on the back side of the first layer panel. In the second layer panel, a lens cut of a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied. In FIG. 114, the light guide plate IL is shown surrounded by a broken line. Further, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured in one layer, for example, by changing the pattern of the lens cut, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be configured to be different. Further, in FIG. 114, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a common view display device 210, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 114, the holding icon which is the target of the pre-reading notice in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed while the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the variable icon display area 280 and In the hold icon display area 281, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, and a chance-throughlet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The contents displayed in the channel through-let display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the channel display area 287, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is displayed. While being performed, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 114 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended (turned off), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. It should be noted that dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or light guide plate IL may be turned off after dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chan- nellet display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, the stock effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be made to be known.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is performed and The stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL counterclockwise 90 degrees to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image You may do so. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated by the panel of the first layer and the panel of the second layer, and in this case, for example, only the panel of the second layer is rotated and the first The panels of the layer may not be rotated, or the panels of the first layer may be rotated together with the panels of the second layer.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the forecasted icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the forecasted icon first display area YA1 of the forecasted icon display area 285, so that the future is simulated. It has been predicted that a series of effects will be performed.

  FIG. 114 (g) shows that the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 114 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing The notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 114 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state of giving notice in advance. As shown in FIG. 114 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of symbols is performed in the through-throughlet display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and as a result of the variation display of the pattern in the chan-throughlet display area 287, the hat The notice icon I6 is foreshadowed to be derived.

  FIG. 114 (i) shows another example of effect of the advance notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer also emits light to imitate the effect image Also make an announcement, and perform the notice icon digest presentation. At this time, when the luminescent color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the luminescent color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, it is possible to make the patterns formed on the panel of

  FIG. 114 (j) shows another example of effect of the advance notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. In the enlarged display on the full screen, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL is made to emit light at that timing to form a pattern imitating the effect image, thereby performing the notice icon digestion and rendering. At this time, although the advance notice icon display area 285 is erased, it may be displayed.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example presentation of the advance notice icon digesting presentation. In FIGS. 115 (1) to (11), except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I10 of the fan and becomes the drink notice icon I31. 85 (44) to (54), only parts different from those described above with reference to FIG. 85 will be described in detail, and descriptions of common parts will be omitted. Further, in this example of the effect, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the contents of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed to a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink advance notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The drink notification icon I31 is a notification icon to notify that the contents to be produced will be changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 115 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 115 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and the drink notice icon I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink advance notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged size, and effect display is performed in which the contents of the drink are sprinkled on the button image 136a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect display is performed in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the image of the liquid disappears, a protrusion button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protrusion position is displayed. At this time, it is a state before the operation acceptance start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the projecting position at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (17), as shown in FIG. 115 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button acceptance time meter decreases Then, it is informed that the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 has been started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the projecting position may be the same as the timing at which the projecting button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), or the projecting button image 136b May be before the display, or may be after the protrusion button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the projecting position along with the start of the digestion and rendering of the drink advance notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In addition, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, it lights in a mode to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period (for example, lights in blue), and when the operation reception period is reached You may make it light (for example, light red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 116 is a view showing in stages the example of the effect using the movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  116 (a1) to FIG. 116 (a3) move the effect movable body 224C to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 when stocking the advance notice icon, thereby notifying the stock of the advance notice icon There is. FIG. 116 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 104 (1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of "STOCK" on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the effect device It is arranged to be hidden behind the 206.

  FIG. 116 (a2) shows that the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to the visible position, which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the stock of any of the plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or notification by sound or lamp may be performed. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the type of notice icon, and the type of notice icon stocked may be notified according to the type of effect movable body 224C that appears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 116 (a3) shows that the hat advance notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 116 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can be rotated about the depth direction as rotational axes are disposed near the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the upper vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224Da with the characters "large", the fifth effect movable body 224De with the symbol of the asterisk, and the "panel" The second effect movable body 224Db with the letter “並 ん” is arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and the third effect movable body 224Dc with the character “振” is given in the lower vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a character of "dance" are arranged side by side in the lateral direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd Will rotate. In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the rotation of the digested number of effect movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of stock advance notice icons is rotated. It is also good.

  FIGS. 116 (c1) to 116 (c6) show that the presentation movable mode is notified by operating the effect movable body 224. FIGS. In this example of presentation, there may be a case where a notice icon I41 of a special training as a notice icon is displayed. When the special notice icon I41 is digested, it shifts to a pre-reading mode informing that the fluctuation display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 116 (c1) shows that the special training notice icon I41 is digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I41 of the special training displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and displayed moving to the center of the display screen. In addition, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body 224 imitating an arm is disposed. The effect movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and a base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the effect device 206 via a rotational axis ax1. . Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached at its base end portion to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via the rotation axis ax2.

  When the advanced warning icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (c2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display "in preparation for training" is right in the strip-like scroll display area. Scrolls from the left to the left. As a result, the player is notified of the shift to the pre-reading mode. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position (first position) covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 An operation of reciprocation between the two (prefetching operation) is performed. Although the prefetching operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during stop display of the symbol, the operation may be continued even during stop display of the symbol. Also, while the pre-reading operation is being performed, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may also operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or Only the unit 224b may operate.

  FIG. 116 (c3) shows a state in which a reach state is formed by arranging two "decorates 1" in the symbol variation display of the special view 1 which is the target of the pre-reading. Here too, the prefetching operation is being performed continuously.

  FIG. 116 (c4) shows that the special training reach as the super reach effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "during training preparation" is finished, and the character display of "training start" indicating that the training specific reach has been started is performed. Further, after the effect movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 116 (c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and then as shown in FIG. 116 (c6) The forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined effect image is displayed to notify that the reliability against the big hit is high.

  FIG. 117 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner; It is. In FIG. 117, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216, Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 117, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  Since FIG. 117 (1) is the same display as FIG. 104 (1) described above, the detailed description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (3), the character YM of the lady is moved to the predetermined throwing position, but the notice icon I6 of the hat held is not thrown yet, FIG. 117 (4) As shown in, in a state in which the tomoku character YM stands by at the throwing position, the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the off-set display result is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 117 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are moved by the movement animation respectively. The hold icon displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes a change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is a special view 1 Of the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the character YM of the lord is still waiting at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the owned hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this demonstration example, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, it is notified that the notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the stocking of the notice icon is performed After the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts, stocking of the notice icon is performed. In addition, although a notice that the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display being executed when the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended is given a so-called Gasseed notice in which the notice icon is not displayed. May be In this case, for example, the character YM of the lord may end the display before the variable display of the symbol to be read is started. For example, the symbol YM may be displayed before the symbol change display to be read. The display may be ended at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. In addition, the display of the character YM of the lord may be ended before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading ends, for example, the super reach which is performed during the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is started The display of the character YM of the lord may be ended before. In addition, in the case where the advance notice icon is stocked, the character YM may be displayed continuously even after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, in the state where the character of the lord is standing by, when it becomes big hit with the symbol fluctuation indication which is done before the symbol fluctuation indication which throws the announcement icon, the timing which derives the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example The standby display may be continued in a state where the character of the lord has the advance notice icon during the fluctuation display), or may be deleted.

  And then, the effects shown in FIG. 117 (7) to FIG. 10 (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIG. 117 (7) to FIG. (12) and the second decorative symbol are the same except that the variable display is performed, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 117 (11) shows that the result of the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the off is decided. There is. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In FIG. 117 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and changes to the fluctuation icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 117 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. A warning icon digesting effect is performed where the warning icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram step by step showing another rendering example of the advance notice icon increase rendering. In FIG. 118, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216, Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 118, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of the symbol variation display which is a target of the pre-reading, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIGS. 118 (a1) to 118 (a6) show that the notice icons are stocked after the effect of giving notice that the notice icons are stocked is performed.

  FIG. 118 (a1) shows that the boring effect to be performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the explanation display portion 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its reward for reward are shown. In the explanation display portion 288 shown in FIG. 118 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a character display of "strike item Get" is displayed, which indicates that an item can be obtained as a reward. In this rendering example, when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, bowling rendition by the character of the lord is started. The contents of the mission displayed on the explanation display portion 288 and the contents of the success reward thereof are not only related to the stock of the advance notice item, but, for example, the hold display relates to the change to the display mode of the advance notice. It may be about the notice about the symbol change display of the. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it is possible to say that the advance notice of stocking of the advance notice icon is performed by performing the boring effect as shown in FIG. 118 (a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a dedicated effect performed only for the advance notice regarding stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display being executed, and is used as another advance read advance notice It may be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the off is decided. At this time, the boring effect is not finished, and the character display of “following the next change” is displayed, which indicates that the bowling change is continuously performed in the symbol change display to be executed next. In the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "a strike and an item Get" indicating a mission and its success reward is also performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the ball thrown by the character of the lord is rolled on the lane and moves toward the aligned ten boring pins. There is an expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of a scene where the strike is taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”, and the mission is achieved as shown in FIG. As shown, the letter display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, and it is informed that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It is informed that it was stocked. As described above, in this example of presentation, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the symbol item being displayed is not displayed (stock) while the symbol variation display in progress is displayed. The notice of is done.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the bowling effect described above may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display devices 208K are arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. By displaying the display area WP2 and displaying the notice icon display area 285C displaying the notice icon in the lower half, the boring effect described above is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed as the notice icon display area 285C. It may be displayed on the screen.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118, when the bowling effect becomes a big hit, when the bowling effect is started at the timing (for example, during the swing fluctuation display) to display the big hit symbol derived after the super reach The background display of may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed, and for example, the state shown in FIG. 118 (a2) may be displayed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the bowling effect is a big hit, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. . Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c), when the bowling effect is a big hit, the display of the boring effect in the sub display device 208K may be ended, but the display is continued as it is. May be

  FIG. 119 is a diagram gradually showing another modification of the increase presentation of the advance notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-mentioned embodiment, although the thing which performs change display of special figure 2 preferentially over special figure 1 was explained, in this production example, giving priority to any of special figure 1 change game and special figure 2 change game There is no, and it is applied to what performs the starting opening prize winning order variation which starts the special figure change game which requires suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in order of starting opening prize winning. In addition, it is applicable also to what performs special figure 2 priority change also in this example of an effect. Further, in FIG. 119, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 119, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is an object of pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used. Also, among the pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 281, the first pending icon h11, the third pending icon h12 and the fifth pending icon h13 The second reserve icon h21 and the fourth reserve icon h22 are prized and held in the second special view start opening 232, which is a reserve icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 placed and held. It is a hold icon which shows the change display of the special figure 2.

  The effect shown in FIG. 119 is an effect that may start after the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, and the destination is It is an effect (Amida effect) for acquiring a notice item etc.

  First, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 1-decorative 4-decorative 2". It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an Amida effect is started. More specifically, when the effect is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), one of the start points of three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction is one of the characters SB of Sabohani. Are arranged, and a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lost icon IX are arranged for each end point of the three horizontal lines. In addition, vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are appropriately set, and central portions of these vertical lines are covered with smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of reservations at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida rendition, if the character of Sabohani moves along the line according to the rule of Amida as a result of reaching the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is placed, the notice icon is stocked. When the end point where the lost icon IX is placed is reached, it is informed that stocking of the notice icon is not performed. And, every time the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the character SB of Sabohani may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-link is performed, for example, when the pseudo-link occurs, it proceeds to the position of the second vertical line ahead It may be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the location of the vertical line 2 or more ahead etc. per symbol fluctuation display of 1 time. Incidentally, it is possible to perform the effect as shown in FIG. 119, for example, in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIG. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue to display the muddy rendition even during the execution of the super reach. Then, for example, there may be a case where the effect of increasing the notice icon during super reach can be performed in parallel.

  Then, when the variable display of the special view 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22 and h13 are respectively moved by the movement animation, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move to the right one by one. On the other hand, the decoration pattern starts variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of the sabo hani starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is moved. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and it is displayed that the horizontal line in the upper row and the horizontal line in the middle line are connected by the vertical line, and the character SB of the sabothani moves along the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the middle of the horizontal line is reached.

  After that, when the variation display of the special view 1 ends, the variation display of the special view 2 is started continuously, and the four suspension icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation Be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1), when the safari character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke concealing the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being eliminated, this vertical line is found to be cut off halfway, and the vertical line can not move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line. Therefore, the character SB of the sabothani middle line Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the variation display of the special view 2 is finished, the variation display of the special view 1 is started continuously, and the three suspension icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation . Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), when the safari character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke concealing the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being eliminated, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, and therefore, the sabothani character SB follows the rule of the lottery from the middle horizontal line to the upper line. Move to a horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. After the display indicating that it has been acquired is performed, the Amida effect is ended, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Be done.

  In this example of presentation, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1) and described above, one of a plurality of advance notice icons of different types is selected. For example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 2), place the notice icon I6 of the hat on all the end points of the horizontal line, or place the notice icon I10 of the fan on all the end points of the horizontal line as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3) It is also good. In this manner, by arranging the notice icons of the same type at all the end points of the horizontal lines, it is possible to notify the player that it is decided that the displayed notice icons will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), as described above, since the notice icon I10 for the fan is a notice icon indicating that an effect to give notice that the big hit is to be decided is performed, the player In some cases, it may be possible to further increase the expectation for the big hit. The effect as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), without arranging the lost icon IX, arrange the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the two-sided box at the end of each horizontal line, It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to safely enjoy the Amida effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), the notice icons (head notice icon I6, fan notice icon I10) disposed at the end point of each horizontal line, with the character SB of Sabohani arranged at all the start points of the horizontal line. It may be determined that all of the notice icons I9) in the first and second boxes are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), since the fan notification icon I10 is included, it is guaranteed that the effect of announcing that the big hit will be decided is performed, so the player goes to the big hit In some cases, it may be possible to further enhance the sense of expectation of

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-6), the notice icon of the type of notice icon is not clear at the end point of each horizontal line (the first notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2, the second notice icon 3 may be placed on the notice icon I3 of the Lord of the Lord, and in this way, the player does not know what notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached, so it is against the stock of the notice icon. In some cases, it is possible to improve the expectation. In addition, the notice icon of the lord is different in color depending on the type as described above, and the reliability for the big hit is different depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third tonome, which is the notice icon of red tonome, is more easily changed to the notice icon on which "pseudo-run" is determined than the notice icon on which "pseudo-run" is not determined. On the other hand, it is possible to easily change the notice icon I1 of the first tonome, which is the notice icon of the icon, to a notice icon in which “pseudo chain” is not determined.

  Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is concealed by smoke to make it difficult to identify the traveling route of the character SB of the sabo hani. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the staging effect is started. As a result, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is to be stocked, the player may be able to safely enjoy the amida effect. Furthermore, in this case, a roulette effect may be performed to determine the start point of the horizontal line where the character SB of Sabohani is arranged, and the effect may be further enhanced.

  Further, in this example of presentation, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amidoh effect is displayed in a recognizable manner, for example As shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2), the area in which the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines are displayed with smoke during execution of the Amida effect is displayed with smoke, and then FIG. 119 (a2-2a As shown in), the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to a one-two box advance notice icon I9, and the content of the effect is promoted. In addition, for example, a part of or all of the notice icons of the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines are changed to an icon IX of the lost or a lower notice icon having a lower rank, etc. You may

  Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), the central part of the vertical line is concealed by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), during the execution of the Amida rendition, the smoke hiding a part of the vertical line extends vertically, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a), the smoke disappears Vertical lines may increase and decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, the possibility of acquiring either the notice icon I6 for the hat or the notice icon I10 for the fan is suggested. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan's notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this example of presentation, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut off halfway, the lost icon IX is not selected. As shown in 119 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut off, so that the lost icon IX is selected, and after completion of the rendition, FIG. 119 (a4-3a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10, it may be informed that no notice icon is stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  It should be noted that in the above-mentioned Amida rendition, it is possible to give advance notice of the symbol change display which is the object of pre-reading according to the type of notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 120 is a view showing in stages an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment and a view showing in steps the other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect. is there. In FIG. 120, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216, Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 120, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading, and the hold display becomes a display mode of pre-reading notice (Sabo hani hold icon). It differs from the above-described embodiment in that

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 120 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), symbol variation display is performed in the first special view display device 212, and accordingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second decoration are displayed. The variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Further, in FIG. 120 (1), the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, The two reserved icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are displayed in the default display mode (round no-pattern and white display mode).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (2), when the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, the third reserved icon h13 in the special view 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1. It is displayed and notified that the number of reservations is three. Here, the third hold is a hold subject to prefetching. In this presentation example, the hold icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode (previous display mode) of the advance notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (4), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special view 1 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold of the special figure 1 It becomes the icon h11, the hold icon which was in the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special view 1, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 120 (5) shows that the symbol variation display is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hallus effect is started. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat. As described above, in this effect example, a notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol fluctuation display which is started after the symbol fluctuation display performed when the symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended. A certain hall director production has been started.

  Then, after the main character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (7), the notice icon I6 of the hat held by the hat is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (8). An effect display for throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character of the lord YM succeeds in displaying the advance notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (11) to FIG. 12 (12), a display is performed in which the character YM of the lord is framed out below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (14), the move animation is displayed by the move animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is Move to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and change to the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started .

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decor 6-decor 2" The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the move animation is displayed by the move animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 120 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. A warning icon digesting effect is performed where the warning icon I6 of the hat is digested. As described above, according to this presentation example, it can be said that the prefetch notice by the hold icon is performed simultaneously with the prefetch notice by the notice icon.

  FIG. 121 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. FIG. In FIG. 121, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216, Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 121, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading is being held, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIGS. 121 (a1) to 121 (a3-1) show that a notice effect is given in advance to notify that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 121 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1" The results are shown finalized. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the holding at the display position of the first holding icon h11 The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special view 1, and the third holding icon h13 The holding icon at the display position becomes the second holding icon h12 of the special view 1, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for giving notice that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed following "with the next change", and then "It is displayed as stock", and a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed. Notices that it will always be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is ended and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a hall effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display, As shown at 121 (a 3-1), the notice icon I 6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that stock of the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, and therefore the player may be able to enjoy playing the game at ease.

  In the example of effect described above, it is notified that the notice icon is always stocked by the display of the placard PL1, but, for example, the placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-2) It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, a hat warning icon I6 is displayed following "with the next change", and then "is a stock" is displayed, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat forecast icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 121 (a3-2), no effect on the stock of the notice icon is performed. In addition, although the effect (for example, a hall effect etc.) regarding the stock of the advance notice icon may be performed, in this case, a so-called Gassestock effect is performed in which the advance notice icon is not stocked.

  121 (b1) to 121 (b3) show that the prefetching mode, which is one of the prefetch notices, is being executed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetching is suspended It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (b1), the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, and the pre-reading notice as the display mode of the third holding icon h13 The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as a display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special view 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pre-reading mode which is an effect notifying that the symbol variation display having a high probability of becoming a big hit is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "in rapid heat approaching" are scrolled from the right to the left in each of the two strip-like scroll display areas. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is ended, and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (b3), the symbol fluctuation display is being executed. The hall effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this presentation example, it is possible to perform prefetching notice by changing the background display, in addition to prefetching notice by stocking the notice icon and prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 121 (c1) to FIG. 121 (c2), during the symbol variation display being executed at the time the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the presentation effect etc. are performed, and the notice icon is displayed. Stock may be made.

  FIGS. 121 (d1) to 121 (d3) show that stock of the advance notice icon and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, stocking and digesting of a notice icon relating to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display is also configured to be executable.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the hall effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed the notice icon as shown in FIG. 121 (d2). The preview icon in the area 285 is temporarily stocked in the first display area YA1. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121 (d3), the notice icon digesting effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (e1) to FIG. 121 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown into the notice icon display area 285 due to the hall effect, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may

  FIG. 122 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. It is a figure showing the modification of step by step. In FIG. 122, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 122, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIGS. 122 (a1) to 122 (a3) show that the advance notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are both used.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is "jojomachi". There is. In this stage display area 289, in addition to the display of the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice or the explanation of the appearing character may be displayed, or the notice display may be performed. It is also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described hall effect is performed, and a hat advance notice icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the character display of "stock" is additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and notice in this notice icon display area 285D. A notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 122 (b1) to (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the hat notice icon I6 appeared by the hall effect is not stocked, as it is. You may make it digest. In this way, it is possible to perform the staging effect of the notice icon regarding the notice in the symbol variation display.

  FIGS. 122 (c1) to 122 (c2) show how a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided, and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and the second notice icon display area at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where a notice icon other than the button notice icon is displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. But it is not limited to this. In the first notice icon display area 285E, four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, the notice icon fourth display area YAL4) are provided. In the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, and in the notice icon third display area YAL3, a notice icon I7 of a shuriken is displayed. It is displayed. In the second notice icon display area 285F, four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, the notice icon fourth display area YAR4) Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button preview icons I11 are enlargedly displayed side by side substantially at the center of the display screen, and it is shown that these second button preview icons I11 are stocked. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (c2), the second button preview icon I11 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YAR1 and the preview icon second display area YAR2 of the second preview icon display area 285F. In this example, the second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. When the second button preview icon I11 is full after the second button preview icon I11 is full in the second preview icon display area 285F, and the number of Even if the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and the second button notice icon I11 is digested, the reliability against the big hit is made different. Well, for example, the more the second button preview icon I11 is stocked, the more It may be configured so as to be easy with. Note that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, there may be a case where only two notices are displayed. In the above, the remaining two button advance notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being digested. The first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured such that the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the number of stocked notice items.

  Fig. 122 (d1) to Fig. 122 (d3) show another example of the increase presentation of the advance notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (d1), the notice icon I6s for the hat is displayed smaller on the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12 respectively, and the notice icon I7s for the shuriken is held for the first one. It is displayed small on the icon h11. That is, in this presentation example, an example is shown in which the hold icon may be displayed including the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the hat in the reduced display, displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the text display of "stock" is added, and it is informed that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Be done. In this production example, every time the suspension of the symbol variation display is digested, an effect of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is this It is not limited.

  Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 122 (e1), the advance notice icon may not be displayed on all the change icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on a part of the change icons or the hold icons.

  FIGS. 122 (f1) to 122 (f3) show an example in which, although the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0, the notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIG. 122 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 122 (d1) and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  In this effect example, after that, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol temporarily stops at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (f2), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (f3), the fluctuation icon Although h0 is erased, at this time, together with the fluctuation icon h0, the hat notice icon I6s displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased, and it is informed that the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked. As described above, even if the notice icon is displayed on the change icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIGS. 122 (g1) to 122 (g3) show that when a given notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained in which the same effect is obtained as a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I51 of a bouquet as a notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more icons among the plurality of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 81 (b), but which notice icon is included It is a difficult aspect to identify.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (g2), when the bouquet advance notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet advance notice icon I51 is enlarged after being moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen Ru.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (g3), the notice icon I51 of the bouquet changes in display to the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the type of notice icon included in the notice icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may be able to have a sense of anticipation as to which type of notice icon is included while having the fun of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiment described above and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may continue to be displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the symbol variation display may be suspended. When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, of course, if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without the symbol changing display being suspended, the state of the stock also in the demonstration display May be maintained. Also, regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display is suspended, the stock status may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked.

  Also, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  Also, effects may be made that the stocked notice icon changes or is promoted (leveled up), for example, effects such as changing the stocked hat notice icon I6 to a fan notice icon I10 When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with the chance eye in a state in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the notice icon I9 of the one and two box . Also, conversely, an effect may be performed in which the stocked advance notice icon is demoted (leveled down).

  In addition, the effect display performed when the advance notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (level up), for example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed The effect of changing to the notice icon I10 of the fan may be performed during the operation, or the number of times of pseudo-sequence may be increased in the pseudo-sequence effect executed when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and executed. Good. Also, conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the advance notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down) may be performed.

  Even when the button advance icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button preview icon is displayed, the button preview may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether to make a notice of stocking a notice icon or not, according to the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the fluctuation display time in the case of not giving a notice of stocking the advance notice icon between the symbol fluctuation display serving as a big hit and the symbol fluctuation display serving as a loss may be the same or different.

  In addition, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, a variation time of a length in which stock of the notice icon is not performed may be selected.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed to execute the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to give a notice of stocking a notice icon.

  Also, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the variation time of the length for stocking the advance notice icon may be selected. Here, the stock advance notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 interrupted, or may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which has been interrupted.

  Also, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 before being interrupted is performed. The notice icon may not be digested as it is stocked, or may be configured to be digested.

  Further, the type of the advance notice icon is not limited to those described above or those to be described later, and various types can be adopted.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon, and when this item for customization is digested, for example, increase of selectable BGM, increase of selectable background, selection by player It may be possible to increase the possible effect mode (eg, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, or the like The luminance setting may be made possible.

  Also, for example, an item for user setting clear may be displayed, and when the item for user setting clear is digested, for example, the user setting may be enabled to be cleared, or the user setting is cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  Further, for example, an item for effect mode end may be displayed, and when the item for effect mode end is digested, for example, it is possible to end the prefetch mode or end the effect mode. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Also, for example, a point earning item or a level up presentation item may be displayed, and if these items are digested, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. You may

  Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the advance notice icon may be started, and for example, when the icon of the lord is digested, the lord of the hall VS the swordsman reach may be performed.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the icon of the present is digested, the icon "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect of "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon (divination icon) whose fortune-telling starts when it is digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that displays information on simultaneous island production when it is digested. For example, a countdown to the start of simultaneous production of islands may be started, or a time until the start of simultaneous production of islands may be displayed, or the contents of simultaneous production of islands to be performed next will be displayed. It is also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that enables store-side customization when digested. For example, even if it is possible to perform setting according to the area of the game arcade to be installed (for example, setting of the Tohoku regional mode or Chubu regional mode etc.) or setting of the name of the gaming arcade to be installed Good. For example, depending on the setting, it is possible to make the group notice character (for example, namahage group etc.) appearing in the Tohoku region mode different from the group notice character (for example, shachihoko group etc.) appearing in the central region mode. There is a case.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the tutorial display when it is digested.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon where roulette effect is started when it is digested. In this roulette effect, for example, there are displayed a result indicating that a promotion effect of the display mode of the holding icon is performed, or a result indicating that a notice of the symbol variation display is performed.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original when it is digested.

  Next, modifications of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. FIG. Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 124 is a diagram explaining a lottery table related to notice items. It is.

  In FIG. 123, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a first special view hold lamp 218 and a second special view hold lamp 220 are shown. The common drawing display device 210, the common drawing reservation lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (a), the reserved icon display area 281A of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon display area 282A of the special figure 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you would like. In FIG. 123 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both of FIG. 1 and FIG. And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is stopped and displayed by "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of the decoration symbols corresponding to exfoliation. A notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the reserved icon display area 282A of the special view 2, and a notice icon Ih of a princess is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, although the notice icon is displayed in the left-aligned state, the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may be displayed as needed.

  In FIG. 123 (b), it is shown that two gaming balls have won a prize in the first special view starting opening 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special view 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side on the left. Each of these hold icons h11 and h12 is in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (c), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special view 1, since the first hold is digested, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the gaming ball has won in the second special view starting opening 232, in the pending icon display area 282A of the special view 2, the pending icon h21 corresponding to the first pending is displayed left-justified. The hold icon h21 is a default display mode.

  Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 123 (d) comes, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special view 1 is the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display mode in which "heat" is displayed Change to).

  After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, when the timing shown in FIG. 123 (e) comes, the notice icon It of the lady and the notice icon Ih of the princess are added and displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. Ru. That is, the display in which the advance notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess increased after the notice icons Ih of the two princess is digested And the character HI of the princess accompanied by a balloon with the letters "Atari" and "question mark" appears. The timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is a result of detachment. Is notified.

  In this embodiment, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (h). Ru. In this embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the notice icon is displayed when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 becomes a loss. There is no digestion of the icon and no increase in the notice icon. Therefore, while the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is being performed, the advance notice icon may not be displayed, or the advance notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 concerned becomes a big hit, it is possible not to do neither the digestion of the notice icon nor the increase indication, when the digestion and the increase indication of the notice icon are performed There may be. On the other hand, the pending icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed continuously, or any of the pending icon display areas 281A and 282A may not be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the advance notice icon display area 285A may be hidden, and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (i), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", and it is informed that the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is disapproval .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being held is started, and the notice icon It of the lady is digested, and "atari" and "question mark" A character of the lord YI accompanied by a balloon of letter writing appears. In addition, the timing of appearance of the marshal character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 123 (j), a warning icon Id of a bad agent is additionally displayed in the warning icon display area 285A. That is, the display in which the advance notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing when the warning icon Id of the bad official is additionally displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the warning icon It of the lady, or may be after the same time. It may be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess and the notice icon of the bad officer Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil officer character DI appear. The timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. In addition, the timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the timing of appearance of the character of the bad officer.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , It is informed that it has been a big hit.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the lottery table of the notice icon relationship for determining whether or not to execute the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 Execute increase display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of / 50, execute increase display of notice icon of the princess with probability of 3/50, execute increase display of the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 2/50 . Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the forerunner notice icon with the probability of 40/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with the probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer with the probability of 25/50 Execute the digestion display of In addition, since the execution lottery of these increase display and digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is performed simultaneously for two or more notice icons, or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  Moreover, when the result of the big hit determination performed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a loss, as a result of the look-ahead of reservation of FIG. In addition, execute the increase display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of 3/50, execute the increase display of notice icon of the princess with probability of 2/50, increase the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of 1/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with probability of 10/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 15/50 Execute the digestion display of

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1 Execute the increase display of the notice icon of the lord with the probability of 25/50, execute the increase display of the notice icon of the princess with the probability of 20/50, and the increase display of the notice icon of the evil officer with the probability of 7/50 Run. Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the lord with a probability of 20/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of a bad officer with a probability of 5/50 Execute the digestion display of In addition, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win a prize in the second special view starting opening 232 in the normal gaming state (non-power support state), even if the jackpot determination result is a big hit It is also possible not to increase display on the notice icon of, and not to display digest on any notice icon.

  In addition, when the big hit decision result which is executed with the start of design fluctuation indication of special figure 2 is off, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of reservation of special figure 1, increase indication is indicated concerning any notice icon It does not take place, and does not perform the digestion display about any notice icon.

  In addition, for example, when the power support state ends and one or a plurality of reservations remain for the symbol variation display of the special view 2, the preliminary display icon of the preliminary view regarding the suspension of the special illustration 2 is not displayed Alternatively, in accordance with the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the increase display and the digest display of the advance notice icon may be performed.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 125 to 137 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 125 to 137, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 125 to 137 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 125 to 137, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, in FIG. 125-FIG. 135 and FIG. 137, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation that can be applied to the present embodiment, and FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI portion, a variation icon h0 is at the center It is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), “Tomon-sama is a general Yatsushiro” is displayed, and a description is given regarding the character of the Tonosama. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is displayed preferentially during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol It may overlap. Here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when transitioning to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. Conversely, when displaying ordinary stage names in white, it is not hot as compared to the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen to display the stage name and reach name currently being used. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. ing. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball wins the first special view start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (b), the third special icon hold icon h13 (third reserved icon in the reserved icon display area) Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of reservations has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the symbol variation display that has been the object of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode, but in a display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) of the prefetch notice. At this time, an audio output of "Pon" is made from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the pre-reading advance notice by the hold display has been performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the off Is finalized. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 The hold icons at the display position of the third hold icon h13 become the second hold icon h12, and move to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (d), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1, the character display of "Tomonashi is Yatsushiro general" is still performed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord is the bomb-like icon (bomb icon) I61. It is shown that it is going to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on presentation by throwing by the character of the lord. The throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed as an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be identified or can not be identified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of the throwing, or may be identifiable from the beginning. Also, an animation relating to a notice icon (high expectation degree notice icon) having a high probability of big hit when it is digested, and an animation relating to a notice icon having a low probability of big hit when it is digested than the high expectation warning animation. The display manners of the animations may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (f), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what has been displayed as "Don's grandfather is Yatsushiro" has been changed to "With notice icon digest ..." and something is changed by digesting the notice icon. An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be simultaneous with the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61 The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to the As described above, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanatory displays may be displayed in one symbol variation display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (i), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a warning icon I62 for swordsman . The swordsman's advance notice icon I62 is an icon for giving notice of transition to swords reach, as described later. In addition, at the timing when the warning icon I62 for swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" for notifying of that. Here, the advance notice icon may have a combination of one-to-many to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (j), the warning icon I62 of swordsman is displayed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Pakien" to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 125 (k), the bombardment of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character The animation ends. As described above, since the sword warning icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Here, visual difficulty means that visual recognition is more difficult than in the case where the advance notice icon does not overlap with the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, speaking of the fact that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is superimposed on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, the player can easily draw attention to the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the sword's notice icon I62. There are times when you can. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to notice the presence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur earlier or in the future.
In addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, the arrangement position of the notice icon I62 for the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display unit TT1, and even in this way, the same effect can be obtained. There are times when you can get it. In addition, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the warning icon I62 of swordsman, or even the content having nothing to do with the warning icon I62 of swordsmaster The content may be good, the content relating to the current rendering, or the content may not have anything to do with the current rendering. In FIG. 125 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is the display related to the notice icon and is the display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, but the display of the notice icon I62 of the swordswoman The content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62, although it is related to the content of the explanation as it happens. It may be configured to be When displaying the tutorial display in accordance with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed prior to the notice icon, or the notice icon may be displayed prior to the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon are displayed. It may be displayed simultaneously. The swordsman's notice icon I62 placed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading, as described later. It should be noted that the swordsman's advance notice icon I62 may be digested in the symbol variation display performed prior to the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading. Thereby, the overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started. In this example of presentation, the explanation has been made of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display section ST1.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" in the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (l). The stop display is performed in combination, and the display result of the off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "With notice icon digestion ..." to "Panda is the master of the temple". The relationship between the character of the lord and the character of the panda is described. That is, in this example of the effect, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the notice icon I62 of swordsman is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a new explanation display is started in a state where the swordsman advance notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, It may be timing later than the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 is the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanatory display a plurality of times in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 125 (m) shows that the symbol variation display performed one before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is finished. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of the lord" to "When Yatsushiro general moves ..." There is an explanation that something happens when Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general military item 224Fb are operated.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 125 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the display position of the first hold icon h11 is present. The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decor 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Be done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, and the expectation of whether or not the sword's notice icon I62 is digested is scolded. By doing this, it may be possible to make the player crave that the advance notice icon should be used earlier. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed according to the swing of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman. The effect display may not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, so that it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the warning icon I62 of the swinging sword player has moved upward and has been digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Pakien” to notify that the advance notice icon has been digested. As a result, the overlap state due to the warning icon I62 of the swordsman to the tutorial display section TT1 may be eliminated, and the player may be able to easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (a) following FIG. 125 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display is provided to notify of development into super reach. That is, in this example of rendering, the development to the reach of swordsmen is forecasted by the consumption of the notice icon I62 of swordsman. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and it is demonstrated that the reliability against a big hit in the sword reach is high. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows that a sword strike is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to a background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Kengo reach" is made. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c), a state is shown in which the character of the lord and the character of swordsman face each other. In addition, in the sword reach, the UI unit is framed out downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be framed out after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be framed out for each hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, when the explanation display is being performed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  The animation of the duel scene in FIG. 126 (d) continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It informs that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and promotes the operation of the effect button 136 to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation reception state is received. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be simultaneous with the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or even before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be later than the timing when the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (f), as shown in FIG. 126 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L The cut-in image to which the character display of “Z” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), the main character of the hero loses to the hostile swordsman, and in FIG. A combination of decorative symbols is derived and shaking is initiated.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (j). -Display is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2", and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In addition, if a notice icon (for example, the notice icon I10 of the fan mentioned above) for performing a resurrection effect after stocking once is displayed once, the background display changes from the background of the sword reach to the background of the castle town which is a normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. It is. Since Fig. 127 (a) to Fig. 127 (l) are similar to Fig. 125 (a) to Fig. 125 (l), the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 127 (m) shows that symbol fluctuation display performed one before the symbol fluctuation display targeted for pre-reading is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration A temporary stop is displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of 6 ". When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function to notify that the notice icon I63 of chance up, which will be described later, is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the notice icon I63 of chance up may be always stocked, or the notice icon I63 of chance up may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon symbol CS may include an image (including an enlarged and reduced image itself) imitating the notice icon I63 of chance up, and it may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, it is sufficient for the notice icon acquiring animation by the symbol to be displayed so that the notice icon can be identified. In addition, there may be one that does not correspond to the notice icon symbol CS and the notice icon I63 of chance increase. In addition, the types of preview icons displayed in the form may be more or less than the types of preview icons not displayed in the form. The type of notice icon displayed at the moment of animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to the character of Tonosama is the notice displayed at the moment of animation relating to the pattern (for example, animation performed by displaying the notice icon symbol CS). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed at the timing of both animations. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the icon of the pseudo linked notice may be displayed with two occasions, and may be stocked with two occasions with a change of 1 and may not be. Further, in the second decorative symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in any symbol row. The fluctuation icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "The panda is the master of the lord" to "When General Yatsui moves ...".

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the notice icon I63 of chance up jumps from the notice icon symbol CS as shown in FIG. 127 (n), and FIG. As shown in), it is a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and moved to the right of the swordsman's notice icon I62, and placed (stocked). Then, a voice "Pakien" is output from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the chance-up advance notice icon I63 has been stocked. In addition, the notification by audio | voice output in particular is not performed at the timing when the notice icon I63 of the chance up jumps out. This is because it is possible for the player to easily recognize that stocking of the notice icon I 63 of chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but notification by voice may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of advance notice icons. Further, according to this presentation example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Further, in this example of presentation, the timing of stocking is different between the notice icon I62 of swordsman and the notice icon I63 of chance up, and therefore, the contents of presentation until stocked are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration C—decoration 6”, and the display result of the off Is finalized. In addition, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the display position of the first hold icon h11 is The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (q), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (a) following FIG. 127 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of “decor 2” stop in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c respectively. It is displayed and the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (b), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the warning icon I62 for swords is the right side of the warning icon I62 for swords as well as the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The warning icon I63 of the chance up which is being stocked also depends on, so it may be possible to draw attention to the notice icon I63 of chance up being stocked in addition to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the warning icon I62 of the swinging sword player has moved upward and has been digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Pakien” to notify that the advance notice icon has been digested. In this rendering example, the overlap state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display unit TT1 is canceled, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still in the state of overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, when the warning icon I62 of swordsman is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the warning icon I62 of swords so that the warning icon I62 of swordsman is made to stand out, but in FIG. 128 (c) As shown, this effect display may be applied to the tutorial display section TT1 or the notice icon I63 for the chance up, and may be able to draw attention to the explanation display and the notice icon I63 for the chance up.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display is displayed to notify that the game will be developed to reach the sword. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the notice icon I63 of the chance up which was not digested before the transition to the super reach (Kenshi reach), and the display state of the notice icon I63 of the chance up May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 128 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the notice icon I63 of chance increase There is. Here, since a predetermined distance is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player. In some cases, it may be possible to easily recognize the notice icon I63 of chance increase.

  FIG. 128 (f) shows that a sword strike is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to a background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Kengo reach" is made. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (f), a state is shown in which the character of the lord and the character of swordsman face each other. In addition, in Ken-Age reach, the UI unit is framed out downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 moves downward, but the notice icon I63 for chance up is not affected and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 128 (g), animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (h), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the button image 136a together with the button acceptance time meter. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation reception state is established. Here, the advance notice icon I63 of the chance up starts swinging, and gives a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the advance notice icon I63 of chance up is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed according to the swing of the notice icon I63 of the chance up.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (i), as shown in FIG. 128 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display of “Z” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the notice icon I63 of the chance increase which has been swinging moves upward and is being digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (l), the second cut-in image in which the display image is extended in the upper right direction is displayed overlapping the first cut-in image and the big hit is displayed. It has been reported that the reliability of That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 of the chance up. Note that the first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is displayed by being replaced with the second cut-in image. May be Also, when the second cut-in image is displayed, if another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may overlap with the stock notice icon. The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon. The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon. In the embodiment described above and the embodiment described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is simultaneous with the timing at which the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be timing before execution of the production corresponding to the notice icon concerned is started, or timing after the execution of the production corresponding to the notice icon concerned may be started. Further, in this example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, although the area to be displayed is predetermined, and the notice icon stocked may overlap with another image at a certain trigger, but may not overlap with another image at a certain trigger. Can. When the notice icon I63 of chance up is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 128 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of the other cut-in display to be promoted, etc. You may or may not disappear.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (m), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy character, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. -Display is stopped by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decor 2", and the display result of the big hit is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  FIG. 129 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 129, after the advance notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third advance symbol icon is transported to the stock position by sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It shows how they are going.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The first hold icon h11 of the variation icon h0 and the two hold icons is in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, there may be a case where an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is performed. Further, in the example of the effect, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and "With advance notice icon digestion ..." is displayed. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and it is shown that the bomb icon I61 pops out downward from inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "With notice icon digestion ..." to "The swordsman is the lord of the lord". Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or at a timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or it may be a timing later than the timing when the bomb icon I 61 jumps out of the treasure box image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure chest image TR bursts. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to view. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordswoman notice icon I62. At this time, since the warning icon I62 for swordsman is overlapped on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to view. Then, at the timing when the warning notice icon I62 appears, a voice "Pakien" notifying that effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the warning notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides in the left direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N goes to the initial position so that the display of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman maintains the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the warning icon I62 for swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (ie, the warning icon I62 for swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L While moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the manner as in the next step), the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a6), it is shown that the warning icon I62 for swordsman is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the notice icon I62 for the swordsman moves completely from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap to the tutorial display section TT1 by the warning icon I62 for the swordswoman is canceled. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide in the right direction toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 (b1) to (b8), another example of the notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The first hold icon h11 of the variation icon h0 and the two hold icons is in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in this example of the effect, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed at the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is displayed as "the swordsman is the enemy of the lord" as an explanatory display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be a case where an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is performed. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 pops out upward from inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b3), the bomb icon I6 popped out of the treasure box image TR changes to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in an enlarged manner, and then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b4), the treasure box image TR Is erased. At this time, a voice "Pakien" notifying that effect is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the swordsman's advance notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I6 changes to the warning icon I62 for swordsman, or from the timing at which the bomb icon I6 changes to the warning icon I62 for swordsman The timing may be before the timing, may be after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the warning icon I62 of swordsman, or may be before the treasure box image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing when the treasure box image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure box image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides in the left direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), a portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see It may be

  After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman maintains the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the warning icon I62 for swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (ie, the warning icon I62 for swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L While moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the manner as in the next step), the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b6), it is shown that the warning icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide in the right direction toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N is returned to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is eliminated, and the player The instruction display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b 8), the swordsman's notice icon I 62 is displayed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT 1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a voice "Pakien" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman advance notice icon I62 has been stocked. As described above, since the sword warning icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  In this presentation example, for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5 '), the heights of the lower end edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N must be at least the first decorative symbol display device If the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L if the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in 208L is higher than the displayed position, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. It is possible to create a non-overlapping state, so that, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N on which the advance notice icon is displayed is in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As the slide movement is performed, the third decorative symbol table while visually recognizing the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by the device 208N.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 129, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to the third decorative symbol display device 208N after sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by transferring the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the notice icon to the tutorial display unit TT1 may be eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily viewed.

  FIG. 130 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 130, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally out of frame, and it is shown that the frame is inserted from below when the explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0, the first suspension icon h11, and the second suspension icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third suspension icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. There is. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 130 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged. In the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from the lower right frame of the display screen, and thereafter shown in FIG. 130 (a3) At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a4), “A lady is General Yatsushiro” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 130 (a5) to FIG. 130 (a6), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward and the first decorative symbol Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation to start the frame out, or may be deleted at the timing to start the animation to start the frame out, or the frame is displayed. It may be deleted at the timing after the start of the animation, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (a7), for example, the warning icon I62 for swordsmen is stocked in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 125 (e) to FIG. 130 (j), and then FIG. 130 (a8) As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, in FIG. 130 (a10) At the timing shown, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the back side of the stock sword advance warning icon I62, and as a result, it is overlapped with the sword advance notice icon I62.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a11), an explanatory display of “With notice icon digest ...” is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, the animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. When the instruction display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display unit TT1 goes out of the frame, the instruction display may be easy to visually recognize due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation of the frame out ends.

  Also in this example of presentation, as shown in FIG. 130 (b1) to (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises while the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is displayed. The overlapping state to the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Since FIG. 130 (b1) to FIG. 130 (b2) are as shown in FIG. 125 (p) to FIG. 130 (q) and described above, detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 131 shows that the tutorial display is performed also in the conversation presentation of the character in addition to the tutorial display in the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0, the first suspension icon h11, and the second suspension icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third suspension icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. There is. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), it is displayed that "A lady is a general Yatsushiro". In this rendering example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, along with the character CH1 of Princess Princess. The character CH1 of the Little Princess and the blowout part TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), an advance notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), the blowout portion TT2 displays an explanatory message that “gold is hotter than red” and an explanation regarding a notice made in the pachinko machine 100 is made. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Although the blowout part TT2 may overlap with the first decorative symbol, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the balloon portion TT2 or the balloon portion TT3 described later. Further, the display exactly the same as the display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on the balloon units TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller display area than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have larger or smaller font font than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. In addition, the font may be the same or different in the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3. In addition, although the blowout portions TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol may not overlap in a display area where other explanatory display is performed, but may overlap. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower frequency or a higher frequency at which the explanation display is performed than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be display areas divided by lines, or any one or both may be display areas not divided by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a2), the balloon part TT2 is erased together with the character CH of Princess Chibi. Also, the decorative symbol is still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The blowout part TT2 may also be configured to be displayable over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of off Is finalized. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, it is still displayed that "the lord is a general Yatsushiro".

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 131 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 The hold icons at the display position of the third hold icon h13 become the second hold icon h12, and move to the corresponding pedestal. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1, the character display of "Tomonashi is Yatsushiro general" is still performed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character is started, and it is shown that the Tonosama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. It is done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the left side of the display screen, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is again displayed together with the blowout part TT2, and a conversational effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a5), the balloon unit TT2 displays the explanation “Kenou reach is hot”, and a description on a specific super reach is given. The timing when the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, or may be simultaneous with the beginning of the throwing animation, or at the timing after the throwing animation has started It may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanation display unit) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the eyelid character GY1. ing. The whistle character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the balloon unit TT3 has an explanatory display that "Pander is intruded", and an explanation regarding the notice effect is given. Here, although the blowout part TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative symbol, it may be disposed at a position not overlapping. Note that the timing when the blowout part TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing when the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing when the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. The timing may be later than the timing when the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. In addition, the conversational effect by the character CH1 of the little princess and the character GY1 of the beard may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what has been displayed as "Don's grandfather is Yatsushiro" has been changed to "With notice icon digest ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is at a position overlapping the front side of the blowout part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the blowout part TT3 may be difficult to view. Therefore, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to easily draw attention to the display of the balloon portion TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the instruction display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3. The timing may be before the timing, or may be after the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the blowout part TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst may be at a position overlapping the front side of the blowout part TT3, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of characters displayed in the blowout part TT3.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, there is a case where the warning notice icon I62 of the swordsman is at a position overlapping the front side of the blowout part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the blowout part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the warning icon I62 for swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" for notifying of that. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is possible that the other image may be overlapped with only one of the displays of the two displayed conversational renderings (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3). It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), the warning icon I62 of swordsman is displayed at a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Pakien” to notify that the swordsman advance notice icon I 62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman advance notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman advance notice icon I62 may overlap with a plurality of display units (the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 131 (a1) to (a10), an explanatory display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloon (the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3) displayed together with the character. For example, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), while changing the display mode of the blowout part TT2 (for example, changing the color of the base of the blowout part TT2 to red), By displaying or the like, there may be a case where a notice display or a preview notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  FIGS. 131 (c1) to 131 (c3) show other examples of the content displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. It is shown that the swordsman notice icon I62 is starting to swing. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “a panda is a master of a lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the warning icon I62 of the sword sword that has been swinging moves upward and is being digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c3), the display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of the lord" to "Development to reach the Ken Osamu", and an explanation display of the event that will occur from now on Display) is made. By configuring in this way, the player may be able to easily understand that it occurs as the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Pakien" to notify that the advance notice icon has been digested.

  In the example of presentation described above, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having the function of displaying an explanation about the presentation, but for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 While changing (for example, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red) and displaying the letters "extensive heat" etc., there may be a case where a notice display or a preview notice display in the symbol variation display is also performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 132 shows that the UI unit displays the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 integrally in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. In addition, also in this demonstration example, when it becomes super reach, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, display is performed without frame out. You may leave it alone.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section surrounded by a rectangular frame is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a reserved icon display area is formed at the center. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit, and variation icons are displayed in a mode of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a1), since two variable displays of Special Figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is disposed on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), "Preliminary icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Jojo town stage" is displayed, It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball wins the first special view starting opening 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a2), the third special icon 1 reserved icon (third reserved icon h13) in the reserved icon display area Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of reservations has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the symbol variation display that has been the object of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode, but in a display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) of the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of off Is finalized. At this time, the change icon h0 is not deleted but may be deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Thereafter, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is similar to the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 125 (e) to (k) and described above.

  In FIG. 132 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the bomb icon I61 which has burst is changed to the notice icon I64 of the princess and is moved to the stage name display section ST2 In the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a5), it is shown that the display does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position) although it overlaps with the stage name display section ST2. . In this case, since the notice icon I64 of the princess is not yet displayed on the stage name display section ST2, the explanation display of "the castle town stage" is displayed, and at least a part is displayed by the notice icon I64 of the princess. It is in a difficult-to-see state. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 127), the explanation display is performed based on the trigger of the acquisition of the notice icon, such as the explanation display is erased before overlapping with the stage name display section ST2. May be configured to be different from each other. Also, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Also, a pattern (so-called gusset) may be provided in which the advance notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display unit ST2 and the advance notice icon may not be acquired. In this case, even if the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display may not be deleted (that is, in the case of the cassette pattern, the explanation display is not deleted, and it is true that In the true pattern in which the advance notice icon is acquired, for example, the description display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display unit ST2. In this case, when the dark area is hidden, at least a part of the process up to the acquisition of the notice icon from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation, the execution of the case, is executed in the state where the dark effect is being executed. Specifically, after the bombing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started, the darkening effect is First, when the dark transition effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the state in which the explanation display is displayed). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both of the sound and the lamp effect may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (a6), when the princess advance notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display section ST2, “jojocho, which has been displayed so far in the stage name display section ST2 The description display of the "stage" is erased and functions as an area for displaying a notice icon exclusively. Therefore, in the upper part of the stage name display section ST2, character display of "STOCK" is performed. That is, according to this presentation example, when the advance notice icon is stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the display of the stage name is not performed. Note that the scene in which the advance notice icon is digested may overlap with the execution of the above-described darkening effect. In addition, when the notice icon is acquired, the moving means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the like) performs an effect of moving, whereby the movable means is the acquired notice icon And at least a part of the notice icons that have already been acquired (such as the whole of at least one notice icon among a plurality of notice icons, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may In addition, the effect that the movable means is moved during at least a part of period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is performed, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means It is also good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" The stop display is performed in combination, and the display result of the off is decided. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the display of the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done. Further, in this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the stage is changed along with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the beach. That is, in this presentation example, even if the stage name display unit ST2 is in the non-display state, it is possible to change the stage, and when the stage name display unit ST2 is in the non-display state, It is not displayed. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and then the stage name may be erased and the notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 132 (a9) shows that five notice icons have been stocked. That is, although up to three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is erased and functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this presentation example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanation display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a9), first, the notice icon I64 for the princess and two pseudo linked notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and then the tutorial display In TT4, a warning icon I62 of swordsman and a notice icon I63 of chance improvement are stocked.

  In this presentation example, for example, when the notice icons are digested in order from the left side, an animation may be performed to change the display position of the notice icons other than the digested notice icons. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 132 (a9), when the princess advance notice icon I 64 is digested, two pseudo linked advance notice icons I 65 move to the left one by one, respectively, and a tutorial display is performed. The notice icon I62 for swordsman displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the notice icon I63 for chance up displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left one Do. When the notice icon displayed in the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of the other display may not be affected by instantaneous movement or the like.

  Then, when all the notice icons displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed in the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed in the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In the case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the display of the stage name do not have to be resumed. The resumption of the explanation display may be resumed (for example, reopened after the super reach) within the same change display as the symbol change display in which the advance notice icon is digested. In addition, when the explanatory display is resumed, the exact same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop type (scroll type) display.

  Further, the type of notice icon to be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of notice icon to be displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, the other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and when the stocked number becomes three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is displayed as a tutorial display section Up to three more TT4 can be stocked, but if the number is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stock is three, then the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is additionally 3 in the stage name display section ST2. It may be possible to stock up to one.

  Also, in this example, before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display unit ST2 or the tutorial display unit TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 or a part of the tutorial display unit TT4 In the state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the advance notice icon is completely contained in the stage name display section ST2 or the tutorial display section TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. In addition, immediately after starting to move upward at the time of digesting the advance notice icon, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. In addition, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display unit ST2 or the tutorial display unit TT4, the explanation display is displayed, and immediately after starting to move upward when the notice icon is digested, the explanation display is displayed It may not be done.

  Further, in this presentation example, although the above-described one is shown as an example of the throwing animation as shown in FIG. 125, it is needless to say that it is possible to combine the modes shown in the other drawings.

  In addition, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, there may be, for example, a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, even if a plurality of notice icons are digested into a tooth loss, another notice icon is moved so as to be filled in an empty place. You don't have to move.

  In addition, it is possible to distribute to the 1st special figure winning a prize opening and the 2nd special figure winning a prize opening per one starting mouth, in the normal game state it is possible to hold 8 design fluctuation displays, the so-called MAX 8 machines (8 In the case of a store-in-order machine), the display area for the hold icon display area is prepared in advance for four hold areas, and when the hold is four, the display area is expanded to five minutes. Or, it may be expanded up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed on the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIGS. 132 (b1) to 132 (b2) show the situation where the stock notice icon is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon I63 of chance up is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In addition, the 1st decorative symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol are changing display.

  Then, at the timing when the advance notice icon I63 for chance up is digested, as shown in FIG. 131 (b2), the situation is shown that the advance notice icon I63 for chance up moves upward. In this example, even if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, even if the notice icon I63 of the chance up moves from the display position in the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display is performed. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display unit TT4. The display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the advance notice icon has moved from the display position in the stage name display unit ST2.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing another example of effects according to the present embodiment in stages.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), "With advance notice icon digestion ..." is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged.

  FIGS. 133A1 to 133A3 illustrate how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 133 (a1) shows the castle town stage. In addition, about the display mode of this castle town stage, since it is the same as the mode shown by FIG. 125 (a), it abbreviate | omits description.

  FIG. 133 (a2) shows the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in the space stage is different from the above-mentioned castle town stage in that a UI unit is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section of the space stage, the variation icon display area is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in a manner mounted on a pedestal. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side vertically. The display position of the stock notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle stage shown in FIG. 125 and described above. The hold icon display area is a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11, h12 and h13 in the space stage is different from the display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the castle town stage, and forms a pentagon. In the display form of the white pentagon, the display form of the pre-reading advance notice is, for example, the display form of a blue pentagon. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. It has become. In addition, in the tutorial display area TT1 disposed below the reserved icon display area, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Thus, in the space stage, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different, the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 133 (a3) shows a state immediately after transition from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, the explanation display becomes non-display, and the non-display state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed. Be done. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the warning icon I62 of swordsman is overlapped with the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. The instruction display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is in a non-display state in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when transitioning to another stage (for example, a space stage), the explanatory display is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition May be displayed.

  Fig. 133 (b1) to (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the notice icon is stocked. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The first hold icon h11 of the variation icon h0 and the two hold icons is in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed below the display screen, and "With notice icon digest ..." is displayed. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is erased. Here, the button icon IBT can be stocked in a plurality, and is an icon for notifying in advance of the number of occurrences of the effect of operating the button during a specific effect, for example, the number of occurrences of the button operation effect is large It can be said that the greater the confidence against a big hit, that is, the more the stock of button icons IBT, the more likely it is a big hit.

  Thus, according to this presentation example, it can be said that performing another display is sacrificed when the notice icon is displayed.

  FIG. 134 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 134 shows another example of rendering using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned character of the lord.

  FIGS. 134 (a1) to (a6) show that the notice icon that has already been stocked is changed by the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although both the variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), "dono is a general Yatsushiro" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 134 (a1), a notice icon I66 of hatena is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is timed to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested. Sometimes it acts as a notice icon. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character is started, and it is shown that the Tonosama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. It is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a3), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a4), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what has been displayed as "Don's grandfather is Yatsushiro" has been changed to "With notice icon digest ...".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord arrives at the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst is superimposed on the front side of the notice icon I66 of Hatena, and at least a part of the notice icon I66 of Hatena is considered to be difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is at least as large as covering the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon which is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the notice icon I66 of Hatena changes to the notice icon I62 of the sword master. Then, the voice "Pakien" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I66 of Hatena has been changed to the notice icon I62 of swordsman. At this time, since the warning icon I62 for swordsman is overlapped at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the instruction display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a6), what has been displayed as "in advance notice icon digestion ..." is changed to "Kengo is the enemy of the lord." The timing of changing the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the warning icon I62 for the swordsman is started, or from the timing at which the display of the notification icon I62 for the swordsman is started The timing may be earlier, or may be later than the timing at which the display of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of stock presentation of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change presentation of the stocked notice icon.

  FIGS. 134 (b1) to (b3) show that the notice icon that has already been stocked is changed by the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (b1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), and FIG. 134 (b3) is the same as FIG. 134 (a6), so the description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display section TT1 in FIG. 134 (b3), "With advance notice icon digestion ..." is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 134 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tonosama character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst is displayed overlapping on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, at least a part of the notice icon I66 of the hatena and the tutorial display unit TT1 are considered to be difficult to view, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 134 (a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, all notice icons may be overlapped. In this way, it can be said that a part of stock presentation of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change presentation of the stocked notice icon.

  In FIG. 134 (c1) to FIG. 134 (c3), it is shown that the notice icon already stocked is changed by the throwing animation. Since FIG. 134 (c1) is the same as FIG. 134 (b1 and FIG. 134 (c2) is the same as FIG. 134 (b2), the description of these drawings is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c2), after the bomb icon I61 bursts, as shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased and the notice icon I66 of Hatena notices the swordsman It has changed to the icon I 62 and the notice icon I 63 of chance up. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. Furthermore, in other words, it is possible to say that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the preview item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

  FIGS. 134 (d1) to (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes by the throwing animation. Since FIG. 134 (d1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), the description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 134 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tonosama character is displayed on the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the advance notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is considered to be difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is at least as large as covering the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon which is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red )doing. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “pong” to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  As described above, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 134, at least a part of the animation at the time of acquiring the advance notice icon is the same as a part of the other animations. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol) The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 135 (a1) to (a7) show that when a specific advance notice icon is stocked, notification of the mission achievement is performed by displaying that effect. Since FIGS. 135 (a1) to 135 (a3) are the same as FIGS. 125 (h) to 125 (j), descriptions of these drawings are omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 135 (a3) is performed, as shown in FIG. 135 (a4), the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the achievement display unit KM1 as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed above the tutorial display unit TT1 It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays "Kengo stock" indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. That is, when the mission to acquire the warning icon I62 of swordsman is imposed, when the warning icon I62 for swords horse is stocked, notification of the achievement of the mission is indicated by displaying that effect on the achievement display unit KM1. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 may be displayed to explicitly notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 for prescribing that the expectation to the jackpot is extremely high is performed. It is also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be simultaneous with the end of the throwing animation, or may be a timing before the throwing animation ends, or after the throwing animation has ended It may be timing. In addition, since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked warning notice icon I62 of the sword sword, the achievement display unit KM1 may be able to be noticed. The notice icon to be stocked may be displayed overlapping on the achievement display unit KM1.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, “decoration 1—decoration C—decoration A temporary stop is displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of 6 ". The fluctuation icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 135 (a6) to the same figure (a7), the notice icon I63 of chance up from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (a6), the advance notice icon I63 of chance increase overlaps the front side of the achievement display unit KM1, making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the explanation display in the achievement display unit KM1.

  In this presentation example, for example, when the notice icon is stocked, the display position of the notice icon is determined in advance by the type of the notice icon, the achievement display unit KM1 according to the kind of the notice icon to be digested. It is also possible to eliminate the overlap. Also, for example, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are stocked and when the remaining notice icons are moved to align at a predetermined interval by digesting the notice icons, one of the notice icons is selected. When the predetermined number of notice icons are digested, the overlap to the achievement display unit KM1 by the notice icons may be eliminated.

  In FIGS. 135 (b1) to 135 (b3), for example, one example of the operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operating at the time of development to a super reach or becoming a big hit is It is shown.

  FIG. 135 (b1) shows that super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of the super reach is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit frames out downward at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed above the display screen, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the special view 1 and the special view 2 The fourth symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to pay attention to the explanation display while giving a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are adjacent to each other, are integrated to be along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed at the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and The image to which the character of "holiday" was given in the frame is also displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the family crest 224E disposed under the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and is over the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The eight generation character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which have been wrapped and arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, move downward to overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There is a case. In addition, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the character may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa or the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to pay attention to the explanation display while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  In (c1) to (c4) of FIG. 135, the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a fixed period in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed. A state of informing the state is shown.

  FIG. 135 (c1) shows that the animation of the duel scene in the sword strike is being performed. FIG. 135 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 126 (d), but the stage name display section ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a fixed period of time below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in the normal state (the default display state).

  In (c2) of FIG. 135, animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in (c2) of FIG. The display mode of 136 a is displayed in a display mode prompting the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and promotes the operation of the effect button 136 to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation reception state is received.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c3), as shown in FIG. 135 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L The cut-in image to which the character display of “Z” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode on the assumption that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this presentation example, as described above, for example, as described above, when the operation of the button preview icon (the first button preview icon I4 or the second button preview icon I11) becomes effective, as described above. In some cases, the player may be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 135 (d) shows an example of the notice icon applicable in the present embodiment. For example, in addition to Hatena's notice icon I66 described above, pseudo-linked notice icon I65, chance-up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 The panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the warning icon I67 for promoting holding is an icon for notifying that the display mode of the holding icon or the variation icon is changed to a display mode with a higher degree of reliability for a big hit when it is digested. In addition, the pseudo-series notice icon is an icon for predicting that the simulated series effect will be performed when it is digested. Further, the notice icon I68 of chance eye is an icon for giving notice that the chance eye is derived as the display result of the decorative symbol when it is digested. In addition, the notice icon of the princess is an icon for giving notice of transition to the pre-reading zone when it is digested. Also, the panda's notice icon I69 is an icon for giving notice that the panda intrudes into an effect when it is digested, and that a big hit will surely be made.

  FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the advance notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIGS. 136 (a1) to (a7) show how the explanatory display (for example, the display of “The swordsman is the enemy's enemy”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 136, the left side is overlapped with the warning icon I62 for swordsman.

  FIG. 136 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “The sword is the enemy of the lord” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a2), only the portion of "Kenou wa" is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. There is. In these cases, since none of the characters overlap the warning icon I62 of the swordsman, there may be cases where the explanation display can be clearly recognized.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a4), the entire text “Kenryo is your lord” is displayed. In this case, at least the character portion of "Kengo" is overlapped with the predator icon I62 of the Kendo, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to view.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a5), the part “Ken-A-Wa” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the part “Don's lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "Hondon-sama" is overlapped with the warning icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to view.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a6), the part “Ken is the lord” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the section “It is a enemy” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "in the enemy" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this effect example, the characters overlapped by the advance notice icon are continuously changed by the scroll of the explanation display. In addition, the scrolling of the explanation display results in a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. In addition, when scrolling the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  136 (b1) to (b7) show the tutorial display section TT1 while the scroll display of the explanatory display (for example, the display of “The sword is the enemy of the lord”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. The situation in the case where the display (for example, the notice display of "superheat") is performed is shown. 136 (b1) to (b3), and FIG. 136 (b6) to (b7) respectively indicate FIG. 136 (a1) to FIG. (A3) and FIG. 136 (a6) to FIG. As it is the same as FIG. (A7), the detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanatory display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 136 (b3), as shown in FIG. 136 (b4) to FIG. 136 (b5), a notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The notice display changes the color of the base of the tutorial display section TT1 to red, and displays the letters "superheat", etc., and performs a notice display or a prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display. While the advance notice is displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make it difficult to visually recognize the explanation display, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  After that, when the advance notice display ends, as shown in FIG. 136 (b6), the scroll display of the explanation display resumes. The scroll display of the explanation display proceeds in the background even during the period when the advance notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background It is an aspect. In addition, the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode when it is interrupted. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (b7), the scroll display of the explanation display is ended. Although the advance notice display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  Figures 136 (c1) to (c5) show an explanatory display (for example, the display of "The swordsman is the enemy's enemy") displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in a state in which multiple notice icons are stocked During display, it is shown that the other notice icons move as the notice icons are digested.

  In FIG. 136 (c1), the notice icon I63 for chance up, which is the notice icon to be digested first, and the notice icon I62 for swordsman, the notice icon to be digested second, is the notice icon I63 for chance up. It is arranged side by side on the right side, and it is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is overlapped on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (c2), when the notice icon I63 of chance up is digested, as shown in FIG. 136 (c3) to FIG. 136 (c5), the notice icon I62 of swordsman is up chance The notice icon moving animation is performed to move to the position where the notice icon I63 was displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with respect to the tutorial display unit TT1 according to the warning icon I62 of the sword player changes continuously, the overlap state is released and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easy to see May be That is, in the example of the effect, the preview icon does not overlap or does not overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 depending on the number of stocked preview icons. When the instruction display is scrolled in the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon may overlap with the scroll display of the explanation display.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 137 shows that the stocked notice icon is enlarged when the notice icon is stocked.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the UI unit UI1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen is shown. In the UI unit UI1, a reserved icon display area in which four reserved icons can be displayed in a substantially square shaped display frame is formed on the left side, and four notice icons in the upper stage on the right side are respectively displayed in a substantially square shaped display frame A notice icon display area that can be displayed on the upper right is formed, and a tutorial display unit TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variation icon display area is displayed above the UI unit UI1 at a position close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variation icon display area is disposed above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (a), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0, the first suspension icon h11, and the second suspension icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third suspension icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. There is. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 137 (a), it is displayed that "the lord is a general Yatsushiro". Further, two pseudo linked notice icons I 65 are stocked in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. There is a case where it is displayed in some cases. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is at a position separated from the display area of the decoration pattern, it is not overlapped with the decoration pattern, and the decoration pattern is not displayed. Never overlap. In addition, the notice icon of a normal display aspect may overlap with a decorative symbol, and may overlap an decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 137 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display section ST1, and the display mode is configured to change when instructing the operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a may be always displayed or may not be displayed. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character is started, and it is shown that the Tonosama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. It is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137C, it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61.

  Then, display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (d). In addition, although the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative symbol in the variable display, the bomb icon I61 may overlap with the decorative symbol in the variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lady reaches the display frame where the third preview icon of the preview icon display area is stocked and bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I 61 has exploded overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon of the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon of the notice icon display area is stocked At least a part of the display frame is considered to be difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is at least as large as covering the display frame in which the third preview icon of the preview icon display area is stocked. By this, it is notified that the third notice icon is stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 or the display frame of the reserved display area where the bomb icon I61 is ruptured. When the notice icon is stocked in the display frame and the display frame, the notice icon overlaps the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (f), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode is changed to the effect EF1 of the flame that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with a flame. Therefore, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12 and h13, and the tutorial display unit TT5 are also difficult to view together with the notice icon displayed on the UI unit UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be in a non-display state, or the entire UI unit UI1 may be overlapped by the flame effect EF1 with the UI unit UI1 being displayed. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI unit UI1, and may be able to visually recognize at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 and the tutorial display unit TT5. It may be difficult to see only.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon enlargement animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is a flame effect. The appearance of appearing from within EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which a first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which a second notice icon is stocked. In the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked, the notice icon I62 of swordsman is newly displayed, and it is informed that the notice icon I62 of swordsman is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is Each is enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the swordsman advance notice icon I62 has been stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged and displayed, and the first notice A part of the left side of the display frame in which the icon is stocked and a part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Ru. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also enlarged and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, it is determined that at least a part of the pseudo continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is difficult to view. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap on the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 respectively. Because of this, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is considered to be more difficult to view. In other words, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo run warning icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to view. Further, since the notice icon display frame YF is displayed overlapping at least a part of the decorative symbol in the variable display, it may be possible to more easily understand that the notice icon has been stocked. In other words, it can be said that the preview icon displayed in an enlarged manner may overlap the decorative pattern. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the decorative pattern. Also, in this example, when an effect is produced in which a notice icon is stocked, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed (overlap) prior to other displays (for example, notice display). However, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. At the approximate center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display frame is displayed, in which a third notice icon with the notice icon I62 of swordsman being displayed is stocked. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed to the maximum size. That is, the stocked warning notice icon I62 of the sword sword and the pseudo linked notice icon I65 already stocked are enlarged display modes (in this display example, “the second display mode”) larger than the normal display mode (the first display mode). In some cases, it may be referred to as At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked, and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked They are displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, at least a part of the pseudo continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is considered to be difficult to view. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap on the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 respectively. Because of this, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is considered to be more difficult to view. That is, at least a portion of the pseudo linked notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is viewed It can be said that it is considered difficult. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a part of the pseudo continuous notice icon I 65 already stocked is made visible when the third notice icon is in the enlarged display mode. The display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is displayed on the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked, since the entire display frame is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The pseudo linked notice icon I65 is hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon reduction animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. It is displayed to move toward. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and the visual recognition is made easy. Furthermore, a portion of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo-link displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked A part of the notice icon I65 is made visible. That is, in this presentation example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually made visible. In other words, it is possible to say that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increased by the notice icon reduction animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduction animation of the advance notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. It is displayed to move toward. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF (two pseudo linked notice icons I65 and All notice icons I62 of swordsmen are made visible. That is, although the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode, it can be said that all of the notice icons are visible.

  Thereafter, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). That is, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased, and the flame effect EF1 overlapped with the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. , UI unit UI1 is displayed again. At this time, in addition to the two pseudo linked notice icons I65, it is shown that the notice icon I62 for the swordsman is stocked in the notice icon display area. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT5, what is displayed as "Don's grandfather is Yatsushiro" has been changed to "Panda is the master of Tonashi". Here, the flame effect EF1 may be deleted after the notice icon display frame YF is deleted, or the notice icon display frame YF may be deleted after the flame effect EF1 is deleted. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be simultaneously erased. In addition, the display change of the tutorial display unit TT5 may be a timing before the effect EF1 of the flame is erased, or may be a timing after the effect EF1 of the flame is erased. Further, the display change of the tutorial display unit TT5 may not be performed. In addition, the display of the variation icon or the hold icon may be performed at the timing between the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). In this case, the configuration may be made such that the increase in retention is reflected firmly.

  In this example, although the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described, for example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the above-described notice icon enlargement animation is completed, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is at the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end of the notice icon display frame YF is made visible. A background display appears in the area on the left side of the left end of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this case, since there is no notice icon which is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a notice icon which is considered to be difficult to be recognized does not occur.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to direct the stock of the notice icon. For example, the effect EF1 of the flame is displayed. After that, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (i) without passing through the notice icon enlargement animation, or, for example, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. After being displayed as shown in i), the UI unit UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (l) without passing through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area May be displayed.

  Further, in this example of presentation, the stock notice icon is enlarged and then displayed in the normal display mode by reduction animation, but for example, the notice icon is digested in the enlarged display state In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without being displayed in the normal display mode.

  Also, in this example of the effect, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to display the stock notice icon in an enlarged manner, but when the notice icon is digested, After the warning icon to be digested is enlarged and displayed (displayed in the second display mode), it may be digested, and when digesting, the warning icon is enlarged and displayed (displayed in the second display mode) You may do so.

  Further, in this presentation example, the notice icon enlargement animation performed when stocking the notice icon may be partially canceled by the timing of the stock. For example, in the stock of the notice icon by the action of the character (for example, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord), if it is performed just before the stop display of the decorative symbol, part is canceled (for example, the second half May be canceled) or, for example, in the stock of a notice icon by stopping of a special symbol such as a pseudo run symbol, it may not be canceled.

  Also, the manner of the enlarged display may differ depending on the number of notice icons already stocked and the number of notice icons stocked. Also, the form of the enlarged display may be the same regardless of the number of notice icons.

  In addition, if the hold increases when the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the start opening) blinks, or the effect sound is output. There may be etc. This may be performed, for example, at the time of the hold increase, which is the target of pre-reading at the start winning combination. In addition, even when holding is increased when the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the start opening) blinks, and the effect sound is output. Etc., and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the advance notice icon is finished. By doing this, the player notices the change of the display mode of the hold icon. There are cases where it can be made easier.

  In addition, at the time of the enlarged display of the advance notice icon, the variable icon and the hold icon may be also enlarged and displayed. In this case, if the hold increases during the enlarged display of the advance notice icon, the hold increase animation may not be performed.

  Further, in the above description, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “extensive heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-link”, etc.), it may be referred to as a notice text.

  Next, an example of the structure of the rendering device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 138 is a schematic explanatory view showing an example of the structure of the rendering device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, a plate shape extending substantially in parallel with the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. The transparent protective member CL is, for example, raised from the rear end of the stage 244, has a rib RB formed at the upper end, and protrudes forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. There is. The rib RB prevents the game ball jumping into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to a collision with the effect movable body or the like arranged in the.

  Fig. 138 (a-2) shows that the effect display is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 by applying the effect device 206 shown in Fig. 138 (a-1). In the example shown in FIG. 138, a crest 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208, and between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. It is configured to be displaceable. As shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the suspension display of the square shape of the fluctuation icon h0 at the center thereof It is displayed in the form accommodated in the frame FL1, and on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although both the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode but is displayed in a blinking manner, and thus the prefetching is performed. It has become a display mode of the notice. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. The tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2) is in the non-display state. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is displayed preferentially during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol It may overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), the character CH1 of the little princess is displayed along with the blowout part TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. The blowout part TT3 is displayed. In the balloon part TT2, the words "Where is the rabbit ~" is displayed, and in the balloon part TT3, the words "here" are displayed. The blowout portions TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbol in the variable display, and are in a state in which visual recognition is difficult as compared with a state in which the decorative symbol in the variable display is not overlapped. In addition, a part of the UI unit (the suspension display frame FL1 and the fluctuation icon h0 and the suspension icons h11 and h12 displayed in the suspension display frame FL1) and the character CH1 of the Little Princess overlap with the transparent protection member CL and are transparent. The visibility may be reduced as compared with the case where it does not overlap with the protective member CL.

  In FIG. 138 (a-3), it is shown that the family crest item 224E is elevated and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the holding display frame FL1 is expanded to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-3), a part of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the family crest 224E.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), the family crest 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlapping state with the decorative symbol display device 208 is resolved. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the up-down direction in the hold display frame FL1 expanded and displayed. It is done. In addition, while balloon portion TT2 is overlapped with the expanded portion of the extended display holding display frame FL1, it is considered as being difficult to view as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the expanded portion of the extended display holding display frame FL1 Because the balloon portion TT3 is displayed above the holding display frame FL1, it is not overlapped. Further, the decorative symbol in the variable display is overlapped with the holding display frame FL1, and it is considered that a part of the decorative symbol is difficult to be recognized as compared with the case where the overlapping display frame FL1 is not overlapped. In the present embodiment, the extended display of the holding display frame FL1 can be performed to the upper side of the transparent protection member CL by the expanded display, so the visibility of the holding display frame FL1 may be improved.

  FIG. 138 (b-1) shows the above-mentioned state shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), and FIG. 138 (b-1) shows the cross section along the line AA of FIG. The situation is represented schematically.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-1a), between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, the size of the decorative symbol display device 208 is approximately the same as the size of the decorative symbol display device 208 in addition to the above-mentioned family crest 224E. A light guide plate IL is disposed. The light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (b-1), the family crest 224 E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this manner, a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is viewed through only the light guide plate IL, and the other part is through the transparent protection member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visible. The configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above with reference to FIG. 114, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 138 (b-2) shows the above-mentioned state shown in FIG. 138 (a-3), and FIG. 138 (b-2) shows the cross section B-B in FIG. 138 (b-2). The situation is represented schematically.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-2a), the family crest 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the family crest 224E is between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to view as compared with the case where there is no intervening.

  FIG. 138 (b-3) shows the above-mentioned state shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), and FIG. The situation is represented schematically.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-3a), since the family crest 224E has been moved to the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the player can see that the family crest 224E is between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. As compared with the case where it intervenes, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in an easily visible state via the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL.

  138 (c-1) and FIG. 138 (c-2) are diagrams for explaining an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (c-1), the above-described suspension display frame FL1 is disposed in the first layer LY1. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 138 (c-2), the portion (expanded portion) expanded upward in the holding display frame FL1 is a second layer arranged behind the first layer LY1. It is arranged in layer LY2. The ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extension portion of the hold display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged respectively in the two layers constituting the reserve display frame FL1, and, for example, a speech notice, a decoration pattern, a notice display (for example, a display in which an arrow is flying) Etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the extended portion of the holding display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that parts do not straddle two or more layers and are configured as one image data. You may

  Note that the display mode of the UI unit may be configured to be different depending on an effect stage and an effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “effect stage etc.”) corresponding to each game state, or may be common.

  In addition, at least a part of the effect stage or the like may be selectable by the operation of the player, or changes according to the progress of the game (for example, every change). It is also good.

  In addition, the operation “the suspension display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward”, which is a characteristic operation of the present invention, is at least a part of a rendering stage or the like (for example, a rendering stage or the like in a non-electric support state It may be performed on a part of the effect stage etc. which can be selected by the player during display of the setting screen during the change, or may be performed on all the effect stages etc.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 139-154 are figures which show gradually the modification of the presentation centering on the decorative symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. In FIGS. 139 to 154, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 139 to 150, 152 and 154 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. In addition, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, in FIG. 139-FIG. 150 and FIG. 152-FIG. 154, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a pending change announcement effect as an advance announcement announcement effect by the pending icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 140 is a staged continuation of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI portion, a variation icon h0 is at the center thereof. It is displayed in the form accommodated in the rectangular holding display frame FL1, and a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0 There is. In the broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal of the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and display of various information related to games and effects (tutorial display) is performed, and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), “Tomon-sama is a general Yatsushiro” is displayed, and a description is given regarding the character of the courtesan. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is displayed preferentially during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol It may overlap. Here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when transitioning to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. Conversely, when displaying ordinary stage names in white, it is not hot as compared to the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen to display the stage name and reach name currently being used. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display section ST1, and the display mode is configured to change when instructing the operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a may be always displayed or may not be displayed. Also, the UI unit may be always displayed or may not be displayed. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. ing. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball wins the first special view starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third special icon holding area h13 (third holding icon in the reserved icon display area) Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of reservations has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the symbol variation display that has been the object of the pre-reading. However, in this presentation example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b).

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), the hold icon h13 of the third special view 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode (for example, the display mode blinking in white) of the prefetch notice. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice of “Pokeon” to notify that the pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed. The voice output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 may change before the voice output from the speaker 120. May be In this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Further, the timing of the change of the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of the sound output from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. In addition, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Little. The character CH1 of the Little Princess and the blowout part TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), an advance notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), the blowout portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation “this variation is ...”, and a suggestion regarding a notice made in this pachinko machine 100 is made. Although the blowout part TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, it may be arranged at a position where it is not overlapped. Also, the character CH1 of the little princess and the balloon part TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, or the balloon TT2 may be displayed after the character CH1 of the little child is displayed, and the balloon TT2 is displayed. Chibi princess character CH1 may be displayed after being played. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows fall from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as advance notices, and overlap the decorative symbols in the variable display. In addition, the blowout part TT2 is changed to the explanation display of "Mately ...". Here, the timing at which the display of a plurality of arrows is started may be the timing before the explanation display of the blowout part TT2 is changed, or the timing after the description display of the blowout part TT2 is changed. It may be the same timing as the timing when the explanation display of the blowout part TT2 is changed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. In addition, although the character CH1 of the little princess and the blowout part TT2 are overlapped with a plurality of arrows, they may be overlapped with a plurality of arrows. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 becomes non-display may be the timing after the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed. It is also good. The timing at which the instruction display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display on the balloon unit TT2 is changed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (e), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which the left symbol is stopped and displayed with “deco 6”. In addition, the left pattern stopped and displayed by “decoration 6” is displayed so as to overlap a part of the character CH1 of Little Princess and the blowout part TT2. Also, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which the right symbol is stopped and displayed with “decoration 2”. Note that the plurality of arrows and the character CH1 of Little Princess have been deleted. The timing at which a plurality of arrows are deleted may be after the character CH1 of Princess Chibi has been deleted, or before the character CH1 of Princess Chibi has been deleted, or the character CH1 of Chibi Princess has been deleted. It may be the same timing as the timing. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 2", the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" After the swing fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is decided. In addition, the second decorative symbol variably displayed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed at the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" at the timing of the decision stop display of the first decorative symbol. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or may be displayed. Also, it may be configured to be erased before the swing fluctuation state of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which symbol stop display is continued from FIG. 139 (g).

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the display position of is placed in the hold display frame FL1 in which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11 The hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1, the character display of "The panda is a master of the lord" is performed. Here, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the timing after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be the same timing as the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or the variation of the decorative symbol It may be timing before the start of display. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed along with the character CH1 of Princess Princess on the left side of the display screen. It is displayed. In the balloon part TT2, the words "Where is the rabbit ~" are displayed, and the conversation announcement is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows come down again from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. In this manner, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous advance notice performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays in succession. Note that, in this effect example, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed as in FIG. 139 (c), but another character may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT3 as a third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the eyelid character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The whistle character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (d), in response to the speech display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, speech display of "here" is made on the blowout part TT3, and the conversation announcement continues. Here, the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative pattern, but the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 may overlap with the first decorative pattern. In addition, the brow character GY1 and the blowout part TT3 may be arranged at a position not overlapping the first decorative pattern. Also, the spider character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the spider character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The brow character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of the princess of the little princess and the character GY1 of the beard may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 becomes non-display may be the timing after the crow character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the crow character GY1 is displayed It is also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased may be the same timing as the timing at which the decoy character GY1 is displayed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Also, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), it is shown that the family crest 224E ascends from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, after moving, the family crest 224E completely covers the holding display frame FL1 and moves a part of the first holding icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one part of the balloon part TT2. It covers each part.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, extended animation (extended animation) of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, and the reserved display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and a family crest item 224E. It is shown that it has appeared above than. That is, it can be said that a portion where the pending display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest 224E appears. Further, although the suspension display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps with the blowout part TT2 and overlaps with the blowout part TT2, it does not overlap with the blowout part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this example of presentation, there may be cases where the speech display preview (the blowout part TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the holding display frame FL1 is expanded. Thus, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expansion display mode. In this example of presentation, although the figure of reservation display frame FL1 before expansion and reservation display frame FL1 after expansion is expressed, that by which expansion display frame FL1 expands in a step-by-step manner is included in extended animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the appearance of the character NJ1 of the ninja is shown in the upper part of the holding display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the part c is not overlapped with the family crest 224E.

  FIG. 140 (h) shows that the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 moves toward the second hold icon h12 for which the advance notice is given. Note that the effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side rather than the display of the conversation notice by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the nephew, or may be displayed on the rear side. . In addition, it can be said that the effect by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the extended portion of the suspension display frame FL1 after expansion. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1 which is an example of the effect display is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. Furthermore, in other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area in the extended display mode holding display frame FL1 and the area in the default display mode holding display frame FL1. It can also be said. The effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an advance notice or an effect of the change advance notice. Although the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is associated with the effect (effect by the character NJ1 of the ninja) performed in the hold display frame FL1 after expansion, it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 140 (i) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is directed to the second holding icon h12. As shown in FIG. 140 (i), the area in the frame of the suspension display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is configured to include the area in the frame of the suspension display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the suspension display frame FL1 of the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area within the frame of the suspension display frame FL1 of the default display mode is increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second holding icon h12 explodes is performed. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second reserved icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first reserved icon h11. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to have an expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes and the reliability to the big hit may become high.

  Thereafter, FIG. 140 (k) shows that the luminescent color of the family crest 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that notification has been made that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, a predetermined light emitting means (such as an LED contained in the family crest 224E or an LED provided at the special view starting opening) is a holding icon prior to the change of the holding icon as the target of pre-reading. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after change of.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily for visual recognition. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice of "Pokeon" is outputted from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h12 may change after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 The change of aspect and the audio output may be performed simultaneously. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and thereafter, the hold display frame FL1 is shown in FIG. Animation display (reduction animation) is performed to reduce the shape to be shown. Note that a reduced animation may be performed without deleting the ninja character NJ1. In this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed to move downward according to the reduction of the holding display frame FL1, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. And may eventually be erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the holding display frame FL1 ends, and the holding display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

  In addition, in the example of the effect mentioned above, the start timing of each effect such as the character CH1 of princess Chibi, the character GY1 of the nephew, the advance notice display of a plurality of arrows, the family crest character 224E, the decorative symbol variation display, the expansion operation of the holding display frame FL1 The end timing can be set in any combination.

  Further, in this example of rendering, a character (for example, a ninja character NJ1) for changing the holding icon is displayed in the holding display frame FL1 after expansion, but an image substantially the same as the holding icon after the change is displayed It may be configured to display an image (corresponding to the changed hold icon) that recalls the changed hold icon.

  Next, in the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the character NJ1 of the ninja, an example of the effect when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails is described.

  Fig. 140 (i ') corresponds to Fig. 140 (i), and has the same effect contents as Fig. 140 (i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j '), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, although the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second reserve icon h12, the display of the effect EF2 is not performed, and the shuriken SH1 is the second reserve. Passing the icon, as shown in FIG. 140 (k '), that the shuriken SH1 has a frame out below the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the change of the display mode of the holding icon has failed. It is directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains in a blinking manner in white.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. In FIG. 141, it is shown that the change effect of the display mode of the holding icon is being performed with the stop display of the decorative pattern in which the character display of "change" is shown in the middle symbol. That is, the decorative symbol of "change" can be said to be a display that suggests the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is held at the center of the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in the housed mode, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although the first holding icon h11 of the variation icon h0 and the two holding icons is in the default display mode, the second holding icon h12 is blinking in white, and the display of the prefetch notice is displayed. It is displayed in the form. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state of swinging and fluctuating due to the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-change-decoration 1" is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode, and does not overlap the decoration pattern. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 141 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the variation display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the special view 1 And the 4th design of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (b) shows that the family crest 224E ascends from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest item 224E completely covers the holding display frame FL1, and also a part of the first holding icon h11, a part of the tutorial display section TT1, and a part of the middle symbol of "change" Covering. The family crest 224E may not overlap the decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the holding display frame FL1 expands upward and appears above the family crest 224E. At this time, the suspension display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of "change"). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the symbol in the middle of "change") is overlapped with the extension display frame FL1. The extended display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where a part is not overlapped over the family crest 224E.

  FIG. 141 (e) shows that the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 moves toward the second hold icon h12 for which the advance notice is given. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state in which the display (the decorative symbol of “change”) suggesting the effect content is overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (f) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is directed to the second holding icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second holding icon h12 explodes is performed. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second reserved icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first reserved icon h11.

  After that, FIG. 141 (h) shows that the light emission color of the family crest 224E is changing from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second hold icon h12 is more easily visible again as compared with a state where the effect EF2 is erased and the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice of "Pokeon" is outputted from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and thereafter, a reduction animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the holding display frame FL1 ends, and the holding display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the overlap to the decorative symbol by the suspension display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol becomes easy to be recognized as compared with the state in which the overlap to the decorative symbol by the suspension display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

  FIG. 142 is a view showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 142, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally out of frame, and it is shown that the frame is inserted from below when the explanation display is performed. 142 (a) to 142 (n) are the same as FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs frame-in and frame-out animation, so they are different. Only the part will be described, and the description of the same contents as those in FIG. 140 (a) to FIG. 140 (n) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed, and it is in a frame-out state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a frame-in animation (frame-in-animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started from the lower right frame of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 142 (c), the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a character display of "Panda is a master of the lord". The timing at which the character display on the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be simultaneous with the completion of the frame in animation, or may be the timing after the completion of the frame in animation, or a timing before the completion of the frame in animation It may be Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. In addition, the character display of “Panda is the master of the master” in the tutorial display section TT1 is until the animation (frame out animation) of the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. , For 5 seconds) to be displayed continuously. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), when the family crest 224E is lifted and overlapped with a part of the tutorial display unit TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. It may be overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 142 (f) to (h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation in which the frame is out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed. The instruction display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the start of the frame out animation, may be deleted at the timing of the start of the frame out animation, or the frame out animation is started. It may be erased at the timing after the process has been performed, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Further, the timing of the start of the frame out animation may be the same as the timing of the start of the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, or may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or The timing may be later than the start. In this presentation example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second expanded display. For example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is similar to the extended holding display frame FL1 (which may be referred to as an example of the first expanded display in this rendering example) in that the tutorial display unit TT1 is not overlapped with the decorative symbol. It can be said that they differ in that they do not overlap with the previous notice, that there are few overlapping regions, and that they have a low frequency of overlapping.

  FIG. 143 shows another variation of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 143, after the instruction display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed and the frame is out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is again framed in, and the preview display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. 143 (a) to (n), after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is again framed in, and this tutorial display unit TT1 is used to display a notice in advance as shown in FIG. 142. (A) to (n), and therefore, only different parts will be described, and the description of the same contents as (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  After the effects shown in FIG. 143 (a) to FIG. 143 (h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial from the lower right frame of the display screen After the in-frame animation of the display unit TT1 is started again, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (j), and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the characters "pseudo run". The display is displayed. That is, a display is provided to indicate that a pseudo link may be performed. That is, in the tutorial display section TT1, in addition to the tutorial display, a preliminary display can be performed. In addition, the character display of this "pseudo series" may be a notice of the change concerned, and may be a prefetch notice. In addition, the timing of completion of the frame in animation of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or at a timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started It may be the same timing as the display of the effect EF2 is started. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (j) to FIG. 143 (n), the tutorial display unit TT1 is continuously displayed. In this demonstration example, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 is longer when the advance notice is displayed than when the explanation display is performed, but even if the display time is the same. The display time of the tutorial display section TT1 may be longer in the case where the explanatory display is performed than in the case where the preliminary display is performed. Further, the color of the characters may be made different between the case of the explanatory display and the case of the preliminary display. As described above, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

  The tutorial display unit TT1 displays a plurality of types of mini games having a pattern of success or failure, and when the success pattern of the mini game is performed, simultaneously with or after the display indicating success. , Display that gives change to other effect display such as hold change (for example, change of display mode of hold icon, change of display mode of fluctuation icon, stop of pseudo run symbol, occurrence of pseudo run, display mode of serif notice Change (for example, change blue serif or blue background serif to red serif or red irence serif), step up of serif notice (for example, in the state where serif notice of character A is being displayed, then character B's serif It may be configured to perform advance notice display etc.).

  FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of the super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment in stages. In the effect example shown in FIG. 144, symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode has been changed as described above is performed, for example, performed after the effect display shown in FIG. 140 is performed. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is held at the center of the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in the housed mode, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice displayed in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is erased. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode, and does not overlap the decoration pattern. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed, and a state in which an explanatory display is performed is shown.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 144 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the variation display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the special view 1 And the 4th design of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. The family crest 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the variation icon h0.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display is provided to notify that it will develop into a super reach (a sword reach).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and it is demonstrated that the reliability against a big hit in this sword strike is high . Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the fluctuation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the fluctuation icon and the hold icon These displays may be less visible than when they do not overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI unit FO animation is started, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is deleted, and the held icon displayed in the held icon display area is deleted. The timing of erasing the character display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be a timing before the timing of erasing the hold icon, or may be a timing after the timing of erasing the hold icon. The timing may be the same as the timing of erasing the hold icon. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Although the fluctuation icon h0 is not deleted, the fluctuation icon h0 may also be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d) to FIG. 144 (g), the UI unit performs a frame out by the UI unit FO animation. Even if the hold display frame FL1 is erased, there are cases where the display mode of the hold icon can be recognized by the luminescent color of the household object 224E. That is, as described above, symbol fluctuation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by the hold display frame FL1 being displayed is displayed Even after the suspension display frame FL1 in which the variation icon is accommodated is hidden, it may be possible to confirm the display mode after the change of the suspension icon.

  FIG. 144 (h) shows that a sword strike is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to a background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Kengo reach" is made. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (h), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of swordsman are confronted is displayed.

  Thereafter, for example, after the animation display of the duel scene by the Tonosama character and the sword master character shown in FIG. 126 (c) to FIG. 126 (h) is performed, as shown in FIG. 144 (i), the first decoration In the symbol display device 208L, the main character of the hero loses to the hostile swordsman, and as a result, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is derived for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background for exclusive use of swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 144 (j) to (n), an animation (UI part FI animation) in which the UI part frames in from the lower side of the display screen is performed. Although the hold icon is redisplayed after the display of the UI unit FI animation is completed, the hold icon may be displayed from the time when the display of the UI unit FI animation is started, or the display of the UI unit FI animation is performed. It may be displayed simultaneously with completion. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a decoration of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display unit 208L. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In addition, the family crest item 224E changes from the green light emission mode to the default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is displayed also in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be deleted at the time of stop display. Further, the timing at which the family crest 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be the timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the decoration The timing may be later than the stop display of the symbol. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Also, the change icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode and then deleted before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or is changed to the default display mode after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased after that, or it may be erased without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode is after the stop display of the decorative symbol. You may make it erase | eliminate without changing, and you may make it erase | eliminate, without changing a display mode at the same timing as the timing of the stop display of a decorative symbol.

  In the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the holding display frame FL1 after expansion, during expansion, and during reduction may be displayed. In this configuration, after expansion It may be configured such that not all of the retention display frames FL1 of the above are overlapped in the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

  In addition, the suspension display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 may be displayed during super reach, and in this configuration, each timing during super reach (for example, cut-in of an allied character or cut-in of an enemy character) The display mode in the display timing of or the display timing of the words displayed in blue, the display timing of the words displayed in red, and the like may be changed.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be able to be framed in during super reach, and the display mode at each of the above timings may be changed. The display may be one of a plurality of types of displays indicating.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. 145 (a-1) to (a-4) show that effect display for stocking the advance notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the suspension display frame FL1. FIG. 145 (c-1) to FIG. 145 (c-1) to FIG. 145 (c-1) show that the display effect of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed in the state where the advance notice icon is stocked. In the diagram (c-6), it is shown that an effect is produced in which the display mode of the advance notice icon is changed by an effect which is partially shared with the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 145 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (g) except that the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1, so detailed description will be made. I omit it. As shown in FIG. 145 (a-1), a part of the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box is overlapped with the family crest 224E, and a part is not overlapped with the family crest 224E. It is considered to be difficult to see in comparison. Further, although this effect example will be described using the notice icon BX of the treasure box as an example of the notice icon, it is also applicable to, for example, displaying various notice icons shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 136 (d). It goes without saying.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-2), the family crest 224E is shown to descend toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the treasure box advance notice icon BX which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and it is made easy to view.

  Thereafter, FIG. 145 (a-3) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the preview icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced or may be displayed in an enlarged size. In addition, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box is stopped at the upper part of the second hold icon h12 and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. It is suggested that some advance notice is given in the symbol variation display based on the hold. That is, the advance notice by the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box is performed.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-6) is the same as FIG. 140 (g) except that the notice icon BX for the treasure box is displayed above the second reserved icon h12. Since it is the same as (1), the detailed description will be omitted. In addition, the notice icon BX shown in FIG. 145 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the manner described above in FIG. 145 (a-1) to FIG. (For example, it may be displayed by the effect etc. performed by the stop of the chance symbol). Further, the advance notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 145 (b-3) shows that the shuriken SH1 overlaps the notice icon BX of the treasure box. Here, the shuriken SH1 may overlap with the notice icon BX of the treasure box, or may overlap with the notice icon BX of the treasure box. That is, even if, for example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in the manner described above in FIG. 145 (a-1) to FIG. 145 (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is better than the notice icon BX of the treasure box. May be displayed on the front side or may be displayed on the back side.

  FIG. 145 (b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps with all the advance notice icons BX of the treasure box in addition to the second reserve icon h12. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation without knowing whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box changes.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-5) are the same as those in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-5), and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 145 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second reserved icon h12, but the light emission of the family crest item 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the reserved icon after change There is no change in aspect. That is, it can be said that the change display of the holding icon is not performed due to the non-change of the luminescent color of the family crest product 224E.

  In FIG. 145 (c-6) following FIG. 145 (c-5), the situation after the effect EF2 is erased is shown. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is deleted, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box changes. The player may not only change the display mode of the hold icon but also change the promotion icon BX of the treasure box, thereby providing unexpectedness to the effect and further enhancing the expectation to the jackpot. is there. The mode of change of the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to the change of the size, and for example, the shape may change, the color may change, or the combination thereof may change . As shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), although the voice output for notifying that the display mode of the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box has been changed is performed from the speaker 120, the voice output is not performed. You may

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. Here, in FIGS. 146 (a-1) to (a-6), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the display mode (for example, blinking in white) of the prefetch notice. 146 (b-1) to (b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 and the display mode of the hold icon is displayed. A state in which the effect to be changed is performed is shown, and in FIG. 146 (c-1) to FIG. 146 (c-5), an effect to change the display mode of all the displayed pending icons is performed. Is shown.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 146 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and thus detailed description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 146 (a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

  The same figure (a-2) following FIG. 146 (a-1) shows that the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moved not to the second holding icon h12 for which the advance notice is given, but to the third holding icon h13 adjacent thereto.

  Thereafter, FIG. 146 (a-3) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is directed to the third holding icon h13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third holding icon h13, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the third holding icon h13 explodes It has been done. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third reserved icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second reserved icon h12. The second hold icon h12 is still in the display mode (flashing in white) of the pre-reading advance notice.

  Thereafter, FIG. 146 (a-5) shows that the luminescent color of the household object 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that notification has been made that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third hold icon h13 is again visually recognized in comparison with the state where the effect EF2 is erased and the effect EF2 is not erased Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice of "Pokeon" is outputted from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 may change after voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 The change of aspect and the audio output may be performed simultaneously. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged from the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. According to this example of presentation, not only the second reserved icon h12 but the display mode of the third reserved icon h13 adjacent thereto changes, so that the unexpectedness can be given to the effect, and the second There may be a case where the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third suspension icon h13 can be dramatically improved while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the suspension icon h12 . Although this example of effect has been described for the third hold icon adjacent to the second hold icon which is the target of the pre-reading notice, it may be performed for the first hold icon. If there is a fourth hold, it may be performed on the fourth hold icon h14.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 146 (b-1) to (b-4), the extension character of the ninja character NJ1 is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1, and a bancho character BC1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 The same as FIG. 140 (g) to FIG. 140 (j) except that is changed, so only the different points will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the other parts will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, in the upper part of the hold display frame FL 1, the character BC 1 of a slot length appears instead of the ninja character NJ 1. It should be noted that the Bancho character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with a state where a part is not overlapped over the family crest 224E.

  In FIG. 146 (b-2), the manner in which the family crest 224E descends to the initial position is shown. Then, a part of the Bancho character BC1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and the visual recognition is made easy. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the Bancho character BC1 is throwing a qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a throwing object. This Qigong Wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which the advance notice is made. Note that the effect display of the Qigong Wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side of the display of the speech advance announcement by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character of GY1 of the nephew, or may be displayed on the back side. Good.

  Thereafter, FIG. 146 (b-3) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the qigong wave KK1 is directed to the second holding icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the Qigong Wave KK1 overlaps the second holding icon h12 and the second holding icon h12 explodes Has been done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the qigong wave KK1. Further, at this time, although the ban-cho character BC1 is deleted from the hold display frame FL1, it may be displayed. As described above, in this effect example, by making it possible to display characters other than the ninja character NJ1, for example, it may be possible to change the reliability of the jackpot depending on the appearing character.

  146 (c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. The same as FIG. 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-3) except for FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (c-3) following FIG. 146 (c-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong Wave KK1 overlaps the second reserved icon h12, and the effect EF3 that explodes is displayed However, this effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only the second hold icon h12 but also the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 is notified that all of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are to be changed in the display mode. This may allow us to have the expectation that every hold may be more credible. At the timing shown in FIG. 146 (c-4), the character BC1 of the lead position is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. Further, the effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the Bancho character BC1 appears, and an effect that is not performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. In addition, when a Bancho character BC1 appears, an effect by the effect EF3 may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 to third 3 is compared with the state where the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 is displayed easily again. At this time, all display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this example of presentation, not only the pending icon which is the target of the pre-reading but also the display mode of all the pending icons displayed can be changed to give surprise to the presentation and to all pending In some cases, it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit. This presentation example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. It may be done to

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. Here, FIGS. 147 (a-1) to (a-5) show that the extension range of the holding display frame FL1 is enlarged, and FIGS. 147 (b-1) to (b) FIG. 147 (c-1) to FIG. 147 (c-4) show that the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened in b-5) and the character according to the hold change notice effect appears there. In the figure, it is shown that an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed.

  Since the effect example shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (g) and described above, the detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) following FIG. 147 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the holding display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. Also, in response to the further extension of the hold display frame FL1 upward, the ninja character NJ1 is also moved further upward. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not easily overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is easy to be recognized as compared with a state where it is overlapped with the family crest 224E. Further, the suspension display frame FL1 overlaps the blowout portion TT3, and the display of the blowout portion TT3 is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the holdout frame TT3 is not overlapped. Also, the family crest 224E is lowered toward the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja casts three shurikens SH1. The three shurikens SH1 are all moving toward the second hold icon h12 which is giving advance notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the blowout portion TT2. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12, and the second holding icon h12 explodes in the effect EF2. The display is being done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second hold icon h12 is again visible as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is erased and the effect EF2 is not erased Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the lord. At this time, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. At this time, although the light emission mode of the family crest 224E is not changed, it may be changed. As described above, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 140, the extension range of the suspension display frame FL1 is further enlarged upward, and the effect contents are also partially different. The effect contents may be the same even if the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. Further, the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. As a result, it may be possible to change the sense of expectation for the big hit by the amount of change of the holding display frame FL1.

  The extension range of the suspension display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction as well as the upper side. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3 ′), the hold display frame FL1 is expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon of the target of pre-reading, in addition to the upward expansion. Good. Further, the expansion range in the vertical direction of the holding display frame FL1 may be set to a degree shown in FIG. 140 (g), and the expansion range in the width direction may be a range overlapping the holding icon for prefetching. In addition, in the case where the third hold icon to be digested after the second hold icon h12 to be read ahead is displayed, it is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon You may configure it. In other words, a part of the holding display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap the third holding icon.

  In FIG. 147 (b-1), the family crest character 224E rises from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1, but no character appears in the expansion portion, and It is shown that the family crest 224E has moved to the initial position. The other effect contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 140 (g), and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation is started so that the background of the holding display frame FL1 rises like a shutter, and the back side of the background is viewed It is shown that the display of the above aspect is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background of the holding display frame FL1 is fully opened, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 is shown. A plurality of back colors of the holding display frame FL1 in which the background is fully open may be prepared, and the colors may be made different depending on the degree of expectation of the change in the display mode of the holding icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1. The timing at which the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started may be later than the timing when the background of the holding display frame FL1 becomes fully open, and the same as the timing when the background of the holding display frame FL1 becomes fully open The timing may be before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the shuriken SH1 is directed to the second holding icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second holding icon h12 explodes It has been done. At this time, a closing operation is started in which the background of the holding display frame FL1 descends like a shutter, and then the door is closed. The start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be earlier than the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started, or may be the same as the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started It may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  The example of the effect shown in FIG. 147 (c-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the fluctuation icon h0, so the difference is about It explains in detail and omits explanation about others.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja casts a shuriken SH1 toward the fluctuation icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF3 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the fluctuation icon h0 explodes. The effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire fluctuation icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged as the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. Thereby, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed and the reliability to the jackpot of the fluctuation may be increased while maintaining the sense of expectation for the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon There are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, FIG. 147 (c-3) shows that the luminescent color of the household object 224E is changing from white to green. That is, it can be said that notification that the display color of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from white to green is notified in advance. In other words, a predetermined light emitting means (such as an LED incorporated in the family crest 224E or an LED provided in the special view starting opening) is a fluctuating icon prior to the advance notice that the display mode of the fluctuating icon changes. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after the change of h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed again easily for visual recognition. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound of “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 has changed. Note that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed after voice output is performed, or the display of the fluctuation icon h0 The change of aspect and the audio output may be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. FIG. 148 shows that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the UI unit is framed out from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center thereof. It is displayed in the housed mode, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 148 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode, and does not overlap the decoration pattern. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Little. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon portion TT2, which suggests that a UI portion FO animation in which the UI portion including the suspension display frame FL1 described later is framed out. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 148 (a) is a display relating to a predetermined effect in which the holding display frame FL1 is not displayed due to the frame out.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 148 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the variation display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and the special figure of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are shown. The fourth symbol of 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done.

  FIG. 148B shows that the UI unit FO animation is performed and the UI unit is framed out below the display screen together with the hold display frame FL1. The UI unit FO animation is performed, for example, when transitioning to darkening effects or SP reach.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a character in which the character NJ1 of the ninja is displayed, and an effect of throwing the shuriken SH1 toward the position where the second reserved icon h12 was displayed. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed, a play is performed to change the display mode of the hold icon by the character NJ1 of the ninja. As shown in FIG. 148C, the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the decorative symbol and also overlaps the balloon portion TT2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second reserved icon h12 is displayed, and the display of the effect EF2 that explodes is performed. There is.

  Thereafter, FIG. 148 (e) shows that the luminescent color of the family crest 224E changes from white to green. That is, it is notified in advance that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (f), although the effect EF2 is erased in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is still out of frame, so the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, a voice of "Pokeon" is outputted from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows that an animation in which the UI unit performs frame-in (UI unit FI animation) is performed, and the UI unit FI animation is completed. When the UI part FI animation is completed, the UI part is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the holding display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

  In this effect example, the UI unit performs a frame out including the suspension display frame FL1, and during this period, an effect of changing the display mode of the suspension icon is performed. For example, FIG. As shown in '), the UI unit may be framed out with the suspension display frame FL1 left. Here, since the effect example shown in FIG. 148 (a ′) is the same as FIG. 148 (a), the detailed description will be omitted.

  In the same figure (b ') following FIG. 148 (a'), a state in which the UI unit FO animation is completed is shown. As shown in FIG. 148 (b '), in this example, when the UI unit FO animation is performed, the UI unit is framed out below the display screen, but the holding display frame FL1 is displayed without being framed out. It is supposed to be maintained.

  In FIG. 148 (c '), the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (c '), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character NJ1 of the ninja is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the second hold icon h12 displays the shuriken SH1. It is directed to throw at the position where it was being played. That is, in this effect example, even when the hold icon which is the target of the change of the display mode is not displayed, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the character NJ1 of the ninja is performed.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. Here, FIGS. 149 (a-1) to (a-7) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and that the display of the advance notice icon is being performed at the same time, FIGS. 149 (b-1) to (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice.

  Since the effect example shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (f) and described above, the detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) following FIG. 149 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with a state where a part is not overlapped over the family crest 224E.

  Also, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the manner in which the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 149 (a-3) shows that the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 moves toward the second hold icon h12 for which the advance notice is given.

  On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. The timing to start throwing the bomb icon I61 may be the same as the timing to start the throwing of the shuriken SH1 by the ninja character NJ1 or before the start of the throwing of the shuriken SH1. The timing may be after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, FIG. 149 (a-4) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is directed to the second holding icon h12.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-4), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps the first decorative pattern and also overlaps the nephew character GY1 and the blowout part TT3. In other words, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the bag character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the beard character GY1 or the blowout part TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second holding icon h12 explodes It has been done.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord is burst. Note that the timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, or it may be the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed It may be the timing of Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-6), it is notified that the light emission color of the household object 224E changes from white to green and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-6), the ruptured bomb icon I61 is changed to the swordswoman's notice icon I62, and it is predicted that it will shift to swords reach. Here, at the timing when the warning icon I62 for swordsman appears, a sound may be output from the speaker 120 to notify of that. The timing at which the warning icon I62 for the swordsman is changed may be the same as the timing at which the luminous color of the family crest 224E changes to green, or before the luminous color of the family crest 224E changes to green. The timing may be after the light emission color of the family crest 224E changes to green. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second hold icon h12 is again visible as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is erased and the effect EF2 is not erased Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice of "Pokeon" is outputted from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), the warning icon I62 of swordsman is displayed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size, and then the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord The throwing animation ends. In addition, it may be notified by voice output that the warning icon I62 of the swordsman is arranged in the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, since the warning icon I62 for swordsman is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, the state is not compared with the condition where the warning icon I62 for swordsman is not arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. At least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to view. In other words, according to this presentation example, it can be said that the swordsman advance notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display section TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is easy for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the display of the notice icon I62 for swordsman by causing the notice icon I62 for swordmaster to overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. There are times when you can do it. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to notice the presence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur earlier or in the future.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) is the same as FIG. 139 (a) except that the character display of “Panda is the master of the lord” is made in the tutorial display section TT1, and thus the details are detailed. The explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) and the same figure (b-2) following FIG. 149 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started and the character of the lord is the bomb icon It is shown that I try to throw I61.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (b-3), the character of the lord casts the bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown how to do it.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lady reaches the second reserved icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 bursts Is shown. The display of the ruptured bomb icon I61 covers the entire second reserved icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first reserved icon h11.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased and the ruptured bomb icon I61 is compared with a state not erased. The hold icon h12 is displayed easily again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (display mode blinking in white). As described above, the mode of the change in the display mode of the preview notice of the hold icon is not limited to the hold increase, and may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold increase. In addition, as in this presentation example, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by another change presentation. In addition, the effect of changing the display mode of the previewing notice of the reserved icon described above may be performed, for example, in a state in which the UI unit is framed out.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. Here, FIG. 150 shows the effect of changing the display mode of the reserve icon while moving the sub display devices (the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N).

  Since the effect example shown in FIG. 150 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (d) and described above, the detailed description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 150 (a-2) continued to FIG. 150 (a-1), a state is shown in which the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased with the stage.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each of the brow character GY1, the blowout portion TT3, the tutorial display portion TT1 and a part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion Each of the TT3, the tutorial display unit TT1, and a part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is in a state in which it is difficult to view as compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-4) shows that the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to move. Then, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold display frame FL2 is displayed in the lower part of the display screen, and the variation icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The holding display frame FL2 and the variation icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the holding display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. . That is, it can be said that the holding display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displaying the holding display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in an expanded manner. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the overlap of the nephew character GY1 has been eliminated, but each of the blowout part TT3 and part of the right design of the first decorative symbol still displays the third decorative symbol It is overlapped by the device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), each of the hold display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 and the blowout portion TT2 is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Compared to a state in which the suspension display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 contained in the suspension display frame FL1 and the blowout part TT2 are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N ends its movement with its center aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, all of the pending display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the middle symbol and the pending display frame FL1 are displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is not visible in front view. The first hold icon h11, the blowout unit TT2, and a part of the blowout unit TT3 are also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first hold icon h11, the blowout unit TT2 and a part of the blowout unit TT3 It is difficult to view as compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the expansion animation of the suspension display frame FL2 is performed, the suspension display frame FL2 is expanded upward, and the extension portion is ninja's It is shown that the character NJ2 appears. That is, it can be said that the holding display frame FL2 in which the holding display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is expanded and displayed is further expanded and displayed. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. May be smaller.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-7), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the ninja character NJ2 throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 moves toward the second notice icon h12 for which the advance notice is made. Note that the effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side of the display of the conversational announcement by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character of the baby GY1 or may be displayed on the back side. . It can be said that the effect by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the extended portion of the suspension display frame FL2 after expansion. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2 which is an example of the effect display is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an advance notice or an effect of the change advance notice. Although the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is associated with the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ2) performed in the hold display frame FL2 after expansion, it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and proceeds toward the second holding icon h12 The situation is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second holding icon h12 explodes It has been done. The effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-10), it is shown that the luminescent color of the household object 224E changes from white to green. In addition, the LED arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, and a notice that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green by these light emitting means Do. In addition, the timing of the change of the luminescent color of the family crest 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N The timing may be later than the provided LED emits green light, or may be the timing before the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second hold icon h12 is again visible as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is erased and the effect EF2 is not erased Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, the change of the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by output of voice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-12), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the holding display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, the animation may be performed by frame-out from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fade-out, or may be suddenly erased.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-13), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shown moving to the right and moving toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-13), the overlap of the first holding icon h11 is canceled and the holding display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the third decorative symbol display The device 208N is partially overlapped, and the variable icon h0 is partially visible. In addition, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is compared with the state where the partial symbol is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. While the part is in a visible state, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is in a state in which visual recognition is difficult as compared with a state in which the right symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-14) shows that the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-14), since the overlap is eliminated for each display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L which has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far, the overlap As compared with the state in which is not eliminated, both displays are in an easily visible state.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-15) shows that the LED emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N is turned off. In addition, you may make it light with the default light emission aspect (for example, the light emission aspect lighted with white), without light extinction. On the other hand, the family crest 224E is still emitting green light corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  In this presentation example, one of the two sub display devices (the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) (the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is a first decorative symbol. The effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by moving the display device 208L so as to overlap is performed, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), both of the two sub display devices are An effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by moving it may be performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), when effecting a change in the display mode of the reserved icon, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are replaced with the first decorative symbol It moves to the position which mutually approaches in the center of display 208L. Then, the holding display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower portion of the holding display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N The variation icon h00 is displayed on the screen, and the ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, the blowout unit TT2, the blowout unit TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The whole of h0 is overlapped, and a part of the tutorial display section TT1 and the character CH1 of Little Princess are overlapped.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. Here, in FIG. 151, instead of the above-described two sub-display devices, only one sub-display device (sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in this sub-decorative symbol display device 208P It is shown how to do

  FIG. 151 is different from the above-described embodiment in that a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device are provided. The sub decorative symbol display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper edge of the sub decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps the front side of a part of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 151 (a), in the sub decoration pattern display device 208P, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, The UI portion in which the is formed is displayed, the change icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In addition, although the variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are set as the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 is set as the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and an explanation is given on the relationship between the panda and the lord. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Hibi. In the blowout part TT2, a phrase display of "Where is the rabbit ~" is made. In addition, on the right side of the display screen, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed together with the brow character GY1. In the balloon part TT3, the words "here" are displayed. That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151 (a), conversation announcement is performed. Although the blowout portion TT2 and the blowout portion TT3 overlap with the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol may overlap with the blowout portion TT2, TT3. Further, in the upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 151 (b), the expansion animation of the holding display frame FL1 is performed, the holding display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the ninja character NJ2 appears in the extended portion. At this time, the holding display frame FL1 displayed on the sub decoration symbol display device 208P is expanded from the sub decoration symbol display device 208P to the decoration symbol display device 208, and the holding display frame displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 A ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extension of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon portion TT2 is overlapped with the extension display frame FL1, and a portion of the balloon portion TT2 is visually recognized in comparison with a state not overlapping with the extension display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 casts the shuriken SH1 is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. It is shown moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 151 (c), it is shown that the thrown in-the-shoulder SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub decorative symbol display device 208P and is heading to the second holding icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), in the sub decorative symbol display device 208P, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second holding icon h12 explodes is performed. There is. The effect EF2 is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacent to the effect EF2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (e), the second decoration icon h12 is displayed again more easily in the secondary decoration symbol display device 208P in comparison with the state in which the effect EF2 is deleted and the effect EF2 is not deleted. Be done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, the change of the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by output of voice.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the pending change advance presentation effect. Here, FIGS. 152 (a-1) to (a-6) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the error display is performed, FIG. 152 (b) shows that the effect of changing the display mode of the holding icon is being performed when the effect display performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is being performed, and FIG. FIGS. 152 (d-1) to 152 (c-1) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the operation of the effect button 136 is shown. In the figure (d-3), it is shown that an effect of changing the display mode of the holding icon is performed when the button effect is performed to urge the operation of the effect button 136.

  Since the effect example shown in FIG. 152 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (d) and described above except that an error display is performed, only the different points will be described in detail, Detailed explanation is omitted about others.

  In FIG. 152 (a-1), when the lower plate is full, the lower plate is used to indicate that the lower plate is full error by displaying the text “Please remove the ball”. It is shown that a tongue error display ER is displayed. The lower tray full error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Such an error display is displayed in priority to other displays since it is necessary to notify the player promptly. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the lower tray full error display ER overlaps with a part of the blowout part TT2 is shown. Such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-2), it is shown that the family crest 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 152 (a-2), since the family crest 224E is disposed on the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full-tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest 224E. It is considered that visual recognition is difficult as compared with a state in which a portion of the lower tray full error display ER is not overlapped with the family crest 224E.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the expansion animation of the holding display frame FL1 is performed, and the holding display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest 224E It is shown that it appears above. In this example, since the error display is displayed prior to the holding display frame FL1, a part of the holding display frame FL1 overlaps the lower tray full error display ER, and a part of the holding display frame FL1 However, it is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the state in which the lower plate full error display ER is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja appears in the upper part of the holding display frame FL1. It should be noted that a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the lower error full error display ER, and a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is difficult to see as compared with a state where it is not overlapped with the lower error full error display ER. It is assumed.

  FIG. 152 (a-5) shows that the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged. However, since a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower error full error display ER, the ninja in comparison with a state where a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower error full error display ER The character NJ1 of is difficult to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 moves toward the second hold icon h12 for which the advance notice is given.

  Thereafter, FIG. 152 (a-6) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlap state of the family crest accessory 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 is cancelled. However, since the lower bowl full error still continues, the lower bowl full error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and the extended part of the hold display frame FL1. A part is overlapped to the lower plate full error display ER. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the shuriken SH1 is directed to the second holding icon h12 is shown.

  In FIG. 152 (b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the state of scrolling in the left direction is shown. It is done. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and displayed, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expansion portion, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 152 (b), the second hold icon h12 is set as the display mode of the advance notice. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "enemy invades" is displayed, and the contents related to the advance notice display YK are displayed. In this example of effect, in order to display the effect display of the display mode of the hold icon with priority over the advance notice display YK, a part of the advance notice display YK is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 which is expanded and displayed.

  FIG. 152 (c-1) shows that the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon that is a display mode simulating the effect button 136, as an example of the display mode of the preview preview. In this example of rendering, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the nephew are not displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is in the non-displayed state. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is not displayed, but the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button holding icon is displayed at a position apart from the holding display frame FL1, it can be said that the display is not overlapped even when the holding display frame FL1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode or the like) after the hold is increased.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (c-2), as shown in FIG. 152 (c-3), the second hold icon h12 starts from the button hold icon. It changes to a hold icon of the display mode of the character of the lord. In addition, the operation of the production button 136 can be accepted under the condition that the symbol is changing, and it can not be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the presentation button 136 can be accepted also during the symbol stop display It is also good.

  FIG. 152 (d-1) shows that an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the button effect is performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed at the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, button effects are performed. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and displayed, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expansion portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. . In this rendering example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar are partially expanded in the suspension display frame FL1 displayed in order to preferentially display the effect display for changing the display mode of the suspension icon over the button presentation. It is overlapped. Also, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, so it can be said that the button effect is an effect that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is a button effect. It can also be said that the effect is not overlapped. At this time, when the above-described error display is performed, the button effect or the hold display frame FL1 is displayed with priority. Also, when the above-described button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1. Alternatively, it may be displayed on the rear side of the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed on the rear side of the holding display frame FL1.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (d-2), as shown in FIG. 152 (d-3), the cut-in in which the character of the lord is displayed up Display may be performed. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot has high reliability. In this rendering example, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the suspension display frame FL1 which is expanded and displayed in order to preferentially display the presentation for changing the display mode of the suspension icon over the cut-in presentation. . At this time, when the above-described error display is performed, the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. Further, when the above-described button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed or may be displayed on the rear side of the holding display frame FL1.

  FIG. 153: is a figure shown stepwise about an example of the symbol change display applicable to this embodiment. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 153 (a-1) to FIG. 153 (a-5) does not include the sub display device, and the effect display is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. What is configured to be displayed is shown, and FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) show a state where an error display is performed. Further, FIG. 153 (c) shows that the display position of the variation icon h0 and the display position of the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the holding display frame FL1, and FIG. 153 (d-1) to FIG. 153 (d) In -2), it is shown that the hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

  FIG. 153 (a-1) is different from the embodiment described above in that only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device is provided and the sub display device is not provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), the UI unit is disposed at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display screen In the upper right of the symbol, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed.

  In addition, a family crest item 224E is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208, and an eight generation character 224Fa and a general role item 224Fb are disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and fluctuation is performed. Moreover, the variable display is performed in the 2nd decoration symbol. Further, in the UI unit, the hold display frame FL1 in which the variation icon h0 is accommodated is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, wipe display is performed in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right to the center of the display screen. In this example of effect, an image imitating an eyebrow is used as the wipe images WP1, WP2, and an effect display in which the eyelid is closed is performed as the wipe display. Here, wipe refers to a video effect displayed by inserting an image to be displayed next from a part of the display screen when switching an image. There are various types of techniques for wiping, but any technique can be applied. In this staging example, wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after shaking fluctuation is started by a combination of lost decorative designs, but wipe display is performed at the timing when the shaking fluctuation ends and the display is finalized. May be performed. Also, for example, it may be performed when changing the stage, or may be performed when shifting to super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap the UI part and the first decorative symbol, and overlap the second decorative symbol, the second number-of-retentions display, and the fourth symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area are not overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. The fluctuation icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Here, the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 is erased may be the timing before the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed, or at the same timing as the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. It may be present, or it may be timing later than the timing when the wipe images WP1, WP2 are started to be displayed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  FIG. 153 (a-3) shows that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 further move toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 is the wipe image WP1 , WP2 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and a state in which the final display is displayed with the lost symbol is displayed. Therefore, the holding display frame FL1 is in a state in which the entirety thereof is overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. In addition, the second decorative pattern displayed in the upper left of the display screen is a combination of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2” according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed at the time of the swing fluctuation of the first decorative symbol. The stop display is shown, and the special figure 1 fourth pattern is also stopped and displayed with the lost design.

  After that, when the reserve is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, in the decoration symbol display device 208, the wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the left and right direction It will be. As a result, the UI unit is made visible, and the holding display frame FL1 is also displayed visibly. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the fourth symbol in the special view 1 each start variable display. At this time, for example, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 is moved to the hold display frame FL1 by the hold movement animation, and is displayed as the change icon h0. Further, the second hold icon displayed as the second hold icon h12 is also moved to the display position of the first hold icon and displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

  FIGS. 153 (b-1) to (b-2) show that the wipe display is performed while the error display is displayed. Note that the effect examples shown in FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) are the same as FIG. 153 (a-3) to FIG. Since it is the same as a-4), only different points will be described in detail, and the detailed description of the other parts will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the lower side fullness error display ER described above overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2. It is done. Such an error display is displayed in priority to other displays since it is necessary to notify the player promptly. Therefore, also in the case shown in FIG. 153 (b-1), the display of the lower-ink-full-error display ER is prioritized over the wipe images WP1, WP2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-2), even when the symbol is determined and displayed, the lower plate full error display ER is not erased but is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. . Note that an error display such as the lower tray full error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

  FIG. 153C shows that the display position of the variation icon h0 and the display position of the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the holding display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 153 (c) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the display position of the variation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 is reversed, so only the different points will be described in detail, Detailed explanation is omitted about. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 153 (c), for example, when the expansion animation of the holding display frame FL1 is performed, the fluctuation icon h0 moves upward with the expansion of the holding display frame FL1, and An effect is performed such that the ninja character NJ1 appears. As described above, in this presentation example, it can be said that the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 is changing when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

  In (d-1) in FIG. 153, while the holding display frame FL4 surrounding the second holding icon h12 which is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed, the holding display frame FL4 is expanded upward, and the expanded portion is It is shown that the character NJ3 is displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), the pending display frame FL4 surrounding the second pending icon h12 is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed in FIG. As it is the same as b), only the different points will be described in detail, and the detailed descriptions of the other parts will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, the holding display frame FL 4 is displayed so as to surround the second holding icon h 12 which is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. The hold display frame FL4 is, for example, a default display mode of a size matching the size of the second hold icon h12, and is framed in from the lower side of the display screen and moved to a position surrounding the second hold icon h12. Thereafter, display is performed in which the holding display frame FL4 is expanded upward in the manner described above by the expansion animation. Then, the character NJ3 of the ninja is displayed in the extended portion of the extended holding display frame FL4, and an effect of changing the display mode of the holding icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed May overlap, or the times when both effects are performed may not overlap.

  Also, when the effect of changing the display mode of the holding icon is being performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 is also moved according to the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when symbol stop display is performed, the extended holding display frame FL4 is reduced and changed to the default display mode, and then the symbol is displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 of the default display mode is also moved according to the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the movement animation, and the symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, the hold display frame FL4 is extended upward by the extension animation. You may make it move reserve display frame FL4 in such a mode. In addition, at the time of symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be once erased, and after the next symbol variation display is started, the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again. The display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in the expanded state even when symbol stop display is performed, and the hold display frame FL4 may also be moved according to the movement display by the movement animation of the second hold icon h12.

  FIG. 154 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the extension effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 154 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the tutorial display unit TT6 as a holding display frame is expanded, and FIGS. 154 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), it is shown that the holding display frame in which the holding icon is accommodated is expanded and displayed to change the display mode of the holding icon.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the change display icon h0 is suspended at the center thereof It is displayed in the form accommodated in FL1, and the holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arrange | positioned so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode, and does not overlap the decoration pattern. Further, in this demonstration example, the tutorial display unit TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is disposed below the holding display frame FL1 and the holding icon display area . Then, in the tutorial display section TT6, a character display of “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed, and a state in which an explanatory display is performed is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In the example of the effect, the button image 136a is not displayed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the special view 1 And the 4th design of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done.

  In (a-2) in FIG. 154, the pause display frame FL1 and the pause icon display area are pushed upward by the animation in which the tutorial display unit TT6 expands upward, and the scope of the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded. ing. Further, in the expanded tutorial display section TT6, a drinker confrontation reach production has been started. At this time, the first decorative symbol variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this presentation example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative symbol is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area widens the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. The display performed in the lower area is a display that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, for example, the display of speech such as a speech notice, the display of a notice, the effect of a change in display of a hold icon, etc. It can be said. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the character display of "winning and SP development" is performed, and the contents of the effect to be performed when winning in the drink confrontation reach effect are notified. In the drinker confrontation reach production, the main character of the protagonist and the persimmon are compared for drinking, and when the persimmon is drunk, it is predicted that the main character of the protagonist will develop into the SP reach as a victory. In addition, when the drink match display effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 may be displayed and the hold icon display area may be hidden. May be

  In FIG. 154 (a-3), it is shown that the drink confrontation reach production is being performed continuously.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4), when transitioning to the SP reach, there is performed an effect display in which the fortune is drunk and the main character has won. On the other hand, when the result of losing is displayed without transitioning to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4 ′), the effect display in which the main character of the main character got drunk and the main character of the main character was lost Is done. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) may be configured not to perform the effect display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2), or The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) may be configured so that the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) is not performed. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 154 (a-2), the hold icon or the change icon may be hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this effect example, a reserved icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, which respectively constitute a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), four pending icons are accommodated in each frame in the pending icon display area, and one of the first pending icon h11 to the fourth pending icon h14 is displayed. The second hold icon h12 is a display mode (for example, a display mode lit in blue) of the prefetch notice, and the other hold icons are set as a default display mode. Further, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and during the symbol variation display, the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area. Here, the area where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the tutorial display section TT7 displays the character display of "at notice icon digestion ...", which indicates that the notice effect is to be performed. In the tutorial display section TT7, an explanatory display may be performed. In addition, neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In this example of presentation, the stage name display unit and the button image 136a are not displayed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the special view 1 And the 4th design of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the family crest item 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlargement display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually enlarged. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the hold display frame containing the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded mode. In the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-3), the emission color of the household object 224E emitting blue changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the second hold icon h12 displayed in an enlarged manner is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol variation display required for the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually reduced. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this manner, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

  Next, the pachinko machine 100 by the examples 1-9 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this Embodiment is demonstrated using FIGS. 155-158. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (a). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), instead of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66, a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third And the display device 804 of FIG. The first display 800, the second display 802, and the third display 804 are disposed in the rendering device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first display device 800, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, etc. Other display devices, including a projector, may be employed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments includes the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810. The effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 are disposed in the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  Here, the positional relationship among the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 will be described. . After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as "front", and a position farther to the player than the "front" It is written as "after". Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is described as "forward", and the one farther to the player than the "forward" is described as "rearward". The side closer to the player is referred to as the “front side”, and the side farther to the player than the “front side” is referred to as the “rear side”. Also, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the left side (left side, left side, left end, etc.) of the player is viewed from the player, and the reverse is right side (right side, right side) , The right edge etc.).

  The first display device 800 is disposed substantially at the center of the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 66, and the second display device 802 is disposed to the left of the first display device 800, and the third display device 804 is disposed. Are disposed to the right of the first display 800. The second display 802 and the third display 804 are disposed in front of the first display 800. The positions of the second display 802 and the third display 804 in the front-rear direction are the same.

  The effect movable body 806 is disposed at the upper left of the first display device 800, and the effect movable body 808 is disposed at the upper right of the first display device 800. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are disposed adjacent to each other. The position in the front-rear direction of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 is the same and is the front side of the first display device 800.

  The effect movable body 810 is disposed below the first display device 800. The position of the effect movable body 810 in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first display device 800.

  The display device and the effect movable body are, from the rear side, the first display device 800, the second display device 802 and the third display device 806, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810. It is arranged in order. The positions of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 in the front-rear direction may be the same, or the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are disposed in front of the effect movable body 810. It may be In addition, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 may be disposed on the front side of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810.

  The first display device 800 has a horizontally long rectangular display area. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the first display device 800 is "decorative 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → It is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol that switches the display of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the order of .... During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first display device 800 displays the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in this order in a horizontal row from the left. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the symbol combination “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2” other than the symbol combination notifying the hit is stopped and displayed on the first display device 800.

  In the lower part of the display area of the first display device 800, a game information display area a is provided. The lower end side of the game information display area a matches the lower end side of the display area of the first display device 800, and the left end side of the game information display area a matches the left end side of the display area. The right end of a matches the right end side of the display area. A variation icon display area b surrounded by a square frame is provided at the center of the game information display area a. A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area b. The fluctuation icon is an icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b when the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started. By changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon, it is possible to notify the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree) (the fluctuation advance notice). In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is a default display mode, and is the display mode with the lowest big hit reliability among the plurality of display modes.

  A special view 1 reserved icon display area c is provided in the game information display area a and to the left of the variation icon display area b. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area c, the number of pending icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c, it is possible to notify the number of reserve for special figure 1 variable game by the number of reserve icons in the special figure 1, and the special figure relating to the reserve according to the display mode (1) It is possible to notify (predictive notice) of the success or failure of the fluctuation game with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree).

  The special figure 1 reserved icon display area c is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from right to left. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding orders, respectively. That is, the hold icon of the special view 1 corresponding to the earliest (most stored) hold can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth to the second to fourth areas. The hold icon of Special Figure 1 corresponding to the hold of can be displayed respectively.

  At the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas, an oval pedestal image showing the display position of the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is three, and the special icons 1 hold icon g1, g2, g3 in the first area, the second area, and the third area of the reserve icon display area c. Are displayed respectively. The hold icons g1, g2 and g3 are displayed overlapping at the top of the pedestal image. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the hold icons g1, g2 and g3 are displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is a default display mode, and is the display mode with the lowest big hit reliability among the plurality of display modes. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation icon which shows the pending | holding whose special figure 1 prefetch result is "not determined" may be displayed by the default display mode. The reliability of the default display mode in this case is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the hold icon is displayed at a smaller display size than the change icon. This may facilitate identification of the hold icon and the change icon.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), a special figure 2 reserved icon display area d is provided in the gaming information display area a and to the right of the variation icon display area b. In the special figure 2 pending icon display area d, the number of pending icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 reserve icon display area d, it is possible to notify the number of reserve for special figure 2 variable game by the number of reserve icons of special figure 2, and the special figure concerning the reserve according to the display mode of each reserve icon 2) It is possible to notify (predictive notice) the success or failure of the fluctuation game with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree).

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since the number of reservations of the special view 2 is 0, the special icon of the special view 2 is not displayed in the special view 2 suspension icon display area d. When the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), a display area e of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided so as to overlap a part of Special Figure 2 reservation icon display area d. Be In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display such as how to play a game or an explanation of the contents of an effect or an explanation of a character or a notice display as a character image. As shown in FIG. 155 (a), during the stop display of the decorative symbol, no character image is displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display and the advance notice display are not executed in the display area e. As described above, the tutorial display or the notice display may not be displayed in the display area e while the decorative symbol is stopped. In addition, when the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 1 or more, or when the gaming state is the power support state, the display area e may not be provided, and within the display area of the first display device 800. The display area e may be provided at a position not overlapping the special icon 2 reserved icon display area d, or the display area e may be provided in the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the castle town stage is set as the effect stage. On the first display device 800, a background image of the castle town (hereinafter referred to as "castle town background") corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the first display device 800. The first display device 800 can display a background image corresponding to the current rendering stage, rendering mode, or gaming state.

  The second display device 802 has a vertically long rectangular display area. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800, and the display area of the second display device 802 corresponds to that of the first display device 800. Smaller than the display area. In the upper part of the display area of the second display device 802, a mini decoration pattern having a smaller display size than the decoration pattern displayed on the first display device 800 is displayed. In FIG. 155 and thereafter, a mini decoration symbol is illustrated in a simplified manner as compared to the decoration symbol displayed on the first display device 800. Note that the display mode of the mini decorative symbol may be different from the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the first display device 800. On the second display device 802, three mini-decorative symbols of a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol can be displayed side by side in this order from the left to the right. During the special figure 1 or special figure 2 floating game, each symbol on the left middle right is "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → The variation display of the mini decoration pattern which is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → ... is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the second display device 802 is similar to the first display device 800 in that the symbol combination “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2” other than the symbol combination notifying the hit is displayed. It is displayed stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the central part of the display area of the second display device 802, an acceptance count display 850 showing the acceptance count of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the acceptance count display 850 of the "0 times after" character string image is displayed, and the acceptance count of the operation of the chance button 136 is 0 times. A button image 852 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the second display device 850 and below the acceptance count display 850. Three lines are drawn in the button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the button image 852 is divided into four regions. The button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), all four areas of the button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero. The specific content of the effect using the reception number display 850 and the button image 852 will be described later.

  In the lower part of the display area of the second display device 802, a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed, and in the frame image, information about the current rendering stage is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since the effect stage is the castle town stage, a character string image of "castle town" is displayed in the frame image.

  In addition, on the second display device 802, a background image of the castle town background is displayed. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the second display device 802. The second display device 802 can display a background image corresponding to the current rendering stage, rendering mode, and gaming state.

  In the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the second display device 802, a full color LED is disposed. By causing the full color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, predetermined effects, notification, and the like can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the third display 804 has a vertically long rectangular display area of the same size as the second display 802. As shown in FIG. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800. In the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804, a number indicating the number of reserved special views is displayed. The number displayed on the left indicates the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 and the number on the right indicates the number of reservations of Special Figure 2. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 2 is 0, so “3” in the upper left part of the display area of the third display device 804. And the number "0" are displayed.

  At the upper right of the display area of the third display device 804, a fourth symbol is displayed. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed. The square-shaped fourth symbol displayed on the left is the fourth symbol for the special figure 1, and the circular fourth symbol displayed on the right is the fourth symbol for the special figure 2. While the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 is displayed in white, while the special figure 1 variation game is not executed, the fourth pattern for the special figure 1 is displayed in black. Similarly, the fourth symbol for special figure 2 is displayed in white during execution of the special figure 2 variation game, and the fourth pattern for special figure 2 is displayed in black during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game. . In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since both the special view 1 and the special view 2 variation game are not being executed, both the fourth symbol for the special view 1 and the fourth design for the special view 2 are It is displayed in black. In addition, when the special view 1 of the big hit symbol aspect is stopped and displayed, the fourth pattern for the special view 1 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black. Similarly, when the special figure 2 of the big hit symbol aspect is stopped and displayed, the fourth figure for the special figure 2 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black.

  In the lower part of the display area of the third display device 804, a character image of a character on a cylindrical stage is displayed. A predetermined effect or notification can be performed using a character image of a lord.

  In addition, on the third display device 804, a castle town background is displayed. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the third display 804. The third display device 804 can display a background image corresponding to the current rendering stage, gaming state, and rendering mode.

  In the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the third display device 804, a full color LED is disposed. By causing the full color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, predetermined effects, notification, and the like can be performed.

  The second display device 802 may display a decorative symbol, a change icon, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a number display with numbers held by a number, or a fourth symbol, or the third display device 804 may display a decorative symbol or a change icon. The information on the hold icon, the tutorial display, the reception count display, the button image, the mini decoration pattern, and the current stage of presentation may be displayed. The first display device 800 may display a mini decoration symbol, a display of the number of times accepted, a button image, information of the current rendering stage, and a display of the number of reservations by a fourth symbol or a number.

  The display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 is executed by the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG. A control unit (for example, a liquid crystal control unit) which executes display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 may be separately provided. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the second display 802 and the third display 804 are located at the initial positions. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are in front of the display region of the first display device 800 and in their initial positions in planes parallel to the display region. It is movable from left to right. The drive control (movement control) of the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. The initial positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are positions symmetrical with respect to an imaginary straight line extending in the vertical direction through the center of the display area of the first display device 800. In addition, a virtual straight line passing horizontally through the center of the display area of the first display apparatus 800 passes through the centers of the display areas of the second display apparatus 802 and the third display apparatus 804. Three display devices 804 are arranged. The right end of the second display 802 located at the initial position overlaps with a part of the left end of the display area of the first display 800 as viewed from the front. Similarly, the left end of the third display 804 positioned at the initial position overlaps a part of the right end of the display area of the first display 800 as viewed from the front.

  In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are located at the initial position. The effect movable body 806 is relatively disposed on the left side, and the effect movable body 808 is relatively disposed on the right side. The positions in the vertical direction at the initial positions of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are the same. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 each have a horizontally long rectangular plate of the same size, and the plate surface is disposed to be orthogonal to an imaginary straight line extending in the front-rear direction. The characters "Yatsushiro" are written on the surface of the plate of the effect movable body 806, and the characters "General" are written on the surface of the plate of the effect movable body 808.

  The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are in front of the display area of the first display device 800 and in the vertical direction from the respective initial positions in the plane parallel to the display area. It is movable. Note that the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 may operate integrally or may operate individually at the time of operation. Further, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have full color LEDs, and can emit predetermined color effects and can execute predetermined effects and notifications. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 emit light in white (shown by dot hatching in the figure).

  The effect movable body 810 has a circular shape, and the surface is decorated with a family crest. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 810 is located at the initial position. The effect movable body 810 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and is movable in the vertical direction from the initial position in the plane parallel to the display area on the front side of the display area of the first display device 800. In addition, the effect movable body 810 has a full color LED, and can emit predetermined color effects to execute predetermined effects and notifications. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 810 emits light in white (shown by dot hatching in the figure).

  The drive control (movement control) of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  Further, in each of the drawings after FIG. 155 (a), the configuration necessary for explanation among the configurations of the pachinko machine 100 is extracted and illustrated in the region on the paper surface divided by the dashed dotted line. As shown in FIG. 155 (a) and the subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically shown at the upper left in the figure, and the chance button 136 is schematically shown at the lower left in the figure, and general winning in the lower right in the figure. The mouth 226 is schematically illustrated.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Each diagram of FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. A symbol combination "decoration 6-decoration 2" other than the symbol combination informing the hit showing that the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 show that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is out -"Decoration 2" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, so the suspension icons g1, g2 and g3 are displayed in the special diagram 1 suspension icon display area c. The number of reservations is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804 by the numbers "3" and "0". The fluctuation icon f1 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b is erased while the decoration symbol is stopped. The fluctuation icon f1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation display of the next decoration symbol.

  During the game, a predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 emits light in white (indicated by dot hatching in the drawing).

  In FIG. 155 (b) following FIG. 155 (a), the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started by the special figure 1 display 212 (the first special view display 212) not shown in FIG. The state in which the variation display of the decoration pattern and the variation display of the mini decoration pattern are started is shown. In each figure, the variation display of the decoration symbol and the variation display of the mini decoration symbol are represented by the downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed, and the fluctuation icon f1 is erased. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes a fluctuation icon f2 and changes. Moving to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, the special figure 1 hold icon The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 155 (b), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icons g2, g3 has been completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image of "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed in the display area e, and a description of the panda character is given.

  FIG. 155 (c) continuing from FIG. 155 (b) shows a state immediately before the single game ball wins the general winning hole 226. FIG. 155 (d) continuing from FIG. 155 (c) shows a state in which the meter of the button image 852 is increased by one in accordance with the fact that one gaming ball is won in the general winning opening 226. More specifically, the leftmost area of the four divided areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green (indicated by cross hatching with diagonal lines in the figure). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment changes the area of one of the four divided areas of the button image 852 from white to green every time one game ball wins the general winning opening 226, and the meter Increases by one.

  The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 155 (e) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (d). In this example, the special figure 1 fluctuation game started in FIG. 155 (b) is being executed, and two game balls are winning in the general winning opening 226 from FIG. 155 (d) onward.

  FIG. 155 (f) shows the state after two gaming balls have won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. In accordance with the fact that two game balls have won in the general winning opening 226, two more areas of the button image 852 change from white to green and the meter increases by two. At this point the value of the meter is three.

  After the time point shown in FIG. 155 (f), one gaming ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 155 (g) shows the state continuing from FIG. 155 (f). According to the fact that one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, one more area of the button image 852 changes from white to green, the meter increases by one, and the meter becomes full. In the present example, when a total of four gaming balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is received (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the number of times received") increases by one. The display number of the acceptance number display 850 is updated to the text image of “1 more time”, and it is notified that the acceptance number of the chance button 136 has increased from 0 times to 1 time. The button image 852 changes the color of all four areas from green to white after the meter is full, and the value of the meter is reset to zero. The meter of the button image 852 may be reset at the same time as the display content of the acceptance number display 850 is updated, or may be before the display content is updated, The display content may be updated. In this example, when the number of acceptance of the chance button 136 increases from 0 to 1, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In addition, when the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, the chance button 136 may emit light in red. The red light emission start of the chance button 136 may be simultaneous with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 or may be after the start of the operation effective period, or immediately before the start of the operation effective period. May be

  The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 155 (h) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (g). In this example, the special figure 1 fluctuation game started in FIG. 155 (b) is being executed, and eight more game balls are winning in the general winning opening 226 in FIG. 155 (g) and thereafter.

  FIG. 155 (i) shows a state after eight more game balls have won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. The number of acceptances of the chance button 136 is increased twice in response to eight game balls having won in the general winning opening 226. The display number of the acceptance number display 850 is updated to “3 more times” character string image, and it is notified that the acceptance number of the chance button 136 has increased to 3 times. In the button image 852, all four areas are displayed in white, and the meter is reset to 0.

  FIG. 155 (j) continuing from FIG. 155 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game started in FIG. 155 (b) is ended. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 2" other than the symbol combination notifying a hit, showing that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 change game is a loss. -"Decoration 2" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed. While the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the character image is not displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display is not executed. The timing of erasing the character image in the display area e may be the same as the start of stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be immediately before the start of stop display of the decorative symbol, or during stop display of the decorative symbol. May be

  In FIG. 155 (k) continuing from FIG. 155 (j), as the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the special figure 1 change game, the change indication of the decoration symbol and the change indication of the mini decoration symbol are started Show the situation. In each figure, the variation display of the decoration symbol and the variation display of the mini decoration symbol are represented by the downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed, and the fluctuation icon f2 is erased. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes a fluctuation icon f3 and changes. The icon is moved to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 155 (k), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variation icon f3 and the hold icon g3 has been completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image of "Tomon-sama is a general Yatsushiro" is displayed in the display area e, and a description is given of the character of the temple. As described above, the display contents of the tutorial display may be changed for each symbol variation display.

  Further, on the second display device 802, the acceptance count display 850 is displayed by the “three more times” character string image. The accepted number of times of operation of the chance button 136 accumulated during the execution of the previous special figure variation game can be carried over to the next special figure variation game transition.

  FIG. 155 (l) continuing from FIG. 155 (k) shows that the player has operated the chance button 136 once. FIG. 155 (m) continuing from FIG. 155 (l) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed). In this example, the rendering is not performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. As the chance button 136 is operated once, the number of times the chance button 136 is operated decreases to two. As a result, the display content of the acceptance count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “2 more times”.

  The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 155 (n) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (m). In this example, the chance button 136 is operated twice by the player during execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game started in FIG. 155 (k) after FIG. 155 (m).

  FIG. 155 (o) shows the state after the player has operated the chance button 136 twice. In this example, the effect is not executed in response to any of the two operations of the chance button 136. By the chance button 136 being operated twice, the number of times of operation of the chance button 136 is reduced to zero. As a result, the display content of the acceptance number display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “0 times later”. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends when the number of acceptance of the chance button 136 decreases from one to zero. For example, when the success or failure determination result concerning the symbol variation display being executed is a release, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the effect may not be executed according to the operation.

  FIG. 155 (p) shows another pattern of the effect example that continues from FIG. 155 (k). In this pattern, in response to the chance button 136 being operated, the notice effect of the change is executed. In FIG. 155 (p), the player operates the chance button 136. In addition, the fluctuation icon f3 is displayed in a green circular display mode. When the variation icon or the hold icon is displayed in a predetermined color, the big hit reliability is set to increase in the order of white, blue, green, and red. That is, the display mode with the largest hit reliability is white, then the display mode with the high hit reliability is blue, then the display mode with the high hit reliability is green, and the display mode with the highest hit is It is red. Therefore, when the green circular fluctuation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (p) is displayed during execution of the symbol fluctuation display, the white circular fluctuation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (k) is displayed. The jackpot symbol form is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display than in the case. In addition, the display mode may be changed from white to green during execution of the symbol fluctuation display, and the display icon from white to green may be displayed at the start of the symbol fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 155 (p). The display mode may be changed from white to green in the period displayed as the pending icon f2 before becoming a fluctuating icon, or the pending icon f2 may be displayed from the beginning in a green display mode. It may be

  FIG. 155 (q) continuing from FIG. 155 (p) shows that the player has operated the chance button 136 once. In this example, the notice effect of the change is performed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As a notice effect of the change, a notice image including a character image of “holiday” is displayed in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852, and the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 Changes from white to red (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing with vertical and horizontal lines in the drawing), and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of “key”. The preview image is displayed overlapping the entire acceptance number display 850. Note that the acceptance number display 850 may be erased while the preview image is displayed. Further, either one of the timing when the display of the preview image is started and the timing when the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806, 808 changes from white to red may be earlier or simultaneous. Good. The effect movable bodies 806 and 608 may execute the moving operation as the advance effect. For example, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may move downward at the same time as the light emission color changes to red, or may move downward after the light emission color changes to red, and the light emission color is red You may move downward before changing to.

  Further, one of the timing when the display of the preview image is started and the timing when the sound effect of “key” is output from the speaker 120 may be earlier or may be simultaneous. In addition, one of the timing at which the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes to red and the timing at which the speaker 120 outputs the sound effect of “key” may precede the other, or simultaneously. It may be.

  In this example, the notice image including the character image of “holiday” is a notice image of the big hit determination, and is displayed only when the result of the determination regarding the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. In the case where the result of the determination of whether or not the symbol variation display being executed is a disapproval, as shown in FIGS. 155 (m) and (o), even if the effect is not executed in response to the chance button 136 being operated. For example, a notice image including a character string image of "chance" may be displayed as a notice of the change. The advance notice image including the character string image of “chance” can be displayed even when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. The preview image including the character image of "chance" is less likely to be hit with a higher reliability than the preview image including the character image of "holiday", and the preview image including the character image of "holiday" is When displayed, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed in the symbol variation display than when a preview image including the character string image of "chance" is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit reliability of the notice effect in which the effect movable body emits light in red is set relatively high. The emission color of the effect movable body at the time of the notice effect is set to have a high hit probability in the order of white, blue, green and red. If the effect movable body emits light in red and the notice effect is executed during execution of the symbol change display, the pattern change is more than in the case where the effect movable body emits light in blue and the advance effect is performed. In the display, there is a high probability that the jackpot symbol aspect will be displayed definitively.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect of the change is performed according to the first operation of the chance button 136, but the notice effect of the change may be performed according to the second operation of the chance button 136. Also, the notice effect of the change may be executed in response to the third operation, or the notice effect of the change may be performed each time the chance button 136 is operated. In addition. The effect to be executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a pre-read preview effect.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased by one each time four game balls reach the general winning opening 226. The number of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 may increase by one each time one game ball wins in the general winning opening 226, and every two or three game balls win in the general winning opening 226. The number of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased by one, and the number of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 is increased by one each time the game ball has won a predetermined number of five or more in the general winning opening 226 May be The upper limit of the number of times of operation of the chance button 136 may be three times, less than three times, or four or more times.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a chance button 136 as an operation means and a general winning opening 226 as a first area. The number of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the effect (the first button effect) concerning the chance button 136 by the acceptance number display 850 and the button image 852 can be increased or decreased, and the number of acceptances when the game ball enters the general winning opening 226 May increase. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the increase in the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is received and the number of times the chance button 136 is operated allow the player to grasp the number of winning balls on the general winning opening 226. There is a case.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c) are diagrams showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is being executed. In the first display device 800, variable display of decorative symbols is performed, and in the second display device 802, variable display of mini decorative symbols is performed. The third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol. Since the number of reservations of Special Drawing 1 is 2, and the number of reservations of Special Drawing 2 is 0, the holding icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 In the upper left part of the number of pendings is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in a white circular display mode. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display manner.

  In FIG. 156 (a), a button image 854 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed at the center of the display area of the first display device 800, and a gauge image 856 showing the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is displayed below it. ing. The button image 854 is displayed in a red display mode. The gauge image 856 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the length of a predetermined color (thin ink color in the drawing). The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed overlapping with the variation display of the decoration pattern (the variation display of the middle pattern). The button image 854 has a display size larger than that of the button image 852.

  In addition, the number of times of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 is three in response to the fact that 12 game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 before the time point shown in FIG. 156 (a), and the second display device In 802, a number of acceptances display 850 by the character string image of "3 more times" is displayed. The entire area of the button image 852 is white, and the value of the meter is zero.

  In this embodiment, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “button effect A”) related to the chance button 136 by the acceptance number display 850 and the button image 852 and an effect related to the chance button 136 (button image 854 and the gauge image 856 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect B) is being executed redundantly. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is, for example, 10 seconds. The remaining time is reported. In this example, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 may be displayed after the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, or prior to the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. And a gauge image 856 may be displayed. Further, in the button effect B, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the advance effect effect is executed according to the operation. The effective period of operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B ends when the chance button 136 is operated once. When the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are erased at the end of the operation effective period. In this case, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is not performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is executed. It is also good.

  FIG. 156 (b) continuing from FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 once. FIG. 156 (c) continuing from FIG. 156 (b) shows a state in which an effect is executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. In this example, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first preview effect is performed corresponding to the button effect A, and the second preview effect is performed corresponding to the button effect B. The first preview production and the second preview production are started at the same time. The first preview effect is the same as the preview effect of the variation shown in FIG. 155 (q), and is within the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852 as the first preview effect. A notice image including a character image of “holiday” is displayed, the color of light emitted from the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red, and a sound effect “keyne” is output from the speaker 120. The second notice effect is a notice effect of the change, and a cut-in image 858 including a character image of a horizontally long parallelogram shape and a dojolike character is displayed on the first display device 800 as a second notice effect. The cut-in image 858 is displayed overlapping a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation icon display area b. In this example, when the first preview effect and the second preview effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first preview effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the second preview effect is output. It may be done.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is received is 1 or more in the button effect A. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B, the second advance effect can be executed. The button effect A and the button effect B are effects independent of each other, and the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B even when the acceptance frequency display 850 of the “0 times later” character image is displayed. Then, the second preview effect can be performed. As shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), the button effect A and the button effect B can be performed in parallel, and the first preview effect and the second preview effect can be performed in parallel It is.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), the second preliminary announcement effect may be started after the first preliminary announcement effect is started. In this case, if the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit light green as the second notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit light red as the first notice effect and then the second notice effect The effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit green light. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), after the second preview effect is started, the first preview effect may be started. In this case, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit light in red as a second advance effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit light in red as a first advance effect. As described above, the luminescent color of the effect movable body may be overwritten on the color according to the notice effect started later.

  Although the button effect B in this example is an effect requiring a single shot operation of the chance button 136, the button effect B may be an effect requiring a continuous hitting operation of the chance button 136. For example, in the case where button effect B is an effect requiring ten consecutive hitting operations of chance button 136, the operation of chance button 136 of seven times by button effect B even after the number of times of acceptance of button effect A becomes 0 Is accepted, and when the chance button 136 is operated ten times, the operation effective period of the button effect B ends, and the second notice effect is executed.

  The chance button 136 may emit red light only when the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B overlap, or in the button effect A The light may be emitted in red only in the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or may be emitted only in the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B.

  In button effect A, a period other than the stop display of the decorative symbol and the in-execution of the wipe effect display described later in FIG. 158 may be set as an operation effective period of chance button 136. In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the button effect A may be reset to zero.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 (d) and 156 (e), a modification of the rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 156 (d) and 156 (e) are diagrams showing the effect example of this modification in time series. FIG. 156 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the first display device 800, variable display of decorative symbols is performed, and in the second display device 802, variable display of mini decorative symbols is performed. The third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol. Since the number of reservations of Special Drawing 1 is 2, and the number of reservations of Special Drawing 2 is 0, the holding icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 In the upper left part of the number of pendings is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icon g1 is displayed in a white circular display manner. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display manner.

  The hold icon g2 is displayed in a display mode of a pattern imitating the chance button 136. Also, the hold icon g2 is displayed in red. The hold icon g2 has a smaller display size than the button image 850. In addition, the number of times of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 is three in response to the fact that 12 game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 before the time point shown in FIG. 156 (d), and the second display device In 802, a number of acceptances display 850 by the character string image of "3 more times" is displayed. The entire area of the button image 852 is white, and the value of the meter is zero.

  In this example, the button effect A by the acceptance number display 850 and the button image 852 and the effect on the chance button 136 by the hold icon g2 (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect C”) are performed in an overlapping manner. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is a period during which the hold icon g2 is displayed, It is continued until the chance button 136 is operated once. In this example, at the same time as the display start of the holding icon g2 of the pattern imitating the chance button 136, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is started. Note that the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C may be started after the display start of the hold icon g2, or the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C prior to the display start of the hold icon g2. May be started.

  FIG. 156 (e) continuing from FIG. 156 (d) shows that the player has operated the chance button 136 once. In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first preview effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the third preview effect is executed corresponding to the button effect C. The first preview effect is the same as the preview effect of the variation shown in FIG. 155 (q), and is within the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852 as the first preview effect. , And a notice image including a character image of “holiday” is displayed, and the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red. The third preview effect is a prefetch notice effect, and the third preview effect of the present embodiment is a prefetch notice of a special figure change game relating to a second hold of special figure 1. As a third advance notice effect, the display mode of the hold icon g2 changes from the pattern imitating the chance button 136 to the character pattern of the statue of honor. In the hold icon, the jackpot reliability of the display mode of the character pattern of the character is set higher than that of the red circular display mode. When the display mode of the hold icon g2 is changed, the hold icon change animation may be displayed in the special view 1 hold icon display area c. In this example, when the first preview effect and the third preview effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first preview effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the third preview effect is output. It may be done.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is received is 1 or more in the button effect A. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C, a third advance notice effect can be executed. The button effect A and the button effect C are effects independent of each other, and the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C even when the acceptance frequency display 850 of the “0 times later” character image is displayed. Then, the third preview effect can be performed. As shown in FIG. 156 (d), the button effect A and the button effect C can be performed in parallel, and the first preview effect and the third preview effect can be performed in parallel. In this example, the button effect A and the first advance notice effect are executed as the notice effect of the change, and the button effect C and the third notice effect are executed as the advance notice effect. Note that the button effect B shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b) and the button effect C shown in FIG. 156 (d) may be performed in parallel, or the button effect B and the button effect C. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where is being executed in parallel, the second preview rendering and the third preview rendering may be performed in parallel.

  In the first and second embodiments, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, but the special view 1 starting opening 230 (first special view Even if the number of times of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 is increased when the game ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232 (second special figure starting port) and the common figure starting port 228) Good.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, a gate or a through chucker) for detecting passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226 and reception of operation of the chance button 136 when the game ball passes the sensor It may be configured to increase the number of times.

  Note that the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased only in a predetermined gaming state (for example, the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state, non-execution of the big hit game).

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Each diagram of FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 157 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. A symbol combination "decoration 6-decoration 2" other than the symbol combination informing the hit showing that the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 show that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is out -"Decoration 2" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 157 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. Therefore, suspension icons g1, g2 and g3 are displayed in Special Figure 1 suspension icon display area c. The number of reservations is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804 by the numbers “3” and “0”. The fluctuation icon f1 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b is erased while the decoration symbol is stopped. The fluctuation icon f1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation display of the next decoration symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a horizontally long rectangular wipe display screen wpa is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the first display device 800. A still image or a moving image different from the still image or the moving image displayed outside the wipe display area is displayed in the wipe display screen wpa, and a predetermined effect is performed. The wipe display screen wpa functions as a so-called corner wipe. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. For example, the wipe display screen wpa is provided on the first display device 800 when non-execution of super reach effect, and is provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when executing super reach effect. Good. Note that the wipe display screen wpa is provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 at the time of non-execution of super reach effect, and is provided on the first display device 800 at the time of execution of super reach effect. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), on the wipe display screen wpa, a character image of a stunned expression of disappointed expression is displayed. The character image is a default display displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. In addition, during the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa and the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end in this example) is over the decorative symbol (right symbol) in the stop display. It is displayed by wrapping.

  In FIG. 157 (b) continuing from FIG. 157 (a), as the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the special figure 1 change game, the change indication of the decoration symbol and the change indication of the mini decoration symbol are started Show the situation.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed, and the fluctuation icon f1 is erased. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes a fluctuation icon f2 and changes. Moving to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, the special figure 1 hold icon The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 157 (b), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icons g2, g3 has been completed.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol, a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa and the wipe display screen wpa (in the present example, the upper end) is not overlapped with the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol. In other words, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (in this example, the upper end portion) are displayed overlapping the fluctuation display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol. The lower end of the variation display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol may coincide with the upper end side of the wipe display screen wpa.

  FIG. 157 (c) continuing from FIG. 157 (b) shows a state immediately before the single game ball wins the general winning hole 226. FIG. 157 (d) continuing from FIG. 157 (c) shows a state in which the mini game effect display has been started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the single game ball being won in the general winning opening 226. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the mini game effect display is executed as the wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the game ball having won in the general winning opening 226. It should be noted that even when the game ball has won in the general winning opening 226, when the suspension of the special figure is 0, during the stop display of the decorative symbol (under symbol fluctuation stop display) or during the execution of the big hit game If the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game being executed is, for example, 10 seconds or less, the mini game effect display may not be executed. In addition, the mini game effect display may be executed the number of times corresponding to the number of gaming balls that have won in the general winning opening 226. For example, the mini game effect display is started in response to one game ball winning in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is not being executed, and the general game winning opening is further played during the mini game effect display. When the ball wins, the start of the mini game effect display may be suspended. Further, the mini game effect display is started only when the game ball is won in the general winning hole 226 while the mini game effect display is not being executed, and the game ball is won in the general winning hole 226 while the mini game effect display is being executed. In this case, the start of the mini game effect display may not be suspended.

  In the present example, as shown in FIG. 157 (d), a mini game effect display is performed in which the lord and the mother make a confrontation between the drinking and the drinking. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which a lord and a wolf are confronted with drinking alcohol is displayed. The mini game effect display of this example is executed as a prefetch notice effect for the special figure fluctuation game according to the second hold of the special figure 1. The mini game effect display may be executed as the advance notice effect or may be executed as the advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 157 (e) continuing from FIG. 157 (d) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 157 (f) continuing from FIG. 157 (e) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, the lord has won the confrontation against drinking and comparison, and the wipe display screen wpa displays the character image of “win” and the moving image of the scene where the lord has won. In this example, if the mini game is successful, the lord wins the confrontation of drinking and drinking alcohol.

  FIG. 157 (g) continuing from FIG. 157 (f) shows a state where the notice effect to be executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, a pending icon change animation for changing the display mode of the pending icon g3 indicating the second pending of the special view 1 is executed as the notice effect. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. A part of the pending icon change animation of this example is displayed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa. Arrows in (g) and (h) of FIG. 157 indicate the movement trajectory of the effect image 860.

  FIG. 157 (h) continuing from FIG. 157 (g) shows a state in which the effect image 860 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon g3. The entire hold icon g3 is hidden by the effect image 860. The effect image 860 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g2) which is not the target of the hold icon change animation.

  FIG. 157 (i) continuing from FIG. 157 (h) shows a state in which the pending icon change animation has ended. When the on-hold icon change animation ends, the effect image 860 is erased and the entire on-hold icon g3 becomes visible again. Due to the pending icon change animation, the pending icon g3 is displayed with the display mode changing from white to green.

  FIG. 157 (j) following FIG. 157 (i) shows a state after the mini game effect display is finished. In this example, the mini game effect display ends after the end of the hold icon change animation. On the wipe display screen wpa, the default display similar to FIG. 157 (b) is executed.

  FIG. 157 (k) shows an example of effects of a pattern that has failed in the mini game. If the mini game fails, the lord is defeated in the confrontation against drinking alcohol, and on the wipe display screen wpa, a character image of "lost" and a moving image of a scene where the lord is defeated are displayed. If the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed, and the mini game effect display ends.

  FIG. 157 (l) shows an example in which the mini game effect display is displayed overlapping with another effect display. In the lower right portion of the display area of the first display device 800, a conversation notice image 862 including a character image of Princess Chibi and a balloon image provided with a character string image is displayed. A part of the conversation notice image 862 is overlapped on the wipe display screen wpa. More specifically, in the conversation notice image 862, the right half of the character image of Princess Chibi, the whole of the character string image, and those other than the upper end and the right end of the balloon image are overlapped on the wipe display screen wpa and viewed It is impossible. In other words, in the present example, the wipe screen wpa is displayed without being overlapped with the conversation notice image 862. Further, in the present example, the conversation notice image 862 is displayed as a notice image of the change. The conversation notice image 862 may be displayed as a prefetch notice image.

  157 (m) to (r) show another example of the mini game effect display in time series. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of mini game effect displays. FIG. 157 (m) continuing from FIG. 157 (b) shows a state immediately before the single game ball wins the general winning hole 226. FIG. 157 (n) continuing from FIG. 157 (m) shows a state in which the mini game effect display has been started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the single game ball being won in the general winning opening 226. In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (n), a mini game effect display in which the lord challenges the two-handed box throwing is executed. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which a lady is about to throw a thousand-card box is displayed. The mini game effect display of this example is executed as a prefetch notice effect for the special figure fluctuation game according to the second hold of the special figure 1. The mini game effect display may be executed as the advance notice effect or may be executed as the advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 157 (o) continuing from FIG. 157 (n) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 157 (p) continuing from FIG. 157 (o) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, the lord has succeeded in throwing at the two-handed box, and a moving image of a scene in which the lord succeeded at throwing the two-handed chest is displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. In this example, if the mini game is successful, the lord wins the 1000-box throwing.

  FIG. 157 (q) continuing from FIG. 157 (p) shows a state where the notice effect to be executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, a pending icon change animation for changing the display mode of the pending icon g3 indicating the second pending of the special view 1 is executed as the notice effect. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. Arrows in FIG. 157 (q) indicate the movement locus of the effect image 860. The pending icon change animation of this example is the same as the pending icon change animation shown in FIGS. 157 (g) to (i). In this example, as in the case of FIG. 157 (j), the mini game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends.

  FIG. 157 (r) shows an example of effects of a pattern that has failed in the mini game. If the mini game fails, the lord fails in the 1000-box throwing, and a moving image of a scene in which the lord fails the 1000-box throwing is displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. If the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed, and the mini game effect display ends.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of mini game effect display. A big hit reliability may be set according to the type of the mini game effect display. For example, the mini game effect display (hereinafter referred to as “mini game effect display A”) of the alcohol drinking comparison confrontation shown in FIG. 157 (d) to (l) is shown in FIG. 157 (m) to (r) The big hit reliability may be set higher than the mini game effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “mini game effect display B”) that challenges the one-handed box throwing. In this case, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be finalized and displayed in the symbol variation table of the advance target when the mini game effect display A is executed than when the mini game effect display B is executed. Conversely, the mini game effect display B may be set to have a higher big hit reliability than the mini game effect display A. In this case, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed in the symbol variation table of the advance target when the mini game effect display B is executed than when the mini game effect display A is executed. The mini game effect display A may be executed more easily in the mini game than when the mini game effect display B is executed, or the case where the mini game effect display B is executed. May be easier to succeed in the mini game than when the mini game effect display A is executed. Note that only one type of pending icon change animation may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided. When a plurality of pending icon change animations are provided, the pending icon change animation to be executed for each mini game effect display may be determined in advance, and the pending icon change animation to be executed is determined by lottery each time. It may be done.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the general winning opening 226, and the display means of the first display 800, the second display 802, and the third display 804 as a first area. When the game ball enters the general winning opening 226, a mini game effect display may be executed, and the mini game effect display is not overlapped with the decorative symbol that is changing. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player is given the expectation of a big hit by not only the winning balls based on the winning on the general winning opening 226 but also the effect display based on the winning on the general winning opening 226. There are times when you can.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the mini game effect display as a wipe display in the wipe screen wpa which is a partial area of the display area of the first display device 800. The mini game effect display may be displayed in a partial area of the display area of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a part of the hold icon change animation in the wipe screen wpa as the wipe display. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display, as the wipe display, a part of the change icon change animation for changing the change icon in the wipe screen wpa. The mini game effect display may not be started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game effect display is executed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, but the special view 1 start opening 230, the special view 2 start opening 232, The mini game effect display may be executed when the game ball enters the figure starting opening 228.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, through) for detecting passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow-down path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226 so that the mini game effect display is executed when the game ball passes the sensor. It may be configured.

  Note that the mini game effect display may be executed only in a predetermined gaming state (for example, the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state, non-execution of the big hit game).

  Note that the change animation of the hold icon is an animation of only the display start of the effect image 860 and the deletion of the effect image 860, and the animation in the wipe display screen wpa in FIGS. 157 (g) and (h) is a hold icon change. It may be an animation of

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Each diagram of FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 6”, which suggests an out during the super reach effect, is displayed on a temporary stop (swing fluctuation display). In each drawing of FIG. 158, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are not shown.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 155 to FIG. 157, suspended by the mini decoration symbol displayed on the second display device 802 and the number displayed on the third display device 804. The number display and the fourth symbol are displayed on the first display device 800. The mini-decorative symbol is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the first display device 800, and the number-of-helds display by number and the fourth symbol are displayed on the upper right of the display area. In addition, during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, since the variable symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed, the wipe display screen wpa is displayed overlapping with the “decor 6” of the right symbol.

  At the time shown in FIG. 158 (a), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, so the suspension icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special diagram 1 suspension icon display area c. In the upper right portion of the display area of the first display device 800, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0".

  FIG. 158 (b) following FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the wipe effect display has been started. The wipe effect display is an effect of erasing the image from the end of the display area of the display device so as to wipe it out. In this example, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the wipe display wpb1 starts appearing from the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, and the wipe display wpb2 starts appearing from the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb1 and the wipe display wpb2 start to appear at the same time, and the wipe effect display starts with the appearance start of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. The display mode of the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 is an eyebrow pattern. The wipe effect display may or may not be performed on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  The wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are displayed overlapping with the mini decoration pattern, the number-of-holds display with numbers, and the display other than the fourth pattern. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the wipe display wpb1 is displayed overlapping with the display other than the mini decorative symbol, and the wipe display wpb2 is overlapped with the display of the number of reservations by number and the display other than the fourth symbol. Is displayed. In other words, the mini decoration pattern, the number-of-retentions display with numbers, and the fourth pattern are displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

  In addition, the fluctuation icon f1 is erased simultaneously with the start of the wipe effect display. The variation icon f1 may be deleted prior to the start of the wipe effect display, may be deleted after the start of the wipe effect display, or may be displayed even after the start of the wipe effect.

  FIG. 158 (c) following FIG. 158 (b) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is being performed. The variation icon f1 may be deleted at the time point shown in FIG.

  FIG. 158 (d) following FIG. 158 (c) shows a state in which the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. The entire display area of the first display device 800 is displayed in a display mode in which the eyelids are closed by the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In this example, simultaneously with the completion of the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol (symbol variable display) end. In the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, the mini decoration pattern of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and in the upper right part of the display area The 4th design is displayed. The symbol variation display may end after the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. In addition, withdrawal display of wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 is executed after the end of the symbol variation display, and the stop display of the decoration symbol of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6" becomes visible.

  FIG. 158 (e) following FIG. 158 (d) shows a state in which the next special view 1 fluctuation game has been started. The withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed prior to the start of the next special view 1 change game. In the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the wipe display wpb1 shrinks toward the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, the wipe display wpb1 disappears from the display area, and the wipe display wpb2 shrinks toward the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb2 is erased from the display area. The timing of withdrawal display completion of the wipe display wpb1 and the timing of withdrawal display completion of the wipe display wpb2 are the same.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes a fluctuation icon f2 and changes. It moves to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 158 (e), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variation icon f2 and the hold icon g2 has been completed.

  As shown in FIG. 158E, since the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are erased, the wipe display area wpb, the fluctuation icon f2, the hold icon g2 and the castle town background can be viewed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to renew the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next change when there is a gap in the super reach effect.

  FIGS. 158 (f) and (g) show another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 158 (f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 158 (c) except that the lower tray full error display 864 is displayed.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 158 (f), the lower plate 128 is filled with gaming balls, and a lower plate full error occurs. At the lower center of the display area of the first display device 800, a lower error error display 864 is displayed, in which a character string image of “draw a ball” is displayed in white with a white outline in the image of a black horizontal rectangle. There is. The lower tray full error display 852 is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower tray full error from the main control unit 300. The lower tray full error display 864 is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol and the wipe display wpb1, wpb2.

  FIG. 158 (g) continuing from FIG. 158 (f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 158 (d) except that the bottom plate full error display 864 is displayed. The lower tray full error display 864 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. Thus, the lower plate full error display 864 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of removal. In other words, the wipe display wpb1, wpb2 at the time of release is not overlapped with the lower tray full error display 864.

  FIG. 158 (h) shows another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 158 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 158 (g) except that the pending icon change animation is displayed. FIG. 158H shows a state in which the effect image 860 of the pending icon change animation is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. The arrow in FIG. 158 (h) indicates the movement locus of the effect image 860. The effect image 860 in motion is not overlapped with the bottom error message 864. In other words, the lower tray full error display 864 is displayed overlapping with the moving effect image 860.

  As described above, there may be a case where the notice effect display is overlapped with the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of release. In this example, the effect image 860 of the pending icon change animation as the pre-reading advance notice effect is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of release. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs the wipe effect display before starting the next change when the super reach effect is deviated, thereby completely refreshing the player's mood, and the advance notice to the wipe effect display. By overlapping the symbol, it may be possible to have expectations after the next symbol variation display.

  Next, characteristic configurations of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fourth embodiments of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 again.

(A1)
Operation means (e.g., chance button 136);
A first area (for example, general winning opening 226, special figure 1 starting opening 230, special figure 2 starting opening 232, common drawing starting opening 228),
A game console equipped with
The first area is an area where game balls can enter.
The number of times to receive the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (for example, the effect on the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 155, the button effect A) (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times accepted") can be increased or decreased.
If the game ball enters the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the number of game balls entering the first area may be grasped by the player by the increase in the number of times of accepting the operation of the operation means and the number of operations of the operation means.

(A2)
The gaming machine described in A1 above,
Display means (for example, a generic name of the first display 800, the second display 802, the third display 804),
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display 800, the second display 802, and the third display 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as a "first display" (for example, a notice display including a character image of "holiday" shown in FIG. 155 (d)). ,
In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(A3)
The gaming machine described in A2 above,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, "second display" (for example, cut-in image 858 shown in FIG. 156 (c), pending icon g2 shown in FIG. 156 (e)) ) And
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in a second button effect (for example, button effect B, button effect C), the second display may be displayed,
Even if the number of times of acceptance is 0, the second display may be displayed,
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by

(A4)
The gaming machine described in A3 above,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be performed in parallel,
A game stand characterized by

(A5)
The gaming machine according to the above A3 or A4,
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as a “third display” (for example, a button image 852)) in the first button effect.
The display means is an image imitating the operation means in the second button effect (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display” (for example, the button image 854, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 156 (d)). Can be displayed,
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display,
A game stand characterized by

(A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A5, wherein
When the operation means is operated, the number of times of acceptance may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by

(A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A6, wherein
If a plurality of (for example, four) game balls enter the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(A8)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A7, wherein
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226),
A game stand characterized by

(A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above A1 to A8, wherein
A second area (for example, a through provided in front of the flow-down path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which game balls can pass,
The game ball having passed through the second area may enter the first area,
If the game ball enters the second area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(A10)
The game console according to any one of the above A1 to A9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

  If the game ball enters the first area, the number of times of acceptance may be increased.

  The number of times of acceptance may increase only when the game ball enters the first area in a state where predetermined conditions such as the number of times of acceptance are not full are satisfied.

  Even if the game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of times of reception is not full is not satisfied, the number of times of reception may not increase.

  In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more, the first display may be displayed without fail.

  The first display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more in the first button effect during execution of the symbol variation display.

  In the first button effect during non-execution of the symbol variation display, even when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more, the first display may not be displayed.

  When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed.

  The second display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated in the second button effect.

  Even when the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may not be displayed.

  The second display may always be displayed even if the number of times of acceptance is 0 when operating the operation means.

  The second display may be displayed only when the number of times of reception is 0 when operating the operation means.

  The second display may not be displayed even if the number of times of acceptance is 0 when operating the operating means at the time of operating the operating means.

  When the operating means is operated, the number of times of acceptance may be reduced.

  The number of times of acceptance may be reduced only when the operation means is operated.

  Even when the operation means is operated, the number of times of acceptance may not be reduced.

  If a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of acceptance may be increased.

  The number of times of acceptance may increase only when a plurality of game balls enter the first area.

  Even if a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of acceptance may not be increased.

  The game ball having passed the second area may enter the first area without fail.

  Only the game ball having passed the second area may be able to enter the first area.

  The game ball having passed the second area may not enter the first area.

  If the game ball enters the second area, the number of times of acceptance may be increased.

  The number of times of acceptance may increase only when the game ball enters the second area in a state in which a predetermined condition such as the number of times of acceptance is not full is satisfied.

  Even if the game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of times of reception is not full is not satisfied, the number of times of reception may not increase.

  In order to increase the base (number of award balls / number of game balls launched) in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, it is conceivable to increase the winning ratio to the general winning opening, but in the conventional game stand the general winning opening Since there is no means for the player to recognize that the winning rate for 226 has become high, the number of winning balls in the general winning hole 226 is increased by the increased number of winning balls based on the winnings, but the number of winning balls is not There was a risk of distrusting the player about the increase. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment increases the number of acceptances of the operation of the chance button 136 and increases the number of operations of the chance button 136 by increasing the number of acceptances of the operation of the chance button 136 based on winning on the general winning opening 226. There are cases where it is possible to make a player grasp the number of winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 226.

  The number of times of acceptance may be configured to increase by one each time one game ball wins in the first area.

  In a so-called right-handed machine provided with a regular drawing start opening and an attacker on the right side of the game area, at the time of right-handing (during power support and big hit game), the game ball is won in the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game area. In this case, the number of acceptance may not be increased.

  At the time of the right strike, the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game area may win or not increase the number of acceptances, or even if the number of acceptances dedicated to the right strike increases. Good.

  When the game ball enters the first area, an effect that at least one operation of operating the operation means may be started may be started. For example, in a configuration in which a certain effect necessarily involves the operation of the operation means, the number of occurrences of the certain effect (for example, a pseudo-series effect) may be indicated.

  The display of the first display (for example, the first preview effect) may be configured to require a plurality of operations of the operation means even in the case of a big hit in the symbol variation display under execution.

  The number of times of acceptance may be configured to be increased by another chance (the number of winnings of the big hit or the number of times of execution of the predetermined reach).

  If the operation means is operated even during the first display, the number of times of acceptance decreases.

  If the game ball enters the first area during the first display, the number of times of reception may or may not increase.

(B1)
A first area (for example, general winning opening 226, special figure 1 starting opening 230, special figure 2 starting opening 232, common drawing starting opening 228),
Display means (for example, generic name of first display 800, second display 802, third display 804);
A game console equipped with
The first area is an area where game balls can enter.
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display 800, the second display 802, and the third display 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display” (for example, mini game effect display)),
When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first indication is not overlapped with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the player is given a sense of expectation for a big hit by the first display based on the winning on the first area as well as the winning ball based on the winning on the first area. There are times when you can do it.

(B2)
The gaming machine described in B1 above,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display” (for example, conversation notice image 862)),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe indication does not overlap the second indication,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by

(B3)
The gaming machine described in B2 above,
The wipe display is displayed in a partial area (for example, the wipe screen wpa) of the display area of the display unit.
A game stand characterized by

(B4)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B3, wherein
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as a “third display” (for example, a hold icon, a change icon)),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The first display (for example, a wipe icon display as a pending icon change animation or a change icon change animation) is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(B5)
The gaming machine described in B4 above,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by

(B6)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B5, wherein
The display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol (for example, the display of the wipe effect display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol),
A game stand characterized by

(B7)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B6, wherein
When the game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed (for example, in the general winning opening 226 during execution of the wipe effect display) When the game ball wins, the wipe effect display is continuously executed),
A game stand characterized by

(B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B7, wherein
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226),
A game stand characterized by

(B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B8, wherein
A second area (for example, a through provided in front of the flow-down path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which game balls can pass,
The game ball having passed through the second area may enter the first area,
If the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(B10)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

  The first display may be displayed whenever the game ball enters the first area.

  The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the first area during execution of the symbol variation display.

  Even if the game ball enters the first area during non-execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may not be displayed.

  The game ball having passed the second area may enter the first area without fail.

  Only the game ball having passed the second area may be able to enter the first area.

  The game ball having passed the second area may not enter the first area.

  The first display may be displayed whenever the game ball enters the second area.

  The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the second area.

Even if the game ball enters the second area, the first display does not have to be displayed. To increase the base (number of winning balls / number of launching game balls) in the special figure low probability common figure low probability state Although there is a means to increase the prize winning rate to the mouth, it is conceivable that there is no means for the player to recognize that the prize winning rate to the general prize winning opening 226 has been increased in the conventional gaming machine. There is a fear that the player may feel distrust about the increase in the overall number of prize balls although the jackpot has not been won by the increase of the prize balls based on the winnings. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a mini game effect display based on the winning on the general winning opening 226, thereby informing the player that the game ball has won on the general winning opening 226, while playing the mini game. There are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit by the effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini game effect display in the wipe screen wpa displayed by giving priority to the decorative symbol or other effect display (for example, the conversation notice image 862), thereby the mini game There are cases where it is possible to make it possible to grasp the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 at the frequency of the effect display effect display, and not to give the player a sense of distrust.

  The wipe screen wpa may display not only the mini game effect display but also the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is received (for example, the number of times received 850) or a button image (for example, the button image 852).

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e). Each of FIGS. 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e) is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e), the gaming state is the non-power-supporting state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is within the gaming information display area a of the display area of the first display device 800, and is a digested icon to the right of the fluctuation icon display area b. A display area i is provided. The digested icon display area i is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. In the digestive icon display area i, a fluctuation icon corresponding to the finished special figure fluctuation game (symbol fluctuation display) can be displayed as a digestive icon. At the lower part of each of the first to fourth regions, a horizontally long rectangular pedestal image indicating the display position of the digestive icon is displayed.

  Further, in each of the drawings after FIG. 159 (a), the configuration necessary for explanation of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 is extracted and illustrated in the region on the paper surface divided by the dashed dotted line. As shown in the drawings after FIG. 159 (a), the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated at the upper left in the drawing, and the chance button 136 is schematically illustrated at the lower left in the drawing.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has not been executed since the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. The pachinko machine 100 displays the default symbol combination “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2” on the first display 800 and the second display 802 after power-on. Since the numbers of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 are 0 at the time shown in FIG. 159 (a), the holding icon is not displayed on the first display device 800, and the third display device 804 is shown. The number of reservations is indicated by the numbers "0" and "0". Further, on the third display device 804, a black special figure 1 for the special figure 1 symbol and a black special figure 2 for the fourth figure symbol are displayed.

  On the second display device 802, a button image 870 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed. The display color of button image 870 is white. The chance button 136 emits white light. The effect movable bodies 806, 808, 810 are respectively located at initial positions, and all emit white light. A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 159 (b) continuing from FIG. 159 (a), the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one in response to the game ball having a winning one in the special view 1 start opening 230, and the suspension of the special view 1 is digested Then, with the special figure 1 display device 212 starting the special figure 1 change game, the state is shown in which the change indication of the decorative symbol and the change indication of the mini decorative symbol are started. In the variation icon display area b, a variation icon f1 of a white circular display mode is displayed. In addition, the third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol.

  In FIG. 159 (b), when the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is 0, the reservation of Special Drawing 1 increases by 1, the reservation of Special Drawing 1 increased is digested, and Special Drawing 1 fluctuation game is It has been started. In this case, the main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on an increase in one hold of the special view 1 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to execute the increase animation of the hold icon. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icon gradually rises from the bottom toward the first area of the special view 1 hold icon c. In this example, since the suspension of the special view 1 is digested during the execution of the increase animation of the suspension icon, the first sub control unit 400 starts the symbol variation from the main control unit 300 while the increase animation of the suspension icon is being executed. Receive a command When the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol change start command, it controls the first display device 800 to stop the increase animation of the hold icon, and displays the change of the decoration pattern and the movement animation between the hold and change icons. Run In the moving animation between the holding and changing icons, the holding icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested becomes a changing icon and moves to the changing icon display area b. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command during execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to perform the increase animation of the hold icon. Stop on the way and start moving animation between the hold and change icons. In addition, when the number of reservations of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 0, when the reservation of Toku-zu 1 increases by 1, the animation of increase of the holding icon, the holding icon corresponding to the increased holding, and the holding / variation A fluctuation icon corresponding to a special figure fluctuation game (symbol fluctuation display) started immediately after the hold increase may be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b without displaying the animation of movement between icons. In addition, after the pending icon corresponding to the increased pending is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 pending icon display area c (after the completion animation of the pending icon is completed to the end), the animation of moving between the pending and changing icons May be performed.

  In FIG. 159 (c) continuing from FIG. 159 (b), four gaming balls are prized in the special drawing 1 start opening 230, the holding of the special drawing 1 is increased by 4 and the increasing animation of the holding icon is executed. It shows a state in which the increase animation of the icon has ended. In the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area c, reserved icons g1 to g4 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons g1 to g4 are all white and circular. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icons g1 to g4 gradually rise from the lower side toward the respective areas of the first to fourth areas. Further, the number of reservations is displayed on the third display device 804 by the numbers “4” and “0”.

  FIG. 159 (d) continuing from FIG. 159 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 4" other than a symbol combination notifying a hit indicating that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 change game is a loss. -"Decoration 2" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  In FIG. 159 (e) continuing from FIG. 159 (d), as the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the special figure 1 change game, the change indication of the decoration symbol and the change indication of the mini decoration symbol are started Show the situation. In addition, the third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon and the reduction animation of the reserved icon with the start of the special view 1 fluctuation game. In the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the icon displayed as the fluctuation icon becomes a digestion icon and moves to a digestion icon display area i. In the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons in this example, the fluctuation icon f1 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game ended in FIG. 159 (e) becomes the digestion icon j1 simultaneously with the movement start, and the digestion icon j1 is the digestion icon display area Move gradually towards the first region of i. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the digest icon j1 is completed. The movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon ends when movement of the digestive icon is completed. In addition, the display mode of the digest icon j1 changes from the white circle to the gray ninja character pattern after movement is completed. The display mode of the digestion icon j1 may change during movement of the digestion icon j1, or may change simultaneously with completion of movement of the digestion icon j1. In this example, the digest icon of the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern may be displayed as a preview icon as a preview notice or as a notice display of the change. By means of the digested icon of the display mode of the gray ninja character, for example, a notice effect such as a hold change animation can be executed. Even if the digest icon of the display mode of the gray ninja character is displayed, there may be a case where no advance notice effect such as a hold change animation is performed.

  The reduction animation of the hold icon is an animation including a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon. In the moving animation between the holding and changing icons, the holding icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area c becomes the changing icon f2 and gradually moves to the changing icon display area b. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 is completed. The moving animation between the holding and changing icons ends when movement of the changing icons is completed. In addition, the display size of the fluctuation icon f2 is gradually enlarged during the movement to the fluctuation icon display area b.

  The move animation of the hold icon is an animation in which each hold icon moves to the area corresponding to the hold order higher by one. In this example, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c, and the special view 1 hold icon display area c The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area moves to the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c, and the hold icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c It moves to the 3rd territory of Figure 1 reservation icon indicatory territory c. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the hold icons g2 to g4 is completed. The move animation of the hold icon ends when the move of the hold icon is completed.

  In this example, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold / movement icons, and the movement animation of the hold icons are simultaneously started. Note that three animations may be started in any order, or two animations of the three animations may be started simultaneously.

  Also, in this example, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold / movement icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon end simultaneously. Note that the animation of the three may end in any order, or two of the three animations may end simultaneously.

  FIG. 159 (f) continuing from FIG. 159 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination informing the hit, showing that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 change game is a loss. -"Decoration 5" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  In FIG. 159 (g) continuing from FIG. 159 (f), the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started along with the special image 1 variation game being started by the special view 1 display device 212. Show the situation. In addition, the third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the animation of moving the digest icon when one or more digest icons are displayed in the digest icon display area i at the start of the special view 1 change game. The movement animation of the digestion icon is an animation in which the digestion icon moves one area to the right. In the movement animation of the digestion icon of this example, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i in FIG. 159 (f) gradually moves toward the second area of the digestion icon display area i. . At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. The movement animation of the digestion icon ends when the movement of the digestion icon is completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons and the reduction animation of the hold icon are executed. In the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f2 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game ended in FIG. 159 (f) becomes the digestion icon j2 simultaneously with the movement start, and the digestion icon j2 is the fifth of the digestion icon display area i 1 Move gradually towards the area. The display size of the digest icon j2 is gradually reduced during the movement so that it has the same display size as the hold icon at the same time the move to the first area of the digest icon display area i is completed. The display size of the digest icon j2 is the same as the display size of the circular hold icon (for example, the hold icons g3 and g4 shown in FIG. 159 (g)), and the display color of the digest icon j2 is gray (in FIG. Shown in stripes). The circular gray display mode is the default display mode of the digestion icon. The digest icon of the default display mode is not used as a notice icon.

  Thus, the digest icon in the default display mode has the same display size and shape as the variation icon of the special view 1 and the hold icon of the special view 1. As a result, the player may easily recognize that the icon corresponds to the special figure 1 fluctuation game in which the digest icon has ended.

  In this example, execution of the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons moves to the second area as if the digestion icon j1 is pushed out of the first area of the digestion icon display area i by the digestion icon j2. Do.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reduction animation of the hold icon is executed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c becomes a change icon f3 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 is completed. In the move icon of the reserve icon, the reserve icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c, and the special figure 1 reserve icon is displayed. The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the area c moves to the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the hold icons g3 and g4 is completed.

  In this example, the movement animation of the digestive icon is started simultaneously with the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold / change icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that four animations may be started in any order, or two or three animations of the four animations may be started simultaneously.

  Further, in this example, the movement animation of the digestive icon ends simultaneously with the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the movement animation between the holding / fluctuation icons, and the movement animation of the holding icon. Note that the four animations may end in any order, and two or three animations of the four animations may end.

  FIG. 159 (h) continuing from FIG. 159 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. A symbol combination "decoration 6-decoration 3" other than the symbol combination informing the hit showing that the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 show that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is a loss. -"Decoration 9" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  Five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 159 (i) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159 (g). In this example, after the state shown in FIG. 159 (g), two special figure 1 fluctuation games are executed. It is assumed that there is no winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the two special figure 1 fluctuation games. Also, with the start of two special figure 1 movement games, movement animation of digestion icon, movement animation between movement / digestion icons, movement animation between hold / movement icons, movement animation of hold icon are respectively 2 It is executed each time.

  The digested icon j1 displayed in the second area of the digested icon display area in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is associated with the start of the first special figure 1 fluctuation game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). Move to the third area of the digestion icon display area i by the movement animation of the digestion icon performed, and then display the digestion icon by the movement animation of the digestion icon executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variation game started Move to the fourth area of the area i.

  The digested icon j2 displayed in the first area of the digested icon display area in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is associated with the start of the first special figure 1 fluctuation game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). Move to the second area of the digestion icon display area i by the movement animation of the digestion icon performed, and then display the digestion icon by the movement animation of the digestion icon executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variation game started Move to the third area of the area i.

  The variation icon f3 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is executed at the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i as a digestion icon j3 and then the second special figure 1 movement game starts with the start of the digestion icon The movement animation moves to the second area of the digested icon display area i.

  The reserve icon g3 displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is associated with the start of the first special figure 1 fluctuation game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). Moved to the fluctuation icon f4 (not shown) by the movement animation between the held and fluctuation icons performed, moved to the fluctuation icon display area b, and then executed with the start of the second special figure 1 fluctuation game started The movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon causes the digestion icon j4 to be moved to the first area of the digestion icon display area i.

  The reserve icon g4 displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c in FIGS. 159 (g) and (h) is associated with the start of the first special figure 1 fluctuation game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). It moves to the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c by the move animation of the reserve icon executed, and then between the reserve / variation icons executed with the start of the second special figure 1 change game started. By moving animation, it becomes a fluctuation icon f5 and moves to the fluctuation icon display area b.

  FIG. 159 (j) shows a state in which the second special figure 1 variation game is ended from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 1" other than the symbol combination informing the hit showing that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is out. -"Modification 4" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  Five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 159 (k) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159 (j). In this example, it is assumed that one special game ball is won in the special figure 1 start opening 230 during non-execution of the special figure fluctuation game shown in FIG. The number of reservations for special drawing 1 is increased by one according to the winning, the increase animation of the holding icon is started, and the holding icon g5 (not shown) corresponding to the increased holding is the first area of special drawing 1 holding icon c. Is displayed in the form of gradually rising from the bottom toward the In this example, the special icon 1 suspension is digested during execution of the increase icon of the suspension icon, and the special figure 1 floating game is started, so the increase animation of the reservation icon is canceled and movement between the suspension and fluctuation icons The animation is started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g5 becomes a change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the first display device 800, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, in the second display device 802, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is performed, and in the third display device 804, the white special figure 1 is displayed. The 4th design is displayed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the movement animation of the digestive icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons are executed.

  In this example, up to four digestion icons can be displayed in the digestion icon display area i. When the animation of moving the digestion icon is started in a state where four digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i, it is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i at the start of the animation of movement of the digestion icon. The digest icon moves to the right, and the digest icon is gradually erased in a manner of moving toward the outside of the display area of the first display device 800. In this example, by executing the moving animation of the digest icon, the digest icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area c in FIG. 159 (j) moves to the right, and the digest icon j1 is displayed. The data is gradually erased in such a manner as to move out of the display area of the first display device 800. Further, by executing the moving animation of the digest icon, the digest icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i is moved to the fourth area of the digest icon display area i, and the digest icon display area The digested icon j3 displayed in the second area of i is moved to the third area of the digested icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (l), the digest icon j1 is erased, the move of the digest icons j2 and j3 is completed, and the move animation of the digest icon is ended. In this example, the digest icon j1 is erased without the advance effect being executed by the digest icon j1 of the display pattern of the character pattern of the ninja.

  By executing the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f5 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b in FIG. 159 (j) becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. . At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (l), the movement of the digestion icon j5 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is ended.

  In addition, during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, 2 game balls win the special figure 1 starting mouth 230, the number of reservations of special figure 1 increases by 2, the increase animation of the reservation icon is started, 1 piece The hold icon g6 corresponding to the hold increased in accordance with the winning of the eye is displayed in a manner of gradually rising from the lower side toward the first area of the special view 1 hold icon c, and in response to the second winning. The hold icon g7 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a manner of gradually rising from below toward the second area of the special view 1 hold icon c. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (l), the movement of the hold icons g6 and g7 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon is ended. The display mode of the hold icons g6 and g7 is a default display mode.

  FIG. 159 (m) continuing from FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 6" other than the symbol combination informing the hit indicating that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 change game is a loss. -"Decoration 7" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  In FIG. 159 (n) continuing from FIG. 159 (m), the variation display of the decoration symbol and the variation display of the mini decoration symbol are started with the special figure 1 display device 212 having started the special figure 1 fluctuation game. Show the situation. In addition, the third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol.

  At the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation of a digestion icon, a movement animation between variation / digestion icons, a movement animation between hold / variation icons, and a movement animation of a hold icon are executed.

  Execution of the movement animation of the digestion icon erases the digestion icon j2 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon j3 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is a digestion icon Moving to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j4 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i The digestion icon j5 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (n), the digestion icon j2 is erased, the movement of the digestion icons j3, j4, and j5 is completed, and the animation of movement of the digestion icon is ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f6 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b in FIG. 159 (m) becomes the digestion icon j6 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. . At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the digestion icon j6 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is ended.

  By the execution of the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g6 displayed in the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 159 (m) becomes a change icon f7 and a change icon display area b Move to At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the fluctuation icon f7 is completed, and the movement animation between the holding and fluctuation icons is ended.

  The execution of the move icon of the reserve icon moves the reserve icon g7 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c in FIG. 159 (m) to the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c. Do. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the hold icon g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 159 (o) continued from FIG. 159 (n) shows a state where the display mode of the digest icon j4 has been changed to a gray ninja character pattern. The digested icon j4 after the display mode change is displayed as a notice icon.

  FIG. 159 (p) continuing from FIG. 159 (o) shows a state in which change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. The change animation of the hold icon is a pre-read notice effect. In this example, the suspension of the prefetching preview object is the suspension of the special view 1 corresponding to the suspension icon g7 (preservation of the first special figure 1 of the suspension order), and the change animation of the suspension icon corresponds to the suspension of prefetching preview object This is executed to change the display mode of the hold icon (in this example, the hold icon g7). In the change animation of the reserve icon of this example, the digest icon j4 displayed as the advance notice icon throws the image k of the shuriken (hereinafter referred to as "the shuriken k") toward the reserve icon g7 which is the change target of the display mode. A moving image of a scene hit by the shuriken k is displayed on the hold icon g7. The arrow in FIG. 159 (p) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed overlapping with the variation display of the decorative symbol. In other words, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (p), the shuriken k has hit the hold icon g7.

  FIG. 159 (q) continuing from FIG. 159 (p) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is being executed. In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, after the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g7. The shuriken k is erased at the same time as the display of the effect image 872 starts. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872 or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 159 (r) continuing from FIG. 159 (q) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon has ended. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire reserve icon g7 is erased, the entire reserve icon g7 whose display mode has changed in a blue circle can be viewed again. When the effect image 872 is erased, the change animation of the hold icon is ended. In addition, prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue. In other words, the luminescent color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue before the entire reserved icon g7 becomes visible again. The emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue simultaneously with the end of the change animation of the hold icon, or the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue after the end of the change animation of the hold icon. It may change. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue at the same time as the entire reserved icon g7 becomes visible again, or after the entire reserved icon g7 becomes visible again The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from white to blue. As described above, when the change animation of the holding icon is executed, the display color of the holding icon whose display mode has been changed becomes the same as the light emission color of the effect movable body 810. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as the pre-reading advance notice effect. The effect that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes is associated with the change animation of the hold icon. Note that the effect movable body in which the light emission color changes as the advance notice effect when the change animation of the reserved icon is executed may be at least one effect movable body among the effect movable bodies 806, 808, and 810.

  In this example, the change animation of the holding icon for changing the display mode of the holding icon g7 is executed by the digest icon j4 of the display mode of the pattern of the ninja. In (159) to (r) of FIG. 159, the digest icon j4 is displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display. Note that the change animation of the hold icon takes only the display start of the effect image 872 and the deletion of the effect image 872, the digest icon j4 throws the shuriken k, and the animation of the scene where the shuriken k flies is an animation for the hold icon change. It may be

  Fig. 160 (a) continuing from Fig. 159 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is ended. The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 5" other than the symbol combination informing the hit showing that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is a loss. -"Decoration 7" is displayed stopped. On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed.

  The decorative symbol displayed on the first display device 800 is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular frame image, and when the decorative symbol is odd, the frame image is displayed in red and the decorative symbol is even. In some cases, the inside of the frame image is displayed in blue. It is assumed that the display color in the frame image is included in the display mode of the decorative symbol. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading notice by displaying all the stop symbols of the decorative symbol with odd numbers or even numbers. In this example, the pre-reading notice by the combination of the odd-numbered decorative symbols is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the pre-reading notice by the combination of the even-numbered decorative symbols. In other words, the pre-reading notice by the combination of the red decorative symbols is set to have a higher big hit reliability than the pre-reading notice by the combination of the blue decorative symbols. For this reason, when the combination of the odd (red) decorative symbols is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display of the pre-reading advance notice object than the case where the even (blue) decorative symbols are displayed. It is easy to be done. The combination of the odd, even and the same color decorative symbols is a so-called chance eye.

  In FIG. 160 (b) continuing from FIG. 160 (a), with the special view 1 display device 212 starting the special view 1 change game, the change indication of the decoration symbol and the change indication of the mini decoration symbol are started Show the situation. In addition, the third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, and a movement animation between the holding / variation icons are executed. In addition, when only one hold icon is displayed at the start of the special figure 1 change game, the movement animation of the hold icon is not executed along with the start of the special figure 1 change game.

  Execution of the movement animation of the digestion icon erases the digestion icon j3 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon j4 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is a digestion icon Moving to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j5 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i The digestion icon j6 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (b), the digest icon j3 has been deleted, and the motion of the digest icons j4, j5, and j6 has been completed, and the motion animation of the digest icon has ended.

  By execution of the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f7 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b in FIG. 160 (a) becomes the digestion icon j7 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. . At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (b), the movement of the digestion icon j7 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is ended.

  With the execution of the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g7 displayed in the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 160 (a) becomes the change icon f8 and the change icon display area b Move to At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (b), the movement of the change icon f8 is completed, and the movement animation between the holding and change icons is ended.

  FIG. 160 (c) following FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which change icon change animation for changing the display mode of the change icon is executed. The change animation aspect of the variation icon in this example is the same as the change animation aspect of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 159 (p) to (r). As shown in FIG. 160C, the digest icon j4 displayed as the advance notice icon throws the shuriken k toward the fluctuation icon f8, and a moving image of a scene hit by the shuriken k is displayed on the fluctuation icon f8. The arrow in FIG. 160 (c) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed overlapping with the variation display of the decorative symbol. In other words, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time point shown in FIG. 159 (p), the shuriken k has hit the fluctuation icon f8.

  The change animation aspect of the change icon may be different from the change animation aspect of the hold icon. For example, in the change icon change animation, a moving image of a scene where the digest icon j4 throws a bomb may be displayed.

  FIG. 160 (d) following FIG. 160 (c) shows a state in which change icon change animation is being executed. In the change icon change animation, after the shuriken k hits the change icon f8, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the change icon f8, as in the change icon change animation. The shuriken k is erased at the same time as the display of the effect image 872 starts. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872 or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 160 (e) following FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the change icon change animation has ended. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire variation icon f8 is deleted, the entire variation icon f8 whose display mode has changed in a red circle can be viewed again. When the effect image 872 is erased, the change icon change animation ends. Further, prior to the end of the change animation of the variation icon, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red before the entire variation icon f8 becomes visible again. The emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red simultaneously with the end of the change icon change animation, or the emission color of the effect movable element 810 changes from blue to red after the change icon change animation ends. It may change. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time as the whole of the fluctuation icon f8 becomes visible again, or after the whole of the fluctuation icon f8 becomes visible again The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from blue to red. As described above, when the change animation of the change icon is executed, the display color of the change icon whose display mode has changed and the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as the advance notice effect of the change. The effect that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes is associated with the change animation of the fluctuation icon. In addition, even if the effect movable body whose luminescent color changes as the advance notice effect of the change when the change animation of the change icon is executed is at least one effect movable body among the effect movable bodies 806, 808, 810. Good.

  In this example, the change animation of the change icon for changing the display mode of the change icon f8 is executed by the digest icon j4 of the display pattern of the ninja. In (b) to (e) of FIG. 160, the digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice display of the change. Note that the change animation of the hold icon is an animation of only the display start of the effect image 872 and the deletion of the effect image 872, the digest icon j4 throws the shuriken k, and the animation of the scene where the shuriken k flies is a change icon change. It may be an animation. In this example, after the digest icon j4 is displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, it is also displayed as a notice of the change.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first display 800, a second display 802, and a third display 804. In this example, the first display device 800 can display the variation display of the decoration symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f) after the variation display of the decoration symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d). It is. The first display device 800 can display the variation icon f1 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), and the icon displayed as the variation icon f1 can be displayed in FIG. And (f) can be displayed as the digest icon j1 in the variable display of the decorative symbol. The digestion icon j1 is displayed as a notice icon. The digested icon display area i in which the digested icon j1 is displayed is an area different from the fluctuating icon display area b. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the symbol aspect of the symbol display is stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display, the fluctuation icon corresponding to the previous symbol fluctuation display is notified in advance in the next symbol fluctuation display. Since it is possible to display as, there are cases where it is possible to have expectation in the symbol variation display immediately after the release.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the fluctuation icon f2 corresponding to the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol in the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f). The first display device 800 can display both the fluctuation icon f2 and the digestion icon j1.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the icon displayed as the hold icon as the change icon f4. The advance notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes, and one of the plurality of types of display modes is a gray ninja character pattern as a first display mode. It is a display mode. The gray ninja character digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice icon and is an icon associated with a change in display mode of the hold icon g7 (for example, a change animation of the hold icon).

  The gray ninja character digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice icon and is an icon associated with a change in display mode of the change icon f8 (for example, a change animation of the change icon).

  Note that one of the display modes of the plurality of types of digested icons is, for example, a display mode of a character pattern of a slot-length character (display mode of the hold icon g1 shown in FIG. 160 (F) described later). The digested icon of a gray-length banister character pattern may be displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon). It is an icon associated with a change (eg, a change animation of a change icon).

  It should be noted that the display mode of the Bancho character pattern may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja. For example, when the notice icon of the display pattern of the character pattern of the bancho character is displayed, the big hit symbol form stops in the symbol variation display of the notice object than when the notice icon of the display pattern of the character pattern of the ninja is displayed. It may be easy to be displayed.

  In this example, the execution of the movement animation of the digest icon causes the digest icon displayed in the second area of the digest icon display area i to be the second icon in the digest icon displayed in the first area of the digest icon display area i. Move out as it is pushed out of the Similarly, the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is moved to the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i so as to be pushed out of the second area, The display of the first display 800 such that the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the icon display area i is pushed out of the second area to the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i It is erased from the area.

  In this example, the execution of the move icon of the hold icon causes the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area to be the digest icon displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area c. Move as pushed out. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is moved to be pushed out of the second area to the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area c, and the hold is performed. The hold icon displayed in the first area of the icon display area c is moved from the first area to the change icon display area b such that the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is pushed out of the first area .

  As described above, the movement animation of the digest icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are common in an animation mode in which the icon is pushed to the icon of the adjacent area and moved to the opposite area to the adjacent area.

  In this embodiment, when the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, and the movement animation of the movement animation between the hold / variation icons are displayed, the display is performed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i. Timing at which the digestion icon being displayed is pushed out and erased by the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i, the timing at which the fluctuation icon becomes the digestion icon, and timing at which the hold icon becomes the fluctuation icon Is the same. Note that these three timings may be different, and the order can be set arbitrarily. Note that two of the three timings may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the increase animation of the hold icon is performed in a manner in which the hold icon is lifted from below, but may be performed in a manner in which the hold icon is lowered from above.

  The effect of displaying the fluctuation icon as the digest icon or the notice icon after the next symbol fluctuation display is executed only in the non-power support state. For this reason, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons are executed only in the non-power support state. In addition, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon may be always executed in the power support state.

  Note that the number of digested icons whose display mode changes is not limited to one. In this embodiment, the display mode of only the digestion icon j4 is changed in FIG. 159 (o), but the display mode of at least one of the digestion icons j3, j5 and j6 together with the digestion icon j4. May change. When the display mode of many digested icons changes at one time, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display of the advance notice object than when only the display mode of one digested icon changes. In this case, it may be possible to entertain the player by making the presentation with a relatively high hit probability lively. Also, conversely, when the display mode of only one digestive icon changes, the jackpot symbol is determined in the symbol variation display of the advance notice object than when the display mode of many digestive icons changes at one time It may be easy to be displayed. In this case, it may be possible to make an impression on the player of the digest icon displayed as the notice icon changing in the display mode.

  In the present embodiment, in the symbol variation display in FIG. 159 (m) to FIG. 160 (a), the suspension of the advance notice target is the suspension of the special figure 1 with the first retention order (pending 1 of special figure 1). When the reserve 1 of the special figure 1 is a notice target, the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice object is displayed as a reserve icon in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c, and the change icon is displayed. There is an opportunity for two changes in the display mode (promotion to a display mode with high jackpot reliability) with the case where the area b is displayed as a fluctuation icon. In FIG. 159 (o) to FIG. 160 (a), the digest icon j4 as the notice icon is displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i, and in FIG. 160 (b) to FIG. 160 (e) The digest icon is displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i, and the digest icon j4 can be displayed over two symbol variation displays. Since the change animation of the suspension icon and the change icon is executed only once in one pattern change display, the digested icon as the advance notice icon related to the change animation is displayed over the two pattern change displays. In some cases, it may be possible to predict that the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display when the digest icon is started to be displayed is the advance notice target.

  For example, in the case where the foreclosure of the advance notice is on hold 2 of the special figure 1 of the hold order (on hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon showing the symbol variation display of the advance notice object Three display changes (display with a high hit probability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second area and the first area of c and when displayed as a change icon in the change icon display area b There is a chance of promotion). The digest icon as the advance notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may be started to be displayed in the second area of the digest icon display area i. As a result, since the digest icon is displayed over three times in the symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display including the symbol variation display being executed when the digest icon is started to be displayed is a notice target. In some cases, it can be predicted.

  As described above, there are cases where it is possible to predict the target change of the pre-reading advance notice by the display start position of the digest icon as the advance notice icon. In addition, the larger the chance of promotion of the display mode of the icon, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. In some cases, it is possible to indicate the jackpot reliability by the number of opportunities for promoting the display mode of the icon.

  For example, in the case where the foreclosure of the advance notice is on hold 2 of the special figure 1 of the hold order (on hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon showing the symbol variation display of the advance notice object Three display changes (display with a high hit probability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second area and the first area of c and when displayed as a change icon in the change icon display area b There is a chance of promotion). The digest icon as the advance notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may be started to be displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i. Thereby, since the said digested icon is displayed over 1 time of symbol fluctuation display, it may be able to predict that the opportunity of promotion of the display mode of an icon is 1 time.

  Note that the digest icon as the advance notice icon can be displayed in the first to fourth areas of the digested icon display area i, regardless of which is the hold of the advance target. The digest icon as the advance notice icon can be associated with the promotion of the display mode of the icon up to four times when the display is started in the first area of the digest icon display area i. On the other hand, the hold icon displayed in the 4th area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c has 5 opportunities for promotion of the display mode, and one digest icon is related to all promotion opportunities. I can not The hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c may not be the target of the change animation of the hold icon (target of promotion of display mode).

  Note that the display on the first display device 800 in the present embodiment may be displayed on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (f). FIG. 160 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is being executed. In the first display device 800, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, in the second display device 802, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is performed, and in the third display device 804, the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 is white. It is displayed. A white circular fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b.

  In the state shown in FIG. 160 (f), the gaming state is the non-power-supporting state, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is four, and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is two. On the third display device 804, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "4" and "2". In the special view 1 suspension icon display area c of the first display device 800, suspension icons g1 to g4 corresponding to the suspension of the special view 1 are displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display area dedicated to the display of the reserved icon in the special view 2 is not provided in the non-power support state, the hold in the special view 2 becomes one or more in the non power support state. A reserve icon corresponding to the reserve of special figure 2 is displayed in special figure 1 reserve icon display area c. As shown in FIG. 160 (f), the hold icon m1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special view 2 partially overlaps the hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of the special view 1, and the special view 1 hold icon is displayed. The hold icon m2 displayed in the area c and corresponding to the hold 2 of the special view 2 is partially overlapped with the hold icons g2 and g3 corresponding to the hold of the special view 1 and displayed in the special view 1 hold icon display area c Be done. Therefore, a part of the hold icons m1 and m2 corresponding to the hold of the special view 2 becomes invisible. The hold icons m1 and m2 are displayed in a white square display manner. The display mode of the white square is a default display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special view 2. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special view 2 is displayed on the back side of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special view 1.

  As described above, in the non-power-supporting state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special view 2 is displayed overlapping the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special view 1. In other words, in the non power saving state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special view 1 is displayed without overlapping the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special view 2.

  The reserve icon corresponding to the reserve of the special figure 2 is displayed as a variation icon in the symbol variation display executed when the corresponding suspension is digested, and the digest icon or notice in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display It is not displayed as an icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is erased at the end of the symbol variation display. For example, when the reserve of the special figure 2 remaining at the end of the charge support is digested after the finish of the charge support, the reserve icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a variation icon in the symbol variation display , It is not displayed as a digestion icon or a notice icon in the next symbol variation display.

  In the non-power support state, when reserve of special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, when special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, game information indicatory territory a is deleted, the digestion icon and special figure 1 And the special icon 2 reserved icon display area is provided in the display area of at least one display unit of the first display 800, the second display 802, or the third display 804 separately. It may be done. In the non-power-supporting state, the digest icon or the advance notice icon may be deleted when the reserve of the special view 2 becomes one or more, or when the special view 2 change game is started.

  By using a device that distributes winnings on the game ball to the special view 1 start opening 230 and the special view 2 start opening 232 in the non-electric support state, a start opening winning combination for which the game can be performed with a maximum number of eight hold In the configuration of forward variation, up to eight hold icons and digest icons can be displayed. Therefore, if the digest icon is mistaken for a hold icon, the number of pending icons appears to be 16, and the maximum hold count is It may be mistaken to be 16 pieces. This may give the player a fresh feeling. In addition, since the hold icon and the digest icon of the special view 1 are not displayed in the power support state, the maximum number of held may be visible as four.

  A maximum of four special icon 1 reserved icons and digest icons can be displayed. For example, the display area of the first display device 800 is divided into two, and one of the areas is displayed with a change icon of a decoration icon corresponding to the hold icon and the special figure change game to execute effects, and the other The area may be displayed with a variable icon of a fake icon and a fake decorative symbol that does not correspond to the special pattern change game, and the false effect may be performed. The fake effect may be displayed in the wipe screen wpa shown in FIG.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (A) to 160 (E). Each of FIGS. 160A to 160E is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 160 (A) to 160 (E), the gaming state is the non power saving state. FIG. 160 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 5" other than the symbol combination informing the hit showing that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is a loss. -"Decoration 7" is displayed stopped. In the first display device 800, the advance notice is executed by the combination of the odd (red) decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". In this example, the pre-reading advance notice object is the suspension of the special view 1 with the second suspension order.

  On the third display device 804, a black special design 1 for fourth figure is displayed. Digestion icons j1 to j4 are displayed in the digestion icon display area i. The display mode of the digestion icons j1 to j4 is a default display mode of gray circle. In the variation icon display area b, a variation icon f5 of the display pattern of the character pattern of the ninja is displayed. The fluctuation icon f5 is displayed in color and is not displayed in gray. The icon of the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja may be displayed not only in the digested icon display area i but also in the variable icon display area b or the special view 1 reserved icon display area c. When the icon of the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja is displayed in the variation icon display area b or the special figure 1 suspension icon display area c, it is displayed in color. In the present example, the change icon f5 is displayed as a prefetch notice display targeted for the suspension of the special figure 1 with the second suspension order.

  In FIG. 160 (B) continuing from FIG. 160 (A), the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decoration symbol are started in conjunction with the special view 1 variation game being started by the special view 1 display device 212. Show the situation. In addition, the third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol.

  At the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation of a digestion icon, a movement animation between variation / digestion icons, a movement animation between hold / variation icons, and a movement animation of a hold icon are executed.

  Execution of the movement animation of the digestion icon erases the digestion icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is a digestion icon Moving to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j3 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i The digestion icon j4 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (B), the digestion icon j1 is erased, the movement of the digestion icons j2, j3 and j4 is completed, and the animation of movement of the digestion icon is ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f5 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the digestion icon j5 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is ended. The digestion icon j5 is displayed in the same display size as the variation icon f5. As described above, the icons of the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja have the same display size in the case of being displayed as a variation icon and in the case of being displayed as a digestive icon. Also, the digestion icon j5 is displayed in gray. The display color of the digestion icon j5 may be changed to gray at the same time as the digestion icon j5 starts moving to the first area of the digestion icon display area i, or may be changed to gray while moving to the first area It may be grayed out simultaneously with the completion of the movement to the first area, or may be grayed out after the completion of the movement to the first area.

  By executing the moving animation between the holding and changing icons, the holding icon g5 displayed in the first area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area c becomes a changing icon f6 and moves to the changing icon display area b. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the fluctuation icon f6 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is ended.

  With the execution of the moving icon of the holding icon, the holding icon g6 displayed in the second area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the hold icon g6 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 160 (C) following FIG. 160 (B) shows a state in which change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (C), the shuriken k thrown by the digest icon j5 hits the hold icon g6. An icon displayed as a fluctuation icon in FIG. 160 (A) may be used for preview effect after becoming a digest icon.

  FIG. 160 (D) continuing from FIG. 160 (C) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is being executed. After the shuriken k hits the hold icon g6, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g6. The shuriken k is erased at the same time as the display of the effect image 872 starts. The display mode may be changed when the icon corresponding to the symbol variation display of the advance notice target (in this example, the hold icon g6) is displayed as the hold icon.

  FIG. 160 (E) continuing from FIG. 160 (D) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is finished. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire reserve icon g6 is erased, the entire reserve icon g6 whose display mode has changed in a red circle can be visually recognized again. Further, prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to red. As described above, when the change animation of the holding icon is executed, the display color of the holding icon whose display mode has been changed becomes the same as the light emission color of the effect movable body 810. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as the pre-reading advance notice effect.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the fluctuation icon as a notice icon for making a notice of other than the fluctuation. Note that the hold icon may be displayed as a notice icon that makes a hold other than the hold of the corresponding hold order as a notice target. In addition, the icon of the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja may be displayed as the notice display of the change in the change icon display area b, and may be displayed as the advance notice display in the special view 1 hold icon display area c. is there.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (e). Each of FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (e) shows an example of this effect in time series. In the states shown in FIG. 160 (A) to (E), the gaming state is the non-power support state. FIG. 160 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. On the first display device 800, the decoration design of the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is displayed temporarily. In the second display device 802, variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed, and in the third display device 804, a white special symbol 1 for the special figure 1 symbol is displayed. Moreover, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". In the special view 1 suspension icon display area c of the first display device 800, suspension icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the suspension of the special view 1 are displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the digest icon display area i is not provided in the game information display area a, and the digest icon is not displayed. Also, unlike the variation icon display region b in the above embodiment, the variation icon display region n of this embodiment is not surrounded by a square frame image, and the display position of the variation icon is displayed below the variation icon display region n. A horizontally long rectangular pedestal image is displayed. Also, in FIG. 160 (A), the variation icon f1 of the display pattern of the character pattern of the ninja is displayed. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in color. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed as a notice icon for giving notice of the hold of the special figure 1 with the first hold order.

  FIG. 160 (i) continuing from FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon g1 has been changed during the execution of the special view 1 change game. The display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed from the white circle to the display mode of the character pattern of the bancho. The display mode of the character pattern of the key long is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. During the change of the display mode of the hold icon g1, a change animation of the hold icon including a scene where the change icon f1 throws a shuriken to the hold icon g1 may be executed, or the change icon f1 shown in FIG. 160 (i) An animation may be displayed in which the character of the ninja turns to the hold icon g1. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 changes, an animation including a moving image of the change icon f1 may be displayed, and the change icon f1 may be associated with the change of the display mode of the hold icon g1.

  FIG. 160 (b) continuing from FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the first display 800 and the second display 802, a symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 5" other than the symbol combination informing the hit showing that the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 variation game is a loss. -"Decoration 7" is displayed stopped. In the first display device 800, the advance notice is executed by the combination of the odd (red) decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". The suspension of the prefetching advance notice object is a suspension of the special figure 1 with the first suspension order.

  In FIG. 160 (f) continuing from FIG. 160 (f), with the special view 1 display device 212 starting the special view 1 change game, the change display of the decoration symbol and the change display of the mini decoration symbol are started Show the situation. In addition, the third display device 804 displays a white special figure 1 fourth symbol.

  With the start of the special figure 1 floating game, in this example, in addition to the moving animation between moving icons, the moving animation between holding and changing icons, and the moving animation of holding icons, moving animation of moving icons is executed.

  The movement icon f1 moves from the central part of the fluctuation icon display area n to the right by the execution of the movement animation of the fluctuation icon. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the change icon related to the change display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area n even after the end of the corresponding special view change game. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (f), the movement of the fluctuation icon f1 is completed, and the movement animation of the fluctuation icon is ended.

  By executing the moving animation between the holding and changing icons, the holding icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area c becomes the changing icon f2 and moves to the changing icon display area n. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (f), the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is ended.

  With the execution of the move icon of the reserve icon, the reserve icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (e), the movement of the hold icon g2 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  In this embodiment, two variation icons may be displayed in the variation icon display area n. In the example shown in FIG. 160 (e), the fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the upper right portion of the pedestal image of the fluctuation icon display area n, and the fluctuation icon f2 is displayed in the upper left portion of the pedestal image. The fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 are displayed in separate areas in the fluctuation icon display area n so that one does not overlap the other. Note that a part of one of the fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 may be overlapped with a part of the other icon. Above the fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2, a character string image of "competitive" is displayed, and the notice effect of the fluctuation is indicated by the fluctuation icon f1 of the character pattern of the ninja and the fluctuation icon f2 of the character pattern of the bancho To be executed. Thus, the variation icon f1 and the variation icon f2 may be displayed integrally and function as one variation icon. In FIG. 160 (e), the change icon f1 may be displayed as a notice icon or a digest icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 160 (e) may be only the variation icon f2.

  As in the present embodiment, two icons may be displayed integrally as one variation icon. When two icons are integrally displayed as one variation icon, the big hit symbol aspect is easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display being executed than when one icon is displayed as one variation icon. It is also good.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is being executed. In the first display device 800, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, in the second display device 802, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is performed, and in the third display device 804, the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 is white. It is displayed. A white circular fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b.

  In the state shown in FIG. 160 (a), the gaming state is the non-power-supporting state, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". In the special view 1 suspension icon display area c of the first display device 800, suspension icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the suspension of the special view 1 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons g1 and g2 is a default display mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a horizontally elongated rectangular display area e similar to the example shown in FIG. 155 (a) within the game information display area a and to the right of the variation icon display area b. . In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display such as how to play a game or an explanation of the contents of an effect or an explanation of a character or a notice display as a character string image. In FIG. 160 (a), a tutorial display is executed by displaying a character string image of "at notice icon digestion ..." in the display area e.

  A notice icon o is displayed overlapping at the top of the text image of "notice" in the display area e. The display mode of the advance notice icon o is a sword character character pattern. The icon displayed as the change icon is displayed as a notice icon E after the end of the corresponding special view change game (pattern change display). In this example, the advance notice icon o is an icon displayed as a change icon in the special figure 1 change game immediately before the special view 1 change game executed in FIG. 160 (A). The notice icon o may be an icon displayed as a variation icon in the special figure 1 variation game two or more times before the special figure 1 variation game executed in FIG. 160 (A). The advance notice icon o may be a character pattern of swordsman during the period displayed as the change icon, or may be a circular display mode of a predetermined color. The notice icon of this example is the same as the notice icon I62 shown in FIG. 125 (i). The notice icon of the present example may be displayed as a notice icon shown in FIG. For example, when the notice icon of this example is digested, the pseudo-series effect may be executed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can be applied to the effect example shown in FIG. 80 to FIG.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 5 to 9 of the present embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

(C1)
Display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, a generic name for the third display device 804, the special view 1 display device 212)
A game console equipped with
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display 800, the second display 802, and the third display 804, a special view 1 display 212)
Is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display” (for example, variation display of the decoration symbol, variation display of the special figure 1, variation display of the mini decoration symbol, shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d) After the symbol fluctuation display, the symbol fluctuation display ended in FIG. 160 (A), and the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIGS. 160 (A) to (U))), the next symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol” Variable display (for example, display of fluctuation of decorative symbol, display of variable of special drawing, variable display of mini decorative symbol, display of symbol fluctuation shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), FIGS. 160 (B) to (E) 160) is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display to be shown, and a symbol variation display shown in FIG.
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first variation icon” (for example, variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), 160 (A) can be displayed, and can be displayed as the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS.
The icon displayed as the first fluctuation icon (for example, the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), the fluctuation icon f5 shown in FIG. 160 (A), and FIGS. 160 (a) to 160) In the second symbol variation display, the fluctuation icon f1 shown in FIG. 159 indicates, for example, the digested icon j1 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f) and the digested icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E). , And can be displayed as the fluctuation icon f1) shown in FIG.
The area where the preview icon is displayed (for example, the preview icon display area i) is an area different from the area where the first change icon is displayed (for example, the change icon display area b).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console having the configuration, even if the symbol aspect of the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, in the next second symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is performed. Since the corresponding change icon can be displayed as a notice icon, there may be cases where the second symbol change display immediately after the disconnection can be expected.

(C2)
The gaming machine described in C1 above,
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second variation icon” (for example, variation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), 160 (B) to (E) can be displayed.
The second variation icon (for example, variation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), variation icon f6 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to 160 (E)) and the notice icon (for example, FIG. 159 (e) (F), and both (digested icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)) can be displayed (eg, FIGS. 159 (e), (f), 160 (A) to (E)),
A game stand characterized by

(C3)
The gaming machine according to C1 or C2 above,
Icons (for example, holding icon g7 shown in FIGS. 159 (l) to (r) and FIG. 160 (a)) displayed as holding icons are used as a changing icon (for example, changing icon f8 shown in FIG. 160 (b)) Can be displayed,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a gray round display mode, a gray ninja character pattern display mode).
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode (for example, a display mode of a gray ninja character pattern),
The preview icons of the first display mode (for example, the digest icon j4 shown in FIGS. 159 (o) to (r), FIGS. 160 (a) to (e), the digest shown on FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)) The icon j5) is a display mode of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIG. 159 (l) to (r), FIG. 160 (a), and the hold icon g6 shown in FIG. 160 (B) to (E)). (E.g., see FIGS. 159 (p) to (r) and FIGS. 160 (c) to (e)), which are associated with the change of (e.g., change animation of the hold icon)
A game stand characterized by

(C4)
The gaming machine described in C3 above,
The preview icons (for example, digested icons j4 shown in FIGS. 159 (o) to (r) and FIGS. 160 (a) to (e)) in the first display mode are the fluctuating icons (for example, FIG. 160 (b) An icon associated with a change in display mode (for example, change animation of a change icon) of the change icon f8) shown in
A game stand characterized by

(C5)
The gaming machine according to C3 or C4 above,
One of the display modes among the plurality of display modes is a second display mode (for example, a display mode of a character pattern of a gray banister),
The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon associated with a change of a display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon),
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon associated with a change in a display mode of the change icon (for example, a change animation of a change icon).
A game stand characterized by

(C6)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above C1 to C5, wherein
The display mode (for example, the display color is gray) of the preview icon is different from the display mode (for example, the display color is other than gray (white, blue, green, red, color))
A game stand characterized by

(C7)
The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C6 above,
It is possible to display an animation (for example, an animation of movement between variation / digestion icons, an animation of movement of digestive icons) including an operation of moving the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

(C8)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above C1 to C7, wherein
The display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804) is configured to include an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
A game stand characterized by

(C9)
The game console according to any one of C1 to C8, wherein
In the non power saving state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(C10)
The game console according to any one of C1 to C9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

  Note that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon and the notice icon may be different, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is the same, and the notice icon is different from the hold icon and the change icon only in color. The preview icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and the change icon.

  The display mode of the change icon and the notice icon may be the same, the hold icon may be different only in color from the change icon and the notice icon, and the hold icon may be different in color and shape from the change icon and the notice icon. You may

  The display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon may be the same, the change icon may be different only in color from the hold icon and the notice icon, and the change icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and the notice icon. You may

  Note that an animation may be executed to change the display mode of the digest icon by the hold icon. The hold icon may be an icon associated with a change in display mode of the digestion icon. Also, conversely, even if no animation is executed to change the display mode of the digest icon by the hold icon. The hold icon may be an icon that is not related to a change in display mode of the digest icon.

  Note that an animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon other than the digestion icon may be executed by the digestion icon. The digestion icon may be an icon associated with a change in display mode of the digestion icon other than the digestion icon.

  The variation icon of the default display mode is a ninja after a special flag variation game is being executed (during symbol variation display) and a display suggesting a detachment (for example, a temporary stop display of a removal symbol form) is executed. It may change to a character pattern or the like such as a bancho or the like, and may be displayed as a notice icon after the end of the symbol variation display.

  The digest icon may return to the default display mode after the end of the notice effect (for example, the change animation of the hold icon or the change animation of the change icon) to which the digest icon relates. The digested icon that has finished the role of rendering may return to the default display mode. In addition, even after the effect of changing another hold icon, change icon, or digest icon is executed by the hold icon of the character pattern of the ninja, the hold icon of the character pattern of the ninja does not return to the default display mode.

  Effects that change the display mode of the advance notice icon by at least a part of the same effect, or other effects (for example, change in display mode of the hold icon, acquisition of mini items (notice icon), stop of middle symbol) It is feasible.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 by the said Examples 1-9 is the 1st display apparatus 8 as a display means.
Although the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are provided, the pachinko machine 100 may have only the first display device 800 among these display devices. In this case, the display on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 described in the above presentation example may be displayed on the first display device 800. In Embodiments 1 to 9 described above, the display on the first display 800 may be displayable on at least one of the second display 802 and the third display 804. The display on the second display 802 may be displayable on at least one of the first display 800 and the third display 804, and the display on the third display 804 is , And / or may be displayable on at least one of the first display 800 and the second display 804. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments, the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 125 is used instead of the first display 800, the second display 802 and the third display 804 as display means. The display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be provided. In this case, the display described in the above presentation example is executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the first display 800 and the second display 802 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIGS. 125 to 154. , And may be displayed on the third display 804. The game information display area a corresponds to the user interface (UI) portion in FIG. 125 (a). The game information display area a may be referred to as a user interface (UI) unit.

  The items described in the first to ninth embodiments can be combined.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 161 to 170 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 161 to 170, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 161-FIG. 170, the example which arranged three decorative symbol display apparatuses side by side in a row is shown. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. In addition, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 161 to 170, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, in FIG. 161-FIG. 170, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the presentation button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of a mini game effect applicable to the present embodiment in stages.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is at the center thereof. It is displayed in the form accommodated in the rectangular holding display frame FL1, and a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0 There is. In the broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal of the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (a), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 all have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and display of various information related to games and effects (tutorial display) is performed, and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 161 (a), no display is performed and the display is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a stop (fixed display) with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and it is notified that it is a loss There is. The UI unit is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the first decorative symbol, but may overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. Also, the UI unit may be always displayed or may not be displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen to display the stage name and reach name currently being used. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 161 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stop-displayed (confirmed display) by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" and is lost. Is reported.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. ing. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed in the hold display frame FL1 in which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11 The hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the character of the lord is described. Here, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the timing after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be the same timing as the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or the variation of the decorative symbol It may be timing before the start of display. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161C, the hold icon h12 of the second special view 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the button hold icon. In this embodiment, the timing of the change of the display mode of the hold icon may be configured to be always performed at the same timing after the symbol variation display starts, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Good. Alternatively, voice output may be performed from the speaker 120 at the timing of the change of the display mode of the hold icon h12 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (c), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the operation is not validated and the display mode of the hold icon h12 is not changed, but the operation of the effect button 136 is validated The display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the effect of the mini game. When the mini game is started, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed on the upper side of the stage name display section ST1 in a mode that indicates the outcome of “1”. A description of the mini game mission is being displayed. In the explanation display of the mission shown in FIG. 161 (d), the display of "button push" and the display showing the appearance of "3" of the dice are performed, and the display of "chance" is performed, and the mini game is started. After that, it is explained that something good will happen if the effect button 136 is operated and the output of the dice "3" is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the mini game is executed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but in other words, the display area in which the mini game is executed is the liquid crystal frame formed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It can be said that it is divided by (bezel).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the symbol of the dice is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter, and the operation of the effect button 136 is received. To notify the player of the operation of the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter changes so that the gauge becomes short according to the time after the mini game starts. The button acceptance time meter may not be displayed. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 161, when the effect button 136 is operated during the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived in preference to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It is configured.

  Therefore, after the mini game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (f), as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the symbol of the dice The stop icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not displayed while the display mode of the display mode is not changed. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (g), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of “3”, and it is notified that it is the outcome of the mission achievement.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (h), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a display of "pending 1 UP" indicating that it is a reward for achieving the mission is performed. That is, it is notified in advance that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon is raised by one level. In other words, it can be said that the reward for achieving the mission functions as a notice of a big hit notice. In addition, since the reward of mission achievement functions as a notice of a big hit notice, it can be said that the big hit symbol is finally clearly displayed when the mission is performed than when the mission is not performed. Further, at the timing when the mini game is ended, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the change display of the hold icon is started. At this time, a button acceptance time meter may be displayed. FIG. 161 (i) shows that the reward for completing the mission is continuously displayed. Further, since the effect button 136 has not been operated yet, the second hold icon h12 of the special view 1 remains the display mode of the button hold icon.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (j), as shown in FIG. 161 (k), the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon is circular and blue Change. That is, the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is changed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice can be displayed in three display modes of blue, green and red, and the reliability of the big hit is high in the order of red> green> blue. . That is, when the red and red display mode holding icon is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally more likely to be finalized and displayed than the circular and green display mode holding icon and the circular shape is circular. When the green display icon is displayed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed than when the blue display icon is displayed, and the circular blue icon is displayed. When the display mode retention icon is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the default display mode retention icon is displayed. In this production example, by operating the production button 136, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon is changed to the hold icon of the blue display mode which is the first rank of the preliminary notice, but green The hold icon may change to the display mode of red or the display mode of red. In this case, for example, the display mode of the button hold icon may be displayed in an aura manner, or the like, and the hold icon may be expected to change to a higher rank display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (l), the display of "HOLD 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves across the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display mode is changed to blue. A state is shown in which the second reserved icon h12 of the changed special view 1 is moved to. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of “pending 1 UP” starts moving is the timing after the display mode of the pending icon h 12 changes, but it may be any timing. For example, the timing at which the display of “hold 1 UP” starts moving may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes. Further, in this embodiment, the timing at which the display of "HOLD 1UP" starts moving is in the same symbol fluctuation display as the symbol fluctuation display in which the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes, but the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes It may be during execution of the symbol variation display performed after the selected symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, when the display of “pending 1 UP” is superimposed on the second pending icon h12 of the special view 1, as shown in FIG. 161 (m), the display mode of the pending icon h12 changes from blue to green. That is, the result of the mini game is reflected, and it is produced that the reliability of the pre-reading advance notice in the hold icon h12 has been raised by one stage. In addition, even if the display of "pending 1 UP" overlaps with the pending icon, the display mode of the pending icon may not change.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 161 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2”. , It is informed that it is a loss. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" and stopped. At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, by achieving the mini game mission, it is notified that the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice in the hold icon is to be one step up. However, for example, the mini game mission is achieved As a result, any of the mini items shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 135 (d) may be stocked, and the contents of the effect (preceding effect) to be performed thereafter may be notified, or timer stock may be performed. May be Here, the timer stock is, for example, an aspect of a notice that displays a timer and indicates that a special effect starts when the time indicated by the timer elapses. In addition, as a result of the mini game mission being achieved, it may be possible to obtain rare items that are not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mini game is started at the timing after the hold icon changes to the display mode of the button hold icon and the change icon for the hold icon is started, but the mini game is started. The change effect of the hold icon may be started later. Further, in the present embodiment, the period in which the change effect of the holding icon is performed and the period in which the mini game is performed overlap, but the periods may not overlap, for example, a certain symbol variation A change effect of the hold icon may be performed on the display, and the mini game may be started after the hold icon changes to a display mode (for example, a blue display mode) of the pre-reading notice. That is, the mini game may be started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed in a state where the blue display icon holding icon is displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a reward that the mission of the mini game is achieved, it is notified that the pending icon that has changed to the display mode of the advance notice is ranked up due to the change presentation of the button pending icon. As a reward for the achievement of the mini game mission, it may be notified that the hold icon changes to the display mode of the advance notice by changing the button hold icon. In this case, the rank of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice may be notified. Also, it may be notified that a change presentation of the button hold icon is to be performed.

  Further, in this example of the effect, the mini game is performed on the sub liquid crystal (the second decorative symbol display device 208M), but may be performed on the main liquid crystal (the first decorative symbol display device 208L).

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the example of the effect of the mini game stepwise. In addition, since FIG. 162 (a)-the same figure (j) are the same as that of FIG. 161 (a)-the same figure (j), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (j), as shown in FIG. 162 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed. It changes to a circular and green display mode, and the display of "HOLD 1UP" is erased in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is shown that when the effect button 136 is operated, the change of the hold icon of the display mode of the button hold icon and the change of the display mode of the hold icon due to the mission achievement of the mini game are simultaneously performed. . That is, in this production example, as a change to the display mode (display mode of blue) of the first stage of the advance notice of display of the hold icon due to the change effect of the button hold icon and the reflection of the mission achievement result of the mini game At the same time, it is performed at the same time as rank-up of pre-reading notice of the display mode of the hold icon.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the example of the effect of the mini game stepwise. Since Fig. 163 (a) to Fig. 163 (b) are the same as Fig. 161 (a) to Fig. 161 (b), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 163 (c), unlike in FIG. 161 (c), the change effect of the hold icon is not started, and the hold icon h12 of the second special view 1 remains in the default display mode. Thereafter, the effect of the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (d), and the mini game is played in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 161 (d) to FIG. 161 (h) (FIG. 163 (d) The same figure (h).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 163 (i) in a state where the effect of changing the holding icon is not started, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding icon h12 of the second special view 1 changes to a blue display mode And change to the display mode of the first stage of the pre-reading advance notice. That is, in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon is not changed due to the change effect of the hold icon using the button hold icon, and only the change of the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the mini game mission achievement. It has been done.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the example of the effect of the mini game stepwise. In addition, since FIG. 164 (a)-the same figure (l) are the same as that of FIG. 161 (a)-the same figure (l), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 164 (l), the display of "HOLD 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves across the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of "HOLD 1UP" is displayed. When overlapping with the second reserve icon h12 of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 164 (m), the display mode of the reserve icon h12 changes from blue to red, and the reliability of the advance notice is ranked up by two stages. ing. In this example of presentation, it has been anticipating a one-step rank-up of the reliability of the prior notice as a result of the mini game's mission achievement, but an advantageous result (two-stage rank up of the reliability of the prior notice) than the contents notified. Is shown to be reflected.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 164 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2”. , It is informed that it is a loss. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" and stopped. At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the display mode (blue display mode) of the preliminary notice of the pre-reading notice by the change effect of the button hold icon, and thereafter, the result of achieving the mini game mission is Although the display mode of the hold icon is further changed as reflection, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the display mode of the rank of two or more stages of the advance notice by the change effect of the button hold icon, The display mode of the hold icon may be further ranked up as a reflection of the result of mission achievement. Here, for example, the display mode of the hold icon is the display mode of the highest rank of the pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of red, or the display mode of the premier for notifying the big hit decision) When changing to the color display mode), the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed even if the rank up of the display mode of the hold icon is notified as a result of achieving the mission of the mini game. Also, the display may be changed to a specific display mode (for example, a gold display mode) that can be displayed only as a reflection of the result of the mini game mission achievement.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the example of the effect of the mini game stepwise. In addition, since FIG. 165 (a)-the same figure (e) are the same as that of FIG. 161 (a)-the same figure (e), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After the mini game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (f), as shown in FIG. 165 (g), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the symbol of the dice stops indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is changed to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the advance notice. . That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation acceptance in the mini game and the button operation acceptance in the change effect of the button holding icon are simultaneously performed by one operation of the effect button 136.

  After that, the effects are performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 161 (k) to (l) (FIGS. 165 (h) to (k)).

  FIG. 166 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game. Since Fig. 166 (a) to Fig. 166 (c) are the same as Fig. 161 (a) to Fig. 161 (c), the description will be omitted.

  In this effect example, before the start of the effect of the mini game, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (d). The second decorative symbol display device 208M is a position where the left end side of the display area is approximately aligned with the left end side of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third decorative symbol display device 208N is stopped at a position where the right edge of the display area is substantially aligned with the right edge of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the mini game is performed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not compared with the overlapped state. And the hold icon h12 is difficult to view. In other words, it can be said that an effect including a button image promoting button operation is overlapped with an effect including a button image promoting button operation. The change effect of the button holding icon is performed by the holding icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, the holding icon h13 of the third special drawing 1, and the holding icon h14 of the fourth special drawing 1. In the case where it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and not performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the case where it is performed with the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1, Even in the case of the second special figure 1 with the reserve icon h11, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be configured to overlap. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), a part of the reserved icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the second special figure 1 All of the reserved icons h12 may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this rendering example, when only one of the change notification of the display mode of the holding icon and the mini game is being performed, the renderings do not overlap each other, and the holding icon Even when the period in which the change in display mode is notified and the period in which the mini game is performed do not overlap, the effects of each other do not overlap. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display unit is compared with a state where the third decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. The character display displayed on TT1 is difficult to view. In addition, the first decorative symbol is such that the left symbol and the right symbol are overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively, making it difficult to view, but the middle symbol is either It is not overlapped by the display device but is visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the effect of the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 161 (d) and described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (f), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of symbols on the dice is started.

  After the mini game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (g), as shown in FIG. 166 (h), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the symbol of the dice stops indicate. In addition, the display icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed in display mode. That is, also in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the change effect of the button hold icon is not received, and only the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is received. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (h), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating "3", and it is notified that it is the outcome of the mission achievement.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (i), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a display of "pending 1 UP" indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is performed. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start slide movement in the direction away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 166 (j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon has the overlap icon in which the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M has been eliminated and is compared with the state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps. h12 is easy to see. Note that the timing at which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions may be after the end of the mini game, or may be returned during the derivation of the mini game result. May be

  After that, the effects are performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 161 (j) to (n) (FIGS. 166 (k) to (n)).

  In this effect example, the display device on which the change effect is performed by the button hold icon is different from the display device on which the effect of the mini game is performed, and the button by the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the effect of the mini game is performed. Although it is shown that the change effect by the hold icon is overlapped, the display device on which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed and the display device on which the mini game effect is performed may be the same. In this case, for example, the effect of the mini game may be displayed so as to overlap with the change effect by the button hold icon.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the change presentation by the button holding icon is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game effect is performed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A change effect by the button hold icon may be performed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and an effect of a mini game may be performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this case, the change effect by the button hold icon is a line The effects of the mini game may be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In addition, when the display device on which the change presentation by the button hold icon is performed and the display device on which the mini game effect is performed are the same, for example, the change effect by the button hold icon overlaps the mini game effect. It may be displayed.

  Also, although this example shows an example in which the mini game effect is overlapped with another effect, for example, it is changed to the mini game effect and other than the mini game such as the customer waiting demonstration effect or the decoration symbol fluctuation display etc. An effect of may be performed, and this effect may overlap other effects. More specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays a big hit effect, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The effects displayed on the display device 208L may be overlapped. According to this, by performing effects other than the mini game, it may be possible to cause more attention to effects.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the example of the effect of the mini game stepwise. Since FIGS. 167 (a) to (g) are the same as FIGS. 166 (a) to (g), the description will be omitted.

  After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (g), as shown in FIG. 167 (h), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the symbol of the dice stops indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the effect of the mini game is being performed. The hold icon h12 changes to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the advance notice. That is, in this effect example, the button operation acceptance in the mini game and the button operation acceptance in the change effect of the button holding icon overlapped with the effect of the mini game are simultaneously performed by one operation of the effect button 136. Is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (i), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of "pending 1 UP" indicating that it is a reward for achieving the mission is performed. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start slide movement in the direction of separating from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 167 (j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap icon canceled by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is compared with the state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps it. h12 is easy to see.

  After that, the effects are performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 165 (i) to (k) (FIGS. 167 (k) to (l)).

  FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the example of the effect of the mini game stepwise. In addition, since FIG. 168 (a)-the same figure (g) are the same as that of FIG. 166 (a)-the same figure (g), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (g), in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 168 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M The symbol of the dice in the mini game effect is not displayed in a stop but is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the mini game effect is performed. The hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the advance notice. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that only the button operation in the change effect of the button hold icon overlapped with the effect of the mini game is accepted without accepting the button operation in the mini game. In other words, in this presentation example, it can be said that the reception of the button operation in the change presentation of the button holding icon is performed prior to the reception of the button operation in the mini game.

  After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start slide movement in directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 168 (i). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the effect of the mini game is still continuing, and it is shown that the gauge of the button acceptance time meter is decreasing along with the display of the button image 136a in order to promote the operation of the effect button 136. . On the other hand, with respect to the holding icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode, the overlapping by the second decorative symbol display device 208M has been cancelled, and the holding icon h12 is compared to the state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps. Is easy to see.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (j), as shown in FIG. 168 (k), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the symbol of the dice is “3” The stop display is performed in the manner shown, and it is informed that the mission has been achieved.

  After that, the effects are performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 165 (h) to (k) (FIGS. 168 (l) to (n)).

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the example of the effect of the mini game stepwise. Since FIGS. 169 (a) to (f) are the same as FIGS. 161 (a) to (f), the description will be omitted.

  After the mini game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (f), as shown in FIG. 169 (g), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the symbol of the dice stops On the other hand, the display icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed in display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 169 (g), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of “1”, and it is notified that it is not the outcome of the mission achievement.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (h), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a display of "sorry" is displayed to notify that the mission of the mini game has failed. Therefore, in this example of presentation, a big hit advance notice will not be made. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is configured so as to be more likely to be finalized and displayed when the outcome of the mission achievement is derived than when the outcome other than the mission achievement is derived. There is.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (i), as shown in FIG. 161 (j), the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the default display mode. . That is, it is shown that the change effect of the button holding icon is an effect of a gusset that does not change to the display mode of the advance notice.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 169 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2”. , It is informed that it is a loss. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" and stopped. At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating the steps of another example of the mini game effect. In addition, since FIG. 170 (a)-the same figure (e) are the same as that of FIG. 161 (a)-the same figure (e), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 170 (f) shows that the mini game has been started but the effect button 136 has not been operated yet. Therefore, the variable display of the symbol of the dice is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (g), when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (h), the notification of the result of the mini game is not performed, and the effect of the mini game is ended. Do.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (i), as shown in FIG. 170 (j), the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon changes to a blue display mode , Read ahead notice is made.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 170 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2”. , It is informed that it is a loss. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" and stopped. At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 161, in the mini game, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, the mini game mission is achieved and the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example of the effect, the mission is not achieved because the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, and it is shown that a notice that the display mode of the holding icon changes is not given. Moreover, in this example of rendering, since the mission was not achieved, it was made that the display mode of the display mode of the hold icon does not perform the stage up by one stage, but the display mode of the hold icon changes up to the second stage, for example If it has been determined in advance, regardless of the result of the mini game, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as predetermined, for example, the hold icon up to the second stage After it is decided to change and the hold icon is changed to the first stage by the change effect of the hold icon of the button, the effect of the mini game is executed so that the result of the mini game becomes the mission achievement, and the mini game is derived If it is planned to change the hold icon up to the second stage according to the result, even if the result of the mini game is not derived, The end to hold the icon may be changed to a second stage. Regarding the mode of the change, for example, in the change effect of the hold icon of the button, in response to the operation of the effect button 136, the hold icon is a second display mode from the display mode of the button hold icon to the green display mode. The display mode may be changed, and in response to the effect button 136 being operated, the hold icon is changed from the display mode of the button hold icon to the display mode of the first stage which is a blue display mode. After that, when the symbol variation display is stopped during the symbol variation display, or during the execution of the symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display being executed, the second display step that is a green display mode The display mode may be changed. In other words, a notice corresponding to the result of the mini game being executed may be given, or if the result of the mini game is not derived, the notice corresponding to the result scheduled to be derived is It may not be performed. Even in this case, since the result of the symbol variation display does not change, it is possible to perform appropriate presentation.

  In the present embodiment, the hold icon may be more likely to be displayed in green when the mini game is played than when the mini game is not played. That is, when the mini game is started, it can be said that the notification is configured to be more easily performed in an advantageous manner than when the mini game is not started.

  In this presentation example, when the mini game is started and the result of the mini game is not derived in the state where the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the preliminary notice, the rank increase of the display mode of the hold icon is Although the current state is maintained without being performed, the display mode of the holding icon may be ranked up even when the result of the mini game is not derived. In this case, rank increase may be performed in the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed, or rank increase may be performed in symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed.

  Further, in this example of presentation, although an example in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed is described as an example of the pre-read advance notice, the pre-read advance can be applied to known modes such as continuous advance notice. .

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 179.

  FIGS. 171 to 179 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 171 to FIG. 179, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 171-FIG. 179, the pachinko machine 100 provided with the one decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 171. It is. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (a), “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative 3” which is a combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, although the reserve icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the reserve of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, the reserve icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. In addition, in this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these may be displayed .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (b), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested, and the hold icon h12 of the second special view 1 is set as the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 It is displayed, and also, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, after the suspension is digested and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variation icon may be, for example, the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (c), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (d), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (e), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, “decoration 2” -Finalized by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of decoration 5-decoration 7 ".

  Subsequently, in FIG. 171 (f), the suspension of the special view 1 is digested and the suspension display disappears, and the first special view display device 212 (not shown) starts symbol variation display, and even in the decorative symbol display device 208 Variable display has been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (g), a step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice that sequentially switches and displays a plurality of display modes in a predetermined display order, and in the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number representing the number of steps of the display mode. It is displayed. The magnitude of the number of steps is a display showing the level of the big hit reliability. For example, when displayed up to step 5, the development to super reach is determined and the possibility of a big hit is high. However, even if displayed up to step 5, there is a possibility of deviation, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when it is displayed to step 5, you may make it a final display of a big hit symbol finally. As the number of steps increases, the size of the display also increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 171B (g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (h), the step-up notice is updated in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 171 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (k), the second stop is performed, and the "description 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 in which a mini game is displayed is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game display area MN1 is displayed overlapping at least a part of the super reach effect display, and the super reach effect display is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the mini game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. In the mini game in this example of presentation, the mission is to continuously hit the effect button 136 in the operation effective period and finally derive "Daikichi". That is, the mini game in this presentation example requires a plurality of manipulations of the presentation button 136 to derive the result. FIG. 171 (m) shows that the mini game is started, and an explanation of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to continuously hit the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi at Super Hot Warning" may be displayed below it, and it is foretold that a high reliability warning may occur due to the fact that "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained. The mini game display area MN1 may not be divided by a frame.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (n), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, display of "Daikichi" which is a display which may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (o), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Nakakichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (p), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Okichi”, which is a display possibly derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi".

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (q), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Koyoshi". It is notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by has been started.

  FIG. 171 (r) shows that the player performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

  In FIG. 172 (a) continued from FIG. 171 (r), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, an effect image of a star is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the number also increases as the number of operations increases due to continuous hitting. In this example of the effect, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the number of effect images of stars gradually decreases, but may not decrease. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (a), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

  In FIG. 172 (b), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of "Koyoshi" is erased by performing the operation of the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It is reported that the possibility of deriving "Nakakichi" or "Daikichi" is increased as a result of the mini game. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the display of "Okichi" that has been erased may be displayed again, but if it is erased once, it is not displayed again. It is also good.

  FIG. 172 (c) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (c), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of "Daiyoshi" and "Nakakichi" is continued. In place of the button image 136 and the display of the characters "Continuous stroke", the characters "2 more seconds" are displayed, and it is informed that the operation effective period is remaining 2 seconds.

  FIG. 172 (d) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (d), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of "Daiyoshi" and "Nakakichi" is continued. The display for informing the operation valid period is "one more second", and it is informed that the operation valid period is one second remaining.

  FIG. 172 (e) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and there is no change in the display for notifying the operation effective period, but a predetermined number of effect buttons By performing the operation 136, the display of "Nakakichi" is erased, and it is reported that the possibility of "Daikichi" being derived as a result of the mini game is increased. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the display of "Nakakichi" that has been erased may be displayed again, but if it is erased once, it is not displayed again. It is also good.

  FIG. 172 (f) shows that "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. That is, it is informed that the mini game mission has been achieved. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that the intense advance notice will appear. Note that when the display of "Daikichi" is derived, it may be notified that advance notice of intense hot is always performed.

  Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (g), the super reach effect is resumed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (g), a button advance notice effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and "Push" along with the button image 136a. The character of is displayed, and a state of promoting one operation of the effect button 136 is shown. At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only vibration occurs, may be displayed in a mode in which only rotation occurs, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. There may be cases. In this presentation example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, it is more final than when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner in which at least one of vibration and rotating is not performed. The jackpot symbol is designed to be easy to stop. The button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect regarding the variable display of the decorative symbol). Further, in this example, although the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game and the effect by one operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, the effect button is performed in both the mini game and the main effect. An effect may be performed by the 136 consecutive hitting operations.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 172 (h), it is shown that the super reach effect is continued and the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continued. Here, when the operation effective period is started, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of “Push”, and the gauge is displayed to decrease in accordance with the elapse of the operation effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of (for example, nine) face faces of a bancho are arranged around the character of "match" in the balloon. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in response to the result of achieving the mission.

  On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of "Daikichi" is not derived and the mission is not achieved, a weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 172 (i ') is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the character of "match" in the balloon. Even if the mission is not achieved in the mini game, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. Note that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap with the super reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super reach is more than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The presentation is considered to be difficult to see. Also, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with the decorative pattern.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 172 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 172 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  In this demonstration example, in the mini game, a continuous hit operation of the presentation button 136 is required to achieve a mission, while in the main presentation, one operation of the presentation button 136 is required to cause a notice to appear. In the mini game, a single operation of the effect button 136 may be requested, and in the main effect, a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 may be requested.

  In addition, as in this example of the effect, when the result of the mini game relates to a notice relating to the symbol variation display, the mini game execution time is an execution time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 173 (a) shows the effect following FIG. 171 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (b) shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game in this effect example is also played in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. FIG. 173 (c) shows that the mini game is started, and an explanation of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to continuously hit the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi at Super Hot Warning" may be displayed below it, and it is foretold that a high reliability warning may occur due to the fact that "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, even in the main effect, a button operation effect for requesting the operation of the effect button has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, the character "Push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It is shown that the operation is promoted. At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only vibration occurs, may be displayed in a mode in which only rotation occurs, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. There may be cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Daikichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period in the main effect is not started, and the button acceptance time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relevance between the mini game and the main effect in the mini game display area MN1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Nakakichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, display of "Okichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period still has not started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Okichi". It is notified that the reception of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has been started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed. As described above, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation prompting display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation prompting display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Furthermore, in this effect example, the button operation on the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping the main effect is preferentially received. The button operation to the main effect overlapping in the mini game display area MN1 may be received with priority.

  In FIG. 173 (h), it is shown that the player performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In the mini game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of star effect images increases according to the number of times of operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 173 (i) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (i), the display of "Okichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and "Nakakichi" or "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game. It is informed that the possibility has increased. The number of displayed star effect images in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 173 (j) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. Further, in place of the button image 136 and the display of the characters of "continuous hit", the characters of "two more seconds" are displayed, and it is informed that the operation effective period is remaining two seconds. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period still has not started, and the display mode of the button acceptance time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 173 (k) shows that the player has interrupted the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. Then, the star effect image displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (k), the number of star effect images in the mini game display area MN1 is 0. It is shown that it has become. Moreover, although the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Nakakichi" are continued, the display notifying the operation effective period is "one more second", and the operation effective period is one second remaining. It has been informed.

  FIG. 173 (l) shows a state in which the operation effective period in the mini game has passed and “Nakakichi” has been derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is informed that the mini game mission has not been achieved. This was originally supposed to lead to "Daikichi" when continuous hitting operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved because the number of times of operation of the presentation button 136 was insufficient It is due to.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game is finished, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and the super reach effect is resumed. Decrease display is started. Thereby, it is notified that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has been started. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 173 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the mini game derivation result is not "Daikichi". At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. In the case where it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, when it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed, FIG. As shown in o ′), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation state (operation state) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, when it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 173 (q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends. Thus, the result of the success or failure is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the success or failure is derived. Therefore, the effect on the way may be changed as appropriate. The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

  FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 174 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state where a mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. . Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi put out Daikichi and a fierce appearance at Daikichi" is displayed below that, and it is announced that a highly reliable advance notice will occur by the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (c), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Daikichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Nakakichi" which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Okichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (f), high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakakichi” and “Okichi” is started in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a under the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is informed that the reception of the operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect for requesting a continuous hitting operation of the effect button is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (f), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Are shown to promote At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only vibration occurs, may be displayed in a mode in which only rotation occurs, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither vibration nor rotation is performed. There may be cases. As described above, in the example of the effect, an effect of requesting continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and an effect of requesting one operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times for requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is smaller than the number of times for requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. Further, in this effect example, effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. In addition, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reduction display of the gauge by the button acceptance time meter MT is started, and a state in which the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this effect example, acceptance of operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and acceptance of operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are simultaneously performed. The acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started After that, the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136. In this production example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button production in the main production corresponds to the state of the production button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1 The display mode 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, both effects of the main effect and the mini game can be operated by the same operation means (effect button 136). Therefore, for example, when the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect requiring the continuous hitting operation, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the one requiring the operation, the momentum of the continuous hitting of the operation means Results may be derived for effects that are not prioritized, and effects for which acceptance of an operation is prioritized are effects that require an operation once, and effects for which acceptance of an operation is not prioritized are consecutive hit operations. In the case of the required effect, since the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, the result may be able to be reliably derived even for the priority effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136 Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mini game mission has been achieved is also displayed, and that effect is notified. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is received prior to the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being performed continuously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (i), a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the continuous hitting operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the continuous hitting operation effect in the main effect. Then, the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by the cut-in image, and it is in a state of being difficult to be recognized as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "in progress" is displayed from the right end to the left end, informing that the mission in the mini game is achieved. Thus, on condition that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continued, it is informed that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Note that the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is still continued.

  After that, as a result of the player continuously hitting the effect button 136 continuously, as shown in FIG. 174 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b, the strong cut-in image CI1a It is shown that is displayed. This is displayed as a result of mission accomplishment in the mini game as described above. In this production example, a continuous hit gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated may be displayed. For example, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed when the continuous hit gauge reaches the first amount. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when displayed and full. At this time, when it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed, the continuous hitting gauge may not be full even if the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, then, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The display of the "super advance advance announcement" is carried out, and it is informed that the strong cut-in image CI1a which is the advance advance hot alert is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 174 (h), the mission of the mini game is achieved, and then, as shown in FIG. 174 (i '), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. However, if the number of times the effect button 136 is operated is insufficient due to the player stopping the continuous hitting operation thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (j '), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It may remain the same. That is, as in this production example, although the mission is achieved, depending on the operation status of the production button 136, a rule collapse may occur in which the advance advance notice does not appear. Note that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136 to match the achievement of the mission of the mini game, or may be changed to the strong cut-in image CI1a. You may make it display a hot at-the-minute notice. Further, when the continuous hitting operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time passes, as shown in FIG. 174 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, achieving the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in is performed when the number of times of operation of the rendering button 136 is smaller than a predetermined number. The image CI1a is not displayed but the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Note that, in this example, it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed. It is configured to be able to derive a display of "Daikichi" in the game. When it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI 1 b can be displayed, the display of “Daikichi” is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this example, the cut-in image is not displayed if the effect button 136 has not performed the necessary number of operations at least for displaying the weak cut-in CI1b in the button continuous hitting operation production in the main effect. You may Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is continuously hit in the button continuous hitting operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image The CI 1 b may be displayed but the strong cut-in image CI 1 a may not be displayed.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 175 (a) shows the effect following FIG. 171 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (b) shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 175 (c) shows that the mini game is started, and a description of the game in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "Put on the screen with Daikichi by continuous hitting" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 175 (c) has a size larger than that of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 171 (m). However, they may be the same size. In addition, the button image 136a of a small size and the button image 136a of a large size may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be made different depending on the size of the button image 136a displayed. . That is, when the large size button image 136a is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the small size button image 136a is displayed. In addition, the wording of "Daiyoshi and strong cut-in occurrence" is performed below that, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in notice with high reliability of the big hit will occur when "Daiyoshi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

  After that, the description of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 175 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a possibility of being derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of "Daiyoshi", "Nakakichi", and "Okichi", which is a display, is displayed in this order, the display of "Daikichi" is overlapped with the display of "Nakakichi", and the display of "Nakakichi" is "Kokichi" It is displayed as being overlapped on the display of.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Koyoshi". It is notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by has been started. In addition, a button acceptance time meter MT is displayed on the left side of the mini game display area MN1, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases as the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this effect example, it is shown that the display regarding the mini game is also performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

  FIGS. 175 (f) to (g) show that the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini game display area MN <b> 1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of consecutive hits of the effect button 136.

  After that, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has passed, a result according to the number of consecutive hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 175 (h), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game, and the letters "Mission achieved" are displayed below it, and it is informed that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (i), a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mini game being derived and the mission being achieved as a result of the mini game described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 175 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  On the other hand, after acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (e), as shown in FIG. 175 (f ') to FIG. 175 (g'), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is However, if the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has elapsed while the number of times determined in advance has not been reached, as shown in FIG. 175 (h ′), in the mini game display area MN1, as a mini game result. "Okichi" is derived, and the word "Mission failure" is displayed below the message to notify that the mini game mission has not been achieved. Note that the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (i '), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as the cut-in notice. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is lower than the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is a result of the result of the mini-game described above that "Okichi" is derived and the mission is not achieved.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (j '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" Ru.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time passes, as shown in FIG. 175 (k ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7” is stopped (fixed display) , And one of the special game variation game ends.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 176 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (d). In the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost, is stopped and displayed. In addition, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in the display mode of the sabohani, that is, in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 176 (b), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested and the reserve display disappears, and the first special view display device 212 not shown starts the symbol variation display, and even the decorative symbol display device 208 Variable display has been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (c), it is shown that a mission as a main effect is started. Specifically, the letters "mission activated" are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the mission has been started. Also, at the lower end edge of the display area, "Please put out a cut-in" and "If hit, a big hit" is displayed together with the image of the face of the bancho, and the contents of the mission are informed. That is, it is reported that the mission will be achieved if the image of the face of the Bancho appears during the mission, and the big hit will be decided.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "in mission" indicating that the mission is continuing is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (e), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the display of "in mission" is continued.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 176 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display that develops into super reach (punching reach) is performed. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed. In addition, even after developing into Super Reach, the display of "In Mission" is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area and the mini game is started. In this presentation example, it is shown that a mission as a main presentation and a mission in a mini game are being performed simultaneously. In other words, it is shown that the mission of the mini game is being repeated on the mission as the main effect. Here, in this presentation example, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 176 (g) to FIG. 176 (l) are the same as FIG. 175 (c) to FIG. Since it is the same as h), it omits about detailed explanation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 176 (j) to (k), a part of the display of “during mission” is overlapped with the button acceptance time meter MT, and the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed. The display of "in mission" is considered to be less visible than in the case of no overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (l), “Okichi” is derived as a result of the mini game, and after the mission is achieved, a cut-in notice is made in the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (m). The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mini game being derived and the mission being achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even while the strong cut-in image CI1a is being displayed, and the display of "in mission" is continued, but the strong cut-in image CI1a is overlapped and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is considered to be more difficult to see than when not overlapped to CI1a.

  As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a balloon in which a number of faces of the game leader are arranged around the character of "match". Therefore, with the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (n), the character display of "mission accomplished" is over the strong cut-in image CI1a by achieving the appearance of the face of the Bancho who is the mission in the main effect It is displayed by wrapping. That is, it is notified that the big hit is decided by the mission in the main effect being achieved. In other words, in this presentation example, it can be said that the mission in the main presentation is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" .

  After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 176 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 177 (a)-the same figure (k) are the same as that of FIG. 176 (a)-the same figure (k), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (l), when “Okichi” is derived as a result of the mini game, the word “Mission failure” is displayed below it, and the mini game mission is not achieved. Is notified. In this production example, the result of the success or failure judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mini game mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a has to be displayed, so in this production example, in the mini game Regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, it is determined in advance so that the items other than "Daikichi" are always derived.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission is not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even during the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the display of "in mission" is continued, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped, and the weak cut-in image is displayed. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a although it is considered to be more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by CI1b, the display of “in mission” is a strong cut-in image The case of being overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to view than the case of being overlapped by CI1a.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the leader. Therefore, since the appearance of the face of the Bancho who is the mission in the main effect is not achieved, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is a weak cut-in image CI1b. It is displayed overlapping. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the mission in the main presentation was not achieved by the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy swordsman and the defeated screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by a combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time passes, as shown in FIG. 177 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 178 (a)-the same figure (i) are the same as that of FIG. 176 (a)-the same figure (i), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After acceptance of continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (i), as shown in FIG. 178 (j) to FIG. 178 (k), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is If the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has elapsed while the number of times determined in advance has not been reached, as shown in FIG. 178 (l), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game Is derived, and the word "Mission failure" is displayed below it, informing that the mini game mission has not been achieved. In the example of the effect, the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined to be able to derive "Daiyoshi" as the result of the mini game. However, since the operation effective period has elapsed since the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 has not reached the number determined in advance, “Okichi” is not derived and “Okichi” is derived. It should be noted that when the mini game is started but there is no operation of the effect button 136, the result of the mini game may not be derived even if it is determined to be able to derive "Daikichi". . Also, if it is determined that "Daiyoshi" can be derived, "Daikichi" may be derived even if the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated is insufficient or the effect button 136 has not been operated. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission is not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even during the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the display of "in mission" is continued, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped, and the weak cut-in image is displayed. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a although it is considered to be more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by CI1b, the display of “in mission” is a strong cut-in image The case of being overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to view than the case of being overlapped by CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed also when the result of the mission is not derived.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the leader. Therefore, since the appearance of the face of the Bancho who is a mission in the main effect is not achieved, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is a weak cut-in image CI1b. It is displayed overlapping. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the mission in the main presentation was not achieved by the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  However, in this demonstration example, since the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 178 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the swordman of the enemy character, In addition, “decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed at approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol of “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” It is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of

  After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 178 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends. That is, in this production example, the number of times of operation of the production button 136 is insufficient in the mini game, and the mission of the mini game is a failure. Therefore, although the mission of the main production related to this is not achieved either It is shown that the jackpot symbol is displayed in a definite manner according to the result of the determination.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 179, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown.

  FIG. 179 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword master of the enemy character are displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (b), a button operation effect for requesting continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 as a main effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the character of "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Are shown to promote At this time, for example, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrease display of the gauge by the button acceptance time meter MT is started, and the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 in the main effect is shown. It is done. Then, the player sees this and starts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state where a mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the wording "Daikichi at Super Hot Warning" may be displayed below it, and it is foretold that a high reliability warning may occur due to the fact that "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission in the mini-game and the explanation of the result of the mission achievement are given. As described above, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT changes in accordance with the time from the start of the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Daikichi" which is a display which may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. In addition, the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being performed continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Nakakichi” which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game is performed. The display of "Nakakichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Daikichi". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is movable, and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. In the example of the effect, the effect movable body 224 operates, for example, as a big hit advance notice, but for example, by operating the effect movable body 224, it predicts that the possibility of achieving the mission in the mini game is high. You may do so, and it may be foretold that there is a high possibility of mission achievement in the main presentation. In addition, the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is being performed continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Okichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is performed. The display of "Okichi" is overlapped with part of the display of "Nakakichi". Further, the display of “Okichi” is overlapped with the forearm portion 224 b of the effect movable body 224 and is considered to be difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the effect of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is continuously performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (g) responds to the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. , Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the continuous hitting operation effect in the main effect. In this presentation example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side thereof so as not to overlap the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT. Note that the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is still continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (h), high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakakichi” and “Okichi” is started in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a under the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is informed that the reception of the operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. ing. Note that the display of this mini game is overlapped with the upper arm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, and it is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect requiring continuous hitting operation of the effect button continues. Further, in this effect example, effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and effects including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Also here, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing, but when the acceptance of the operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the effect button in the main effect is the operation of the effect button 136 Since it is accepted as the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game prior to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the one-dot chain line. Is configured. In addition, one operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 179 (i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in response to one operation by the effect button 136 Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mini game mission has been achieved is also displayed, and that effect is notified. However, since the mini game display area MN1 is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, the character of "achievement" is considered to be difficult to visually recognize. At the timing shown in FIG. 179 (i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has passed, and the player has finished the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (j), when the mission in the main effect is completed, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (j), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap to the mini game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word "achievement" to the effect that the mini game mission has been achieved is considered to be easy to see. The timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main effect is completed may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position. After the mission in the main effect is finished and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may move to the initial position, or the effect movable body 224 After the forearm portion 224b of has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may end, and the weak cut-in image CI1b may move to the center of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (k), it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in place of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of mission accomplishment in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. The strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a Although the display is not performed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. You may do so.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" . After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the fluctuation game of one special figure ends.

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184.

  FIGS. 180 to 184 are diagrams showing in stages the modified examples of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 180 to 184, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the general drawing The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIGS. 180 to 184, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 180, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

  FIG. 180 (a) shows that the mini game is started while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. In this effect example, the mini game is played without being divided by the area. When the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower right and left of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is reported that transition to super reach (SP reach) is made when the main character of the hero appears from the treasure box. In addition, “Select with cross key” and “Select with button” are displayed above the display area, and select a treasure box with operation key unit 137 and decide as a treasure box to open the treasure box selected with effect button 136 It is informed that can do. That is, in this presentation example, a situation is shown in which a mini game using a plurality of operation means is performed. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is being performed using a wider area than the effect regarding the decorative symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is shown that the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has been started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and it is shown that the treasure box enclosed by the cursor CSL is the treasure box being selected. Further, the remaining time of the operation effective period is shown on the center right side of the display area, and “3” indicating that the operation effective period is remaining 3 seconds is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (b). It is done. Further, FIG. 180 (b) also shows that the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c), it is shown that the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR and surrounds the right treasure chest image BXR. . The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is remaining 2 seconds.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (d), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened as shown in FIG. 180 (e). While the treasure chest image BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is reduced and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 180 (d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “1”, indicating that the operation valid period is one second remaining. Further, after the player performs the determination operation of the treasure box to be opened by operating the effect button 136, the display may be made such that the treasure box to be opened is decided when the operation effective period has elapsed. In addition, when the operation effective period passes without the operation by the effect button 136 being performed, it may be determined as a treasure box for opening the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. When the operation effective period has elapsed, neither treasure box is selected and the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to improve the desire to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 with respect to the player.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (f), it is shown that the character YSM of the hero of the main character appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the mission of the mini game is achieved. Thereby, it is predicted that it will shift to SP reach. It should be noted that the advance notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character of the main character.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (h) shows a state of developing into SP reach. As described above, in this example of the effect, in the case where the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined based on the result of the pass / fail determination shifts to the SP reach, in the mini game performed before the shift to the SP reach, It is configured to be able to display the character YSM of the main character of the main character who predicts to shift to the SP reach. Thereby, there may be a case where it is possible to give notice of the transition to the SP reach by causing the character of the lord YSM to appear in the mini game.

  In this example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, the character YSM of the lord appears even if either the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is selected, and it does not shift to the SP reach. If it is determined in advance, the character YSM may not appear even if either the right treasure box image BXR or the left treasure box image BXL is selected. In addition, on the condition that the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit is randomly determined, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. If you do, you may be configured so that your character YSM will appear. In addition, when the variation time that can execute the SP reach is selected, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. If the character YSM of Tonosama appears to appear and then the character YSM of Tonosama appears, then it develops into SP reach but if the character YSM of Tonosama does not appear, then SP reach It may be configured to perform a jackpot less reliable reach than the SP reach such as the normal reach until the fluctuation time passes. Further, it may be randomly selected whether or not the character of the character YSM should be made to appear at the timing when the treasure box image is selected. In addition, even if the character YSM of the lord appears, it may not shift to the SP reach in this case, and in this case, the jackpot symbol may be finally determined and displayed as a broken law.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 181, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows that the mini game is started while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. When the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower right and left of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is reported that transition to super reach (SP reach) is made when the main character of the hero appears from the treasure box. In addition, “Select with cross key” and “Select with button” are displayed above the display area, and select a treasure box with operation key unit 137 and decide as a treasure box to open the treasure box selected with effect button 136 It is informed that can do. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (a), the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, and any treasure box image is displayed in a mode not selected. It is done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed on the center right of the display area. Ru. At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (b), “3” indicating that the operation effective period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (c), after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, no operation is performed, the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 The display shows "2", and it is shown that the operation effective period remains for 2 seconds. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet been selected with any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (d), after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started and no operation is performed, the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is The display changes to "1", and it is shown that the operation effective period is left for one second. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected with any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (e), after the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, no operation is performed, the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 The display changes to "0", indicating that the operation effective period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected with any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL. As a result, no treasure box is selected, and no treasure box can be opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived, and as shown in FIG. 181 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state is reached. Transition to

  In this example, if the transition to the SP reach is determined in advance, the SP reach is executed even if none of the treasure boxes are selected, but the result of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the fluctuation time are Since no treasure chest is selected because it is determined in advance based on the result of the pass / fail judgment, SP reach is not performed, and for example, a reach with a big hit reliability lower than SP reach such as normal reach is performed You may According to this, there are cases where it is possible to improve the desire to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 with respect to the player.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 182, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown. Since Fig. 182 (a) to Fig. 182 (d) are the same as Fig. 180 (a) to Fig. 180 (d), the description will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (d), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened as shown in FIG. 182 (e), and the right treasure box image is determined. While the BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, the left treasure box image BXL not selected is reduced and displayed. Also, in this example of the effect, as shown in FIG. 182 (e), the error display of “The game ball is clogged” and “Please call a person in charge” below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error Informing is performed, and it is informed that the ball clogging error which is a state in which the game ball is clogged in the payout path is occurring. Specifically, for example, the payout condition of the winning ball or the lending ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 65 etc.) is driven, but the payout of the gaming ball is not detected, and the retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, In the case where the payout of the game ball is not detected despite repeating three times, the ball jam error notification is performed. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error notification is performed. Note that the error notification is erased when it is detected that the error notification has been targeted for error (for example, when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 152 is normally performed). Here, the timing when the error display is started may be the same as the timing when the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlargement display, or the timing after the timing when the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlargement display Alternatively, the timing may be earlier than the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlargement display.

  Since FIG. 182 (f) to FIG. 182 (h) are the same as FIG. 180 (f) to FIG. 180 (h) except that an error display is performed, the description will be omitted.

  Thus, in this example of the effect, it is shown that the mini game is continued if the error is not interrupted.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 183, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown. In this effect example, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting the magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100. When the magnetic detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits a magnetic detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and then stops the game and deactivates it. Control to After the inactivation, it is configured not to be able to return until the initialization process of step S113 of the main control unit main process (see FIG. 69) is performed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 having received the magnetic detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120, for example, or according to a predetermined error mode by the various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542. The lamp can be blinked, or a predetermined error display can be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, FIG. 182 (a) to FIG. 182 (c) are the same as FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (c), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (c), a state in which the right treasure box image BXR is enclosed is shown. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is remaining 2 seconds.

  After that, for example, when the player uses the magnet for making a fraud, and the magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 A magnetic error display ERR including a character of “sensor error” is displayed overlapping the display shown in FIG. 180 (d), for example, and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased even when the effect button 136 is operated, and the display shown in FIGS. 180 (d) to (h) is also performed. However, the magnetic error display ERR will continue to be displayed until the power is shut off without these effect displays being viewed (Fig. 183 (d)-(h)). )). As compared with the error display shown in FIG. 182, it can be said that the magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 183 has a different area overlapping with the effect of the mini game. In other words, the effect display of the mini game can be said that the area overlapped with the error display is different depending on the type of the error that has occurred.

  FIG. 184 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of mini-game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 184 (a) shows the effect following FIG. 171 (j), in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into bowling reach which is one of super reach. Bowling reach is a reach effect performed as a main effect. When transitioning to bowling reach, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed respectively in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and ten bowlings arranged in a pyramid shape The effect display that the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin is performed, and the character "Shit by big hit" is displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and if the mission of strike is achieved, it will be a big hit. It has been informed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (c), it is shown that the balls reach a position close to the ten boring pins, and it is attempted to fall the boring pins even now. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area, and at least a part of the bowling reach effect display is overlapped. . In the mini game display area MN1, a description display of the mini game is performed. In the explanation display of the mini game shown in FIG. 184 (c), the display of “1” of the dice is shown below the display of “mini game” and the display of “put out” is performed, and the mini game is displayed. It is described that a mission is performed to operate the effect button 136 after the start of the command to stop and display the appearance of the "1" of the dice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (d), it is shown that nine boring pins are fallen. That is, it is shown that one boring pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of "Push", and it is notified that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has been started. At this time, for example, the symbol of the dice may be variably displayed.

  FIG. 184 (e) shows that the result of the mini game is derived in the mini game display area MN1 when the effect button 136 is operated. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since a strike does not occur in the bowling reach, the character of "sorry" is displayed, and a mission in the bowling reach is not achieved, and it is informed that it will be a loss. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, as the effect button 136 is operated, the output of the dice “1” is stopped as a result of the mini game, and the mission is achieved. The display of "+1" is performed to predict that the book will fall.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (f), the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed together with the outcome of the "1" of the dice derived as a result of the mini game. After the display of “+1” is performed, as shown in FIG. 184 (g), it is shown that one boring pin left without falling falls and strikes. That is, it is shown that a resurrection big hit from a loss is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time passes, as shown in FIG. 184 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped (fixed display) , One of the special game of the variation game ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of reach effect as the main effect.

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 185 to 192 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 185 to 192, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the general drawing The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 185-FIG. 192, the pachinko machine 100 provided with the one decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 185 is a view stepwise showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (a), “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multi-functional display area MF1 divided into a substantially square shape is formed. The multi-function display area MF1 can perform the above-described tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like. In addition, in this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these may be displayed .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (b), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested, and the hold icon h12 of the second special view 1 is set as the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 The third special figure 1 holding icon h13 is displayed as the second special figure 1 holding icon h12, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, as described above, the change icon may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (c), a state in which tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "You will start a mini game at various timings" is performed, and a suggestion is made as to when the mini game starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. -Finalized by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of decoration 5-decoration 7 ".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (e), the suspension (first suspension) of Special Figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second icon 1 in the special figure 1 is the first special diagram 1 Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (f), a state in which tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Yoshimune is 8th General” is displayed, and information on the main character of the main character is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, a "dice game" is displayed on the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is informed that the dice game as a mini game is to be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of “Don't hold 1 UP” is performed along with the display showing the appearance of the “1” of the dice on the right side of the face image BCH After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated and the output of “1” of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by one stage. That is, as a result of the mini game, when the result of "1" of the dice as a mission is derived, it is notified that the default display mode hold icon changes to the pre-read notice display mode hold icon It becomes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of “press” is performed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (j), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (j), as shown in FIG. 185 (k), the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement in the multi-function display area MF1. It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of “1”, and “1UP confirmed” is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for mission accomplishment. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of a face of a bancho is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 185 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game After the result of is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (l), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, “ It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". Also, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage from the default display mode. As a circular and blue display mode has been changed. Also in this presentation example, the hold icon has a high hit reliability in the order of red> green> blue. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  Also, in place of the dice game as the mini game described above in FIGS. 185 (g) to 185 (k), the fortune game may be started. Here, FIG. 185 (g ') is another example of the effect following FIG. 185 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 185 (g '), the mini game is performed in the multi-function display area MF1. It is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the "fortune game" is displayed on the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started. Be done. In this example of effect, even when mini-games of different types are started, the image BCH of the same face of the face is displayed. In other words, in this effect example, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of mini games by causing the same character (bancho's face image BCH) to appear.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (h ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, “Hold 1UP” is displayed along with “Nakakichi” on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho face, and It is described that when the Nakayoshi is derived and displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by one stage. That is, as a result of the mini game, the fortune of “Nakakichi” as the mission is derived, and it is notified that the hold icon of the default display mode is changed to the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (i ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. In the mini game of this effect example, no operation is performed by the operation means such as the effect button 136 or the like.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (j '), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open state, and the fortune of “Nakakichi” is derived and displayed, and it is shown that the mission is achieved. In addition, the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or after the left symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed, or of the mini game After the result is derived and displayed, the left symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased and the display of “1 UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is performed. There is. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho continues to be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (k '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing when the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started may be the same, or the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be displayed stopped after the display of mission completion is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (l '), the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the "los 2-7-7". Also, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage from the default display mode. As a circular and blue display mode has been changed. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 185 shows an example configured to be able to play different types of mini games when the mini game start condition is satisfied, and one of them ( The mini game of the dice game) requires the operation of the effect button 136, and the mini game of the other (the fortune game) does not require any operation by the operation means, and the display mode in any of the mini games Are the same (all are changing the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1). That is, in FIG. 185, in any mini game, an effect example in which the same target is given to the main effect as a result is shown. In this example of the effect, which of the dice game and the fortune game is to be executed may be determined randomly, or may be determined based on the result of the determination of success or failure. For example, the dice game is executed In the case where the fortune game is executed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more clearly than in the case where the fortune game is executed.

  In addition, as in this demonstration example, in a mini game, a character smaller than the character appearing during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol (sometimes referred to as "small character") or, for example, in the demonstration such as tutorial display Characters that appear (sometimes referred to as "navi characters") may appear. Note that these characters may be configured to be displayed on a tutorial display, another notice, or the like when the mini game is not played, or may be configured to appear only in the mini game. Also, these characters may be displayed at all times. In addition, it is preferable that there is an apparent difference between the character appearing in the mini game and the character appearing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol. For example, the size may be different, or the 3D character may be deformed. There may be differences in expression such as the character of.

  In this example of effect, the fortune game (second mini game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini game uses at least a display area (multifunction display area MF1 in which the first mini game is played), and another display area (display area of a portion where the multifunctional display area MF1 is enlarged) ) May also be configured to use.

  FIG. 186 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since Fig. 186 (a) to Fig. 186 (e) are the same as Fig. 185 (a) to Fig. 185 (e), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (f), it is shown that the display of the mini game start notice is performed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "focus" is performed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is predicted that the mini game is to be started from this.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, a "dice game" is displayed on the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is informed that the dice game as a mini game is to be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display showing “3HOLD ON 3UP” is performed along with a display showing the appearance of the “3” of the dice on the right side of the face image BCH After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. In other words, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the outcome of "3" of the dice as a mission, it is notified that the default display mode hold icon changes to the pre-read notice display mode hold icon It becomes. Moreover, in this presentation example, the contents of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are contents more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of “press” is performed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (j), the first stop is performed, and the “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (j), as shown in FIG. 186 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of "3", and the display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission accomplishment is performed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of a face of a bancho is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 186 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the mini game After the result of is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (l), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  When the fortune game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 186 (g '), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 The display of the "fortune game" is performed together with the face image BCH, and it is informed that the fortune game as a mini game is to be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (h ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, “Hide 3UP” is displayed along with “Daikichi” on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho face, and It is described that the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by three stages when the "Daikichi" is derived and displayed. That is, as a result of the mini game, the fortune of “Daikichi” as the mission is derived, and it is notified that the hold icon of the default display mode is changed to the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice. Moreover, in this presentation example, the contents of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are contents more advantageous than the fortune game shown in FIG.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (i ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (j ′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the display of the opened mode, and the fortune of “Daikichi” is derived and displayed, and a state where the mission is achieved is shown. In addition, the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or after the left symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed, or of the mini game After the result is derived and displayed, the left symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “3UP set” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is displayed. There is. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho continues to be displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 186 (k ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing when the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started may be the same, or the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be displayed stopped after the display of mission completion is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (l '), the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed, It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the "los 2-7-7". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 186 shows an example configured to be able to differentiate the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission even in the same type of mini game. In addition, the contents of the mission may be the same, and the reward for achieving the mission may be made different, or the contents of the mission may be made different, and the reward for achieving the mission may be made the same.

  FIG. 187 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 187 (A1) to (A6) show an example of effects performed in the bowl mode, and FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B6) show examples of effects performed in the princess mode. There is. Note that the habit mode and the princess mode are names of effect modes, and are configured such that effects specific to the mode are performed in each mode. Note that, for example, at least one of the decoy mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. Further, which one of the habit mode and the princess mode is to be shifted may be determined randomly, or may be determined based on the gaming state. For example, if it is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general view low probability state), it is easy to shift to a habit mode, and if it is a hidden probability change state (a special figure high probability regular view low probability state), it shifts to a princess mode The player may be made to be able to estimate the current gaming state by facilitating the process.

  FIG. 187 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (A1), “婆 mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and a dark blue character BA is displayed at the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the eyebrow mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the display of the "dice game" is performed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this effect example, in the bowling mode, the dice game is configured to be more easily started than the fortune game. Here, in the case of executing the mini game in the decoy mode, the dice game may always be started and the fortune game may not be started. Since FIGS. 187 (A2) to (A6) are the same as FIGS. 186 (h) to (l) except that the display of the eyebrow mode and the display of the eyebrow character BA are performed. , I omit the explanation.

  FIG. 187 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started. In this effect example, in the princess mode, the fortune game is more easily started than the dice game. Here, in the case of executing the mini game in the princess mode, the fortune game may always be started and the dice game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 187 (B2) to (B6) are the same as FIGS. 186 (h ') to (l') except that the display of the princess mode and the display of the princess character HM1 are performed. Description is omitted because there is.

  FIG. 188 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  Fig. 188 (A1) to Fig. (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the eyebrow mode, and Fig. 188 (B1) to Fig. (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

  FIG. 188 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A1), “婆 mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and a dark blue character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the eyebrow mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the display of the "dice game" is performed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this effect example, the type of mini game to be executed is determined based on the content of the notice executed in the main effect. For example, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is easier to be started than the fortune game as the mini game in the symbol variation display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo run In the case where the symbol change display is present, the fortune game is configured to be more easily started than the dice game as the mini game in the symbol variation display. In addition, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and when it is decided to execute the pseudo-link, it is said that In the symbol variation display, the fortune game may be always started as a mini game. Further, in this example of rendering, the type of mini game to be executed is determined without depending on the current rendering mode, but the type of mini game to be executed may be determined depending on the rendering mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A2), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display indicating “Hold 3 UP” is performed along with a display showing the appearance of the dice “3” on the right side of the face image BCH After the mini game is started, when the effect button 136 is operated and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Note that even if the display of the outcome of the "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the timing when the display of "Hold 3 UP" is started are the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is started. The step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the result of "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started, or the step-up notice may be started. After SU1 is started to be displayed, the display of the outcome of “3” of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of “HOLD 3UP” may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Note that the timing when the display of the button image 136a and the "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing when the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, or in the multifunction display area MF1. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF1 And the display of "press" may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A4), as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of "3", and the display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission accomplishment is performed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of a face of a bancho is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice After the completion of, the right symbol may stop displaying.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 188 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the head of the game, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B2), it is shown that temporary stopping is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”. In this effect example, for example, it is informed that there is a case where the pseudo-link may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3”. That is, there is a case where the combination of the decoration patterns of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" is a chance eye. The pseudo run symbol may be displayed to notify the start of the pseudo run. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, when "Daijin 3 UP" is displayed along with the display of "Daikichi" on the right side of the face image BCH of the Bancho, when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon It has been described that the display mode of is up-graded by three stages. In addition, the timing when the display of "Daikichi" in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" is started may be the same as the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the multi-function display area MF1 After the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, "Daikichi" in multi-function display area MF1 The display of “” and the display of “Hold 3 UP” may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the face image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and it is shown that the pseudo continuous first variable display is performed. Here, the number of times the pseudo link is performed may be displayed. In addition, the start of the variation display (pseudo series) of the decoration pattern and the display start of the treasure box BXS may be the same timing, or after the variation display (pseudo series) of the decoration pattern is started, the display of the treasure box BXS May start, or after the display of the treasure box BXS starts, the variable display (simulation run) of the decorative symbol may start.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box changes to the display of the opened mode, and the fortune of “Daikichi” is derived and displayed, and the mission is achieved It is shown. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", and it is notified that the pseudo link may be further performed. In addition, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. After the result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, while the treasure box image BXS is erased, a display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is performed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and it is shown that the pseudo continuous second variable display is performed. In addition, the start of the change display (pseudo series) of the decorative symbol and the timing when the display of the reward of the mission achievement is started may be the same, or after the variable display (pseudo run) of the decorative pattern is started The display of the reward for mission accomplishment may be started, and the display of the reward for mission completion may be started after the display of the reward for mission completion is started (simulation link) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 Is changed from the default display mode to the circular and red display mode as the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decorative 7-decorative 3", and it is informed that it is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost. Here, after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, a pseudo chain may be further performed. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  In this example, although the result of the mini game has been described as affecting the display mode of the hold icon, it is also possible to give notice that as a result of the mini game, a pseudo link will be made as a reward for achieving the mission. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo link is started may be notified, or the increase of the number of pseudo links may be notified.

  In addition, as a reward for achieving the mission, the mini game may give notice that a step-up notice will be made, or it may give notice of the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice, or It may be possible to predict that the number will increase.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  189 (A1) to (A6) show an example of effects performed in the eyebrow mode, and FIGS. 189 (B1) to (B6) show an example of effects performed in the princess mode There is.

  FIG. 189 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (A1), the display of “婆 mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and the 婆 character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the eyebrow mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 189 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this example of rendering, a sabotary character image SBH is displayed in place of the face image BCH of the face of a bancho, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the sabotary character image SBH. It is shown that it is notified that the dice game is to be started. The character image SBH of Sabohani is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the dice game and is not displayed in the fortune game, but may be displayed in the fortune game as well. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the dice game is more likely to be more advantageous when the Sabohan character image SBH is displayed than when the face image BCH of the bankmaster is displayed. That is, in this example of the effect, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is the default display mode as a reward for achieving the mission than in the case where the face image BCH of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to be notified that the display mode (red display mode) of the 3rd step of the advance notice is displayed, and when the face image BCH of the head of the bancho is displayed, it is more mission than in the case where the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the advance notice. More specifically, when the Sabo-Hani character image SBH is displayed, the outcome of the mini game is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the face image BCH of the head of the game is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the outcome of the mini game is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the Sabohan character image SBH is displayed. Furthermore, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the image BCH of the face of the master is displayed. In FIGS. 189 (A2) to (A6), the image of the face with the numbered face BCH displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and FIG. 188 (A2) The description is omitted because it is similar to (A6).

  FIG. 189 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current effect mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 189 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this effect example, the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed in place of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of the princess. It is shown that the start of the fortune game is notified. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune game and is not displayed in the dice game, but may be displayed in the dice game. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the fortune game is more likely to be more advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the face image BCH of the Bancho is displayed. That is, in this example of the effect, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is the default display mode as a reward for achieving the mission than in the case where the face image BCH of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to give notice that the display mode (red display mode) of the 3rd step of the advance notice is displayed, and when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed, the mission is better than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the advance notice. More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, "Daikichi" is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the Bancho face image BCH is displayed, and the Bancho face image When BCH is displayed, “Nakakichi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As in this effect example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character displayed in the princess mode (princess character HM1) and the character displayed in the mini game (hime character image HM2) are the same. Furthermore, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the face image BCH of the head of the game is displayed. Also, in FIG. 189 (B2) to FIG. (B6), an image BCH of a face with a mask length displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced with the princess character image HM2, and in FIG. The description is omitted because it is similar to (B6).

  FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 190 (A1) to (A6) show an example of effects performed in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general drawing low probability state), and FIGS. 190 (B1) to FIG. It shows about an example of the rendition performed in a definite change state (special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state). In this presentation example, it is shown that the types of mini games to be started are different depending on the current gaming state. More specifically, in the normal game state, the dice game is easily started as a mini game, and in the positive variation state, the fortune game is easily started as a mini game. In the normal game state, a dice game may always be started as a mini game, and in a definite change state, a fortune game may always be started as a mini game. In addition, the appearance frequency of the mini game may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the definite change state, since the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit, the player is idle until the big hit. Because there are cases, the mini game occurrence probability may be higher than the normal gaming state. Further, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher in the normal game state than in the definite change state. Also, the mini game may be executable only in the definite variation state, or may be executable only in the normal gaming state. In addition, for a certain mini game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the definite changing state, or the appearance rate may be higher in the positive changing state than the normal gaming state, and appearance only in the positive changing state There may be cases where it may occur, or it may appear only in the normal gaming state. In addition, for certain notices, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the definite change state, or the positive change state may be higher in the definite change state than the normal gaming state, and appears only in the positive change state There may be cases, and it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 190 (A1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability / common figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (A1), the display of the "normal mode" is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. 190 (A1) to (A6) in FIG. 189 (except that the display of the whistle mode and the display of the whistle character BA are in the normal game state, indicating that the display is in the normal game state). Since it is the same as that of A1)-the figure (A6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 190 (B1) shows that the gaming state is a definite change state (a special figure high probability flat view high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (B1), the display of the “probability change mode” is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the probability change state ing. In the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "right-handed" is performed, and a strike indication is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 190 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, the first reserved icon h21 of the special figure 2 and the reserved icon h22 of the second special figure 2 and the reserved icon h23 of the third special figure 2 both represent the suspension of the special figure 2 in the default display mode. It is displayed and displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Moreover, in this example of presentation, the multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the "fortune game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2, and it is informed that the fortune game as the mini game is started. 190 (B1) to (B5) show that the game mode is the effect mode in the princess mode, which is a definite change state, and the hold display of the special view 1 is the hold display of the special view 2 It is the same as FIG. 189 (B1) to FIG. 189 (B5) except that the number of pending displays is different, and the location of the pending display and the display position of the multifunctional display area MF1 are switched. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (B5), after the display of “3 UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for achieving the mission is performed in the multi-function display area MF1, then the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 190 (B6) In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is deleted, and in this example of presentation, the display mode of the hold icon h22 of the second special view 2 is the default display mode and the preview notice It is changed to the circular and red display mode as a display mode of 3rd step. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decorative 7-decorative 3", and it is informed that it is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost. Thus, the result of the mini game may affect any hold icon.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  191 (A1) to (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and FIGS. 191 (B1) to (B6) show the multi-function display area MF1. An example is also shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Although FIG. 191 has been described by taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, it is also possible to apply to the above-mentioned fortune game.

  FIG. 191 (A1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability common view low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (A1), the display of the "normal mode" is performed at the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the special view 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. In the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the Sabo Hani character image SBH, and it is informed that a dice game as a mini game is to be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and it is shown that the area is enlarged. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the visibility is improved. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, along with the display showing the outcome of the dice “3” on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, “Hold 3 UP” is displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect button It is described that the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by three stages when the operation of 136 is performed and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed. Here, the display showing the character image SBH of Sabohani and the appearance of "3" of the dice is enlarged and displayed. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping with the multi-function display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. Note that the timing when the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, or after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, step-up The display of the notice SU1 may be started, or the multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded after the step-up notice SU1 is started. In addition, even if the display of the outcome of "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the timing when the display of "Hold 3 UP" is started are the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is started. The step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the result of "3" of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started, or the step-up notice may be started. After SU1 is started to be displayed, the display of the outcome of “3” of the dice in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of “HOLD 3UP” may be started. Further, the timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the timing at which the display of the outcome of "3" of the dice in the multifunction display area MF1 is the same as the timing at which the display of "hold 3UP" is started are the same. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the outcome of "3" and the display of "Hold 3 UP" may be started in the multi-function display area MF1, or many The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the outcome of "3" of the dice in the function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started. Further, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded or may not be expanded. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, when the mini game is started in the positive change state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is normally operated. When it is started, multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded, or when the mini game is started in the normal gaming state, multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is started in the definite change state In this case, the multifunction display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this example of rendering, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative symbol, but the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the multi-functional display area MF1 is expanded It may be overlapped with the function display area MF1. Also, the multi-functional display area MF1 which is not expanded may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the multi-functional display area MF1 which is not expanded of the decorative symbol may be overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed superimposed on the button image 136aL together with the button image 136aL displayed large, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It is informed that the operation effective period of has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. The step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 is overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 is not overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1. Note that the step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multi-function display area MF1 is displayed in an expanded manner, or the step-up notice may be overlapped even when not displayed in an expanded manner. Further, the timing when the display of the button image 136aL and the "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 may be started may be the same as the timing when the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, or in the multifunction display area MF1. After the display of the button image 136aL and "press" is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136aL in the multi-function display area MF1 And the display of "press" may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 is overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 is not overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1. Further, in multi-function display area MF1, button reception time meter MT is displayed below button image 136aL, and display is performed in a mode in which the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective period of operation of effect button 136 is started. It is done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the decrease rate of the gauge is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not enlarged. Here, the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game, or mini The decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game and the decrease speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be the same speed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A4), as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the symbol of the enlarged dice shows the achievement of the mission achievement It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of “3”, which is “3”, and “3UP confirmed” is displayed, which indicates that it is a reward for achieving the mission. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also enlarged and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice After the completion of, the right symbol may stop displaying.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". Also, the expanded multifunction display area MF1 is shrunk and returned to the default size. In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed. Also, the timing at which the multifunctional display area MF1 returns to the default size and the timing at which the mini game result is erased may be the same, or after the multifunctional display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini game The result of may be erased, or after the result of the mini game is erased, the multifunctional display area MF1 may return to the default size.

  FIG. 191 (B1) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), “normal mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. Also, as shown in FIG. 191 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in this rendering example, a multi-function display area MF2 is formed across the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF2, in addition to the above-described tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like, display of a holding icon is also performed. The hold icon of the special view 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the hold icon of the special view 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 191 (B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, the hold icon h11 of the first special view 1 representing the hold of the special view 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, a mini game is started using the display area of the reserved icon of Toku 2 and "Dice game" is displayed together with the Sabo Hani character image SBH, and the mini game It is informed that the dice game is to be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, a display of “Withhold 3UP” is performed along with a display showing the appearance of the “3” of the dice on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the holding icon is upgraded by three stages. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. It should be noted that even if the timing at which the display of the outcome of "3" and the display of "Hold 3 UP" are started in the multifunctional display area MF2 is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started The step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of "3" of the dice and the display of "hold 3 UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 are started, or the step-up notice may be started. After SU1 is started to be displayed, the display of the outcome of the “3” of the dice in the multi-function display area MF2 and the display of “Withhold 3UP” may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Note that the timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multifunction display area MF2 may be started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF2. After the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF2 And the display of "press" may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Also here, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B4), as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF2, the symbol of the dice is the outcome of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a mode that indicates the outcome of "3", and the display of "3 UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for mission accomplishment is performed. In the multi-function display area MF2, a character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice After the completion of, the right symbol may stop displaying.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop by swing fluctuation It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special drawing 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the advance notice It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 192 (a) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (a), “normal mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is done. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in the display mode of the default t. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (a), a step-up notice as a main effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 192 (a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (b), the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern. A mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini game display area MN2, a mini game is started, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the Sabo Hani character image SBH, and it is informed that a dice game as a mini game is to be started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started. Here, the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the mini game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 has been displayed. The step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (c), the decorative symbol in the variable display is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display region, the mini game display region MN2 is erased, and the mini game effect is displayed. It is shown that the display is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, along with a display showing the outcome of the dice “3” on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, the “Hold 3 UP” display is greatly enlarged and displayed, and the effect is produced after the mini game is started. When the button 136 is operated and the output of "3" of the dice is stopped and displayed, it is described that the display mode of the holding icon is increased by three stages. As described above, this effect example shows that the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased in at least a part of the period in which the mini game is being performed. Also, the step-up notice is scheduled to be displayed until the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 when the mini game is not started, but along with the enlarged display of the effect display of the mini game, Has been discontinued. Even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be displayed continuously without ending it. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap with the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. In addition, the step-up notice may be displayed overlapping the effect display of the mini game, or the effect display of the mini game may be displayed overlapping on the step-up notice.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (d), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136. It is displayed in the form of The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing when the button image 136aL and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing when the left symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the button image 136aL and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button acceptance time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (e), the symbol of the enlarged dice is the outcome of the mission achievement “3 It is derived and displayed in a manner that indicates the outcome of Further, at this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini game display area MN2, the symbol of the dice is derived at the appearance of "3" In addition to announcing that it has been displayed, "3UP confirmed" is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for achieving the mission. In the mini game display area MN2, a character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 192 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stop displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or mini After the game result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed. The timing for deriving and displaying the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing for redisplaying the mini game display area MN2, or after the result for the mini game is derived and displayed, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed. It may be redisplayed, or after the mini game display area MN2 is redisplayed, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (f), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed. It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". At this time, the size of the decorative symbol is returned from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position is also returned to the default display position. In addition, with the end of the mini game, the mini game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of previewing advance from the default display mode. The display mode of has been changed. In addition, the change of the display mode of the holding icon and the finalized display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the holding icon changes, or the decorative symbol is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Also, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be finalized after the mini game display region MN2 is erased. The mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, the timing at which the mini game display area MN2 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or after the mini game display area MN2 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Alternatively, the mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  In the example of effect shown in FIG. 192, although the dice game has been described as an example of the mini game, the present invention is also applicable to the above-mentioned fortune game.

  Further, although the dice game and the fortune game are executed as the mini game described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed, the configuration is made such that it is executed in a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be done.

  Subsequently, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 193 to FIG. 200 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 193 to 200, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIGS. 193 to 200, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Moreover, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 193 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (a), a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which the variable display of the special view is not performed, and is a presentation for promoting the player's willingness to play the game. In the lower part of the display area, a display of "display menu with push button" is performed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demo display, and each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is displayed in the standby state. When is operated, it is informed that the menu screen is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 193 (c). On the menu screen, items of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini game, and end are displayed side by side in a row, and below that, the character display of "select" is displayed along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. In addition, the character display of “decision” is performed together with the OK button operation prompting image 137 q and the button image 136 a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137 a or the lower button 137 b of the operation key unit 137, OK Operating the button 137e or the effect button 136 indicates that the item designated by the cursor CSL is to be executed.

  Here, when the item "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to a member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for password acquisition is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for initial registration on the operation server side. In the present embodiment, by performing member registration, it is possible to set an original mode such as recording a game history or customizing effects. The player reads the two-dimensional code and obtains the URL of the initial registration page, for example, with a portable terminal having a camera function and a bar code reader function. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the portable terminal. The operation server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the portable terminal, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the management server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When a password is issued from the operation server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the portable terminal.

In addition, when the item "two-dimensional code issuance" is executed, a two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. In the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player has made a selection when ending the game with the original mode set.
The two-dimensional code mentioned here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and changes the size on the display in units of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 cells to 177 × 177 cells. Can. QR Code (registered trademark) is known as a representative of two-dimensional codes. The two-dimensional code may be replaced by a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the character string increases, and can not be remembered or recorded by human beings, so that the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, information indicating the mission achievement status, and the accumulated value of the original mode points. In addition, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, information for shop identification, information specific to the game console, operation status, the number of errors, etc. may be included. Information representing the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the accumulated value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, etc. correspond to history information. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update acceptance page prepared in the operation server.
In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is erased from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when issuing a two-dimensional code, a warning screen is displayed to warn the player that information such as the result of the current game is to be erased.
When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the portable terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the portable terminal, the personal identification information (ID) or the like contained in the two-dimensional code in “http: //www.~/jp” representing the address of the update acceptance page prepared in the operation server The URL to which the argument representing the history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information stored so far in the management server in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion is It is updated to the history information included in the argument part.
In the present embodiment, since there is a risk that the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game stand as it is, history information stored in the game stand at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be erased based on the operation of the player after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not erase the history information, the game can be returned to the game reflecting the history information. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, when the item of “game history” is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the current game and the achievement status of the mission, the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. Also, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. may be displayed.

  In addition, when the item of "mini game" is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini game will be described later.

  In addition, when the item of “end” is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL designates "member registration", as shown in FIG. 193 (d), the cursor CSL is " When "two-dimensional code issuance" is instructed and the lower button 137b is operated one more time, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (f), the cursor CSL indicates a "mini game".

  Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (f), as shown in FIG. 193 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game is started. Specifically, the title "Today's fortune telling" is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, four treasure boxes are arranged from the center to the left of the display area, and the direction is on the right of the display area. A character of "select" is displayed together with the key operation prompting image 137p, and a character of "set" is displayed together with the button image 136a below it, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction key of the operation key unit 137 Then, one of the four treasure boxes (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) is instructed, and by operating the effect button 136, it is informed that the treasure box instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened. At the timing shown in FIG. 193 (g), the cursor CSL points to the treasure box BX1 at the upper left. In this mini game, the player selects from four treasure chests and notifies the contents of the selected treasure chests. The contents of the treasure box are the result of a fortune-telling (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, bad luck, etc.) that suggest a fortune, and a plurality of types are prepared. Furthermore, in this presentation example, along with the result of fortune telling, a word of advice is also added. In addition, the result of these fortunetelling and a word advice have contents irrelevant to the result of the pass / fail judgment. That is, it does not at least suggest a decision on success or failure. In addition, it is determined at random as to which result is to be associated with each treasure box. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents change every time the mini game is executed. That is, the contents of the treasure box (the result of the mini game) can be changed according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (h), when the lower button 137b is operated, as shown in FIG. 193 (i), the cursor CSL points to the lower left chest BX2.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (i), as shown in FIG. 193 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The upper left treasure chest BX1, the upper right treasure chest BX3 and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right portion. Thus, it is informed that the lower left treasure box BX2 has been determined as the open treasure chest.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a fortune character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of fortune telling As "Okichi" is displayed, "a moderate amount of ..." is displayed as a word of advice, and it is shown that it warns not to be too crowded with the game. That is, in this example of the effect, the character BA of "Koyoshi" is associated with the character of the rabbit, and it may be understood that the result of the fortune-telling is "Koyoshi" by looking at the character BA of the rabbit.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (l), the character display of "other results are this" is displayed, and it is predicted that the contents of the treasure box which has not been opened are notified. Note that the content of the character display shown in FIG. 193 (l) differs depending on the character that has appeared, and for example, when the princess character HM3 described later appears, the character display such as "other results are this" Is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (m), the princess character HM3 appears from the upper left treasure box BX1, the image of the head of the bancho BCH from the upper right treasure box BX3, The appearance of the image PND of the face of the panda is shown. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is a character corresponding to Nakakichi, and the image PND of the panda's face is a character corresponding to the evil. The combination of the fortune-telling result and the character can be appropriately set, and the combination of the fortune-telling result and the character may be changed each time the mini game is played.

  As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (k1), a princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune telling, "" Is displayed as a word of advice, and there is a display of "prediction of big fishing today", and there is a thing that gives the feeling of expectation that a large amount of balls may be obtained.

  In addition, as shown in Figure 193 (k2), while the face image BCH of the Bancho appears from the treasure box, “Nakakichi” is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, and it is a day when something is sticky as advice. There is also a display of "", and there is a thing that gives an expectation that there may be something that it may be necessary to play slowly and slowly over time.

  In addition, as shown in Fig. 193 (k3), the image PND of the face of the panda appears from the treasure box, and "bad" is displayed as a result of fortune-telling, and as a word advice "" Is displayed, and it is also shown that the player is reminded not to get too stuck in the game.

  In addition, for example, the result of a mini game that may appear may be prepared according to the setting contents by the DIP switch connected to the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. For example, by appearing by the DIP switch If the setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to be, as shown in Figure 193 (k4), the display of a word advice of “Today is a foresight of big fishing”, “Today is It may be changed to a display that "premium advance notice is easy to come out". That is, it may be an explanation of the effect related to the result of the pass / fail determination, such as the suggestion of the appearance rate of the advance notice, and may display the result regardless of the result of the pass / fail determination. According to this, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to seem to be indirectly involved in the influence of the pass / fail judgment. Note that even when the appearance rate of the advance notice is not changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (k4) may be displayed. Thus, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word advice, may be changed.

  Further, in this effect example, in place of the word advice, a tutorial display such as a game explanation or an explanation of the character of the model may be performed.

  FIG. 194 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 194 (A1) to (A6) are effects following FIG. 193 (f) and show an example of effects of another mini game. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (f), the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A1) displays “Today's fortune telling – close to the top of the display area – The title is displayed, and a mini game with a mission of selecting a treasure box with contents of "Daikichi" is started. In addition, since FIG. 194 (A1)-the same figure (A 4) are the same as that of FIG. 193 (g)-the same figure (j) except that the display of a title is different, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 194 (A5) shows that the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A5), the treasure box at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 comes out of the treasure box, and as a result of fortune telling "Daikichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game has been achieved by the display of "Daikichi", the display of "Mission achievement" to that effect is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A6), instead of the display of "mission accomplished", a display of "prediction of today's best condition" is performed as a word advice, I try to give a sense of expectation. This word advice can also be said to be a display that is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIGS. 194 (B1) to (B6) are also effects following FIG. 193 (f) and show that the mission can not be achieved. FIG. 194 (B1) shows the same display as FIG. 194 (A1).

  Then, when the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (B2), as shown in FIG. 194 (B3), the cursor CSL points to the treasure box BX3 at the upper right.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (B3), as shown in FIG. 194 (B4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 at the upper right is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The upper left treasure chest BX1, the lower left treasure chest BX2, and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right portion. Thus, it is informed that the upper right treasure box BX3 has been determined as the open treasure chest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 194 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 at the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a fortune character BA appears from the treasure box and the result of fortune telling As "Okichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game was not achieved because "Daikichi" was not displayed, "not achieved ..." is displayed accordingly.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (B6), instead of the display of "not achieved ...", a display of "moderate ..." is performed as a word advice, It is shown that it warns you not to get stuck too much.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (a), the above-mentioned customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 195 (c). In the menu screen shown in FIG. 195 (c), the items of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end are displayed side by side in a row, and "Select" The character display of “OK” is performed with the OK button operation prompting image 137 q and the button image 136 a, and the cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137 a or the lower button 137 b of the operation key unit 137. By moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137, it is shown that the item designated by the cursor CSL is executed.

  Here, when the item "customization" is executed, customization of various settings can be performed. Details of customizable settings will be described later.

  In addition, when the item of “personal data clear” is executed, the pachinko machine 100 deletes the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed in order to prevent data being cleared by mistake.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once in a state where the cursor CSL indicates "member registration", as shown in FIG. 195 (d), the cursor CSL is displayed. Directs "customize". Then, when the OK button 137e is operated in a state where the cursor CSL instructs "customize", as shown in FIG. 97 (e), the screen shifts to a customize menu screen.

  In the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, setting of premier notice appearance rate, tutorial display on / off are displayed in a row in a row, and the direction below The character display of "selection" is performed with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of "decision" is performed with the OK button operation promotion image 137q, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting designated by the cursor CSL can be changed.

  Here, the “automatic button mode” is an effect mode in which the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on to automatically determine the timing of button operation and perform the operation. For example, when the continuous hitting operation effect requiring the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is executed, control is performed so that the button operation is automatically performed at appropriate timings (for example, every 200 ms). In this example, when “Auto button mode” is set to on, the various buttons are set to full auto, which is automatically operated, without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long press auto in which automatic operation of the button is performed by long press. Here, in long-press auto, when a long-press operation is performed by the operating means in an effect (including a mini game) requiring the operation of the operating means a plurality of times, the operation is performed plural times continuously. It is a pseudo-operation to be done. In this case, when the operation means is operated to press and hold, it is handled as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the continuous hitting operation effect described above is executed, by long-pressing the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform the continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner. Further, full auto is an operation in which the operation of the operation means is performed in a certain effect requiring the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

  In the "eco mode", for example, when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the drive of one or more drive devices is limited such as turning off various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption. Or it is a mode to stop. In the present embodiment, when the eco mode start condition is satisfied after the eco mode is turned on, the various lamps 418 are turned off, and the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced. The target device whose drive is to be restricted or stopped can be set as appropriate.

  "Premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of notices promised to finally display the jackpot symbol by appearance, and when it is set to "normal", the first notice The normal probability table where the premier notice appears by probability is used to draw the appearance of the premier notice, and when it is set to "high", the premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first probability. The high probability table to be used is controlled so that the lottery of the appearance of the premier notice is performed.

  Also, the “tutorial” is controlled so that the above-mentioned tutorial display is not performed when it is set to off.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (f), when the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL designates the "auto button mode", as shown in FIG. The setting of "Auto button mode" which has been instructed is changed to "On".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (g), when the OK button 137e is operated once in a state in which the setting of the "auto button mode" is "on", the setting of the "auto button mode" is "on" Finalized. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once, as shown in FIG. 97 (h), the screen shifts to a menu screen. When the effect button 136 is operated without the OK button 137e being operated in a state where the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. It is possible to shift to the menu screen, or to shift to the menu screen after reflecting (determining) the result of the setting of the “automatic button mode”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (h), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL designates "customize", as shown in FIG. 195 (i), the cursor CSL is " Instruct "mini-game".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated in a state where the cursor CSL designates the “mini game”, as shown in FIG. 97 (j), the mini game is started. Ru. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a Bancho character is displayed, and the name of the mini game "Bancho awakening game" is displayed, and a mission of "Breaking clothes with a continuous hit of a button" is displayed below that. Is displayed. That is, in this mini game, when the mission is achieved on the condition that the presentation button 136 is continuously hit during the operation reception period of the presentation button 136 and the presentation button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, the dress of the Bancho is broken. Display to notify the mission completion.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT together with the character of the bancho, and the character display of "START" is performed above it. It is shown that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this effect example, as described above, although the setting of the "auto button mode" is set to "on" and set to full auto, in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective, and the effect button It is configured such that 136 automatic operations are not performed. In addition, when the setting of "auto button mode" is set to "on" and is set to long press auto, even if the effect button 136 is pressed long, the setting of long press auto is not effective, and at first Only one manually operated part of is made effective, and automatic operation of the presentation button 136 is not performed after that. In this effect example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is made different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display. Also, for example, as in this example of effect, it is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game which can be started during the customer waiting demo display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the rate of change of the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display The change speed of the display mode of may be the same. Also, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of default display mode) The number of (for example, the default display mode, the vibrating display mode, the rotating display mode, and the vibrating and rotating display modes) may be larger or smaller. The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variation display May be the same.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 195 (l) to FIG. 195 (n), when the operation effective period elapses while the pressing operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed once, as shown in FIG. 195 (o), The display does not change, which indicates that the mission to break the costume of the character of the captain has not been achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (o), the display of "bancho awakening game" and "end" is performed to notify that the mission has ended.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to a menu screen.

  In this effect example, the player may select the execution of the mini game. For example, in the customization menu screen transitioning from the menu screen, whether or not the mini game can be executed is set. It may be possible to select the type of mini game that can be performed.

  In addition, the customized game may be configured to be easily performed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the game is configured such that a game with a very low appearance rate is usually executed, the will to participate in the mini game May be able to improve.

  FIG. 196 and FIG. 197 are diagrams showing gradually another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIGS. 196 (A1) to (A6) show the effects following FIG. 195 (i), in which the player achieved the mission as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. In addition, since FIG. 196 (A1)-the same figure (A 2) are the same as that of FIG. 195 (j)-the figure (k), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A2), the effect button 136 is continuously hit by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 196 (A3) to FIG. 196 (A5), the effect image of the star increases as the number of effect images of the star displayed increases as the number of operations increases, and approaches the number of operations to achieve the mission. As shown in FIG. 196 (A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and the number of operations for which a mission is achieved is reached by the elapse of the operation reception period, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A6) It shows that the clothes are being broken, and displays "Bancho Awakening" and "Today's best" is displayed to notify that the mission has been achieved.

  196 (B1) to (B6) show effects following FIG. 195 (i), in which an example in which long press auto is enabled in the mini game is shown. It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo-double-stroke operation. In addition, since FIG. 196 (B1)-the same figure (B 2) are the same as that of FIG. 195 (j)-the same figure (k), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (B2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of a star is displayed according to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the simulated continuous hitting operation has not been started yet. In the present embodiment, when long press auto is enabled, one press operation is desired, but in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of the pseudo continuous hit, the long press of the effect button 136 After a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed since the start of the pseudo-striking operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A3), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is smaller, and the effect image of the star is also shown in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is less than the display. That is, the method of changing the display mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between when the player performs the normal double-stroke operation and when the pseudo-double-stroke operation by the long press auto is performed. .

  As shown in FIG. 196 (B4) to FIG. (B5), when the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started after the long press of the effect button 136 is started and the predetermined time elapses, the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the effect image of the displayed star also increases, and as the number of operations for achieving the mission approaches, the large-size effect image of the star is displayed as shown in FIG. 196 (B5). Thereafter, a pseudo-continuous hitting operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations for which a mission is achieved is reached by the elapse of the operation reception period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the clothes worn by the character of the character are broken, and the message "bancho awakening" and "today's best" is displayed to notify that the mission has been achieved.

  FIG. 197 (C1) to FIG. (C7) show the effects following FIG. 195 (i) in which the long press auto is invalidated in the mini game, in which the long press is performed but pseudo continuous hit It shows that the operation was not performed and as a result, the mission was not achieved. In addition, since FIG. 196 (B1)-the same figure (B 2) are the same as that of FIG. 195 (j)-the same figure (k), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of a star is displayed according to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

  However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is invalidated, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the long press of the effect button 136 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 197 (C4), since the number of times the effect button 136 is operated does not increase, not only does the effect image of the star increase but also a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) When the) has elapsed, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 197 (C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 197 (C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission is to It is shown that it was not achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 197 (C7), the display of "bancho awakening game" and "end" is performed to notify that the mission has ended.

  FIG. 198 is a view gradually showing another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 198, the full auto (or long press auto) function is enabled for effects (including mini games) requiring one or more operations of one button, but the operation key unit 137 With regard to the effects (including mini games) that require selection using, there is shown an example in which the function of full auto (or long press auto) is disabled.

  FIG. 198 (A1) to FIG. 1 (A6) show effects following FIG. 195 (i), showing an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini game in which the output button 136 is continuously hit. It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo-continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 being performed. Note that FIG. 198 (A1) to FIG. 1 (A2) are the same as FIG. 195 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A2), the full auto functions and a pseudo continuous hitting operation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of times of pseudo operation of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 198 (A3) to FIG. 1 (A5), the effect image of the star is displayed more as the number of operations by the pseudo operation increases, and as the number of operations for which the mission is achieved approaches As shown in FIG. 198 (A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. Thereafter, the pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is further continued, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the elapse of the operation reception period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A6) It is shown that the clothes worn by the Bancho character are broken, and the message "bancho awakening" and "Today's best" is displayed to notify that the mission has been accomplished.

  FIG. 198 (B1) is an effect following to FIG. 193 (f) and shows an example of an effect of another mini game. That is, when the mini game is started, a title of "Today's fortune telling-closing Daikichi-" is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (B1). A mini game is launched, whose mission is to select the content treasure box. In this mini game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL, and a treasure box to be opened is determined by operating the effect button 136. A mini game is operated by operating a plurality of buttons. Because the function is performed, the function of the fully automatic function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless one of the buttons is operated.

  On the other hand, full auto may be made to function also in such a mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B1 '), when the mini game starts, full auto functions immediately and the effect button 136 is activated. Is simulated and, as shown in FIG. 198 (B2 '), the upper left treasure box is automatically selected. That is, in the mini game where the treasure box is selected by each button of the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box to be opened by the effect button 136 is determined as described above, the treasure box to which the cursor CSL points first when fully automatic is made to function. May be determined as an open treasure chest and may not reflect the player's operation intention at all.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game is performed to derive the result which is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment in the standby state, but for example, in the effect started when the predetermined time comes by the RTC (Real Time Clock) The game may be executed in a mini game to be executed in at least one of the symbol variation display, and may be executed at any time regardless of the gaming state in order to kill the player's time. .

  FIG. 199 and FIG. 200 are diagrams showing steps of another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect examples shown in FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, it is shown that the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game. In addition, a mini game may be always started during execution of a big hit game, and may not be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (a), the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and a state of becoming a big hit is shown. Also, the first special icon 2 reserved icon h21, the second special icon 2 reserved icon h22, the third special icon 2 reserved icon h23, and the fourth special icon 2 The hold icons h24 are all displayed in the default display mode. In addition, in this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these may be displayed .

  FIG. 199 (b) shows that the big hit game has been started and shifted to the first round. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "big hit start" is performed to notify that the big hit game has been started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. The display of "1R" to show, and the display of "0 GET" showing the current number of winning balls in the present big hit are also performed. In addition, the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the rowing may be displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 234 in one round is a predetermined number (for example, 10) in the winning prize number of balls, and the variable winning opening 234 is closed during the closing state (over winning) The number of winning balls based on the game balls may or may not be included. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (b), a character of a child panda may appear, and it may be possible to make a comical action to entertain the player. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification to instruct a right-handed may be performed.

  FIG. 199 (c) shows that the fifth round of the big hit game is being played. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "5R" indicating the fifth round of the big hit game and "735 GET" indicating the number of winning balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This winning prize number of balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (c), the display "Mini game will start in the next round" is displayed, and the mini game is started in the next round (sixth round) It has been foretold.

  FIG. 199 (d) shows that the sixth round has been started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "6R" indicating the sixth round of the big hit game and "750 GET" indicating the number of winning balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This winning prize ball number is due to the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning hole 234 since the big hit started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (d), the display of "Mini game will start" is performed, and it is predicted that the mini game is to be started from this.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (e) shows that the mini game has been started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a Bancho character appears, a display showing the appearance of the dice “1”, and a display “A character action UP if there is a display,” the mini game is displayed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the output of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the possibility that the effect movable body 224 operates is high. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and a display based on the winning of 51 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is. In addition, when the effect movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is ensured that a holding group will occur. That is, the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the big hit game can be said to be an example of the advance notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice starts variable display, and the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed. The character display is performed, and it is shown that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and a display based on the winning of 52 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (g), as shown in FIG. The stop display is shown in the manner shown, and it is shown that the mission achievement was not achieved. The number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 199 (h) The winning prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area 208 indicates "825 GET".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (i), the display showing the outcome of the "3" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and the mini game mission is not achieved Display of "sorry" to notify is performed. Therefore, in the example of the effect, the effect movable body 224 is not operated, and the notification as to whether or not the hold sequence is performed will not be performed. In this production example, in the case where the result of pre-reading is that the game is on hold, the mission may always be achieved in the mini game, and the presentation movable body 224 may be operated, or the mission is not achieved, and the presentation The movable body 224 may not operate. In addition, when the mission is achieved, the effect movable body 224 may always operate or may not operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display based on is done.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is over, as shown in FIG. 199 (j), the display of “big hit” is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player is informed that the big hit game is over. In the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400 GET" indicating that the number of award winning balls is 2400 are displayed. There is.

  In the mini game of this effect example, although the game is performed by one operation of the effect button 136, for example, the "bancho awakening game" shown in FIG. 97 is started, and a bonus is awarded when the mission is achieved. (For example, the operation preview of the effect movable body 224) may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the situation in which a mission is achieved in a mini game performed during a big hit game will be described. In addition, since FIG. 200 (a)-the same figure (d) are the same as that of FIG. 199 (a)-the same figure (d), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (e) shows that the mini game has been started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a Bancho character appears, a display showing the appearance of the dice “1”, and a display “A character action UP if there is a display,” the mini game is displayed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the output of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the possibility that the effect movable body 224 operates is high. Here, the Bancho character is displayed in the form of a broken clothes, suggesting that the mission is likely to be achieved. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and a display based on the winning of 51 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice starts fluctuating display, and the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed. The character display is performed, and it is shown that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. Note that, in this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a rotating and vibrating manner, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This implies that the mission is likely to be achieved. Further, the number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and a display based on the winning of 52 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (g), as shown in FIG. 200 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the dice of the dice is "1". The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (g) indicates "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 200 (h). The winning prize ball number displayed at the upper right of the display area 208 indicates "825 GET".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (i), the display indicating the outcome of the “1” derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the notification that the mission of the mini game is achieved is given. The display of "I'm done" is done. In addition, the display of “focus on the arm” is performed below the display, and it is predicted that the effect movable body 224 may operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (i) indicates "840 GET", and the 56 winning balls of the gaming ball to the variable winning opening 234 are won. The display based on is done.

  FIG. 200 (j) shows that the seventh round has been started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "7R" indicating the seventh round of the big hit game and "900 GET" indicating the winning prize ball number at the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that the game ball of 60 balls has won the variable winning opening 234 since the jackpot started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and this forearm portion 224b overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect images of a large number of stars are displayed, and a display is performed as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "915 GET", and a display based on the winning of 61 gaming balls to the variable winning opening 234 is performed. There is.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "pending on continuous reservation" is performed, and it is informed that the symbol variation display to be a big hit is being suspended. That is, the advance notice is given based on the operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of “Reserved connection confirmation” in FIG. 200 (l).

  In addition, in this example of presentation, it may be made to inform that it is a reservation continuation decision by achievement of a mission.

  In the present embodiment, one or more of the plurality of types of mini games described above are combined and configured to be executable.

  In the embodiment described above, the button (operation means) used in the mission in the main effect and the button (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game may be different.

  In addition, the result of the main effect or the result of the mini game may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed using another display means (for example, a display device dedicated to a mission, etc.) , Other effect means (eg, movable means such as the effect movable body 224 or the shielding device 246, sound output means such as the speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532 May be notified by another device of

  In addition, the mini game described above may be performed during execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, and may be executed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Further, as in the case of the mini game described above, it is preferable that the result be notified whenever the mini game is started, but it may function as a false advance notice. For example, in the case of the symbol variation display in which the number of suspension of the special display variation display is four, the variation time may generally be short, and in such a case, the result is displayed as if the mini game was started. You may make it interrupt, without alerting | reporting. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the presentation of the game lively.

  In addition, the mini game described above may be configured to be interrupted or discontinued when a predetermined condition is established. For example, a big hit (for example, a combination of big hit decorative symbols is displayed without passing through a reach effect) When a variable display pattern etc. occurs, an RTC effect starts, a current effect display switches to a display such as wipe, or an error such as a door open error or a magnetic detection error occurs. May be interrupted. For example, if a big hit occurs suddenly while the mini game is being executed and the mini game is interrupted, the player suddenly becomes a big hit during a period looking forward to the result of the mini game, and the player is surprised and delighted There are times when it can be given. When the mini game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to enjoy a link on the effect with another game table by the RTC effect.

  Further, the display area in which the mini game is executed may be changed in position or size depending on the game state, the effect mode or the stage.

  Further, as an operation mode required in the mini game described above, an appropriate operation mode such as a single operation, a continuous hitting operation, a long press operation, a timing operation, and the like can be adopted. As a result, there are cases where it is possible to change the result of the mini game depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, when the mini game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini game may be started before reaching the reach. When reaching the reach, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effects of the symbol variation display, so there are cases where it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect before the reach by starting the mini game before the reach.

  Further, although the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game described above is to predict that a notice is to be made, the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game may be a notice or an advance notice. For example, the fluctuation advance notice or the advance notice may be given as a result of the mini game performed during execution of the symbol change display, and the advance notice may be provided as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the big hit game.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other gaming machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) which can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 201 to 285 are in principle used only for the description using FIGS. 201 to 285, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 285, the reference numerals shown in FIG.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door open sensor 109 is provided to detect the opening of the front frame door 106.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, an effect button 136 as an example of operation means for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 203) by the operation of the player, and the performance The effect button lamp 138, which is incorporated in the button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. The effect button lamp 138 is formed of, for example, a full color LED, and can emit light in multiple colors. In the present embodiment, the effect button lamp 138 is an example of a light emitting means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means. Furthermore, the operation key unit 137 as an example of the operation means is also provided. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 may be referred to as a first operation means, and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a second operation means. The specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described later. Further, the lower plate 128 is provided with a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by the game ball.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 202 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 203 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear by being operated at the time of power on A power supply board case 184 containing a power supply board 182 having a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 203 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 function as symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208, a rendering movable body 225 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208, the rendering movable body 225, and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, and is disposed on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved up and down by a home pattern motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 is displaceable to a position (retracted position) retracted to the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a position (advanced position) overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that a counter is built in), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the lower-side full-tank sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high confidence) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view starting port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the signal is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value corresponds to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in value storage register. Also, even when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 232 The latched and latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured by bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured by bidirectional communication.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, the effect button lamp 138 provided in the effect button 136) are controlled. Drive circuit 420, drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of shielding device 246, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, various buttons included in effect button 136 and operation key unit 137 (details will be described. Stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430 and the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and Read image data etc. and use the work area of VRAM 436 to And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the first secondary control unit 400, and this voltage monitoring circuit Outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 402 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  The first sub control unit 400 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit, not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input from the output circuit, game control is started (a first sub control unit main process described later is started).

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, 225, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, 225, and an effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the basic circuit 502 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board for controlling the game board frame 542 A frame lamp drive circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten types of special figures from "Special figure A" to "Special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display, and the white parts in the figure turn off The locations of the segments to be displayed are indicated, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit design which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, each being a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The small hit referred to here corresponds to the same thing as 2R time short no hit big hit. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 205 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit corresponding to 15R big hit in the symbol display area 208a-208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of notifying 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which the same three odd decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 To stop.

  In addition, the 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure E" hidden probability change, the 2R big hit, which is usually called "special figure F", or the first small hit of "special figure G", is "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when reporting 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R big hit called sudden shortness of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 205 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 206 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that an operation has been made). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 204, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding number of holding storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 winning value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 While obtaining as a random number value, a value is obtained as a special figure 1 random number value from a random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in a corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding number of holding storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 2 winning value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318 While obtaining as a random number value, a value is obtained as a special figure 2 random number value from a random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in a corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 205 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 205 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 205 (a), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag is also off special figure F, the first small hit flag is on special figure G, the second small hit flag is on special figure H, the first off flag is on In the case of the special pattern I, when the second out flag is on, perform the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED which constitutes the second special symbol display device 214 so as to become each aspect of the special figure I , And setting that indicates that the special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the second out-of-place design (special figure J) the fixed display of any one of the design is done. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. Further, if the common drawing probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and it is for solving this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the process returns to the main control unit main process.

  On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, return to the main control unit main processing.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, the initialization process is first performed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. In this effect control process, for example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, effect data Update process of

  In step S311, when pressing of the effect button 136 and various buttons of the operation key unit 137 is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to pressing of the various buttons.

  In step S313, an image control process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 in the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434. In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  In step S323, mission achievement determination processing (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S325, processing is ended after original mode control processing (details will be described later).

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S321, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  In step S505, it is monitored whether the above-described low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (if the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S507, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the power shut off is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state upon power return are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input / output port is performed.

<Image control processing>
Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, an initialization process is first performed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second secondary control unit main processing, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903, an update process of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 210 (a) is a view showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 201, and FIG. 210 (b) is a view schematically showing the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), the operation key unit 137 is configured to have six buttons of an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e and a clear button 137f. There is. In the following description, in order to simplify the description, among the components of the operation key unit 137, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, and the OK button 137e are shown in FIG. It may be expressed in the mode shown in b).

  The pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment has a long press auto continuous hitting function of performing a continuous continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner by long press operations of the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137. Here, the long press operation refers to an operation mode in which the state in which each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is pressed and operated is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. The continuous hitting operation is an operation mode in which the pressing operation by each of the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effect using the effect button 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137. In the present embodiment, in the state where the long press auto continuous hitting function is effective, while the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 are continuously pressed, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, 100 ms interval) Is configured to be simulated. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137, the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 are used. In order to properly perform single-shot operation, the long-press auto continuous hitting function is performed until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses from the start of the pressing operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 It is comprised so that a pseudo | simulation continuous hitting operation may not be started.

  Subsequently, a specific effect example of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a display example on the menu screen, and FIG. 212 is a diagram showing the continuation of the display example on the menu screen shown in FIG. The following figure shows how the screen transitions in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIGS. 211 and 212 show, for example, how various settings are performed on a menu screen that can be executed when in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

  In addition, although the menu screen in this embodiment enables the change of the setting by the player, other than this menu screen, for example, the setting menu screen for the game arcade side is displayed, and thereby, the game arcade The user may be configured to be able to change various settings by the side, and may be configured to be able to input, for example, a master volume, a store name, and the like. Further, in the slot machine, for example, the setting change for determining the probability of BB, RB or the like may be made on the menu screen.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured to be able to be displayed in the standby state, but for example, the menu screen can not be displayed in the power support state (positive change, time saving). It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, are stopped and displayed. Although not shown in the drawings, the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are both stopped in the display mode of removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol t2 is also stopped and displayed as the outset display result corresponding to the display result of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, respectively. Further, although not shown, the numbers of pending displays of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (a), effect display of the standby state is performed.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen, an icon representing the effect button 136 is displayed, and the characters “Display on menu screen” are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the menu screen can be performed by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the effect button 136 is pressed once by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a menu screen as shown in FIG. 211 (b) (“setting screen In some cases,) is displayed. Specifically, on the menu screen, "volume light amount adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light amount, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by inputting a password, appearance frequency of effects such as notices Four menus of “operation customization setting” for setting and “operation assist setting” for setting a long press auto continuous hitting function and an auto button function to be described later are displayed in a selectable manner. At the bottom of these menus, the characters "Select" are displayed with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the characters "Determine" with the icon of the OK button 137e are displayed further to the right. Furthermore, on the right side of the icon of the effect button 136 is displayed the character of "return", and by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, the cursor CL is moved and the OK button 137e is operated. Thus, it is informed that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed. Also, in FIG. 211 (b), when the effect button 136 is operated, it is also notified that the display returns to the effect display of the standby state shown in FIG. 211 (a).

  In the present embodiment, in the volume light amount adjustment, the volume and the light amount can be set, for example, from 11 steps of 0 to 10 respectively. The volume and the amount of light are set to default values when the power is turned on, and the default values are set to, for example, “5”. Needless to say, default values can be set as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the player has enabled the setting change of the volume and the light amount by the setting operation on the menu screen, but the setting change may not be made for at least one of the volume and the light amount by the player. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change of the volume and the light amount is configured to be possible only on the setting screen in the menu screen, but for example, the setting change of the volume and the light amount may be configured without using the setting screen. For example, even during the variable display of the decorative symbol or immediately after the stop display of the decorative symbol, the setting change of the volume and the light amount can be performed by operating the operation key unit 137 without displaying the setting screen. Good.

  In the present embodiment, in the menu screen, the cursor CL can be moved one by one each time the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is operated, and in the menu screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function described later is invalidated. Since it is assumed that the cursor CL can not be moved by two or more by long press operation. When the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is long pressed on the menu screen, the cursor CL may be moved by two or more.

  When effect display in a standby state is being performed, in addition to the effect button 136, any one of the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 or a specific button (for example, the OK button 137e etc.) is pressed. The menu screen may be displayed also in the case of a failure. In addition to the effect button 136, for example, when the clear button 137f is pressed when the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen may return to the effect display of the standby state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when the lower button 137b is pressed once by the player when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL, in the decorative symbol display device 208, As shown in FIG. 211 (d), a display indicating that "Member registration" is selected by the cursor CL is performed.

  Thereafter, when the lower button 137b is pressed once more by the player, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL. Display is done. That is, in this effect example, when “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL, the menu of “customize effect” operates the lower button 137 b twice (or the upper button 137 a is operated twice). It is a display which can be selected. In other words, in the present embodiment, on the menu screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled. Therefore, when “volume and light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL, the menu of “customize effect” is displayed as not selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). It can also be said that there is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display (one example of the second display) in which “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL is the operation of the lower button 137 b (upper button 137 a) a plurality of times (for example, twice) This is a display that may be displayed in response to being operated (in the first operation mode), and in the case where the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is pressed and held (in the second operation mode) It can be said that the display in which “customize effect” is selected by the cursor CL is not started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL is the display when one of the plurality of options is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL can also be said to be the display displayed on the menu screen (setting screen).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen is a screen including a display for instructing selection of one option from among a plurality of options, and the display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (operating in the first operation mode) when one of the three display examples is displayed, "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL In some cases, the display of the display (an example of the second display) may be started, and the display (an example of the third display) in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is pressed and held (in the second operation mode), the display of “display customization” selected by the cursor CL (an example of the second display) is displayed. Started It can also be referred to have.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL is the lower button 137 b (the upper button when the display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. It can also be said that the display is started when the operation is performed N times (N ≧ 2) by 137a).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL can also be said to be a display that is not started during display of the symbol variation display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player in the state where "customize effect" is selected by the cursor CL in the decorative symbol display device 208, In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect customization setting screen as shown in FIG. 211 (f) is displayed. In the effect customization setting screen, the default frequency is set to the appearance frequency of effects such as a notice, etc. "Normal mode", no false big hit advance notice, but only a notice of a big hit determined to be a big hit by appearing Three menus are displayed in a selectable manner: "One-shot notification mode" to make settings, and "Premier-up mode" to set the setting to improve the appearance frequency of low-presence jackpot finalization premier notices in "normal mode" ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (g), when the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player when the “normal mode” is selected by the cursor CL, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the figure. As shown in 211 (h), along with the character of Princess Chibi, "Normal mode" and "I can see the usual effects" is displayed to notify that the normal mode has been set, and the appearance of the effects such as notices etc. The frequency is set to default.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated on the menu screen, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL Even if the OK button 137e is pressed and operated for a long time by the player, the “normal mode” is never set, and the OK button 137e is operated again after the display screen is changed to the effect customization setting screen. "Normal mode" is set.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 211 (f), when the lower button 137b is pressed twice while the “normal mode” is selected by the cursor CL, as shown in FIG. 211 (g1). , “Premier up mode” is displayed with the cursor CL. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, the menu of the "premium up mode" is selected when the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL. It can be said that the display can be selected by operating the lower button 137b twice, in other words, the display can not be selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that the "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL can be considered as an example of the second display, and the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL. The indication showing can be said to be an example of the third indication.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (g1), when the "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL, and the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208, As shown in Fig. 211 (h1), along with the character of Princess Chibi, it displays "You can see a lot of premiere effects" to notify that the premier up mode has been set, and the appearance frequency of the premier notice is high. Set to

  Also, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when “downward effect” is selected by the cursor CL, as shown in FIG. 212 (e2), when the lower button 137b is pressed once more. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating that “operation assist setting” is selected by the cursor CL is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, the menu of the “operation assistance setting” is selected when “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL. It can be said that the display can be selected by operating the lower button 137b three times, in other words, the display can not be selected unless the lower button 137b is operated three times. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that the “operation assist setting” is selected by the cursor CL can be said to be an example of the second display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 212 (e2), in the case where the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player in the case where the “operation auxiliary setting” is selected by the cursor CL, in the decorative symbol display device 208, An operation assistance setting screen as shown in FIG. 212 (f2) is displayed. In the operation support setting screen, “do not assist” not assisting the continuous hitting operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137, long-press and operate each button constituting the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 Even if the effects of the effect button 136 or the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 are not performed during the execution of the effects relating to the operation of the “long press auto continuous hit”, the effect button 136, etc. Three menus of "auto button" for simulating single shot operation, long press operation and continuous hit operation are displayed in a selectable manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 212 (f2), when the lower button 137b is pressed once by the player when "without assistance" is selected with the cursor CL, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays As shown in 212 (g2), a display indicating that "long press auto continuous hit" is selected by the cursor CL is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 212 (h2), when the player presses the OK button 137e once, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 212 (i2), Is displayed to inform that the long press auto continuous hitting function has become effective, and the long press auto continuous hitting function is set to become effective. In this embodiment, on the condition that the long press auto continuous hitting function is set in this way, the continuous hit assisting function by the long press operation of each of the effect button 136 or each button constituting the operation key unit 137 Is configured to trigger. In the embodiment described in this specification, the setting of the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be provided, and the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be configured to be always in the valid state.

  In the present embodiment, in the menu screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function is configured to be invalidated, but the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled in the menu screen, for example, the upper button When the button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed, the cursor CL may be moved in accordance with the pseudo-continuous hitting operation. At this time, for example, the interval of the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) which can easily recognize that the menu which is the target of the player's selection has been changed. In this case, for example, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, or the OK button 137e continues to be pressed before the setting screen changes, such as transition from the menu screen to the effect customization setting screen, the setting screen is displayed. After switching, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is configured to be performed again by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b or the OK button 137e after the setting screen is switched without performing the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be Further, the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long press operation may not be performed at least one of the movement of the cursor CL and the transition of the setting screen.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the result set on the menu screen may affect the effect that the long press auto consecutive hit function described later functions. For example, it is possible to set the degree of difficulty for the effect of performing the continuous hitting operation on the menu screen, and when the difficulty level is high, to make it more likely to be successful to perform the long press auto continuous hitting than the continuous hitting operation. Can. Further, the volume and the light amount set on the volume and light amount setting screen are reflected in the effect that the long press auto consecutive hit functions.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pseudo series effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 213 shows how an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed in the pseudo connected effect. Here, although the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the fluctuation display of the special figure with the pseudo-link, the left symbol display area 208a, middle for the fluctuation display of one special drawing After temporarily stopping the variation display of the decoration symbol in all of the symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation pattern of the decoration symbol which executes the re-variation display of changing all the decoration symbols again and again one or more times Point to That is, the pseudo-link is a pseudo-variation in which the decorative symbol appears to be varied a plurality of times with respect to the variable display of one special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (a), in the first special view display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 variably displayed in accordance with the display state of the first special image display device 212 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth pattern t1, for example, the variation display is performed in a mode in which the color represented in the circle changes to a plurality of types corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special figure display device 212 There is. In addition, although the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a mode in which the symbol displayed stop-displayed can be recognized for convenience of explanation in FIG. The displayed symbol is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 may be displayed in a manner that can be recognized by the player.

  In the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold display area is provided which represents the number of holdings of the special view 1 by the number of icons. In this hold display area, a first special view 1 hold display h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special view 1 and a second special view 1 hold display corresponding to the second hold of the special view 1 h12, a third special view 1 suspension display h13 corresponding to the third suspension of the special view 1, and a fourth special diagram 1 suspension display h14 corresponding to the fourth suspension of the special view 1 are displayed It is done. In FIG. 213 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is one, one hold lamp in the first special view suspension lamp 218 is on, and the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 2 is Is 0, so all of the hold lamps in the second special view hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, among the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14, the first special view 1 hold display h11 correspondingly. Only the default display mode (default hold icon) is displayed, and the other special view 1 hold displays are displayed in a non-hold mode (for example, a grayed-out mode hold icon). In addition, it is good also as an aspect which makes a pending | holding icon a non-display instead of the display in the aspect which is not suspended.

  Further, at the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 284 for displaying a variation icon is provided. The variation icon is, for example, a display mode associated with the special display hold display, and is displayed in the same display mode as the hold display. The fluctuation icon can execute, for example, a notice (the fluctuation notice) about the display result of the fluctuation display according to the display mode. The fluctuation icon is erased after the fluctuation display is started. Note that the deletion timing of the fluctuation icon is not limited to this, and may be deleted, for example, at the end of the fluctuation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (b), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the form of swing fluctuation in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (c), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the form of swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display device 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (d), the third stop is performed, and the pseudo-connected symbol GG including the character display of "CONTINUED" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a swing fluctuation mode. By stopping and displaying this pseudo run symbol GG, it is possible to make the player expect as to whether or not the pseudo run will occur.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (e), the word "PUSH" is displayed at the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136, and the remainder of the acceptance period of effect button press A remaining time meter MT representing time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are displayed superimposed on the pseudo run symbol GG. As a result, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 can be received.

  Thereafter, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (f), as shown in FIG. 213 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, After the effect is successfully produced, effect display is performed to the effect that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Specifically, a display of “× 2” indicating that the second variation design of the decorative symbol is being performed is displayed above the decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 213 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c again fluctuate, The first pseudo-series effect is started. That is, the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the first stop and the second stop are performed in the same manner as described above in FIGS. (B) to (c), as shown in FIG. 213 (i), The third stop is performed, and the pseudo run symbol GG is stopped and displayed in the form of fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. By stopping and displaying this pseudo run symbol GG, it is possible to make the player expect as to whether or not the second pseudo run will occur.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. The meter MT is also displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 can be received.

  Thereafter, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (k), as shown in FIG. 213 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, After the effect is successfully produced, effect display is performed to the effect that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Specifically, a display of “× 3” is displayed above the decorative symbol, which indicates that the third variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is being performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (m), the second pseudo-series effect is started.

  In the example of the effect described above, the effect button image BT is displayed each time the effect (sometimes referred to as a pseudo continuous generation effect) for asking whether or not to generate the pseudo continuous is executed, and the pseudo continuous generation effect is performed a plurality of times Since the effect button image BT is also displayed a plurality of times because it is executed, the effect button image BT displayed at one time is one, and the display of the effect button image BT is intermittently performed at every occurrence of the pseudo continuous occurrence effect It shows that it is done.

  In the example of the effect described above, although the effect button 136 is depressed and the effect is successful, for example, when the pseudo continuous effect is not started, for example, the effect of the effect of the operation of the effect button 136 has failed The effect display of may be executed, and the stop display may be performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the off. In addition, after the effect display indicating that the effect has failed is executed, the stop display may be performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 The result of the operation may be displayed by performing the long press operation. Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the effect of the effect button 136 by one-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effect of plural times is two of the effects by one-shot operation, effects by long press operation and effects by continuous hitting operation You may comprise by the combination of the above. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be made to carry out one by one according to the continuous hitting operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be in an invalid state. In this case, even when the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, the effect button lamp 138 may be turned off. The effect button lamp 138 may emit light in a light emission mode (e.g., light emission in blue) different from the light emission mode (e.g., light emission in red) in the state where the long press auto continuous hitting function is effective.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is an example of the first operation mode. Further, the long press operation for a predetermined time or more by the effect button 136 is an example of a second operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than in the first operation mode.

  And in this example of production, when long press automatic consecutive hitting function is made effective state, the production indication due to the pseudo ream which is executed as a result of the operation of the production button 136 which is generated after the 2nd time, is the 1st operation It is possible to start when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in a mode, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode It can be called an example.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the effect display by the pseudo-run executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second time is the second operation An example of a second effect that is more easily started when the second operation is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed by the operating means in the mode. be able to. Moreover, it can also be said that it is an example of the 2nd presentation which is not started only by one operation being performed by the operation means in the 2nd operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect display by the pseudo link executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be started when the first number of operations is performed, and can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 214 is a diagram for explaining an example of chance eye effect presentation. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 214 shows a state of transition to super reach after an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times in the chance effect effect is performed. Here, the chance eye refers to an aspect in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of different symbols having the same color), and is an aspect of the notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (a), after the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display region 208a. The chance symbol "A" which constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the chance symbol "B" which constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" which constitutes a part of the symbol "C" is stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol which is the chance eye. The first special view display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special view fourth symbol t1 is also changed and displayed corresponding to the pattern change display of the first special view display device 212.

  Further, in FIG. 214 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is one, one reserve lamp in the first special view storage lamp 218 is on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, among the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14, the first special view 1 hold display h11 correspondingly. Is displayed in the default display mode, and the other special view 1 hold displays are displayed in the non-hold mode.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (b), with the effect button image BT1 urging the pressing of the effect button 136 so as to overlap with the chance symbol “A” displayed stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. The characters "PUSH" are displayed, and a remaining time meter MT1 representing the remaining time of the reception period of the effect button press is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 prompting the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap with the chance symbol "B" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap with the chance symbol "C" stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (c), as shown in FIG. 214 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance symbol “A” that has been played is changed to a crown pattern YM1 that imitates a crown face. At this time, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 remain superimposed on the domed pattern YM1, but the character display of "PUSH" is erased, and the remaining time meter MT1 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 seconds.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 214 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 which are displayed superimposed on the domed symbol YM1 are erased, and an embodiment in which the symbol pattern YM1 is easily visible Is displayed. The timing at which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased can be set appropriately, for example, before the timing at which the display changes from the chance symbol "A" to the symbol pattern YM1. The timing may be the same as the timing of changing the display from the chance symbol "A" to the symbol YM1. The same applies to the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the display of the remaining time indicated in the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  In addition, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (e), as shown in FIG. 214 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance symbol "B" that has been done is changed to the crown pattern YM2. At this time, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 remain superimposed on the domed pattern YM2, but the character display of "PUSH" is erased, and the remaining time meter MT2 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 seconds. In FIG. 214 (e), the appearance that the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased and the state that the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed are simultaneously shown, but in fact, the effect is displayed After the button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. Note that deletion of the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may be at the same time as pressing operation by the effect button 136, or after there is pressing operation by the effect button 136, the effect button image BT1 and The remaining time meter MT1 may be erased. Further, even if there is a pressing operation by the effect button 136, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT1 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT1. May be erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 214 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 which are displayed superimposed on the pattern tam YM2 are erased, and an embodiment in which the celebrity symbol YM2 is easily visible Is displayed. Further, the display of the remaining time indicated by the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  Also, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (g), as shown in FIG. 214 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" which has been done is changed to the crown pattern YM3. At this time, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 remain superimposed on the domed pattern YM3, but the character display of "PUSH" is erased, and the remaining time meter MT3 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 seconds. In FIG. 214 (g), the appearance that the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased and the state that the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed are simultaneously shown, but in fact, the effect is displayed After the button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. Note that deletion of the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may be at the same time as the pressing operation by the effect button 136, or after there is a pressing operation by the effect button 136, the effect button image BT2 and The remaining time meter MT2 may be erased. Further, even if there is a pressing operation by the effect button 136, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT2 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT2 May be erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 214 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 which are displayed overlapping on the pattern PM are erased and the pattern representing the celebrity symbol YM3 is easy to view , And the mode is such that the crown pattern YM1 to YM3 are aligned. Then, as shown in FIG. 214 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c move to the upper left corner of the display screen and "SP reach" is displayed to indicate that the transition has been made. In addition, even if there is a pressing operation by the effect button 136, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT3 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT3. May be erased.

  In the effect example described above, effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed for each decorative symbol, and a plurality of these effect button images BT1 to BT3 are simultaneously displayed, and effect button image BT1 to BT1 each time the effect button 136 is operated. It shows that BT3 is erased one by one.

  Moreover, in the example of an effect mentioned above, although the effect button 136 is pressed and an effect succeeds, the example which changes all the chance symbols into a token pattern and shifts to a super reach was shown, but after chance eye effect is performed When not shifting to the super reach, for example, at least one of the chance symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, Display a change from a chance symbol to a symbol different from the token pattern (for example, a bad key symbol imitating the face of a bad key officer), and notify that it will not shift to super reach, and then, with the combination of the decorative symbols off You may make it stop display.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, for example, the operation is performed by the long press operation by the effect button 136 The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the effect of the effect button 136 by one-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effect of plural times is two of the effects by one-shot operation, effects by long press operation and effects by continuous hitting operation You may comprise by the combination of the above. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be made to carry out one by one according to the continuous hitting operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be in an invalid state.

  In this effect example, when the long press auto-continuous hitting function is in effect, the effect that the chance symbol “B” is changed to the symbol pattern YM2 and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the symbol pattern YM3. Can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode It can be said that it is an example of the first effect that can be started.

  Moreover, in this production example, when the long press auto consecutive hitting function is in an invalid state, the effect that the chance symbol "B" is changed to the symbol pattern YM2 and the chance symbol "C" is the symbol pattern YM3. The effect to be changed is greater when the second operation mode is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the 2nd production which is easy to be started. Moreover, it can also be said that it is an example of the 2nd presentation which is not started only by one operation being performed by the operation means in the 2nd operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect that the chance symbol is changed to the ball pattern as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is the operation in the first operation mode. It can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the means, and is an example of the first effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Can.

  FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of the cut-in effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 215 shows how effects are produced by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. In this effect example, a cut-in effect of displaying a cut-in image is performed each time the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (a), variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special view display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special view fourth symbol t1 is also changed and displayed corresponding to the pattern change display of the first special view display device 212. In addition, the character “PUSH” is displayed on the center left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the effect button image BT1, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, the character “PUSH” is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the effect button image BT2, and the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed on the center right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the effect button image BT3, and the remaining time meter MT3 is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  Further, in FIG. 215 (a), since the numbers of reservations of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both 0, the reserve lamp in the first special view reserve lamp 218 and the reserve in the second special view reserve lamp 220 All lamps are off. In addition, in this example of presentation, although suspension display in decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed, it may be made to perform suspension display as mentioned above.

  Thereafter, for example, when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 indicate that one second has elapsed, that is, the gauge is decreased by one second. It is displayed in the form.

  Then, when one pressing operation is performed by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 215 (c), "PUSH" displayed with the effect button image BT1 displayed on the center left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 And the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. That is, the operation acceptance remaining time of the effect button 136 does not decrease. The update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the operation acceptance remaining time of the effect button 136 may be decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is displayed. The first cut-in image CI1 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is erased and the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the effect button 136 Operation acceptance of is resumed.

  After that, for example, when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 215 (g), an embodiment in which the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 indicate that one second has further elapsed, that is, the gauge It is displayed in a mode of decreasing by one second.

  Then, when one pressing operation is performed by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 215 (h), "PUSH" displayed with the effect button image BT2 displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 And the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. Note that the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the operation acceptance remaining time of the effect button 136 may be decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed. The second cut-in image CI2 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button BT3. Further, in the second cut-in image CI2, the displayed range is expanded in the vertical direction more than the first cut-in image CI1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is erased, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 is resumed. Be done.

  After that, for example, when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 215 (m), an embodiment in which the remaining time meter MT3 indicates that one second has elapsed, that is, the gauge is further reduced by one second Is displayed in the same manner.

  Then, when one pressing operation is performed by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 215 (n), “PUSH displayed along with the effect button image BT3 displayed on the center right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 The remaining time meter MT3 is displayed in such a manner that the word "" is erased and the gauge remains 0 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are erased.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed. The third cut-in image CI3 is an image displayed over the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example of effect described above, an example is shown in which the cut-in image is displayed as having been successfully produced each time the effect button 136 is pressed three times and the effect button 136 is pressed. The cut-in image may be displayed for only one or two of the pressing operations of the button 136, and the cut-in image may be displayed in any of the three pressing operations of the effect button operation 136e. May not be displayed.

  In addition, these cut-in images may be displayed even when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. At this time, the display mode may be different depending on whether the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed or not, or the same display mode may be used.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, for example, the operation is performed by the long press operation by the effect button 136 The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the effect of the effect button 136 by one-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effect of plural times is two of the effects by one-shot operation, effects by long press operation and effects by continuous hitting operation You may comprise by the combination of the above. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be made to carry out one by one according to the continuous hitting operation. At this time, when it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136, the pseudo pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed immediately, so that the remaining time meter can be updated in a state in which the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. In the case of being displayed, it may be possible to display three cut-in images with little change in the display mode of the remaining time of the remaining time meter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be in an invalid state.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect that the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and the effect that the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed are: It can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and can be started also when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode It can be said that it is an example of one production.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, an effect that the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and an effect that the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed Is easier to be started when the second operation is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the second effect. Moreover, it can also be said that it is an example of the 2nd presentation which is not started only by one operation being performed by the operation means in the 2nd operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, the effect that the cut-in image is displayed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 when the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an effective state is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be started when the first number of operations is performed, and can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of the cut-in effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 216 (a-1) to 216 (a-6) show how a single-shot operation of the presentation button 136 is performed during the change display of the decorative symbol, and FIGS. 216 (b-1) to (b-) 6) shows that a single-shot operation of the effect button 136 is performed when the auto button function is in an effective state. Here, the auto button function is a function that simulates a single-shot operation, a long press operation, and a continuous hitting operation even when the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed while the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 is being performed. is there. In the present embodiment, the auto button function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. Also, with the auto button function enabled, according to the contents of the effect using the effect button 136, only one or two functions among the one-shot operation, the long press operation, and the continuous hitting operation are effective. It may be configured to be

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, it is indicated that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. When the effect button 136 is not operated, the effect button lamp 138 may be made to emit light in a specific color (for example, blue). Here, the color to be emitted is not limited to blue, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the second state when it is not in the operation accepting state.

  Since the number of reservations of the variable display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are both 0, the hold lamp in the first special view hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special view hold lamp 220 are all turned off.

  Thereafter, when the gaming ball wins the first special view starting opening 230, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-2), the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, and Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, the character “PUSH” is displayed at the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (a-3), and the remaining time is below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. The color to be emitted is not limited to red, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the first state when in the operation accepting state.

  Then, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (a-4), as shown in FIG. 216 (a-5), the “display button image BT is displayed While the word "PUSH" is erased, the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains 0 seconds.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example of effect described above, after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-5), the character “PUSH” displayed with the effect button image BT is erased. Although the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge remains 0 seconds, such display may not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the outset is displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits green light to indicate that the auto button function is enabled. The color to be emitted is not limited to green, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the third state when the auto button function is in the effective state.

  Since the number of reservations of the variable display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are both 0, the hold lamp in the first special view hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special view hold lamp 220 are all turned off.

  Thereafter, when the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-2), the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the character “PUSH” is displayed at the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b-3), and the remaining time is below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed.

  Thereafter, when a half period of the reception period of the effect button 136 depression has passed, a single-shot operation by the effect button 136 is artificially performed at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b-4) by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-5), the characters “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT are erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge remains 0 seconds. Ru.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example of the effect described above, after the operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-5), “PUSH” displayed with the effect button image BT The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the character is erased and the gauge remains 0 seconds, but such a display may not be performed.

  In the example of the effect described above, a single-shot operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and when a single-shot operation is performed, an example is shown in which a cut-in image is displayed as having succeeded, but even if a single-shot operation is performed The cut-in image may not be displayed as a failure.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by a single-shot operation with the effect button 136, for example, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the result of the operation is displayed You may Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled.

  In the example of the effect described above, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI4) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function is a single-shot operation with the effect button 136 The same as the effect contents to be executed in the case where the effect button 136 is performed, but the effect contents to be executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function is a single-shot operation by the effect button 136 It may be different from the contents of the effect to be executed in the case where it is performed, or may be different.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 216, the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is different between the state where the normal operation of the effect button 136 in the one-shot operation can be received and the state where the auto button function is enabled. Is shown.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of the hold change notice. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in numerical order in parentheses. Figs. 217 (a-1) to (a-7) and Figs. 217 (b-1) to (b-8) show that the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136 and the hold change notice is performed. Showing how

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a-1), in the first special view display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. In the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the variation display is performed as described above, corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212.

  In FIG. 217 (a-1), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is three, the three suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view 1 hold among the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 corresponding to this. The display h11, the second special view 1 hold display h12 and the third special view 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 is not a hold mode Is displayed. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 284 is provided.

  Thereafter, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-2), the number of suspension of the variable display of special view 1 increases to four, and the first special view reservation lamp The four hold lamps at 218 light up. Then, in the hold display area in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 is displayed in a default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-3), animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 is deformed is started. In (a-3) in FIG. 217, an animation is displayed in which the circular icon displayed in the form of a circle extends in the lateral direction and changes into an oval. At this time, the effect button image BTH is continuously displayed, but may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. After that, as shown in FIGS. 217 (a-3) to (a-5), the hold icon extends vertically or horizontally for a predetermined effect execution period (for example, 2 seconds). Animation can be continued.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-6), after the animation that the reserve icon in the fourth special view 1 reserve display h 14 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-7), the reserve icon It changes to the notice display mode which imitated the face of the lord.

  On the other hand, FIG. 217 (b-1) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is shown. At this time, since the number of suspension of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view reservation lamp 218 are on, and the number of suspension of variable display of special figure 2 is 0 Therefore, the hold lamps in the second special view hold lamp 220 are all turned off. On the other hand, the first special view 1 suspension display h11 to the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  After that, when the timing for symbol stop display comes, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols is a combination of the decorative symbols of "off"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 3 "-" decorative 3 "is displayed. Further, in the first special view display device 212, the finalized display result of the removal is displayed, and the special view fourth symbol t1 is also determined and displayed in the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the first special view display device 212 It is done.

  In this state, for example, even if one pressing operation is performed by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-3), the animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 is deformed is Not started. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted during the stop display of the symbols. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted even during stop display of symbols. Here, "during stop display of the symbol" may be during stop display of the special view, or during stop display of the decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b-4), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 is moved to the variation icon display area 284 and then deleted, and the second special view 1 hold display h12 An animation display is performed in which the reserve icons respectively displayed on the fourth special figure 1 reserve display h14 move to the first special figure 1 reserve display h11 to the third special figure 1 reserve display h13.

  After the symbol variation display is started as described above, when one pressing operation is performed by the effect button 136, the third special view 1 suspension display h13 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b-5). The animation display in which the hold icon in the box is deformed is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-5) to FIG. (B-6), the hold icon extends in the vertical direction only for a predetermined effect execution period. The animation display extending horizontally can be continued.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-7), after the animation that the reserve icon in the third special view 1 reserve display h 13 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-8), the reserve icon It changes to the notice display mode that imitates the face of the lord.

  In the example of effect described above, an example is shown in which, when a one-shot operation is performed by performing the one-shot operation, and the display is performed to change the hold icon as having succeeded, the one-shot operation is performed. The display may not be performed to change the hold icon because the effect has failed. For example, when a one-shot operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the default display is displayed again after performing the animation display in which the hold icon is deformed. You may make it perform the production | presentation display used as an aspect.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by a single-shot operation with the effect button 136, for example, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the result of the operation is displayed You may In this case, for example, when the variation display of the symbol ends and the stop display is performed during the long press operation, after the next symbol variation display starts, the production button 136 is pressed again to perform the long press operation. The long press operation may continue to be effective even during stop display of symbols. Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be in an effective state. In this case, for example, when the variation display of the symbol ends and the stop display is performed during the long press operation, the effect button for enabling the long press auto continuous hitting function after the next symbol fluctuation display starts It may be necessary to press the key 136 again, or even when the long press operation is continued even during stop display of the symbol, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be continued to be effective. In addition, the long press automatic consecutive hit function may be disabled. In addition, the auto button function may be enabled to artificially operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect using the effect movable body. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 218 shows how an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the super reach. In the effect example shown in FIG. 218, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 are decorated for the convenience of description. It is shown on the lower right side of the display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 218 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized.

  Since the number of reservations of the variable display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are both 0, the hold lamp in the first special view hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special view hold lamp 220 are all turned off. Moreover, the first special view 1 suspension display h11 to the fourth special view suspension display h14 are displayed in a mode in which none are suspended.

  Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the effect movable body 224 is disposed so as to overlap the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the game ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, and this corresponds. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  Then, after transitioning to the super reach as shown in FIG. 218 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of “press the button” prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (d). Display is done.

  Then, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (e), as shown in FIG. 218 (f), an initial position (first Position) is displaced to a position (second position) indicated by a solid line.

  In the example of the effect described above, an example in which the effect movable body 224 moves as a successful effect when the single-shot operation is performed by performing the single-shot operation by the effect button 136 is shown, but even if the single-shot operation is performed, The effect movable body 224 may be prevented from moving because the effect has failed. In addition, when the one-shot operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves toward the second position, but it may operate so as to return to the first position in the middle of the movement as a failure in the effect.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by a single-shot operation with the effect button 136, for example, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the effect of the operation is produced You may Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be produced. At this time, for example, the position may be gradually changed each time the effect button 136 is pressed, or may be oscillated at the first position, or from the first position to the second position. You may move gradually toward the Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, for example, the display as shown in FIG. 218 (d) is performed and the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. Also, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from the front, the effect movable body 224 moves as the effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed when the operation of the effect button 136 becomes acceptable. It may be configured to After that, when another effect for operating the effect button 136 is generated while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect button 136 is artificially pressed in the generated effect. The result of the operation may be displayed or rendered (in other words, the result of the operation may be displayed or rendered even when the rendering button 136 is continuously hit, and the same operation may be performed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. The result may be displayed or rendered), and the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled so that the rendering button 136 may not be pressed in a pseudo manner. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be in an invalid state.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of effect by single operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 219 shows how a single-shot operation of the production button 136 is performed in reach production.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 219 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. Moreover, in this effect example, the special figure 2 fourth pattern t2 is displayed below the special figure 1 fourth pattern t1. In the special figure 2 fourth pattern t2, for example, the variation display is performed in a mode in which the color represented in the square mark changes to a plurality of types corresponding to the symbol variation display of the second special figure display device 214 It is. As shown in FIG. 219 (a), since the second special view display device 214 is displayed as the display result of the detachment, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special view display device 212. , And the finalized display result (for example, a white square mark) is displayed. In FIG. 219 and below, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbol displayed in the stop display can be recognized, but in fact, the stop is displayed The symbol is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 may be displayed in a mode that can be recognized by the player. In FIG. 219 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 219 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. In this effect example, the timing at which the variation icon h00 is erased is the timing at which the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, but can be set to an appropriate timing, for example, at a timing before the decorative symbol is determined and displayed. It may be present, or it may be timing before the reach effect is started. When the change icon h00 is displayed in the default display mode, it is displayed in the same display mode as the hold icon which is the default display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 219 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (d), “with the effect button image BT prompting pressing of the effect button 136” The text “press” is displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state.

  Then, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (e), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 219 (f). Ru.

  In the example of the effect described above, a single-shot operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and when a single-shot operation is performed, an example is shown in which a cut-in image is displayed as having succeeded, but even if a single-shot operation is performed The cut-in image may not be displayed as a failure.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by a single-shot operation with the effect button 136, for example, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the result of the operation is displayed You may Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. Further, in the above-described effect example, the auto button function may be enabled or disabled.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect by a single-shot operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 220 shows how a single-shot operation of the production button 136 is performed in reach production.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. Further, the second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. Note that the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. In the present embodiment, in the state where the effect button lamp 138 is on, the operation accepting state may basically be set. In this case, even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, the operation may be accepted, or even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned on, the operation accepted may be performed. In addition, when production button lamp 138 is on, it is always in the operation acceptance state, but even when production button lamp 138 is off, it may not always be in the operation non acceptance state. Good.

  Further, in FIG. 220 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, although the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously before the start of the symbol variation display, the long press auto continuous hitting function is in a state of being invalid.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to a change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third special view 1 hold display h13. An animation display to move to is performed. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 220 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (d), together with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The text “press” is displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, at this time, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted. In order to receive the operation, it is necessary to release the pressing of the effect button 136 once and press the effect button 136 again.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 220 (e) to (f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, the timing becomes as shown in FIG. 220 (g). When the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the button 136 has elapsed, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), the cut-in image CI5 is finally displayed.

  In the example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is not operated effectively, the cut-in image CI5 may not be displayed, which is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 219 (f). The cut-in image of the display mode may be displayed.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram for describing an example of effect by single operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 221 shows how a single-shot operation of the production button 136 is performed in reach production.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. Further, the second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. Note that the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 221 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the auto button function is in an effective state, and the character display of "auto setting" indicating that is performed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the effect button lamp 138 is turned off in this example, the green light may be emitted as described above. Further, in this example of effect, although the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously before the start of the symbol variation display, the long press auto continuous hitting function is in a state of being invalid.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284 and then changes to a change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third special view 1 hold display h13. An animation display to move to is performed. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 221 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (d)” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The text “press” is displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, the light emission aspect of green which shows that the auto-button function is an effective state may be sufficient.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 221 (e) to (f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, a predetermined auto button function activation time (for example, the effect button 136) is generated at the timing of FIG. 221 (g). When it becomes a timing when 2.5 seconds has passed since the operation reception state, the auto button function is activated and a one-shot operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 221 (h), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed.

  In this production example, when the auto button function is activated and the rendering button 136 is pseudo-operated, a display different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 219 (f) or 220 (h) is displayed. A cut-in image of an aspect may be displayed.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 222 shows that in the reach effect, an effect by continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 222 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 222 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 222 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (d),” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "Please hit continuously" are displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. That is, the continuous hitting operation effect is started. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed. The continuous hit meter RD is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, and when the gauge is full, the advance effect is executed on the assumption that the effect is successful. It is done.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 222 (e) to (g), when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD did not become full, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed as "Sorry ..." to that effect as the rendering has failed. Is done.

  In the example of the effect described above, the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of performing the continuous hitting operation, an example is shown to display that effect as failure, but the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full. In the case where it is determined that the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice notifying that a big hit will be made may be performed. In addition, it is determined based on the display result of a special figure about whether it is possible to fill up the gauge of continuous hitting meter RD. That is, when it is not possible to fill up the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not be full even if the production button 136 is hit continuously.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, when the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, the advance notice such as the cut-in image or the big hit is announced. Although the notification has been made, for example, even when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means), the notice display such as the cut-in image or the notification notifying the big hit will be made. It may be performed. At this time, the long press auto continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e is invalidated, and when the long press operation by the OK button 137e, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice notifying a big hit will not be performed. Good. Also, the long press auto continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e is enabled, and even if the long press operation is performed by the OK button 137e, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice notifying a big hit may be performed. In this case, if there is a difference in operability between the effect button 136 and the OK button 137e, such as a difference in button size or a difference in stroke, the player can select and operate the button of his choice. There is. Also, since the OK button 137e is smaller than the effect button 136 and does not have light emitting means such as the effect button lamp 138 etc., it is difficult for the player to know whether the OK button 137e is in the operation valid state or not by the OK button 137e. The operation may be, for example, for advanced users who obtain the information through a capture magazine or the Internet. Here, the OK button 137e may be provided on the left side or lower side of the effect button 136 so that the OK button 137e can be easily operated with the left hand.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, when the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, the advance notice such as the cut-in image or the big hit is announced. Although the notification has been made, for example, when the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means) is operated only once, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification giving a notice of becoming a big hit is performed. You may do so. In this case, notification that the effect is performed by one operation of the OK button 137e may not be notified. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a game expert who knows the existence of the back button effect.

  In this effect example, the continuous hitting operation effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and may be referred to as an example of a third effect that urges the operating means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode. it can.

  Further, in the example of the effect, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the effect to be executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the operation means in the second operation mode Thus, it can be said that an example of the second effect is more likely to be started when the second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the one operation is performed. Moreover, it can also be said that it is an example of the 2nd presentation which is not started only by one operation being performed by the operation means in the 2nd operation mode.

  In the example of the effect, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the effect button lamp 138 may be set to the second state during the operation reception period of the effect button 136. That is, the effect button lamp 138 may not emit light, or may emit blue light.

  FIG. 223 is a diagram showing a state in which a long press auto consecutive hit is performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 223 shows that in the reach effect, an effect by continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 223 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 223 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (b), symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 223 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (d)” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "Please hit continuously" are displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed.

  In this effect example, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 223 (d) is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 223 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, when the long press operation is started, one operation by pressing the effect button 136 is accepted, and thereafter, as described above, when the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), A simulated continuous hit operation is started. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 4/6. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD did not become full, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed as "Sorry ..." to that effect as the rendering has failed. Is done.

  In the example of effect described above, an example is shown in which the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the long press auto continuous hitting function, and as a result, the effect is displayed and the effect is displayed. If the gauge of the consecutive hitting meter RD is full for four seconds, it may be determined that the effect has succeeded, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice notifying that a big hit will be made may be performed. That is, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means is artificially operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times (for example, 20 times) It can be said that the effect of is configured to be startable.

  In this effect example, the effect to be executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation mode performed by the operation means in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed. It is possible to start in the case of being called, and it is an example of the first effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed. it can. In other words, in this effect example, the result (first effect) of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation (first effect) is also when the button is long pressed. It can be said that it is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice display such as a cut-in image which is displayed successfully after continuous hitting operation presentation, and the notification for giving notice of becoming a big hit, the production button 136 is operated a plurality of times (first operation It is an effect that may be executed in response to being operated in a mode), and when a long press operation (operation in the second operation mode) of the effect button 136 is performed, a continuous hit operation effect is displayed successfully It can be said that a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice notifying that a big hit will be started may be started.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the notice display such as a cut-in image displayed successfully after continuous hitting operation presentation and a notice notifying that it will be a big hit may be started during the display of the symbol variation display It can also be said that

  FIG. 224 is a diagram showing a state in which a long press auto consecutive hit is performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 224 shows that in the reach effect, the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 224 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is off and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 224 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  In this effect example, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player keeps pressing the effect button 136 continuously before the start of the symbol variation display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 224 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (d)” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "Please hit continuously" are displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 224 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this effect example, since the player has already started the long press operation of the effect button 136, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started when the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 5/6. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 224 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD did not become full, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed as "Sorry ..." to that effect as the rendering has failed. Is done.

  In the example of effect described above, an example is shown in which the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the long press auto continuous hitting function is performed, and as a result, the effect is displayed and the effect is displayed. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform advance notice display such as a cut-in image or to notify that a big hit will be made, on the assumption that the effect is successful. That is, when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect can be started assuming that the operation means is artificially operated the first number of times in the first operation mode It can be said that it is configured.

  In this effect example, the effect to be executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation mode performed by the operation means in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed. It is possible to start in the case of being called, and it is an example of the first effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed. it can.

  FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 225 shows that in the reach effect, an effect by continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is displayed in a definite manner. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 225 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 225 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 225 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (d)” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "Please hit continuously" are displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 225 (e) to (h), when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. Since the effect button lamp 138 is turned off each time the effect button 136 is pressed, and is emitted again in red when the effect is released, it is easy for the player to press the effect button 136. There are cases where it can be recognized. Also, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, light may be emitted in a different color (for example, blue).

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 225 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD did not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that "sorry ..." to that effect as the rendering has failed. Is done.

  In the example of the effect described above, the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of performing the continuous hitting operation, an example is shown to display that effect as failure, but the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full. In the case where it is determined that the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice notifying that a big hit will be made may be performed. In addition, it is determined based on the display result of a special figure about whether it is possible to fill up the gauge of continuous hitting meter RD. That is, when it is not possible to fill up the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not be full even if the production button 136 is hit continuously.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, in which case the effect button lamp 138 blinks only once at the timing when the effect button 136 is pressed first. It is also good.

  FIG. 226 is a diagram showing a state in which a hold change advance notice is performed during an effect by a continuous hit operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 226 shows that in the reach effect, effects are produced by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and the on-hold change advance notice is carried out simultaneously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 226 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 226 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 226 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (d),” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "Please hit continuously" are displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed.

  In this example of the effect, the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 226 (d) is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 226 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, when the long press operation is started, one operation by pressing the effect button 136 is accepted, and thereafter, as described above, when the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), A simulated continuous hit operation is started. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136.

  Further, in this effect example, the game ball enters the first special figure starting opening 230 during execution of the above-mentioned continuous hitting effect, and the number of pending displays of the variable display of special figure 1 increases to 4, FIG. 226 (f) As shown in FIG. 4, the four holding lamps in the first special view holding lamp 218 are turned on. Then, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 is displayed in a default display mode corresponding to this. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. That is, the hold change notice is started. However, in this production example, priority is given to the continuous hitting production being executed, the operation of the production button 136 accepts only the continuous hitting operation related to the continuous hitting production, and the operation of the production button 136 related to the pending change notice is at least the continuous hitting production It is not accepted until the end of.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 4/6. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD did not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that “Sorry ...” to that effect as the rendering has failed. Is done.

  In this effect example, after the continuous hitting effect is finished in this manner, the operation of the effect button 136 according to the pending change advance notice can be received. At this time, with the long-press auto-continuous-stroke function still in the effective state, if the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the hold change notice may be started by the pseudo operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, when the continuous hitting effect is over, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the pressing of the effect button 136 may be required. Alternatively, the continuous hitting effect and the pending change advance notice may be simultaneously executed while the continuous hitting effect is being executed, with the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the pending change advance notice being acceptable. At this time, the operation of the effect button 136 according to the hold change notice may be accepted by the operation of the long press auto continuous hitting function, or after the hold change notice is started, the long press operation of the play button 136 is temporarily performed. It may be configured to be able to execute the hold change notice by releasing and performing the pressing operation of the effect button 136 again.

  In the example of effect described above, an example is shown in which the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the long press auto continuous hitting function is performed, and as a result, the effect is displayed and the effect is displayed. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform advance notice display such as a cut-in image or to notify that a big hit will be made, on the assumption that the effect is successful.

  Further, in the example of the effect, for example, two effect buttons are provided, and in the continuous hit effect, the operation of the first effect button and the second effect button can be received, and the hold is performed only by the operation of the first effect button It may be configured to be able to start a change notice. In this case, for example, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled for the second effect button, the first effect button is operated while the second effect button is operated by pressing the second effect button continuously, and the hold change The advance notice can be started.

  FIG. 227 is a diagram for describing an example of effect by long press operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 227 shows how an effect by long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 227 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 227 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 227 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (d),” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "save meter by long press" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, on the left side of the variation icon display area 284, a long press meter NO is displayed. The long press meter NO is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the cumulative time during which the effect button 136 is pressed, and when the gauge is full, it is assumed that the effect is successful, and the advance effect is executed. It is configured to be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 227 (e) to (g), when the long press operation is performed by the effect button 136, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the pressing time of the effect button 136. . In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at timing shown in FIG. 227 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO is not full and has increased to 5/6. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 227 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, so in the decorative symbol display device 208, assuming that rendering failed, it is "sorry ..." Display is done.

  In the example of the effect described above, the long press operation is performed by the effect button 136, and as a result of performing the long press operation, an example is shown in which the effect is displayed as failure, but the gauge of the long press meter NO is full In the case of a tongue, it may be possible to give notice of a notice such as a cut-in image or a notice of becoming a big hit, assuming that the effect is successful. Whether or not it is possible to fill the gauge of the long press meter NO is determined based on the display result of the special view. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the long press meter NO, the gauge will not be full even if the production button 136 is kept pressed for a long time.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, although the long press auto continuous hitting function is in the disabled state, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the production button 136 is long pressed during the long press effect, the continuous hitting operation may be pseudo-performed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of effect by long press operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 228 shows how an effect by long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 228 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is off and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 228 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special view holding lamp 220 are off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 228 (a), the effect button 136 continues to be pressed continuously before the start of the symbol variation display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 228 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (d)” along with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "save meter by long press" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, on the left side of the variation icon display area 284, a long press meter NO is displayed. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the long press effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted, and the gauge of the long press meter NO does not increase. In order to receive the operation, it is necessary to release the depression of the effect button 136 once and operate the effect button 136 again (long press).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (e), FIG. (F),..., After the effect button 136 continues to be pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, the timing shown in FIG. When the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, the long press meter NO is shown to be zero. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, so in the decorative symbol display device 208, assuming that the rendering failed, it is "sorry ..." Display is done.

  In the example of the effect described above, when the long-press effect is started in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not effectively handled, but the effect button 136 Even when the long-press effect is started in the state of being continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 may be effectively handled.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, although the long press auto continuous hitting function is in the disabled state, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the production button 136 is long pressed during the long press effect, the continuous hitting operation may be pseudo-performed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a state in which the continuous hitting operation is performed in the effect by long press operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 229 shows how effect is produced by the long press operation of the effect button 136 in reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 229 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 229 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 229 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (d), together with the effect button image BT urging pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "save meter by long press" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, on the left side of the variation icon display area 284, a long press meter NO is displayed.

  Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 229 (e) to (g), the player does not perform a long press operation by the effect button 136 but a continuous hit operation. Even when such a continuous hitting operation is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the time when the effect button 136 is actually pressed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 227, since the time during which the effect button 136 is actually pressed is shorter than when the long press operation is performed, the increase amount of the gauge of the long press meter NO is small. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 229 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT remains 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO is not full and has increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, so in the decorative symbol display device 208, assuming that rendering failed, it is "sorry ..." Display is done.

  In the effect example described above, an example is shown in which the continuous pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the long-press effect, and as a result, the effect is displayed as a failure. In the case where it is determined that the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice notifying that a big hit will be made may be performed.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 230 (a-1) to (a-4) show that the conversation announcement effect is executed by operating the effect button 136, and FIGS. 230 (b-1) to (FIG. 230) b-2) shows a state in which a hold change notice in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Here, the conversation advance presentation effect is, for example, an advance presentation effect based on the conversation content of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a-1), in the first special view display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. The decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the variation display is performed as described above, corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 fourth figure t2 is displayed under the special figure 1 fourth figure t1, corresponding to the display result of the 2nd special figure display 214 it is decided and displayed with the display result of out There is. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the variation icon display area 284 is a variation icon h00 having a shape of a six-point star as a notice display mode. .

  In FIG. 230 (a-1), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is three, the three suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, among the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14, the first special view 1 hold display h11 correspondingly. , The second special view 1 suspension display h12 and the third special view 1 suspension display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 is displayed in the non-reserved mode It is done.

  And in this example of an effect, as shown to FIG. 230 (a-1), the effect button image BT which urges | presses the effect button 136 is displayed on the center of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. Further, since the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red. In this example of presentation, the remaining time meter is not displayed.

  After that, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “A reach is expected to be developed along with the character image CH of Little Princess” A balloon FD1 including the characters "Y" is displayed. That is, the first-step conversation announcement is performed. At this time, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the effect button 136 has been pressed. Note that the confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the character image CH of Little Princess and the balloon FD1 (the timing of display and the timing of audio output are determined by the timing of display control, audio output control, transmission and reception of signals, etc. There may be back and forth), and it may be output at a timing earlier than the display of the character image CH of Little Princess and the balloon FD1, or it may be output at a timing later than the display of the character image CH of Little Princess and the balloon FD1. It may be done. Also, the confirmation sound may not be output. Further, in this example of the effect, the character image CH of Little Princess and the balloon FD1 are simultaneously displayed, but the balloon FD1 may be displayed after the character image CH of Little Princess is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-3), the effect button image BT is continuously displayed even after the character image CH of Little Princess and the balloon FD1 are displayed. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that the effect by the operation of the effect button 136 is further performed.

  Then, when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is further performed, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, with the character image GY of the eyebrows, The balloon FD2 including the characters “is displayed. That is, the second stage conversation announcement is performed. At this time, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the effect button 136 has been pressed. The confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the rose character image GY and the balloon FD2, or may be output at a timing earlier than the display of the rose character image GY and the balloon FD2, or It may be output at a timing later than the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. Further, in this example of presentation, the rose character image GY and the balloon FD2 are simultaneously displayed, but the balloon FD2 may be displayed after the rose character image GY is displayed. Then, when the second stage conversation announcement is executed, the effect button image BT is erased.

  It is needless to say that the contents of the character image and the balloon appearing in the speech advance presentation effect are not limited to those described above, and various things can be adopted. In addition, the number of times of preannouncement of conversation to be executed in one preannouncement of conversational announcement is not limited to two, and may be performed only once or three or more times.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 The result of the operation may be displayed by performing the long press operation. Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the effect of the effect button 136 by one-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effect of plural times is two of the effects by one-shot operation, effects by long press operation and effects by continuous hitting operation You may comprise by the combination of the above. Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be made to carry out one by one according to the continuous hitting operation. That is, conversational announcements may be executed one after another at intervals of the pseudo continuous hitting operation. In addition, when the speech advance notice is executed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the above-mentioned confirmation sound may not be output. In addition, the gap between the timing at which the character image and the balloon are displayed in the conversation advance presentation effect and the timing at which the confirmation sound is output may be increased.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the character image and the balloon are additionally displayed for each execution of the conversation announcement, but the character image and the balloon are not added, and only the characters included in the balloon are displayed. May be changed. For example, by the operation of the first production button 136, the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach is expected for development" is performed, and thereafter, the second production button 136 Then, the character displayed in the balloon FD1 may be changed to "I'll make a chance by the appearance of a whistle".

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press auto-continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the second step of the conversation announcement is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a first effect which can be started and which can also be started when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held.

  Further, in the example of the effect, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the second step of the conversation announcement is from the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Also, it can be said that an example of the second effect is more easily started when the second number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. Moreover, it can also be said that it is an example of the 2nd presentation which is not started only by one operation being performed by the operation means in the 2nd operation mode.

  Further, in the example of the effect, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the conversation notice executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation mode by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said that it can be started when the number of operations is performed, and can be said to be an example of a first effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, FIG. 230 (b-1) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is shown. At this time, since the number of suspension of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view reservation lamp 218 are on, and the number of suspension of variable display of special figure 2 is 0 Therefore, the hold lamps in the second special view hold lamp 220 are all turned off. On the other hand, the first special view 1 suspension display h11 to the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. In the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the variation display is performed as described above, corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212. In addition, the special figure 2 fourth figure t2 is displayed under the special figure 1 fourth figure t1, corresponding to the display result of the 2nd special figure display 214 it is decided and displayed with the display result of out There is. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the variation icon display area 284 is a variation icon h00 having a shape of a six-point star as a notice display mode. . In the example of the effect, the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state, but the effect button lamp 138 is off. The effect button lamp 138 may be lit, for example, in red.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (b-1), when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the fourth symbol pattern is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. The special view 1 hold display h14 changes to a hold icon of the advance notice display mode imitating the face of the lady. At this time, the effect button image BTH may be kept displayed.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in numerical order in parentheses. Figures 231 (a-1) to (a-4) and Figures 231 (b-1) to (b-4) show that the effect button 136 is operated during the change display of the decorative symbol. It shows how it is done several times at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 231 (a-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 231 (a-1), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view suspension lamp 218 are on, and the fluctuation of the special view 2 Since the number of pending displays is 0, all of the holding lamps in the second special view holding lamp 220 are off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (a-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 231 (a-3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect are displayed It is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are being performed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Here, the first effect button effect is, for example, an effect that a conversation advance notice effect is executed, and the second effect button effect is, for example, an effect that a hold change advance notice is executed. Further, in this example of the effect, since the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not treated as effective, and the figure As shown in 231 (a-4), the result of the operation is not produced for any of the effect button effects. Note that the first effect button effect may be started at a timing before the start of the second effect button effect, or may be started at the same timing as the start of the second effect button effect. The second effect button may be started at a timing later than the start of the effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 231 (b-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 231 (b-1), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view suspension lamp 218 are on, and the fluctuation of the special view 2 is Since the number of pending displays is 0, all of the holding lamps in the second special view holding lamp 220 are off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (b-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special view 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 231 (b-3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect are displayed It is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are being performed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In this effect example, although the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, the long press auto continuous hitting function is in a valid state. As shown in FIG. 231 (b-4), of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 according to the first effect button effect is displayed. In addition, among the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 according to the second effect button effect may be displayed. As to whether to display the result of the operation of the effect button 136 according to which effect button effect, for example, only the effect of the one started earlier may be performed, or the effect to be executed preferentially is predetermined It may be

  FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 232 shows that another effect of operating the effect button 136 is started while the effect of operating the effect button 136 is being executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the removal corresponding to the display result of the second special view display device 214 Confirmed display. In FIG. 232 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

  Further, in FIG. 232 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in the example of the effect, the variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserve display area of the special view 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the display of the hold icon is performed in the default display mode for all of the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, while the variable display of the special view 1 is started in the first special view display device 212, in response to this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, after the hold icon displayed on the first special view 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, it changes to a change icon h00 having a shape of six-point star as a notice display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special view 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 are the first special view 1 hold display h11 to the third An animation is displayed to move to the special view 1 reservation display h13 of. Then, the fourth special view 1 suspension display h14 displays a suspension icon of a mode that is not suspended.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 232C, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the effect button image BT is displayed at the center of the display screen. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state.

  Then, when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is started, it is assumed that there is one pressing operation by the effect button 136, and as shown in FIG. In the device 208, a balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach is expected for development" is displayed together with the character image CH of Princess Hibi. That is, the first-step conversation announcement is performed.

  Thereafter, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, as shown in FIG. 232 (e), the number of suspension of the variable display of special view 1 increases to four, and the first special view holding lamp 218 Four hold lamps turn on. Then, in the hold display area in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special view 1 hold display h14 is displayed as a hold icon of the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special view 1 hold display h14. The display of the effect button image BTH is an example of a second effect button effect. However, in this example, since the second effect button effect is an effect started after the first effect button effect, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, this effect is The result of the operation of the effect button 136 according to the button image BTH is not displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon FD2 including the characters “The appearance of chance with the appearance of a rose” is displayed together with the character image GY of the rose at the timing of FIG. . That is, the second stage conversation announcement is performed. Then, when the second stage conversation announcement is executed, the effect button image BT is erased.

  In this production example, only the conversation advance announcement effect is executed, and the hold change advance announcement is not executed, but the hold change advance announcement is continuously executed after the conversation advance announcement effect is ended by the long press auto continuous hitting function. Alternatively, after the conversation advance notice effect is finished, the hold change advance notice may be performed by releasing the depression operation of the effect button 136 once and then performing the depression operation again.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of operating the effect button in time with the rhythm. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 233 shows that the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is executed in the super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a), in the first special view display device 212, while the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is being executed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to this, the variation display of the decorative symbol Has been done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 233 (a), the decorative symbol shown in the left symbol display area 208a and the decorative symbol shown in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed with the same "7" symbol, In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation display of the decoration symbol is still performed, and it is in the reach state. FIG. 233 (a) shows a state of transition to super reach after reaching the reach state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "Please press a flowing button in a timely manner", which explains the contents of the presentation, is displayed together with "princess dance SP reach" indicating the type of super reach that has been shifted. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "mode 3" indicating the degree of difficulty of this effect is performed. There are multiple types of difficulty, and for example, it is configured to change according to the degree of expectation for the big hit.

  Further, in FIG. 233 (a), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is two, the two suspension lamps in the first special view storage lamp 218 are on, and the variation display of the special view 2 Since the number of reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special view reservation lamp 220 are turned off. In this example of effect, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Then, after “hime princess dance SP reach” is started, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character image HM dances to music on the left side of the display screen. Animation is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, on the right side of the display screen, display is performed in which the timing image TM including the characters "CHANCE" moves downward from above the display screen, and on the moving path of the timing image TM. The hit image HT is displayed on. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping the hit image HT in accordance with the music.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (c), when the player depresses the effect button 136 at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, as shown in FIG. 233 (d), the timing image TM becomes an effect button. It changes to the result display RS according to the timing of the operation of 136. The result display RS is displayed, for example, in a mode including the character display of “PERFECT” when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT, When the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the specified timing, it is displayed in a mode including the character display of "GOOD", and when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the greatly deviated timing, "BAD" An aspect including the letter display of is displayed. In this presentation example, points are added or subtracted according to the timing of pressing operation of the presentation button 136, and a notice presentation according to the final points is executed. When the operation by the effect button 136 is not performed at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the display is scrolled out below the display screen without changing to the result display RS.

  Note that, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the continuous hitting operation of the pseudo effect button 136 may be performed at constant intervals, and timing other than the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT When the pseudo effect button 136 is operated at the timing of point, points may be subtracted to reduce the possibility of the advance effect being executed. As a result, the player can act as an incentive to operate the effect button 136 at the player's own timing without relying on the long press auto-continuous hitting function, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, only when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT (when the timing is “PERFECT”) or when the timing image is slightly deviated (when the timing is “GOOD”) The presentation button 136 may be configured to be operated in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 234 (a-1) to (a-4) show that the auto button function is released, and FIG. 234 (b) shows that the auto button function is set. FIG. 234 (c) shows how to notify the preferred timing of the operation of the effect button 136, and FIGS. 234 (d-1) to (d-3) show that the auto button function becomes effective. It shows that the back button effect is being performed in the state where the player is playing. Here, the back button effect does not notify that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is validated, but is performed when the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is operated during the period. It refers to a specific presentation. The player may be able to know the existence of such back button effect on a capture magazine or on the Internet. The back button effect is often used mainly for the advance effect, but is not limited thereto. Here, the mode informing that the operation is made effective means, for example, a light emission mode in which the effect button lamp 138 emits light or in which the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is effective. A combination of one or more of a predetermined sound (for example, a sound of “pressing a button”) and a predetermined image (for example, display of a character of “pressing”) It means that. On the other hand, the mode not notifying that the operation is effective is, for example, the light emission of the effect button lamp 138 or the light emission mode indicating that the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is effective. That is, at least one or all of outputting a sound and displaying a predetermined image is not performed. Moreover, the aspect which does not alert | report that operation is validated may be that a predetermined | prescribed image is not displayed at least. In addition, in the case where the N notification means reports that the operation is valid, the aspect in which the notification is not performed by the N notification means is also a mode that does not notify that the operation is effective. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (a-1), the first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the exfoliation confirmed, and the special view first symbol pattern t1 is also the first special view display device 212. The finalized display result (for example, a white circle mark) is displayed corresponding to the display result of. Moreover, since the number of reservations of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is all 0, both the retention lamp in the first special view retention lamp 218 and the retention lamp in the second special view retention lamp 220 are turned off There is. That is, FIG. 234 (a-1) represents the standby state in which the symbol variation is not performed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, it is indicated that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. In this effect example, for example, the auto button setting is performed as described above with reference to FIG. 212, and the auto button function is enabled by simultaneously pressing the left button 137c and the right button 137d in the standby state. It can be set to the state.

  When the auto button function is activated, the effect button lamp 138 emits green light as shown in FIG. 234 (a-2).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 234 (a-3), for example, when the button other than the effect button 136 (for example, the left button 137c) is operated while the auto button function is in an effective state, As shown at 234 (a-4), the auto button function is released. That is, the auto button function is disabled. The auto button function may be canceled by operating the effect button 136 while the auto button function is enabled, or the left button 137 c and the right button 137 d may be pressed simultaneously. May be configured to cancel the auto button function. Further, the auto button function may be canceled also when it is set to "without assistance" or "long press auto-continuous hit" in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), when the auto button function is enabled, for example, the display of "auto button setting" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player is notified of the auto mode. It may be easily notified that the button function is in an effective state.

  The operation in the state where the auto button function is effective is as described above, but for example, as shown in FIG. 234 (c), when the effect relating to the effect button 136 is being executed, the auto button An advantageous timing for operating the presentation button 136 is notified by the function than when the presentation button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner, and when the presentation button 136e is operated at this timing, the automatic button function is performed. An effect different from the effect performed by operating the effect button 136 in a pseudo manner may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136, the image for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. For example, the image for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. When the operation of the effect button 136 is performed without performing the reverse effect, the reverse effect may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (d-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is finalized and displayed. The first special view display device 212 is displayed with the display result of the removal, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in response to the display result of the first special view display device 212. The results are finalized. The second special view display device 214 is also displayed as the display result of the release. Further, in FIG. 234 (d-1), since the number of suspension of the variable display of the special view 1 is one, the one suspension lamp in the first special view suspension lamp 218 is on, and the fluctuation of the special view 2 is Since the number of pending displays is 0, all of the holding lamps in the second special view holding lamp 220 are off. In FIG. 234 (d-1), the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, which indicates that the auto button function is enabled.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (d-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special drawing 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, The variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variation display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the example of the effect, the display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed, but when the effect button 136 is operated, the back button effect can be performed. In addition, whether or not to execute the back button effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the variable display of the symbol, and can be executed on condition that it is determined that the back button effect is to be executed.

  After that, when the activation timing of the predetermined auto button function is reached, the one-shot operation by the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 234 (d-3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display of the cut-in image CI6 as the back button effect is performed.

  The effect example described above indicates that a display prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 is performed even when the auto button function is enabled.

  In the example of the effect described above, the back button effect is performed by a single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but for example, the back button effect is performed by performing the long press operation by the effect button 136 It is also good. Further, for example, the back button effect may be executed by performing a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136. Further, in the example of effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. In addition, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed and operated before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be accepted in the effect, In some cases, it may be possible to see an effect prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. On the other hand, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed and operated before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted in the effect, in that case In some cases, it may not be possible to see the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the example of the effect described above, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI6) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function is a single-shot operation with the effect button 136 The effect content may be the same as the effect content to be executed, or the effect content to be executed when the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated by the auto button function is a single-shot operation with the effect button 136 It may be different from the effect contents to be executed in the case of being sent, or may be different.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example using two effect buttons. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in numerical order in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 235, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are provided as effect buttons, so that effects relating to the effect button are executed according to these operations. It is configured. Here, FIG. 235 (a-1) to FIG. (A-7), FIG. 235 (b-1) to FIG. (B-4) and FIG. 235 (c-1) to FIG. (C-6) Shows that a single-shot operation of the first effect button 136A or the second effect button 136B is performed during the change display of the decorative symbol. In this example of effect, although the shapes of the buttons are made different between the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B, they may have the same shape.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (a-1), variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Note that the first special view display device 121 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special view fourth symbol t1 is also changed and displayed corresponding to the pattern change display of the first special view display device 212. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 235 (a-1), since the number of reservations of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the reserve lamp in the first special figure reserve lamp 218 and the second special figure reserve lamp 220. All the hold lamps in are off. In addition, in this example of presentation, although suspension display in decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed, it may be made to perform suspension display as mentioned above. Note that both the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are extinguished.

  Thereafter, for example, when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that one second has elapsed, that is, the gauge decreases by one second. It is displayed in the form.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-3), although one pressing operation by the first effect button 136A is performed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-4), the result of the operation is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. That is, in the example of the effect, in the operation of the first effect button 136A, the effect that the effect related to the effect button is not executed is executed. In FIG. 235 (a-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are both extinguished, the result of the operation is displayed by any of the effect buttons. In some cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the presentation effect can be improved.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-5), the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B emits red light. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that the result of the operation is displayed by operating the second effect button 136B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-6), when one pressing operation by the second effect button 136B is performed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the effect example described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the second effect button 136B, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed Thus, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing the continuous hitting operation by the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for either one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect according to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. If it is continued, after the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is artificially operated by the long press auto consecutive hit function, and the operation is performed. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed also when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is pressed for a long time. Also, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed, the process shown in FIG. 235 (a Even if the effect relating to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press auto continuous hitting function may not be accepted, and in this case, the effect button After the effect relating to is started, the depression of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the depression of the second effect button 136B may be required again.

  Also, for example, in the case where the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed from before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. After the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long press auto continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do so. Also, for example, in the case where the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed from before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted, in this case , After the effect relating to the effect button is started, the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is canceled once, and the pressing of the second effect button 136B is required. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (b-1), variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special view display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special view fourth symbol t1 is also changed and displayed corresponding to the pattern change display of the first special view display device 212. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 235 (b-1), since the number of reservations of the variable display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is both 0, the reserve lamp in the first special view reserve lamp 218 and the second special view reserve lamp 220. All the hold lamps in are off. In addition, in this example of presentation, although suspension display in decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed, it may be made to perform suspension display as mentioned above. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-2), the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A emits light in red, and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B turns off. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-3), as shown in FIG. 235 (b-4), when one pressing operation is performed by the second effect button 136B in which the effect button lamp does not emit light as shown in FIG. 235 (b-3) The cut-in image CI7 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this example of the effect, the effect button lamp of the effect button for displaying the result of the operation is turned off, and the effect button lamp of the effect button for which the result is not displayed even if the operation is performed In some cases, it is possible to make the player have the unexpectedness of the effect, and to be able to improve the effect.

  In the effect example described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the second effect button 136B, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed Thus, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing the continuous hitting operation by the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for either one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect according to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is performed. If it is continued, after the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long press auto consecutive hit function, and the operation is performed. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed also when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is pressed for a long time. Also, for example, when the second effect button 136B continues to be pressed continuously before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed, FIG. 235 (b Even if the effect relating to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press auto continuous hitting function may not be accepted, and in this case, the effect button After the effect relating to is started, the depression of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the depression of the second effect button 136B may be required again.

  Also, for example, in the case where the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed from before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. After the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is artificially operated by the long press auto continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do so. Also, for example, in the case where the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed from before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted, in this case , After the effect relating to the effect button is started, the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is canceled once, and the pressing of the second effect button 136B is required. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (c-1), variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special view display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special view fourth symbol t1 is also changed and displayed corresponding to the pattern change display of the first special view display device 212. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  Further, in FIG. 235 (c-1), since the numbers of reservations of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both 0, the reserve lamp in the first special figure reserve lamp 218 and the second special figure reserve lamp 220. All the hold lamps in are off. In addition, in this example of presentation, although suspension display in decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed, it may be made to perform suspension display as mentioned above. Note that both the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are extinguished.

  After that, for example, when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that one second has elapsed, that is, the gauge decreases by one second. It is displayed in the form.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-3), although one pressing operation by the first effect button 136A is performed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-4), the result of the operation is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. That is, in the example of the effect, in the operation of the first effect button 136A, the effect that the effect related to the effect button is not executed is executed. In FIG. 235 (c-3), since both the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are extinguished, the result of the operation is displayed by any of the effect buttons. In some cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the presentation effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (c-5), in this effect example, both of the effect button lamps of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B remain off after that.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-5), when one pressing operation by the second effect button 136B is performed, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the effect example described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the second effect button 136B, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed Thus, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing the continuous hitting operation by the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for either one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect according to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. If it is continued, after the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is artificially operated by the long press auto consecutive hit function, and the operation is performed. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed also when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is pressed for a long time. Also, for example, when the second effect button 136B continues to be pressed continuously before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed, the process shown in FIG. Even if the effect relating to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press auto continuous hitting function may not be accepted, and in this case, the effect button After the effect relating to is started, the depression of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the depression of the second effect button 136B may be required again.

  Also, for example, in the case where the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed from before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. After the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long press auto continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do so. Also, for example, in the case where the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed from before the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect relating to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted, in this case , After the effect relating to the effect button is started, the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is canceled once, and the pressing of the second effect button 136B is required. It is also good.

  FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of the character selection effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 236 shows how, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 236 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image Y of the lord is brightly displayed at the center of the display screen and the character image H of the princess is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and a dark blue character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the nephew, and it is informed that the character image Y of the lord is selectable. For example, when the character image Y of the lord has become selectable, when the effect button 136 is operated, the character appearing after the end of the big hit game is determined to be the character of the lord, and the character image H of the princess is selected. When it becomes possible, when the effect button 136 is operated, the character appearing after the end of the big hit game is determined to be the princess character, and when the whale character image G becomes selectable, When the effect button 136 is operated, the character appearing after the end of the big hit game is determined to be a whale character. In addition, below the character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display of "press button to select character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is in the second state.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (b), when one pressing operation is performed by the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 236 (c), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess and The display in which the character image G rotates counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is started. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the eyebrows is displayed brightly, and it is informed that the character image G of the eyebrows is selectable. Thereafter, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIG. 236 (c) to FIG. 236 (f), and as shown in FIG. 236 (f), the character image G of the rose is a decorative symbol display device 208. At the center of the display screen of, the rotation display ends. When the character image H of the princess is made selectable, it can be realized by further performing one pressing operation with the right button 137d in the state shown in FIG. 236 (f). That is, in this example of the effect, the character image H of the princess is the first operation mode in comparison with the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed by the operation means is an example of the first image that is more likely to be selected. It can also be said that the princess character image H is an image that can not be selected only by one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. In addition, when one pressing operation is performed by the left button 137c, display is performed in which the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the wolf rotate clockwise so as to draw a circle.

  In this demonstration example, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during rotational display of each character image, the position at which each character image at the time of operation is displayed remains the same without changing the position at which the character image is displayed. It is possible to perform a character selection cancel display in which the characters are replaced. Note that the character selection cancellation display may not be performed. In addition, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the animation of the rotation display is omitted, and the character image in a selectable state is the position in front of the display screen. If, for example, one pressing operation with the right button 137d is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (c), for example, FIG. 236 (d) to FIG. 236 (e). The animation of the rotation display shown in) may be omitted, and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 236 (f).

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the character selection effect is a first operation that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of selection display.

  Also, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character appearing after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, and only one character image which can be selected is shifted even if the long press operation is performed, so the first selection display In the execution of the operation means, even if the operating means is maintained for the first time or more, it is assumed that one operation is performed by the operating means. be able to.

  FIG. 237 is a view for explaining an example of the character selection effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 237 shows how, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 237 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image Y of the royal crown is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the character image H of the princess is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and a dark blue character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the nephew, and it is informed that the character image Y of the lord is selectable. In addition, below the character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display of "press button to select character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. In this effect example, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is effective, and the player continues to press the right button 137d continuously before the start of the character selection effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is such that the character image Y of the royal crown, the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the rose rotate in a counterclockwise direction to draw a circle It is started. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the eyebrows is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the eyebrows is selectable.

  And in this example of presentation, since pressing down of the right button 137d is continuously performed, continuous pressing operation of the right button 137d is performed pseudo by the long press auto continuous hitting function. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 237 (b) to (e), the above-mentioned character selection cancellation display is performed for each operation (for example, every 200 ms) of the pseudo right button 137d. That is, for example, when the character selection cancellation display is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (b), the display positions of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the nephew are maintained. As shown in FIG. 237 (c), a character image G of a wolf is displayed at the position where the character image Y of the crown character was displayed, and a character image Y of the crown character is displayed at the position where the character image H of princess is displayed. The character image H of the princess is displayed at the position where the character image G of the wolf is displayed. Then, the character image in the selectable state is changed from the wolf character image G to the princess character image H, and the princess character image H is displayed brightly. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the character image H of the princess is selected even when the right button 137 d is continuously hit and the character image H of the princess is selected even when it is long pressed.

  In this production example, even when the long press auto continuous hitting function is effective, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed before the start of the character selection production, the long press auto continuous hitting function In the case where the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long press auto continuous hitting function is not performed, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is selected after the character selection effect starts. It may be necessary to press again. In addition, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be limited. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be effective for each button constituting the operation key unit 137 as well as the effect button 136.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the character selection effect is a second one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of selection display.

  Then, in this example of the effect, the princess character image H can be selected when the third number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display, While the second selection display is being performed, it can be said that it is an example of the second image which can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Also, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character appearing after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display. it can.

  FIG. 238 is a view for explaining an example of the character selection effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 238 shows how, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image Y of the crown is displayed brightly at the center of the display screen, and the character image H of the princess is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and a dark blue character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the nephew, and it is informed that the character image Y of the lord is selectable. In addition, below the character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display of "press button to select character" is displayed. In this effect example, the auto button function is in an effective state, and the effect button lamp 138 emits green light.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is such that the character image Y of the royal crown, the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the rose rotate in a counterclockwise direction so as to draw a circle. It is started. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the eyebrows is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the eyebrows is selectable.

  And in this example of production, it is in the state where an automatic button function is effective, and continuous hitting operation of right button 137d is performed artificially. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 238 (b) to (e), the above-described character selection cancellation display is performed for each operation (for example, every 200 ms) of the pseudo right button 137d. When the auto button function is activated, the continuous hitting operation of the left button 137c may be performed in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 239 is a diagram for explaining an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 239 shows, for example, how a character selection effect performed at the start of a big hit is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character appearing during the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display "select character" is displayed, and an explanatory display in the character selection effect is performed. In addition, the character image Y of the princess is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, the character image H of the princess is displayed slightly dark on the right side of the display screen, and the character image G of the nephew is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen . The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the nephew, and it is informed that the character image Y of the lord is selectable. These character images are displayed in a mode in which a part is covered by the above-described character display. In this effect example, the character in the selectable state can be changed by the operation of the effect button 136, and the character in the selectable state at the end timing of the character selection effect (character corresponding to the character image displayed brightly ) Is configured to be determined as a character appearing during the jackpot game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display of “START” is performed, as shown in FIG. 239 (c), the character selection effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (c), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen together with the effect button image BT urging the pressing of the effect button image 136e under these character images. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In addition, on the right side of the effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT, a balloon including a character display of “Press button to select character” is displayed.

  After that, for example, when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 239 (d), a mode in which the remaining time meter MT indicates that one second has elapsed, ie, a mode in which the gauge decreases by one second Is displayed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (e), when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 239 (f), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess and the princess The display is started to rotate counterclockwise so that the character image G of 描 く draws a circle. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the eyebrows is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the eyebrows is selectable. After that, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIG. 239 (f) to FIG. 2 (i), and as shown in FIG. 239 (i), the rose character image G is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. At the center of the display screen of, the rotation display ends. This operation is performed each time the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during rotation display of each character image, the character selection at which only the character image is replaced without changing the position where each character image at the time of operation is displayed. Cancel display can be performed. Note that the character selection cancellation display may not be performed.

  In the case where the character selection cancel display can be executed, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. For example, after the character selection effect is started, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the long press auto continuous hit function, and as a result, the pseudo effect button The above-described character selection cancel display may be performed every 136 operations (for example, every 200 ms). In addition, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, in this example, when the character selection effect is started, the remaining time meter MT does not stop the update display of the gauge until the character selection effect ends (does not stop the decrease of the character selection effect remaining time) However, while the rotation display of the character image is being performed, the update display of the gauge may be stopped (the reduction of the remaining time of the character selection effect may be stopped). That is, the gauge may be updated and displayed only while any one of the character images of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the nephew is stopped and displayed in front.

  Further, while the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the update display of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT may be stopped. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to suppress the operation of the useless effect button 136 by the player.

  In this example, although the present invention is applied to the selection of a character appearing in a big hit game, for example, a plurality of kinds of music to be output in a big hit game or a normal gaming state, or a plurality of kinds The present invention is also applicable to the selection of stories to be executed during a big hit game from stories.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of selection effect executed during symbol variation display. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 240 shows an example of the selection effect to be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and an effect (treasure box selection effect) of selecting any of the treasure boxes by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d is executed. Showing how

  As shown in FIG. 240 (a), when the treasure box selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a right treasure box image BG1 and a left treasure box image BG2 are displayed at the left and right centers of the display screen, respectively. While the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side and displayed between the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2, the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the icons. The right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 are represented, for example, in light blue, and the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are represented, for example, in white. Then, in the upper part of the display screen, a character display of "Select a treasure box to be opened with the direction key" is performed, and it is informed that the treasure box selection effect has been started. In the upper right corner of the display screen, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In this treasure box selection effect, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated to select the right treasure box image BG1 or the left treasure box image BG2 until the operation acceptance period elapses, and the treasure box selected when the operation acceptance period passes An effect is performed in which an item may appear from the image.

  After that, for example, when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 240 (b), the display indicates that the remaining time meter MT indicates that one second has elapsed, that is, the gage has decreased by one second. Be done. At this time, the operation by the left button 137 c and the right button 137 d has not been performed yet.

  Then, when one pressing operation is performed by the left button 137c, as shown in FIG. 240 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the color of the icon indicating the left button 137c changes from white to red and The color of the left treasure chest image BG2 changes from light blue to red. That is, it is informed that the left treasure box image BG2 is being selected. At this time, a confirmation sound is output once to notify that the button operation has been performed. The audio output timing may be the same timing as the display change timing, or may be a timing after the display change timing, or a timing before the display change timing. It is also good. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 240 (c), it is shown that, for example, 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation reception period.

  After that, when the operation acceptance period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 240 (d), the remaining time meter MT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a mode in which the gauge remains 0 seconds, and the left treasure box image BG2 is displayed. It is displayed in red to notify that the left treasure box image BG2 has been selected.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left treasure box image BG2 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 240 (e), the lid is opened and effect display is performed in which the booklet as an example of the item pops out from inside. . The item appearing from the left treasure box image BG2 is not limited to the above-described booklet, and it is also possible to cause various items such as a princess character HM as shown in FIG. 240 (e1) to appear. Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (e2), the treasure box image is selected, but the lid may not be opened and the item may not appear. In addition, the same item may appear or different items may appear when the left treasure box image BG2 is selected and when the right treasure box image BG1 is selected.

  In the example of the effect described above, one of the left treasure chest image BG2 and the right treasure chest image BG1 can be selected by a single pressing operation of the left button 137c or the right button 137d. It may be Specifically, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 240 (c), when one pressing operation of the left button 137c is performed, the right treasure box image is displayed because the target of selection is a loop. When BG1 is selected and one further pressing operation of the left button 137c is performed in this state, the left treasure chest image BG2 may be selected. Further, in this case, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the target of selection in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. The treasure box may be changed sequentially. At this time, the interval of the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the treasure box which is the target of selection has been changed. Alternatively, the long press auto-continuous hitting function may be disabled, or the treasure box to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed from before the treasure box selection effect is started, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is Alternatively, it may be configured that the pseudo-continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after the treasure box selection effect is started.

  Further, the target of selection does not have to be a loop, and for example, in the state shown in FIG. 240 (c), when one pressing operation of the left button 137c is performed, the target of selection is left It may be configured not to change from the treasure chest image BG2. In this case, only a confirmation sound may be output by a single pressing operation of the left button 137c. In this case, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed, but the selection is made. The target treasure chest image may be configured not to change. Furthermore, in this case, only the confirmation sound may be output for each pseudo continuous hitting operation.

  FIG. 241 is a view for explaining an example of effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the rendering example shown in FIG. 241, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the left image display device 209L at a position overlapping the front of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front of the right edge portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 The right image display device 209R is disposed at a position overlapping with the right. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R respectively function as fourth effect means (second image display means). The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are each connected to, for example, a slide drive motor (not shown) via a link member, and the directions in which they approach each other along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is possible to move to Further, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to, for example, a rotation drive motor (not shown) via a link member, and when they come close to each other, It is possible to rotate along the display surface. Furthermore, the left image display device 209L is provided with a light emitting unit LL in which full color LEDs are arranged side by side on the outer periphery, and the right image display device 209R is provided with a light emitting portion LR in which LEDs are arranged side by side ing. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of a second effect unit. Further, the means for moving the left image display device 109L and the right image display device 209R provided with the light emitting parts LL and LR function as an example of the third effect means (movable means). Further, in the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201), a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission area can be made to appear to emit light in a predetermined pattern. In addition, the light-emitting body which comprises light emission part LL and LR may be not only LED but a lamp, for example, and may apply other light-emitting devices, such as EL. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 241, for the convenience of description, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 are illustrated. It is omitted. Further, even if the long press auto-continuous hitting function is set to be effective, the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated in the example of the effect shown in FIG. That is, the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 241 can be said to be an example of the second effect. In the effect by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 241, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be made effective.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (a), at the lower part of the display screen of the right image display device 209R, variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, the continuous hit effect by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT together with the effect button image BT for prompting the depression of the effect button 136. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (a), it is before the start of the operation effective period, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. Further, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Further, in all of the light emitting parts LL and LR, all the LEDs are turned off. In the present embodiment, all the light emitting parts LL and LR turn off all the LEDs in a normal state, but may emit light in a predetermined mode, for example, in a white state in a normal state You may make it blink. In the present embodiment, an aspect in which all the LEDs in the light emitting parts LL, LR are turned off is also included in one aspect of the light emission aspect.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (b), the characters "Shot continuously hit" are displayed above the effect button image BT, and the effect button lamp 138 emits red light, It is informed that the effective period has started. Then, the player who sees this starts the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136.

  When the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, the light emitting units LL and LR gradually increase the number of light emission from the lower part of the LED according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. At the timing shown in FIG. 241 (c), it is shown that the LED emits light in yellow up to a height of about 1⁄4 from the lower ends of the light emitting parts LL, LR. In this embodiment, such a light emission aspect can be said to be an example of a second light emission aspect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases in accordance with the elapsed time. In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR simultaneously emit the same number of LEDs, but for example, the light emitting unit LL emits light first, and all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LL emit light. After that, the light emission of the light emission part LR may be started, or the light emission part LR is caused to emit light first, and the light emission of the light emission part LL is started after all the LEDs of the light emission part LR emit light. May be In addition, the number of light emission of the LED may be alternately increased between the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR.

  Thereafter, the player continuously hits the effect button 136 continuously, and at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (d), the LED emits green light up to about 2/3 the height from the lower ends of the light emitting parts LL and LR. In this embodiment, such a light emission aspect can be said to be an example of a second light emission aspect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in the area along the light emitting parts LL, LR, and effect display is performed as if the light from the LED influences the image. As described above, the light emission color of the light emitting units LL and LR changes in accordance with the number of light emission of the LEDs, that is, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. In addition, only the number of light emission of the LED may be changed, and the light emission color may not be changed. Further, only the color of light emitted from the LED may be changed, and the number of light emitted may not be changed. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be simultaneous with the timing at which the color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR changes, or the color of the LED may change after the effect image is displayed. The effect image may be displayed after the color of the LED changes. In the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR, but may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be correlated.

  After that, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is further continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (e), all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emit light in red. In this embodiment, such a light emission aspect can be said to be an example of a second light emission aspect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a red effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting parts LL, LR, and effect display is performed as if the light from the LED influences the image.

  After that, when the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (f), indicating that the effect by the continuous hitting operation is successful. A mode in which the light emission color of all the LEDs of the light emitting parts LL and LR changes so that the light emitting parts LL and LR appear to emit light in rainbow color (hereinafter referred to as “rainbow light emitting aspect”) There is a case.) It lights up. Further, in response to this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image which is a display mode as viewed in a rainbow color in the region along the light emitting parts LL, LR is displayed. Note that the timing at which the princess character is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect image in which the effect image is viewed in a rainbow color is displayed, or the princess character is displayed. The timing may be earlier, or the timing when the princess character is displayed may be later.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move in the direction in which they approach each other, and at the position overlapping in front of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 The image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are located closest to each other. In the light emitting parts LL and LR, all the LEDs are continuously lighted in the iridescent light emission mode.

  Then, after the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are integrated and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (h), At the timing shown in FIG. 241 (i), the character of "holiday", which congratulates being a big hit, is displayed across the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. At this time, the decorative symbol during the variable display is displayed in the lower left portion of the right image display device 209R in accordance with the direction of the right image display device 209R.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (j), the light emitters disposed in the vicinity of the side end of the transmission plate member 118 emit light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to perform an effect with depth by the left image display device 209L, the right image display device 209R, and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118. The effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transmission area of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 241 (b) to FIG. (F), the light emission mode of the light emitting portions LL and LR corresponds to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. Although it is possible to see the effect and the effect image that changes accordingly, for example, if the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation after the effect by the continuous hitting operation is started, these effects are not performed, At the timing when the operation effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 241 (g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (g) to (j) without performing the continuous hitting operation, but the light emission mode of the light emitting units LL and LR changes Since the effect or the effect image can not be visually recognized, the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may sometimes contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, the effect that the light emitting units LL and LR are lit in the modes illustrated in FIG. 241C to FIG. It is an effect that may be executed, and it can be said that the effect is not started when the effect button 136 is long-pressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can also be said that the continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 241 (c) to FIG. 241 (e) is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R come close to each other corresponds to the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. It may have relevance with the luminescence mode (luminous color) of luminescence part LL and LR which changed, and may not have relevance. In addition, when the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R come close to each other, the effect by the continuous hitting operation is successful and the continuous hitting operation is It may be different from the case where it is not performed or may be the same.

  Moreover, you may provide the light emission means to which a position changes according to the presentation content besides the light emission part LL mentioned above and LR. In this case, the light emission mode may or may not change in relation to the effect by the continuous hitting operation shown in FIG. 241, or the light emission in relation to the effect by the other continuous hitting operation Aspects may vary. In addition to the above-described light emitting units LL and LR, the light emitting unit may not include light emitting means whose position changes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, the light emitting units LL and LR have predetermined light emission modes (the first light emission mode even during the execution of effects other than the effects by the continuous hitting operation shown in FIG. 241 (for example, effects during symbol variation display or big hit game) Although it is comprised so that it may light, it may be comprised so that it may light only during execution of the production | presentation by the continuous hitting operation shown by FIG. In the present embodiment, the first light emission aspect is a light emission aspect different from the second light emission aspect, but may be the same light emission aspect.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 241, in place of the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R, a shielding device 246 (see FIG. 203) having no image display device may be applied. In this case, The light emitting units LL and LR may be provided to the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, respectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be integrally rotatable, but may be configured not to rotate. Further, although the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be movable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, they may be configured not to move.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two image display devices (left image display device 209L and right image display device 209R) are applied as the second image display means, but one image display device may be used. , And three or more image display devices.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are provided in the rendering device 206 of the game board 200. However, the light emitting units LL and LR may be provided in other than the rendering device 206 of the game board 200. Instead, the front frame door 106 may be provided. For example, instead of the light emitting units LL and LR, the effect button lamp 138 may be applied. In this case, for example, the effect button lamp 138 may have a configuration in which light emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged in a matrix, and the display mode may change according to the continuous hitting operation. In addition, the light emitting units LL and LR may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, when light emission control is performed so that light emission interlocks from the light emitting unit provided on the game board 200 to the light emitting unit provided on the front frame door 106, the rendering effect may be improved. Moreover, any of the light emitting parts of these aspects may be movable by the movable means or may not be movable. In addition, when the light emitting unit provided with the movable unit and the light emitting unit not provided with the movable unit are provided, the light emitting unit that is not movable first is made to emit light, and then the light emitting unit provided with the movable unit emits light by stepping up. The light emission may be controlled to cause the light emission. Further, instead of the light emitting portions LL and LR, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 241 (j) is applied to emit light in the pattern formed in the transmission region It may be realized by changing the mode.

  FIG. 242 is a diagram for explaining an example of the back button effect. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 242, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 functioning as the second effect means are provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 and are lighted respectively It is configured to be able to perform control. Each of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 incorporates a full color LED as light emitting means and is covered by a lens cover. The letter "eight" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL1, and the letter "feet" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL2, and the letter cover is indicated on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL3. The character of "General" is drawn, and the character of "Army" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL4. Further, in the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201), a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission area can be made to appear to emit light in a predetermined pattern. In addition, as a light emission means which comprises effect lamp | SL1-SL4, not only LED but a lamp may be sufficient, for example, and other light-emitting devices, such as EL, may be applied. Further, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 242, for the convenience of description, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 are illustrated. It is omitted. Further, even if the long press automatic double hit function is set to be effective, the long press auto continuous hit function is invalidated in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 242, but the long press auto continuous hit function may be enabled. In this embodiment, in a period in which the back button effect can be performed (an operation reception period for performing the back button effect), it is not notified that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is effective. For example, you may perform a tutorial display that suggests the existence of a back button effect such as “When you operate a button at the time of ...,” etc., and this tutorial display happens to be a back button effect. It may be displayed during a practicable period, or may be displayed intentionally. When the suggestion of the back button effect by such tutorial display is performed, the effect performed by the operation of the effect button 136 or the like may also be referred to as the back button effect, and it is not included in the back button effect It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Further, at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach title TT of "search for a family crest" is displayed in a square frame, and it is notified that the super reach effect is started. For example, a green color scheme is given within the reach title TT. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect button lamp 138 are all turned off. Here, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be turned off at normal times, or may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a mode of lighting in white).

  After that, when the player who knows the existence of the back button effect presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (b), as shown in FIG. 242 (c), the frame of the reach title TT. The color scheme inside changes from green to red. That is, although the notification of the operation of the effect button 136 is not issued, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) in which the reach title TT is displayed, and the effect button is displayed during this period By operating the button 136, the back button effect is performed. In addition, the change of the color arrangement in the frame of the reach title TT may be performed by one pressing operation of the effect button 136, or may be performed when there are a plurality of operations. The operation may be performed when a long press operation is performed for a predetermined time. Also, when the effect button 136 is operated, the color arrangement within the reach title TT frame is changed as the back button effect, but for example, the color of the characters is changed, or the color or display mode of the background is changed. It may be changed. Further, as the back button effect, the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed only once, or the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed each time the effect button 136 is pressed. In addition, by operating the effect button 136 in a state where the reach title TT is displayed, the back button effect may be necessarily performed or may not be performed. For example, the operation of the effect button 136 is performed. A lottery may be performed each time the game is played, and when the game is won, the back button effect may be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 242 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated, a predetermined sound effect may be output in addition to the change in color arrangement within the reach title TT frame. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 242C, even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation reception period, the color arrangement in the frame of the reach title TT may change from green to red. When the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation reception period, the color may be changed to a color other than red. In this case, when the effect button 136 is further pressed, the color arrangement in the frame of the reach title TT may be further changed (for example, green> yellow> red or the like).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, super reach effect is started. When the super reach effect is started, the character display "develop with crest fall" is displayed on the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 225 imitating the crest is above the decorative symbol display device 208 It is informed that the development effect of higher reliability of the big hit is started by falling from the bottom.

  After the super reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 242 (d), the player who knows the existence of the back button effect (back button continuous hit effect) starts the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136, and the predetermined number of times When the pressing operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 242 (e), the effect lamp SL1 lights up in green. That is, although the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, the operation of the effect button 136 is effective during the period (second period) in which the super reach effect is performed, and the effect button is performed during this period. The back button continuous hit effect is performed by the continuous hit operation of 136. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the effect lamp SL1 being turned green, a green effect image is displayed in a region along the lower edge of the display screen, and light from the effect lamp SL1 affects the image. The effect is displayed as if The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be simultaneous with the timing at which the effect lamp SL1 lights green, or the effect lamp SL1 may be turned on after the effect image is displayed, The effect image may be displayed after the effect lamp SL1 is turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the light emission color of the effect lamp SL1, but may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be correlated. Also, the effect image may not be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, although the effect lamp SL1 is turned on by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 and the effect image is displayed accompanying it, the effect image is displayed by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 The configuration may be such that the effect lamp SL1 is turned on concomitantly.

  After that, when the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, the green lamp lights in the order of the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3 and the effect lamp SL4 according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. To start. FIG. 242 (f) shows that all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit in green. Although the display mode of the effect image is not changed, it may be changed, for example, the display area of the effect image may be enlarged according to the number of lighting of the effect lamp. Further, the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, a big hit advance notice may be given by setting the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 to be different from normal.

  After that, when the player continues the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 and the timing shown in FIG. 242 (g) comes, the light emission mode of the effect lamp SL1 changes from green to red. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display color of the effect image changes from green to red, and the display area is also enlarged upward.

  After that, when the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3 and the effect lamp SL4 are sequentially green The light emission mode changes to red. FIG. 242 (h) shows that the light emission mode has changed from green to red for all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4. In the present embodiment, in the back button continuous hitting production, since the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated, lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not started when the production button 136 is pressed and operated. As described above, in the back button continuous hit effect, the effect of turning on the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect of displaying the effect image can be said to be an example of the second effect. Further, the effect image in the back button continuous hit production can be said to be an example of the second display. In addition, in the back button continuous hit effect, the mode in which at least one of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is lit can be said to be an example of the second light emission mode.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined effect time has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 242 (i), the effect movable body 225 disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It moves to a position where it is superimposed on the front of the center of the display device 208. At this time, all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are in the iridescent light emission mode. The descent operation of the effect movable body 225 is not an effect by the back button effect but an effect executed in the super reach effect. Further, the iridescent light emission mode by the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is a light emission mode accompanying the movement of the effect movable body 225, and is different from the back button effect. The timing to start lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 according to the iridescent light emission mode may be simultaneous with the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225 or before the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225 The timing may be after the completion of the lowering operation of the effect movable body 225.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (j), the light emitters disposed in the vicinity of the side end of the transmission plate member 118 emit light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image changes, and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118 is highlighted. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to perform rendering with depth by the effect movable body 225 and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118. The effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transmission area of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 242 (e) to FIG. (H), the light emission mode of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is as the back button continuous hitting effect. Although it is possible to see effects and effect images that change according to the number of times of operation of the effect button 136, when the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation, the operation effective period has elapsed without these effects being performed. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 242 (i), the lowering operation of the effect movable body 225 is performed. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 242 (i) to (j) without performing the continuous hitting operation as the back button operation, but visually recognizes the back button effect described above. Since it can not be done, the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may be able to contribute as an incentive to enjoy such effects.

  Moreover, you may provide the light emission means from which a light emission aspect changes according to the contents of production besides the production lamps SL1-SL4 mentioned above. In this case, the light emission mode may or may not change in relation to the effect by the continuous hitting operation shown in FIG. Aspects may vary. In addition to the above-described effect lamps SL1 to SL4, it may not be provided with light emitting means whose light emission mode changes according to the contents of the effect. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be movable according to the contents of the effect.

  In the present embodiment, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are provided on the effect device 206 of the game board 200. However, the effect lamps may be provided other than the effect device 206 on the game board 200. Instead, the front frame door 106 may be provided. The effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, when light emission control is performed so that light is emitted interlockingly from the effect lamp provided on the game board 200 to the effect lamp provided on the front frame door 106, the effect of the effect may be improved. Further, any of the effect lamps of these aspects may be movable by movable means or may not be movable. In addition, in the case where the effect lamp provided on the movable means and the effect lamp that is not movable are provided, after the first effect lamp is caused to emit light, step up and the effect lamp provided on the movable means is emitted The light emission may be controlled to cause the light emission. Further, instead of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4, the light emitter provided at the side end of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 242 (j) is applied to emit light in the pattern formed in the transmission region It may be realized by changing the mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the back button continuous hit effect is performed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode). It can be said that light emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not started when the effect button 136 is operated for a long press (operation in the second operation mode), which is a certain effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image in the back button continuous hit effect is a display that may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operation in the first operation mode), It can be said that the display of the effect image is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed and held (in the second operation mode).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect that the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are turned on in the back button continuous hit effect and the effect that displays the effect image can be said to be effects that may be started during display of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 243 is a diagram for explaining an example of effect by long press operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 243, in place of the effect button 136, an effect button unit 1360 is provided. The effect button unit 1360 is configured to include a button portion 136P and a jog dial portion 136J. The button portion 136P can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, for example, and the position thereof is displaced in accordance with the contents of the effect. The jog dial portion 136J is formed in an annular shape and disposed so as to surround the outside of the button portion 136P. The jog dial unit 136J can be rotated in the forward and reverse direction by the player along the circumferential direction, and a signal corresponding to the operation amount is the sensor circuit 428 of the first sub control unit 400 (see FIG. 204). Is input to Further, in the rendering example shown in FIG. 243, for the convenience of description, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 are illustrated. It is omitted. The special figure 1 fourth pattern t1 is variably displayed corresponding to the variation display of the figure in the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 2 fourth pattern t2 is a display result of the second special figure display device 214 The stop display is displayed in response to the display result of outliers.

  As shown in FIG. 243 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and a reach state is formed by "decoration 3", and super reach The production is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (a), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy player, the swordsman, is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (a), the game will be decided. It is shown how to do it. In addition, in order to be able to easily recognize the contents of the effect, it may be displayed what the effect result of the big hit is (for example, a character such as "if it wins the swordsman, a big hit" is displayed). Then, in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT imitating the effect button unit 1360, superimposed on the animation of the duel scene. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below, and a notification to prompt operation of the button portion 136P is performed. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the button portion 136P emits light in red. Note that FIG. 243 (a) shows that a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. Then, when the player presses the button portion 136P, as shown in FIG. 243 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen showing that the main character has defeated the swordsman.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the resurrection effect is started, and the character "Reset jog to rewind time" is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the jog dial 136J Inform you to rotate the

  When the player rotates the jog dial 136J according to the display of the decoration symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. There is a case. Here, in accordance with the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J, predetermined effects such as light emission of an effect image or a lamp may be performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts animation of the duel scene again, and displays the deca-button image LBT, which is a large image resembling the effect button unit 1360, A remaining time meter MT is displayed below the large button image LBT, and a notification is provided to prompt pressing of the button portion 136P. In addition, the effect button unit 1360 has the effect that the button portion 136P protrudes and the expectation for the big hit is high. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red. Note that the timing when the button portion 136P protrudes may be the same as the timing when the display of the big button image LBT is started, or after the display of the big button image LBT is started, or the display of the large button image LBT is started It may be before. In the present embodiment, when the display of the big button image LBT is started, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is started, but when the button portion 136P protrudes, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is It may be started. Further, in FIG. 243 (e), the effect button image BT may be displayed instead of the display of the large button image LBT. In this case, the button portion 136P may not be protruded.

  FIG. 243F shows that a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the display of the big button image LBT is started. When the player presses the button portion 136P as shown in FIG. 243 (f), the effect movable body 225 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends as shown in FIG. 243 (g). And move to a position where the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the front. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined effect image is displayed to emphasize that the effect movable body 225 has been lowered.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (h), the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R, which are disposed on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, move to positions where they are close to each other. Form that encloses the left and right sides of the The left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are formed by cutting out a part of a semicircular plate-like member in an arc shape, and have a shape substantially along the outer periphery of the effect movable body 225. In the present embodiment, it is notified that a big hit will be made by the operation of the effect movable body 225, and the player may be able to recognize that a big hit will be made by seeing this effect. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 243 (g) to (h) may not necessarily be performed. For example, even when the button portion 136P is operated, the effect movable body 225 does not move downward, and is removed. The result may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are retracted to the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 225 is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is shown showing that the main character has won the swordsman.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the long press auto continuous hitting function is made effective in the sword strike reach production, and after the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c) is performed, the jog dial 136J is not rotated, As shown in d '), the effect shown in FIG. 243 (e) may be performed also by rotating the jog dial 136J by long-pressing the button portion 136P.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing the long press operation with the button portion 136P, it is configured that the predetermined effect is started on the assumption that the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the predetermined operation by the operation device other than the effect button is substituted by the long press operation of the effect button. As other operation devices other than an effect button, a touch panel, a touch sensor, etc. are mentioned, for example. For example, in the case of a touch sensor, when an operation is performed such as rubbing the hand on the sensor to perform an effect requiring repeating detection / non-detection of the sensor a plurality of times, this operation is long pressed on the effect button It may be substituted by operation.

  Further, instead of the long press operation of the effect button, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled by the long press operation by an operation device other than the effect button. For example, the long press operation on the touch panel, touch The sensor may be configured to exhibit a long press auto hit function by long time detection of the sensor.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 244, for the convenience of description, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 are illustrated. It is omitted. FIGS. 244 (a1) to (e1) show that the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is being executed in the super reach. In this super reach, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is set, the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, but the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (a1), in the decoration symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a reach state is formed by "decoration 3". SP reach) production is being performed. In the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "step 1" indicating the degree of difficulty of this effect is performed. There are a plurality of types of difficulty, and for example, the degree of difficulty is configured to be changed according to the degree of expectation for a big hit and the degree of success of the rendering in the princess dance SP reach.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244 (a1), a display in which the timing image TM including the characters "CHANCE" is moved downward from the upper side of the display screen is performed on the right The hit image HT is displayed on the moving path of the timing image TM. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping the hit image HT in accordance with the music. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red, and notifies that the operation accepting state is in progress.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 244 (b 1), the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136. Then, the long press automatic continuous hit function is activated, and the continuous hit operation of the pseudo effect button 136 is performed at constant intervals regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. In addition, during operation of the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the operation of the pseudo effect button 136 may be performed only at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. On the other hand, in the case of a skilled player, a game for beginners, such as pressing and holding the production button 136 to activate the long-press auto-continuous hitting function, is not performed, and the production button is performed at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. It is also possible to aim for a high score by playing the game operating the 136. Note that the playing method of this “Himesama Dance SP Reach” is the same as that shown in FIG. 233 and described above.

  After that, the game of the first turn in the princess dance SP reach ends, and the result of the play on the first turn is determined. If the determination result is the determination result of level up, as shown in FIG. 244 (c1), the character display "NICE" is performed, and notification that the degree of difficulty shifts to "step 2" is notified. . At the timing shown in FIG. 244 (c1), the effect button lamp 138 is extinguished because it is outside the operation effective period.

  After that, the game with the difficulty level "step 2" is started. FIG. 244 (d1) shows that the game with the difficulty level "step 2" is being performed. Thereafter, when the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (e1), the long press auto continuous hit function is activated again, and the continuous hit operation of the pseudo effect button 136 is resumed. .

  In the present embodiment, a period during which the long press auto-continuous hitting function is valid is repeated, but, for example, a first period during which the long press auto-continuous hitting function is effective (for example, FIG. Second period (eg, for example, a period shown in FIG. 244 (c1)) in which the long press automatic double hit function is effective (eg, the period shown in b1)) If a long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed over the period shown in FIG. 244 (d1) to FIG. 244 (e1), the second after the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated. In the period of, unless the production button 136 is pressed again, the long press automatic double hit function is configured not to be effective. In the case where the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed from the first period to the second period across the interval period, the long press auto operation may be performed in the second period without pressing the effect button 136 again. The continuous hitting function may be enabled.

  FIGS. 244 (a2) to (d2) show an example of the operation when the premiere up mode is selected on the effect customization setting screen as described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 244 (a2) shows that the premier up mode is set as shown in FIG. 211 (h1) and described above.

  As described above, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started after being set in the premier up mode, as shown in FIG. 244 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image that urges pressing of the effect button 136 The characters "double hit" are displayed at the center of the screen together with BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In the continuous hitting operation effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective. When the player recognizes that the continuous hitting operation effect has been started, the player starts the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when a plurality of operations are performed by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. A premier notice may be displayed that indicates that the jackpot has been finalized. In the present embodiment, this premier notice is more likely to occur by being set to the premier up mode, and when it is set to a mode other than the premier up mode on the effect customization setting screen, a notice other than the premier notice Is more likely to occur.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (d2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mission achievement display indicating mission achievement is displayed. The mission achievement display is like a history of effect generation display (to be displayed here as “NO 92: steel plate preview has been displayed”) displayed so far. In addition, you may make it be displayed for a long time, so that the production | generation generation display corresponding to the production | presentation with a high expectation degree is. On the other hand, the effect generation display corresponding to the effect with a low degree of expectation may disappear immediately, and may be displayed over the next to the next when the effect is executed next to next. Furthermore, a display indicating the degree of expectation of the effect and the appearance frequency may be attached to the effect generation display, and for example, a rank display of A rank to C rank may be attached. In addition, this mission achievement display may be a display for opening a hidden effect for membership service. That is, for example, by performing the premiere preview shown in FIG. 244 (c2), a specific hidden effect (for example, a specific character can be selected, etc.) becomes executable, and the mission is achieved. It may be displayed by display.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting to the premier up mode, it becomes easy to generate a premier notice, so, for example, when points as a game history of a player are easily accumulated or a mission is given. In some cases, missions can be easier to accomplish.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the menu screen described above with reference to FIGS. 211 to 212, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is pressed once to move the cursor CL, and transition of the setting screen. It makes it easy to generate a premier notice (premium effect) as a benefit of the effort of setting the mode to the premier up mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the result set on the menu screen described above is reflected in the effect that the long press auto continuous hitting function is effective.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of chance eye effect presentation. The following figure shows how the presentation proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 245 shows a state of transition to super reach after an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times in the chance effect effect is performed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 244, for the convenience of description, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 are illustrated. It is omitted. Further, in this chance effect production, even when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalidated, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a1), after the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, the left symbol display region 208a is displayed. The chance symbol "A" which constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the chance symbol "B" which constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" which constitutes a part of is stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol which is a chance eye. Then, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e in such a manner as to overlap the chance symbol "A" stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. A remaining time meter MT1 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap with the chance symbol "B" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e in such a manner as to overlap the chance symbol "C" stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT3. Thus, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a1), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to recognize the number of times the presentation button 136 should be pressed since the chance effect presentation was started. In the present embodiment, as for the effect that makes it possible to recognize the number of times the pressing operation of the effect button 136 should be performed, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is invalidated in order to make the player perform a careful operation. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 245 (a1), the symbol pattern YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order in place of the chance symbol every time the operation is performed. May be FIG. 245 (b 1) shows that the display pattern 208 is displayed in such a manner that three domed patterns YM 1 to YM 3 are aligned. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in a mode in which three of the crown patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned in this way is an example of a second display (second effect). On the other hand, for example, a display in the form of only the crown pattern YM1 displayed in the middle of a plurality of operations, a display in which the crown pattern YM1 and the crown pattern YM2 are displayed in a row, and the crown pattern YM3 is not represented Can be said to be a display other than the second display. That is, an effect (output of sound effects, etc.) is performed for each operation of the effect button 136, and a second display (second effect) is displayed (or executed) after being performed a plurality of times. It can be said.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 245 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the cut-in effect including the character display of “heat” is performed, the super reach effect is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (d1) It is started. In addition, in the chance eye effect, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which three crown patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are aligned. Also, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d1) is started without performing the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1). In addition, in the chance eye effect, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which three crown patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are aligned. After the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1) is performed without performing the above, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d1) may be started.

  In this manner, in the chance-eye effect shown in FIG. 245 (a1) to (d1), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the celebrity symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are displayed. In some cases, it is possible to view the display in a mode in which three are aligned. In other words, when the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in a mode in which three of the crown patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned. The same can be said for the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1).

  In addition, for example, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times in the chance effect production, in a mode in which three domed patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are aligned. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long press auto-continuous hitting function is invalidated, the advanced player can view the effect earlier than the beginner by performing the operation of the effect button 136 multiple times quickly. So you may be able to feel a sense of accomplishment more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a2), after the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display region 208a. The chance symbol "A" which constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the chance symbol "B" which constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" which constitutes a part of is stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol which is a chance eye. Then, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e in such a manner as to overlap the chance symbol "A" stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. A remaining time meter MT1 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap with the chance symbol "B" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e in such a manner as to overlap the chance symbol "C" stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT3. Thus, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a2), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to recognize the number of times the presentation button 136 should be pressed since the chance effect presentation was started. In the present embodiment, as for the effect that makes it possible to recognize the number of times the pressing operation of the effect button 136 should be performed, the long press auto-continuous hitting function is invalidated in order to make the player perform a careful operation. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 245 (a2), the symbol pattern YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order in place of the chance symbol every time the operation is performed. May be FIG. 245 (b 2) shows a state in which three in-figure patterns YM 1 to YM 3 are displayed in a row in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the effect button 136 is pressed once more There is a button operation additional effect to urge you. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1), the characters "Earse and press" are displayed above the display in the mode in which three high-profile symbols YM1-YM3 are aligned , A predetermined effect image is displayed. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red to notify that the operation effective period has started.

  Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (c2-2), as shown in FIG. 245 (d2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, super reach effect is started However, at this time, the wording of "super heat" is added to indicate that the reliability against the jackpot of this super reach production is high. In addition, in the chance eye effect, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which three crown patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b2) are aligned Also, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d2) is started without performing the button operation additional effect shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1) to the same figure (c2-2). In this case, for example, it is not necessary to add the character display of "super heat".

  In this way, in the chance-eye effect shown in FIG. 245 (a2) to FIG. (D2), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the celebrity symbols YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. In some cases, it is possible to view the display in a mode in which three are aligned. In other words, when the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in a mode in which three of the crown patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned. The same can be said for the button operation additional effect shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1) to (c2-2) in FIG.

  In addition, for example, in the case of the chance eye effect, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, in a mode in which three domed patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long press auto-continuous hitting function is invalidated, the advanced player can view the effect earlier than the beginner by performing the operation of the effect button 136 multiple times quickly. So you may be able to feel a sense of accomplishment more.

  Further, in this production example, after the notification that the number of times of operation of the production button 136 has been recognized has been made in advance, further production is performed to operate the production button 136, so the number of times for operating the production button 136 should be clear from the beginning In some cases, the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing another display example of the menu screen. FIG. 246 shows how various settings are performed on the menu screen that can be executed, for example, in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-out decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown, the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed as the display result of the removal, and the special view 1 fourth symbol t1 is also the display result of the first special view display device 212. The stop display is displayed in response to the display result of outliers. Further, since the number of reservations of the variable display of the special view 1 is 0, the first special view 1 suspension display h11 to the fourth special view suspension display h14 are displayed in a mode in which none are reserved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), a special figure 1 reserve number display portion 281A is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen, which represents the reserve number of the variable display of special figure 1 by a number. The special figure 1 pending number display portion 281A displays “0” indicating that the pending number is 0. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), the effect display of the standby state is performed.

  Further, the upper part of the display screen displays an icon representing the effect button 136 and the characters “display the menu screen”, and informs that it is possible to shift to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  When one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 246 (b). Specifically, on the menu screen, "volume light amount adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light amount, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by inputting the password, and the player's game history are acquired Three menus of "playing game history" are displayed to be selectable. Below these menus, the characters "Select" are displayed with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters "Determine" with the icon of the effect button 136 are displayed on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the cursor CL is moved, and by operating the effect button 136, it is informed that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed. In this effect example, the "game history" menu is a display that can be selected by operating the right button 137d twice. If the long press auto hit function is disabled, the first menu is selected. During execution of the selection display, the case where the second number of operations are performed by the operating means in the first operation mode than in the case where one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode Can be said to be an example of the first image that is easy to be selected. Further, in this presentation example, the menu screen can be said to be an example of a first selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  In this menu screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval of the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the menu to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, or the menu to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed before shifting to the menu screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. After shifting to the menu screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again.

  As described above, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 246 (c). That is, on the upper part of the display screen, an "adjustment screen" indicating that the volume and the light amount can be adjusted is displayed, and below that, there are 11 levels of 0 to 10 gauges indicating the volume, The brightness of the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542 are displayed, and the gauges of 0 to 10 steps are displayed. And under the gauges, the characters "Change in" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and on the right side thereof, the characters "Determining" with the icon of the effect button 136 are displayed By operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the setting for the item (volume and light amount) indicated by the cursor CL can be changed, and by operating the effect button 136, the changed volume setting And while it determines so that production | presentation will be performed by light volume setting, it is alert | reported that an adjustment screen can be complete | finished. In this adjustment screen, the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or light quantity by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the cursor CL is moved to the volume or light quantity by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. After setting, the setting can be changed in the direction to decrease the volume or light quantity each time the left button 137 c is pressed, and the setting is changed to increase the volume or light quantity each time the right button 137 d is pressed. be able to.

  In this adjustment screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed continuously, the volume and light amount are adjusted according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. You may be able to change the setting of. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the setting of the volume and the light amount may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137 c and the right button 137 d. In addition, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed before shifting to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. After shifting to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again. Similarly, the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b may have the long press automatic consecutive hit function activated or not.

  In this effect example, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, the display for performing the volume setting can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. Can be said to be an example of the first selection display. Then, for example, when the setting is “0” in the volume setting, the display mode of the setting “10” is one time by the operation means in the second operation mode while the first selection display is being performed. It can be said that an example of the first image in which the second number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode can be said to be an example of the first image more easily than when the operation is performed, and the volume setting The audio output performed with “10” can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. The same applies to the light amount setting.

  Further, when “membership registration” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. 246 (d). That is, at the top of the display screen, "Please enter password" is displayed on the upper part of the display screen, and at the lower part of the screen, a 4-digit input for displaying the entered characters is displayed. A character display area is provided. Then, below the input character display area, an alphabet from A to Z and a cursor UB as an underline display mode are displayed. The cursor UB points to any one of the alphabets A to Z, and points to “S” on the display screen shown in FIG. 246 (d). In this password input screen, the cursor UB moves when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are pressed, and when the effect button 136 is pressed, the cursor UB is pointing The alphabet is displayed in the input character display area with the alphabet as the input target character. When the input password is correct as a result of inputting alphabets in the 4-digit input character display area, the game history corresponding to the input password is input. When the password input screen is ended, for example, it can be executed by pressing the cancel button 136f.

  In this password input screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the pseudo mode The cursor UB may be moved in accordance with the continuous hit operation. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the cursor UB can be moved only for each pressing operation of the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c and the right button 137d. It may be done. In addition, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed from before the transition to the password input screen. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is configured to be performed by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the password input screen without performing the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the password input screen is a first screen capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed by the cursor UB is "S", the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet "K" is the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. An example of a first image that is more likely to be selected when the second operation is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed once by the operating means. Can.

  Further, in this effect example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, the password input screen can select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of the two selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed by the cursor UB is "S", the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet "K" is the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected when the third number of operations are performed by the operation means, and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display It can be said that it is an example of the selectable second image. In other words, it can be said that the display mode indicating the alphabet "K" is displayed even when the left button 137c is continuously hit, and the display mode indicating the alphabet "K" is displayed also when the left button 137c is long pressed.

  In addition, when “game history” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a code issue screen as shown in FIG. 246 (e). That is, on the upper part of the display screen, a "code issuing screen" is displayed to the effect that the game history can be acquired by reading a two-dimensional code with a portable terminal or the like equipped with an imaging means. , A two-dimensional code CD in which a player's game history is coded is displayed, and a character display of “please read” for prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code CD is performed. In this effect example, the code issuance screen can be said to be an example of effects that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  The menu selectable on the menu screen described above is not limited to the one described above, and various menus can be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (f), a favorite selection screen may be displayed for selecting a character to be made to appear in a big hit or in the normal gaming state. That is, in the favorite selection screen, the display of the “favorite selection screen” to the effect that the character can be selected is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and “Chara A” for making the character A appear below it. , And "Chara B" for causing the character B to appear and "Cara C" for causing the character C to appear. Below these selection items, the characters "Select" are displayed with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters "Determine" with the icon of the effect button 136 are displayed on the right side thereof. It is informed that by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the cursor CL is moved, and by operating the effect button 136, the character indicated by the cursor CL can be made to appear.

  On this favorite selection screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the left button 137 c or the right button 137 d is continuously pressed continuously, the cursor CL in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval of the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, or the selection item to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed from before the transition to the favorite selection screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed Alternatively, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the favorite selection screen.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, the favorite selection screen is a first screen capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of selection display. And, while the first selection display is being executed, the selection item of “Chara C” is the operation means in the first operation mode than in the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is more likely to be selected. Then, the effect by the character C appearing with “Chara C” selected can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in the example of the effect, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, the favorite selection screen can select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of the two selection display. Then, the selection item of “Chara C” can be selected when the third number of operations are performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display, and the second While the selection display is being performed, it can be said to be an example of a second image which can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Then, the effect by the character C appearing with “Chara C” selected can be said to be an example of a fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 246 (g), a song selection screen for selecting a song to be output in the middle hit or in the normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the song selection screen, it is possible to select from three selection items: "Song A" for outputting the music A, "Song B" for outputting the music B, and "Song C" for outputting the music C Is displayed on. Below these selection items, the characters "Select" are displayed with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters "Determine" with the icon of the effect button 136 are displayed on the right side thereof. It is informed that by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the cursor CL is moved, and by operating the effect button 136, the music indicated by the cursor CL can be output.

  In this music selection screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed continuously, the cursor CL in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval of the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, or the selection item to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed from before the transition to the music selection screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed Alternatively, the virtual continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the music selection screen.

  Note that the music selection screen shown in FIG. 246 (g) may be executed, for example, in the jackpot start effect.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, the music selection screen is a first screen capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of selection display. And, while the first selection display is being executed, the selection item of "Song C" is operated in the first operation mode as compared with the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is more likely to be selected. Then, the music piece C, which is output when "the music piece C" is selected, can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this example, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, the music selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means. It can be said that it is an example of the two selection display. Then, the selection item of "Song C" can be selected when the third number of operations are performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display, and the second While the selection display is being performed, it can be said to be an example of a second image which can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Then, the song C, which is output after “Song C” is selected, can be said to be an example of a fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (h), a customization screen for individually setting various settings in the game may be displayed. That is, on the upper part of the display screen is displayed a "customization screen" to the effect that various settings in the game can be set individually, and below that, functions 1, 2 and 3 are displayed. Each setting item of ... and setting contents for each setting item are displayed. And under these displays, the characters "Select" are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and further, "Changed" together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d on the right side thereof. Is displayed, and the user can change the setting of the function selected by the left button 137c and the right button 137d by selecting the function to change the setting by pressing the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. It has been informed. The selected function is enclosed in a bold frame.

  In this customization screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed continuously, a thick frame is displayed in accordance with the pseudo continuous pressing operation You may make it move. At this time, the interval of the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) by which the player can easily recognize that the function to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, or the function to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. In addition, in the case where the long press auto continuous hit is enabled, the pseudo continuous hit operation is not performed if the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b continues to be pressed from before switching to the customization screen After transitioning to the customization screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b again.

  Also, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed continuously while the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, the setting can be changed according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, or the function may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, in the case where the long press auto continuous hit is enabled, the pseudo continuous hit operation is not performed if the left button 137c or the right button 137d continues to be pressed from before the transition to the customization screen. After shifting to the customization screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again.

  When the various setting screens shown in FIG. 246 (b) to FIG. 246 (h) are displayed, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d or the effect button 136 is long pressed. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 etc. is started, the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled and the operation is performed. The pseudo continuous hitting operation of the button may be performed, or the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long press auto continuous hitting function may be performed under the condition that the button is pressed again after the effect is started. And the long press auto-continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Also, although various setting screens shown in FIG. 246 (b) to FIG. 246 (h) are configured to be displayed on the full display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, FIG. The various setting screens shown in FIG. 24 (h) may be smaller than the entire display screen, and may be superimposed on the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 246 (a).

  In addition, in the effect display of the standby state shown in FIG. 246 (a), when one pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, without passing through the display of the menu screen shown in FIG. 246 (b), For example, various setting screens as shown in FIG. 246 (c) to FIG. 246 (h) may be directly displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set in advance whether or not to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function. For example, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 246 (b), a setting menu for ON / OFF of the long press auto continuous hitting function is provided, and in this setting menu, the rendering button is performed on the condition that the long press auto continuous hitting function is ON. If the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled when the long press 136 is pressed and the long press auto continuous hitting function is turned off, the long press auto continuous hitting function is not enabled even when the production button 136 is pressed long You may do so. Also, the ON / OFF setting of the long press auto continuous hitting function may be set by a predetermined operation by the operation key unit 137.

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, when performing the continuous hitting operation effect, if the effect button 136 is continuously hit, a moving image may be displayed such that the effect button image is also continuously hit accordingly. In addition, when performing long press operation effect, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time, a moving image may be displayed as if the effect button image is also long pressed accordingly. In addition, when the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by the long press auto continuous hitting function being effective and the long pressing by the effect button 136, the effect button image is not the long press according to this, and the continuous hitting is performed. A moving image as shown may be displayed, or a moving image as if held down may be displayed. The moving image display according to such an operation may be applied not only to the effect button 136, but also to the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 246, for example, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. It may apply to the icon of.

  FIG. 247 is a view showing how initial setting of the effect movable object is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 247, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), the effect movable object GM1 is provided on the game board 200, and the position shown by the chain line in the figure (the decorative symbol display device 208 It is configured to be able to move from the upper side and a position not overlapping the decorative symbol display device 208) to a position shown by a solid line (a position overlapping with the decorative symbol display device 208). Further, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect movable member GM2 is provided at the lower left of the front frame door 106, and the effect movable member GM3 is provided at the upper right of the front frame door 106. The effect movable member GM2 is rotatably attached to the front side with the pivot support shaft side of the front frame door 106 as a support axis, and the effect movable member GM3 is supported along the upper end side of the front frame door 106 A shaft is provided, and the support shaft is pivotally mounted upward as a support shaft. These effect movable members GM1, GM2, GM3 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor.

  In order to operate the effect movable members GM1, GM2, and GM3 normally, it is necessary to perform an initial operation to recognize an initial position. However, the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 provided on the front frame door 106 may, for example, be hit by a game clerk by being operated at an unintended timing of a game clerk performing an opening work. The effect movable members GM2 and GM3 need to be initially operated at the timing intended by the game clerk.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the effect movable member GM1 provided on the game board 200 that is unlikely to hit the gaming clerk Is done. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), when a long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed within one minute after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), The initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is performed. As a result, there is a possibility that it may be possible to reduce the possibility of the game clerk being hit by the effect movable member performing the initial operation during the opening work of the game clerk.

  Here, in order to perform the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3, a long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, and in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed continuously, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started When the effect relating to the operation of the effect button 136 described above is started, the long press auto continuous hit function may be enabled to perform a pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, After the effect is started, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by the long press auto continuous hitting function on condition that the production button 136 is pressed again, or even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. Good.

  Although the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is started by the long press operation by the effect button 136, the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136 Alternatively, the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 may be started by the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136.

  In addition, only a part of the selection effects described above may be activated with the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, or the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated with respect to all of them. Further, only a part of the selection effects described so far may not be enabled for the auto-continuous hitting function, or may not be enabled for all.

  In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times while the front frame door 106 is open, a specific menu for setting by the gaming staff may be configured to be executable. In this case, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled or may be enabled.

  In addition, the above-mentioned long-press auto-continuous hitting function may be made effective over plural symbol variations, or invalid when symbols are stopped and displayed, it is effective to span plural symbol variations. May not function.

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of effect buttons are provided, the operation with respect to the other effect button is not accepted when the continuous effect of the pseudo effect button is being performed by the long press auto continuous hitting function for one effect button. Alternatively, the acceptance of the operation for one of the effect buttons may be resumed after the acceptance of the operation for one of the effect buttons is temporarily stopped and the operation for the other effect button is accepted.

  Further, for example, in addition to the effect button 136, a lever for effect, a touch sensor or the like may be provided, and the long press auto continuous hitting function or the auto button function may be enabled for the lever or touch sensor for effect.

  In addition, for example, the effect that the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated may be made to have regularity, for example, the effect that the long press auto continuous hitting function becomes effective is not performed after the start of the super reach effect You may In addition, after the start of the super reach effect, a continuous hit effect may be performed.

  In addition, among the continuous hit effects that can be performed, the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hit function is invalidated may be more or less than the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hit function is effective. May be

  In addition, the expectation for the big hit may be higher or lower for the effect for which the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated than the effect for which the long press auto continuous batting function is enabled.

  In addition to the second effect, the N-th effect may be an effect in which the long press auto-continuous hitting function is invalidated.

  In addition to the first effect, the M-th effect may be an effect in which the long-press auto-continuous-stroke function is effective.

  In addition, the effect for which the long press auto consecutive hit function is invalidated may be only the second effect.

  In addition, the effect for which the long press auto consecutive hit function is effective may be only the first effect.

  Further, for example, the long press auto-continuous hitting function may be enabled as to what is determined to be displayed as a result of the operation.

  In addition, in the effect in which the character display of "continuous hit" is performed, the long press auto continuous hit function may be enabled.

  In addition, for the continuous hitting operation effect (or multiple operation effects) related to the success or failure of the big hit, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be made effective.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, for example, effects such as effects may be performed in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the long press auto continuous hitting function, but such effects are real It can be said that the effect is different from the first effect in the invention. In other words, the first effect can be said to be the effect displayed as a result of the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the long press auto continuous hitting function.

  In addition, in the continuous hitting operation production in which the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated, for example, the effect presentation may be performed according to the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) of the presentation button 136 by the player. Can be said to be an effect different from the second effect in the present invention. In other words, the second effect can be said to be an effect displayed as a result of the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) of the effect button 136 being performed.

  In addition, the control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) that makes a pass / fail determination is mainly responsible for continuous pressing operation (plural operation) effects that are determined to be executed, so that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is made effective. Alternatively, the long press automatic double hit function may be disabled.

  In addition, not the control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that performs the determination of acceptance, but the control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500) different from this mainly The long press automatic continuous hit function may be enabled for the continuous hit operation (multiple operation) effect to be performed, or the long press automatic continuous hit function may be disabled.

  In addition, including the examples described above, the relationship between the effect button 136 and the effect (button effect) related to the effect button 136 is as follows.

  (1) When a single-shot operation is performed after a button effect (single-shot operation effect) for causing one press operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 to be performed, a effect related to the result of the operation is executed Ru.

  (2) In the case where a single-shot operation effect is performed a plurality of times consecutively, when a long press operation is performed by the effect button 136, only the effect related to the result of the operation relating to the first button effect is performed. Alternatively, an effect relating to the result of the operation relating to all button effects is executed.

  (3) After the button effect (continuous hitting operation effect) for executing the multiple pressing operations (continuous hitting operation) by the effect button 136 is started, if the continuous hitting operation is performed, the effect on the result of the operation is executed Ru. In addition, when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, if the long press automatic continuous hit function is effective, the effect regarding the result of the operation is executed.

  (4) If the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, for example, the effect may be advanced as it is, for example, the effect corresponding to the cumulative pressing time of the effect button 136 is performed . Further, when the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, the effect regarding the result of the operation is performed. In this case, for example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the effect may be made to advance accordingly by performing the pseudo continuous hit operation, or the operation is performed assuming that the effect button 136 has been long pressed. May be accepted.

  (5) In the state where the production button 136 is continuously pressed (continuous pressing state), when the one-shot operation production is started, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, the operation by the production button 136 is accepted Absent.

  (6) In the continuous pressing state, if the continuous hitting operation effect is started, if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the effect on the result of the operation is executed by performing the pseudo continuous hitting operation Ru. In this case, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation is performed from the time when the continuous hitting operation effect is started. Also, in the case where the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single-shot operation is performed. May be In addition, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous press state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained.

  (8) In the case where the one-shot operation effect is started and then the one-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect related to the result of the operation on these one-shot operation effects is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition concerning the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition started later is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation regarding the one-shot operation rendition having a predetermined high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (9) If the single-shot operation effect is started and then the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the effect on the result of the operation on the single-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect are executed Be done. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (10) When the one-shot operation effect is started and then the long-press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long-press operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (11) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started and then the one-shot operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect are executed Be done. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (12) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started and then the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the consecutive hit operation rendition started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the consecutive hit operation rendition started later is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the consecutive hit operation rendition having a high priority predetermined is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (13) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started and then the long pressing operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long pressing operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (14) If the long press operation effect is started and then the one-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the single operation operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (15) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (16) If the long press operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect related to the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is executed. Alternatively, only the rendering relating to the result of the operation for the high-pressing operation rendering with high predetermined priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (17) After the long press operation effect is started, the long press operation is performed, and when the one-shot operation effect is started in that state, only the effect regarding the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect on the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is not performed. Alternatively, both the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect are performed. Moreover, after the long press operation effect is started, the continuous hit operation is performed, and when the one-shot operation effect is started in that state, for the long press operation effect, for example, according to the pressing cumulative time of the effect button 136 For example, the effect may be advanced as appropriate, and the effect regarding the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is performed.

  (18) After the long press operation effect is started, the long press operation is performed. If the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect regarding the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is not performed. Alternatively, both the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect are performed. Moreover, after the long press operation effect is started, the continuous hit operation is performed, and when the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, for the long press operation effect, for example, according to the pressing cumulative time of the effect button 136 For example, the effect may be advanced accordingly, and the effect regarding the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect is performed.

  (19) After the long press operation effect is started, the long press operation is performed, and when the long press operation effect is started in that state, the result regarding the operation result of the long press operation effect started earlier As far as only the effect is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect on the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is not executed. Or it is performed also about the production about the result of the operation about which long press operation production. Moreover, after the long press operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed and the long press operation effect is started in that state, for example, the effect button 136 is selected for the long press operation effect started earlier. For example, effects may be advanced depending on the cumulative time of depression of the button, and the effect corresponding to the cumulative time of depression of the effect button 136 may also be performed for long-press operation effects started later. There may be cases where the production proceeds as such.

  (20) After the continuous hitting operation effect is started, if the long press operation is performed and the one-shot operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function becomes effective, and the operation about the continuous hit operation effect Unless the long press operation is canceled once, only the effect on the result of is not performed on the effect on the operation result of the one-shot operation effect. Alternatively, both of the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect are performed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, and the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the result of the operation regarding the result of the operation of the continuous hitting operation effect and the operation of the single-shot operation effect Both of the renderings are performed.

  (21) After the continuous hitting operation effect has been started, if the long press operation is performed and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function becomes effective and the continuous hit is started earlier Only the effect on the result of the operation on the operation effect is performed, and the effect on the result on the operation on the operation effect started later is not performed unless the long press operation is canceled once. Or it is performed also about the production about the result of the operation about which continuous hitting operation production. Moreover, after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the continuous hitting operation is performed, and when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation for any of the continuous hitting operation effects is also executed.

  (22) If the long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hit function becomes effective, and the continuous hit operation effect is performed. As far as only the effect on the result of the operation is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the continuous hitting operation is performed, and when the long pressing operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hitting operation effect is executed, the long pressing operation effect For, for example, the effect may be advanced as it is, for example, the effect corresponding to the pressing cumulative time of the effect button 136 is executed.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

  248 to 272 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 248-272, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 in addition to the decorative symbol display unit 208. Although illustrated, the common view display device 210 and the common view holding lamp 216 are not shown. In FIGS. 248 to 272, the types of special views to be stopped and displayed on the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are the stop symbol modes shown in FIG. 68 (a) and FIG. 68 (b) It is done. Moreover, although the pachinko machine 100 comprised with one decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is shown in FIG. 248-FIG. 272, it provided with several decoration symbol display apparatuses like embodiment mentioned above. It may be In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram showing an example of button effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not shown, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are symbols in order to indicate whether or not the symbol is changing (or while the symbol is stopped). Special pattern 1 The fourth pattern t1 is the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of losing or the symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol in the special figure 1 is displayed while the special pattern 1 is stopped. During the change, the symbol "-" blinks. The special pattern 2 fourth pattern t2 is a special pattern 2 symbol displayed while the special pattern 2 is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the result of losing or the symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol in the special figure 2 is displayed. During the change, the symbol "-" blinks. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position from the decorative symbol, but also in the display mode (shape here), so that the player can distinguish at first glance. In addition, by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol, it is also possible to give advance notice of the pre-reading advance notice or the symbol variation display.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 248 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shortening state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280. In the non-power-supply state, the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be displayed.

  The number of reservations of the special view 1 is also represented by the number of suspension icons of the special view 1 in addition to the number of lighting of the special view 1 suspension lamp 218. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The reserve icon in Special Figure 1 is displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the left side becoming the older the prize icon.

  Three reserved icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in FIG. 248 (1), and the reserved icons h11 to h13 of these three special figures 1 are all default display modes And white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. It is because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a reserve icon of a special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280 according to the control state (playing state). . That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 248 (1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed, and the holding icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power-on state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is hidden.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is also a round non-pattern and white display mode, but the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the display position are made different. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be made different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a decision at first glance.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the blinking start or blinking of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decoration symbol. , This order may be back and forth.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. , The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (3), the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and a state is shown in which the suspension notice is started. That is, the display mode of Sabohani is a display mode of the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a button operation effect for requesting an operation of the effect button 136 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display state of the button acceptance time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge in the rectangular frame decreases in accordance with the time after the start of the operation effective period. This button acceptance time meter MT is a display indicating the maximum time that can be accepted for the operation of the effect button 136 after the start of the operation valid period. Here, the button image 136a is displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the middle pattern of the decorative pattern, but is disposed on the rear side of the decorative pattern and is superimposed by the decorative pattern (overlapped) ) May be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 248 (4), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (5), step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 248 (6). Ru. At this time, the button acceptance time meter MT is erased together with the button image 136a. The step-up notice is a notice that switching display is performed by a plurality of steps, and is a notice that suggests that the jackpot is highly reliable as the step progresses. The step-up notice in this effect example is a notice effect relating to the symbol variation display, but may be executed as a prefetch notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (6), the display SU1 of step 1 in the step-up notice is displayed. The display SU1 of this step 1 is a display represented by the face of the leader character. In this demonstration example, after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, the display of step 2 is performed more than the case where the display of step 1 is not performed after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Also, it is configured to be likely to be a big hit (big hit symbol is easy to be displayed clearly). In addition, although display SU1 of step 1 is overlapped and displayed on the front side of the middle pattern of a decorative symbol, it may be arrange | positioned behind the decorative symbol, and may be displayed so that it may be superimposed by a decorative symbol. In addition, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the step-up notice may not be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice has ended, and the display SU1 of step 1 is erased. That is, the present step-up notice ends at the display SU1 of step 1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (11), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the advance notice display mode related to the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area 280 without changing the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (12), the button operation effect is started, and the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 248 (4) and described above. At the timing shown in FIG. 248 (12), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14), the state shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period is started. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge may be faster than, the same as, or slower than the decreasing speed of the gauge displayed before the effect button 136 is operated. Furthermore, in the button acceptance time meter MT, a plurality of mini-characters BCH consisting of a face of a number-long face are arranged and arranged in a plurality (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is. The number of mini characters BCH of the group leader displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is a number according to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time after the start of the operation valid period). In this example of the effect, by displaying the mini character BCH of the Bancho on the button acceptance time meter MT, it functions as a notice display that suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. When the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the step-up notice is started, and the display of the mini character BCH of the group leader in the button acceptance time meter MT (the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT) starts. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice may be started after the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is started, or the start of the step-up notice display and the button The start timing of the advance notice display using the reception time meter MT may be the same timing. The same applies to the following description. In addition, the advance notice display using this button acceptance time meter MT is performed from the start of the operation valid period until the time corresponding to the maximum time of the operation valid period elapses, but it ends at an earlier timing than that It may be done or it may be finished at a late timing. It should be noted that even if the effect button 136 is operated, there may be a case where the mini-character BCH of the program leader is not displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. That is, in this demonstration example, it is more likely that a big hit will be more likely if the mini character BCH of the bancho is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT than if the mini character BCH of the bancho is not displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. Is configured. In addition, there may be a case where a mini character (for example, a princess mini character) other than the mini character BCH of the master may be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the displayed mini characters. In addition, after the mini-character BCH of the bancho is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT, a step-up notice in which the mini-character to be displayed changes may be performed. For example, the display mode of the mini-character BCH of the bancho changes It may be easy to be a big hit. In this example, the reliability of the big hit is the same regardless of the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, but the reliability of the big hit according to the number of displayed mini-characters BCH. For example, the larger the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of the deca button or a display mode in which the button vibrates and rotates), for example, a display mode of the deca button When the button image 136a is displayed, the mini character of the princess may easily appear on the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated, and the mini character of the princess is displayed as the mini character that has appeared. When it is included, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be displayed in a definite manner than when only the Bancho mini character BCH appears. On the other hand, when the button image 163a is displayed in the default display mode, it may be easy for only the mini-character BCH to appear easily. Moreover, in this production example, when the production button 136 is operated after the start of the operation effective period, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the mini character BCH of the program leader is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. The advance notice may be displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the acceptance time meter MT (for example, changing from blue to red), or the advance notice is displayed by changing the shape of the button acceptance time meter MT. You may do so. Further, in this effect example, the type of notice display on the button acceptance time meter MT may be different depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the start of the operation effective period. For example, the operation effective period starts If the effect button 136 is operated at an earlier timing, the mini-character BCH of the master length is easily displayed, and if the effect button 136 is operated at a later timing after the start of the operation effective period, timer display is performed. An advance notice may be made. In addition, the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is performed on display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a sub display device, a display device provided on the front door frame 106 or the door 108 with ball storage tray) You may do so.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (16), step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. The display SU2 of this step 2 is a display represented by the whole body of the Bancho character. That is, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that the display SU2 of step 2 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that it is likely to be a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU1 of step 1. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is three at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (16).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (17), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. The display SU3 of this step 3 is a display showing that the character of the captain is breaking the clothes. Furthermore, together with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the word "super hot" is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. That is, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that it is likely to be a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH of the Bancho decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and becomes one at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (17). Note that the button acceptance time meter MT may be erased before changing from the display SU2 of step 2 to the display SU3 of step 3 (that is, the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT may be ended), The button acceptance time meter MT may be erased at the timing when the display SU2 of step 2 changes to the display SU3 of step 3. Further, in this effect example, no effect is given even when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT is exhausted, but a notice may be given when the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted. Further, in this example, although the mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is not related to the number of steps executed in the step-up notice, for example, the mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT If a mini character of princess is included in the list, it may be easy to be displayed until the display SU3 in step 3, or conversely, the mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is only the mini character BCH of the Bancho If the display SU3 of step 3 is difficult to be displayed, the step-up notice may be easily ended by the display SU1 of step 1 or the display SU2 of step 2. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be a display mode other than the default display mode (for example, the display mode of the deca button or the display mode of vibration and rotation), for example, the button image 136a When the display mode is the display mode of the deca button, the display SU3 of step 3 is easier to be displayed than when the display mode is the default display mode, and the display mode of the button image 136a is the default display mode. The step-up notice may be more easily ended by the display SU1 of step 1 or the display SU2 of step 2 than in the case of the display mode of the big button.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (18), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. At this time, the step-up notice is ended, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also deleted. Here, the step-up notice may be continued until the gauge remaining amount in the button acceptance time meter MT runs out, or may be ended before the gauge remaining amount runs out.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (19) following FIG. 248 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "super hot" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached, and it is suggested that the jackpot reliability in this reach is high. In addition, normally, when the reach state is formed, "reach" is displayed to notify that the reach state is reached. That is, it can be said that when the reach state is formed and the display of "super hot" is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the display of "reach" is performed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 249 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (21), it is shown that the button preview effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (22), as shown in FIG. 249 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 A cut-in image is displayed that includes a balloon image in which the characters are arranged. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine pieces) of face-to-face are placed around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is It suggests that the jackpot reliability is higher than that displayed. In addition, when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be determined to be a big hit (finally, a big hit symbol is determined and displayed).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”, as shown in FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a final display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of the "concerts 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of "A" indicating that the big hit has been made in "special figure A" is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of "special view A".

  FIG. 250 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 2" is stopped and displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 250 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). Therefore, the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280.

  Two reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in FIG. 250 (1), and among them, the first reserve icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani (pre-reading advance notice), and The second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 250 (3), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (4), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (5), FIG. 250 (6) As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, and the timer acceptance display TM is displayed in place of the button acceptance time meter MT. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM displays a time according to the time from the start of the operation effective period (that is, the remaining amount of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated) At the timing shown in FIG. 250 (6), “03.87” indicating 3.87 seconds is displayed on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM. That is, the timer display indicates the timing at which the notice effect performed by the completion of the countdown in the timer advance display TM is executed, and the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the timer display is started is It differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation effective period is started. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice by the timer notice display TM displayed in place of the button acceptance time meter MT is performed. In this example of presentation, although timer announcement display TM is displayed by operating presentation button 136, timer announcement display TM may not be displayed. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation valid period, the timer advance notice display TM may not be displayed, or the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the timer advance notice display TM is displayed in a mode in which the time in the timer display is further reduced according to the time after the start of the operation effective period, and the timing shown in FIG. “02.49” is displayed to indicate that the

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (8), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 250 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208. The display SU2 of step 2 changes to the display SU3 of step 3. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM is displayed in bold color while the display color changes to red, and notifies that the notice due to the completion of the countdown has occurred. The change from the display SU2 of step 2 to the display SU3 of step 3 is a notice display performed by the timer display in the timer notice display TM counting up. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice being given to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are mutually related. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices. In this effect example, the contents of the effect of the step-up notice may be changed according to the remaining time indicated by the timer display on the timer notice display TM. For example, the remainder indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started If the time is long (for example, 5 seconds), the display SU3 of step 1 is performed from the display SU1 of step 1 through the display SU2 of step 2, and the display SU3 of step 3 is performed. If the number is small (for example, 1 second), the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, and then the display SU2 of step 2 is not in time, so the display SU2 of step 2 is not displayed, and the display of step 3 is displayed. SU3 may be displayed. Alternatively, the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed without the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 being displayed. Further, in this example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM is a time (for example, 1.13 seconds) after the operation effective period is started from the time (for example, 5 seconds) corresponding to the operation effective period. "03.87" indicating this is displayed when the remaining time after subtraction is 3.87 seconds, but according to the gauge remaining amount of the button acceptance time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated The initial value of the timer may be displayed, and the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed at the timing when the timer counts down from the initial value of the displayed timer and becomes "00.00". . Specifically, for example, in a period (first period) within 1 second after the start of the operation effective period, “04.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer, and within 2 seconds after exceeding 1 second In the period (second period) of “03.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer in the period (second period)... In the period (fourth period) within 4 seconds after exceeding 3 seconds, “01 .00 "may be displayed. Also, the timer advance notice may not be started when a certain period is exceeded after the start of the operation effective period.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (10) to (18) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 250 (10)-the same figure (18) is the same as that of FIG. 248 (18)-FIG. 249 (25), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 251. . In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (1) through (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 250 (1) through (5), so descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 251 (6), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (4). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period is started. Furthermore, in the button acceptance time meter MT, a plurality of mini-characters BCH consisting of a face of a number-long face are arranged and arranged in a plurality (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is. That is, the advance notice display by the display of the mini character BCH of the Bancho is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (6), the timer notice display TM is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the timer notice display TM is predetermined regardless of the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. A timer display (for example, 30 seconds) indicating the time of 30 seconds (in the timer advance display TM shown in FIG. 251 (6), display of “30.00” indicating 30 seconds) is performed. At this time, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM may be made different according to the time when the operation valid period is started, and the timing at which the countdown ends may be the same. The timing at which the countdown ends may be adjusted by changing the time during which the reach effect is started and the transition from the normal reach to the super reach or the time for performing the temporary stop display due to the swing fluctuation. In addition, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM when the timer notice is started may be made to display a time according to the time after the operation valid period is started. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the notice by the display of the mini character BCH on the button acceptance time meter MT and the timer notice by the timer notice display TM are integrated into one notice display. In other words, in this production example, while notifying the remaining time at the time when production button 136 is operated at least of the time set as the operation valid period, with button reception time meter MT, It can be said that the display of the character BCH and the timer advance notice are performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH of the Bancho decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is three at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (7). In addition, the timer display on the timer notice display TM counts down according to the time after the timer notice is started, and "28.50" indicating 28.50 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (7). Is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. Furthermore, together with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the word "super hot" is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH of the Bancho decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and becomes one at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (8). In addition, the timer display on the timer notice display TM counts down according to the time after the timer notice is started, and "26.00" indicating 26.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (8). Is displayed. In this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 250, as a result of the timer countdown, it does not affect the step-up notice as a result of the countdown, and the countdown continues in FIG. 251 (8). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. At this time, the step-up notice ends, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also deleted, but the timer notice is continuously performed, and the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is in progress. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation effective period has passed and that the timer advance notice is continued even after the step-up advance notice is finished. In addition, the period during which the timer display in timer notice display TM is displayed is from the period from when the operation valid period starts and the gauge in button reception time meter MT starts to decrease until the remaining amount of gauge becomes 0. It can also be said that it is a long period. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (10) to (13) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 251 (10)-the same figure (13) is the same as that of FIG. 249 (19)-FIG. 249 (22), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (13) after the button preview effect is started as shown in FIG. 251 (12), the decorative symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 251 (14). In the apparatus 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "match" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the image of the close-up of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the Bancho is not displayed around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the big hit is more than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although the reliability of is low, it suggests that the reliability of the big hit is higher than the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. Also at this time, the timer notice is continuously performed, and the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is in progress. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (14), "10.50" is displayed, which indicates that the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM has 10.50 seconds remaining.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". On the other hand, at this time also, the timer advance notice is continuously performed, and the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is advanced. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (15), “05.50” is displayed, which indicates that the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM has remaining 5.50 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 251 (16) to (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" Then, the timer announcement is continuously performed, and when the timer display on the timer announcement display TM becomes “00.00” at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (17) and the countdown is completed, FIG. 251 (18). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Bancho character BC appears backward, and on the timer advance notice display TM, the character "resurrection" is displayed to notify that a resurrection effect is to be performed. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit decision. In the resurrection effect, an effect that fails in resurrection may be performed, and the result of the loss may be derived.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (19) continued to FIG. 251 (18), the character BC of the bancho character who is backward facing faces the front, and the decorative symbol of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5" The combination of is displayed and it is notified that it becomes a big hit. Also, in the timer notice display TM, the word "Congratulations" is displayed, and it is shown that the player is blessed to be a big hit.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a final display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of the "concerts 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  FIG. 253: is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 253 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 250 (1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol fluctuation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. In this example of effect, an icon of a bancho and an icon of a panda are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT. And the button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is different from the mode mentioned above, and as shown in the figure 253 (3)-the figure (7), according to the time after the operation effective period is started The display mode changes as it becomes shorter gradually. Further, in response to shortening of the button reception time meter MT, the panda icon arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT also moves to follow the right end of the button reception time meter MT. At this time, the No. long icon arranged at the left end of the button acceptance time meter MT has a fixed position and has not moved. In the following description, an icon arranged at the left end of the button acceptance time meter MT and whose position does not change regardless of the decrease display of the button acceptance time meter MT is referred to as a fixing icon, and is disposed at the right end of the button acceptance time meter MT. An icon which is displaced according to the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT may be referred to as a movement icon. Therefore, as time passes, the panda icon is displayed so as to approach the Bancho icon. In this example of the effect, it is predicted that something will occur when the panda bites into the bancho, that is, it can be said that the display itself of the button reception time meter MT functions as a notice display. In addition, from another viewpoint, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, whereby the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT is started before the operation of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is performed. It can also be said that In this presentation example, a step-up notice may be performed in which the icons displayed on both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT change according to the time after the start of the operation valid period, for example, the operation valid period When the time has started, two panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT, and when the time passes, the panda icons change to ones with a long icon one by one, and the icon changes so much that the jackpot trusts A high-degree advance notice may be easily displayed, or the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed as the icon changes. Further, in this example of presentation, the advance notice is displayed in a mode in which the icon of the character is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT, but for example, the advance notice is displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT. It may be performed, or the advance notice may be displayed by changing the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT.

  FIG. 253 (4) shows that the button acceptance time meter MT becomes short as time passes after the start of the operation effective period.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (5), as shown in FIG. 253 (6), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button acceptance time meter MT becomes gradually shorter according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Change. At this time, a mini character (for example, a mini character BCH or a mini character of a princess, etc.) may be displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT to perform advance notice display. In this case, for example, when the two icons added to the button reception time meter MT are both the icons of the first set, the mini character of the princess is likely to be displayed, and 2 is added to the button reception time meter MT. In the case where one icon is a combination of a Bancho icon and a Panda icon, the Bancho mini character BCH may be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is further shortened according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (7), the panda icon approaches the number-long icon By displaying the word "gabut", it is shown that the panda is bitten by the bancho. This causes the player to expect something to happen, and as a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the big hit. In this presentation example, the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT is performed within the range from the start of the operation valid period to the time corresponding to the operation valid period.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (8), the display SU2 of step 2 is covered in a difficult-to-see manner by the symbols of a large number of stars. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. This effect is an effect to be performed when the panda bites into the bancho, that is, the result of the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT affects the step-up notice (notice started by operation of the effect button 136) It can be said that it is something to give. In this case, it may be possible to expect that the step-up notice changes. In addition, since the step-up notice is further developed while showing that the step-up notice is over, it may be possible to make the step-up notice have unexpectedness. In this production example, the time from the start of the operation valid period to the start of the display of the result of the preliminary display by the button acceptance time meter MT is determined, and therefore, the effect is produced after the operation valid period is started. The earlier the timing until the button 136 is operated, the longer the execution time of the step-up notice. Further, in this example of effect, when the effect button is not operated in the operation effective period, the step-up notice is not started, and the result of the notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 253 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the display SU2 of step 2, the princess character HM is displayed together with the character display of "Premier", and it is determined that the big hit is confirmed. A state of being informed is shown. That is, the result of the notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT shifts from the step-up notice to the premier notice. It should be noted that if the effect button 136 is not operated in the button operation effect described above, the step-up notice is not started, and therefore, the premier notice is not given, but even if the step-up notice is not given, the premier notice is It may be performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (10), it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration patterns of the “big 7” of the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7”, as shown in FIG. As shown in the above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  FIG. 254 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, the appearance of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period in the button operation effect is shown. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 254 (1)-the same figure (3) is the same as that of FIG. 250 (1)-the same figure (3), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 254 (4) shows a state after the button operation effect is started and the operation valid period is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 254 (4) to FIG. 6 (6), when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 254 (7), The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that the step-up notice is started after the operation effective period has elapsed even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period. In this case, since the button acceptance time meter MT is deleted as the operation valid period elapses, the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is not performed. In addition, when the above-described auto button mode is set, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is artificially operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the operation effective period. When the step-up notice is started, the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT may be performed, or only the step-up notice may be performed, and the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is not performed. Alternatively, only a notice using the button acceptance time meter MT may be given, and a step-up notice may not be given. After the step-up notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 254 (7), the step-up notice develops in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 254 (8) to FIG. In this case, the step-up notice may end on the display SU2 of step 2 without the display SU3 of step 3 being displayed, or the display SU1 of step 1 may not be displayed. The step-up notice may end in some cases. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 254 (8) to FIG. (9) are the same as those in FIG. 248 (16) to FIG. (17) except that the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed, Omit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "super hot" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached, and it is suggested that the jackpot reliability in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect as described above is performed, in the case of a big hit, after the temporary stop display due to the swing fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  FIG. 255 is a view showing in stages an example of the pseudo-series effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 is a view showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 255 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 250 (1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in the example of the effect, the character display of "If three people gather together, it is a pseudo sequence" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that a pseudo sequence effect is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is an advance notice effect regarding the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the same as that described above and shown in FIG. 253 (3), and the display mode is changed by shortening the button acceptance time meter MT itself as time passes. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this example), and a desired display result is displayed (the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character YSM, and the Hime character HME) By being displayed, it is predicted that the pseudo link will be performed. In the case where pseudo chaining is not performed, three characters are not displayed. In this example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation, or the number of continuous hitting operations The characters may be incremented one by one. In addition, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation. In addition, if the number of times the effect button 136 is operated does not reach the predetermined number of times (for example, three times) by the time the operation valid period elapses, the pseudo connection may not be performed, or the pseudo connection is performed. May be

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (4), as shown in FIG. 255 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG of is displayed. Then, when the second production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (5), as shown in FIG. 255 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM on the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (6), as shown in FIG. 255 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT separate from each other, and the button acceptance time meter MT has the letters "All members set" Is displayed and it is predicted that the pseudo ream will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-replay symbol-decorative 7" is displayed, and a state in which temporary stop by the fluctuation display is performed , It is informed that the pseudo ream will be performed. That is, in this effect example, the stop symbol of the replay symbol is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-link is to be performed. In the example of effect, "decorative 7-replay symbol-decorative 7" is simultaneously stopped and displayed, but may be sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (10), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display saying "If three people gather it is a pseudo train" is displayed, and it is predicted that a second pseudo train effect will be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is also a notice effect relating to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the same as that described above and shown in FIG. 253 (3), but with the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. It is displayed. In this example of rendering, the pseudo-series is more likely to occur when the two icons are displayed, as compared to the case where the icon of the Bancho icon and the icon of the panda are displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. If two icons are displayed, pseudo-run may be performed. When two number-long icons are displayed on button reception time meter MT, button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of deca button, a display mode in which vibration and rotation are performed, etc.) Alternatively, when the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default display mode, it may be easier for the two button acceptance time meters MT to be displayed. .

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (12), as shown in FIG. The character ECG of is displayed. Then, when the second production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (13), as shown in FIG. 255 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM on the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (14), as shown in FIG. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

  Then, in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 255 (8), the pair of icon icons displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT are separated, and the button acceptance time meter MT has “all members set”. The characters are displayed, and it is predicted that the second pseudo-link will take place.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-replay symbol-decorative 7" is displayed, and it is shown that temporary stop by the fluctuation display is performed. , It is informed that the second pseudo run will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), it is shown that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 3” display indicating the number of times the third variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link is performed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "It is extremely hot if collected by three people" is displayed, and it is predicted that a highly reliable notice of the jackpot will be made.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (18) following FIG. 255 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (18), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect relating to a certain advance effect. In the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 256 (18), the icons of the slot lengths are displayed at both ends. In this example of presentation, a notification with higher reliability is more likely to occur when two icons are displayed, as opposed to the case where the icon for the Bancho icon and the icon for the panda are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. , It is easy to become a big hit by the display of two icons of the Bancho (big hit symbol is easy to be displayed).

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (19), as shown in FIG. 256 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208 The character ECG of is displayed. Then, when the second production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (20), as shown in FIG. 256 (21), with the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM on the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (21), as shown in FIG. 256 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character TSM, and the princess character HME are arranged to overlap the front side of the middle symbol, and the button acceptance time meter MT displayed below them. The word "super hot" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (punching reach). The effects shown in FIG. 256 (24) to FIG. 30 (30) are the same as those in FIG. 249 (20) to FIG. 26 (26) except that the decorative symbols constituting the reach state are different. Do.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the pseudo-series effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, it is shown that three characters are not aligned in the button operation effect and no pseudo link is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 257 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 255 (1) to (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (6), the button operation effect is performed, and as a result of the effect button 136 being pressed twice, it is shown that the Echigoya character ECG and the Otome character YSM are displayed. It is shown. Then, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 257 (6), as shown in FIG. 257 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the princess character HME, The display of “x” indicating that the princess character HME has not appeared is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (8), the icon of the screen leader accompanied by the button acceptance time meter MT and the icon of the panda separate from each other, and the letter “Sorry” is displayed in the button acceptance time meter MT. It is displayed, and the button operation effect fails, and it is informed that the pseudo link is not performed. In addition, although three characters are not displayed and the character of "sorry" is displayed, a pseudo ream may be performed. In this case, for example, a jackpot may be decided as a premium effect of the law collapse.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 257 (9) to (12), the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol> middle symbol> right symbol, and the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” It is displayed in combination in combination. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 257 (9)-the same figure (12) are the same as that of FIG. 248 (7)-the figure (10), description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, in this effect example, the icons displayed accompanying the button acceptance time meter MT are the icon of the Bancho icon and the icon of the panda, and the icons of the two Bancho icons in the effect example shown in FIGS. The big hit design is less likely to be displayed than when it is displayed.

  FIG. 258 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, the appearance of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing close to the end of the operation effective period in the button operation effect is shown. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 258 (1)-the same figure (4) is the same as that of FIG. 248 (10)-the same figure (13), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 258 (6), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (5) after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (4). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 258 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is a timing later than the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14), and a timing slightly before the end of the operation effective period. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 258 (6), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT is small, and the number of the mini-length mini characters BCH displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge is also only one.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 258 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. The step-up notice ends before the left symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, since the timing when the step-up notice ends is predetermined (for example, in this example, the timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed in this example), the effect button can be displayed during the period when the step-up notice can be executed. It will fluctuate with the timing when 136 is operated. Therefore, the later the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, the shorter the execution time of the step-up notice. In this example of production, since the effect button 136 is operated at a timing slightly before the end of the operation effective period, the step-up notice is started and the display of the display SU1 of step 1 is started, and so on until the display SU3 of step 3 Although there is not enough time to perform the effect to be developed, and the display SU3 of step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, the step-up notice ends in the display SU1 of step 1. It should be noted that the display of the step-up to start the display may be determined according to the time when the step-up notice can be executed. For example, as in this example of presentation, the execution time of the step-up notice is short In this case, the display may be started from the display SU3 of step 3 without displaying the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2.

  After that, the effects shown in FIG. 258 (8) to FIG. (15) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 258 (7)-the same figure (15) is the same as that of FIG. 248 (18)-FIG. 249 (26), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 259 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 259 (1)-the same figure (4) is the same as that of FIG. 248 (10)-the figure (13), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 259 (6), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (4). The step-up notice is started. In this effect example, when the step-up notice is started, the display is not started from the display SU1 of step 1, the display is started from the display SU2 of step 2, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 259 (7), The display SU3 of 3 is displayed. This is the timing when the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14) as shown in FIG. When the display is started from the display SU1 of step 1, the display SU2 of step 2 and the display SU3 of step 3 can not be sufficiently displayed because it is shorter than the execution time of the effect that is scheduled to be executed in the up notice. . Therefore, in this presentation example, the display of the step for starting the display in the step-up notice is determined from the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, and the step-up notice is performed based on this. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (5), it is determined to start the display from the display SU2 of step 2, and the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed. . As a result, for example, when the display SU3 of step 3 is to be displayed, there may be no case that the display button can not be viewed due to the delay of the operation of the effect button 136. In the example of the effect, the icon of the character described above may be added to both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT. For example, when the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda are displayed, the effect button 136 is operated. Then, when the button acceptance time meter MT is likely to display the mini-character BCH of the Bancho, and two icons of the Bancho are displayed, the mini-character of the princess is more likely to appear than the mini-character BCH of the Bancho. When a princess mini character appears, it may be more likely to be a big hit (a big hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed) than when a Bancho mini character BCH appears.

  After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 259 (8) to (16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 259 (8) through (16) are the same as those in FIGS. 248 (18) through 249 (26), so the descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 260 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 250 (1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), the button image 136 a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button acceptance time meter MT as described above is not displayed. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (4), when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the display of “after 5.00 seconds” indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is performed. The display of this remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value gradually decreases according to the time of the countdown according to the time after the operation effective period is started. The display of the countdown may be such that the countdown proceeds in response to the passage of the actual time, or the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown proceeds later than the passage of the actual time. You may In this example of presentation, the display of the remaining time is started at the timing when the operation valid period starts, but the display of the remaining time may be started at the timing after the operation valid period starts, for example, the operation valid If the maximum duration of the period is 5 seconds, start displaying the remaining time, for example, display 3.00 seconds after the start of the operation effective period, and when the remaining 3 seconds have been reached, etc. It is also good.

  Thereafter, the timing shown in FIG. 260 (5) (for example, in this example, the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the operation effective period, and the display of the remaining time is “after 3.0 seconds”) Then, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 260 (6), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the display of the countdown is also erased along with the button image 136a.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (7), the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 253 (3) and described above is displayed below the display SU1 in step 1. The display of the button reception time meter MT is started with the same length regardless of the timing from the start of the operation effective period to the operation of the effect button 136. On the other hand, the execution period of the step-up advance notice depends on the timing from the start of the operation effective period to the operation of the effect button 136, so the period during which the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed is also different. Therefore, the speed at which the button acceptance time meter MT shortens differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. For example, as the effect button 136 is operated earlier after the operation valid period starts, the button acceptance time meter The speed at which MT shortens becomes slower.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is shortened according to the time since the button acceptance time meter MT starts to display, and at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (8), the panda icon approaches the number long icon. By displaying the letters "Gabutsu", it is shown that the panda bites into the bancho. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 260 (9) to FIG. 260 (13) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 260 to (13) are the same as those in FIGS. 253 (8) to (12), and thus the description thereof is omitted. As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the display related to the operation valid period (the display of the remaining time and the display of the button acceptance time meter MT) changes before and after the operation of the effect button 136 There is.

  FIG. 261 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 261 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 250 (1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special diagram display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (3), the button image 136 a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button acceptance time meter MT as described above is not displayed. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (4), when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, “5 more seconds” indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value is reduced by the method of countdown according to the time after the operation effective period is started. In this effect example, compared to the effect example shown in FIG. 260, since there is no display for less than one second, it can be said that the schematic display of the remaining time is performed. The display of the countdown may be such that the countdown proceeds in response to the passage of the actual time, or the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown proceeds later than the passage of the actual time. You may

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (5) (for example, in this example of rendering, one second has passed since the start of the operation effective period, and the remaining time display is “four more seconds”), When the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 261 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the display of the countdown is continuously displayed, and the countdown is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the display of the countdown is that the "after" part is erased, and it is indicated that the display of the remaining time of the operation effective period has been switched to the display as the timer notice until a certain effect is performed ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 261 (7) to FIG. 10 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display of a countdown as timer notice is performed. At this time, the display of the numerical part of the display of the countdown changes to multiple colors (for example, seven colors), which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high. In addition, when the display of the numerical part of the display of countdown changes to multicolor, it may be a big hit decision. Also, the numerical value portion of the display of the countdown may be displayed in another color, and for example, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the display color. Also, for example, the typeface of the numerical part of the display of the countdown may be changed, and the displayed typeface may indicate the reliability of the big hit. Further, in the step-up notice, the development from step 1 is not performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 261 (10), when the countdown display is “0 seconds” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 261 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of step 1 is performed. It changes from SU1 to display SU3 in step 3. In addition, the display of the countdown is erased. The change from the display SU1 of step 1 to the display SU3 of step 3 is a notice display performed when the countdown as the timer notice is completed. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice being given to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are mutually related. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices.

  Thereafter, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 248 (18) to FIG. Is done. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 261 (12)-the same figure (18) is the same as that of the FIG.

  FIG. 262 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 262 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 250 (1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this example of the effect, the character display "The chance is that it would be a chance to gather three people" is displayed at the top of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high if three characters appear It is done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the same as that described above and shown in FIG. 253 (3), and the display mode is changed by shortening the button acceptance time meter MT itself as time passes. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this example), and a desired display result is displayed (the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character YSM, and the princess character HME By being displayed, it is notified that a notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit is performed. That is, when all three characters are displayed, a notice is more easily displayed than when all three characters are not displayed. In this example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation, or the number of continuous hitting operations The characters may be incremented one by one. In addition, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation.

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (4), as shown in FIG. 262 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG of is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the operation valid period continues. That is, it is shown that the hidden button effect is received in which the operation of the effect button 136 is received while the display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. Then, when the second production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (5), as shown in FIG. 262 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM on the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. That is, it is shown that a character of the lord YSM appears by the operation of the hidden button. Furthermore, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (6), as shown in FIG. 262 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed. That is, it is shown that the princess character HME appears by the hidden button operation. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the hidden button rendering is being performed during the execution of the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (8), the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT separate from each other, and the button acceptance time meter MT has the letters "All members set" Is displayed, and it is informed that a notice display indicating that the jackpot reliability is high will be performed thereafter.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (9), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the donkey character YSM, and the princess character HME are arranged to overlap on the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception displayed below them In the time meter MT, the word "chance" is displayed, and a warning display indicating that the big hit is highly reliable is performed. In the button operation effect, the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated is insufficient and three characters are not displayed, or the effect button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, for example, any one of three characters When the above character does not appear, it may be changed to the character of "chance", for example, display "sorry" to notify that the big hit reliability is low. Moreover, when it becomes reach by a specific symbol (for example, "decoration 7"), a big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed than when reach by other symbols.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 262 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the state of developing to the above-mentioned defeat reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (12), as shown in FIG. 262 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the swordsman of the enemy character, and the defeated screen is displayed. "Decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 262 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 263 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 263 (1) to FIG. 26 (3) are the same as those in FIG. 250 (1) to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 263 (3), after the button operation effect is started, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (4), the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 The characters "Continuous Strike" are displayed on the screen, and the continuous strike operation of the effect button 136 informs that the step advances in the step-up notice.

  Thereafter, when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (5), as shown in FIG. 263 (6), in accordance with the first operation of the effect button 136, a step-up notice is given. The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, at this timing, in the button acceptance time meter MT, a plurality of mini-characters BCH are arranged side by side (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (6)) in the remaining display portion of the gauge. . Also in this example of presentation, by displaying the mini character BCH of the Bancho on the button acceptance time meter MT, it functions as a notice display which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. At the timing shown in FIG. 263 (6), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, the step-up notice is started by one operation of the effect button 136, but the step-up is performed when a predetermined number of continuous hitting operations of the effect button 136 are performed after the operation effective period is started. An advance notice may be started. As described above, in the example of the effect, it is shown that the preliminary display by the button acceptance time meter MT is being performed while the effect of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is being executed.

  After that, when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed and the operation of the effect button 136 is performed a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step SU1 to step SU1 is performed. Step up to 2 display SU2. As described above, in this effect example, on the condition that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed, step-up of the display in the step-up notice may be performed, in other words, the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is insufficient If this is the case, step-up is not performed. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH has decreased according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

  After that, when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed and the operation of the effect button 136 is performed a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step SU2 from step SU2 is performed. Step up to display 3 of 3 That is, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that it is likely to be a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH has decreased according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

  After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 263 (9) to the same figure (17) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 263 (9) to the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 248 (18) to FIG. 249 (26), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing an example of a button continuous hitting operation effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment step by step. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 264 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 250 (1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (3), it is shown that the button continuous hitting operation effect is started. Specifically, the bancho character BC1 is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a letter "Awaken the bancho by continuous hitting" is displayed. That is, in this button continuous hitting operation effect, it can be said that the mission effect aims to display an aspect in which the clothes of the Bancho break in a predetermined time by continuously hitting the effect button 136.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (4), it is shown that the operation effective period in the button continuous hitting operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "Awaken the Bancho by continuous hitting" displayed on the right side of the character BC1 of the bancho is changed to the character display of "continuous hitting start", and Below the character display of "Start", a continuous hit button acceptance time meter RMT is displayed. The continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT has a display mode different from that of the button receiving time meter MT described above, and is configured by an indicator consisting of a plurality of (9 in the example of effects shown in FIG. 264 (4)) There is. The display mode of the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT changes in such a manner that one block is erased one by one from the block at the right end according to the time after the start of the operation valid period.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 264 (5) to FIG. 7 (7), when the effect button 136 is continuously hit operated, the number of star symbols displayed superimposed on the bancho character BC 1 increases as the number of operations increases. It will increase.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 264 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of a mode in which the character of the Bancho breaks the clothes (final form Is displayed, and the letters "Wake up" are displayed, and it is informed that the purpose (mission) of the button continuous hitting operation effect is achieved. At this time, the consecutive hit button acceptance time meter RMT is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a mode of changing to multiple colors (for example, seven colors), which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high. . In this effect example, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed by the change of the display mode of the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT may not change, and it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is low, or the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT is erased when the mission is achieved. And there may be cases where no advance notice is displayed. Further, the display color of the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT may be changed to any of a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the changed display color. As described above, in this presentation example, it is shown that the preliminary display using the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT is performed after the purpose of the button continuous hitting operation presentation is achieved. In addition, in the button continuous hitting operation production, the number of times of operation of the production button 136 in the operation effective period is in spite of the fact that the mission is not determined to be achieved in advance or the mission is determined to be achieved in advance. If the number of times required to achieve the mission is not reached, the leader character will not be displayed in the final form (ie, the final form of the character BC2 will not be displayed), and the continuous hit button Since all the blocks of the reception time meter RMT are also erased, no advance notice display using the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT will be performed. If it is determined in advance that the mission will be achieved, even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the operation effective period is less than the number necessary for the mission to be achieved, the character BC1 of the game leader is It may be a display of the final form. Even in this case, since all the blocks of the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT are erased, the advance notice display using the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT will not be performed. Also, after the start of the operation valid period, the number of operations of the effect button 136 has become the number required for the mission to be achieved, for example, because the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. If the conditions for achieving the mission are not satisfied, the mission may not be achieved unless the directing button 136 is continuously hit and operated until the predetermined period of time elapses. In addition, in the button continuous hitting operation presentation, after the operation effective period starts, the mission may be achieved by one operation of the presentation button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (9), it is shown that one block is erased one by one and the remaining number of blocks is four according to the time since the start of the operation effective period. It is done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (10), it is shown that one block is erased one by one and the number of remaining blocks is one according to the time since the start of the operation effective period. It is done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (11), the decorative symbol is in the normal display state, and the decorative symbols of “decoration 7” forming reach states on the left symbol and the right symbol are respectively stopped and displayed The manner in which the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. Then, the final form of the long-length character BC2 moves to the overlapping position on the front side of the middle symbol, the character "SP" is displayed, and it is informed that it will shift to the super reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 264 (12) to FIG. 18 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 transitions to super reach (punching reach), and a state where the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed is shown. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 264 (12) to the same figure (18) is the same as that of FIG. 256 (24) to the same figure (30), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 265 is a view sequentially showing an example of button continuous hitting operation presentation performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 265 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 264 (1) to (4), so the description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 265 (4), after the effective period of operation in the button continuous hitting operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 265 (5) to FIG. As the number of operations increases, the number of star patterns displayed superimposed on the Bancho character BC1 increases.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 265 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final character of the bank-length character BC2, and The word "alert" is displayed to indicate that the mission has been accomplished. At this time, the consecutive hit button acceptance time meter RMT is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a mode of changing to multiple colors (for example, seven colors), which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high. . In this example, compared to the example shown in FIG. 264, since the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 is fast and the number of operations per time is large, the number of blocks of the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT remains large The mission has been accomplished in the (7 remaining) condition. Thereafter, the blocks are erased one by one according to the time since the start of the operation effective period.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (8), a state is shown in which a mini character YM is displayed in the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the button reception time meter RMT for continuous hitting There is. This mini character YM appears when the time from the start of the operation effective period to the achievement of the mission is early (when the mission is achieved within the predetermined first mission achievement time) It can be said that it is an example of the advance notice display using the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT together with the change of the display mode of the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT. That is, it can be said that the mode of the advance notice using the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT differs depending on the time from when the operation effective period is started to when the mission is achieved. As described above, when the advance display is performed using the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT, the rendering effect may be improved and the interest may be improved. In addition, when the mission is achieved, this mini character YM may always be displayed regardless of the time from the start of the operation effective period until the mission is achieved, Even if the time from the start of the operation effective period to the achievement of the mission may be early, it may not be displayed. In addition, when this mini character YM has appeared, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (9), it is shown that two more blocks are erased according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and the number of remaining blocks is three. ing. The continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT also shows that the mini character YM is moved to the left in accordance with the enlargement of the blank portion where the block has been erased. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (9), it is shown that the character of “big board” appears along with the mini-character YM of the lord. In this example of presentation, it is informed that a big hit is decided by appearance of a character of "big game behavior". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 265 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (10), it is shown that one block is erased one by one and the number of remaining blocks becomes one according to the time after the operation effective period is started. It is done. At this time, the display of the characters of "Daio behavior" displayed along with the mini character YM of Tonosama completely appears. In this example of rendering, only "Ball" of "Ball behavior" may appear, and there may be a case where the "Dance" character does not appear. In this case, the entire "Ball behavior" character You may make it hard to display a big hit symbol clearly than when a character appears. By doing this, it may be possible to have an expectation as to whether or not the jackpot's reliability is a high-prediction until the character YM of the lord is completely displayed. In addition, display of a case in which characters different from "behavior" appear may be displayed. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 265 (10), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 265 (11) to FIG. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 265 (11) to FIG. 26 (18) are the same as those in FIG. 264 (11) to FIG.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a hold combination notice effect performed during a big hit game. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In FIG. 266, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 Is also illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 266 (1), in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is made in the “special view I” which is the lost symbol, and in the second special view display device 214, it is the big hit symbol “ The stop display is given in the special view a ", and in this example of the effect, it is shown that the special view 2 has become a big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is lost in "special figure I". Stop is displayed with the symbol of "x" which shows that it became, and special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is stopped and displayed with the symbol of "A" which shows that it became big hit with "special figure a" There is.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266, since the jackpot in the power support state has been a big hit, the reserve icon of the special view 2 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280. In FIG. 266 (1), the hold icons h 21, h 22, h 23 and h 24 of the four special figures 2 are displayed, and all the hold icons h 21 to h 24 of these four special figures 2 have default display modes ( Round non-pattern and white display mode). That is, the default holding icon of Special Figure 2 is a circular holding icon. On the other hand, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 0, and no reservation icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed. In this demonstration example, the hold icon in the special view 1 is not displayed in the power support state, but the hold icon is displayed when the number of holds in the special view 1 is one or more. Good.

  Further, in the effect movable body 224, both the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b are in the initial position, that is, they are not in the movable state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (2), it is shown that the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "big 7" of the "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" displayed when the big hit became the upper left of the display screen It is displayed in the corner, and in the center of the display screen, it is shown that a copanda character with a fan is celebrating a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (3), it is shown that the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is started. It should be noted that in the stage during the big hit game, the number of big hit consecutive villas, the number of payout balls obtained during the present big hit, and the number of payout balls earned during the continuous loaf may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (4) shows that the seventh round has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 266 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the button is pushed out, the character "super heat is displayed" is displayed on the right side of the copanda character, and the effect button 136 is operated to operate the effect movable body 224. In the case, it is explained that it is notified that the symbol fluctuation display being held is highly likely to include a symbol fluctuation display that is a big hit (that is, there is a high possibility of occurrence of a hold string). It has been done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (6), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button effect can be said to be an example of the advance notice effect during the big hit game. At the timing shown in FIG. 266 (6), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (7), as shown in FIG. 266 (8), the forearm portion of the effect movable body 224 224 b operates to move to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, a plurality of star symbols are displayed, and such effect display as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208 Has been done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 266 (9), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is determined that the generation of the holding string will be generated. The display of "hold reservation fixed" is performed. In this example of production, when the production movable body 224 operates, the retention train is always generated, but even if the presentation movable body 224 operates, the retention train may not occur. Good.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the hold combination notice effect executed during the big hit game. The effects shown in FIGS. 267 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 266 (1) to (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (7) after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 267 (8), by the effect movable body 224 The operation is not performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "chance" to give an expectation as to whether or not the hold sequence will occur. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period is started. Furthermore, in the button acceptance time meter MT, a plurality of panda mini character PNDs consisting of panda faces are arranged in a row (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (8)) in the remaining display portion of the gauge. The number of panda mini characters PND displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time after the start of the operation effective period). In this effect example, the mini character PND of the panda is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display that suggests that the degree of expectation of occurrence of the holding group is not so high. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the mini character PND of the panda may not be displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. That is, in the case where the mini character PND of the panda is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT, it is easier for the hold sequence to occur than in the case where the mini character PND of the panda is not displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. It may be configured. In addition, there may be a case where a mini character different from the panda mini character PND may be displayed, and the degree of expectation of occurrence of the hold sequence may be different depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, a plurality of types of mini characters may be displayed in a mixed manner. In this example, regardless of the number of panda mini-characters PND displayed, the degree of expectation for generating a hold string is the same, but according to the number of panda mini-characters PND displayed. The degree of expectation generated by the holding group may be different, for example, the higher the number of panda mini characters PND displayed, the higher the degree of expectation generated by the holding group may be. In addition, the type of mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT may be changed according to the timing after the start of the operation valid period, for example, the timing of operation of the effect button 136 is the operation valid period If the timing is early after the start of the, the mini character other than the panda mini character (for example, a mini-length character or the like) may be easily displayed. Further, in this example of rendering, the character display of “chance” is displayed by operating the rendering button 136, and thereafter, the mini character PND of the panda in the button acceptance time meter MT is not based on the operation of the rendering button 136. Although the display is performed, for example, the character display of "chance" and the display of the mini character PND of the panda in the button acceptance time meter MT may be simultaneously performed in response to the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, the object displayed by the operation of the effect button 136 is the display of "chance", and the display of the mini character PND of the panda in the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed by the operation of the effect button 136 It is shown about the example which is not a thing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (9), the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the start of the operation effective period. Further, the number of display of the mini character PND of the panda is also reduced according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and is two at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (9).

  FIG. 267 (10) shows that the eighth round has been started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (10), it is shown that the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT has become zero. That is, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 267 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star figure is displayed, while the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 267 (12) As described above, the display of the character "Sorry" is performed, and the button operation effect fails, and it is informed that the possibility of the occurrence of the hold sequence is low. In this production example, even when there is a plan to generate a suspension string, there may be a case that the button operation presentation may fail, and by configuring in this way, the expectation to the suspension string is lost May be reduced.

  FIG. 268 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the hold combination notice effect executed during the big hit game. The effects shown in FIG. 268 (1) to FIG. 7 (7) are the same as those in FIG. 267 (1) to FIG.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (7) after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. Although the operation by the movable body 224 is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character of "Tsu" which gives expectation as to whether or not the hold sequence will occur. When the word "Tsu" is displayed, the effect movable body 224 is easier to operate than when the word "chance" is displayed. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period is started. Furthermore, in this effect example, a plurality of mini-characters BCH consisting of a face of a length and a mini-character PND of a panda are displayed respectively on the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT (decorative symbol display shown in FIG. In the device 208, two mini-characters BCH of a long-length and three mini-characters PND of a panda are arranged side by side. In this effect example, the hold sequence is more likely to occur in the case where the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed than in the case where only the mini character PND of the panda is displayed (in the symbol variation display being held, the big hit The symbol is easy to be displayed finalized). In other words, in the case where there is a schedule for generating a reservation string, it is easy to display the mini-character BCH as the leader. It should be noted that the Bancho mini character BCH is disposed to the right of the panda mini character PND, and the Bancho mini character BCH is erased faster than the panda mini character PND according to the decrease in the remaining amount of the gauge. Therefore, the player may be allowed to pay attention to the change of the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT in order to confirm the mini character BCH of the gamemaster. In addition, since the number of mini characters displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is a number according to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time after the operation effective period is started), the operation effective period is started. From when the timing of operation of the effect button 136 is late, and the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT is less than the space for arranging the mini character BCH of the note length, only the panda mini character PND is displayed, There may be a case in which the mini character BCH of the leader is not displayed. Therefore, the player may be able to improve the desire to quickly press the effect button 136 in order to confirm the mini character BCH of the bankmaster. It should be noted that in this example of rendering, the expectation for the effect movable body 224 to operate is the same regardless of the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, but according to the number of displayed mini-characters BCH. For example, the effect movable body 224 may be made easier to operate as the number of displayed mini-characters BCH increases. In addition, the button image 136a displayed in FIG. 268 (6) may be displayed in the display mode of the Deca button or the display mode in which vibration and rotation are performed, and such a display mode is displayed. In this case, the mini-character BCH of the master may be displayed more easily than when displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (9), the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Further, all the mini-characters BCH of the Bancho are erased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and only the mini-character PND of the panda is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (9), two panda mini characters PND are displayed.

  FIG. 268 (10) shows that the eighth round has been started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (10), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT becomes 0, and the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation valid period was started. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (11), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and such an effect as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208 The display is being done. As described above, in this effect example, the action movable body 224 does not immediately operate in response to depression of the effect button 136, and the operation is performed only when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT becomes 0. It shows about the example of presentation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 268 (12), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is determined that the generation of the holding string will be generated. The display of "hold reservation fixed" is performed.

  FIG. 269 is a diagram stepwise illustrating another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 269 is the non-power-supporting state (non-time-shortening state). Therefore, the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 269 (1), three reserved icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and all three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are default. It is displayed in the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 changes the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 are moved to the display positions of the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12, respectively. The hold icon h11 is displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the mode shown in FIG. 253 (3) and described above, and a bancho icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT.

  FIG. 269 (4) shows that the button acceptance time meter MT is shortened as time passes after the start of the operation valid period.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (5), as shown in FIG. 269 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button acceptance time meter MT becomes gradually shorter according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Change.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (7), step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is further shortened according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (7), the panda icon approaches the number-long icon By displaying the word "gabut", it is shown that the panda is bitten by the bancho. This causes the player to expect something to happen, and as a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (8), after the icon of the first screen displayed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a panda icon, the pair of panda icons separates The characters “icon change” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged as the display SU2 of step 2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 269 (9), the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and a notice of the symbol variation display is performed. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged as the display SU2 of step 2 here. As described above, in this example, even if the step-up notice does not become the display SU3 of step 3, the change icon changes to the notice mode of the notice by the notice effect using the button acceptance time meter MT. In some cases, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for a big hit. In this effect, depending on the characters displayed on both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT, the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed with different ease. For example, icons displayed on both ends of the button acceptance time meter are displayed. In the case of the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda, the display SU3 of step 3 is hard to be displayed, and the step-up notice is easily ended by the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2; When the icons displayed at both ends are two number-long icons, the display SU3 of step 3 may be easily displayed.

  After that, when the first stop and the second stop of the decorative symbol are performed and the "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively, and the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 269 (10) In the device 208, the display of "reach" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 269 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the state of developing to the above-mentioned defeat reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (12), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (13), as shown in FIG. 269 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character is defeated by the swordsman of the enemy character, and the defeated screen is displayed. "Decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 6-Decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 270 is a view sequentially showing an example of the button continuous hitting operation effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 270 (1)-the same figure (6) is the same as that of FIG. 269 (1)-the same figure (6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (5) and the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 270 (6), FIG. 270 (7) In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, although the step-up notice is continuously performed, the display SU1 of step 1 is not changed to the display SU2 of step 2, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is further shortened according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (7), the panda icon approaches the ban icon and the panda icon Is trying to bite in the Bancho, but the word “Attack” is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 270 (8), it is shown that the panda is defeated by the Bancho. In this example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the panda takes on the game after the game is performed, than when the panda takes the game in the game. In the effect example, as will be described later, the suspended symbol variation display is likely to be a big hit).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (9), after the panda icon displayed at the right end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a long icon, a pair of long icon is separated. The characters “icon change” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU1 of step 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (10), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the present, and a suspension notice is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged as the display SU1 of step 1 here. As described above, in this example of the effect, even if the result of the step-up notice in the symbol variation display does not have the expectation for the big hit, the pre-reading notice using the button acceptance time meter MT may be performed. In some cases, it may be possible to have an expectation for becoming a big hit in the symbol variation display being held. Further, in this example of presentation, any of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 changes as a result of the notice effect by the button acceptance time meter MT being performed in the same display mode, so the effect of the notice of the symbol change display And at least a part of the effects are performed in the same manner in the pre-read advance notice and when it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation until the change icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14 changes There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (11), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (13), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. 270 (14) As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holiday 2-Decorative 2-Decorative 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 272 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. . In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 2" is stopped and displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 271 is the non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). Therefore, the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (1), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. Is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, moving animation of holding icon h11, h12 of special figure 1 is done, the holding icon which is the display position of the first holding icon h11 (the holding icon which is the object of this design fluctuation) fluctuation indicator display area 280 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 271 (3), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 271 (4), the button image 136a is erased as shown in FIG. 271 (5). The button acceptance time meter MT is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (5), the characters “stock chance” and “press well” are displayed, and in the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in an enlarged manner, the operation valid period Depending on the time since the start of the display mode changes as the gauge decreases. At this time, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the button reception time meter MT, three treasure boxes (treasure boxes TR1, TR2, and TR3) are arranged in a row in the remaining display portion of the gauge, and the right end portion of the gauge is displayed to decrease with time. It is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when each of the two passes through the center of each treasure box. That is, it is notified that the mini game of the timing press is started. In the example of this effect, the mini game with the button acceptance time meter MT may not be performed, and a preliminary announcement effect using the button acceptance time meter MT described above may be performed. In addition, the number of treasure boxes to be displayed may be different depending on the remaining amount of the gauge displayed according to the time from the start of the operation effective period when the effect button 136 is operated, for example, the effect button Since the remaining amount of gauges increases as the operation timing of 136 starts earlier after the operation effective period starts, the number of treasure boxes may be increased by that amount, and as the timing of operation of production button 136 is later, The number of treasure boxes to be displayed may be reduced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (6), at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR1 disposed at the rightmost of the three treasure boxes, the effect button 136 When operated, as shown in FIG. 271 (7), the treasure box TR1 may be moved upward, and the treasure box TR1 may be opened to cause a notice icon I71 of the sabothani to which the character of "change" is added. . The notice icon I71 of Sabohani is a form of pre-reading notice. When the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, it is forecasted that the change icon or the hold icon changes to the display mode of the notice. As described above, in this example of the effect, the effect button 136 is operated with good timing when the right end of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is substantially in the center of the treasure box disposed on the button acceptance time meter MT. A notice icon may be stocked. Here, the notice icon may be referred to as a notice item or a mini item. Even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is substantially at the center of the treasure box TR1, the advance notice icon may not appear. Also, something other than the notice icon may appear. For example, a notice character appears to give notice of the symbol variation display or give a notice of advance reading, or a mere effect display without notice (for example, an instruction display etc.) May be performed. In addition, even if the advance notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, the display mode of the change icon or the hold icon may not change.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (7), when the notice icon I 71 of Sabo Hani appears from the treasure box TR1, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (8), the notice icon of Sabo Hani appeared in the upper right corner of the display screen. I71 is displayed, showing that the notice icon has been stocked.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (9), the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes approximately the center of the treasure box TR2 disposed on the right side of the remaining two treasure boxes (treasure boxes TR2 and TR3) When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing, as shown in FIG. 271 (10), the treasure chest TR2 moves upward, and the treasure chest TR2 is opened, and the notice icon I72 of the lord with the character of “subjugation” added. May appear. This notice icon I72 of the lord is a form of pre-reading notice, and the strong cut-in CI1a is executed in the defeat reach which is scheduled to be executed with the symbol variation display being held by stocking the notice icon I72 of the lord. It is predicted that it will appear. That is, by the stocking of the notice icon I71 of the courtesy, the pre-reading notice that the punishment reach is performed in the suspended symbol variation display, and the pre-reading notice that the strong cut-in CI1a appears are performed. It can be said. It should be noted that the strong cut-in CI1a may not appear even if the grandchild's preview icon I72 is stocked, or the strong cut-in CI1a may always appear.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (10), when the notice icon I72 of the donkey appears from the treasure box TR, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (11), the notice icon of the honor which appeared in the upper right corner of the display screen. I72 is displayed, showing that the notice icon is stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 271 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing significantly delayed from the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is substantially at the center of one remaining treasure box TR3. As shown in FIG. 271 (13), the treasure box TR3 moves upward but is not opened, and the character "failure" is displayed, indicating that the timing pressing has failed. Therefore, the contents of the treasure box TR3 are not displayed, and the treasure box TR3 is erased as it is, as shown in FIG. 271 (14). If the timing press fails, the contents of the treasure box are displayed, but if the contents of the treasure box are the notice icons, they may not be stocked. Further, in the example of the effect, when the effect button 136 has the function of the auto button enabled, the right end portion of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is an approximate shape of each treasure box even if the effect button 136 is not operated. Each treasure box may be opened on the assumption that the effect button 136 is operated at the center timing, or the function of the auto button may be disabled in this timing-pressed mini game.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (15) shows that the button acceptance time meter MT has been erased and the mini game using the button acceptance time meter MT has ended. In addition, the notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lady are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” shakes A temporary stop due to fluctuations is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. Further, in this example, when the notice icon is displayed, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button acceptance time meter MT It is shown that the notice display using the symbol has an influence on the subsequent decoration symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. In addition, the notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lady are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (19) following FIG. 271 (18), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (20), the Sabo Hani notice icon I 71 moves to the approximate center of the display screen while being enlarged, and the Sabo Hani notice icon I 71 is shown to be digested .

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (21), the change icon h0 of the default display mode displayed in the change icon display area 280 changes to the display mode of the sabot hani, and the notice display by the change icon h0 It is shown that is being done. In addition, when the advance notice icon I71 of Sabo Hani is digested, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (21), after the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (22), the notice icon I 71 of the enlarged sabothani is erased, and thereafter As shown in FIG. 272 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (24), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (25), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "super hot" are displayed, and it is informed that the reach state has been reached, and the reliability of the big hit in this reach is It is suggested that it is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (27), it is shown that normal reach effect is being performed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (28), the state of the notice icon I72 of the lord moving to the approximate center of the display screen while being enlarged and the state of the notice icon I72 of the lord being digested is shown .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (30), the button preview effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (31), as shown in FIG. 272 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. As shown in FIG. 272 (28), the strong cut-in image CI1a appears as a result of digestion of the preview icon I72 of the lord. When the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button advance effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period. Even if not, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed after the lapse of the operation effective period. Further, in the mini game described above, if the preview icon I72 of the grandfather is scheduled to appear, but the timing of the presentation button 136 has failed and the preview icon I of the grandfather has not appeared, the strong cut-in image CI1a The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed more easily than the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 272 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5."

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 272 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a final display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of the "concerts 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  In this presentation example, as a result of the mini game, a notice icon may be stocked to the effect that a button operation effect in which a notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT described above is performed is performed. That is, the advance notice of the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT may be performed.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, in FIGS. 274 to 285, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 Although illustrated, the common view display device 210 and the common view holding lamp 216 are not shown. Also in FIGS. 274 to 285, the types of the special views to be stopped and displayed on the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 have the stop symbol form shown in FIG. 68 (a) and FIG. It is done. In addition, although a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated in FIGS. 274 to 285, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided as in the embodiment described above. It may be In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, with regard to the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIGS. 274 to 285, it can be applied that the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIGS. Nor.

  First, with reference to FIG. 273, the types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. Here, FIG. 273 (a) is a figure which shows another example of a decorative symbol, and the same figure (b) is a figure explaining the combination of the symbol used as the chance eye of a prior notice.

  As shown in FIG. 273 (a), in the decorative pattern of the present embodiment, in addition to the 10 kinds of decorative symbols of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10", two specials of "special 1" and "special 2" Decorative designs are also available. The decorative symbol of "special 1" may be referred to as a replay symbol, and for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 1" stops in middle symbol, or "special 1" is in all symbols. It is a decorative symbol that is to be subjected to a pseudo-series effect when it becomes a mode of stop display etc.). The decorative pattern of "special 2" is sometimes referred to as a chance button pattern, and is a display mode that represents the button in a simplified manner, and the display mode is different from the button image 136a as described above displayed in the button operation effect There is. For example, the display pattern of "special 2" includes a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 2" stops and displays in the middle symbol, a mode in which "special 2" stops and displays in all symbols, etc.) When it becomes, it is a decoration pattern by which button operation production is performed. Note that "special 1" and "special 2" are not always included in the variation display of decorative symbols, and appear as necessary, but they are always present in the variation display of decorative symbols. It may be included. Further, "special 1" and "special 2" are not displayed in a definite manner by a combination of decorative symbols including them, and function as a notice display for giving a notice of the contents of the effect to be performed thereafter. In addition, it is displayed by the combination of the decoration design including the decoration design of "special 1" or "special 2", and it functions as a pre-reading notice that the effect corresponding to "special 1" or "special 2" is performed You may In addition, although one type of symbol corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and one type of symbol corresponding to the button operation effect are prepared, respectively, two or more types may be provided. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the decorative symbol of "special 1" corresponding to a pseudo-series effect and the decorative symbol of "special 2" related to button operation effect are prepared, for example, a variation icon Alternatively, a special decorative symbol corresponding to the effect that the display mode of the holding icon changes to the display mode of the notice, or a special decorative symbol specifically suggesting the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be prepared. In this case, at least a part of the display mode of these special decorative symbols and the display mode of the image displayed when the corresponding effect is performed may be different or the same.

  As shown in FIG. 273 (b), in the present embodiment, it is a combination of decorative designs consisting of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3” and excluding the combination constituting the reach and the combination of the jackpot decorative designs The preview notice is configured to be able to be displayed by finalizing the display with a combination of decorative symbols (sometimes referred to as "chance eye"). Specifically, the combination of the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 7", the combination of the decoration design of the "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7", "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3" Design of the combination of the decorative design of the loss of "", and the combination of the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", the pattern having a high probability of becoming a big hit on the suspended design fluctuation display It is informed that the variable display is included.

  FIG. 274 is a view showing in stages an example of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 275 is a view showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 1—decorative 6—decorative 8” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In both the special figure 1 fourth pattern t1 and the special figure 2 fourth pattern t2, a symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of losing is displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Further, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 274 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280. The reserve icon of the special figure 1 represents the reserve number of the special figure 1 by the displayed number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The reserve icon in Special Figure 1 is displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the left side becoming the older the prize icon.

  Two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in FIG. 274 (1), and both of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 have the default display mode (round no It is displayed in a pattern and white display mode). On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 274 is the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult to open the power chute and it is difficult to win special figure 2 start port 232 It is because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a reserve icon of a special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280 according to the control state (playing state). . That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 274 (1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power-on state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is hidden.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is also a round non-pattern and white display mode, but the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the display position are made different. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be made different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a decision at first glance.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the blinking start or blinking of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decoration symbol. , This order may be back and forth.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the move animation of the hold icon h11, h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol fluctuation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (3), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (4), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "decorative 3-special 2-decorative 4" is displayed. The stop display (temporary stop display) is performed in combination. Then, as shown in FIG. 274 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button operation effect requiring operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, in this effect example, the stop symbol of "special 2" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, the decorative pattern of "special 2" is erased, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode in place of the decorative pattern of "special 2", and together with this button image 136a The button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed. In addition, the characters “press the chance button” are also displayed above the button image 136 a to promote the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the middle symbol may be erased or may be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed by a predetermined animation (for example, an animation in which the button moves up and down). As described above, the decorative image of "special 2" is displayed in a mode in which the buttons are displayed in a simplified manner as described above, whereas the button image 136a is a display mode imitating the effect button 136. And the display of the button acceptance time meter MT, which can be said to have different display modes. In addition, although the decoration pattern of "special 2" is made not to perform animation at least when it is stopped and displayed, animation may be performed during the stop display.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, if the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 274 (7), as shown in FIG. 274 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 When the button acceptance time meter MT is erased, symbols of a plurality of stars are displayed so as to cover the front side of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and a display is performed to affect these.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (9), after the slip variation display in which the middle symbol and the right symbol are changed at high speed is performed, as shown in FIG. 274 (10), the middle symbol and the right are displayed. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the design, and temporary stoppage is performed due to the fluctuation, and then, as shown in FIG. 274 (11), “decoration 3—decoration 7—decoration 7” in the decorative symbol display device 208 It is displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a chance eye and includes symbol variation displays that are likely to be a big hit in the symbol variation displays being held. It functions as a pre-reading notice to inform that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274 (11), it is predicted that the symbol variation display is highly likely that the suspension of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 will be a big hit. In this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 274 (10), when the game is temporarily stopped at the chance, the word "Chance" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance is eye Informing that pre-reading advance notice by.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (12), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (13) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (13), the characters "Mini game" and "Press well" are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed, and the approximate center of the timing meter is displayed. It is shown that the treasure box TR is arranged at. At this time, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this timing meter, the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge displayed to be reduced as time passes by the center of the treasure box TR.

  FIG. 274 (14) shows a state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 274 (15), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. The TR is enlarged and moved to the upper side of the timing meter, and a replay icon RP appears from the treasure box TR. A display in which a question mark is added to the characters “Continued” is displayed on the icon RP of this replay, and it is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-link will be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, it can be said that the icon RP of the replay functions as a notice of the pseudo-series effect in the symbol variation display. That is, in this example of presentation, the case where the icon RP of replay appears appears to be easier to start the pseudo-link than the case where it does not appear. Here, the icon RP of replay does not appear, for example, the icon of a button may appear, and when the icon of the button appears, the decorative symbol of “special 2” is stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a button operation effect will be performed. Here, when the button icon appears, the "special 2" decorative symbol may be displayed and the button operation effect may be started more easily than when the button icon does not appear. In addition, the timing meter continues to be displayed, and the bancho icon is displayed on the left and right ends of the gauge. The Bancho icon displayed on the right follows the reduced display of the gauge and moves toward the Bancho icon displayed on the left. If the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the timing meter gauge is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR1, something other than the replay icon RP may appear. For example, the button icon By appearing, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a button operation effect may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, the button operation effect may be more easily started when the button icon appears than when the button icon does not appear. In addition, even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end portion of the timing meter gauge is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR1, there may be a case where nothing appears.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (17), the treasure box TR is erased, the icon RP for replay is displayed substantially at the center, and a whirling effect is performed as to whether or not the pseudo link is performed. This turning effect is continued until the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. Until then, the timing meter continues to display the gauge decrease.

  Thereafter, when the remaining time of the gauge in the timing meter becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the operation effective period was started, the decorative symbol storage and display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (18) The display of the question mark in the icon RP is changed to the exclamation mark, and the text "I will continue" is displayed on the timing meter, and it is reported that the pseudo-link is to be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed by displaying the icon (replay icon RP) relating to the pseudo continuous effect before the decorative symbol of “special 1” is stopped and displayed. In some cases, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (19) following FIG. 274 (18), it is shown that the mini game is over and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (21), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (22), after the decorative symbol of “special 1” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), “special 1” The decorative design of is displayed in a stop, and the stop display (temporary stop display) is performed by the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 3-special 1-decoration 4". This "special 1" decorative pattern is a pattern in which the character of "Replay" is displayed on a substantially oval shape with a moon pattern, and the figure is different from the replay icon RP that appears as a result of the mini game. It is common in that it is the same, but the displayed characters are different.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), the decoration symbol of "special 1" stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is enlarged and displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is performed. The appearance of this "special 1" decorative symbol is that it is an effect performed by the appearance of the replay icon RP as a result of the mini game shown in FIG. 274 (13) to FIG. 18 (18) being performed. Can. If the mini game described above fails, the pseudo sequence may not be performed, or even if the mini game fails, the pseudo sequence may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (25), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (26), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (27), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 275 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other. At this time, the display of "Chance" notifying that the chance eye has appeared is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (29), it is shown that the button preview effect is started. In this button preview effect, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed in place of the button image 136a in the default mode. Although this large button image 136aL is an image imitating the effect button 136, it is a display mode that is larger than the button image 136a in the default mode. In addition, the display mode of the deca-button image 136aL is displayed in the previous symbol variation display (that is, displayed in a different decoration symbol variation display), the display pattern of the "special 2" decoration symbol shown in FIG. 274 (5) Both are different. As described above, in this presentation example, a plurality of button images are prepared as button images displayed in the button operation presentation, and a display pattern of the button image (the decoration pattern of "special 2") displayed as the decoration pattern It can be said that it has more display patterns. In addition, it may change to Deca button image 136aL, and the button image 136a of a default mode may be displayed. In this case, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the case where the large button image 136aL is displayed than in the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (30), as shown in FIG. 275 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 275 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 275 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 3”, “dec 3” and “dec 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A. In addition, as shown in FIG. 275 (33), when the decorative symbol is in the default display mode, the display of the character of “Chance” for notifying that the chance eye is displayed is resumed. It does not have to be.

  In this effect example, when the decorative symbol of the third stop is "special 1" or "special 2", button operation presentation or pseudo-series is performed, but "special 1" or "special 2" When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop or the first stop, a button operation effect or pseudo link may be performed. In addition, when the decorative pattern of “special 1” or “special 2” is included in two of the three decorative symbols, the button operation effect or the pseudo-link may be performed.

  Further, although this effect example has been described in comparison with the button image displayed in the button operation effect performed by displaying the decorative symbol of “special 2” in one decorative symbol variation display, one decoration The present invention also includes the comparison between the decorative pattern of "special 2" displayed in the symbol variation display and the button image displayed in the button operation effect unrelated to the display of the decorative pattern of "special 2". It can be applied as a concept.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 276, although the button operation effect is performed when the three "special 2" decorative symbols are aligned, the button operation effect is not started without the three "special 2" decorative symbols being aligned. It is shown that the production is being performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 276 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (3), the first stop is performed and “special 2” is displayed on the left symbol. "Is displayed stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (4), the second stop is performed, and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, when "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, "special 2" is more easily stopped and displayed on the right symbol than when "special 2" is not displayed and stopped on the left symbol. It is also good. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to give up early that the button operation effect is started, and the expectation for the button operation effect is expected to be expected until the last moment when the third stop of the decorative symbol is performed. There is a possibility. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "special 2-decoration 4-special 2" A temporary stop is displayed in combination, and three "special 2" are not aligned, and it is informed that the button operation effect is not started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left symbol and the right symbol are variably displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 276 (6), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 3" is displayed on the right symbol. Is displayed in a stopped state, and a temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative patterns of the “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3”, and then “decoration 4” as shown in FIG. 276 (7). -Decoration 4-It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of the loss of 3 ". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 277 is a view showing in stages the other example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 278 is a view showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 to FIG. 279, the pseudo-series effect is performed when three decoration symbols of “special 1” are aligned, and the button operation effect is performed when three decoration symbols of “special 2” are aligned. It is shown how it will be done. The effects shown in FIG. 277 (1) to FIG. 4 (4) are the same as those in FIG. 276 (1) to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 277 (4), after the second stop is performed and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (5), the third stop is a line In the middle pattern, the decoration pattern of "special 2" is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which "special 2" is aligned.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (6), the decorative symbol starts fluctuating display again, and the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button acceptance time meter MT along with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. At this time, the effect button 136 is also started to vibrate and rotate the internal mechanism. In the case where the effect button 136 vibrates and the internal mechanism rotates, the effect button 136 is more likely to be a big hit than when the vibration and the internal mechanism does not rotate (the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed) ) Is configured. This button operation effect can be said to be an advance notice effect in which a chance appears in the symbol change display, or is a previewed notice effect to notice that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the symbol change display being held. It can be said that. In addition, it may change to vibration and rotation button image 136aV, and the button image 136a of the default display aspect mentioned above may be displayed. In this case, for example, the display color of the button image 136a may be changed, the button image 136a may be displayed in a blinking manner, or the button image 136a may be displayed by a special animation. Moreover, it may change to vibration and rotation button image 136aV, and may be displayed by other display modes (for example, the display mode of a deca button etc.). At the timing shown in FIG. 277 (6), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective. As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, it is possible to display a button image corresponding to the state (at least one of vibration and rotation) of the effect button 136, and the display mode of "special 2" Can be said to have a different display. In this example of the effect, the effect button 136 may perform only the vibration and display a button image in which a state of vibrating corresponding to this is displayed, or only the rotation operation of the internal mechanism of the effect button 136 , And a button image may be displayed in which the user is shown to rotate accordingly. In addition, the button image 136a of the default display mode may be displayed in a normal state in which neither the vibration nor the rotation operation is performed in the effect button 136. In addition, a button image other than the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, in the state where the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, the button image 136a of the default display mode May be displayed. Also, on the contrary, although the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed, the effect button 136 may take a default state in which neither vibration nor rotation operation is performed.

  Thereafter, after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (7), as shown in FIG. 277 (8), the decorative symbol is displayed as a default. While the variable display is performed as an aspect, a plurality of star patterns are displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern in the variable display in a large and small manner, and a display that affects the decorative pattern in the variable display It will be.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (9), a temporary stop due to a fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decor 7-decor 7", and then Fig. 277 (10). It is displayed as shown in. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a chance eye and includes symbol variation displays that are likely to be a big hit in the symbol variation displays being held. It functions as a pre-reading notice to inform that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (10), it is predicted that the symbol variation display is highly likely that the suspension of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 will be a big hit. In this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 277 (9), when the game is temporarily stopped at the chance, the word "Chance" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance is eye Informing that pre-reading advance notice by.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (11), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12), the characters "Mini game" and "Press well" are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed, and the approximate center of the timing meter is displayed. It is shown that the treasure box TR is arranged at. At this time, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this timing meter, the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge displayed to be reduced as time passes by the center of the treasure box TR.

  FIG. 277 (13) shows the state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (14), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. To the display showing the appearance of the pattern BF of the face of the Bancho. Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (16), after the character of “continue” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 277 (17), the character of “following” is added to the fluctuation icon h0, and the symbol fluctuation display is displayed. It is notified in advance that a pseudo reunion will take place at. The fluctuation icon h0 to which the character "continuation" is added can also be said to be an example of a display mode of a symbol for effect for notifying that the pseudo connection is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of notification modes may be prepared for performing pseudo chaining.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (18) shows that the mini game is over and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) following FIG. 277 (18), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (20), the second stop is performed and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (21), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and once "special 1" is aligned. Stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (22), the character of the copanda appears, the character of “one more time” is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is performed. As described above, although the decorative symbol for notifying that the pseudo-link is performed has one kind of display mode (the decorative symbol of "special 1"), the symbol pattern for effect for notifying that the pseudo-linked is performed A plurality of display modes are prepared, and the number of variations is large.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24) shows that the selection effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), two boxes BXL and BXR are arranged side by side, and a button acceptance time meter MT is shown below the boxes. Here, the box disposed on the left side may be referred to as a left box BXL, and the box disposed on the right side may be referred to as a right box BXR. Further, an operation key image 137p schematically representing the operation key unit 137 is displayed above the two boxes BXL and BXR in a state in which the left and right button parts are highlighted, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is performed. The word "Select" is displayed to prompt the user. In addition, the left box BXL of the two boxes BXL and BXR is displayed in a manner surrounded by the cursor CSL. That is, in this presentation example, the cursor CSL is moved by operating the left button 137 c and the right button 137 d of the operation key unit 137 from the start of the operation effective period to the end of the operation effective period, When one of the boxes BXL and BXR is selected, an effect corresponding to the selected box is shown. The operation key image 137p is an image displayed only when the selection effect is performed, and is not prepared as a decorative symbol for notifying that the selection effect is performed. That is, no special symbol is prepared to announce that an operation effect will be performed. In addition, you may prepare separately the image which imitated the operation key unit 137 as a special symbol which announces that operation production is performed.

  Thereafter, after the operation acceptance period of the operation key unit 137 is started, when the right key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (25), as shown in FIG. 278 (26) The cursor CSL surrounding the left box BXL moves to surround the right box BXR.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 278 (27), when the operation acceptance period elapses and the gauge remaining amount of the button acceptance time meter MT disappears, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28) is not selected. The left box BXL is erased, only the selected right box BXR is displayed, the right box BXR is opened, and the replay icon RP appears in a manner with the question mark nearby. That is, the icon RP of this replay is different from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "special 1" in that a question mark is added. Thereby, it is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo link may be performed in the symbol variation display. In this rendering example, since the question mark is added to the icon RP of replay, it is not guaranteed that the pseudo ream is always performed. Therefore, there is a case where the pseudo link is not performed and it ends in a cassette. In addition, there may be a case where a question mark is not attached, and it may be displayed in a mode to guarantee that the pseudo link is always performed, or the pseudo link is always executed when the replay icon RP appears from the box. You may do so.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 278 (29), the character of “continuation” is added to the change icon h0, and the display of the change icon display area 280 corresponding to the display of the question mark added to the replay icon RP. A question mark is also displayed at the upper side, and it is also informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-link will be made in the symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (30), it is shown that the selection effect is ended and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (31), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (32), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), the enlarged display of the “special 1” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. At this time, the decorative pattern of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed without the reach effect being performed, or the decorative symbol of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed after the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), the character "one more time" is displayed below the decorative symbol of "special 1" and the question mark displayed above the variation icon display area 280 is displayed. It is changed to an exclamation mark, and it is informed that a pseudo link will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the decorative symbol of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed and the pseudo connection may be started after reaching the reach state. In addition, when a pseudo ream is not performed, after the decorative symbol of "special 1" scrolls out without stopping, reach production may be performed, and reach production is not performed, and the middle Any of the decorative symbols other than the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols or the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be derived.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (35), it is shown that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 3” display indicating the number of times the third variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (36), symbols of a plurality of stars are displayed so as to overlap on the front side of the variation icon h0, and a display as if affecting the variation icon h0 is performed. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (37) following FIG. 278 (36), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the sabothani. That is, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the advance notice. In the example of effects shown in FIG. 278 (36) to FIG. 279 (37), when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed instead of the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (38), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (39), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "super heat" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached, and it is suggested that the jackpot reliability in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 279 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), button advance notice effects are started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), in place of the button image 136a, a protrusion button image 136aS is displayed that schematically represents an aspect in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, This suggests that the button image 136a of the default display mode is more likely to be a big hit (i.e., the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed) than when displayed. In the projecting button image 136aS, a brow character is added to the front side, and a character "Press" is displayed below it, prompting operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, since the production button 136 is not equipped with a function to project upward, the state of the production button 136 is not compatible with the display mode of the projection button image 136aS, but the production button 136 may have a function capable of projecting upward, and in this case, the rendering button 136 may or may not project upward in accordance with the display of the projecting button image 136aS. . In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (42), as shown in FIG. 279 (43), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 279 (44), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 279 (45), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, as shown in FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 3”, “dec 3” and “dec 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. 6 (6), when the presentation button 136 is operated when the advance notice using the button acceptance time meter MT is not performed, the button acceptance time Although the meter MT is erased, for example, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the button acceptance time meter MT may be continuously displayed, and effect display may be performed using the remaining display portion of the gauge. This effect display may be a notice display, or may be an effect display other than the notice display.

  FIG. 280 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 280 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (3), “decoration 3” is displayed from above the display screen in the left symbol. It is shown that it scrolls in and moves downward. At this time, "decoration 3" is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol by high speed continues.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (4), the left symbol "decoration 3" moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, to the front side of the left symbol "decoration 3" A pattern of a plurality of stars is displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display as if to affect the "decoration 3" of the left pattern is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (5), after “decoration 3” of the left pattern is changed to the decoration symbol of “special 2”, stop display is performed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the symbol is changed to a “special 2” symbol that schematically represents the effect button 136 immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (6), it is shown that “decorative 1” scrolls in from the upper side of the display screen in the right symbol and moves downward. . At this time, "decorative 1" is moving at a low speed. In addition, in the middle design, the fluctuation display of the decoration design with high speed continues.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (7), the "symbol 1" of the right symbol moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, to the front side of the "symbol 1" of the right symbol. A pattern of a plurality of stars is displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display as if to affect the "decoration 1" of the right pattern is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (8), after the “decoration 1” of the right pattern is changed to the decoration symbol of “special 2”, the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (9), it is shown that “decoration 6” scrolls in from the upper side of the display screen in the middle symbol and moves downward. At this time, "decoration 6" is moving at a low speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (10), the "symbol 6" of the middle symbol moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, it moves to the front side of the "symbol 6" of the middle symbol. A pattern of a plurality of stars is displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display as if to affect the "decoration 6" of the middle pattern is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (11), after the “decotion 6” of the middle symbol is changed to the decoration symbol of “special 2”, it is stopped and displayed, and temporarily stopped in a mode in which three “special 2” are aligned. Displayed (provisional stop display).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (12), the decorative symbol starts fluctuating display again, and the button operation effect is started. The effects shown in FIG. 280 (12) are the same as those in FIG. 277 (6), so the description will be omitted.

  In this effect example, a state is shown in which the display is changed to the “special 2” decorative symbol simply imitating the effect button 136 immediately before the decorative symbol stops and the stop display is shown, but for example, the decorative symbol is stopped Just before doing, “special 2” may be interrupted in the order of arrangement of decorative symbols, and the “special 2” may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case where the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the order of "decorative 1"> "decorative 2"> ...> "decorative 10", "decorative 1" and "decorative 1" are displayed immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped. The decoration pattern of "special 2" may be inserted between the decorations 2 ", and the" special 2 "may stop and be displayed.

  FIG. 281: is a figure shown in steps about the other example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 281 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 281 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (3), the first stop is performed, and the left symbol "Is displayed stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (4), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (5), it is shown that the decorative symbol of “special 2” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward. This "special 2" decorative pattern is a display mode of an oversized size that is larger than the normal display mode. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (6), the left symbol and the right symbol are erased, and only the decorative symbol of “special 2”, which is the middle symbol, is stop displayed (provisional stop display). It is shown. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode by the combination of three decorative symbols may be displayed in the stop display mode by one decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), a simplified button image 136aX imitating the decorative symbol of "special 2" is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT. That is, the simplified button image 136aX has the display portion of the button in common with the decorative symbol of “special 2” in the display mode, but the decorative symbol of “special 2” is displayed at least with the button acceptance time meter MT. It can be said that the display mode is different. In addition, the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX may be a mode in which the character display of "Chance" is omitted from the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 2". In this case, although the button shape is common, It can be said that the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX differs from the display mode of the "special 2" decorative symbol depending on the presence or absence. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative symbol is not displayed, but for example, it may be displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (5), although the decorative symbol of “special 2” appears in the middle symbol and scrolling downward is shown, the button operation effect is performed. If not, for example, the decoration pattern of "special 2" is scrolled down without displaying stop, and then, as shown in FIG. 281 (6 '), the display of "decor 6" is displayed in the middle pattern After the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, the final display may be made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 3-decoration 6-decorative 1".

  FIG. 282 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the pseudo-series effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 282 (1)-the same figure (2) is the same as that of FIG. 274 (1)-the figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 282 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (3), the first stop is performed and “special 1” is displayed on the left symbol. "Is displayed stopped. The decorative symbol of "special 1" in this effect example is added with characters notifying the number of times of pseudo ream. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282 (3), the decorative symbol of "special 1" The character “× 1” is added to indicate that there is a possibility that the first pseudo run may be performed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (4), the second stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character of "x 1" is added to notify that the first pseudo link may be performed also for "special 1" in this right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and provisionally in a mode in which three "special 1" are aligned. Stop display. Here too, the character of "x 1" is added to notify that the first pseudo run may be performed for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (6), the decorative symbol in which three "specials 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1" which is a display mode of oversized size It is shown that it is being done. Thereby, it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode by the combination of three decorative symbols may be displayed in the stop display mode by one decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (7), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (8), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. The decorative symbol of "special 1" shown in FIG. 282 (8) also has a character to notify the number of times of pseudo run and is notified that there is a possibility that the second pseudo run will be performed "× 2" The letter of is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (9), the second stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character "x 2" is added to notify that there is a possibility that the second pseudo run may be performed even for "special 1" in this right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and provisionally in a mode in which three "special 1" are aligned. Stop display. Here too, the character of "x 2" is added to notify that the second pseudo link may be performed also for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (11), the decorative symbol in which three "specials 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of the "special 1" which is a display mode of oversized size It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is informed that the second pseudo link will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (12), it is shown that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 3” display indicating the number of times the third variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link is performed.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, the number of pseudo runs is displayed on the decoration symbol of "special 1", but the display mode of the decoration symbol itself of "special 1" is changed according to the number of pseudo runs. You may do so. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize the number of pseudo runs.

  FIG. 283 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIG. 283 (1) to FIG. 2 (2) are the same as those in FIG. 274 (1) to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 283 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (3), the first stop is performed and “special 2” is displayed on the left symbol. "Is displayed stopped. The decorative character of "special 2" in this presentation example is displayed in a mode in which a mini-head character BCH of a Bancho is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (4), the second stop is performed, and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Unlike the decorative symbol of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the decorative symbol of "special 2" in the right symbol is displayed in a mode in which a panda mini character PND is added. In this effect example, even if the same "special 2" decorative symbol, since the added symbol is different, it may be possible to prevent misidentification that reach has occurred. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. On the decorative pattern of "special 2" in the middle symbol, a mini-character BCH having the same length as the decorative symbol of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the left symbol is displayed. As a result, the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which three "specials 2" are aligned, but in this effect example, the types of mini characters added to "special 2" stopped and displayed on the right symbol are different. . That is, in this example of the effect, even when three "special 2" are aligned, the display mode of at least one "special 2" is different from the display mode of the other "special 2", so the symbol is In some cases, it may be possible to prevent false recognition that a big hit has occurred. In this demonstration example, the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the right symbol and the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol are the same, but three "special 2" All of the display modes may be different. In addition, all types of mini characters added to three “special 2” s may be the same (for example, a mini-character BCH of a bancho is added to any of three “special 2” Also, in this case, the jackpot reliability is higher (the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized and displayed) than when the types of mini characters added to the three “special 2” are not all the same. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (6), a state in which the button operation effect is started is shown because three decorative symbols of “special 2” are aligned and stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button acceptance time meter MT along with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. Furthermore, a mini-character BCH of a guard length is added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, and in this respect, it can be said that the display pattern and the decorative pattern of the "special 2" described above are common. At this time, neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed, and the effect button 136 is in the normal state, but the vibration and the rotational operation of the internal mechanism may be started. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The mini character added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be a mini character (for example, a panda mini character PND, etc.) other than the mini character BCH having the set length. At this time, the reliability of the big hit may be made to differ depending on the type of the additionally displayed mini character, and, for example, the mini character BCH of the slot length is displayed than when the panda mini character PND is displayed. In the case, the jackpot may be made more reliable. In addition, as in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 280 (12), the mini character may not be additionally displayed, and when the mini character is additionally displayed, the big hit than when the mini character is not additionally displayed. The reliability of the symbol may be high (the jackpot symbol is likely to be determined and displayed). Also, in place of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the button image 136a of the above-described default display mode may be displayed. At this time, a mini-character BCH of a game-length or a mini-character PND of a panda may be added to the button image 136a. At the timing shown in FIG. 283 (6), the operation effective period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 283 (7), as shown in FIG. 283 (8), the character “× 1” The stop display is performed in a mode in which three decorative symbols of “special 1” to which “is added” are aligned, and it is informed that the first pseudo link will be performed. In addition, the mini character mentioned above may be added and displayed on the decoration pattern of "special 1", In this case, at least one mini character of the decoration patterns of three "special 1" is another "special 1" You may make it prevent misidentification with respect to a big hit and a reach state by making it different from the mini-character of the decorative design of "".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (9), the decorative symbol in which three "specials 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1" which is a display mode of oversized size It is shown that it is being done. Thereby, it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (10), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  FIG. 284 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 284 (1) through (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 274 (1) through (7), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (7) after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 284 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button The image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the second reserved icon h12, and a display is performed to affect these. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, "decoration 4" is scrolled in from the upper side of the display screen, and it is shown that it is moving toward the stop position of the middle pattern due to low speed fluctuation.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (9), it is shown that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button preview display mode. That is, the display mode of the button preview is a display mode of the preview notice. The display mode of this button preview is different from the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 2" in that the character "Chance" is not displayed and an animation prompting button operation is displayed. . The middle symbol continues to change at a low speed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (10), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and then the decoration is performed as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "losing 3-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. The second hold icon h12 changed to the button image has not changed yet.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol fluctuation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The second hold icon h12, which was the display mode of the button preview, is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the button preview continues. Be done.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (13), as shown in FIG. 284 (14), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of Sabohani from the display mode of the button advance notice. It is changed to an aspect. It is suggested that this is a symbol variation display with high possibility of becoming a big hit the symbol variation display reserved at the first.

  FIG. 285 (A) is a view showing another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 285 (B) is a simulation performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure shown about the other example of a row production.

  FIGS. 285 (A1) to (A2) show how the contents of the button operation effect are suggested by the decorative symbol of “special 2”. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (A1), a state is shown in which the decorative symbol of “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol. In this effect example, the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is different from the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the left and right symbols, and the effect button 136 is simulated. It is assumed that the And in this "special 2" of the middle symbol, the character "hold change" is displayed on the upper surface, and by the effect button 136 being operated in the button operation effect, the hold icon (or the change icon) It is notified in advance that the display mode may change. That is, it can be said that the decoration symbol of "special 2" of the middle symbol is a dedicated display mode in which it is notified that change notification of the holding icon due to the button holding is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (A2), it is shown that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, when the button operation effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the decorative symbol in which three "specials 2" are aligned, and instead, the button image 136a represented in the extra large size is displayed It is shown that it is done. The character "hold change" is displayed on the upper surface of the button image 136a, and it is notified that change preview of the hold icon due to the button hold is being performed. The button image 136a has the same display mode as the "special 2" of the dedicated display mode, but differs in that an animation promoting button operation is performed. That is, it can be said that a part of the display mode is common to the button image 136a shown in FIG. 285 (A2) and the decorative symbol of “special 2” of the dedicated display mode shown in FIG. 285 (A1). On the other hand, the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold has the characters “Push” displayed on its upper surface, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated, the button image 136a is erased, and the hold icon h11 of the button hold display mode changes to another display mode (for example, a display mode of Sabohani, a default display mode, etc.) .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (B), a pseudo-announced notice icon acquired and stocked in a mini game or the like is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The pseudo-reminder notice icon is a notice icon displayed in a manner in which the character of "pse-cho-rench" is added to the character of the lady, and may be displayed by both the prefetch notice and the notice in the symbol variation display. However, the display mode may be different between the pre-reading advance notice and the symbol variation display. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (B), it is shown that three decorative symbols of “special 1” are aligned to generate a pseudo-link. In FIG. 285 (B), there is no relevance between the pseudo-series notice icon displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen and the display of the mode in which three decoration symbols of “special 1” are aligned, Both may be related. Here, the display mode differs between the display mode of the pseudo-announced notice icon and the display mode of the decorative symbol of "special 1", and the player can clearly distinguish the notice icon from the decorative pattern. There is.

  In the embodiments described above, the main display device having a large screen size and one or more sub display devices having a screen size smaller than the main display device may be provided. In this case, For example, a symbol displayed on a sub-display device whose screen size is smaller than that of the main display device than a symbol (decorative symbol, button image, various icons, characters, etc.) displayed on the main display device whose screen size is large. You may make it display the larger one.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]"
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
Notice means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand frame lamp 542 and the like] ,
A game console equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a pending display [eg, a pending icon etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, the hold icon display area of the special view 2, the variation icon display area 280, etc.] in the image display means.
The said pending | holding display is a display according to the number (Hereafter, it is called "the number of pending | holding.") For which the operation | movement of the said symbol variation display is suspended. A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 etc.] in the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons [for example, the notice icon display area 285 is formed of a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6 , Each area is configured to be able to display the notice icon],
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be executed, and if the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a first notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6 or the like] of the plurality of kinds of notice icons is a first number [for example, two, etc. When the second number [for example, three etc] which is larger than the first number is digested, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when it is digested.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of an effect may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display within the hold. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from missing the notice corresponding to the notice icon.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and the consumption of the advance notice icon.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol fluctuation display, or may not execute symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of notices, or may be capable of being executed other than the plurality of types of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of types of notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of notices.

  In addition, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of display other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in addition to the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be, for example, characters, numbers, or symbols.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  In addition, the symbol variation display may be started only when the holding is digested, or may be started other than when the holding is digested. The symbol variation display may be started whenever the retention is digested, or may not be initiated when the retention is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may display one or more notice icons or may not display one or more notice icons.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the type of notice corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [eg, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is A notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change displayed as the notice icon to the digested change, it is possible to play the game so that the player does not miss the notice display. There are cases where you can

  Here, the notice icon may display only the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or a number other than the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or does not display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, "the above-mentioned notice means is a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the above-mentioned notice [for example, a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect etc. to be a big hit] [eg a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect etc. to be dropped] A viable means,
The notice means is a type of notice icon which is digested when one notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a box of notice icons I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. A means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition presentation, etc., which is to be lost],
After the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be disjointed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to feel tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the false notice of the same aspect as the aspect of the notice, or may be other than the false notice of the same aspect as the aspect of the notice. May be In addition, the notice means may always carry out a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the notice, or may not carry out a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the notice.

  Further, even if the notice means is capable of executing only the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be executable. . In addition, the notice means may execute a false notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In the case where one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, there may be a case where a false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon is not executed.

  In addition, after the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation indication may be configured to be always disjoint, or after the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation indication may be a big hit. It may be.

  In addition, there may be a case where a notice with a high probability that a big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means may be executed after a false notice is executed.

In addition, during the period during which the one symbol variation display is being performed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is greater than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [eg, three etc.] larger than the number of three is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the number at which the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display.

In addition, it is equipped with “hold display means capable of executing display according to the number of holds [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, effect hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display of the hold display and the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of executing only the display according to the number of holdings, or may be capable of executing other than the display according to the number of holdings. Further, the hold display means may always execute display according to the hold number, or may not execute display according to the hold number.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

  Here, the holding display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include other than the light emitting means (for example, the image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package may include a plurality of LEDs such as a full color LED. Moreover, it may be configured by a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the emission operation notification means for notifying the operation of the emission operation means may be realized by the light emission means.

In addition, "prediction notice means capable of executing pre-notice notice [for example, decoration symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540 ],
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the notice icon, there may be a case where the expectation to the big hit can be enhanced.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than pre-reading notice. In addition, the pre-reading notice means may always carry out the pre-reading notice or may not carry out the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by any means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. It may be possible to execute pre-reading notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Also, "the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter," the second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold being a prefetching target shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.] The notice icon may be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc.] during the period in which the
The above-mentioned symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three prefetching targets shown in FIG. 82 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is being held in a period during which the first symbol change display is being performed [eg, in FIG. 82 (4) During a period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead shown is being executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead is It is displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, etc.], and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the number of digests of the notice icons differs between the case of symbol variation display to be read ahead and the case of symbol variation display executed before the symbol change display to be read ahead. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to make the symbol variation display to be noticed by the player easy to understand.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Moreover, in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed The preview icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

  In addition, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed The advance notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  In addition, the suspension display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol fluctuation display is being executed, or the first In the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the suspension display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol fluctuation display is being executed, or the first symbol may be displayed. It may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is being performed.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as" fourth symbol change display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digestion display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display where the notice icon is digested, the player may be expected to have an expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be always started to be displayed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon is The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start being displayed only during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be started during a period other than the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested.

In addition, during the period in which the “symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ third symbol variation display ”) to be executed before the“ fourth symbol variation display ”is executed, the fourth The display of the notice icon to be digested may be started during the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed increasing during execution of the symbol variation display which is executed earlier than etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to be started to be displayed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon to be digested may be started to be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In addition, during the period when the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be configured to be always started to be displayed, or In a period in which three symbol variation displays are being performed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may not start to be displayed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to start display of the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

Also, “the pending display area is an area where the pending display can be displayed up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the number of possible displays of the hold display and the number of possible display of the notice icon are different, the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the advance notice icon display area may display advance notice icons up to the eighth number or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the advance notice icons may be the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the hold display of the special view 1 or may be the same or at least the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the hold display of the special view 2, or may be at least the same or the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the sum of the displayable maximum numbers of the special display 1 and the special display 2 and may be at least the same or the same.

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand lamp 542 Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 85 (49) to FIG. (50) or FIG. 97 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. (Bb)],
The first notice is a different notice from the second notice,
One of the multiple effects is a first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIG. 85 (51) to FIG. (57) or FIG. 97 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to know in advance the content of the effect to be executed, so it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be notices other than the first notice and the second notice. The notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering and the second rendering, or may be capable of executing the rendering other than the first rendering and the second rendering. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the first effect are executed. . In addition, the first advance notice may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is performed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is performed. . In addition, the second advance notice may always notify that the second effect is performed, or may not notify that the second effect is performed.

Also, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested [eg, for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66), FIG. 94 (1) As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased advance notice icons are all digested, etc.], and the game table is characterized. "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the display of the notice icon is always executed, the player's sense of expectation may be able to be improved.

Also, “The game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [eg, first special view display device 212, second special view display device 214, etc.]”
A second display means [for example, a combination of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration symbol display device 208 and the first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 or the effect holding lamp 286];
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [eg pseudo-series effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variation effect, etc.] And
The second display means holds a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as the “number of reservations”). Display means capable of displaying on the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2, the variation icon display area 280, the reserved display area of the reserve lamp 286 for effect, etc.] [eg, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 etc.] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons [for example, the notice icon display area 285 is formed of a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6 , Each area is configured to be able to display the notice icon],
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested It is a means [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-series effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the one and two box is digested, the reach transition effect is executed There is a case etc],
A second number [eg, three, etc.] digested that is larger than the first number during the period when one symbol variation display is being executed, rather than the first number if the advance notice icon is digested. It is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if it is
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of an effect may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display within the hold. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from missing the notice corresponding to the notice icon.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and the consumption of the advance notice icon.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may have a display capable of displaying in addition to the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of reservations only in the suspension display area, or may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of reservations other than the suspension display area It may be. Furthermore, the second display means may display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area without fail, and may not display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be startable except when the hold is digested. Also, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the retention is digested, or may not be initiated even if the retention is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may display one or more notice icons or may not display one or more notice icons.

  Further, the second display means can display only the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested can be displayed. It is also good. Further, the second display means always displays, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, there may be a case where the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon is not displayed.

Also, the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 Notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change at which the notice icon is displayed to the change which is digested, the game is performed so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to

  Here, the notice icon may display only the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed Other items may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or displays a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. May not do.

Also, "the second display means is a fake notice display of the same form as the form of the advance notice display [for example, a pseudo-sequence effect or reach transition effect that will be a big hit, etc.] Display means capable of displaying transition effects etc.,
The second display means is a display that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for hat, the notice icon I 9 for a box, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means capable of displaying the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-run notice or reach transition effect etc. to be lost],
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or other than the false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. May also be displayable. In addition, the second display means may display a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or may not display a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. It may be.

  Also, the second display means can display only the type of false notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It may be displayed, and when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it is possible to display other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon It may be Further, the second display means always displays a false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If there is one warning icon displayed in the notice icon display area, it may not be displayed a false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the warning icon that has been digested. .

  In addition, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be always disjointed after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after a false advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display having a high possibility of displaying a big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

In addition, during the period during which the one symbol variation display is being performed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is greater than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [eg, three etc.] larger than the number of three is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the number at which the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display.

"The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means, and
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a reserve display means [for example, the first special view reserve lamp 218, the second special view reserve lamp 220, the effect reserve lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, the hold lamp of the number according to the hold number, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display of the hold display and the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display unit may be configured by two display units, or may be configured by three or more display units.

  Further, the second display means may be configured only by the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured to include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be one in which the image display means and the hold display means are necessarily configured, or may not constitute at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. The hold display means may be configured to include the hold display area without fail, or may not include the hold display area.

  Also, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of hold other than the hold display area It is also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variation display of the decorative symbol or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

  Here, the holding display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include other than the light emitting means (for example, the image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package may include a plurality of LEDs such as a full color LED. Moreover, it may be configured by a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the emission operation notification means for notifying the operation of the emission operation means may be realized by the light emission means.

Also, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]"
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the variation display of the decorative symbol and the holding icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holdings while visually recognizing the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the image display means may always display the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variation display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "prediction notice means capable of executing pre-notice notice [for example, decoration symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540 ],
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the notice icon, there may be a case where the expectation to the big hit can be enhanced.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than pre-reading notice. In addition, the pre-reading notice means may always carry out the pre-reading notice or may not carry out the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by any means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. It may be possible to execute pre-reading notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Also, "the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter," the second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold being a prefetching target shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.] The notice icon may be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc.] during the period in which the
The above-mentioned symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three prefetching targets shown in FIG. 82 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed [eg, FIG. 82 It corresponds to the second hold that is the target of read-ahead during the period when the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead shown in (4) The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and the like], and the like. "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the number of digests of the notice icons differs between the case of symbol variation display to be read ahead and the case of symbol variation display executed before the symbol change display to be read ahead. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to make the symbol variation display to be noticed by the player easy to understand.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Moreover, in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed The preview icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

  In addition, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed The advance notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of reservations may be able to notify only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of reservations may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, In the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, there may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as" fourth symbol change display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digestion display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display where the notice icon is digested, the player may be expected to have an expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be always started to be displayed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon is The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start being displayed only during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be started during a period other than the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested.

In addition, during the period in which the “symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ third symbol variation display ”) to be executed before the“ fourth symbol variation display ”is executed, the fourth The display of the notice icon to be digested may be started during the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed increasing during execution of the symbol variation display which is executed earlier than etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to be started to be displayed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon to be digested may be started to be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In addition, during the period when the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be configured to be always started to be displayed, or In a period in which three symbol variation displays are being performed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may not start to be displayed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to start display of the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

“The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number (eg, four or eight, etc.),
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the display according to the number of reservations and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the display according to the hold number up to the seventh number, or even if the display according to the hold number may not be displayed up to the seventh number Good.

  In addition, the advance notice icon display area may display advance notice icons up to the eighth number or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of displays according to the number of reservations may be the same as the displayable maximum number of notice icons.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the display according to the number of reservations of the special view 1, or may be at least the same or the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the display according to the number of reservations of the special view 2, or at least it may be the same.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable maximum number of notice icons may be greater than the sum of the maximum number of displayable numbers of displays according to the number of reservations of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2, or at least the same. Good.

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand lamp 542 Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 85 (49) to FIG. 50 (50) or FIG.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the multiple effects is a first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIG. 85 (51) to FIG. (57) or FIG. 97 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The game stand characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is performed. "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to know in advance the content of the effect to be executed, so it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays notices other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may display the first notice display and the second notice display without fail, and may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. It is also good.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering and the second rendering, or may be capable of executing the rendering other than the first rendering and the second rendering. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the first effect are executed. Good. In addition, the first advance notice display may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second advance notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the second effect are executed. Good. In addition, the second advance notice may always notify that the second effect is to be performed, or may not notify that the second effect is to be performed.

Also, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested [eg, for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66), FIG. 94 (1) As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased advance notice icons are all digested, etc.], and the game table is characterized. "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the display of the notice icon is always executed, the player's sense of expectation may be able to be improved.

Also, “The game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a pre-reading notice, but may be separately displayable from the pre-reading notice. Alternatively, the display of the advance notice icon may be different from that displayed in the pre-reading mode. For example, the notice icon may be increased or digested even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may be increased or digested even while executing a special background mode for prefetching. It is also good.

  Also, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, and when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or c is displayed and the notice icon C is displayed. When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice display a is digested when the notice c is displayed. It is a display that is displayed in the case where it is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, “pattern for displaying notice display b, notice display c or notice display d The jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when "the symbol variation display in which the advance notice a is displayed" is performed than when the "variation display" is performed. The notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is a display, and it is easier for a big hit symbol to be displayed more clearly when "the symbol variation display with the advance notice display b displayed" is executed than "the symbol variation display with the notice display c displayed" is executed. May be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested, and the notice icon C is Once digested, any one of the notice display b, notice display c or notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed when "the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested" is executed rather than the "figure change display in which the notice icon C is digested" is executed. It may be configured to be easy. In addition, rather than the “pattern change display in which the advance notice display d is displayed” is executed, the one that “indication change in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed is the big hit symbol It may be configured to be easily determined and displayed.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special view display device 212, second special view display device 214, etc.];
A second display means [for example, a combination of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration symbol display device 208 and the first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 or the effect holding lamp 286];
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [eg pseudo-series effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variation effect, etc.] And
The second display means holds a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as the “number of reservations”). Display means capable of displaying on the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2, the variation icon display area 280, the reserved display area of the reserve lamp 286 for effect, etc.] [eg, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 etc.] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is constituted by a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6, Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested. If the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be executed, and if the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During a period in which one of the symbol variation display is being executed, a second number [greater than the first number when the advance notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] For example, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if it is digested, etc.
The second display means is based on the third change of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [e.g., the object of prefetching shown in FIG. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a prefetch notice notice before the start of symbol variation display etc.).
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also, the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 Notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second display means is a fake notice display of the same form as the form of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect that is a big hit, etc.] Display means capable of displaying transition effects etc.,
The second display means is a display that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for hat, the notice icon I 9 for a box, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means capable of displaying the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-run notice or reach transition effect etc. to be lost],
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The second display means is composed of a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] The displayed means,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one display means among the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a reserve display means [for example, the first special view reserve lamp 218, the second special view reserve lamp 220, the effect reserve lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, the hold lamp of the number according to the hold number, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. 83 (20), the notice icon is displayed as a preview notice. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [eg, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],”
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during the period when “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.] is being executed, May be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc],
The above-mentioned symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three prefetching targets shown in FIG. 82 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed [eg, FIG. 82 It corresponds to the second hold that is the target of read-ahead during the period when the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead shown in (4) The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and the like], and the like. "
I also explained about

In addition, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be pre-read [eg, FIG. 82 (1) ~ As shown in FIG. 86 (66) and FIGS. 94 (1) to 98 (66), the notice icons that have been increased are all digested until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notification icon is digested is executed, the notification icon may be started to be displayed [eg, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digestion display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

In addition, during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed while the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed increasing, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg four or eight, etc.],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand frame lamp 542 Etc.],
As the notice icon, it is configured to be able to display a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I9 of a two-sided box shown in FIG. 85 (47) or FIG. 96 (47)].
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 of a ribbon shown in FIG. 92 (Ab), etc.] can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 85 (49) to FIG. 50 (50) or FIG.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the multiple effects is a first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIG. 85 (51) to FIG. (57) or FIG. 97 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The game stand characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is performed. "
I also explained about

Also, “main control means [eg, main control unit 300 etc.]”;
Effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.]
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the display types is a notice icon,
While displaying the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2)], the notice icon The display of the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6 etc.] may be started as [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.],
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. 83 As shown in (14), even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (14), it is not digested etc. at the timing shown in FIG. ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the “second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold being the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2) [Variation display etc.]]) is configured such that the first notice icon which has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested [eg, FIG. 9) to 83 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is, as shown in FIG. Digested in
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

In addition, the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, a hat notification icon The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested, etc. in the symbol variation display where the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, as the preview notice of the second symbol variation display, the first preview icon may be started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. As shown in 83 (25), the symbol variation which is the target of prefetching so that the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. A notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed as a notice of pre-reading of display etc.], a game table characterized by the above. I also explained about.

In addition, during the display of “one pattern change display,” a second number [for example, three etc.] than when the first number [for example, one etc.] of the first notice icon is digested. If the first notice icon of] is digested, it is likely to be a big hit,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10, etc.] can be displayed as“ the notice icon ”.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the symbol variation display digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (60) to the same figure (66), the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested And the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-sequence effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach shift effect, premier notice effect, re-change effect, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] is digested, the first notice display as the notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIG. 84 (28) to FIG. Reproduction etc. may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect that becomes off, etc.],
When the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6 etc.] is digested, the first false notice table [for example, false consecutive effect etc. to be missed] indication is displayed as the false notice display. In some cases,
The display mode of the first false preview display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first preview display,
In the symbol variation display where the first false notice display is displayed, it is configured to be a gap,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect to be transferred to a special stage shown in FIG.
A third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 of a ribbon, etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started [for example, if one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, The effect is that the background shifts to the pre-reading mode, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the display means is constituted by a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] Is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variation display of a decorative symbol, etc.] Is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, based on the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on a hold that is three prior to the hold that is the target of the prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (9) The notice icon I6 of the hat whose display has been started during the symbol variation display is configured to be necessarily digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [e.g. In the symbol variation display based on, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 etc.] in the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is constituted by a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.]” is provided.
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “main control means [eg, main control unit 300 etc.]”;
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.];
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Further, in the above description, the game console includes “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the multiple types of displays may be a notice icon [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 81 (b), notice icon I21 of "house", notice icon I22 of "print". , "Hail" notice icon I31, "Hime" notice icon I32, "爺" notice icon I33],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes the big hit based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in Figure 104 (1)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 105, "house" is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in the period from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished. Notice icon I21 and notice icon I22 of "print" are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (23) to FIG. 84 (32), a hat If the notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-link may be performed, and as shown in FIG. 85 (46) to FIG. May be started etc],
The first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed [for example, the combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" shown in FIG. 104] changes by one symbol By being digested in the display, the first effect display [for example, the effect image etc. displayed in the family crest fall effect shown in FIG. 105 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be possible to continue to have an expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the first combination notification icon is digested.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible to show a plurality of notice icons in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started, and to give a feeling of expectation to the big hit There is a possibility.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the effect indication corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed in some cases, and when the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. The effect display corresponding to may not be displayed.

  In addition, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of preliminary announcement icons is digested in one symbol variation display, only the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. It is configured that the first combination of a plurality of displayed advance notice icons is digested in one symbol change display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. It may be done. In addition, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. The first combination display may be not displayed as one of the presentation effects as the first combination of the plurality of displayed advance notice icons is digested in one time the symbol variation display.

  In addition, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is configured to be displayed as the first effect display as the effect display only by being digested in one symbol variation display It is configured that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the plurality of displayed advance notice icons is digested in one symbol change display. It may be done.

Also, “the first combination is a combination consisting of a first number [for example, two etc.] of the notice icons,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the first effect display is displayed until one notice icon of the first combination of the first number notice icons is displayed and the first number notice icons are digested. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that it may be displayed.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [eg, notice icon I21 of“ house ”and the like” and a second notice icon [eg, notice icon I22 of “print”, etc.] ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including the notice icons other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be Also, the first combination may be a combination that necessarily includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination not including at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (19), the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended The notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print" displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested in the period from when the symbol variation display ends to the end
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested in one pattern variation display, the first effect display is not displayed [eg, Even if only one of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested, the effect image shown in FIG. 105 (21) is not displayed, etc.], Stand. "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is not digested in one pattern change display, so the first effect display It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can see the

  Here, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested in one pattern variation display, only the first effect display may not be displayed, or one time In the symbol variation display of, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. In addition, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested in one pattern variation display, the first effect display may not necessarily be displayed, or one time In the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be displayed.

  In addition, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested only in one symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed, or only once. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested.

In addition, by digesting the third preview icon [for example, the hat forecast icon I6 or the like shown in FIG. 83] as the preview icon, the third effect display as the effect display [for example, FIG. ) Is displayed so that a display effect etc. of the character BC of the group leader displayed corresponding to the consumption of the notice icon I6 of the hat, pushes up the right symbol, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, variations of the effect may be increased, and the effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third preview icon, or the third preview icon may be digested. A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. In addition, the third announcement display may be displayed without fail by the third announcement icon being digested, or the third announcement icon may be digested by the third announcement icon. The display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third effect display may be displayed only by the third notice icon being digested, and the third notice icon may be displayed other than being digested. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during the period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 82] As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) and the symbol variation display to be lost etc.) is suspended] In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The said hold display means is a means which can display the display of the number corresponding to the number (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") for which the start of the symbol variation display is held [for example, the hold icon shown in The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings according to the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[First display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.];
A second display means [eg, a second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, a second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The first display means is a display related to the notice icon [eg, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 109 (10) to 110 (13) is digested, and FIG. 110 (16) to FIG. 112. The display of the character BC of the captain who is performed corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat or the pseudo continuous effect, or the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 112 (c1) to FIG. Etc] can be displayed,
The second display means displays a display related to the notice icon [eg, notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 109 (2) to FIG. 110 (13) or FIG. 109 (5) to FIG. 112 (c6), or a display capable of displaying the warning icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [eg, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81 may function as a prefetch notice display, etc.]
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in Figure 112 (c1)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 112 (c1) to FIG. 112 (c9), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, the line of sight of the player who sees the display regarding the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means. It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may be composed only of the first display means and the second display means, or may be provided with display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the advance notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display concerning the advance notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display on the advance notice icon, or may not display the display on the advance notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the advance notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display concerning the advance notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the display on the advance notice icon, or may not display the display on the advance notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. 112 (c1), etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 112 (c1) to FIG. (C9), it is a target of prefetching In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, the notice icon may be displayed on “the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.] [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (5), a hat forecast icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display means by which stock effect can be performed is defined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. The second display means may be configured to always display the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, and the notice icon is also displayed on display means other than the second display means. It is also good.

In addition, that the notice icon is displayed on “the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.] A display for giving a notice may be displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (2) to FIG. 5 (5), a display for giving notice that a hat notification icon I6 is displayed in the notification icon display area Effects are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, since it is notified that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be displayed, it may be possible to make the display means pay attention to the player and prevent the player from missing the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is displayed may be displayed, or a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is displayed on the first display means It may be possible to display other than the above. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. It may not be done.

  Further, there may be a case where a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is displayed may be displayed only in the first display means, and the notice icon is displayed also in the display means other than the first display means. In some cases, it may be displayed to give notice.

[The first display means is a first display area [e.g., the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.] It is a means provided
The second display means is provided with a second display area [e.g., the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.] It is a means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [e.g., as shown in FIG. 109 (4) or FIG. [1] being displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce an effect of a notice icon with an impact, and it may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with display areas other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed across only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. Also, the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area in some cases, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area, and those other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. May be displayed across the screen.

[The first display means is a first display area [e.g., the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.] It is a means provided
The second display means is provided with a second display area [e.g., the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.] It is a means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 81],
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [e.g. As shown in 110 (16) to (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the enlarged character BC2 of the displayed bancho from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device The right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B in the effect display which is displayed over the 208B and the Bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, and the pseudo run symbol is the second Displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce an effect of a notice icon with an impact, and it may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with display areas other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested may be displayed over the display areas other than the first display area and the second display area. It is also good. In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may be necessarily displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the advance notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, any effect indication other than the effect indication corresponding to the type of the indicated notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during the period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 82] As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) and the symbol variation display to be lost etc.) is suspended] In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The said hold display means is a means which can display the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Also, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number according to the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (hat notice icon I6 etc. shown in FIG. It is not an icon that shows the number of pending operations for symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
First movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 115 (12), a family crest item etc. shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), etc.]
A game console equipped with
One of the multiple types of displays may be a notice icon [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 81 (b), notice icon I21 of "house", notice icon I22 of "print". , Drink notice icon I31 etc],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the third suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66) or FIG. 115, in a period from when symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished, The notice icon display area 285 displays two notice icons I6 for hats, a notice icon I9 for one thousand boxes, an notice icon I31 for drinks, etc.],
The first movable means is a first movable effect [for example, the movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 115 (12) to FIG. (17)]. A viable means,
The first movable effect may be executed when a fourth notice icon [for example, a drink notice icon I31, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested. ,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested in the display means, the first movable effect by the first movable means may be performed, so that variations of effects can be increased. There is a case.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it may be possible to focus attention on the movable means without concentrating the line of sight of the player only on the display means, and it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  In addition, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  In addition, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon When the fourth notice icon among them is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be necessarily executed, or the displayed notice icon It may be configured such that the first movable effect may not be performed when the fourth notice icon among them is digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon among them is digested.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2)] is suspended, the second In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66) or FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icons I6 for two hats, the notification icons I9 for one and a half boxes, and the notification icon I31 for a drink are digested, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81 or the notice icon I21 of "house" among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable Configured so that no rendition is performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or one of the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, the movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may not necessarily be executed, or the first of the displayed notice icons may be selected. The first movable effect may be executed when the five advance notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may not be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the first of the displayed notice icons may be selected. The first movable effect may not be executed even when the five advance notice icons are not digested.

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
The first movable means is means for moving the operation means,
The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [eg, the default position shown in FIG. 115 (12)] to the second mode [eg, FIG. 115 (17) Is the effect of changing to the
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the change of the operation means may be notified by the notice icon in some cases, the operation means may also be noticed.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. Also, it may be operated by the player without fail, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of moving only the operating means, or may be movable other than the operating means. Further, the first movable means may move the operating means without fail or may not move the operating means.

Also, “a second movable means [for example, a family crest or the like shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)]” is provided,
The second movable means is means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family pattern falling effect etc. shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)],
The second movable effect may be executed when a sixth notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of "house", etc.] among the displayed notice icons is digested. ing,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means may be rich, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. In the case where the sixth notice icon of the above is digested, movable effects other than the second movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be performed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth preview icon is digested.

  In addition, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon of the above is digested.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during the period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 82] As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) and the symbol variation display to be lost etc.) is suspended] In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The said hold display means is a means which can display the display of the number corresponding to the number (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") for which the start of the symbol variation display is held [for example, the hold icon shown in The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

"The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed. For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. Is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [eg each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the second suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 117 (1)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), in the period from when the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icon display In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a box of notice icons I9 and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display may be a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. ],
The preview icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that the display of the preview icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be suggested in advance that there may be a possibility that the display of the advance notice icon may be started, so there may be cases where the process until the advance notice icon is displayed can be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display indication display, or may not display the notice icon display indication display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may suggest only that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may be other than the display of the notice icon may be started. It may be suggested. Moreover, the notice icon display suggestion display may always indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started. It may be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 117 (1)] is suspended, the second In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is ended, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. In a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icons I6 of two hats, the notice icons I9 of the two-storied box and the notice icons of the fan are digested in the notice icon display area 285 Being done etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. (5), twice) The notice that the notice icon by the hall effect is displayed over the symbol variation display of, etc. is performed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display, it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of times of symbol fluctuation display, or displayed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays other than the symbol fluctuation display. May be In addition, the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be necessarily displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display, or may not be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display.

In addition, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display is configured to end [for example, FIG. 117 (2) ~ As shown in (5) of the figure, the notice that the notice icon by the hall effect is displayed is finished before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the advance notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol change display to be read out is started, it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol change to be read out.

  Here, during the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the second symbol fluctuation display, only the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol fluctuation may be displayed. The display other than the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may also be finished while the symbol variation display displayed before the display is displayed. In addition, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended, or the second symbol variation display The display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may not be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before that.

  In addition, the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be ended only during the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the second symbol fluctuation display, or the second symbol fluctuation display The display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the display.

In addition, the “prediction icon display indication display” is a display that may indicate that the display of at least one of the third number [for example, three etc.] of the above-mentioned advance notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), in the Amida effect, display of at least one of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the two-sided box may be started It suggests that there is something, etc.],
The third number is a number of 2 or more,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, at least one of the notice icons suggested in advance may be displayed, so that the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. And there may be cases where it is possible to enjoy the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the preview icon display suggestion display may only indicate that the display of at least one of the third number of preview icons may be started, or the third icon It may also indicate that something other than the display of at least one of the number of advance notice icons may be started. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may always indicate that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number notice icons There may be cases where it does not indicate that at least one of the displays may be started.

In addition, “at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed may be started by the notice icon indication suggestion display may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1) to (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, there may be a case where only at least one of the third number of preview icons suggested to be displayed may be started by the preview icon display suggestion display. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may also be started. In addition, at least one of the third number of notice icons that is suggested to be indicated by the notice icon indication suggestion display may be configured to be always started, or the notice may be made. In some cases, display of at least one of the third number of preview icons suggested to be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started during the period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 82] As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) and the symbol variation display to be lost etc.) is suspended] In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of hold”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Also, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed [for example, the notice icon (hat notice icon I6, etc. shown in FIG. It is not an icon that shows the number of pending operations for symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [eg each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first preview notice,
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the third suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 120 (2)] After being suspended, symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “display of first symbol fluctuation display [for example, symbol fluctuation display etc. shown in FIG. 120 (4) to FIG. (13)].”) May be started,
In a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") The display may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the symbol fluctuation display started after the symbol fluctuation display to be the target of pre-reading becoming a hit is suspended Of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a box, and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed from when the display of the symbol display is started to when the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading is finished etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the display is started next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, while it is possible to enjoy the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, it is started thereafter In some cases, it may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as a prefetch notice display related to the second symbol change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display to be performed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as the first pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as the first pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as the first pre-reading notice display.

  Also, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol fluctuation display is started after the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended, or the first symbol fluctuation after the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended The symbol variation display other than the display of the display may also be started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Only the display of one symbol variation display may be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In a period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from when the display of the first symbol variation display is started to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [eg, As shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the target of the prefetching is started after the display of the symbol fluctuating display started after the symbol fluctuating display that is the target of the prefetching is suspended Before the end of the symbol variation display which is a big hit, the notice icons I6 of the two hats, the notice icons I9 of the two-tiered box, the notice icon I10 of the fan, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, while it is possible to enjoy the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, it is started thereafter In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a prefetch notice display related to the second symbol change display to be subjected to prefetching from the symbol change display.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the first symbol variation display is started to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends. In a period from the start of display of one symbol variation display to the end of display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where items other than a plurality of notice icons are also digested. In addition, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the display of the symbol display is started to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after display of the symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of hold”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (hat notice icon I6 or the like shown in FIG. 120) is a special icon It is not an icon that shows the number of pending operations of symbol variation display etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third suspension which is the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. The display of the hold display [eg, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 120 (2), etc.] is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol variation display has been suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol change display is held, and also in the case other than when the second symbol change display is held. The display of the hold display may be started. Moreover, when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the display of the second suspension display may always be started, or when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the display of the second suspension display is It does not have to be started.

In addition, “the second hold display is displayed as a second pre-read advance notice display in a second pre-read display mode [for example, a display mode (presence view of pre-read advance notice shown in FIG. 120 (2), etc.) May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second pre-read display mode [e.g. As shown in), when the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of read-ahead is held, the third hold icon h13 in the display mode (the display mode of Sabohani) of the prefetch notice. Display etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the variation of the pre-reading advance notice display may increase and the interest may improve.

  Here, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second read display mode as the second read preview, and the second hold display may be displayed as the second read preview. A display mode other than the second pre-reading display mode may be displayed. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be the second prefetch display It may not be displayed in an aspect.

  Moreover, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode, or the second In the symbol variation display being displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Moreover, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may always be displayed in the second pre-reading display mode, or the second symbol variation display The second hold display may not be displayed in the second read-ahead display mode in the symbol variation display being displayed when the second hold is held.

  In addition, the second hold display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode only in the symbol change display displayed when the second symbol change display is held, or the second In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display being displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third pre-reading advance notice display [for example, effect display of pre-reading mode shown in FIG. 121 (b2) to FIG.
The third pre-reading advance notice display is a display that may start to be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [eg, as shown in FIG. 121 (b1) to FIG. (B3) As such, the effect display of the prefetch mode is started, etc., after the symbol variation display that becomes the big hit based on the third suspension being the target of prefetching is suspended, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, the number of variations of the pre-reading advance notice display increases, so the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third prefetch notice may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Other than the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading advance notice display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or is not started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation which becomes the loss based on the third hold which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. Symbol variation indication (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation indication [eg, symbol variation indication etc. shown in FIG. 120 (4) to FIG. The display of) may start.
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started [e.g. As shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), after the display of the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is suspended is started, after the display of the symbol variation display is started Until the end of the symbol variation display which is a loss, a notice icon I6 of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a box of two, and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed, etc.]
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the display is started next to the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol fluctuation display is suspended. The symbol variation display other than the display of the display may also be started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may always start after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the fourth symbol spread display is not performed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. Only the display of three symbol variation displays may be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or In the period from the start of the display of the three symbol variation displays to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started in a period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the three symbol variation displays to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) and the symbol variation display to be lost etc.) is suspended] In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons are digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is finished, etc.]. "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying notice icons [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [eg, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the first display [eg, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132, etc.]
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ... displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a) It is a display of “Tomon-sama is general Yatsushiro” displayed in section TT1, “Panda is a master of the temple”, etc. displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed on a first display area [for example, a tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 132] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), in the tutorial display section TT4, a notice icon I62 for swordsmen is displayed. And notice icon I63 of chance up is displayed (stock) etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayable in display areas other than the first display area in the display means, It is also good. Further, the first display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

  Also, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be one. In addition, the advance notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

Also, in the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed [eg, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), The explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed, or may not be displayed in any state other than the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed.

In addition, “when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a7), it is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 Resume the explanation display when all the notice icons are digested, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, or when the notice icon is digested, the displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. There may be. In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may always be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [eg, the character display of“ superheat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d), etc.]”
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The instruction display is an instruction display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "at notice icon digest ... in the notice display TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), etc.]"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or in the display areas other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Also, the second display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, and may also include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the instruction display may include the instruction display on the notice icon or may not include the instruction display on the notice icon.

"The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a change display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 129, etc.],
The third display means is a display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from a treasure box image TR shown in FIG. 129 (a2) to FIG. It is a means capable of displaying a display etc. where the icon I 62 is stocked,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [e.g., as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration It is arranged under the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. You may be comprised including display means other than a display means. In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may display symbol fluctuation display without fail or may not display symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

  In addition, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display in accordance with the display of the second display means, and may also display a display other than the display in accordance with the display of the second display means It may be In addition, the third display means may always display the display in accordance with the display of the second display means, or the display in accordance with the display of the second display means may not be displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Also, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or provided in an area other than at least a part of the area in the third display means. It may be In addition, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a partial area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a partial area of the third display means. It may be.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [eg, character display displayed on stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132, etc.]”
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, the display of “jojomachi stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c) Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The third display is a display displayed on a second display area [for example, stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), etc.] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the stage name display unit ST2 displays a notice icon I64 for a princess and Two pseudo linked notice icons I 65 are displayed (stock), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayable in display areas other than the second display area in the display means. May be Further, the third display may be necessarily displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail or may not be displayed in the second display area.

Also, while the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2 Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.], and the like. "
I also explained about

  Here, the third display may be only the state in which the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area and not displayed, or the state other than the state in which the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area Or may not be displayed. Further, the third display may not necessarily be displayed in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, and is displayed in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area It may be done.

[The first display area is a display area divided by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into a square by a line, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily divided by a line, or may not be divided.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the displayed number [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a7) (hime notice icon I64, pseudo linked notice icon I65, Notice icon I62 of swordsman, notice icon I63 of chance up, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying notice icons [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The display area in which the preview icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132, the stage name display unit ST2, etc.] is displayed in the hold icon [eg, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. A display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area etc. shown in FIG. 132] in which the hold icon h11, h12, h13 etc. is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the first display [eg, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132, etc.]
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ... displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a) It is a display of “Tomon-sama is general Yatsushiro” displayed in section TT1, “Panda is a master of the temple”, etc. displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display, when being displayed, is a display displayed on a first display area [for example, a tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132, etc.] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [e.g., as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 displays the notice icon I62 of the swordsman and the chance to improve Notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or other than the first display area in the display means when it is displayed It may be displayed also in the display area of. Further, the first display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the first display area without fail or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Also, when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display unit TT4, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, only the first display may not be displayed, and in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, the first The display other than the display of may not be displayed. Further, in the state where the first display area is displayed in the first notice icon area, the first display may not necessarily be displayed, and in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, the first The display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the advance notice icon, or in a state other than the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon. Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. Restart the explanation display when all the notice icons are consumed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, or when the notice icon is digested, the displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. May be In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may always be resumed, or when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, in the case where the first display is, for example, the explanation of the first character, a tenth display which is an explanatory display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [eg, the character display of“ superheat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d), etc.]”
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The instruction display is an instruction display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "at notice icon digest ... in the notice display TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), etc.]"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or in the display areas other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Also, the second display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, and may also include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the instruction display may include the instruction display on the notice icon or may not include the instruction display on the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of a number of notice displays.

  In addition, the advance notice may be a advance notice by display of characters. On the other hand, the other preliminary display may be display by display of an image.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the character display of“ gold is hotter than red ”in the blowout portion TT2 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), FIG. (A6), for example, the character display of “Swordsman reach is hot” in the blowout part TT2 and the character display of “If the panda is intruding” in the blowout part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, the blowout part TT2 or the blowout part TT3 shown in FIG. 131 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the second display area in the display means. It may be displayed also in the display area of. In addition, the third display may be necessarily displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

Also, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), Even if the warning notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, the character display of "Kengo reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and the "Pander intrudes" on the balloon display section TT3 Character display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if the display is in the off state, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area Even in the state of, the third display may be displayed.

  Further, the introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, there may be a case where a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display is performed in the second display area. In addition, the advance notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [eg, character display displayed on stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132, etc.]”
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, the display of “jojomachi stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed on a third display area [for example, a stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), etc.] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
When the first number [for example, three etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, in the state where three preview icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new preview icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayable in display areas other than the third display area in the display means. It is also good. Further, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

  In addition, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  Further, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or the first notice icon may be displayed. In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area without fail. In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  Also, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, or the first number Even in a state other than the state in which the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Further, here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

Also, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon on the stage name display section ST2 In the state in which the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth display may be only the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area and not displayed, or the state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area Or may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the third display area It may be done.

"The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a change display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 129, etc.],
The third display means is a display in cooperation with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from a treasure box image TR shown in FIG. 129 (a2) to FIG. Is a means capable of displaying a display etc.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [e.g., as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration It is arranged under the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. You may be comprised including display means other than a display means. In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may display symbol fluctuation display without fail or may not display symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked to the display of the second display means, or may also display a display other than the display linked to the display of the second display means It may be In addition, the third display means may always display a display linked to the display of the second display means, or there may be a case where the display linked to the display of the second display means is not displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Also, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or provided in an area other than at least a part of the area in the third display means. It may be In addition, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a partial area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a partial area of the third display means. It may be.

[The first display area is a display area divided by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into a square by a line, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily divided by a line, or may not be divided.

  In addition, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the displayed number [For example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a9) (a notice icon I64 for the princess, an icon I65 for pseudo-series notice, Notice icon I62 of swordsman, notice icon I63 of chance up, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  In addition, the number of pending numbers and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

  In addition, the maximum number of holdings and the maximum number of stocking notice icons may be the same or different.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying notice icons [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [eg, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 137],
The notice icon can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the swordswoman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l)]. ,
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode [for example, the display of the warning icon I62 of the sword sword displayed in the enlarged size in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i) Aspect etc],
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode [for example, from the sword advanced notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l) Also, the warning icon I62 for swordsmen displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i) is larger in size, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when it is stocked [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (i), when the notice icon I62 of swordsman is stocked, Notice icon I62 of swordsman is enlarged, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  Further, the size of the notice icon may be larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode, and the size of the notice icon in the second display mode is larger than the first display mode. There may be no case.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. May be Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode whenever it is stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when it is stocked.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [e.g. Is displayed in the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 137 (l), etc., after being enlarged and displayed as shown in
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after displayed in the second display mode The display mode may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. In addition, after the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display mode, it may be displayed in the first display mode without fail, or after it is displayed in the second display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode of.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode Also, it may be displayed in the first display mode. In addition, after the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display mode, it may be displayed in the first display mode without fail, or after it is displayed in the second display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode of.

[The above-mentioned display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L etc],
The notice icon is an icon which is not overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), a normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area The pseudo linked notice icon I65 and the notice icon I62 for swordsman are not overlapped with the decoration pattern in the variable display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may not be overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display only in the first display mode, or may not be overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display even in display modes other than the first display mode. May be Further, the notice icon may not necessarily be overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode. .

Also, “the decorative symbol variation display is a display that is not overlapped with the notice icon in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the decoration symbol in the variation display is a notice icon It is not overlapped with the pseudo link notice icon I65 of normal display mode displayed in the display area or the notice icon I62 of swordsman, etc.],
The decorative symbol variation display is a display that may be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (i), the decorative symbol in the variation display is a notification It is overlapped with the pseudo linked notice icon I65 of the enlarged display mode displayed in the icon display frame YF or the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display may not overlap only with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may not overlap other than the notice icon of the first display mode. . Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not necessarily overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode.

  Also, the decorative symbol variation display may overlap only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may overlap other than the notice icon of the second display mode. There may be a certain one. Also, the decorative symbol variation display may always overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode.

"The notice icon is also an icon displayed in the second display mode even when digested.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when it is digested, or may be displayed in the second display mode even when it is not digested. It may be. Furthermore, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode whenever it is digested, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when it is digested.

Further, “the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in the hold display area [eg, the notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 137 (a)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [for example, displayed in the notice icon display area as shown in FIG. 137 (l). The pseudo linked notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are displayed in the normal display mode, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying the notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying the notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or other than the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. The display mode may be displayed. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when displayed in the hold display area, or the first display mode even when not displayed in the hold display area. May be displayed.

Also, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a portion of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [eg, FIG. 137 (i) As shown in, when the swordsman's advance notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo linked advance notice icon I65 displayed in the advance notice icon display area is displayed in the enlarged display mode, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all of the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. In addition, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In some cases, at least a portion of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

[The second display mode is a display mode obtained by enlarging the notice icon of the first display mode [For example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman of the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 137 (i) is 137 (l) is a magnified view of the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 137 (l), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which other than the notice icons of the first display mode is also expanded. It is also good. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the advance notice icon of the first display mode is always enlarged, or may be a display mode in which the advance notice icon of the first display mode is not enlarged.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo-sequence effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach shift effect, premier notice effect, re-change effect, etc.] Yes,
The display means can display a plurality of types of the notice icons [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]. And
When the notice icon is digested, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested may be displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 83 (23) to FIG. 25 (25) In the case where the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 84 (28) to FIG. (31) is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or it may be digested when the notice icon is digested. A preview display of a type other than the type corresponding to the type of the preview icon may be displayed. Also, when the notice icon is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed without exception, and when the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon In some cases, the type of notice display corresponding to may not be displayed.

  Also, only when the notice icon is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed, or even when the notice icon is digested. The preview display of the type corresponding to the type of the preview icon that has been digested may be displayed.

In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the pending icons corresponding to the number of pending start of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “the pending number”) [eg, FIG. 137 ( In the pending icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon (two pseudo linked notice icons I65) shown in FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of pending icons corresponding to the pending number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of pending icons corresponding to the pending number. Good. In addition, the display means may always display the number of pending icons corresponding to the pending number, or may not display the number of pending icons corresponding to the pending number.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
A game table provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [eg, the hold display frame FL1 etc. shown in FIG. 140 (a)],
In the icon display frame, an icon (hereinafter referred to as an “icon”) relating to symbol variation display is configured to be displayable in an area inside the frame (hereinafter referred to as “in-frame area”). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the variation icon h0 is accommodated in the suspension display frame FL1, etc.],
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the display modes of the plurality of types is the first display mode [for example, the default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a), etc.],
One of the display modes of the plurality of types is the second display mode [for example, the expanded display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc.],
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded [for example, the expanded display mode of the holding display frame FL1 shown in FIG. (A) is a display mode in which the default display mode FL1 of the default display mode is expanded upward, etc.]
The second display may be a decoration symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the first decoration symbol in the first decoration symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b) or a second decoration in the second decoration symbol display device 208M It is a variation display etc. of the design],
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display [e.g., the default display mode shown in FIG. 140 (b) Reserve display frame FL1 is displayed at a position not overlapped with the variation display of the first decoration symbol in the first decoration symbol display device 208L or the variation display of the second decoration symbol in the second decoration symbol display device 208M, etc.] so,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is noticed that the player is given the effect by expanding the icon display frame displayed with priority and performing effects such as advance notice and pre-reading advance notice in the expanded portion. It may be possible to In recent years, since a variety of effect displays are simultaneously performed in a plurality of game consoles, they tend to be complicated and difficult to visually recognize, but according to this game console, an icon related to symbol fluctuation display that the player always pays attention to By expanding the icon display frame that displays the symbol, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effects.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the first display and the second display. . Moreover, the display means may display the first display and the second display without fail, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  The first display may include only the icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. In addition, the first display may include one other than the icon display frame. In addition, the first display may include the icon display frame without fail or may not include the icon display frame.

  Here, the "icon display frame" may be referred to as a "hold display frame", a "hold frame", a "UI", a "hold icon display area" or the like. In addition, the “icon display frame” is a display that may be overlapped with at least a part of the hold icon, the change icon, and the like. In addition, since the "icon display frame" is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect display. Also, in some cases, the “icon display frame” is a frame in which one variation icon or a hold icon is displayed. Further, the "icon display frame" may be a display frame which is not overlapped with the decorative symbol after stopping, or may be a display frame which is overlapped by at least a part of the holding icon or the like. The "icon display frame" can also be said to be background display displayed on the back side of the reserve icon or the like and different from the background display of the decorative symbol.

  Here, "icon display frame" refers to a portion that can be recognized by the player as an icon display portion without being caught by the word "frame", and the display of the frame image is It is an example and is not bound by this.

  Further, among the icon display frames, only the icons may be displayed in the area within the frame, or those other than the icons may be displayed in the area within the frame among the icon display frames. Further, the icon may be configured so that the icon is always displayed in the area within the frame of the icon display frame, or the icon may not be displayed in the area within the frame of the icon display frame. Good.

  Here, the framed area constitutes an icon display frame, and therefore is a concept included in the first display.

  Further, the icon display frame may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, the icon display frame may be displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, and display modes other than the first display mode and the second display mode may also be displayed. It may be one. In addition, the icon display frame may always display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. It is also good.

  In the second display mode, only a part of the first display mode may be expanded, or all of the first display mode may be expanded.

  Here, "a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

  Here, “expansion” can also be said to mean display of a substitute for “icon display frame” in a broad sense, and it can also be said that the area of an image or a region becomes large.

  In addition, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped with only the second display, and display modes other than the second display mode may be used. It may not be overlapped. In addition, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not necessarily be overlapped with the second display, or may be overlapped with the second display. It may be.

  Here, the "decorative symbol variation display" may include stop indication of the decorative symbol or indication in a state in which the symbol can be identified at the start of variation, for example, during high-speed variation, etc. Display in a state that is more difficult to distinguish than the display state at the start of change or the state at the start of change (for example, a semi-transparent display during high-speed change), etc. You may include the fluctuation display of the design.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
In the third display, effect display [for example, the ninja character NJ1 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l) casts the shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Effect display etc.],
A portion of the second display mode expanded from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “expansion portion [e.g., an expanded portion in the extension display mode holding display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc. And the second display icon h12 is configured to be able to be displayed overlapping with each other [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (g) to FIG. In the effect display that changes the display mode of, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion in the hold display frame FL1, etc.],
The extension portion is a portion which is not overlapped with the second display [eg, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), the suspension display frame FL1 of the expansion display mode is a portion during the variable display. (1) It is not overlapped with the decoration pattern or the second decoration pattern, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the icon display frame is expanded at a higher priority than the variable display of the decorative symbol indicating at least the success or failure of the fluctuation, and effects such as advance notice and advance notice are displayed at the expanded portion. There are cases where the effect can be improved.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. The display means may display the third display without fail or may not display the third display.

  Here, the “display effect” includes a display icon that changes the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon, and a effect display that changes the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon.

  In addition, only the third display may overlap with the extended portion and display may be configured, or the display other than the third display may overlap with the extended portion and configured with display. Also, the third display may be configured to be displayed so as to always overlap the extension portion, or may be configured such that the third display may not be displayed to overlap the extension portion. Good.

  Note that, here, the "extension part" may refer to itself when it is a difference from the part before the expansion or when only a part of the icon display frame before the expansion is expanded (or enlarged). .

  Also, the extension part may not be overlapped with only the second display, or may be not overlapped with any display other than the second display. Also, the extension portion may not necessarily overlap with the second display, or may overlap with the second display.

In addition, “the effect display is a display for preview advance notice [for example, an effect display for changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 140 (g) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the effect display changes the display mode of the icon [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (g) to FIG. (L), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white Effect display etc. to be changed from the display mode to the display mode to light green]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the second display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), the decorative symbol during the variable display is the display of the expanded display mode Display frame FL1 is overlapped, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may overlap only with the extension, or may overlap also with parts other than the extension. Also, the second indication may be necessarily overlapped with the extension, or may not be overlapped with the extension.

Also, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display of speech [for example, display of speech by the character CH1 of Little Princess in the blowout TT2 or display of speech by the character GY1 of the blowout in the blowout TT3 shown in FIG. 140 (i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that is not overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, a hold display of a default display mode as shown in FIG. 140 (d) Frame FL1 does not overlap with balloon TT2 or balloon TT3, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extension portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the suspension display frame FL1 in the expansion display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. It overlaps with the display of words by the character CH1 of Princess Thibi, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

  Here, "display of speech" may be referred to as "serif preview" or "conversation preview", and may include, for example, a notice of the change, preview preview, tutorial display, and the like.

  Also, the fourth display may not be overlapped only with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that do not happen. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode. It may be.

  Here, "the display in which the fourth display is not overlapped with the icon display frame in the first display mode" is not overlapped in display position. It is a concept that includes what is configured.

  In addition, the fourth display may overlap only with the extension portion, or may overlap with a portion other than the extension portion. In addition, the fourth display may always overlap with the extension, or may not overlap with the extension.

  In addition, "display of serif" includes the display of the first serif and the display of the second serif, and the display of the first serif is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion. The display of the second serif may be a display that is not overlapped with the extension.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display may be a notice display [for example, an effect display which changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIG. 145 (c-1) to FIG. -1) to (c-4) and the like (c-4), effect display etc. that changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0],
In the extended portion, the fifth display is configured so as to overlap and be displayed [for example, a notice icon BX of a treasure box shown in FIG. 145 (c-1) to FIG. (C-6) In the effect display changing the display mode, and the effect display changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 147 (c-1) to FIG. 147 (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is in the expanded display mode Overlap with the extension of the hold icon display area FL1, etc.],
The third display and the fifth display are partially the same display [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 140 (g) to FIG. Also in the effect display shown in FIG. 145 (c-1) to FIG. 145 (c-6), the effect display changing the display mode of the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box is also shown in FIG. Also in the effect display shown in 4) that changes the display mode of the variation icon h0, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, for example, instead of making it difficult to confirm the propriety of the variation with the decorative symbol, the icon display frame is displayed by displaying both the third display and the fifth display with the expanded icon display frame. If you look at it, you may be able to see it without missing both displays. Moreover, if all of the third display and the fifth display are different modes, it may be clear whether to expect the change or whether to expect the symbol change display to be performed after the next, but the third By setting the part of the fifth display and the fifth display in the same mode, it may be possible to increase the sense of expectation until it can be recognized which pattern variation display can be expected.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  In addition, in the extended portion, only the fifth display may be overlapped and configured to be displayable, and in the extended portion, displays other than the fifth display may be overlapped and configured to be displayed. It may be done. Also, in the extension part, the fifth display may be configured so as to always overlap and be displayed, or in the extension part, the fifth display may not be displayed in overlap. May be configured.

  In addition, the fifth display may be configured to be able to be displayed so as to overlap only in the extended portion, or the fifth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped also in portions other than the extended portion. It may be configured.

  Here, the "preliminary display" may be a change effect of a fluctuation icon, or may be a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo continuous symbol.

  Further, "the third display and the fifth display are partially the same display" is, for example, a concept including one in which the animation up to the appearance of the character is the same.

In addition, “the framed area in the first display mode (hereinafter,“ first framed area [for example, an area in the frame of the default display mode holding display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a) Etc.] is the first area,
The framed area in the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second framed area [for example, an area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc.]” The area of) is the second area,
The second area is an area larger than the first area,
The extension part is a part of a difference area between the second framed area and the first framed area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second framed area is an area configured to include the first framed area [for example, as shown in FIG. The area in the frame is configured to include the area in the frame of the holding display frame FL1 of the default display mode, etc.], and the like. "
I also explained about

  Here, the second in-frame area may be configured to include a portion of the first in-frame area, or may be configured to include the entire first in-frame area. It may be.

In addition, “the display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded according to claim 1” means that the area of the in-frame area in the first display mode is increased. [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), in the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode, the area of the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode is increased. Display mode etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode [for example, there is no hold and no symbol variation display is performed Even if neither the change icon h0 nor the hold icon h11 to h14 is displayed, the hold display frame FL1 is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayable only in the first display mode, or even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame is displayed. A display mode other than the first display mode may be configured to be displayable. In addition, even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayed in the first display mode without fail. Even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame may be displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

  The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in an area other than the icon display frame.

Also, the icon that can be displayed in the area within the frame is a fluctuating icon [eg, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), a fluctuating icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the icon that can be displayed in the framed area may be a hold icon.

In addition, “the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 displayed in the hold icon display area, etc.] as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the pending icons corresponding to the number of pending start of symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon as an icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold icon as an icon. Further, the display means may always display the hold icon as an icon, or may not display the hold icon as an icon.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of holding icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display pending, or corresponds to the number of the start of the symbol variation display pending. The number of pending icons other than the number of pending icons may also be displayable. In addition, the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending symbol variable display may be displayed without fail, or the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending symbol variable display May not be displayed.

In addition, the first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [eg, FIG. 140 (f) to FIG. The suspension display frame FL1 of the extended display mode shown in Fig. 21 is overlapped with the variation display of the first decoration symbol in the first decoration symbol display device 208L and the variation display of the second decoration symbol in the second decoration symbol display device 208M. Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped with only the second display, or a display mode other than the second display mode Also, they may not be overlapped. In addition, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily be overlapped with the second display mode, or may be overlapped with the second display mode. There may be cases.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
[Operation means that can be operated by the player [e.g., the operation unit 136],
Rendering means capable of executing a plurality of types of rendering [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208];
A game console equipped with
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect shown in FIG. 223, which is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full],
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect [for example, the effect button which is generated in the second and subsequent times shown in FIG. It is the effect display by the pseudo ream executed as a result of the operation of 136],
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
In the first effect, the first operation mode [for example, 20 times] is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136]. If it is an effect that can be started,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136].
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
In the second effect, a second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. The effect is more likely to be started in the case of [If the long press auto continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, for example, the result execution of the operation of the effect button 136 that occurs in the second and subsequent times shown in FIG. Effect display by the simulated sequence is not started by the long press operation by the effect button 136],
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming platform, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the rendering means.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of performing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering and the second rendering, or may be capable of executing the rendering other than the first rendering and the second rendering. In addition, the presentation means may always execute the first presentation and the second presentation, or there may be cases where the first presentation and the second presentation are not performed.

  Here, the first effect may be, for example, an effect corresponding to "re" of "Dremi", and the second effect may be, for example, "I" of "Aru". There may be cases where it can be said that the corresponding effects.

  In addition, the first effect starts only when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except in the case where the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode and in the case where one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode. It may also be startable. In addition, the first effect always starts when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. Start when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode May not do.

In addition, “the symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214] is provided,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect [for example, a continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. (G),
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operating means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. (G), an effect button image It is an effect that the letters "Please hit continuously" are displayed with BT,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol fluctuation display, or may be capable of executing display other than symbol fluctuation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol fluctuation display, or may not execute symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may always start during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect, and during the execution of the third effect. The operation may be started only when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit. Even if it is possible to start other than when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode when the operation of the number of times is performed and the third effect is being performed. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect, and during the execution of the third effect. The operation may always be started when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation mode is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. When the operation of the number is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, there may be a case where the operation is not started when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

"The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first period of time [For example, the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed and operated is Operation mode maintained for 0.5 seconds or more],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operation means is artificially operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times. And the first effect can be started as
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect is assumed that the operation means is pseudo-operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times only when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time. The operation means may be started, or the operation means may be artificially operated the first number of times in the first operation mode except when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time. It may be something that can be started as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operating means is pseudo-operated as the first number of times operated in the first operation mode when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time In the case where the operating means is operated for a second time, it may not start.

“The second effect is an effect that is not started only when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second effect may be one that can be started when two or more operations are performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, effect button lamp 138]
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state of emitting light in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a second state [for example, a light off state or a blue light emitting state] in a state in which an operation for starting the second effect by the operation means can be received. Yes,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the first state is the state of light emission,
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in a second mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which at least one of the light emitting color, the on / off and blinking pattern, the location of the light emitting element, and the luminance is different.

Also, “the first aspect is a first color [eg, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operation means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above explanation,
[Operation means that can be operated by the player [e.g., the operation unit 136],
Rendering means capable of executing a plurality of types of rendering [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208];
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [e.g., a decorative symbol display device 208];
A game console equipped with
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect shown in FIG. 223, which is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full],
In the first effect, the first operation mode [for example, 20 times] is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136]. If it is an effect that can be started,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136].
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a first selection display [for example, the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236],
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236],
The first image has the first operation mode in which the first selection mode is performed, compared with the case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the first selection display is performed. It is an image that is more likely to be selected if the second number of operations is performed by the means [for example, in the case where the long press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the princess character image shown in FIG. 236 H is not selected by long press operation by the effect button 136],
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming platform, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the rendering means.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of performing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering, or may be capable of performing rendering other than the first rendering. In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect or may not execute the first effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  In addition, the first effect starts only when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except in the case where the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode and in the case where one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode. It may also be startable. In addition, the first effect always starts when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. Start when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode May not do.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first selection display, or may be capable of executing display other than the first selection display. Further, the display means may always execute the first selection display or may not execute the first selection display.

  Further, the first selection display may be capable of selecting only one image of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means, or a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means Other than one of the images in the above may be selectable. Further, the first selection display may be one in which one image of a plurality of types of images is necessarily selected in accordance with the operation of the operation means, or the plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means There may be cases where one of the images is not selected.

In addition, “one of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is the fourth effect [eg, an effect by a princess character appearing after the end of the big hit game],
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 223 and executed when the gauge of the batting meter RD is full],
The fourth effect is, for example, when the first image is selected in the first selection display [eg, when the character image H of a princess is selected in the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]. It is an effect that can be started,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth effect may start only when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image may be the first selection display. It may be startable other than when it is selected. In addition, the fourth effect may always start when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is selected in the first selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “the symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214] is provided,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect [for example, a continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. (G),
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operating means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. (G), an effect button image It is an effect that the letters "Please hit continuously" are displayed with BT,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol fluctuation display, or may be capable of executing display other than symbol fluctuation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol fluctuation display, or may not execute symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may always start during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect, and during the execution of the third effect. The operation may be started only when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit. Even if it is possible to start other than when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode when the operation of the number of times is performed and the third effect is being performed. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect, and during the execution of the third effect. The operation may always be started when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation mode is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. When the operation of the number is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, there may be a case where the operation is not started when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

"The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first period of time [for example, the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed and operated is 0.5 seconds The operation mode maintained above],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operation means is artificially operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times. And the first effect can be started as
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect is assumed that the operation means is pseudo-operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times only when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time. The operation means may be started, or the operation means may be artificially operated the first number of times in the first operation mode except when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time. It may be something that can be started as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operating means is pseudo-operated as the first number of times operated in the first operation mode when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time In the case where the operating means is operated for a second time, it may not start.

Further, “during the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time or more, one operation is performed by the operation means. Are configured to be
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The first image is an image which can not be selected only by one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode."
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first image may be selectable when two or more operations are performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode.

In addition, “display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display [for example, a favorite selection screen shown in FIG. 246 (f)],
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image [for example, a selection item of "character C"],
The second image can be selected when the third operation [for example, twice] is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode while the second selection display is being executed. It is an image,
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second selection display may be capable of selecting only one image of the plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means, or in response to the operation of the operation means. Other than one image among the images may be selectable. Further, the second selection display may be one in which one image of a plurality of types of images is always selected in accordance with the operation of the operation means, or the plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means There may be cases where one of the images is not selected.

  In addition, while the second selection display is being performed, when the third number of operations are performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display, and while the second selection display is being performed. The second operation mode may be selectable only when one operation is performed by the operation means, or the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display Can be selected other than when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode while the third number of operations are performed by the second selection display It may be In addition, the first effect is performed when the third number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode while the second selection display is being performed, and while the second selection display is being performed. The second operation mode may be selected whenever one operation is performed by the operation means, or the second operation mode may be selected by the operation means in the first operation mode while the second selection display is performed. Even when the third number of operations are performed, and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display, there is a case where no selection is made. Good.

In addition, “one of the multiple types of effects is the fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fifth effect may start only when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or in the second selection display, the second image is displayed. It may be startable even when it is not selected. Further, the fifth effect may always start when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is selected in the second selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, effect button lamp 138]
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state of emitting light in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means which is in a second state [for example, a light off state or a blue light emitting state] during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the first state is the state of light emission,
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in a second mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which at least one of the light emitting color, the on / off and blinking pattern, the location of the light emitting element, and the luminance is different.

Also, “the first aspect is a first color [eg, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operation means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[Operation means that can be operated by the player [e.g., the operation unit 136],
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [e.g., a decorative symbol display device 208];
A game console equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “the first display [e.g., when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. It is said that)
One of the displays of the plurality of types is displayed in the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [e.g., in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. The effect display by the pseudo ream which is executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second time]
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display for prompting the player to continuously hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [eg, FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. (G) Be called a “double-stroke operation effect]
The third display is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. 223 ( d) As shown in (g) of the figure, an effect is displayed that the characters “double hit” are displayed together with the effect button image BT],
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is continuously hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed and held,
The second display is a display that is easier to be started when the operation means is continuously hit than when the operation means is long pressed.
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be received (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, FIG. In the example shown in the, the characters "double hit" are not displayed together with the effect button image BT], a game table characterized by the above. "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of display. Also, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display. The display means may perform the first display and the second display. And, only the third display may be executable, or displays other than the first display, the second display and the third display may be executable. Further, the display means may always execute the first display, the second display and the third display, or one of the first display, the second display and the third display. Part or all may not be executed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which it is possible to accept the operation of. In addition, the third display may always be displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received, or the operation means for starting the first display It may not be displayed in a state where it can accept the operation of.

  Also, the first display may be started only when the operation means is continuously hit and the operation means is pressed for a long time after the third display is started, or the operation means It may be possible to start other than when the character is continuously hit and when the operation means is pressed for a long time. In addition, the first display may always start when the operation means is continuously hit and when the operation means is long pressed, or when the operation means is continuously hit and the operation means is long pressed In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, effect button lamp 138]
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means to be in a first light emitting state [for example, a state of emitting red light];
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means to be in a second light emitting state [for example, a light off state or a blue light emitting state].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operation means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operation means.

  In addition, the light emitting means may be in the first light emission state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emission state in any state other than the first state.

  Also, the light emitting means may be in the second light emission state only in the second state, or may be in the second light emission state even in states other than the second state.

Also, "the first light emission state is a lighted state,
The second light emission state is a light off state,
The light emitting means is in the light-on state, which means that the light emitting means is in the state of accepting the operation of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-3) and FIG. (A-4) In the state of accepting the operation of the operation means, the effect button lamp 138 is turned on],
The light-emitting means is in the light-off state, which indicates that the operation of the operation means is not received [for example, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-1) and FIG. (A-2) When the operation of the operation means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the first light emission state is a state in which light emission is performed in the first light emission mode (for example, light emission in red color),
The second light emission state is a state of light emission [e.g., light emission in blue] in the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, "display of one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, the display related to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol],
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, the display related to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol],
The third display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 222 (d) to FIG. Continuous hitting operation rendition is performed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may be one that can start display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be one that can start display other than during display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the first display may always start during display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during display of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display may be one that can start display only during display of symbol variation display, or may be one that can start display other than during display of symbol variation display. Further, the second display may be one which always starts to display during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the third display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the third display may always start display during display of the symbol variation display, or may not start display during display of the symbol variation display.

"The second display is a display that is not started only by the long press of the operation means [For example, the display shown in FIG. 213 (l) indicates that the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated. If it is, it will not be displayed unless the production button 136 is operated twice.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be a display that is not started except when the operation means is long pressed.

In addition, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display is configured to be started as the operation means is continuously hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means has been artificially operated 20 times. Notification to give notice of becoming a big hit is started],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit, and even when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is The first display may be startable as being continuously hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may always be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit, or when the operation means is long pressed, the operation means is continuously hit. The first display may not start as.

"The long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “The game console is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[Operation means that can be operated by the player [e.g., the operation unit 136],
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [e.g., a decorative symbol display device 208];
A game console equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “the first display [e.g., when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. It is said that)
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display [eg, character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]"),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display,
The fourth display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236],
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is continuously hit,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed and held,
The first image is an image that is more likely to be selected when the operation means is operated a plurality of times than when the operation means is held for a long time [e.g. In the case where the character image H of the princess shown in FIG. 236 is not selected by the long press operation with the effect button 136],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first display and the fourth display, or may be capable of executing display other than the first display and the fourth display. Further, the display means may always execute the first display and the fourth display, or may not execute the first display and the fourth display.

  Also, the first display may be started only when the operation means is continuously hit and when the operation means is long pressed, or when the operation means is continuously hit and the operation means is long press It may be possible to start other than when it is done. In addition, the first display may always start when continuously hit by the operation means and when the operation means is pressed for a long time, or when the operation means is hit continuously for long time and the operation means is pressed for a long time In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display [eg, an effect by a princess character appearing after the end of the big hit game],
The fifth display is a display different from the first display [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 223 when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full],
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236] is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fifth display may be started only when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the fifth display may be performed during the execution of the fourth display. It may be startable other than when one image is selected. The fifth display may always start when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the first display during the execution of the fourth display. It may not start if an image is selected.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting the player to continuously hit the operation means (hereinafter,“ third display [eg, FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. It is said that)), it is said)).
The third display is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. 223 ( d) As shown in (g) of the figure, an effect is displayed that the characters “double hit” are displayed together with the effect button image BT],
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is continuously hit after the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which it is possible to accept the operation of. In addition, the third display may always be displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received, or the operation means for starting the first display It may not be displayed in a state where it can accept the operation of.

  The first display may be started only when the operation means is continuously hit after the third display is started, or may be started other than when the operation means is continuously hit. It may be possible. Further, the first display may always start when the operation means is continuously hit, or may not start when the operation means is continuously hit.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, effect button lamp 138]
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
The light emitting means is a means which is turned on in the first state.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operation means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operation means.

  In addition, the light emitting means may be in the first light emission state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emission state in any state other than the first state.

In addition, "display of one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, the display related to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may be one that can start display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be one that can start display other than during display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the first display may always start during display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during display of the symbol variation display.

Also, “the first image is an image that can not be selected only by the long press of the operation means [For example, in the display shown in FIG. In this case, the character image H of the princess is not displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated twice.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first image may be an image which is not selected except for long pressing of the operation means.

In addition, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display is configured to be started as the operation means is continuously hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means has been artificially operated 20 times. Notification to give notice of becoming a big hit is started],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit, and even when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is The first display may be startable as being continuously hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may always be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit, or when the operation means is long pressed, the operation means is continuously hit. The first display may not start as.

"The long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds),
A game stand characterized by "

In addition, “the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “The game console is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136 and the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.];
A game console equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “the first display [e.g., when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. And so forth]))),
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [e.g., in the case where the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. 214 In the chance eye effect shown in, it is said that "you see three patterns YM1 to YM3 aligned"].),
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may be started while the symbol variation display is displayed,
The second display is a display that may be started while the symbol variation display is displayed,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display prompting the player to continuously hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [eg, FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. (G) Be called, and it is said ").
The first display is a display that may be started when the operation means is continuously hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display prompting the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as a “fourth display [eg, FIG. 214 (b) to FIG. (H) Be a chance eye effect etc.])),
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times (for example, three times etc.) after the display of the fourth display is started. And
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only when the operation means is pressed once for a long time after the display of the fourth display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 214 (i) The display in the mode in which three crown patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned is not displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated three times, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

In addition, “light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting states [for example, effect button lamp 138 etc.]
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
One light emission state of the plurality of light emission states is a first light emission state [eg, a state of light emission in red, etc.],
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of receiving an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a light off state, a light emission state in blue, etc.],
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is a light off state,
The light emitting means is in the light-on state, which means that the light emitting means is in the state of accepting the operation of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-3) and FIG. (A-4) When the operation of the operation means is received, the effect button lamp 138 is lit, etc.],
The light-emitting means is in the light-off state, which indicates that the operation of the operation means is not received [for example, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-1) and FIG. (A-2) When the operation of the operation means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a light off state, a light emission state in blue, etc.],
The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode (eg, light emission in red, etc.),
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode (eg, light emission in blue, etc.),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the first display is a notice display [for example, a notice display such as a cut-in image, a notice notifying a notice of becoming a big hit, etc.],
The second display is a notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 214 (i), it is predicted that three hall-like patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned to shift to super reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a display instructing to select one of a plurality of options (hereinafter,“ selection display [character selection effect shown in FIG. 236, for example, Or a display when the volume is indicated by the cursor CL on the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 246 (c), or a display when the light amount is indicated by the cursor CL]]).
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the first option among the plurality of options [eg, the character image H of the princess shown in FIG. 236, the setting of the volume “10” or the light amount “10” (The fifth display [for example, a display in which the character image H of the princess shown in FIG. 236 is displayed brightly at the center of the display screen, "Display in the display mode with the setting of" 10 "or display in the display mode with the setting of the light amount of" 10 "
The fifth display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times (for example, twice or five times) after the display of the selection display is started. Is a display,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only when the operation means is pressed once for a long time after the display of the selection display is started. [For example, the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated In the case where it is in the state, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is not selected only by the long press operation by the effect button 136, and also in the case where the long press auto continuous hit function is disabled. The display in the display mode where the volume setting shown in FIG. 246 (c) is "10" is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, or the long press auto continuous hit function is disabled. In the case where the light amount setting shown in FIG. 246 (c) is “10”, the display in the display mode is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the fifth display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number [for example, twice or five times, etc.] after the display of the selection display is started. Display, and
The first number is two or more.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the operation means is continuously hit. It is configured such that the display of the first display may be started as an example [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is pseudo Display related to the result of the operation assuming that it has been operated 20 times (for example, advance notice display such as a cut-in image, notification to give notice of becoming a big hit, etc. is started, etc.),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“Long press” means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time (eg, 4 seconds, etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, "one of the plurality of states for receiving the operation of the operation means is the first state,
One of the plurality of states for receiving the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 223 (d) to FIG. And so forth],
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state [for example, the characters “PUSH” are displayed on each of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 shown in FIGS. 214 (b) to (h). Displayed etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The first state is a state for receiving an operation for starting the display of the first display. In other words, the first state is a state for receiving an operation of the operation means. In the first state, when the operation means is continuously hit, the display of the first display may be started. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The second state is a state for receiving an operation for starting the display of the second display. In other words, the second state is a state for receiving an operation of the operation means. In the second state, display of the second display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The first state is a state which ends when a predetermined time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses from the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the state in which the second state is ended when a predetermined time [for example, the remaining time shown in the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 shown in FIG. 214] elapses from the second state. Is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the second display, after the display of the fourth display is started, the number of operations of the operation means is a second number [for example, three times, and the first number The display is started when the number of times different from 2 or 5) is
The second number is two or more.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, "the third display is a display including a first image,
The first image is an image [eg, as shown in FIG. 223 (d), including an image showing the appearance of the operation means [eg, effect button image BT shown in FIG. 223 (d), etc.] An image etc. that includes the characters “double hit” along with the button image BT]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, "the fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image [eg, shown in FIG. 214 (b), which is an image showing the appearance of the operation means [eg, effect button images BT1, BT2, BT3 etc. shown in FIG. 214 (b)]. Thus, an image including the character “PUSH” with the effect button image BT1, an image including the character “PUSH” with the effect button image BT2, and an image including the image “PUSH” with the effect button image BT3] is there,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"The second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
"The game console has a first operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.], and
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, effects shown when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 222 or 223 is full, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, the effect that the light emitting units LL and LR are lit in the continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 241 (c) to FIG. (E)]. Yes,
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, the continuous hitting operation or the multiple operation (the operating mode by the continuous hitting operation and the operation mode by the multiple operations include the same operation modes. The same applies hereinafter) Etc.], the first effect may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 222, when the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, If the effect is successful, there may be a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification to give notice of becoming a big hit etc.],
When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, a plurality of operations etc.], the second effect may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 241 (e) When the player performs a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR may emit light in red, etc.]
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [eg, long press operation etc.], the first effect may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 223, an effect button When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous pressing operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, the cut-in image is assumed to be successful if the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full. Notices such as, etc., and notices may be made to give notice of becoming a big hit etc.],
If the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [For example, in the continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 241, the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated. Therefore, when the effect button 136 is pressed and held, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR do not emit light in red, etc.],
The second effect is an effect to be executed by a second effect means [for example, light emitting unit LL, LR, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional gaming machine, there was room for improvement in the rendering, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming platform having a feature in the rendering.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may It may be performed depending on what is operated in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be necessarily executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means is the first operation mode. In some cases, it may not be executed depending on the operation performed in

  The second effect may be performed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be It may be performed according to things other than having been operated by the operation mode of 1. In addition, the second effect may be necessarily performed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means is the first operation mode. In some cases, it may not be executed depending on the operation performed in

  In addition, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means performs the second operation. It may be executed even when it is not operated in the aspect. In addition, the first effect may be performed whenever the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode It may not be executed if it is done.

  In addition, the second effect may not start even when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation mode. The operation may not necessarily be started by being operated, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

  Further, the second effect may be performed only by the second effect means, or may be performed other than the second effect means. In addition, the second effect may be necessarily performed by the second effect means, or may not be performed by the second effect means.

  In addition, the second effect is an effect to be executed including at least a second effect means, and may be an effect to be executed only by the second effect means, or the other of the second effect means The effect to be executed may also be performed including effect means other than the second effect means. Further, even when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect is an effect in which the second effect means and effect means other than the second effect means are simultaneously executed. Good. The effect is a concept included in the effect (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, “the second effect means is a light emitting means,
“The effect performed by the second effect means” is “the second effect means is the second light emission mode [for example, from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL, LR shown in FIG. A mode in which the LED emits yellow light to a height of 4 or a mode in which the LED emits green light to a height of approximately 2/3 from the lower ends of the light emitting portions LL and LR shown in FIG. Aspect of the light emission part LL, the aspect performed by emitting light in a mode in which all the LEDs of the LR emit light in red, etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode [for example, a predetermined light emission mode or the like during symbol variation display or during a big hit game],
The first light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode [e.g., the light emission modes of the light emitting portions LL and LR shown in FIG. 241 (c) to FIG. Different from the light emission mode in the stage during display or in the big hit game etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second effect means may be capable of emitting light only in the first light emission mode, or may be capable of emitting an aspect other than the first light emission mode. In addition, the second effect means may always emit light in the first light emission mode, or may not emit light in the first light emission mode.

  Further, the first light emission mode may be partially different from the second light emission mode, or may be entirely different.

In addition, "a first rendering means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]" is provided,
The first effect means is a first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full In such a case, the notice display such as a cut-in image or the notification for announcing that it will be a big hit is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, etc., which is executed on the assumption that the presentation is successful.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect may be performed only by the first effect means, or may be performed by effect means other than the first effect means. Also, the first effect may be performed by the first effect means or may not be performed by the first effect means.

  Further, the first effect is an effect to be executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect to be executed only by the first effect means, or the other effects of the first effect means The presentation may be performed including presentation means other than the first presentation means. Further, even when the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect is an effect in which the first effect means and effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

In addition, “provide the third effect means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is a means provided in the third effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 241, the left image display device 209L provided with the light emitting parts LL, LR and the right image display The device 209R is a means movable by a slide drive motor, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third effect means may be composed only of the movable means, or may be means including means other than the movable means. Further, the third effect means may include the movable means or may not include the movable means.

  Also, the second rendering means may be provided only in the third rendering means, or may be provided in addition to the third rendering means. In addition, the second rendering means may be necessarily provided in the third rendering means or may not be provided in the third rendering means.

In addition, “fourth effect means [for example, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R shown in FIG.
The fourth effect means is a second image display means,
The fourth effect means is means provided to the third effect means [eg, as shown in FIG. 241, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are driven by a slide drive motor. Moving means etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth effect means may be composed only of the second image display means, or may include means other than the second image display means. In addition, the fourth effect means may include the second image display means without fail or may not include the second image display means.

  The fourth rendering means may be provided only in the third rendering means, or may be provided in addition to the third rendering means. The fourth effect means may be provided to the third effect means or may not be provided to the third effect means.

In addition, “symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display [for example, it is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. The effect to be played is started during symbol variation display etc.],
The second effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display [e.g., in the continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 241 (c) to FIG. The effect that the LR lights up is started during the symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other display than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  Also, the first effect may be started only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first effect may be necessarily started during display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during display of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be necessarily started during display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during display of the symbol variation display.

[When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode The first effect may be started as being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is artificially operated 20 times As display of the result of the operation (preliminary display such as a cut-in image, notification to give notice of becoming a big hit, etc.) is started, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and effects other than the first effect are also started. There may be. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may always be started on the assumption that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, “operation in the first operation mode” is “multiple operation”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In other words, “in the first operation mode” in “the first effect may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode” is: It is the thing of the continuous hitting operation,
A game stand characterized by "
It can be said.

Further, in other words, "the operation in the first operation mode" in "the first effect may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode". Is the operation of multiple times,
A game stand characterized by "
It can also be said.

In addition, “operation in the second operation mode” is “long press operation”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds, etc.),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the effect mode of the second effect may be partially different from the effect mode of the first effect, or all of them may be different.

In addition, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
"The game console has a first operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.], and
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, effects shown when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 222 or 223 is full, etc.]
One of the multiple effects is a second effect [for example, in the back button continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 242 (e) to FIG. (H), the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red Effect that is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, the continuous hitting operation or the multiple operation (the operating mode by the continuous hitting operation and the operation mode by the multiple operations include the same operation modes. The same applies hereinafter) Etc.], the first effect may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 222, when the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, Notice that a notice such as a cut-in image or a notice of becoming a big hit is given, etc., as having succeeded in the production],
When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, a plurality of operations etc.], the second effect may be started [eg, FIG. 242 (e) to FIG. In the back button continuous hit production shown in h), when the player performs a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit light green or red, or an effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 Ru, etc.],
The effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [eg, long press operation etc.], the first effect may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 223, an effect button When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous pressing operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, the cut-in image is assumed to be successful if the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full. Notices such as, etc., and a notification to give notice of becoming a big hit is given, etc.],
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [For example, in the back button continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 242, the long press auto continuous hitting function is invalidated. Because the effect button 136 is pressed and held, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 do not emit green or red, and the effect image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The second effect is a back button effect,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional gaming machine, there was room for improvement in the rendering, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming platform having a feature in the rendering.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may It may be performed depending on what is operated in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be necessarily executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means is the first operation mode. In some cases, it may not be executed depending on the operation performed in

  The second effect may be performed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be It may be performed according to things other than having been operated by the operation mode of 1. In addition, the second effect may be necessarily performed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means is the first operation mode. In some cases, it may not be executed depending on the operation performed in

  Further, the effect mode of the second effect may be partially different from the effect mode of the first effect, or all of them may be different.

  In addition, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means performs the second operation. It may be executed even when it is not operated in the aspect. In addition, the first effect may be performed whenever the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode It may not be executed if it is done.

  In addition, the second effect may not start even when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation mode. The operation may not necessarily be started by being operated, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, "a first rendering means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]" is provided,
The first effect means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full In such a case, the notice display such as a cut-in image or the notification for announcing that it will be a big hit is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, etc., which is executed on the assumption that the presentation is successful.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect may be performed only by the first effect means, or may be performed by effect means other than the first effect means. Also, the first effect may be performed by the first effect means or may not be performed by the first effect means.

  Further, the first effect is an effect to be executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect to be executed only by the first effect means, or the other effects of the first effect means The presentation may be performed including presentation means other than the first presentation means. Further, even when the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect is an effect in which the first effect means and effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good. The effect is a concept included in the effect (the same applies hereinafter).

In addition, ““ the first effect is the effect executed by the first effect means ”means“ the first effect is the first display of the first effect means [eg, As shown in FIG. 222, a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full, it is executed as if the effect is successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit "It is an effect to be executed by displaying a notice etc. for giving a prior notice of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [e.g., in the back button continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 242 (e) to FIG. (H), the decorative symbol display device 208 Effect images etc. displayed on
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second effect may be performed only by the first effect means, or may be performed by effect means other than the first effect means. In addition, the second effect may be always performed by the first effect means, or may not be performed by the first effect means.

  Further, the second effect is an effect to be executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect to be executed only by the first effect means, or the other of the first effect means The presentation may be performed including presentation means other than the first presentation means. In addition, even when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect is an effect in which the first effect means and effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

Also, ““ the second effect is the effect performed by the first effect means ”means“ the second effect is the second display with the first effect means [eg, It is an effect to be executed by displaying the effect image etc. displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button continuous hitting effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second rendering means [for example, rendering lamps SL1 to SL4 and the like],”
The second effect means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect to be executed by the second effect means [for example, in the back button continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 242 (e) to FIG. (H), the effect is applied to the decorative symbol display device 208 Images are displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second effect may be performed only by the second effect means, or may be performed by effect means other than the second effect means. In addition, the second effect may be necessarily performed by the second effect means, or may not be performed by the second effect means.

  In addition, the second effect is an effect to be executed including at least a second effect means, and may be an effect to be executed only by the second effect means, or the other of the second effect means The effect to be executed may also be performed including effect means other than the second effect means. Further, even when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect is an effect in which the second effect means and effect means other than the second effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

Also, ““ the second effect is the effect performed by the second effect means ”means“ the second effect is the second light emission mode of the second effect means [for example, 242 (e) to (h), it is an effect executed by emitting light in a mode in which the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit light in green and red, etc.] Is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “informing means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, effect button lamp 138, etc.]” is provided,
The notification means is a notification for prompting an operation to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation notification [for example, effect button for urging the depression of the effect button 136 by the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is a means for displaying an image BT, displaying a character “repeat hit”, displaying a remaining time meter MT, emitting red light by the effect button lamp 138, etc.]
The back button effect refers to the second period during which the operation notification is not performed (for example, the operation reception period pertaining to the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIG. 242 (d) to (h)). It is an effect that may be started in response to one operation means being operated in the first operation mode [for example, a continuous hitting operation etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the notification means may perform only notification for prompting an operation to the first operation means, or may perform notification for prompting other than the operation to the first operation means. In addition, the notification means may always give a notification that prompts an operation on the first operation means, or may not give a notification that prompts an operation on the first operation means.

  In addition, even in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the back button effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first operation mode. In the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the operation may be started in response to something other than that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. In addition, during the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation means may always start in response to the operation in the first operation mode, or the operation notification is not performed. In the second period, the first operation means may not be started in response to operation in the first operation mode.

Also, in the first period during which the operation notification is performed [for example, the operation reception period according to the continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 222 (d) to FIG. (G), etc.], the first operation means The first effect may be started in response to an operation in one operation mode [for example, a continuous hitting operation, etc.],
In the first period, when the first operation means is operated in a second operation mode (for example, long press operation etc.), the first effect may be started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the operation may be started even in response to things other than the operation of the first operation means in the first operation mode. . Further, the first effect may be necessarily started in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the first operation means may not be started in response to the operation in the first operation mode.

  In addition, the first effect may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, or the first period In the case where the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, it may be started even in cases other than the case. Also, the first effect may be necessarily started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, and in the first period, The first operating means may not be started in response to operation in the second operating mode.

In addition, “symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display [for example, it is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. The effect to be played is started during symbol variation display etc.],
The second effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display [eg, effect lamps SL1 to SL in the back button continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 242 (e) to FIG. (H) The effect that SL4 emits light in green or red, the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other display than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  Also, the first effect may be started only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first effect may be necessarily started during display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during display of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be necessarily started during display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during display of the symbol variation display.

[When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode The first effect may be started as being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is artificially operated 20 times As display of the result of the operation (preliminary display such as a cut-in image, notification to give notice of becoming a big hit, etc.) is started, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and effects other than the first effect are also started. There may be. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may always be started on the assumption that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, “operation in the first operation mode” is “multiple operation”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In other words, “in the first operation mode” in “the first effect may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode” is: It is the thing of the continuous hitting operation,
A game stand characterized by "
It can be said.

Further, in other words, "the operation in the first operation mode" in "the first effect may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode". Is the operation of multiple times,
A game stand characterized by "
It can also be said.

In addition, “operation in the second operation mode” is “long press operation”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the long press operation is an operation in which the state of the operation is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by "
Also, in the above description,
[First operation means [e.g. effect button 136 etc.]
Second operation means [eg, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, OK button 137e, clear button 137f, etc.]
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to display multiple types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a display shown in FIG. 222 or 223 when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a display showing that “customize effect” is selected by the cursor CL, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), FIG. Display indicating that the "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL, etc.]
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, the continuous hitting operation or the multiple operation (the operating mode by the continuous hitting operation and the operation mode by the multiple operations include the same operation modes. The same applies hereinafter Etc.] may cause the display of the first display to be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full. In such a case, it is notified that a notice such as a cut-in image or a big hit will be given, for example, on the assumption that the presentation is successful.
When the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, a continuous hitting operation or a plurality of operations, etc.], the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 6E, when “Adjust volume light amount” is selected by the cursor CL on the menu screen, the display indicating that “customize effect” is selected by the cursor CL is “Premier” is displayed by operating the button 137 b twice, as shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. (G 1), when “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen. The display indicating that the up mode is selected by the cursor CL is displayed by operating the lower button 137 b twice, etc.],
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long press operation etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, When the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the continuous pressing operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, the effect is succeeded when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, and the cut is performed. Notice display such as in image etc. and notification to give notice of becoming a big hit are performed etc.],
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display of the second display is not started [eg, as shown in FIG. 211 (b) to FIG. (E), a menu screen When "volume light amount adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, a display indicating that "customize effect" is selected with the cursor CL is not displayed when the lower button 137b is pressed and held, As shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. (G 1), when “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, “premier up mode” is selected by the cursor CL Is not displayed when the lower button 137b is pressed and held, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game console, there was room for improvement in display, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by display.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may It may be displayed even in response to things other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means is the first operation mode. It may not be displayed according to having been operated with.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed only in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the second operation means may be the first It may be displayed even in response to things other than having been operated in the operation mode of. In addition, the second display may be always displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the second operation means is the first operation mode. It may not be displayed according to having been operated with.

  The display mode of the second display may be partially different from the display mode of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the first display may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second The display may be started also in cases other than the case of being operated in the operation mode. In addition, the first display may be always started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is the second operation mode. The display may not start when operated.

In addition, the second display may not be started even when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the second operation means may be the second The display may not always start when the user operates in the mode, or may start when the second operating means is operated in the second operating mode.
The effect is a concept included in the effect (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, “the second display is a display when one of the plurality of options is selected [eg,“ volume light amount adjustment ”in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (e), Displayed when "production customization" of "member registration", "production customization", and "operation assistance setting" is selected with the cursor CL, "normal" in the presentation customization setting screen shown in the figure (g1) Displayed when "Premier up mode" among "Mode", "One shot notification mode" and "Premier up mode" is selected with the cursor CL, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second display is a display displayed on the setting screen [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be displayed only on the setting screen, or may be displayed on other than the setting screen. Further, the second display may be displayed on the setting screen without fail or may not be displayed on the setting screen.

In addition, “the setting screen is a screen including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 is“ volume light amount adjustment ”,“ member It includes a display that instructs you to select one option from “Registration”, “Customize effect”, and “Operation assistance setting”, and one option from “Normal mode”, “One shot notification mode”, and “Premier up mode” Including indication to instruct to choose]
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display that is displayed when the first option among the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light quantity adjustment” in the menu screen shown in FIG. Displayed when “volume light quantity adjustment” of “member registration”, “production customization”, and “operation assistance setting” is selected by the cursor CL, or in the presentation customization setting screen shown in FIG. Displayed when “normal mode” out of “normal mode”, “one shot notification mode”, and “premium up mode” is selected by the cursor CL],
The second display is a display that is displayed when the second option is selected from the plurality of options [for example, “volume light amount adjustment” in the menu screen shown in FIG. Displayed when “Production customization” is selected by the member registration among “member registration”, “production customization”, and “operation assistance setting”, or “in the presentation customization setting screen shown in the same figure (g1) Displayed when "premium up mode" among the "normal mode", "one shot notification mode", and "premium up mode" is selected with the cursor CL],
When the third display is displayed, the display of the second display may be started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, FIG. As shown in (b) to (e), when "Adjust volume light amount" is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, if the lower button 137b is operated twice, the "effect customization" is a cursor When the display indicating that the CL is selected is started, and the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, as shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. 211 (g1), When the lower button 137b is operated twice, a display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is started, etc.],
When the third display is displayed, the display of the second display is not started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, FIG. 211 (b) As shown in (e) of the figure, when “Adjust volume light amount” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, “Defense customization” is performed with the cursor CL when the lower button 137 b is pressed and operated. The display showing that it is selected is not started, and as shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. 211 (g1), when “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, As long as the lower button 137b is pressed and held, a display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the setting screen may include only a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or an instruction to select one option from a plurality of options Display other than the above may also be included. In addition, the setting screen may always include a display instructing to select one of a plurality of options, or instructs to select one of a plurality of options. The display may not be included.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first option among the plurality of options is selected, or the first option among the plurality of options is selected It may be displayed at other times. Further, the third display may be displayed whenever the first option among the plurality of options is selected, or the first option among the plurality of options is selected It may not be displayed on occasion.

  Also, the second display may be displayed only when the second option among the plurality of options is selected, or the second option among the plurality of options is selected It may be displayed at other times. In addition, the second display may be displayed whenever the second option among the plurality of options is selected, or the second option among the plurality of options is selected It may not be displayed on occasion.

  Further, the second display may be started only when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed. If the third display is displayed, the display may be started even when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Further, the second display may be always started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed. When the third display is displayed, the display may not be started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

  In addition, the second display may not be started except when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode when the third display is displayed. When the third display is displayed, the display may not necessarily start when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the third display is displayed. In some cases, the display may be started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

[In the case of the second display, when the third display is displayed, N times (N 例 え ば 2 [for example, 2 times etc.]) are operated by the second operation means [For example, in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (b) to FIG. 211 (e), the display showing that "customize effect" is selected by the cursor CL is "volume". When a display indicating that the light amount adjustment is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, the display is started when there are two pressing operations by the lower button 137b, or in the effect customization setting screen, The display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed when the display indicating that the "notification mode" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. Display is started when there are two pressing operations by 7b, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be started only when N operations have been performed by the second operation unit when the third display is displayed. When the third display is displayed, the display may be started even when the second operation means does not perform the operation of N meeting. The second display may be always started when the third operation is performed N times by the second operation means, or the third display may be performed. When the display of is displayed, the display may not be started when there is an operation of N meeting by the second operation means.

In addition, “image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]” is provided,
The first display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, a notice display such as a cut-in image or the like in a continuous hitting operation effect, and a notification notifying that a big hit will be made will be , Etc. are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208],
The second display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, “effect customization” on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (b) to FIG. (E) is selected by the cursor CL The display showing that the cursor is on or the display showing that the "premier up mode" in the effect customization setting screen shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. Etc. displayed on 208],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by something other than the image display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

  The second display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by other than the image display means. In addition, the second display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

In addition, “symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 222 or FIG. 223 is full] The effect to be played is started during symbol variation display etc.],
The second display is a display that is not started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, “effect customization” on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (b) to FIG. (E) is selected by the cursor CL The display showing that it is displayed, and the display showing that the "premier up mode" in the effect customization setting screen shown in FIG. 211 (f) and FIG. It does not start during display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other display than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  The first display may be started only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during display of the symbol variation display. May be In addition, the first display may be always started while the symbol variation display is displayed, or may not be started while the symbol variation display is displayed.

  Further, the second display may not be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started except during the display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may not necessarily be started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

[When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode The first display may be started as being displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is artificially operated 20 times As display of the result of the operation (preliminary display such as a cut-in image, notification to give notice of becoming a big hit, etc.) is started, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, there may be a case where only the first display is started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display other than the first display is started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. May be In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be always started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may not be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, “operation in the first operation mode” is “multiple operation”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In other words, “operation in the first operation mode” in “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, display of the first display may be started” Is the continuous hitting operation,
A game stand characterized by "
It can be said.

Further, in other words, in the "first operation mode" in "the display of the first display may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode". "Operation" refers to multiple operations,
A game stand characterized by "
It can also be said.

In addition, “operation in the second operation mode” is “long press operation”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds, etc.),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display [eg, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the change effect of the holding icon shown in FIG. 161 (c) to FIG. 161 (n), FIG. 172 (g) to FIG. i) button preview effect etc. shown in
The second effect display may be an effect display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIG. 161 (d) to FIG. 161 (k) or a button preview shown in FIG. 171 (m) to FIG. 172 (f) Production etc.],
The first effect display may be a first operation prompting display [for example, a display of a button hold icon shown in FIG. 161 (c) to FIG. (J) or a display of FIG. 172 (g) to FIG. Effect display including vibration and rotating button image 136a and "Push" display, etc.,
The second effect display may be a second operation prompting display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 161 (e) to FIG. 161 (f) or the display of FIG. 171 (r) to FIG. 172 (b) Effect display including the button image 136a to be displayed and the display of “continuous hit”, etc.,
The first operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The second operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display are different operation prompting displays,
In the first effect display, the big hit notice (hereinafter, “first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (k), the hold icon is displayed in a pre-reading notice display mode (circular display mode in blue) Precautionary pre-reading notice and a notice etc. by the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172 (i) and the weak cut-in image CI1 b shown in FIG. 172 (i ′) It is an effect display,
The second effect display is a notice associated with the first notice (hereinafter, “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (h) to FIG. 161 (k),“ hold 1 UP ”is displayed. That there is a possibility that a super-atsu notice may appear due to the notice that the reliability of the prefetch notice in the hold icon is one step up in rank, or the display of "Daikichi" as shown in FIG. 172 (f). Notice notice etc.] is an effect display that may be derived
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice that affects the first notice.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to actively perform the operation of the operation means in order to reach the first notice.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the plurality of types of effect display may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, and may also include displays other than the first operation promotion display. In addition, the first effect display may include the first operation promotion display or may not include the first operation promotion display.

  In addition, the second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, and may also include displays other than the second operation promotion display. In addition, the second effect display may include the second operation prompting without fail, and may not include the second operation prompting.

  Further, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always performed, or there may be a case in which the first notice is not performed.

  In addition, the second effect display may be that only the notice associated with the first notice may be derived, or may be derived other than the notice associated with the first notice. It may be a certain one. Further, the second effect display may be one in which a notice related to the first notice is always derived, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

In addition, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (d) to FIG. (K) , A state in which both the change icon production and the mini game of the hold icon are displayed, or a state in which both the button preview effect and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIG. 173 (c) to the same figure (o) Etc.])),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible for the player to hold that the first notice and the second notice are related.

  Here, there may be only the first state, or there may be other than the first state, or it may be the first state or in the first state. May not be.

Also, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 161 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change icon of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, or FIG. g) As shown in FIG. 1 (l), when both of the button preview effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc., when the production button 136 is continuously hit and operated.
If the operation unit is operated after the second preliminary notification is started, the first preliminary notification corresponding to the second preliminary notification is executed [for example, FIG. 161 (j When the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived as shown in), the display mode of the hold icon according to the result of the mini game is previewed as shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived as shown in FIG. 173 (n), or as shown in FIG. 173 (n), as shown in FIG. 173 (n), Depending on the result, a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to actively operate the operation means with respect to the mini game.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state of (1), a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Also, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first state The second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed even when the operation means is not operated.

  Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be made. In the case where the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, a notice other than the first advance notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated after the second advance notice is started, the first advance notice according to the second advance notice may be executed without fail. If the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the first notice may not be executed in response to the second notice.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the first notice according to the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice The configuration may be such that only the first notice according to the second notice is executed except when there is an operation of the operation means after the start of.

In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 165 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state in which both the change icon production of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes and the result of the mini game Is also derived, or as shown in FIG. 168 (g), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change icon of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. But the result of the mini game is not derived, etc.]
After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed may be changed according to the second notice [eg, FIG. 165 (g) to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 168 (h) to (m), after the result of the mini game is derived and “Hold 1 UP” is displayed, the blue hold mode icon changes to a green display mode etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When there is an operation of the operating means in the state of (1), only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state of 1, the notice other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or in the first state In the case where the operation means is operated, the first notice of the first notice and the second notice and the notice other than the second notice may be executed.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  In addition, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. At least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed even when the operation means is not operated in the state.

  Also, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, Notices other than the first notice performed in response to the second notice may also change. Also, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may always change, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

  Also, only after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice performed in response to the second notice may change.

Also, in the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display [eg, as shown in FIG. 166 (e) to FIG. The change effect of the holding icon being performed by the symbol display device 208L is overlapped with the mini game being performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, in some cases, attention may be paid to the effect display on the mini game side, which is the notice of the first notice, and the expectation to the first notice may be increased.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to give priority to the mini game side in chronological order.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be cases where it is easy to understand even if the operation means overlaps, by giving priority to the notices that affect notices that may occur in the future.

  Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, or in the first state, the first effect display may be effects other than the second effect display. The display may also be overlapped. Also, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap with the second effect display without fail, or in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display There may be cases.

  Also, only in the first state, the first effect display may overlap with the second effect display, and in states other than the first state, the first effect display may be the second effect display May be overlapped.

In addition, “second effective period [for example, the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIG. 161 (e) to FIG. (F) or FIG. 175 (e) to FIG. And the second notice is started when the operation means is operated.
The second effect display is a second effective period display [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 161 (e) to FIG. 175 (f) or FIG. 175 (e) to FIG. Effect display including
The second effective period display is a display in which the display mode changes in accordance with the elapse of the second effective period [for example, FIG. 161 (e) to FIG. (F) and FIG. 175 (e) to FIG. As shown in the figure (g) etc., the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation reception time starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by performing the second effective period display, it is possible to cause the player to quickly derive the result of the mini game, so it may be possible to draw attention to the first notice. .

  Here, when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, Notices other than the second notice may be started. Also, the configuration may be such that the second advance notice is always started when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, or the second advance notice is operated in the second effective period. The configuration may be such that the second advance notice may not be started.

  Further, the second advance notice may be started only when the operating means is operated in the second effective period, or in the case other than when the operating means is operated in the second effective period. Alternatively, the second notice may be started.

  In addition, the second effect display may include only the second effective period display, or may include displays other than the second effective period display. Further, the second effect display may include the second effective period display without fail or may not include the second effective period display.

Also, "the first notice is a notice that can be performed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, a reserved icon of a blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k), a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173 (o), etc.] And
One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, the hold icon of the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172 (i), etc.] And
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the case where the first notice is performed in the second mode than in the case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, it is likely that the big hit symbol is finally clearly displayed. Is configured and
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is easier to be executed in the second mode than when the second effect display is not started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to give expectation to the first notice by starting the mini game.

  Here, the first advance notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in modes other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the first advance notice may be always performed in a plurality of modes, or may not be performed in a plurality of modes.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be executable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be implemented in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect, It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be always performed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be performed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

  In addition, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is not finally displayed in a final manner, or the first notice is executed in the second mode. In the case, the jackpot symbol may eventually be configured to be definitely displayed.

  In addition, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may not be executed in the second mode, and when the second effect display is started, the second mode The first notice may be configured to be always performed.

In addition, “the second notice is a notice that can be performed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the third mode [eg, display of "Okichi" shown in FIG. 177 (l), etc.]
One of the plurality of modes is the fourth mode [eg, display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 176 (l), etc.]
If the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final display,
When the first notice is executed in the second aspect [for example, the display of "mission accomplished" shown in FIG. 176 (n)], the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect Configured to be
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by becoming the second mode in the first notice, the big hit symbol will be finally displayed in a final display, thereby further improving the expectation of the derivation result for the second notice There are times when you can.

  Here, the second advance notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable also in modes other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second advance notice may be always performed in a plurality of modes, or may not be performed in a plurality of modes.

  In addition, the second notice may be executable only in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may be implemented in an aspect other than the third aspect and the fourth aspect, It is also good. In addition, the second advance notice may be always performed in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may not be performed in the third aspect and the fourth aspect.

Also, “the first notice may be a pre-reading notice [for example, the display of the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k) or the hold in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m) Display of icon etc]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, it is possible to display the number of pending icons corresponding to the number for which the start of the symbol variation display is suspended [For example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is three pending When it is set, three hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed, etc.],
The first notice is a notice given by changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (k) or FIG. 161 (m), the display mode of the hold icon is blue. The advance notice is given by changing to the display mode or the green display mode, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with “display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
It is configured to be able to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 185 (g) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a lottery game etc. shown in FIG. 185 (g ') to FIG. (L')],
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a)],
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  Further, according to this game stand, since the display area of the mini game is fixed to the "predetermined display area", the player may easily understand.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be configured by one display means, or may be configured by two or more display means. In addition, in the configuration constituted by two or more display means, the decorative symbol change display may be performed only in a part of the display means, or the decorative symbol change display is performed in all the display means. It may be known.

  Moreover, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, and games other than the plurality of types of mini games may also be configured to be executable. In addition, multiple types of mini games may be always executed, or multiple types of mini games may not be executed.

  Also, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or mini games other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute the first mini game and the second mini game, or may be configured such that the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed. .

  The first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. In addition, the first mini game may be displayed by using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

  In addition, the second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. In addition, the second mini game may be displayed by using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Also, "notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a notice of pre-reading with a blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 185 (l) or FIG. 185 (l ')],
The first mini game is a result suggesting that the first preliminary notice is to be made (hereinafter, referred to as "first result [for example, display of" 1 UP determined "shown in FIG. 185 (k), etc.]". ) Is a mini game that can be derived
The second mini game is a mini game capable of deriving the first result [for example, the display of “1 UP determined” shown in FIG. 185 (k ′) and the like ”.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to make the relationship such as advance notice easy to understand while entertaining variations of the mini game.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice or may not execute the first notice.

  Also, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Also, the first mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  In addition, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

In addition, “one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a notice of pre-reading with a red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 186 (l) or the same figure (l ′), ,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given,
The first mini game is a result suggesting that the second notice is to be made (hereinafter referred to as “second result [for example, display of“ 3 UP determined ”shown in FIG. 186 (k), etc.]”. ) Is also a mini game that can be derived,
The second mini game is a mini game which can also derive the second result [for example, the display of “3UP determined” shown in FIG. 186 (k ′) and the like].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to improve the expectation for the result that suggests that the second notice is to be made by the mini game is derived.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the second notice, or may not execute the second notice.

  Also, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Also, the first mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

  Also, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, an image BCH of the face of a watchman shown in FIG. 185 (g), etc.] may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [for example, an image BCH of the face of a watchman shown in FIG. 185 (g ′) and the like] may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the same advance notice may be given even if the type of mini game is different, so it may be possible for the player to have various expectations.

  Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, an image BCH of the face of a watchman shown in FIG. 185 (g), etc.] may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [for example, an image BCH of a face of a watchman shown in FIG. 185 (g ′) and the like] may be displayed,
The first mini game is a mini game in which a second character [for example, the SABOHANI character SBH etc. shown in FIG. 189 (A1)] may be displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [eg, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 189 (B1), etc.] may be displayed,
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, depending on the type of character appearing in each mini game, it may be possible to have an expectation for the second result.

  Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the first mini game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may be displayed. In the first mini game, the second character may always be displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

  Further, in the second mini game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may be displayed. In the second mini game, the third character may be displayed without fail, or the third character may not be displayed.

  Note that the third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

  In addition, in the first mini game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, and when the second character is displayed, the second mini game is performed. The result of may be derived by all means.

  In the second mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second game may be displayed when the third character is displayed. The result of may be derived by all means.

"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [for example, the eyebrow mode etc. shown in FIG. 187 (A1) to FIG. (A6)],
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display [for example, the princess mode shown in FIG. 187 (B1) to FIG. (B6), etc.]
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [e.g., as shown in FIG. 187 (A1) to FIG. It is displayed while executing the symbol variation display],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [eg, as shown in FIG. 187 (B1) to FIG. It is displayed while executing the symbol variation display],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game etc.] is a mini game in which the display of the first effect display is easier to be executed than the display of the second effect display,
The second mini game [for example, a fortune-telling game, etc.] is a mini game in which the second effect display is more easily displayed than the first effect display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to associate the main effects and the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or capable of displaying the effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be Further, the display means may display the first effect display and the second effect display without fail, and may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

  Also, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be. In addition, the first effect display may be necessarily displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be. In addition, the second effect display may be necessarily displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first mini game may not be executed while the second effect display is being displayed, or may be always executed while the first effect display is being displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may not be executed while the first effect display is being displayed, or may be always executed while the second effect display is being displayed.

In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (special figure low probability, common figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability change state (special figure high probability spread figure high probability state), etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first game state and the second game state have different probabilities of executing the plurality of types of mini games,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the mini game execution probability varies depending on the gaming state, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the mini game to be executed can be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, transition may be made to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or transition to states other than a plurality of gaming states may be made. Moreover, it may be comprised so that it may transfer to a plurality of types of gaming states by all means, and may not shift to several gaming states.

  Also, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state . Further, it may be configured to shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  Also, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, and the second gaming state is more The probability of executing multiple types of mini games may be high.

  Also, while the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability spread figure low probability state (including the latent probability change, the same below), the special figure low probability spread figure low probability At least one of the state, the special figure high probability common drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special drawing high probability state common drawing low probability state is the first gaming state The special figure high probability state general drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special drawing low probability general drawing high probability state is the first gaming state, the special drawing high probability generalization The figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Also, regardless of the probability state of the special view, the common drawing low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the common drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state. In addition, the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state while the special figure low probability state is the first gaming state regardless of the probability state of the common drawing.

  In addition, multiple types of mini games may not be executed in the first gaming state, and multiple types of mini games may not be executed in the second gaming state.

Also, the probability of executing the plurality of types of notices is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the first mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the second mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (special figure low probability, common figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability change state (special figure high probability spread figure high probability state), etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game etc.] is a mini game in which the first gaming state is more easily executed than in the second gaming state [eg, FIG. 190 As shown in (A1) to (A6), the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal gaming state than in the probability changing state, etc.],
The second mini game [for example, a lottery game and the like] is a mini game in which the second gaming state is more easily executed than in the first gaming state [eg, FIG. 190 As shown in (B1) to (B6), in the definite change state, the fortune game is more likely to be executed than the normal gaming state, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to associate the gaming state with the type of mini game.

  Here, transition may be made to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or transition to states other than a plurality of gaming states may be made. Moreover, it may be comprised so that it may transfer to a plurality of types of gaming states by all means, and may not shift to several gaming states.

  Also, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state . Further, it may be configured to shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  In addition, while the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state is the first game state, the special figure high probability spread figure low probability state, the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, the special figure high probability spread figure height At least any one of the probability states may be the second gaming state, and the special figure high probability state popular figure height while the special figure high probability state regular figure low probability state is the first gaming state The probability state may be the second game state, and the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability spread figure high probability state is the second game It may be in the state. Also, regardless of the probability state of the special view, the common drawing low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the common drawing high probability state may be the second gaming state. In addition, the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state while the special figure low probability state is the first gaming state regardless of the probability state of the common drawing.

  In addition, the first mini game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed in the first gaming state. Good.

  In addition, the second mini game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed in the first gaming state. Good.

"The first gaming state [for example, the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) etc.]" and the second gaming state [for example, the probability change state (special figure high probability generality figure high probability state) etc. ], The probability of executing the multiple types of mini games is different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the mini game execution probability varies depending on the gaming state, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the mini game to be executed can be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, or the second gaming state The probability of executing multiple types of mini games may be high.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-power support state [for example, a general drawing low probability state, etc.],
The second gaming state is a power support state [e.g.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the non-power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

  Further, the power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, when none of the plurality of types of mini games are displayed in the certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a)], the non-mini game effect is displayed in the certain display area Display [for example, a tutorial display “The mini game will start at various timings shown in FIG. 185 (c)”, a tutorial display “Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun] shown in FIG. May be
The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,
The non-mini game effect display being displayed is erased when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in the certain display area [eg, as shown in FIG. 185 (f) to (g) As shown, when the mini game is started when "Yoshimune is 8th General" is displayed, "Yoshimune is 8th General" is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since a non-mini game effect display can be performed using a display area from a normal time, the player may be easily noticed.

  Here, the non-mini game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of a plurality of types of mini games are displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types in a certain display area may be displayed. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed also in an area other than the display area when none of the mini-games are displayed. In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a display area without displaying any of a plurality of mini games in a display area, or any of a plurality of mini games may be displayed in a display area. The non-mini-game effect display may not be displayed in a certain display area when it is not displayed.

  In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a display area only when none of a plurality of types of mini games are displayed in a display area, or a plurality of mini types may be displayed in a display area. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a display area that is also present when none of the games are displayed.

  In addition, when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any of a plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. The display other than the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted when one of the display starts. In addition, when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be necessarily erased, or any of a plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display that is being displayed may not be deleted when one of the display starts.

  In addition, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased only when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, or any of a plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted even when the display is not started.

  Here, as a display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, a display of parameters in the original mode (LV display etc.), and a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC is adopted. It is possible.

Also, the display area may be a frame [for example, the liquid crystal frame of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 161 (d), the outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 171 (m), , An outer frame of multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 175 (a), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain display area may be divided by only a frame, or may be divided by something other than a frame.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. It is formed in the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

Also, “the certain display area is an area which expands in relation to the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in relation to, etc.],
The certain display area is an area which expands in relation to the start of the second mini game.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be made to pay attention to the mini game by the display expansion of a certain display area.

  Here, a display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini game. Good. Also, a certain display area may necessarily expand in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may not expand in relation to the start of the first mini game.

  Also, a certain display area may expand only in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may expand in relation to other than the start of the second mini game . Also, a certain display area may necessarily expand in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may not expand in relation to the start of the second mini game.

  Also, a display area may expand only in connection with the start of the first mini game, and may be configured not to expand in connection with the start of the second mini game. It may expand only in connection with the start of the mini game, and may be configured not to expand in connection with the start of the first mini game.

Also, the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the mini game is executed on the display means on which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the mini game may be able to pay more attention.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

In addition, the display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means [for example, FIG. 161A) other than“ the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol display device 208 M etc.]]
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

Also, in the above description,
"Notice means capable of executing plural notices [e.g., decoration symbol display device 208 etc.]"
Display means capable of displaying a mini game display [eg, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [eg, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 175 (i ′), etc.]
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 175 (i), etc.]
In the case where the second notice is given rather than the first notice, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
The mini game is a game that can derive multiple results,
One of the plurality of results is the first result [eg, display of "Okichi" shown in FIG. 175 (h '), etc.]
One of the plurality of results is a second result [eg, display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 175 (h), etc.]
When the second result is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than when the first result is derived,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the notice means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may participate (focus) on the mini game to derive the second result.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game or may be capable of displaying other display than the display of the mini game. Also, the display means may always display the mini game display or may not display the mini game display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. . The notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  In addition, when the first notice is given, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not displayed finally in the final notice, and when the second notice is given, the big hit symbol is always confirmed finally May be configured to

Also, “at least it is suggested that the second notice is likely to be made by the result of the mini game becoming the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the mini game is started, the display of "Otakuji and strong cut-in occurrence" is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, etc. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the trend of the mini game toward the generation of an advantageous advance notice.

  In addition, by incorporating so-called mission effects into the mini game, there are cases where it is possible to increase a scene where the player can get a sense of achievement.

  Here, before the result of the mini game is derived, it is configured to at least suggest that only the second notice is likely to be made by the result of the derived mini game being the second result. The good news is that it is at least suggested that other than the second notice is likely to be given by the result of the mini game becoming the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. It may be configured. In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the derived mini game may be a second result, which may at least indicate that the second notice is necessarily performed. And the mini game outcome may be at least suggested that the second outcome will not occur by the second outcome being the second outcome before the mini game outcome is derived. May be

  In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured to be notified in advance that the second preliminary announcement is likely to be performed by the result of the derived mini game being the second result. .

  In addition, modes of suggestion are modes that at least an effect of mission achievement is suggested, such as "Please give ...", "If ... has stopped", etc. As long as it is, any aspect is applicable.

"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIG. 176 (c) to FIG. (N), etc.],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIG. 176 (c) to FIG. Being performed during the display of fluctuation etc.],
The first effect display is an effect display that can derive a plurality of effect results,
One of the plurality of effect results is a first effect result [eg, display of “Mission failure” shown in FIG. 177 (n), etc.]
One of the plurality of rendering results is a second rendering result [for example, the display of "mission accomplished" shown in FIG. 176 (n), etc.]
It is suggested that the jackpot result is likely to be a big hit by the lead effect of the first lead display being the second lead result before the lead result of the first lead display is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), when the mission effect is started, the contents of the mission of “put out a cut-in” and “big hit if it appears” are displayed, etc.,
The second effect result [e.g., in the first effect display than in the case where the second result [e.g., the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 175 (h)] is derived in the mini game. If the display etc. of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 176 (n) is derived, it is configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed finally in the case where it is derived.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where it is possible to increase a scene where a sense of achievement of the player can be obtained by adopting a so-called mission effect other than the mini game.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there may be a case where the variation of the mission effect can be increased by providing a difference to the result of the mission.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it may be possible to clarify the difference between the mission of the main effect and the mission of the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays or may not display a plurality of effect displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying the effect display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display or may not display the first effect display.

  Also, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be. In addition, the first effect display may be necessarily displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only a plurality of effect results, or may be capable of deriving results other than the plurality of effect results. Further, the first effect display may always derive a plurality of effect results or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

  In addition, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only the first effect result and the second effect result, and also derives effect results other than the first effect result and the second effect result It may be possible. In addition, the first effect display may always derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or there may be cases where the first effect result and the second effect result are not derived. It is also good.

  In addition, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured to be notified in advance that the effect result of the first effect display is likely to be a big hit by becoming the second effect result May be

  In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is not finally displayed in the final display, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display Finally, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be definitely displayed. In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display, or the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. When it is done, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may not be displayed in the end.

Also, when the second effect result is derived, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to clarify the division of mission effects.

  Here, only when the second effect result is derived, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed, and also in the case other than the case where the second effect result is derived. Finally, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be finalized.

In addition, “a state in which both the mini game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 176 (g) to FIG. In the state where both the effect and the mini game are displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible for the player to feel that there is a relationship between the result of the mini game and the result of the first effect display.

  Here, there may be only the first state, or there may be other than the first state, or it may be the first state or in the first state. May not be.

Also, the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position that can be operated by the player is provided,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. 176 (g) to FIG. (L), FIG. 177 (g) ~ As shown in the same figure (l), “Okichi” and “Okichi” are derived, etc., when the production button 136 is continuously hit and operated in the mini game, etc.]
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived.
If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice [eg, FIG. 177 (m) rather than the second notice [eg, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 176 (m)]. Weak cut-in image CI1b etc.] shown in
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is easier to be performed than the first notice,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the result of the mini game may affect the notice, the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  In addition, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, and the mini game is performed except when the operation means is operated in the mini game. The result of may be configured to be derived. In addition, when the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game may be always derived, or when the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived. It may not be done.

  In addition, the result of the mini game may not be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the mini game is performed except when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured such that the outcome of the game is not derived. In addition, when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game may not necessarily be derived, or when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is It may be configured to be derived.

  Also, the first notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the second notice only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases as well, the first notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the second notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may always be more easily performed than the second notice, or the result of the mini game is not derived. In some cases, it may be configured that the first notice may not be easier to perform than the second notice.

  In addition, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may be configured not to be given. If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always made. It may be configured to be

  Also, the second notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the first notice only when the result of the mini game is derived, or it may be other than the case where the result of the mini game is derived. Also in the case, the second notice may be configured to be more easily performed than the first notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may always be more easily performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, The second notice may be configured to be less likely to be made than the first notice.

  In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may be configured not to be performed, and when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be performed necessarily. May be configured.

Also, even if the second advance notice is scheduled to be made (hereinafter referred to as the “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first advance notice If, for example, the result of the mini game is determined as derivable as a result of the mini game but the result of the mini game is not derived, as shown in FIG. 178 (m), a strong cut is made. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the result of the mini game may affect the notice, the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, since the advance notice does not affect the judgment of success or failure, even when a notice different from the scheduled time occurs, the result of the success or failure judgment is not affected, and the notice which is forcibly scheduled is There is no need to do it. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in the mini game in order to make a better notice appear.

  Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be provided only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini The first advance notice may be configured to be performed also when the game result is not derived. Further, even in the first case, the first advance notice may be provided whenever the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini game It may be configured that the first notice may not be given if the result of is not derived.

In addition, “held icon display means capable of displaying plural types of held icons [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] is provided,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon [eg, the hold icon of the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [eg, a green display mode hold icon shown in FIG. 161 (m)],
The first notice is a notice given by the display of the first hold icon [for example, the advance notice is given by the display of the hold icon of the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice given by the display of the second hold icon [for example, the advance notice is given by the display of the hold icon of the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon displayed.
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to expect change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, although it was monotonous with only conventional effects in which the button hold icon is displayed and the effect of changing the display mode is performed by the operation of the operation means, the display mode of the hold icon has been changed according to this game stand After that, since there may be further changes, it may be possible to further increase the sense of expectation in the change display of the hold icon.

  Here, the holding icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the holding icon display means may always display a plurality of types of holding icons, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

  Also, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may display the hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be Also, the hold icon display means may display the first hold icon and the second hold icon without fail, or even if the first hold icon and the second hold icon may not be displayed. Good.

  Also, the first notice may be made only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be made by something other than the first hold icon being displayed. May be In addition, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. .

  In addition, the second notice may be given only by the display of the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than the display of the second hold icon. May be In addition, the second notice may be made by displaying the second holding icon or may not be performed by displaying the second holding icon. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured such that it may be started only while a certain symbol variation display is being performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state being, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start while a certain symbol variation display is being performed in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state being.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case, If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case, The first hold icon may be configured to change to a second hold icon if the result of the mini game is not derived.

  Also, in the first case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived. In the first case, The first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon except when the mini game result is not derived. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or the case other than the first case. Also in the case where the mini game result is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case In the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to always change to the second hold icon, or in the first case In the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first holding icon may be configured not to change to the second holding icon.

  Also, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game, or in the first case The first holding icon may be configured to change to the second holding icon also in the case where the second result is derived in the mini game. Also, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case In other cases, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon when the second result is derived in the mini game.

In addition, “held icon display means capable of displaying plural types of held icons [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] is provided,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon [eg, the hold icon of the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [eg, a green display mode hold icon shown in FIG. 161 (m)],
The first notice is a notice given by the display of the first hold icon [for example, the advance notice is given by the display of the hold icon of the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice given by the display of the second hold icon [for example, the advance notice is given by the display of the hold icon of the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon displayed.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol The first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol change display started later than the change display
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there are cases where it is possible to change the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon depending on the participation status of the mini game.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, even if it does not participate in the mini game in the end, the relationship between the advance notice and the reliability may be maintained in some cases.

  Here, the holding icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the holding icon display means may always display a plurality of types of holding icons, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

  Also, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may display the hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be Also, the hold icon display means may display the first hold icon and the second hold icon without fail, or even if the first hold icon and the second hold icon may not be displayed. Good.

  Also, the first notice may be made only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be made by something other than the first hold icon being displayed. May be In addition, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. .

  In addition, the second notice may be given only by the display of the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than the display of the second hold icon. May be In addition, the second notice may be made by displaying the second holding icon or may not be performed by displaying the second holding icon. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured such that it may be started only while a certain symbol variation display is being performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state being, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start while a certain symbol variation display is being performed in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state being.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to only the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured.

  Also, in the first case, only when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Also, in the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display except when the second result is derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Even if the second result is derived in the mini game in any case other than the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display It may be configured as follows.

  Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change only from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of symbol variation display started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of a symbol variation display started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from an icon to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to always change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of symbol variation display started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of a symbol variation display started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured such that the icon may not change from the second hold icon.

  Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon only during the execution of the symbol variation display to be started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first pending icon is not executed during the execution of a symbol variation display that is started later than a certain symbol variation display May be configured to change from the second hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to always change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display started later.

  Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display to be started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived In this case, the first holding icon does not change to the second holding icon other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first pending icon during the execution of the symbol variation display which is started later than a certain symbol variation display May be configured to change from the second hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not necessarily change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display The first hold icon may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display that is also started later.

  Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display to be started later, or in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived Also in the case other than the case where the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, during the execution of the symbol variation display which is started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from the certain symbol variation display The result of the mini game may be configured to change from the first holding icon to the second holding icon during execution of the symbol variation display to be started later. If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of a symbol variation display that is started later than a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate are provided,
Depending on the operation status of the operation means, the derived result of the mini game may be different [For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (i) to FIG. If the condition is satisfied, “Daikichi” is derived, but as shown in FIG. 178 (i) to FIG. "Okichi" is derived, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Moreover, only the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation situation of the operation means, and other than the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation situation of the operation means . Further, the derivation result of the mini game may always be different according to the operation situation of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different according to the operation situation of the operation means.

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate are provided,
In the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is operated or not (for example, as shown in FIG. 177 (i) to FIG. (L) As described above, when "Nakakichi" is determined in advance so as to be derived, "Okyoshi" can be derived even if the production button 136 is continuously hit or not, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  In the mini game, only the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not. In the mini game, the operating means is operated Results other than the same result may be derived depending on the case where the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may always be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, or in the mini game, the operating means is operated when the operating means is operated The same result may not be derived in some cases.

  In addition, in the mini game only, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means may be operated other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on the case where the operation means is not operated.

In addition, “the display means is a first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L etc.] and the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N etc. And means], and
The first display means and the second display means are different display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be composed of In addition, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be one.

Also, in the above description,
“Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means [eg, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIG. 193 (g) to the same figure (m) or a mini game shown in FIG. 195 (j) to the same figure (o)]. It is a possible means,
The mini game is a game that can derive multiple types of results,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (g) to FIG. (K), the treasure box is operated by the operation key unit 137. When the treasure box selected and selected with the effect button 136 is determined, a bastard character BA appears from the treasure box, and “Okichi” is displayed as a result of fortune telling, or FIG. 196 (A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the production button 136 is hit and operated, the appearance of the clothes worn by the Bancho character is shown, and a display of "bancho awakening" and "I am in great shape today" is performed, etc.] ,
One of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation situation of the operation means [eg, as shown in FIG. 194 (A1) to FIG. (A6), the operation When the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is selected by the key unit 137 and determined by the effect button 136, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of fortune telling, but FIG. 194 (B1) As shown in FIG. 6 (B6), when the treasure box BX3 at the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and determined by the presentation button 136, while the brow character BA appears, as a result of the fortune-telling, “Koyoshi Is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 196 (A1) to FIG. 196 (A6), when the effect button 136 is continuously hit and operated and the condition of the number of operations is satisfied, It is shown that the clothes worn by the long character are broken, and the message "bancho awakening" and "Today's best" is displayed, and the production button 136 has been repeatedly hit, but the conditions for the number of operations have not been met. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 197 (C7), the clothes worn by the Bancho character can not be broken and the “bancho awakening game” ends, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is the third result [for example, the display of the brow character BA and "Koyoshi" shown in FIG. 193 (k), or the Bancho shown in FIG. 197 (C7) The indication that the clothes worn by the character can not be broken, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the success / failure determination [for example, the success / failure determination of at least one of the success / failure determination of the special drawing, the success / failure determination of the spread map, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Also, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a game console for playing mini games has been conventionally provided. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a mini game.

  Moreover, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to entertain the player other than pure gaming.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at the position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  In addition, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game or may be capable of displaying other display than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

  In addition, the mini game may be capable of deriving only a plurality of types of results, or may be capable of deriving other types of results. In addition, the mini game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not have a plurality of types of results.

  In addition, only the result of the mini game may be derived by operating the operating means, or other than the result of the mini game may be derived by operating the operating means. It may be done. Further, the result of the mini game may be always derived by operating the operating means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operating means. May be

  In addition, only one of the plurality of results may be derived according to the operation situation of the operation means, or among the plurality of results according to the operation situation of the operation means Other than any one may be configured to be derived. In addition, any one of the plurality of results may be derived according to the operation situation of the operation means, or any of the plurality of results according to the operation situation of the operation means It may be configured that one or more may not be derived.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving other results than the third result. In addition, the mini game may always derive the third result or may not derive the third result.

  Also, the third result does not indicate the result of the success or failure determination, and is not a notification.

In addition, “the mini game is a game for deriving a certain result among the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 194 (A1) to FIG. (A6) is“ Daikichi ” Mission and so on to select the treasure box of the contents of
Depending on the operation situation of the operation means, the certain result can be derived [for example, in the case shown in FIG. 194 (A1) to FIG. (A6), the lower left treasure box BX2 is selected by the operation key unit 137, When it is determined by the effect button 136, the princess character HM3 appears, and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

  Here, a certain result may be only one, or two or more.

  Further, only a certain result may be configured to be derivable according to the operating condition of the operating means, or a result other than a certain result may be derivable according to the operating condition of the operating means. Further, a result may be always derived depending on the operating condition of the operating means, or may be configured such that a result may not be derived depending on the operating condition of the operating means.

In addition, “decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Equipped
When the mini game is started in a first period [for example, a period of a standby state in which the variable display of the special view is not performed (including a state in which a customer waiting demo display is displayed)] (hereinafter referred to as It is a game where there is a "first case."
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended [e.g., a period in which the suspension of both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0, etc.]
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it can be enjoyed in the mini game during the first period.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the operation of the operation means can be positively performed even during the original game by prompting the operation of the operation means in the mini game.

  Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing display other than the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the mini game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

  In addition, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended, or a period in which there is one in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variation display. It is also good.

  In addition, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, or other than the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214) may also be a period of time that has not been performed.

In addition, “automatic operation of the operation means [for example, long press automatic, full automatic, etc.]” is configured to be executable,
The mini game is configured such that the auto operation can not be performed in the first case [for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (g) and FIG. (J) to FIG. (O) , Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the automatic operation of the effect button 136 is not performed, etc. in the Bancho awakening game, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, in the first case, since it is a mini game which is not related to the judgment of success or failure, the auto operation can not be performed and the player can positively operate the operation means. There is.

  Here, only automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable, or operations other than the automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable. In addition, the automatic operation of the operation means may be always performed, or the automatic operation of the operation means may not be performed.

  Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that only the automatic operation can not be performed, or can be configured such that operations other than the automatic operation can not be performed. Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that the auto operation can not always be executed, or may be configured such that the auto operation may not be disabled.

  In addition, the mini game may be configured such that the auto operation can not be performed only in the first case, and is configured such that the auto operation can not be performed except in the first case. It is also good.

In addition, “the mini game is a game that is started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as“ the second case ”), and it is shown in, for example, FIG. Mini games shown in FIG. 171 (m) and FIG. 172 (f) and mini games shown in FIG. 185 (g) to FIG. The mini game shown in FIG. 200 (e) to FIG. 200 (i) is started during the execution of the big hit game, etc.],
The second period is a period which does not overlap with the first period,
The second period is a period including at least one of execution of the decorative symbol variation display and execution of a big hit game,
The third result is more easily derived in the mini game in the first case than in the second case.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to enjoy the mini game even during the game.

  Here, the mini game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

  In the first case, the third result may be derived in the mini game without fail, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. It is also good.

In addition, the type of the mini game to be started is different between the first case and the second case [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 193 (g) to (m) The fortune telling game shown in FIG. 195 (j) to FIG. 195 (o) is a mini game started in the standby state, and the dice game or the diagram shown in FIG. 185 (g) to FIG. 185 (l). The fortune game shown in 185 (g ') to the same figure (l') is a mini game which is started while the decorative symbol is variably displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to identify whether it is a notice or a mere game depending on the type of mini game.

  Here, only the types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different, or in the mini games started in the first case and the second case. Other types may be configured to be different. Also, the type of mini game started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be always different, or the type of mini game started in the first case and the second case May not be different.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, a first effective period display [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the game of the acronym of a master shown in FIG. 195 (k) etc.] is displayed. Configured to be
In the mini game started in the second case, a second valid period display [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 176 (i), etc.] is displayed. Is configured and
The first effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, shown in FIG. 195 (k) to FIG. (N) As such, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, etc.],
The second effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [eg, shown in FIG. 176 (i) to FIG. 176 (k) As such, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, etc.],
The changing speed of the display mode is different between the first valid period display and the second valid period display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the types of mini games can be distinguished by looking at the effective period display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first Validity displays other than the valid display may also be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first effective period display may be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first effective The period display may not be displayed.

  Further, the first effective period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. , And the first validity period indication may be displayed.

  Also, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective. The effective period display other than the period display may be configured to be displayed. Also, in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period display may be displayed without fail, and in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective The period display may not be displayed.

  Also, the second effective period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. , And a second validity period indication may be displayed.

  In addition, the first effective period display may change the display mode only in accordance with the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and other than the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The display mode may change depending on the situation. Further, the first effective period display may be such that the display mode necessarily changes in accordance with the passage of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or in the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. Depending on the situation, the display mode may not change.

  In addition, the second effective period display may change the display mode only in accordance with the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and other than the elapse of the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The display mode may change depending on the situation. In addition, the second effective period display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, or when the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective Depending on the situation, the display mode may not change.

  Also, either one of the first validity period display and the second validity period display may not be displayed.

  In the first and second effective period displays, the speed at which the display mode changes may be faster in the first effective period display, and the second effective period display is the display mode. The changing speed of may be fast.

  Further, different display modes may be used for the first and second valid period displays, or the same display mode may be used. In the first and second effective period displays, the first effective period display may be larger in size, and the second effective period display may be larger in size. The size may be the same between the first and second validity period displays.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation prompting display [for example, the button image 136a displayed in the acronym game shown in FIG. Etc are displayed, and
In the mini game started in the second case, a second operation prompting display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 176 (i) and a display of “continuous hit” etc.] is displayed Configured to be
The first operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The second operation prompting display is a display prompting an operation of the operation means,
The first operation prompting display is a display that can be displayed with a first number [for example, one or the like] display patterns [for example, a default display mode or the like],
The second operation prompting display is a display that can be displayed with a second number [for example, two etc.] display patterns [for example, a default display mode and a display mode etc. that is vibrating and rotating].
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, in the mini game started in the second case, the variation in the display pattern of the operation promotion display may be able to enhance the expectation to the big hit.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first An operation prompting display other than the operation prompting display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation prompt may be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation It may be configured that the prompting may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first operation prompt may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation prompt may be displayed.

  Also, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation prompt may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation Operation prompting other than prompting may be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation prompt may be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation It may be configured that the prompting may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second operation prompt may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. , And a second operation prompt may be displayed.

  In addition, the first operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operation means. In addition, the first operation prompting display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation unit, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the second operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the second operation prompting display may be a display for always prompting the operation of the operating means, or may be a display not for prompting the operation of the operating means.

  Further, the first operation prompting display may be displayable only with the first number of display patterns, or may be displayable with display patterns other than the first number of display patterns. Good. In addition, the first operation prompting display may be always displayed in the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed in the first number of display patterns.

  In addition, the second operation prompting display may be displayable only with the second number of display patterns, or may be displayable with display patterns other than the second number of display patterns. Good. In addition, the second operation prompting display may be necessarily displayed by the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed by the second number of display patterns.

  Also, the first number may be one or two or more.

  Further, in the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display, the first operation prompting display may be larger in size, and the second operation prompting display is larger in size. The size may be the same between the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display.

  Further, the display mode may be different between the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, display of“ Okyoshi ”shown in FIG.
The first result is a result at least suggesting the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Okichi" shown in FIG. At least suggest indication etc],
The first result is more easily derived in the mini game in the second case than in the first case.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. In addition, the mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  The first result may at least suggest only the result of the pass / fail determination, or may at least suggest other than the result of the pass / fail determination. In addition, the first result may necessarily at least suggest the result of the pass / fail determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Further, the first result may indicate the result of the success or failure determination, or may notify the result of the success or failure determination.

  In the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be derived in the mini game.

In addition, the first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a pre-reading notice [eg, FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (f As shown in), in a mini game played during the variable display of the decorative symbol, a preliminary announcement or a preliminary announcement is given when the character YSM of the main character of the main character appears from the treasure box,
The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game is a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the mini game can be functioned as a notice.

"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIG. 173 (c) to FIG. (O), etc.] related to the decorative symbol variation display,
In the first effect display, there is a case where a big hit notice (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice [for example, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173 (o)]”) may be executed. And
As the first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice associated with the first notice may be executed [eg, FIG. c) As shown in the same figure (l), the display of "Nakakichi" derived in the mini game started during the variable display of the decorative symbol gives notice of the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always performed, or there may be a case in which the first notice is not performed.

  In addition, as a first result derived in the case where the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, only the notice related to the first preliminary notice may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started while the variable display is being performed, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be performed. In addition, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice related to the first notice may be necessarily executed, or the execution of the decorative symbol variation display As a first result derived in the case where the mini game is started, a notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is the second result [for example, display of“ Daikichi ”shown in FIG. 176 (l), etc.”]
The second result is a result at least suggesting the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 176 (l) is the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. At least suggest indication etc],
The second result is more easily derived in the mini game in the second case than in the first case,
If the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as a result of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

  Further, the second result may be a result indicating the result of the success or failure determination, or may be a result of informing the result of the success or failure determination in advance.

  In the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini game, or in the second case, the second result may be derived in the mini game without fail. Good.

  In addition, when the first result is derived, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not displayed finally in the final display, and when the second result is derived, the big hit symbol is always finally determined. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, in the first case, “the mini game has only the third result [for example, the mini game result shown in FIG. 193 (k), FIG. (K1) to FIG. (K 4), etc.] It is a game to derive,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is displayed as the fourth result [for example, the princess character HM3 and the display of“ Daikichi ”shown in FIG. Display of the manner in which the clothes worn by the Bancho character are broken, etc.
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the success / failure determination [for example, the success / failure determination of at least one of the success / failure determination of the special drawing, the success / failure determination of the spread map, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give variations to the result of the mini game.

  In addition, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result and the fourth result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result and the fourth result. . Moreover, the mini game may always derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

  Also, the fourth result does not indicate the result of the success or failure determination, and is not a notification.

Also, in the above description,
“Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [eg, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.];
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display [eg, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. (17), etc.]
The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, a display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. 14 (14), etc.,
The operation valid period display is a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. Indicates the remaining time of 136 operation effective period, etc.],
The first display is a first preliminary display [for example, a button acceptance time meter in a mode in which a mini-character BCH of a bancho is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge as shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. This is a display that may include the display of MT etc.
The first display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first advance notice display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation valid period is started [eg, FIG. As shown in (12) to (17), the button reception time meter MT operates the effect button 136 when display is performed in a mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Switching to the display in a mode in which the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge, etc.],
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display which is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period [eg, as shown in FIG. 254 (3) to FIG. When the operation effective period passes without the effect button 136 being operated, the meter MT does not give a notice using the button acceptance time meter MT, and the button acceptance time meter MT is erased, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Conventionally, display effects by display means have become colorful. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game console. According to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where the operation of the operation means can be performed quickly.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to give expectation even after the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player can not operate.

  Note that as the operation means, any operation device such as a button, a lever, an arrow key, a touch panel, or a touch sensor can be applied.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays or may not display a plurality of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. The display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  In addition, the configuration in which the operation unit itself includes the display unit may be applied, or the configuration in which the display unit itself includes the operation unit may be applied.

  In addition, the first display may include only the display of the operation valid period, or may include displays other than the display of the operation valid period. In addition, the first display may include the display of the operation valid period or may not include the operation valid period display.

  The operation valid period display may be a display by a gauge, a display by a countdown of a timer, or a display mode may be switched before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the first display may include only the first preview display, or may include displays other than the first preview display. In addition, the first display may include the first preview display or may not include the first preview display.

  Further, the first display may be such that the display of the operation valid period becomes the first notice display only in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started. The display of the operation valid period may be the first advance notice in response to the operation other than the operation of the operation means after the start of the valid period. In addition, the operation valid period display may be the first notice display according to the fact that the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation valid period is started. The display of the effective period of operation may not become the first advance notice in response to the operation of the operating means later.

  The first advance notice may not be displayed only when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period, or even when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period. It may not be displayed. In addition, the first advance notice may not necessarily be displayed when the operation means is not operated in the operation valid period, or may be displayed when the operation means is not operated in the operation valid period. There may be.

  In addition to the display by the display device, the first notice display can be applied to a notice effect by output of sound, a notice effect by operation of the effect movable body, and a notice effect by emission of a lamp.

In addition, “the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display in which the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 253 (3)] The display may be
The second preliminary display is a preliminary display which may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (3) to FIG. The button acceptance time meter MT in the display mode with the panda icon is displayed since the button operation effect starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the first display may be noticed even before the operation means is operated.

  Here, the first display may include only the second preview display, or may include displays other than the second preview display. In addition, the first display may include the second preliminary display or may not include the second display.

  In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. It may be. Further, the second advance notice may be displayed before the operation means is operated or may not be displayed before the operation means is operated.

Also, in the case where “the first preview display is displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which a mini-character BCH of a bancho is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15), etc.] There is a notice that there is a
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display that may be displayed in a third display mode (for example, a mode in which a mini character of a princess is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge).
The second preliminary display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which a long icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (3)]. It may be a notice, and
The second preliminary display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which the icons of the note lengths are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (11)]. It is a notice display,
In the case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode than in the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the method according to the third display mode is performed. The first preview display is configured to be easily displayed [for example, the button reception time is longer than when the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of a long icon and a panda icon. If the icons displayed on both ends of the meter MT are both the icon of the bancho, it is easier for the princess mini character to be displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT, etc.]
The big hit symbol is finally determined when the first preview display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the princess mini character is displayed than when the bancho mini character BCH is displayed on the remaining display portion of the button reception time meter MT gauge, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the second notice display functions as a notice of the first notice display, the first notice display may be noticed by the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the first display mode, and display modes other than the first display mode may also be displayed. May be In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the first display mode or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first preliminary display may be displayed only in the third display mode, and display modes other than the third display mode may also be displayed. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed only in the second display mode, and display modes other than the second display mode may also be displayed. It is also good. In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed in the second display mode or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, and display modes other than the fourth display mode may also be displayed. It is also good. In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed in the fourth display mode or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the second notice display may be displayed. When the advance notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first advance notice display by display modes other than the third display mode may also be displayed. In addition, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. When it is displayed in the 4th display mode, it may be constituted so that the first notice display by the 3rd display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the second notice display may be displayed. The first advance notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed even when the advance notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display may be the third display mode. When it is displayed, the symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed in the end, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode In the case, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display, and the first notice display may indicate the third display mode. Also in the case other than the case of being displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays may be a fourth display [for example, a button image 136a in a default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12), a Deca button image 136 aL shown in FIG. 275 (29), 277 (6), vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc.],
The fourth display is an operation prompting display,
The operation promotion display is a display for promoting the operation of the operation means [for example, the operation of the effect button 136 is urged by the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248 (12)],
The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode [for example, a button image 136a in a default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12)],
In the fourth display, the sixth display mode [for example, the decal button image 136aL having a display mode larger than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275 (29), the effect button 136 shown in FIG. This is a notice that may be displayed by the vibration / rotation button image 136aV etc. of the rotating aspect],
The first preview display may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which a mini-character BCH of a program leader is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15)]. Is a display,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display that may be displayed in a third display mode (for example, a mode in which a mini character of a princess is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge).
The first display according to the third display mode is more effective when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode. Of the button display time is displayed, and for example, the button acceptance time meter is displayed when the deca-button image 136aL or the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed than when the button image 136a is displayed. Mini character of princess is likely to be displayed on the remaining display part of the gauge of MT, etc.],
The big hit symbol is finally determined when the first preview display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the princess mini character is displayed than when the bancho mini character BCH is displayed on the remaining display portion of the button reception time meter MT gauge, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice by the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means may be further promoted.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

  In addition, the fourth display may be formed only of the operation prompting display, or may be a display other than the operation prompting display. In addition, the fourth display may include the operation prompting without fail, and may not include the operation prompting.

  Also, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the fifth display mode. Good. In addition, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the sixth display mode. Good. In addition, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the first display mode or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the third display mode. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, only the first preview display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the fourth display mode may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, it may be configured such that the first notice display by the display mode other than the third display mode may also be displayed. In addition, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed without fail, or the fourth display may be displayed in the fourth display mode. When it is displayed in the six display modes, it may be configured such that the first preview display by the third display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first preview display according to the third display mode may be displayed, or the fourth display mode may be displayed. The first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display may be the third display mode. When it is displayed, the symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed in the end, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode In the case, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display, and the first notice display may indicate the third display mode. Also in the case other than the case of being displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display.

Also, “the first notice display is a notice display that is started to be displayed in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation valid period [eg, FIG. 248 (15) As shown, when the effect button 136 is operated, the length of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT in which the mini character BCH of the group length is displayed is the length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first notice display differs depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated, the display of the first notice display can be diversified, and the effect of presentation is improved. There is a case.

  Here, the first notice display may be such that display can be started only in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation effective period, or the operation effective period is started. It may be possible to start display even in display modes other than the display mode according to the timing when the operation means is operated after that. In addition, the first advance notice display may always start to be displayed in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation validity period, or after the operation validity period is started The display may not be started in the display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated.

Also, “the first notice display is a notice display that is displayed only for a period according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [eg, FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button acceptance time meter MT in which the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed until the gauge remains. That is, after the effect button 136 is operated, until the time corresponding to the operation effective period elapses, the button acceptance time meter MT in which the mini character BCH of the master length is displayed is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, for example, as the timing at which the operation means is operated is earlier, the first notice display can be seen longer, so there may be cases where the operation of the operation means can be promoted.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayable only in a period according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation effective period, or after the start of the operation effective period It may be possible to display even a period other than the period according to the timing when the operation means is operated. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed in a period according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation effective period, or the operation means after the operation effective period is started May not be displayed in a period corresponding to the timing at which the key is operated.

In addition, the first preliminary display is a preliminary display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. In the button acceptance time meter MT in which the is displayed, the display mode changes such that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time since the start of the operation effective period, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first notice display changes according to the passage of time, the first notice display may be noticed.

  Here, the first preliminary display may change the display mode only in accordance with the passage of time, or the display mode may also change in accordance with other than the passage of time. It may be. In addition, the display mode of the first preliminary display may change with time, or the display mode may not change with time.

In addition, “the operation valid period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. 14 (14), the button acceptance time meter MT The display mode changes as the gauge decreases according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the operation effective period display changes according to the passage of time, it may be possible to pay attention to the operation effective period display.

  Here, the display mode of the operation valid period display may be changed only according to the passage of time, or the display mode may be changed according to other than the passage of time. May be In addition, the display form of the operation valid period display may change with the passage of time, or the display form may not change with the passage of time.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG.
The second display is the display of the operation valid period [for example, the display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to the same figure (5), etc.,
The second display is a display which is erased when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. (6), The button acceptance time meter MT is erased when the effect button 136 is operated while the display in a mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, since the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, the second display may be sometimes noticed when the operation means is operated.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may display the second display without fail or may not display the second display.

  The second display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include displays other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured not to include the operation valid period display.

  Further, the second display may be erased only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation means may be operated after the operation effective period is started. It may be erased even when it is not operated. The second display may be erased whenever the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started May not be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG.
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The second display is a display that may include the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to the same figure (5), etc.,
The second display is a display that may include a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first preliminary display.
The second display is a display in which the operation effective period display is the first effect display in response to an operation of the operation means after the operation effective period is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to focus attention on the second display before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may display the second display without fail or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may include only the display of the operation valid period, or may include the display other than the display of the operation valid period. In addition, the second display may include the display of the operation valid period or may not include the operation valid period display.

  In addition, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include displays other than the first effect display. In addition, the second display may include the first effect display or may not include the first effect display.

  The first effect display may be partially different from the first preview display, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the second display may be such that the display of the operation effective period becomes the first effect display only in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation effective period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first effect display in accordance with things other than that the operation means is operated after the effective period is started. In addition, the second display may be such that the display of the operation effective period always becomes the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation Depending on the fact that the operation means has been operated after the effective period has been started, the operation effective period display may not be the first effect display.

[The operation effective period display is a display by a gauge [for example, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. (5), or FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. Display of gauge on button reception time meter MT etc.]
The first preliminary display is a display by a gauge [for example, a display of a gauge in a button acceptance time meter MT on which a mini character BCH of a group length shown in FIG. 248 (15) to the same figure (17) is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to visually recognize the operation effective period display and the first notice display.

  Here, the operation effective period display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured to include other than the gauge. In addition, the operation effective period display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

  In addition, the first notice display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured to include other than the gauge. In addition, the first notice display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

In addition, “the first advance notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect [for example, a decorative symbol change display etc.],
The certain effect is a effect that is configured to be developed after the display of the first preliminary announcement is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. (20), The decorative symbol variation display is developed into a super reach after the button acceptance time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the original uses the operation effective period, it may be possible to draw attention to the development effect after showing the first notice display.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first notice display including the indication regarding the operation effective period may be able to function as a timer notice regarding the development of a certain effect.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during the execution of an effect other than the execution of a certain effect. There may be In addition, the first preliminary announcement may be necessarily displayed during the execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, a certain effect may be configured to be developed only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started It may be configured such that it may develop other than later. In addition, a certain effect may be configured to necessarily develop after the display of the first preview display is started, or may be developed after the display of the first preview display is started. May not do.

Also, “one of the plurality of displays is a third display [eg, step-up notice shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. (17)],
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated in the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. (17), the operation valid After the start of the period, when the effect button 136 is operated, a step-up notice is started, etc.],
The third display is a notice display,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the display of the third display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. (20), the decorative symbol variation display is , After step-up notice has been started, etc. has developed into super reach],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give an expectation for the display of the third display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. The display means may display the third display without fail or may not display the third display.

  The third display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period, or when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period. May also be displayed. The third display may be displayed whenever the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. It is also good.

  The third display may be configured to include only the advance notice, or may be configured to include a display other than the advance notice. In addition, the third display may be configured to include the advance notice, or may not be included.

  Also, one display may be configured to be developed only after the third display is started, or may be developed other than after the third display is started. It may be configured as follows. Also, one display may be configured to evolve after the third display is started, or may not expand after the third display is started.

[The third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated in the operation valid period [eg, as shown in FIG. 254 (3) to FIG. (9) In addition, after the operation effective period starts, step-up notice is started, etc., also when the operation effective period passes without the effect button 136 being operated, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, while the notice display that starts when the operation means is operated appears even if the operation means is not operated, the first notice display can not be seen, so the first In some cases, it may be possible to facilitate the operation of the operating means to view the advance notice.

  Here, the third display may be always displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period. There may be.

In addition, the operation effective period ends when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds after the start of the operation effective period] elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts. Configured as
The first notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of one second since the start of the operation effective period] has elapsed since the operation effective period has started. The period of time taken is the fourth period [eg, a period of 4 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.],
The first notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds since the start of the operation effective period] has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. The period of time taken is the fifth period [eg, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.],
The third period is longer than the second period,
The fourth period is a shorter period than the third period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, it may be configured that only the operation effective period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or after the operation effective period starts When the first period elapses without the operation means being operated, a period other than the operation effective period may be ended. In addition, the operation valid period may be configured to be ended when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the start of the operation valid period, or the operation may be performed after the operation valid period is started. The operation valid period may not end when the first period elapses without the means being operated.

  Here, the operation valid period display may be a display for giving a notification regarding the first period.

  The operation valid period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the start of the operation valid period. The operation valid period may be configured to end even if a period other than the first period elapses without the means being operated.

  The second period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. The third period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period of the same length as the first period. In addition, the fourth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period of the same length as the first period. In addition, the fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The second period may be longer than the fourth period, may be the same length, or may be shorter. In addition, the third period may be a period longer than the fifth period, may be a period of the same length, or may be a short period.

Also, “the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the first period, or shorter than the first period,
The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same as the first period, or shorter than the first period.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The total length of the second and fourth periods may be longer than the length of the first period, or the total length of the third and fifth periods is the first period. It may be longer than the length of

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [eg, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.];
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display [eg, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. (17), etc.]
The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, a display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. 14 (14), etc.,
The operation valid period display is a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. Indicates the remaining time of 136 operation effective period, etc.],
The first display is a first preliminary display [for example, a button acceptance time meter in a mode in which a mini-character BCH of a bancho is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge as shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. This is a display that may include the display of MT etc.
The first display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first advance notice display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation valid period is started [eg, FIG. As shown in (12) to (17), the button reception time meter MT operates the effect button 136 when display is performed in a mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. And the mini-character BCH is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge, etc.],
The first notice display is a notice display configured to include the display of the operation effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. The button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the length of the gauge decreases corresponding to the time after the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  Conventionally, display effects by display means have become colorful. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game console. According to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to give expectation even after the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player can not operate.

  Note that as the operation means, any operation device such as a button, a lever, an arrow key, a touch panel, or a touch sensor can be applied.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays or may not display a plurality of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. The display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  In addition, the configuration in which the operation unit itself includes the display unit may be applied, or the configuration in which the display unit itself includes the operation unit may be applied.

  In addition, the first display may include only the display of the operation valid period, or may include displays other than the display of the operation valid period. In addition, the first display may include the display of the operation valid period or may not include the operation valid period display.

  The operation valid period display may be a display by a gauge, a display by a countdown of a timer, or a display mode may be switched before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the first display may include only the first preview display, or may include displays other than the first preview display. In addition, the first display may include the first preview display or may not include the first preview display.

  Further, the first display may be such that the display of the operation valid period becomes the first notice display only in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started. The display of the operation valid period may be the first advance notice in response to the operation other than the operation of the operation means after the start of the valid period. In addition, the operation valid period display may be the first notice display according to the fact that the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation valid period is started. The display of the effective period of operation may not become the first advance notice in response to the operation of the operating means later.

  Further, the first advance notice display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include displays other than the operation valid period display. In addition, the first advance notice display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured without including the operation valid period display.

  In addition to the display by the display device, the first notice display can be applied to a notice effect by output of sound, a notice effect by operation of the effect movable body, and a notice effect by emission of a lamp.

Also, “the first notice display is a notice display that is started to be displayed in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation valid period [eg, FIG. 248 (15) As shown, when the effect button 136 is operated, the length of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT in which the mini character BCH of the group length is displayed is the length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation effective period. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first notice display differs depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated, the display of the first notice display can be diversified, and the effect of presentation is improved. There is a case.

  Here, the first notice display may be such that display can be started only in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation effective period, or the operation effective period is started. It may be possible to start display even in display modes other than the display mode according to the timing when the operation means is operated after that. In addition, the first advance notice display may always start to be displayed in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation validity period, or after the operation validity period is started The display may not be started in the display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated.

Also, “the first notice display is a notice display that is displayed only for a period according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [eg, FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button acceptance time meter MT in which the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed until the gauge remains. That is, after the effect button 136 is operated, until the time corresponding to the operation effective period elapses, the button acceptance time meter MT in which the mini character BCH of the master length is displayed is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, for example, as the timing at which the operation means is operated is earlier, the first notice display can be seen longer, so there may be cases where the operation of the operation means can be promoted.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayable only in a period according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation effective period, or after the start of the operation effective period It may be possible to display even a period other than the period according to the timing when the operation means is operated. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed in a period according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the start of the operation effective period, or the operation means after the operation effective period is started May not be displayed in a period corresponding to the timing at which the key is operated.

In addition, the first preliminary display is a preliminary display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. In the button acceptance time meter MT in which the is displayed, the display mode changes such that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time since the start of the operation effective period, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first notice display changes according to the passage of time, the first notice display may be noticed.

  Here, the first preliminary display may change the display mode only in accordance with the passage of time, or the display mode may also change in accordance with other than the passage of time. It may be. In addition, the display mode of the first preliminary display may change with time, or the display mode may not change with time.

In addition, “the operation valid period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. 14 (14), the button acceptance time meter MT The display mode changes as the gauge decreases according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the operation effective period display changes according to the passage of time, it may be possible to pay attention to the operation effective period display.

  Here, the display mode of the operation valid period display may be changed only according to the passage of time, or the display mode may be changed according to other than the passage of time. May be In addition, the display form of the operation valid period display may change with the passage of time, or the display form may not change with the passage of time.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG.
The second display is the display of the operation valid period [for example, the display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to the same figure (5), etc.,
The second display is a display which is erased when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. (6), The button acceptance time meter MT is erased when the effect button 136 is operated while the display in a mode indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, since the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, the second display may be sometimes noticed when the operation means is operated.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may display the second display without fail or may not display the second display.

  The second display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include displays other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured not to include the operation valid period display.

  Further, the second display may be erased only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation means may be operated after the operation effective period is started. It may be erased even when it is not operated. The second display may be erased whenever the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started, or when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started May not be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG.
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The second display is a display that may include the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to the same figure (5), etc.,
The second display is a display that may include a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first preliminary display.
The second display is a display in which the operation effective period display is the first effect display in response to an operation of the operation means after the operation effective period is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to focus attention on the second display before and after the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may display the second display without fail or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may include only the display of the operation valid period, or may include the display other than the display of the operation valid period. In addition, the second display may include the display of the operation valid period or may not include the operation valid period display.

  In addition, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include displays other than the first effect display. In addition, the second display may include the first effect display or may not include the first effect display.

  The first effect display may be partially different from the first preview display, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the second display may be such that the display of the operation effective period becomes the first effect display only in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation effective period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first effect display in accordance with things other than that the operation means is operated after the effective period is started. In addition, the second display may be such that the display of the operation effective period always becomes the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started, or the operation Depending on the fact that the operation means has been operated after the effective period has been started, the operation effective period display may not be the first effect display.

[The operation effective period display is a display by a gauge [for example, the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (4) to FIG. (5), or FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. Display of gauge on button reception time meter MT etc.]
The first preliminary display is a display by a gauge [for example, a display of a gauge in a button acceptance time meter MT on which a mini character BCH of a group length shown in FIG. 248 (15) to the same figure (17) is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to visually recognize the operation effective period display and the first notice display.

  Here, the operation effective period display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured to include other than the gauge. In addition, the operation effective period display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

  In addition, the first notice display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured to include other than the gauge. In addition, the first notice display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

In addition, “the first advance notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect [for example, a decorative symbol change display etc.],
The certain effect is a effect that is configured to be developed after the display of the first preliminary announcement is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. (20), The decorative symbol variation display is developed into a super reach after the button acceptance time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the original uses the operation effective period, it may be possible to draw attention to the development effect after showing the first notice display.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first notice display including the indication regarding the operation effective period may be able to function as a timer notice regarding the development of a certain effect.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during the execution of an effect other than the execution of a certain effect. There may be In addition, the first preliminary announcement may be necessarily displayed during the execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, a certain effect may be configured to be developed only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started It may be configured such that it may develop other than later. In addition, a certain effect may be configured to necessarily develop after the display of the first preview display is started, or may be developed after the display of the first preview display is started. May not do.

Also, “one of the plurality of displays is a third display [eg, step-up notice shown in FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. (17)],
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated in the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. (17), the operation valid After the start of the period, when the effect button 136 is operated, a step-up notice is started, etc.],
The third display is a notice display,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the display of the third display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. (20), the decorative symbol variation display is , After step-up notice has been started, etc. has developed into super reach],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give an expectation for the display of the third display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. The display means may display the third display without fail or may not display the third display.

  The third display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period, or when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period. May also be displayed. The third display may be displayed whenever the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. It is also good.

  The third display may be configured to include only the advance notice, or may be configured to include a display other than the advance notice. In addition, the third display may be configured to include the advance notice, or may not be included.

  Also, one display may be configured to be developed only after the third display is started, or may be developed other than after the third display is started. It may be configured as follows. Also, one display may be configured to evolve after the third display is started, or may not expand after the third display is started.

[The third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated in the operation valid period [eg, as shown in FIG. 254 (3) to FIG. (9) In addition, after the operation effective period starts, step-up notice is started, etc., also when the operation effective period passes without the effect button 136 being operated, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, while the notice display that starts when the operation means is operated appears even if the operation means is not operated, the first notice display can not be seen, so the first In some cases, it may be possible to facilitate the operation of the operating means to view the advance notice.

  Here, the third display may be always displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period. There may be.

In addition, “the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display in which the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 253 (3)] The display may be
The second preliminary display is a preliminary display which may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 253 (3) to FIG. The button acceptance time meter MT in the display mode with the panda icon is displayed since the button operation effect starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, the first display may be noticed even before the operation means is operated.

  Here, the first display may include only the second preview display, or may include displays other than the second preview display. In addition, the first display may include the second preliminary display or may not include the second display.

  In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. It may be. Further, the second advance notice may be displayed before the operation means is operated or may not be displayed before the operation means is operated.

Also, in the case where “the first preview display is displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which a mini-character BCH of a bancho is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15), etc.] There is a notice that there is a
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display that may be displayed in a third display mode (for example, a mode in which a mini character of a princess is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge).
The second preliminary display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which a long icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (3)]. It may be a notice, and
The second preliminary display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which the icons of the note lengths are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (11)]. It is a notice display,
In the case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode than in the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the method according to the third display mode is performed. The first preview display is configured to be easily displayed [for example, the button reception time is longer than when the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of a long icon and a panda icon. If the icons displayed on both ends of the meter MT are both the icon of the bancho, it is easier for the princess mini character to be displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT, etc.]
The big hit symbol is finally determined when the first preview display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the princess mini character is displayed than when the bancho mini character BCH is displayed on the remaining display portion of the button reception time meter MT gauge, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the second notice display functions as a notice of the first notice display, the first notice display may be noticed by the operation of the operation means.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the first display mode, and display modes other than the first display mode may also be displayed. May be In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the first display mode or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first preliminary display may be displayed only in the third display mode, and display modes other than the third display mode may also be displayed. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed only in the second display mode, and display modes other than the second display mode may also be displayed. It is also good. In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed in the second display mode or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, and display modes other than the fourth display mode may also be displayed. It is also good. In addition, the second advance notice may be displayed in the fourth display mode or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the second notice display may be displayed. When the advance notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first advance notice display by display modes other than the third display mode may also be displayed. In addition, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. When it is displayed in the 4th display mode, it may be constituted so that the first notice display by the 3rd display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the second notice display may be displayed. The first advance notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed even when the advance notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display may be the third display mode. When it is displayed, the symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed in the end, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode In the case, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display, and the first notice display may indicate the third display mode. Also in the case other than the case of being displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays may be a fourth display [for example, a button image 136a in a default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12), a Deca button image 136 aL shown in FIG. 275 (29), 277 (6), vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc.],
The fourth display is an operation prompting display,
The operation promotion display is a display for promoting the operation of the operation means [for example, the operation of the effect button 136 is urged by the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248 (12)],
The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode [for example, a button image 136a in a default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12)],
In the fourth display, the sixth display mode [for example, the decal button image 136aL having a display mode larger than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275 (29), the effect button 136 shown in FIG. This is a notice that may be displayed by the vibration / rotation button image 136aV etc. of the rotating aspect],
The first preview display may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which a mini-character BCH of a program leader is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15)]. Is a display,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display that may be displayed in a third display mode (for example, a mode in which a mini character of a princess is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge).
The first display according to the third display mode is more effective when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode. Of the button display time is displayed, and for example, the button acceptance time meter is displayed when the deca-button image 136aL or the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed than when the button image 136a is displayed. Mini character of princess is likely to be displayed on the remaining display part of the gauge of MT, etc.],
The big hit symbol is finally determined when the first preview display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the princess mini character is displayed than when the bancho mini character BCH is displayed on the remaining display portion of the button reception time meter MT gauge, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice by the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means may be further promoted.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

  In addition, the fourth display may be formed only of the operation prompting display, or may be a display other than the operation prompting display. In addition, the fourth display may include the operation prompting without fail, and may not include the operation prompting.

  Also, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the fifth display mode. Good. In addition, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the sixth display mode. Good. In addition, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the first display mode or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the third display mode. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, only the first preview display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the fourth display mode may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, it may be configured such that the first notice display by the display mode other than the third display mode may also be displayed. In addition, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed without fail, or the fourth display may be displayed in the fourth display mode. When it is displayed in the six display modes, it may be configured such that the first preview display by the third display mode may not be displayed.

  In addition, only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first preview display according to the third display mode may be displayed, or the fourth display mode may be displayed. The first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display may be the third display mode. When it is displayed, the symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed in the end, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode In the case, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

  In addition, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display, and the first notice display may indicate the third display mode. Also in the case other than the case of being displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed in a final display.

In addition, the operation effective period ends when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds after the start of the operation effective period] elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts. Configured as
The first notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of one second since the start of the operation effective period] has elapsed since the operation effective period has started. The period of time taken is the fourth period [eg, a period of 4 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.],
The first notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds since the start of the operation effective period] has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. The period of time taken is the fifth period [eg, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.],
The third period is longer than the second period,
The fourth period is a shorter period than the third period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, it may be configured that only the operation effective period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation effective period starts, or after the operation effective period starts When the first period elapses without the operation means being operated, a period other than the operation effective period may be ended. In addition, the operation valid period may be configured to be ended when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the start of the operation valid period, or the operation may be performed after the operation valid period is started. The operation valid period may not end when the first period elapses without the means being operated.

  Here, the operation valid period display may be a display for giving a notification regarding the first period.

  The operation valid period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the start of the operation valid period. The operation valid period may be configured to end even if a period other than the first period elapses without the means being operated.

  The second period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. The third period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period of the same length as the first period. In addition, the fourth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period of the same length as the first period. In addition, the fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. The second period may be longer than the fourth period, may be the same length, or may be shorter. In addition, the third period may be a period longer than the fifth period, may be a period of the same length, or may be a short period.

Also, “the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the first period, or shorter than the first period,
The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same as the first period, or shorter than the first period.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The total length of the second and fourth periods may be longer than the length of the first period, or the total length of the third and fifth periods is the first period. It may be longer than the length of

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a first display [for example, the decoration symbol etc. of "special 2" shown in FIG. 274 (5)],
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display combining the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6) and the button acceptance time meter MT, etc.]
The first display is a display related to a button effect [eg, a button operation effect shown in FIG. 274 (6) to FIG. 8 (8)],
The second display is a display related to the button effect,
The first display is a display that may be displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, “decoration 3 shown in FIG. 274 (5) -Special 2-Decorative 4 "combination of decorative symbols," special 2- special 2- special 2 "shown in Figure 277 (5) may be stopped and displayed, etc.]
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of decorative symbols,
The first display and the second display are different displays [for example, the decorative pattern of "special 2" shown in FIG. 274 (5) simply represents a button, and the character of "Chance" is displayed at the top. While the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6) is a display imitating the effect button 136 while the button acceptance time meter MT is added, the display mode is different. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Conventionally, display effects by display means have become colorful. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game console. According to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it may be possible to distinguish whether it is displayed as a symbol or whether it is occurring as an effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays or may not display a plurality of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. The display means may always display the first display or may not display the first display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may display the second display without fail or may not display the second display.

  Further, the first display may be a display relating only to a button effect or may be related to effects other than the button effect. Also, the first display may be always related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

  Further, the second display may be a display relating only to the button effect, or may be related to effects other than the button effect. Further, the second display may be always related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed only as a display constituting at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol change display, or the execution of the decorative symbol change display may be performed. It may be displayed as a display other than the display which constitutes at least a part of the combination of the decorative symbols therein. Further, the first display may be necessarily displayed as a display constituting at least a part of the combination of decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol change display, or the first display may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol change display. It may not be displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of a combination of symbols.

  Further, the second display may not constitute only the combination of the decorative symbols, or may not constitute other than the combination of the decorative symbols. The second display may not necessarily constitute a combination of decorative symbols, or may constitute a combination of decorative symbols.

  In addition, the first display and the second display may be partially different displays or all different displays.

  The difference between the first display and the second display may be, for example, a difference due to a color difference, a difference due to a lighting mode, a difference due to a blinking mode, a difference due to an animation mode, an animation Although there may be differences due to the presence or absence (for example, presence or absence of animation of pressing a button, etc.), the present invention is not limited to these.

Also, “the button effect is an effect to be started after the first display is displayed [eg, the button operation effect shown in FIG. 274 (6) to FIG. It starts after the decorative symbol of "special 2" is displayed at the timing shown in), and the button operation effect shown in FIG. 277 (6) to FIG. It is started after three decorative symbols of "Special 2" are displayed.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to give an expectation for the button effect to be performed.

  Here, the button effect may be started only after the first display is displayed, or may be started other than after the first display is displayed. In addition, the button effect may be necessarily started after the first display is displayed, or may not be started after the first display is displayed.

In addition, “the first display is a display that can be displayed in the first number of display modes [for example, one display mode (for example, the display mode of the decorative symbol of“ special 2 ”) and the like”,
The second display may be a second number of display modes [for example, five display modes (for example, a display mode of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6), a display of the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275 (29) 277 (6) display mode of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277 (6), display mode of the projecting button image 136aS shown in FIG. 279 (41), and button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. Display mode etc. of the simplified button image 136aX)
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the number of patterns can be reduced for the first display to make it easy to understand, while the second display can sometimes be shown as various variations such as a notice.

  Here, the first display may be displayable only in the first number of display modes, or may be displayable also in display modes other than the first number display modes. . The first display may be always displayed in the first number of display modes, or may not be displayed in the first number of display modes.

  The second display may be displayable only in the second number of display modes, or may be displayable in display modes other than the second number of display modes. In addition, the second display may be always displayed in the second number of display modes, or may not be displayed in the second number of display modes.

  Also, the first number and the second number may be the same number, or the second number may be smaller than the first number.

Also, "the first number is one,"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be cases where it is easy to understand as a symbol to be displayed once by setting the number of first display patterns to one.

  Here, the first number may be a number greater than one or zero.

In addition, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, a combination of three decorative symbols is configured to be stopped and displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 277 (10), as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the left symbol is displayed・ A decorative symbol is displayed on each of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the stop symbol is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.
The button effect is started when a combination of three first displays is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). The button operation effect shown in FIG. 277 (6) to FIG. 8 (8) is an effect, for example, the decorative symbol of “special 2” is displayed on the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol, “special 2-special It is started when the stop display is given by the combination of 2-special 2 "decorative symbols etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand that button effects may be performed.

  Here, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, only the combination of three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, combinations other than the combination of three decorative symbols are also stopped It may be configured to be displayed. Moreover, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be always displayed as a stop. As a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may not be displayed as a stop. It may be configured as it is.

  In addition, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed only by the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped besides the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display It may be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, the button effect may be started only when a combination of three first displays is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol fluctuation display, or the decorative symbol fluctuation display During the execution of the above, it may also be started other than when it is displayed in the combination of three first displays as a combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the button effect may be always started when displayed as a combination of three first displays as a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol fluctuation display, or the decorative symbol fluctuation display During the execution of, it may not start when displayed in a combination of three first displays as a combination of decorative symbols.

  In addition, the button effect may be started only when the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a combination of the three first displays as a combination of the decorative symbols, or the decorative symbol variation display Even during the execution of, it may be started when displayed as a combination of three first displays as a combination of decorative symbols.

[In the first case, the display mode of at least one of the three first displays is different at least in part from the display mode of the other first display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 283 (5), a mini-character BCH of a long-length is added to the decorative symbol of "special 2" of the left symbol and the decorative symbol of "special 2" of the middle symbol. The panda's mini character PND is added to the "special 2" decorative design, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to prevent misunderstanding that the symbols are aligned and become a big hit.

  Here, in the first case, the display mode of one of the three first displays may be partially different from the display mode of the other two first displays, In the first case, the display mode of one of the three first displays may be entirely different from the display mode of the other two first displays.

  In the first case, the display modes of the two first displays of the three first displays may be partially different from the display modes of the other one first display, In one case, the display modes of two of the three first displays may be all different from the display modes of the other one first display.

  In the first case, the display modes of all the first displays of the three first displays may be partially different from one another, or in the first case, the three first displays All of the display modes of the first display of all of the above may be different.

  In the first case, the display modes of all the first displays of the three first displays may be exactly the same.

In addition, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, a combination of three decorative symbols is configured to be stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 275 (34), as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the left symbol is displayed・ A decorative pattern is displayed on each of the middle pattern and the right pattern, and it is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, etc.
In the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols are sequentially displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 275 (26), first, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (27), subsequently, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right pattern, and as shown in FIG. 275 (33), finally “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol Etc.],
The button effect is an effect started when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol to be displayed last of the three decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [eg The button operation effects shown in FIG. 274 (6) to FIG. 274 (8), as shown in FIG. 274 (3) to FIG. Is started when the stop display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand that button effects may be performed.

  Here, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, only the combination of three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, combinations other than the combination of three decorative symbols are also stopped It may be configured to be displayed. Moreover, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be always displayed as a stop. As a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may not be displayed as a stop. It may be configured as it is.

  In addition, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed only by the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped besides the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display It may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation display, only three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed, or in the decorative symbol variation display, other than the three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed. It is also good. Further, in the decorative symbol variation display, three decorative symbols may be necessarily displayed in sequence, or in the decorative symbol variation display, three decorative symbols may not be sequentially displayed. Good.

  Further, only in the decorative symbol variation display, three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed, or even in a configuration other than the decorative symbol variation display, three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed. Good.

  In addition, the button effect may be started only when the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display. Also, during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, it may be started even when the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols. In addition, the button effect may be always started when the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display. Also, during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, it may not be started when the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol displayed at the end of the three decorative symbols.

  In addition, the button effect may be started when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol to be displayed first among the three decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decorative symbol variation is performed. It may be started when the first display is displayed as the second displayed decoration symbol among the three decoration symbols during execution of the display, and during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display, the three display may be started. It may be started when the first display is displayed as two of the decorative designs.

In addition, "the display means is a notice display for notifying that the first display may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as" third notice display [for example, In the mini game shown in 274 (13) to (15), when the mini game succeeds and the button icon appears, there is a possibility that the decoration pattern of “special 2” will be stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display It is a means which may indicate that there is a notification etc.)
The first display is configured to be more easily displayed when the third preliminary display is displayed than when the third preliminary display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the display of the first display.

  Here, the display means may display only the third notice display during execution of the decorative symbol change display, or the third notice display during the decorative symbol change display. Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, the display means may always display the third notice during the execution of the decorative symbol change display, or during the execution of the decoration symbol change display, the third notice display may be displayed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the display means may display the third advance notice only during execution of the decorative symbol change display, and the third notice may be displayed other than during execution of the decorative symbol change display. The display may be displayed.

  Further, when the third notice display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed. When the third notice display is displayed, the first notice may be displayed. A display other than the display may also be displayed. In addition, when the third notice display is displayed, the first display may be displayed without fail. Even when the third notice display is displayed, the first display is displayed. It may be configured such that it may not.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed only when the third advance notice is displayed, or even when the third advance notice is displayed. , And the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “the decorative symbol variation display is configured so that the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the determination of acceptance is displayed after the variation of the decorative symbol is started [for example, FIG. 274 (1) As shown in (11) of the figure, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, if the result of the judgment of acceptance of the special figure 1 is a loss, the loss of the “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7” The combination of the decoration pattern is confirmed and displayed, etc.]
The first display is a display that is not displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to prevent misunderstanding as what may be included in the combination of decorative symbols.

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured such that only the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the determination of acceptance may be finalized after the variation of the decorative symbols is started, or the decoration may be displayed. After the start of the variation of the design, a combination other than the combination of the decorative design according to the result of the pass / fail determination may be displayed in a definite manner. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured such that the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the determination of acceptance is definitely displayed after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, or the variation of the decorative symbol is started After having done, it may be constituted so that the combination of the decoration design according to the result of a yes-no decision may not be displayed definite.

  Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured such that the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the determination of acceptance is displayed only after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, or the variation of the decorative symbol is started. Other than after, the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the pass / fail determination may be configured to be finalized.

  Further, the first display may not be determined and displayed only as a combination of decorative symbols, or may not be determined and displayed as a combination other than the combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the first display may not necessarily be determined and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, or may be determined and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.) are provided,
The button effect is an effect using the operation means,
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (5), the decoration symbol of “special 2” schematically represents a button, etc.) Yes,
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (6), the button image 136 a is represented in a mode imitating the effect button 136] ,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to recognize that an effect by the operation means is performed by displaying the first display and the second display.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player can not operate.

  Note that as the operation means, any operation device such as a button, a lever, an arrow key, a touch panel, or a touch sensor can be applied. Here, with respect to these operation devices, although the first display is not prepared, there may be prepared the second display. For example, a first imitating a lever as an operation means Is not provided, but a second display may be provided.

  Also, the button effect may be an effect using only the operation means, or an effect using means other than the operation means. In addition, the button effect may be an effect always using the operation means, or there may be cases where the operation means is not used.

  Further, the first display may be a display including only a display imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display other than the display imitating the operation means. In addition, the first display may be a display that always includes a display imitating the operation means, or may not include a display imitating the operation means.

  Further, the second display may be a display including only a display imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display other than a display imitating the operation means. Further, the second display may be a display including the display imitating the operation means or may not include the display imitating the operation means.

In addition, “the first display is a display that does not include a display relating to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 274 (6)].
The second display is a display including a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 274 (6)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to distinguish between the first display and the second display.

  Here, the first display may not include only the display regarding the operation valid period of the operation means, or may not include any display other than the display regarding the operation valid period of the operation means. Further, the first display may not necessarily include the display related to the operation effective period of the operation means, or may include the display related to the operation effective period of the operation means.

  In addition, the second display may include only the display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect, or may include the display other than the display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect It is also good. In addition, the second display may always include a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect, or may not include a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect .

Also, “the first display is a display that is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started [eg, FIG. 274 (5) to FIG. (8) As shown, the decoration pattern of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle pattern before the button operation effect is started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to easily recognize that a button effect is performed.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started It may be displayed other than before. Further, the first display may be always displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started It may not be displayed before.

"The operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state [e.g., a default (normal) state of the effect button 136, etc.],
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, etc.],
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first display is a display displayed in a first display mode [for example, a display mode of "special 2" shown in FIG. 274 (5), etc.]
The second display is a display that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode (default display mode) of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6), etc.]
The second display is a third display mode [for example, a display mode of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277 (6) (a display mode showing a state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating), etc.] Is a display that may be displayed in
The second display mode and the third display mode are different display modes,
The first display mode is a display mode according to the operation means which is the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode according to the operation means which is the first state,
The third display mode is a display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state,
The first display is a display not displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state [e.g., as shown in FIG. 277 (5) to FIG. Does not change the display mode of "Special 2", etc., even if it takes vibration and rotation.
When the second display is displayed in the third display mode in the button effect after the first display is displayed in the first display mode (hereinafter, “second case [for example, After “Special 2” is displayed in FIG. 277 (5), the button operation effect starts in FIG. 277 (6), and in this button operation effect, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be displayed. Etc.])),
In the second case, the operation means is a means that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be capable of taking only one of a plurality of states, or may take a state other than any of a plurality of states. It may be In addition, the operation means may necessarily take any one of the plurality of states, or may not take any one of the plurality of states.

  Also, the operating means may be capable of taking only the first state and the second state, or may be capable of taking states other than the first state and the second state. It may be. In addition, the operation means may always take the first state and the second state, or may not take the first state and the second state.

  The first state and the second state are not limited to those showing only the external state of the operating means, and for example, those showing an internal control state concerning the operating means are also included in the present invention. For example, as a state applicable to the first state and the second state, a state in which a single press of the operation means is received, a state in which a continuous hitting operation of the operation means is received, a long press operation of the operation means It also includes the status of accepting. More specifically, for example, the first state is a state in which a single press of the operation means is received, and the second state is a state in which a continuous hit operation or a long press operation of the operation means is received. Good.

  In addition, the first state and the second state may be different in part of the state, or all of the states may be different.

  The first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the second display may be necessarily displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  The second display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. In addition, the second display may be necessarily displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Moreover, a part of display mode may differ from a 2nd display mode and a 3rd display mode, and all the display modes may differ.

  Further, the first display mode may be a display mode according to only the operation means being the first state, or a display mode according to things other than the operation means being the first state, It is also good. In addition, the first display mode may be a display mode corresponding to the operation means in the first state or may not be a display mode not in accordance with the operation means in the first state. Good.

  Further, the second display mode may be a display mode according to only the operation means being the first state, or a display mode according to things other than the operation means being the first state, It is also good. In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operation means that is the first state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operation means that is the first state. Good.

  Further, the third display mode may be a display mode according to only the operation means in the second state, or a display mode according to things other than the operation means in the second state, It is also good. In addition, the third display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operation unit in the second state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operation unit in the second state. Good.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state, or a display mode other than the display mode according to the operation means in the second state However, it may not be displayed. In addition, the first display may not necessarily be displayed in the display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state, or may be displayed in the display mode according to the operation means in the second state There may be.

  In addition, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may be displayed only in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode After the first display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode in the button effect. In addition, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may always be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode After the first display is displayed, the second display may not be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

  In addition, only after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode Even after the first display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

  In addition, the operation means may easily be in the second state only in the second case, or may be easily in the second state other than the second state. In addition, the operating means may necessarily be in the second state in the second case, or may not be in the second state in the second case.

  In addition, the operation means may be more likely to be in the second state than the first state only in the second case, and the second operation may be more than the first state in cases other than the second case. It may be one that tends to be in a state.

  As the display modes applicable as the first display mode, the second display mode and the third display mode, appropriate ones can be adopted. For example, the display mode of the deca button, the display mode of the different color, or A display mode to light, a display mode to blink, a display mode by animation, etc. can be adopted.

Also, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the operating means is in the second state than when the operating means is not in the second state.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the operation means to be in the second state.

  Here, when the operation means is in the second state, there may be a case where only the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed, and when the operation means is in the second state, the final The symbols other than the jackpot symbols may also be displayed in a definite manner. Also, when the operating means is in the second state, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed finally, and when the operating means is in the second state, the big hit symbol is finally determined It may not be displayed.

Moreover, only when the operation means is in the second state, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally displayed in a final display, and also in the case other than when the operation means is in the second state Finally, the jackpot symbol may be displayed finalized.
It may be displayed.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  FIG. 286 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 1001 to the playing area 1002 is discharged from the playing area 1002 and can be supplied to the launching means 1001 again. In addition, display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (winning balls, lent balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 1002 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 201 are not provided.

  It should be noted that a mode may be adopted in which the display means 1003 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 201 and described above, and further, a mode in which the display means 1003 is provided with a touch panel. May be That is, the touch panel provided in the display unit 1003 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect relating to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation or long press operation with the touch panel, or in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is being continuously touched. In addition, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function. In addition, in a part of the effects, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less . Further, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel and the effect is performed by the touch panel, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured to be ineffective in many cases, or may be configured to be less. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286 is used by enclosing a sphere and circulating the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and using the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere, dispensing the spheres May be implemented by credit.

  Further, the term "preliminary icon" described above is merely named for convenience, and this does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is conveniently named according to the display mode (motif), may be referred to as a notice item if the notice icon is a tool, and may be referred to as a notice character if the notice icon is a character. In some cases, if the notice icon indicates a skill, it may be referred to as a notice skill, and if the notice icon is a box, it may be referred to as a notice box; , It may be a notice medal. Further, the term "pre notice" in the notice icons is also simply named for convenience, and this does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item to indicate that the item is to be stored.

  Also, what has been referred to as a lamp or illumination so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp may be replaced with any one that emits light, such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  The items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of embodiment, a modification, and an appendix described above, the component may be applied to other embodiments, a modification, and an appendix.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  According to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 287, the gaming table corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 288 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other gaming machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) which can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 289 to 336. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 289 to 336 are basically used only for the description using FIGS. 289 to 336, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 336, the reference numerals shown in FIG. 289 to FIG. 336 have priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 289. In addition, the same figure is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning a 4th embodiment from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk in a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, the one in which the light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board The ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of the game, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 291) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for causing the effect button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. In FIG. 289, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 290 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for housing the first sub substrate 160 constituting the first sub control unit 400 (see FIG. 292) which performs control processing relating to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 Second sub substrate case 166 for storing the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls Payout substrate case 172 for accommodating the payout substrate 170 which is provided with an error release switch 168 which configures an error as shown in FIG. Launch board case 176 which houses launch substrate 174 which constitutes launch control section 630 (see FIG. 292) which performs control processing relating to the launch of a ball, and power control section 660 which provides power to various electric gaming machines (see FIG. 292) The power supply housing 182 includes a power supply substrate 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on A substrate case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 291 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 When the player wins a prize, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start opening 232 is disposed below the first special drawing start opening 230. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls as game balls pass or enter, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 289, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 291 correspond to the rendering means. Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit assumes that two counters are built in) Is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 a is received. Although the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and lower dish full tank sensors. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special display device 212 or the first 2) A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, various status display units 328 (for example, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc., and Moving members, for example, drive means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 as a normal electric part, drive means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric part, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including the above. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value corresponds to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in value storage register. Also, even when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 232 The latched and latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 with which etc. is provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured such that the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Further, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., and a button sensor 426 for detecting depression of various buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and the CPU 504. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 is read based on the signal from the VDP 518, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350 through the external terminal board which does not illustrate the rental ball information etc. which show that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 which drives the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 which feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 293 (a) to (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 293 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special view 1. In FIG. 293 (a), nine types of special drawings, "special drawing A" to "special drawing I", are shown. In FIG. 293 (a), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. "Special figure H" shown to FIG. 293 (a) is a small hit design. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 293 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of Special Figure 2. In FIG. 293 (b), six types of special drawings of "special drawing a" to "special drawing f" are shown, and five kinds of special drawings are the big hit symbols ("special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG. 293 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 293 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 293 (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292, a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electricity support determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter which generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special drawings, special drawing winning random number values, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area for storing the number of reservations of the special view in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a storage area for the number of special drawings suspension. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special drawing divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas for which the start of the success / failure determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for common use is also prepared. In the start information storage unit for special drawing, as described later, a plurality of types of start information are made into one set, and the start information is stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 294 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 includes a timer circuit 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 292 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals representing that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area, respectively. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information of the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects entry of the ball into the first special view start port 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special view It is determined that there has been a prize in starting opening 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium which passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in first special drawing starting slot 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 thereafter. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control symbol random number value and the random number The random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the common pattern display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 Special figure display symbol update timer for clocking the time to display the fluctuation / stop, various timers including timer for clocking predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined closing time, predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234 and 226 and starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening in RAM 308 is calculated. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning reception process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, plural types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an open area according to the winning order (order of suspension) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Output schedule information and payout request information to be output to payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 292 are constituted by 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 293 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 293 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 3211, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a common drawing timer random number value, and the common drawing display device 210 is generally selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value. One time for fluctuating display of a figure is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later. Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 5R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure a, the special figure b, the special figure c, or the special figure d shown in FIG. 293 (a), the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special probability e flag is turned off and the special probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special flag f is turned off when the lost flag is turned on. The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), lost symbol ( The finalized display of any one symbol of the special figure f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is driven to open and close (a part of various solenoids 332) until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls. Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set the information indicating the closing period to. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and ends at a predetermined timing Storage area for a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set a standby period for displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended. The information which shows the presentation waiting period to is set to. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the general drawing low probability state (electric Chu open spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 opens more easily than in the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a departure (decision determination) is performed using the qualification table stored in the table. Next, main control unit 300 uses the special drawing determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special drawing 2 random number value in the acquired special drawing 2 start information, the determined success or failure determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area Subtract 1 the number of reserved areas. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of special figure 2 variation game with high degree of advantage and special figure 1 variation game with low degree of preference, special figure change game pertaining to the suspension of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 start starting prize winning It may be starting opening winning combination order fluctuation which starts in order. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the pending limit.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure which has stopped the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special figure which stops the variation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data contains various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special pattern probability change flags, timers selected in the special drawing related lottery process In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the number etc., and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a prize effect start command and end In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figures stored in the command data in the RAM 308 [2] Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. being held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 294 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. And then go into the HALT state.

  FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 297 (a) to (c)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support state), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the success or failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 296, prefetching is always performed for the start information of the special figure 2 that has been increased, and prefetching is always performed for the start information of the special figure 1 that has been increased except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 297 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 297 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 297 (a), "special figure I" (disappeared) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure I" as stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 297 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), the special view 2 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 297 (b), "special figure f" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is in the storage areas "hold 2"-"hold 4" Information is not stored. In FIG. 297 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 297 (c) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit in power support. As shown in FIG. 297 (c), "not determined" information is stored in the storage area "pending 1" instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group to be described later are determined in advance, and such information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result It can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as information.

  Next, FIG. 298 is referred to for the table for determination of acceptance used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 295. While explaining. Here, FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, referring to the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. Referring to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 298 (b). And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 change game, the big hit, the small hit or the release is selected as the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Similarly, in the case of the special view high probability state, the special view low probability state shown in FIG. 298 (a) is referred to when the special view high probability state of special view 2 is determined. In the case, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 298 (b) is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a jackpot or an omission is selected as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIG. 298 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. When the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is lost, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 298 (c) is referred to, and the referred small hit judgment table indicates the numerical range indicated and the acquired random number value. , Select the success or failure judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected.

  Next, a stop is performed based on the result of determination of success or failure determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A special drawing determination table used for symbol determination will be described with reference to FIG. 299. Here, FIG. 299 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 299 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 299 (a), the special figure is based on the result of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number. Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  In addition, when deciding the stop design of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 design table for the special figure 2 which is shown in figure 299 (b), on the basis of the decision result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of random value, We draw the stop symbol of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 300A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. First, various initial settings are performed in step S401 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 according to the detection result is effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 Perform processing to change to.

  In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 following step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450. Do.

  In step S417 following step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 300 (b) is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 300C is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S 443 following step S 441, transmission of control commands to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S 419), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 301A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, various initial settings are performed in step S501 of FIG. 301 (a). When power is turned on, first, in step S501, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 516 in the effect data read out in step S509, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 301 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 301C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other processing for updating the effect random number is performed.

  FIG. 301D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), the process waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table, the attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S 551, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes). The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 302 (a) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 302 (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the front side of the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part of the front is not visible. . In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right of the lower part of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left thereof. In the first UI unit 280, it is possible to display the variation icon h0 on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a state in which the variation icon h0 is placed. ing. When the symbol is stopped, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and for example, performs advance notice display or pre-reading notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM may not always be displayed, and a specific notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, advance notice, advance notice in the symbol change display, N suspension of the symbol change display are stored) It may be displayed at the time of the effect etc. displayed at the time, or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 302 (a), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), the display mode according to the progress of the game May change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. In addition, the change icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". . Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second holding number display of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is displayed. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, positive change state, hidden positive change state, short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be vertically moved or rotated according to the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 302 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-scale behavior character 224Ga on which the characters of "large" are applied, and a second on which the characters of "panel" are applied A large-scale behavior character item 224 Gb, a third large-scale behavior character item 224 Gc to which the characters “振” are given, and a fourth large-scale behavior character object 224 G d to which the characters “to dance” are given are arranged. Each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character article 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, light emitting means such as a full color LED is internally incorporated in the first large screen behavior character object 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior character article 224 Gd, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Also, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a one-handed box character 224H which is one of the effect movable bodies is disposed, and is configured to be able to move up and down according to the contents of the effect . The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the one-man box product 224H, light emitting means such as a full color LED is built in, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest 224E, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, and the one-sided box character 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 302 (a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special drawing symbol is stopped, but is blinked or turned off while the special drawing symbol is changing. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height of the display area is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the rendering operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not have to be configured to be able to be all performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, they may be fixed). In addition, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or, the rendering operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform rendering operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs rendering operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate the decorative symbols in the display devices in a variable manner, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a portion thereof can not be viewed. In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. In FIG. 302 (b), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h 11, h 12, h 13 and h 14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), they are displayed according to the progress of the game. Aspects may change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" ing. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed in different decorative symbol display devices in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It may be done. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability changing state, a hiding probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be a frameless form. Also, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate vertically according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 302 (b), although the family crest 224E is located at the initial position, the initial position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 302 (b) is the upper end of the family crest 224E. Although the portion is at a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set at an appropriate position.

  Also, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned one-handed box character 224H is disposed, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices It is made possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest 224E and the one-piece box character 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The action of each effect movable body is made visible.

  Moreover, in FIG. 302 (b), the 4th symbol display apparatus 284 is provided under the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N.

  Next, an example of effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) or FIG. 302 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects that can be applied in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 303 (A1) to (A2) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 303 (A1), when the first to fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H are operated, the embodiment shown in FIG. 303 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large-screen behavior character set 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior graphic object 224 Gd are such that the characters of "large", "panel", "shou", and "mai" are first turned to the front Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the one-man box character item 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the one thousand box box character object 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement character article 224Gd, and the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement box object 224Gd is a one thousand box box product It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. The one thousand box character article 224H may be configured not to overlap with the front side of the first large board behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224Gd. In addition, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may be disposed on the front side of the one thousand box character article 224H and configured to overlap the one thousand box character article 224H.

  In FIG. 303 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 or various lamps may be lowered to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  FIGS. 303 (C1) to (C4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 303 (C1) to FIG. (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set at an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 has a lift arm and an LED array rotatably mounted on the tip of the lift arm. The raising and lowering arm can perform raising and lowering operations by, for example, a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row, and the horizontally extending attitude is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the lift arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extension direction. The first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500) controls lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array one by one based on Versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing this, the light emission aspect of the plurality of LEDs changes while the LED array is rotating, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. Moreover, although POV display 224I is arrange | positioned more front side than the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one-man box goods thing 224H, the anteroposterior relation of these production movable bodies is suitably It can be set.

  FIG. 303 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  FIG. 303 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I lifts the LED array by the lift arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 303 (C3) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating its rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts to rotate, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that they are difficult to visually recognize while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 303 (C4) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the word "heat" is displayed, and a notice display or a preview notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. It is also good. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed in dark.

  In FIG. 303 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

  FIGS. 303 (E1) to (E2) show that the family crest 224E is operating in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 303 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The visual recognition is made more difficult than in the case where at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14 and the navigation character YM do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 303 (E2), the family crest 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. The present invention is also applicable to the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a).

  In FIG. 303 (F1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), a state is shown in which the one-hundred-box character 224H is operating. Specifically, it is shown that the one-handed box character 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (F1), it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapped state because the one-handed box character 224H is overlapped. In this rendering example, when the one-and-two box character 224H operates, the family crest 224E is not operated so that the two-and-one box character 224H and the family crest 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the one thousand box character article 224H and the family crest article 224E are in operation. In addition, when the one-man box character item 224H operates, a retraction operation may be performed to move the household crest item 224E further downward.

  In FIG. 303 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slide-moved so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The scroll display is done together. That is, in the background image, an area which is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the no. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 303 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third decorative symbol display A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  In FIG. 303 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 303 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest 224E. In the timing shown in FIG. 303 (I1), a state is shown in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 303 (I2), after the POV display 224I is moved from the initial position to a position where the LED array overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array is rotated and a fixed rotation is performed. It is shown that the speed is reached and the constant speed rotation is performed, and the word "heat" is displayed.

  In FIG. 303 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown to be displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 303 (K1) to (K4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 303 (K1) to FIG. (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 303 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at initial positions.

  FIG. 303 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide to a position where they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are scrolled along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are matched to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, it is possible to perform display with a sense of unity by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As shown in FIG. 303 (K2), the family crest 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 303 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. In addition, the family crest 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are being operated. You may vibrate while rotating.

  In FIG. 303 (K3) to FIG. (K4), in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in proximity to each other, an anti-clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that it is integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 303 (K4) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images respectively displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the displayed image is not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 303 (L1) shows a modified example of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 303 (L1), the sub-display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the right side below the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the sub It is considered to be more difficult to view than in the case where the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 303 (L1 '), a display image (a background image or a character SBH of Sabohani etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  FIG. 303 (M1) shows operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd. That is, the sub display device 208S is moved from the initial position to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to overlap at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 large behavior character objects 224 Ga ~ 4 nd large behavior character objects 224 Gd, after rotating each of the characters of "large", "panel", "振", "mai" to the front, decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows that a predetermined advance notice effect or a prefetch advance notice effect is performed. ing.

  Next, specific examples of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 307. Here, FIG. 304 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 306 is a view showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 305 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 307 is a drawing showing the steps of another example of the effect shown in .

  In FIG. 304, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special view 1 holding lamp 218, a special view 2 holding lamp 220, a general drawing hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display 284 are shown. In addition, although it demonstrates by applying the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 302 (a) below, it is possible to apply the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 302 (b). Moreover, below, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the family crest item 224E, the 1st large board behavior character article 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character article 224Gd, the one-man box character article 224H, and the light-guide plate IL.

  In the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (1), the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Note that although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (background image of the coast) as shown in FIG. 302 (a) is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a second number-on-hold display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 4-decorative 1-decorative 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 304 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the second UI unit 281 displays the reserve icon of the special view 1. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon whose winning is older.

  In FIG. 304 (1), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the second UI unit 281, and the reserved icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 304 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the reserved icons which are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 304 (1), although the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines to facilitate the description, the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 304 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 304 (1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is the start of variation on the special view display device → the start of blinking of the fourth symbol or the extinguishment → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the holding icon → decoration Although it is carried out in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbols, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 304 (2), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 starts, the variation display of the fourth symbol The symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol starts.

  In FIG. 304 (3), the second number-of-retentions display is updated from 2 to 1, and it is shown that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. In addition, the update display of the second number-of-holds display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second number-of-holds display is performed The display may be started, or the update display of the second number-of-holds display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 304 (4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 is started. In the movement (reduction) animation here, the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the variation icon in the first UI unit 280 At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1. At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 304 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 304 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h 11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h 0 At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of change, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then the variable display of the first decorative symbol Is started. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is ended, or The moving animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 304 (7) shows that variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (8), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (9), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while navigation character announcement is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Further, in the navigation character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "good opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation to the big hit is further increased. In addition, the timing when the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing when the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed May be updated to "No", or the display of the balloon may be updated to "No", and the conversation image CI1 of the lady may be displayed. In addition, the effect (for example, "no") to be promoted to the notice (for example, "super heat") displayed after the notice (for example, "good opportunity") displayed first may be performed in some cases. . In addition, navigation character notices are not only notices in the symbol variation display, but also pre-reading notices, notices that give notice that a given notice is to be made, and explanation displays (characters that appear in various notices, game states, and pachinko machine 100 effects An explanation of the stage of the effect or the like, also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period It is composed of At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 304 (10), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. Further, in the advance notice of the navigation character, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "no" to the character display of "superheat", and reports that the expectation to the big hit is considerably high. In addition, the display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "superheating", or after the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed, The display may be updated to "superheat", or the dialog image CI2 of a whistle may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "superheat". As described above, in this example of the effect, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. In addition, the conversational image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 304 (9) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (11). The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 304 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 304 (12) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (13), It is shown that the person presses the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (12), the advance notice of the navigation character is ended, and the display of the balloon is deleted. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 304 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows, the character of "It is intense heat" is displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May be Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. In addition, the letter display of the notice such as "It is intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 is operated, and the operation effective period is not operated without the production button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even if it has elapsed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (15), the state of the first decorative symbol being made easy to recognize is that the conversational image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the beard are erased and the conversation announcement is finished. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 304 (17), “right The 7 "stop display is made and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an indication that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 304 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the start of reach. In the reach start animation in this presentation example, when the reach state is formed, animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged or reduced. In addition, an appropriate thing can be adopted as a display mode of the animation at the time of reach start. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by viewing this reach start animation.

  When reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 304 (20) to FIG. (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved and displayed upward and downward, and the first UI unit 280 changes The frame is out under the display area leaving the icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (in the example shown in FIG. 304 (20), the hold icon h11) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . In addition, the start of the movement display of the left pattern and the right pattern of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281, or the first The frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 After frame-out display of each image in is started, movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 304 (22), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 304 (23), light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In addition, light emission of light-guide plate IL may not be performed. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior Only the operation of the character 224Gd may be performed, and light emission of the light guide plate IL may not be performed, or only light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The movement of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed either. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 304 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be ended after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to fourth The movement start to the initial position of the four large-screen behavior part 224Gd and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneously performed. Here, in FIG. 304 (22) to FIG. 24 (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light guide plate IL is a series of It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 305 (26), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (26), the image of the sword sword master of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (27) The animation of is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (29), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (30), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (31) It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 305 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the Tonosama is displayed, and a notice effect notifying that the big hit reliability is high is performed . The Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image C13 of the lady may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the production button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (33), it is shown that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord has been erased and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect is started after developing into super reach. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (35), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (36), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then the player at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (37) It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button rendering after the development into the super reach, and in this case, the development into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 305 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and The behavior role object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior role object 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed as well. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, the effect display that causes a loss without performing the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) may be performed, and further, the effect display that causes a loss After being performed, a resurrection effect may be displayed to be displayed as a big hit effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  After that, in FIG. 305 (39), the one-man box character 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 305 (40) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  FIG. 305 (41) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL has ended. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 305 (42), the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 305 (43), the effect image is faded out, and then, as shown in FIG. 305 (44), the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224 Gd move toward the initial position. Have started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues to FIG. 305 (46). In FIG. 305 (46), the protagonist's lord wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and in FIG. 305 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 306 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. . Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (50), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. At the timing shown in FIG. 306 (50), the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is determined to be determined stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 306 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" decoration The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game starts, and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 306 (52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game It is informed to the person that it is 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (52), a mini-right-handed display instructing a right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 306 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 306 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed, and the display of "decorative 7" showing the combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen is It has been done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini-right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the series may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 306 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208, round effect display is performed and in the upper right corner of the display area, Display of "15R" which is the current round is performed.

  FIG. 306 (56) shows that the big hit game is over and the big hit end effect display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since this big hit game is a big hit game that has been started as a 15R certainty big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state (with power support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is performed, and it is informed that the power supply support is shifted to the definite change state.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (57), a display (alert display) is displayed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 292). In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the gaming state which is not in power support is finished, regardless of the situation where the big hit has become a big hit It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 306 (58) shows a state before the first variation display of symbols is started after the big hit game is over and the power support is changed to the definite change state. In the support variable probability state, the background image is a background image for the power support probability state, and the decoration pattern is also a display mode different from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of Special Figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of reserved special views 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the reserve mode (shape in this case) is different from the reserve icon of the special view 1. It is possible to make a decision at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same. In FIG. 306 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that four suspension icons are displayed in the suspension icon display area 282 of the special view 2, suspension is not actually displayed. The icon is shown in dashed lines. Moreover, in FIG. 306 (58) to FIG. (63), the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided and shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but in actuality this broken line is displayed I will not. Also, in the case of the power supply-added definite variation state, although the reserve icon of the special view 1 is not displayed, it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (58), a mini-right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of "bonus x ○" indicating the number of consecutive units is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 306 (58), since the first-time big hit game is over, “bonus × 1” is displayed to indicate that effect.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60) instructs the player to hit the right. A right-hand notice is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "Please hit right" are displayed on the semi-transparent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the power support state where the first big hit game ended and shifted, but may also be displayed in the power support state where big hit games other than the first big hit game ended and shifted For example, it may be displayed each time the jackpot game is over and it shifts to the power support state. Moreover, after shifting to the power support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed also when it is detected that the player is hitting the left, for example, it is detected that the first special view starting port 230 has won a prize. In this case, it may be determined that a left hit has been made and a right hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (61), it is shown that variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. 306 (62). In addition, the mini-right-handed display is performed continuously.

  In FIG. 306 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has been suspended by four. That is, in the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, all the four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 has four reserves, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icon h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 Four are displayed. Moreover, also in the second number-of-holds display, a display of “4” is performed, which indicates that the number of holdings in the special view 2 is four.

  FIG. 307 (49a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 305 (48). In FIG. 304 to FIG. 305, although the case where the "decorative 7" is reached and the "decorative 7" is displayed in the middle design has been described, here, the "decorative 6" is in the reach state The case in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is fluctuating with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view B at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a). In the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a), the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, and thus is not determined to be the symbol determination stop. The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuation is still displayed on the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that it has become a big hit of either a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, or a 2R normal big hit.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 307 (52a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", "bonus" is displayed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player In fact, it is reported that it is either 5R certainty big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (52a), the mini-right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 307 (38b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 305 (37). FIG. 307 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, but the result of losing is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character of the hero loses to the enemy character swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 306 (40b), the fluctuation icon h0, the second reserved number display and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It will be left hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 307 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 scroll in from the lower side of the display area, and the hold icon and the navigation character YM. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 307 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the special view I display mode. In the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, and thus is not determined to be the symbol determination stop. The first decorative symbol is continuously subjected to the swing fluctuation, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in a variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" decoration The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (45b), display of the variation icon erasing animation is performed. In the fluctuation icon erasing animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 becomes gradually smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 307 (46b), the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed. Note that the variation icon deletion animation may be started before the special drawing is stopped.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  In FIG. 308, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (1), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when frame in of timer notice display TM1 is started, but after frame in of timer notice display TM1 is completed (ie, the display shown in FIG. 308 (3) After that, the countdown may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 308 (3) to (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes "00:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (5), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (6), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 308 (8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol with the character of Tonosama in the middle symbol is moved at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 308 (11), after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, it is shown in FIG. Thus, a cut-in display is performed, which consists of the character of the lord and the "continuation" character display. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. Here, the pseudo-link is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo run is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit. In addition, there may be a frame out in the lower part without displaying the pseudo run symbol, and the pseudo run will not be started when the pseudo run symbol is in the lower frame, the decoration symbol of the loss is just as it is The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach effect may be started in the reach state. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is notified that the pseudo link will be started after the countdown is completed by the timer advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 308 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is largely displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (14), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 308 (3a) shows another example of presentation following FIG. 308 (2). Note that, in this effect example, “20:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 308 (10 a) to FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 300 (14a), the second variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. FIG. 308 (10a), FIG. (11a) and FIG. (14a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 308 (10), FIG. (11) and FIG. (14) respectively.

  Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, as shown in FIG. 308 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer advance presentation was started, and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 308 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" for urging attention to the notice is displayed. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the right pattern changes from "deco 6" to "deco 7". Note that the right pattern may be left unchanged as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (16a) to FIG. (17a), the second pseudo run is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo run. As described above, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 308 (3 a) to FIG. 308 (17 a) gives notice that the second pseudo run is started. In addition, it can be said that the start of the second pseudo-run is also foreshadowed that the start of the first pseudo-run, that is, in this example of the effect, by the timer notice effect, It can be said that the first and second pseudo-announcements have been announced. In the timer advance notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo run is notified, but the occurrence of notices and other kinds of advance notices may be made.

  FIG. 308 (7b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 308 (6). Note that FIGS. 308 (7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 308 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (7 b), the display on the timer advance notice display TM 1 is “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (8 b-1), a face image of a character of the toemen character with a balloon serif “Come” in place of the character display of “attention” in the timer notice display TM 1 YMF is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 308 (8b-2), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, attention may be drawn to the notice by the display other than the timer notice display TM1. In addition, as a means to which the countdown in timer advance production is completed and to draw attention to a notice, it may carry out not only by a display but by a sound or a lamp, and performs combining two or more of a display, a sound, and a lamp You may do so.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 308 (9 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol in which the character of Todonori is represented in the middle symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (10 b), the movement display of the pseudo-connected symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the Tonosama character is erased, as shown in FIG. 308 (11 b). After the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 308 (12), cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of "tendon" and the "continuation" character display.

  In this example of rendering, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding rendering (pseudo chain) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00" However, there may be a case where the effect corresponding to this is not performed.

  In addition, while the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer advance display TM1, another advance notice may be performed. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 309 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 309 (a1) shows another example of presentation following FIG. 308 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 309 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice The character "is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a2), display is performed in which the navigation character YM faces the variation icon h0 and turns the sword. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and thereafter shown in FIG. 309 (a5) Thus, the notice display in which the character of "Heat" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. The preview notice may be displayed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, as shown in FIG. 309 (a7), a reach state by “decoration 7” occurs. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect for giving notice that advance notice will be made.

  FIG. 309 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance presentation has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this production example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started to be "30:00", that is, an advance notice effect that occurs 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It is suggested to be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 309 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:69". As described above, a plurality of types of countdown time may be prepared for the timer announcement effect. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the countdown time may be configured. The shorter the time, the higher the jackpot reliability may be, or the higher the jackpot reliability may be, regardless of the countdown time.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts, and in the first decorative symbol, the reach effect by “decoration 7” is being started It is shown.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 309 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and leftward, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 displays leaving the fluctuation icon h0. While the frame is out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 309 (b4), a state of being developed into a super reach (a sword reach) is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4), the image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large, and then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. Also during this time, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6), on the timer notice display TM1, the notice is changed to the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of "heat" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the change display of the decorative symbol, and the timer advance effect is continuously performed even after the transition to the reach state.

  FIG. 309 (b4'-2) shows another example of effect following FIG. 309 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4'-2), after the animation display of the duel scene is started, it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02: 37". There is. In other words, it shows that about 27 seconds have elapsed since the countdown by the timer advance presentation is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect different from the effect notified by the timer advance effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5 '), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 309 (b6'). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the advance notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7 '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of "heat" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a notice display (or presentation) made as a result of counting down in the timer announcement production is being performed during execution of the button presentation.

  Although the above-mentioned example of presentation explained the example in which change display of the display mode of fluctuation icon h0 is performed as the effect which is done as a result which is counted down in timer announcement production, but it is not limited to this, other production may be done For example, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7 ′ ′), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give notice.

  FIG. 309 (b6 ′ ′ ′) shows another example of effect following FIG. 309 (b5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6 ′ ′ ′), instead of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the attention on the notice is displayed to promote attention to the notice. The character display of "is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6 ′ ′ ′-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to perform advance notice, and the animation display of the duel scene is trusted by the big hit It is shown that the display is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the character of the princess is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and a character of "jump" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. Note that this cut-in display may be a notice display that a big hit is determined. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that two or more notice displays are being performed as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variation icon h0 may not be changed, and only cut-in display may be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 309 (c1) to (c2) show how the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and it is changed to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example of production, in addition to the production button 136 as the operation means for production, production lever 136V is provided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (c2), a lever image 136Va imitating the effect lever 136V and a remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state where the lever effect is started is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in the example of the effect, as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect, the state in which the lever effect starts is shown, but instead of the lever effect, the above-described button effect may be performed.

  In addition, there may be a plurality of types of button effects according to the degree of expectation to the big hit (for example, a button image 136a of a default mode, a button image 136a different in color from the default mode (for example, red, gold, etc.) , A default mode, such as a letter display (for example, "super heat" or "expected size") or a button image 136a to which a character is added, or a button image 136a different in size from the default mode (for example, deca button effect or mini button Effect), when there are more button images 136a displayed (for example, three button images 136a are displayed than the default mode), the same number of operations (for example, three times) as the number of button images 136a are performed You may make it do the operation (for example, 1 time, 2 times, 4 times ...) different from the number of button images 136a. Further, as the response display according to the operation of the effect button 136, the number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or the number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed. etc).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 309 (d1) to (d4), as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect, the appearance movable body is shown as operating. As shown in FIG. 309 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the first decorative symbol is reached with "decoration 7" and reach effect is being performed. The first UI unit 280 leaves the variation icon h0 and is framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. In addition, a timer announcement effect is also performed, and it is shown that the timer display on the timer announcement display TM1 is “00:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (d1). After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (d2), in the timer advance notice display TM1, in place of the timer display, characters of “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (d3), the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 309 (d4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this example of rendering, as a result of counting down in the timer advance rendering, the situation is shown that the first large-screen behavior character Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character Gd as the effect movable body operate. The object 224E or the one thousand box character 224H may operate, and at least two of the first large movement character Ga to the fourth large movement behavior Gd, the family crest 224E, and the one thousand box character 224H may be operated. May be

  FIG. 310 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation stepwise.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in FIG. 310 (1), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2), it is shown that the time-based effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "overlay" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time addition is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended. Note that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-series effect, an advance notice of a chance increase, an advance notice such as a advance notice, etc. may be performed between the start of the timer advance effect and the start of the timer addition effect. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 310 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4), an effect is produced in which time is added by the display of count-up animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. In addition, it is not necessary to perform count-up animation display. Further, instead of the display of the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 310 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM is difficult to visually recognize. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 310 (4a), the display of the count-up animation shown in FIG. 310 (4) may be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. . That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 310 (6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the completion of the timer addition effect has elapsed), the first pseudo-series effect is performed. Is started, and the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (7), and it is informed that the pseudo run is performed.

  In this production example, when the timer display effect is performed and the time display is performed on the timer display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the time addition is not performed. There may not be a change, and it may be hard to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 310 (1 b) to FIG. 6 (6 b) show a situation where a timer addition effect by conversation announcement is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1 b), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1b), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in FIG. 310 (1 b), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM 1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1b), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Also, in FIG. 310 (1 b), the conversation announcement has been started, and the conversation image CI 1 of the lord is displayed along with the character of the token with the character display of “chance”. Note that the timing at which the timer announcement effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the conversation announcement is started, or the conversation announcement may be started after the timer announcement effect is started, or the conversation announcement is After being started, the timer announcement effect may be started. In addition, a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2b), the speech notice is updated, the miniature image of the speech image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 is displayed with a text display of "10 seconds added" indicating the time to be added. Thus, it is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer advance display TM. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in timer advance production is performed continuously. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle is considered to be more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the insulting conversation image CI2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4 b), an effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2, the count-up animation display is ended as shown in FIG. 310 (6b), and the timer display in the timer announcement display TM It is updated to "15:00" and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this effect example, the count-up animation display is ended after the end of the conversation announcement, for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (4b'-1) to FIG. (4b'-2). The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends. Also, the timing at which the conversation advance notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 310 (1c) to FIG. 6 (6c) show another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation advance notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1c), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1c), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in FIG. 310 (1c), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1c), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Also, in FIG. 310 (1c), the conversation announcement is started, and the conversation image CI1 of the statue of the lady with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lady. A part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the speech notice is updated, and the speech image CI1 of the statue is reduced and moved to the lower side of the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the eyelid on which the operation promotion notification image described above is displayed is displayed together with the character of. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation announcement, the countdown by the timer announcement effect is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2). Fig. 310 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation effective period, and the length according to the time when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has elapsed It is decreasing. Thereafter, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is notified of that. Ru. Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (3c), the display of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is changed to the character display of "10 seconds addition" showing the time for being added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. When the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period, the time addition in the timer display may not be performed. Also, if the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT may disappear once, and then it may be changed to the character display of "10 seconds on top". The display of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to the character display of “10 seconds on top” without displaying the disappearance of the gauge. In addition, on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display of “I will add 10 seconds” may be performed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the operation valid period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 is pressed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4c), an effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the end of the conversation notice, or the conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice The end timing of the may be the same as the end timing of the count-up animation display.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle, the count-up animation display is finished as shown in FIG. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (6c), it is shown that the timer display counts down to "09: 85" after 10 seconds have been added to the time in the timer display.

  In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the display of the countdown in the timer advance presentation effect is continuously performed even in the operation valid period, but for example, After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-3 '), the update display of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is not performed in the operation effective period. (The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "06:00"), and internally measures time, and at the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4 '), The timer display (for example, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4 ′)) is reflected on the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Update display of may be allowed to resume.

  Also, for example, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-3 ′ ′), the countdown update in the timer announcement effect is updated in the operation effective period. Without performing display (with the timer display in timer notice display TM1 remaining "06:00"), clocking is performed internally, and as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4 ′ ′), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, as shown in Fig. 310 (3c ′ ′), “10 seconds is added” which indicates the time for which the display of the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is added from the operation promotion notification image without reflecting the internal clocking result. At the timing changed to the character display, the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 (for example, the remaining 1.23 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (3c ′ ′)). , And the update display of the countdown may be resumed.

  FIG. 311 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation stepwise.

  FIGS. 311 (1 d) to (2 d) show other effect examples of FIGS. 310 (1 b) to (2 b). In FIG. 311 (1 d), the character display displayed in the speaker's conversation image CI 1 is “focus on timer notice”. As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becoming "00:00". That is, it can be said that the notice of the notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lady in FIG. 311 (1d).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, the miniature image of the conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the above-mentioned conversational image CI2 is displayed. As described above, it may be notified that the timer display changes after attention is paid to the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 311 (1e) shows another example of effect in FIG. 311 (1d). In FIG. 311 (1 e), the timer display is “00” by performing scroll display SC 1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM 1 instead of the conversation image CI 1 of the lord. It may be made to pay attention to the effect performed as a result of becoming “00:00”. That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 311 (1e), the characters "focus on timer advance notice" are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 311 (1 f) to FIG. 6 (6 f) is another example of the timer addition effect, in which the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM 1. It shows. FIG. 311 (1f) is an example of effect following FIG. 310 (3), and after notification of the additional time by the balloon of the navigation character YM is performed, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed on the display screen below the timer notice display TM1. The frame in from the right is shown. In the additional timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed while the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The superimposition timer display TM2 overlaps the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlap state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  FIG. 311 (2f) shows that the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted after the animation of the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 is completed, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 The animation of may be completed, or the timing at which the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. In FIG. 311 (2 f), the additional timer display TM 2 is disposed below the timer advance notice display TM 1, but the timer advance indication TM 1 and the additional timer display TM 2 may be overlapped and disposed, for example As shown in FIG. 311 (2f '), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and as shown in FIG. 311 (2f ′ ′), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 311 (2f) to (4f), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00" is reached. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (5f), the timer display countdown in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer advance display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen. . Here, after the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, the animation of the frame out of the timer notice display TM1 may start, or the timing when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 starts. The timing at which the animation of the frame-out of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 311 (5f), although the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 311 (5f '), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the word "attention" to urge attention to the notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (6f), in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, a pseudo run symbol may appear in the middle symbol and a pseudo run may be performed This suggests that the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo run symbol may not appear when the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo run symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed by displaying on the additional timer display TM2 different from the timer notice display TM1. ing. Note that the notification of the added time may be notification of a total value of a plurality of timer notices, for example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining time You may display the value which added 7 seconds. Here, the additional timer display TM2 may be a timer notice that is newly displayed along with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice that is originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

  FIGS. 311 (3fa) to (8fa) show still another example of the timer addition effect, wherein the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown of the timer display in the addition timer display TM2 are simultaneously performed. It shows the situation. FIG. 311 (3fa) is an example of effect following FIG. 311 (2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is shown how to start the That is, in this presentation example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. Note that the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds, in which the additional timer display TM2 is performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 311 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

  After that, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIG. 311 (3f) to FIG. 6F, and in FIG. 311 (7fa), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, notifying that the pseudo run is performed There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again and the first pseudo run is being performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8 fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and instead of the timer display, characters of "notice" are displayed to prompt attention to the notice. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the second pseudo run is started. . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa '), the symbol CC of the pine as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a notice may be made. In addition, the pseudo connected effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. As described above, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance effect, it may be suggested to be an advance effect or a big hit other than the pseudo ream. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, this effect example indicates that the timer display is increased as one mode of the change of the display mode of the timer display. Note that the timer display may be split.

  FIG. 312 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (1), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the first icon h11 and the second icon h12 are displayed, and in the second number of displays , “2” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (2), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice symbol MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a pre-reading notice, and gives a notice that the addition of time is performed in the timer notice effect. In addition, it may be notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be displayed after the left pattern is stopped, The left symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 on the clock is displayed. In addition, the display timing of the notice icon stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed accompanying the decorative pattern, and temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, various kinds of navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be carried out at any timing such as advance notice or hold on the symbol variation display by the effect or advance notice of the effect by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows that the table on which the navigation character YM stands up rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icon is displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the advance notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (4), it is shown that the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In addition, in the first decorative symbol, a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol is shown. Here, the timing when the right symbol stops and the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol is stopped. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in a reduced size and stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, showing that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that the display is finalized by. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (6), a state is shown in which the symbol change display is performed by digesting one hold of the special view 1. In addition, the timer announcement effect is also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer announcement display TM1 is “09:69”, and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (eg, navigation character YM, etc.) overlapping with the timer advance notice only only during execution of a certain effect (eg, stock effect of the advance notice icon, etc.). Also, conversely, there may be an effect display that causes the timer notice to overlap only while a certain effect is being performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, and it is notified that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is used. . Note that "07: 31" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen. Although the effect remains displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted at the timing when it pops out from the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display of the count-up animation is started, or the display of the count-up animation may be performed after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased. It may be started or, after the display of the count-up animation is started, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312 (10), the advance notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

  FIG. 313 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation stepwise.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 313 (A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and on the timer notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is “00:00”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A3), a balloon in which the character of "superimposed" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. In addition, even if the character display of "superimposition" is performed, the addition of the time of the timer display may not be performed in some cases, and another effect may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-1), after changing to the timer display and displaying the letters “attention” to prompt attention to the advance notice, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-2) Alternatively, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and “+10 seconds” may be displayed on the balloon to indicate the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed for the "attention" is not the advance notice but for 10 seconds. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, after displaying the characters "still" indicating that the timer preview effect is continued, the display of the timer preview display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to a display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" in the timer notice display TM1, the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10 indicating the time to be superimposed on the balloon is displayed. "Seconds" may be displayed. In addition, after the display illustrated in FIG. 313 (A3) is performed, the display illustrated in FIG. 313 (A3 b-2) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 313 (A4), the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on timer notice display TM1 is resumed. . On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A4), in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed and becoming "00:00", the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol Is shown. In addition, the timing when the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the timer display is updated, the pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 313 (B1) to (B5) show an example of effect in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), a balloon in which the character of "subtraction" is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and time subtraction is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is informed that the time for which the timer advance presentation effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B2), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display indicates “05: 89”. Moreover, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction", and is "-3 seconds" which indicates the time to be shortened. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed becomes shorter than the time originally displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) is performed in which the time is shortened by the display of the shortened animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the shortened animation display may not be performed. In addition, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and a state in which the time in the timer display is shortened 3 seconds (subtracted) is shown ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed due to the effect of shortening the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped while the timer shortening effect is being performed, or the display of the countdown may be in progress.

  After that, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5), instead of the timer display, the word “notice” is displayed to prompt attention to the notice. The notice display is performed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5 ′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it may be notified that the pseudo run is started. Note that the timing at which the character of "attention" in the timer advance notice display TM1 starts being displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character of "attention" After the display starts, the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped, the word "notice" May start displaying. It should be noted that the appearance rate of the contents of the effect to be performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or when the timer display effect changes, for example, while the timer notification effect is being executed If there is no change in the display, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and it is easy to be notified of the pseudo run, but if the timer display changes during execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-series notification may be performed earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 313 (C1) to FIG. 313 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes in the timer advance notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), a balloon in which the characters “Timer notice level UP” is displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the big hit reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (C2), for example, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from white to red, and it is informed that the big hit reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the timer display being counted down, it is informed that a notice with a very high reliability may be given as a notice to be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 313 (D1) to (D5) show an example of effects in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted and resumed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (D1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and "06: 99" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), a balloon in which the character of "stop" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the countdown of timer display is interrupted. Note that the timing at which the display of the balloon with the text “stop” starts may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, or the display of the balloon with the text “stop” started. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the balloon may be started to be displayed with the word “stop”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D2), a state is shown in which the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo run is to be performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 313 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 remains "06: 99".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again, and it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo link. It is done. In addition, "x 2" which shows that the fluctuation display of the 2nd decoration symbol by pseudo | simulation run is performed is displayed under the 2nd decoration symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), a balloon in which the characters "resume" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D4), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 313 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is indicated that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while the predetermined effect such as pseudo ream is being performed, and the countdown can be resumed after the effect is completed. It is done.

  Note that, as an example of the change of the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1, the number of the timer notices TM1 may be changed (increased or decreased) more than before the change. For example, when one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to two or more when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, and conversely, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased. If three advance notice displays TM1 are displayed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by timer notice display TM1 may be divided and displayed by timer notice display TM1 originally displayed, or originally The timer notice display TM1 displayed may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer notice notice TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10) The timer notice display TM1 for notifying the second becomes two). In addition, when the number of timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if it is reduced to one, the timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds become one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 changed due to increase, decrease, etc., the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or may be started at different timings.

  FIG. 314 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually. In the effect example shown in FIG. 314, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the illustration of the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character objects 224Gd and the one-hundred box character article 224H is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 314 (A1) to FIG. 314 (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314 (A1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S. The time to be added is reported.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and its upper right corner overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In the example of the effect, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 314 (B1) to (B7) show another example of the timer-added effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown to FIG. 314 (B1), the number of pending | holding of the special figure 1 is 1, and the 1st pending | holding icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 54” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icon is switched to the display of the character of "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is informed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count up animation display is started in the timer notice display TM1. The effect is that the time is added. At least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts. The sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol display After being positioned on the substantially central front side of the device 208, the count-up animation display may be started, or it may be counted up before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the substantially central front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 314 (B4) to (B5), the sub display device 208S performs countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by one second, while the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is increased by one second. . In this example of presentation, while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without interruption.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes "0 seconds", the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 It is updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to specify, but is displayed in a distinguishable manner It is also good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (B6), in the sub display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of “Restart” which indicates that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. The sub display 208S starts to descend toward the initial position.

  FIG. 314 (B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (B7), the timer display is "14:23". After that, the display of “Restart” displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, display of the fluctuation icon h0 and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 314 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts may be the same as the timing at which the sub display device 208S starts to descend, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub display device 208S starts to descend. Alternatively, after the sub display device 208S starts to descend, the countdown of the timer display may resume. Also, the timing at which “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts, or after “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be resumed, or after the countdown of the timer display is resumed, the display of “Restart” may be started on the sub display device 208S. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts, or after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub display 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown resumes.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 314 (C1) to FIG. 314 (C6) show another example of the timer-added effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314 (C1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is reported. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the display of the suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S by the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the suction is displayed from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how you are doing is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, causing a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S to overlap a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character of "+10 seconds" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is extended toward the timer advance notice display TM1 and displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a look that is surprised by the appearance.

  FIG. 314 (C3) shows that the display of the suction animation is continued. Specifically, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 by the suction animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of “+10 seconds” continues to be the sub-display 208S. And the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the count-up animation described above is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that it is going to the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. While the navigation character YM sees the suction animation and performs an astonishing animation (animation accompanying the suction animation) when the suction animation is being displayed, it is not necessary to particularly perform the animation. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely absorbed by the timer notice display TM1, the absorption animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 314 (C6), the timer In the advance notice display TM1, it is shown that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice may be performed only by one of the decorative symbol display devices.

  FIG. 315 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation stepwise.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 315 (A1) to FIG. 315 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the example of effects shown in FIG. 315 (A1) to FIG. (A4), although it is described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), in order to facilitate the explanation A part of the 1-large-scale behavior character 224GA to the 4th-large-size behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H will be described by omitting illustration.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (A1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (A2), the second large-screen behavior part 224Gb and the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd are operated to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time display is performed on the timer display in the timer advance display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example, the second large-area behavior part 224Gb and the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd out of the first large-area behavior part 224Gd to the fourth large-area behavior part 224Gd operate on the timer display 10. It is reported that the second addition is performed, but the time to be added may be different depending on the number of acting items among the first large behavior character objects 224 Ga to the fourth large behavior character objects 224 Gd, for example, When all of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are activated, an additional 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this example, the second large-screen behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate only once to notify that the timer display is performed for 10 seconds, but the operation is The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times, for example, when the second large-scale behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-size behavior character 224 Gd are operated three times, the timer display may be performed for 30 seconds. May be

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 315 (B1) to FIG. 315 (B4) show examples of timer-added effects using the family crest item 224E. In the example of effects shown in FIG. 315 (B1) to FIG. (B4), although it is described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), in order to facilitate the explanation, Description will be made with the illustration of 224 Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224 Gd and the one thousand box character article 224 H omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (B2), the family crest 224E operates and ascends to the front side slightly lower than the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper and lower portions at that position Operate in the direction. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the overlapped family crest item 224E. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround household crest 224E, whereby timer notice display TM1 is performed. It is informed that an additional 10 seconds will be performed on the timer display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (B3), in the timer notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example of rendering, the family crest item 224E is operated only once to notify that the timer display is to be performed for 10 seconds, but even if the time to be added differs depending on the number of operations. For example, if the family crest 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 315 (C1) to FIG. 315 (C6) show another example of the timer-added effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 315 (C1) to FIG. (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (C1), a state is shown where variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first held icon h11 is held in the held display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and “1” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the second number-of-retentions display disposed in the upper right corner of the display area. A first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first UI unit 280 displays a variation icon h0 and a navigation character YM.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effect is performed, and countdown of timer display is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (C1), “05:00” is displayed as the timer display, and in this example, when the timer display is “05:00”, the countdown is interrupted and “05:00” is displayed. The display is maintained. Note that the countdown may be performed continuously without interrupting the countdown.

  In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters of "10 seconds on top" are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, As shown in FIG. 315 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is less visible than in the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. It has become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (C4), the display of “15:00” indicating the time when 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second It is displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, After the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial position, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Ru. In addition, the countdown of a timer display in the state (For example, the state shown, for example, FIG. 315 (C4)) in which the display of "15:00" was displayed straddling the 2nd decorative symbol display 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display 208N May be resumed. It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when the timer display is displayed across multiple decorative symbol display devices than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The likelihood of a jackpot may be the same, and may be configured to be less likely to be a jackpot.

  FIG. 316 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation stepwise.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 316 (A1) to FIG. 316 (A4) show another example of timer-added effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 316 (A1) to FIG. (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (A1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effects are respectively started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this example of effect, two timer announcement effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is regarded as a first timer notice effect, and the timer notification effect performed by the third decoration symbol display device 208N is regarded as a second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (A1), "05: 89" is displayed as the timer display in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15: 89" is displayed as the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is done.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 316 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each of 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Ru. At this time, the timer display countdown is interrupted but may not be interrupted. In addition, a timer display of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other, making it difficult to view. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 316 (A3) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device According to the movement of 208N, the scroll display is performed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in accordance with the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N corresponds to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display "20:00" to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a first decorative symbol display device 208L and a third decoration When “20:00” displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, as shown in FIG. 316 (A3). As shown, the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 316 (A4), the timer display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Note that the countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 316 (A3)). Here, the probability of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this example, the first display of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first 2) It is more likely to be a big hit than being divided and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the likelihood of becoming a big hit may be the same or it may be difficult to be a big hit).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 316 (B1) to FIG. 316 (B3) show an example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, although the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) is applied in the effect example shown in FIG. 316 (B1) to FIG. 316 (B3), in this effect example, in place of the family crest 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 316 (B1) to FIG. Description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Also, in FIG. 316 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotational speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character “+10” in the simple display is displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 316 (B1), all of the first decorative symbol and the variation icon h0 and part of the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11 and the timer notice display TM1 are turned by the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I. It overlaps with the rotation area and is considered to be difficult to view.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 316 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" displayed only on the POV display 224I so far Is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the characters "+10" are displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the character "+10" is performed so as to match the display of the character "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to perform display in which a sense of unity is given by the display of “+10” on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters “+10” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example of effect, the font of the number displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the number displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is decreased, as shown in FIG. 316 (B3), it stops in the initial posture. At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to view than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this effect example, 10 seconds are subsequently added to the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 316 (C1) to FIG. 316 (C5) show other examples of timer-added effects using a plurality of display devices (the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIG. 316 (C1) to FIG. 316 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 316 (B1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 87” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 316 (C1), the POV display 224I is elevated from the initial position to a position on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. Note that the whole of the variation icon h0 and a part of the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped on the POV display 224I, and it is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotation speed and is made constant rotation, as shown in FIG. 316 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer advance display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown continues. Also, at this time, it is shown that the time displayed on the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround household crest 224E, which causes the timer display to be displayed for 10 seconds. It is informed that the addition of

  Thereafter, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 316 (C3) displays an effect that the timer display bursts, and then, as shown in FIG. 316 (C4), the timer display after being added is “15:00”. Is displayed. In the example of the effect, when “15:00” is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but may be performed continuously.

  Thereafter, the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and thereafter, the countdown is resumed. The countdown may be resumed while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, if the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easier to be a big hit May be the same or may not be a big hit.

  In addition, in the timer advance presentation described so far, when the timer display is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, internally from the start of the countdown before the change to the end of the countdown after the change. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time before change may change, and after change, the time of change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after the countdown starts, If you count down 10 seconds and display "attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). In addition, the indication of the countdown may coincide with the time for internally counting down.

  FIG. 317 is a diagram showing one example of an effect using a chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 317, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in the example of the effect, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

  FIG. 317 (1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 305 (25). FIG. 317 (1) shows a state of development into super reach (swords reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (2) Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the progress of the current reach production is summarized according to its position. Informing Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 317 (2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state of development to the super reach shown in FIG. 317 (1) is started. The display may be started at the specified timing, may be started when the reach state is reached, may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change The display may be started when the display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (3), it is shown that the character SAH of the sabo hani starts moving from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right at the timing when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. It can be said that this boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (5), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice by chance up character display is given. It is reported that Note that the timing at which the display of the BOY character BOY starts may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the SABOHANI character SBH is started, or after the display of the BOY character BOY starts, the balloon of the SBOH character SBH is displayed. The character BOY may be displayed, or the character BOY of the boui may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani is started. It should be noted that while the advance notice based on the display of the character BOY of the Boy is given, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 317 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed. Further, in this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the SABOHANI character SBH approaches a check point. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be enlarged, or only the portion of the relevant check point may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (8), when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is displayed, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (10), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the second check point CP2 until the button operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period has elapsed, but may not be stopped.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317 (11), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (12) It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 317 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the Tonosama is displayed, and a notice effect notifying that the reliability of the big hit is high is performed . In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the tombstone is a cut-in image of a special display mode in which it is shown surrounded by a golden frame and wearing a sunglasses and running a large bike while turning a cigar. It reports that the credibility of the big hit is dramatically high. In place of the cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 317 (13), a cut-in image CI3 (see FIG. 305 (32)) having a reliability lower than that of the cut-in image CI3 is displayed. May be The cut-in image CI1 of this lady-in-law shown in FIG. 317 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period, and the effect button 136 is effective in operation It may be displayed whenever it is operated within a period. In addition, the cut-in image CI1 of this crown-like state shown in FIG. 317 (13) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button It may be displayed whenever the operation effective period elapses without the operation 136 and may not be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (14), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH, It is informed that a notice has been made by the display of an image. In addition, the timing when the display start of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord will be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani, or the character of the sabothani after the display of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord A balloon of SBH may be displayed, or a cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that while the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second check point CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not be stopped. Further, in this presentation example, the timing at which the sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 may be the same as the timing at which the button presentation is started, and the sabohani character SBH may be used as the second check point CP2. After reaching the button effect may be started, or after the button effect is started, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2. In the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the statue is not displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated and the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect button is also operated when the effect button 136 is not operated. In the same manner as when the 136 is operated, it may be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or it may not be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or the advance notice of the chance up Only a part of the occurrence may be informed (for example, the balloon may not be displayed, and only the letters "UP" may be displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 317 (15), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (16), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (17), when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (18) displays the lever image 136Va and In the vicinity of the character SBH, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed, and it is informed that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. It should be noted that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started during display of the balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, but may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT, and vice versa. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all of the m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and while the chance up meter CMT is displaying, a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped. It is also good.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (20), when the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation by the player is performed or the operation effective period has elapsed.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317 (21), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 317 (23), the first large-screen behavior part 224 Ga-4 th The large-scale behavior character object 224Gd and the one-handed box character object 224H are activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, the effects (the first large-screen behavior part 224 Ga to the fourth large-area behavior product 224 Gd and the one-and-two-box article 224 H are activated when the effect lever 126 V shown in FIG. 317 (23) is operated. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image is displayed and the effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 305 (40) is operated may be different. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 317 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H return to their initial positions, respectively, and the decorative symbols The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. Although the chance up meter CMT is also faded in with the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the fade in of the animation display of the due battle scene is completed. . The operations of FIG. 317 (23) to FIG. 24 (24) are performed, for example, in the same manner as shown in FIG. 305 (38) to FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (25) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SAH of the sabothani reaches the final point GP, and the placard indicates the letter “V” indicating that the jackpot will be made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (26), the main character of the main character wins over the sword player of the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 316 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. In addition, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, Sabohani characters SBH and placards) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the production | presentation using the chance up meter CMT mentioned above, there may be a case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and a case where it is not displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may not be different between when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when it is not displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance increase appearing regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, the position of the check point may move or the check point may be erased while the presentation in the chance up meter CMT is being performed.

  In addition, during execution of the rendering in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani indicating the current position returns to a position before the current position (position indicating the past) or indicates the position ahead (pointing to the future) Position).

  In addition, the effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game, and for example, when an effect is performed at a position indicated by a check point, an effect such as increasing the chance may be performed. Also, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at a check point, and an effect may be performed such that the chance is raised when fighting against the ally character and winning.

  Further, as an effect of chance increase (for example, rank increase bonus, probability change promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.) during the execution of the big hit game, an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

  Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by power interruption. Further, although the chance up meter CMT itself may return the display, the history of the timing of the check point and the occurrence of the effect of the chance up before the power failure may be hidden.

  In addition, the effect displayed after the count display of the count display in the timer advance effect becomes 0 may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT, or may be performed.

  FIG. 318 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using a chance up meter step by step.

  FIG. 318 (3a) is another example of effect following FIG. 317 (2), and the same effect as FIG. 317 (3) is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (4a), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, but no advance notice is given. That is, it is shown that the advance of the chance increase is not performed even if the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318 (5a), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 318 (5a) to FIG. 7 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first check point. It passes CP1 as it is, and the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. As a result, in the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the advance notice has ended without failure. In addition, when the advance notice of the chance up is not performed at the first check point CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (7a ′), the display of the first check point CP1 may be erased. Also, as shown in FIG. 318 (7a ′ ′), in place of the letter “UP” displayed at the first check point CP1, the display of “x” indicating that the advance of the chance up was not performed. May be performed. In addition, even if the advance notice of the chance up is not actually performed, it is assumed that the advance notice of the chance up is performed after the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, marking at the check point or “UP”. The character of may be displayed. For example, once marking at the check point or non-display of the character of "UP", the character of marking or "UP" may be displayed, Sabohan's character SBH may return to the check point to give a notice of chance improvement, and may display the marking and the character of "UP". Further, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or to the middle is performed, and then, when the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, an effect of chance increase is performed, and the character of marking or "UP" May be displayed.

  FIG. 318 (17b) is another example of effect following FIG. 317 (16), and the same effect as FIG. 317 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a display of a question mark, and when the SBOH character SBH reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is not started as a notice of chance increase. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318 (19b), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 318 (17b) to the same figure (20b), the character SBH of Sabohani is the third check point. It passes CP3 as it is, and the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. In FIG. 318 (19b), it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and the player can now accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 318 (20b), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (21 b) within the operation effective period, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (22 b) Along with the line, "Is it removed ...", it is displayed that the game won't be won. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the placard at the final point GP is displayed with the word "progress", and it is informed that the reach effect is developed.

  After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tonosama character shown in FIG. 318 (23 b), as shown in FIG. 318 (24 b), an effect that the panda character appears as a helper in Kagoshima reach Is started. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and travels toward the start point SP.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 318 (25 b) to FIG. 29 (29 b), a display for changing the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the sabothan character SBH on the way to the starting point SP Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the SABOHANI character SBH, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (26 b) to FIG. 27 (27 b), a part of the chance up meter CMT after change appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears. As shown in FIG. 318 (28b) to FIG. 318 (29b), the fourth check point CP4 appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (29b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is again located at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are in the display state before the change (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the letter "UP" is not displayed) It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30b), a state of being developed into the SP Ken-Age reach is shown. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Figure 318 (30b), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-A-Ok reach in that the main character of the main character and the enemy of the main character are opposed to each other. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30 b), the copanda cheering party KPD composed of three copanda characters is cheering at the timing when the sabothan character SBH reaches the fourth check point CP4. An announcement is made to show that the situation is being reported, and it reports that the credibility of the SP Ken-Atsu reach for the big hit has been dramatically increased. It can be said that this copanda cheering party KPD functions as a chance-up character. The copanda cheering party KPD may always appear in the SP swordsman reach, or may not appear.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (31b), a balloon with the word “Cance-up copanda cheering party” attached is displayed near the Sabohani character SBH, and notice by the character display of chance-up is a line It is reported that it was. In addition, the timing when the display start of the copanda cheering party KPD may be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or after the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is started, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is It may be displayed, or the copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that, while the advance notice by the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is being performed, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, the display of "Collaboration Killing" to the effect that chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Be done. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Here, the lever effect which is a chance up effect may not be performed, and a button effect which is an effect of operating the effect button 136 may be performed. Also, the lever effect may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (34b), in addition to the lever image 136Va, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth check point CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, effects are performed as described above and shown in FIGS. 317 (24) to (28), and it is notified that a big hit will be made.

  FIG. 318 (23c) is another example of effect following FIG. 317 (22), and in the lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18) to FIG. (22), the effect lever 136V is operated by the player. It is shown that he failed in the production. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

  FIG. 318 (5 d) shows a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 317 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (5d), it is shown that a large number of booy characters BOY (booui group) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. . That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the Bowie group. If the character of the boy appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boy's character BOY appears alone. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters of “chance up BOY group” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is informed that the advance notice based on the chance up character display has been performed. As described above, different chance-up effects may be performed even with the same chance-up point, or the same effect may be performed with the same chance-up point.

  FIG. 319 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  FIG. 319 (7e) is another example of presentation following FIG. 317 (6), and the presentation similar to FIG. 317 (7) is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 319 (8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches a position before the third check point CP3. It waits at that place until the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is made. In addition, while the effect that the SABOHANI character SBH jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3 is performed, an effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 317 (9) to The above-described button effect or the like shown in (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the character display of “UP” may be performed as being performed.

  FIG. 319 (2f) is another example of presentation following FIG. 317 (1). The effect example shown in FIG. 319 (2f) is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 317 in the display mode of the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green rod shape, and instead of the character SBH of Sabohani, the status of the current reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the advancing speed of the marker MRK is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. Further, the display mode of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is represented by a question mark, and it is made to have an expectation for the advance of the chance up being performed. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the beginning and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 319 (3f) following FIG. 319 (2f) shows that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (4f), the character BOY of the boy appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (5f), a balloon with the word "CHANCH UP BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice of chance up by the character display is performed. Is notified. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 319 (5f) to (6f).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (7f-1) to FIG. 7F (7f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, in place of the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1, the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been increased due to the appearance of the advance notice are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. Note that the character BOY of the boy is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (7f-2).

  FIG. 319 (4g ') shows an example of an effect when the character MOY of Boy does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 319 (3f) is performed. It is done. Specifically, when the character BOY of Boye does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (4 f), as shown in FIG. 319 (4 g ′), in the chance up meter CMT, at the first checkpoint CP1. In place of the display of the question mark, the display of “x” indicating that the notice has not appeared is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4g ′ ′), the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1 may be erased, and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4 g ′ ′ ′), the display mode may not be changed with the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1.

  FIG. 319 (2h) is another example of presentation following FIG. 317 (1). The effect example shown in FIG. 319 (2 h) is similar to the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. It differs in the point. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the advance notice of the chance up, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the advance notice of the chance up is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 319 (5h), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY PASS” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice by the character display of the chance up has been performed. At this time, a part of the letters “UP” has appeared, which indicates that the reliability of the big hit has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 319 (6h) to (7h), as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” that is hidden disappears Appear.

  FIG. 320 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 320 (A1) to (A11) show that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run occurs and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A2), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed, and it is shown that chase effect as one example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  Thereafter, FIG. 320 (A3) shows that the chase effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 319 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (A3), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo link may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached while the marker MRK is moving, a pseudo link may occur. In addition, it is suggested that reaching the final point makes it possible for a devil merchant to be captured and to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this example of effect, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit as the pseudo ream occurs. In addition, if a pseudo ream occurs four times (that is, when a pseudo ream occurs when the final point is reached), a big hit is determined. It should be noted that the number of times of pseudo run may be determined to be a big hit by a number other than 4 times, for example, it may be determined to be a big hit when the number of times of pseudo run is 1 time and 4 times. The number of pseudo runs that will be determined as a big hit is less likely to occur than the other pseudo runs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (A6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the display that the main character of the hero is chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode. In addition, even if the timing when the character of “continuation” is displayed and the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of “continuation” are the same as the display of driving the vice merchant by the main character The display of the first check point CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation" after the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant. After the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation", the character of "continuation" may be displayed together with the display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the main character of the main character and the vice merchant is reduced.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A8), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the second pseudo-link will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second check point CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant has been changed, and the expression of the evil merchant who had been spared up to now has become an impatient expression.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A10), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the display that the hero of the main character is chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the third pseudo-link is performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third check point CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (A11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of “secure” and also a state in which the main character of the main character has captured the vice merchant. At this time, the chance up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and in the symbol variation display of this time, the pseudo run has been performed three times in total. In addition, at this time, in the first decorative symbol, the "decorative 7" is in the reach state, and the reach effect is started.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 320 (B1) to FIG. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 319 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a notice of chance increase may occur, and the player is made to have a sense of expectation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B3), it is shown that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point. In addition, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon of the character of "Nov. character" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance directly related to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of up.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "appropriate" to "not". In response to this, a balloon with the word "chance up no" added is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance of the chance up by the navigation character YM has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a conversation notice is also started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. This conversational image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Further, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is considered that the Tonosama conversation image CI1 is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped. Note that this conversational image CI1 is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. In addition, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "No" to "Heating fever". In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon character of "super heat" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up related directly to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of In addition, the conversational image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the second decorative symbol. In this case, too, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, a conversation image CI2 of a whistle on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 304 (10) and described above is displayed together with the whistle character as a continuation of the conversational announcement. In addition, although this talk image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rattan. In addition, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the balloon conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped by the balloon character YM balloon and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to recognize than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7). The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 320 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B8), the advance announcement of the navigation character is ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B9), as shown in FIG. 320 (B10), the conversation image CI2 of the bag is changed to the operation promotion notification image and The word "" may be displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Furthermore, in this presentation example, the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is a display mode in which it is highlighted with a bold gold line, and is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal outer frame display mode. Is notified. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up gold frame” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK in response to the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle changing to gold. , It has been notified that the advance notice of the chance up in the conversation advance notice has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Note that if there is no operation of the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle may or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 of a spear is not displayed, it may not be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or may be notified or only a part may be notified. (For example, only the characters "UP" are displayed).

  The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (B11) shows that the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the speech balloon overlaps the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow, and the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 320 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position initially shown in FIG. 320 (B11).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B12), with the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed in the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. Note that the display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation announcement ends, or may be deleted after the conversation announcement ends. In addition, the conversation announcement may end after the display of the balloon is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with "decoration 7". At this time, it is indicated that the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point, and the rendering by the chance up meter CMT is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect is started, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, the timing when the reach effect is started may be the same as the timing when the chance up meter CMT is erased, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance Reach production may be started after the up meter CMT is erased.

  In addition, production with the chance up meter CMT in this production example is ended when it reaches the reach state, but production may be continued even if it reaches the reach state, and it will continue even if it shifts to super reach You may do so. Moreover, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is ended. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may be started, which is different from the presentation by the currently running chance up meter CMT. Moreover, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may always start during normal symbol variation display, or may not start. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation display, there is a case where the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started and a case where it is not started, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be always started. In addition, when it is possible to produce effects by the chance up meter CMT, when the effect button 136 is operated, the effects by the chance up meter CMT may be started. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed to make the player recognize.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 321, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (A1) to FIG. 321 (A5), the effect is started by the chance up meter CMT, but it is shown that it is erased halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 were reached, respectively, since notice of the chance up corresponding to these did not occur, the display of 1st check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 is erased. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), it is shown that the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving from the second check point CP2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2), a cut-in display is performed showing that the character of the brow with the nutritional drink is saying "Fight". The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Also, when this cut-in indication is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this example of presentation, it is indicated that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is finished by the advance notice which is likely to be a big hit than the advance of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT is performed. There is. Note that the display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that rendering by the chance up meter CMT ends before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the appearance of the chance up meter CMT is finished before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point. In this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may always be ended halfway, or the chance up meter CMT may or may not be ended halfway. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends halfway or not, or the effect of the same content may be performed. . In addition, when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway. In addition, the reliability of the big hit when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway is the same as the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway when the notice of the chance up occurs at all the check points. It may be Alternatively, if the chance up meter CMT is not ended halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than if the chance up meter CMT is ended halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "one blow", and it is shown that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation effective period elapses, “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 321 (A4), “ It is notified that it becomes a big hit combination of decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 321 (A4 ′), “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” Be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene is faded in, and a state is shown in which the main character of the main character has defeated the hostile swordsman, and it is reported that .

  FIG. 321 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 321 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), a cut-in display is performed showing that the princess character is saying "Rewrite reach". The display of the cut-in is, for example, a notice that the reliability of the big hit is improved by assuming that effects of other contents are performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. When this cut-in indication is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, also in this example of presentation, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the situation is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted, but may not be deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a), a state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 321 (A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but in this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and red respectively And marked with “UP”. That is, in fact, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the first check point CP1 and the notice of the chance up corresponding to the second check point CP2 were not performed, but both are represented as being performed and the big hit It is shown that the reliability of is improved.

  FIG. 321 (A3a′-1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 321 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1), a state is shown in which it is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 318 (30b), not the swordsman reach. The SP Kenshou reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the Kensou reach. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a'-1), the chance of showing up a state in which the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. An advance notice is displayed, and it reports that the credibility against the big hit of the SP Ken-Atsu reach is dramatically high. The child panda cheering party KPD may always appear or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

  FIG. 321 (A3a'-2) is an example of an effect following FIG. 321 (A2a), and shows an example of an effect different from that of FIG. 321 (A3a'-1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1). That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed, specifically, As described above with reference to 318 (30b), the chance up meter CMT is displayed when transitioning from the sword strike to the SP sword strike. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the copanda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth check point CP4 which has passed and shifted to SP Kengo reach. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, and it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is made. In addition, when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the SABOHANI character SBH may be located at the start point SP, and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, and the SABOHANI character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of the SP Kenshou reach.

  FIG. 321 (A3a '') shows another example of the effect following FIG. 321 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a ′ ′) shows that the full rotation reach starts. The full turn reach is a reach where the big hit is decided, and it is not necessary to give the player a greater sense of expectation, so the display of the chance up meter CMT is not performed again, but FIG. 321 (A3a ′ ′ ′ ′ As shown in), the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the big hit will be decided when all the rotation reach starts, so the position of the SABOHANI character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing the fifth check point CP5. , The placard may be displayed with "V" indicating that it is a big hit. Note that the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, or after the full rotation reach starts, the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the sabothan character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, or the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full turn reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

  Fig. 321 (A2 b) to Fig. (A3 b) show another example of effect following Fig. 321 (A1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large-screen behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the effects of overlapping the first on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are operated. And the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 321 (B1) to (B4), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but since the result of the loss is displayed on the way, the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is ended It is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 has been reached, no notice of chance up corresponding to this has occurred, so the red mark and “UP” are not displayed on the first check point CP1. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1), it is shown that the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving from the first check point CP1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B2), it is shown that the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed to notify that the possibility of losing is high. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B3), the main character of the main character loses to the host of the swordsman, and the "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, it is displayed that the character SBH of Sabohani is a lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 321 (B3 '), although "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol and it is informed that there will be a loss, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is the final It may be displayed that it progresses toward the point GP as it is. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 321 (B4), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after swing fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 322 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 322, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 322 (A1) to (A5) shows that the chance up meter CMT is once erased in the middle of the effect by the chance up meter CMT and then displayed again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. It is shown that Sabohani's character SBH is starting to move from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 322 (A2), light emission from the light guide plate IL is performed, and a state in which a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of the chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is darkened to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL more visible. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by darkening is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also resumed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up illumi irradiance” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH to notify that the advance of the chance up has been performed. The light emission of the light guide plate IL continues to be performed.

  FIG. 322 (A4) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended and fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown.

  FIG. 322 (A5) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move.

  In this production example, the presentation by the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed as a notice of the chance up in the reach production, but it is not limited to the one described above, for example, the character SBH of Sabohani at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in an effect that reaches and tells whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, in addition to the presentation on whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied to the production about whether it will be a big hit, or something else (for example, the development develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) You may Also in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the effect by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 322 (B1) to FIG. 322 (B6) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, and the character BOY of Boi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. Furthermore, in this effect example, guidance display is performed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, the icons indicating the upper key and the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the characters “not displayed by the arrow key operation” are displayed. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the sword strike is started, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the sword strike is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B2), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY pass” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice by chance up character display has been made. Is notified.

  Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 322 (B4) . Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 322 (B6). At this time, the SABOHANI character SBH is at the position where it should be positioned when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 322 (B2) may not be displayed, and the rendition in the chance up meter CMT may be resumed from a place where the touch is good. Further, as shown in FIG. 322 (B6 '), when the display between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the character SBH of Sabohani The second check point CP2 may be located before the second check point CP2, and may stand by at that position until the advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 is reached. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (B6) and FIG. 322 (B6 '), the first check point CP1 is marked in red and the “UP” is marked due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY. The letter is displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B6), the characters “UP” are overlapped by the sabothani character SBH and are considered to be difficult to view.

  In the example of effect shown in FIG. 322 (B1) to (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched any number of times in response to the player's operation After being displayed, after being made non-displayed by the operation of the player, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until presentation by the next chance up meter CMT is performed.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but for example, as shown in FIG. 322 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially not displayed. It may be configured to be in the closed state.

  FIG. 323 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter step by step. In FIG. 323, an effect example in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 323, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 323 (A1) to FIG. 323 (A2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb respectively display the same content.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A1), two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0 interposed therebetween. In this rendering example, the chance up meter disposed on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter disposed on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. Note that these chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed in the same manner as that shown in FIG. 319 (2f). In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (A1), first check points CP1a and CP1b, second check points CP2a and CP2b, and third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. The first check point CP1a (CP1b) to the third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks, and are designed to give a sense of expectation that the advance of the chance up will be made. Here, the check point indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check point indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are for the same advance notice of the chance up. In this example, although two chance up meters are displayed, only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters are displayed rather than when only one chance up meter is displayed. The display may be more likely to be a big hit, or the likelihood (reliability) of the big hit may be the same. Further, when the effect is displayed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed. Also, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Moreover, in this example of presentation, although the advancing speed of 1st chance up meter CMTa and 2nd chance up meter CMTb is made the same, you may differ, for example, the advancing speed of 2nd chance up meter CMTb However, it may be faster than the advancing speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2), in response to the markers MRKa and MRKb reaching the first check points CP1a and CP1b and the character BOY of Boi appearing, "near the markers MRKa and MRKb" A balloon with the word “BOY passing BOY passing” is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is informed that the advance of the chance up by the character display has been performed.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (A2 ′), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the word “CHANNEL UP BOY passing” is displayed on the balloon, and the reliability for the second chance up meter CMTb balloon is displayed. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (A2 ′ ′), when the display of a state in which the character BOY of the Booi is singing a nasal song as a rare advance notice is performed with the appearance of the character BOY of the Booi, the first chance Display the word “chance up BOY passing” on the balloon of the up-meter CMTa, and display the word “chance-up nasal song” on the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb to the effect that rare notice has occurred. It is also good.

  In this example of presentation, the advancing speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same between the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may advance at different speeds. Moreover, although the balloon is displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb in this example of presentation, it may be displayed on only one of them.

  FIG. 323 (A2a-1) to FIG. 323 (A2a-2) show another example of effect following FIG. 323 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-1) subsequent to FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the character BOY of Boye appears. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by the character display is displayed. It has been informed that it has been done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter Only CMTb is displayed. Thus, after displaying two chance up meters, either one may be erased, for example, when one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be easier to be a big hit than it is, or it may be a big hit if it is not erased. Also, the reliability may be different depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  FIG. 323 (A2b-1) to FIG. 323 (A2b-2) show still another example of effect following FIG. 323 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-1) following FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the character BOY of Boye appears. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the notice of the chance up by the character display It has been informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the big hit. It can be called an aspect. Note that only one of the two chance up meters may be changed, or both may be changed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-2), a first chance up meter CMTa in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed out of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. The second chance-up meter CMTb is displayed and only the second confidence-up balloon is displayed. As described above, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. In addition, after displaying two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 323 (B1) and FIG. 323 (B2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different advance chance notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of the main character of the main character and the enemy player of the sword is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (B1), three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, and third check point CP3a) are included in the first chance up meter CMTa. It is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two check points (the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b are the first check points. The timings of the notice and the start of the corresponding chance increase are different from any of CP1a to third check point CP3a. In this example of rendering, when the timings at which the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b arrive are arranged in chronological order , The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1 a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b, and the character of the Boy BOY is starting to sing. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the word "chance up" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, and it is informed that a notice of chance up has been made.

  In this example of presentation, although both the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb were displayed, only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter not displayed is not displayed. It may not be performed, or may be notified of a chance improvement corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter not displayed. In addition, there may be a check point not to be notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even the check point being notified Good.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 323 (C1) to FIG. 323 (C4) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different advance chance notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter indicating the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (evolution point CPA) is arranged It is done. This development point CPA indicates points at which reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the check point, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb, When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this rendering example, a period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and a period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this demonstration example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 319 (2f) and described above. In the display mode, the second chance up meter CMTb is a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 317 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is set as a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, A third check point CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance increase may occur when the marker MRK reaches each check point. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the character SBH of the Sabohani in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C2), a state in which a button effect is performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 323 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. In addition, in the first chance up meter CMTa, the letters “UP” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred is displayed at the first check point CP1, and the appearance that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2 is It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up appearing as a result of the button effect. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SAH of SABOHANI is advancing toward the development point CPA.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1, and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that a cut-in display is performed showing that the princess character says "Rewrite reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. In addition, when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be extinguished.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C4), a state is shown in which a cut-in image of a panda is displayed and transition is made to SP swords reach. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two check points (fourth check point CP4 and fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check is It has been shown that when the marker MRK reaches the point, a notice of chance increase may occur. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani advances from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

  FIG. 324 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 324 (A1) to (A7) show that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run is generated and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A1), the characters "Et. Echigoya should be secured" are displayed, and it is shown that a chase effect as an example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a chance up meter CMT is displayed, and in this chance up meter CMT, a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2 and a third check point CP3 are arranged. It is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo link will occur at each checkpoint. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run is performed Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A4), it is shown that variable display of the first decorative symbol by the first pseudo run (that is, variable display of the second decorative symbol) is performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A5), although the devil merchant has been missed, it is shown that it has developed into a reach by having revived one thousand boxes. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the indication of the second check point CP2 has moved from the question mark to the reach state to the letter “R”. It has been switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-series effect ends on the way, and as shown in FIG. 324 (A6), the display of the pseudo-series effect fades out with the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 324 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0. While being framed out below the display area, the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased with the completion of the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-series effect. As described above, the chance up meter CMT may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when it reaches the end than when it ends at a checkpoint on the way. Also, the likelihood of a big hit may be made different depending on the check point reached.

  Moreover, you may be performed in the point shown to FIG. 324 (A6 a-1)-the figure (A6 a-2) as an example of presentation which makes the chance up meter CMT non-display. Specifically, in FIG. 324 (A5), when the pseudo connected effect is terminated halfway, as shown in FIG. 324 (A6a-1) to FIG. 324 (A6a-2), the chance up meter CMT is The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out to the outside of the display screen.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (B1) to (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT performs during the period from the start of the reach effect to the development of the super reach. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B1), a state is shown in which the reach effect shifted to reach by "decoration 7" is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 324 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. And in this example of presentation, when reach production starts, chance up meter CMT is displayed under the 2nd decoration design, production which uses chance up meter CMT is done. The presentation using the chance up meter CMT is performed until transition to the super reach or until a loss is displayed without transition to the super reach. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 324 (B1), in reach presentation, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a notice of a chance increase corresponding to each check point Is performed and the character "UP" to that effect is displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative pattern.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0 below the display area. A state is also shown in which the pending icon h11 displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out as well as being framed out. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (B3), the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Furthermore, in this example, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. ing. In this example, while the marker MRK continues to move while the first large-screen behavior character 224G to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are operating, the first large-pattern behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large screen The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavior object 224Gd is in operation. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be made non-displayed while the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd are in operation. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 324 (B3), a balloon with the word “chance up large board behavior” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK It is notified that the notice of the chance up by object 224Gd was performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 324 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 324 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 324 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position. Although the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT at the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated after the marker MRK has reached the final point Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. Further, in this example, the first decorative symbol is disposed on the front side of the chance-up meter CMT after the first large-area behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd are operated, and the left of the first decorative pattern The first overlapping design is placed on the front side of the chance increase meter CMT before the first large movement character 224GA to the fourth large movement character 224Gd are operated although the design overlaps with the chance increase meter CMT. After the 1 large movement character item 224Ga to the 4th large movement character object 224Gd is operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped to the chance up meter CMT. You may In addition, it is not necessary to change the anteroposterior relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT before and after the operation of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd return to the initial position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 324 (B7), it develops into super reach.

  FIG. 325 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter step by step.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 325 (A1) to (A5), other effects not related to the chance up meter CMT overlap with the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. It is shown how it is done. Here, other effects may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, and other effects may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2 and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 325 (A1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT. The treasure box BX is an advance notice effect that is not related to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even during display of the treasure box BX, and continues to progress.

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and in the second check point CP2, the notification is made The display of the character "is performed. The treasure box BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A4), it is shown that the treasure box BX is opened, and the characters of "superheat" appear from the inside. This "superheat" character display is also a notice effect unrelated to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 325 (A5), the treasure box BX displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is in an easily visible state.

  FIG. 325 (B1) shows that another presentation unrelated to the chance up meter CMT is performed overlapping the chance up meter CMT while the presentation using the chance up meter CMT is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (B1), wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that simultaneous effects are being performed on the wipe screen WP. Here, simultaneous rendering means, for example, a pachinko machine 100 of the same model attached to the same gaming island using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a clocking means or a built-in timer, and the same rendering content is the same. It is an effect performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when simultaneous rendering starts, and is erased when ending. In addition, the wipe screen WP may be displayed also when effects other than the simultaneous effect are performed.

  FIGS. 325 (C1) to (C2) show that an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 325 (C1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed, developing into super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (C1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1) shows that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2.

  After that, for example, the radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that the radio wave such as transceiver or the like is outputting a strong radio wave causing fluctuation in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by the means, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2), an error display by the character display of "radio wave detected" indicating that is performed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 325 (C2), this error display is not overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 289) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. The present invention is also applicable to a door opening error or the like that occurs when it is detected that a door member such as 289) is opened. Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, and the error notification may be performed by voice or lamp.

  FIG. 325 (C2a), FIG. (C2b) and FIG. (C2c) show other display examples of the error display, for example, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2b), a plurality of error displays can be simultaneously performed, and when an error occurs, the ones displayed in the vertical direction from the upper left side of the display screen are shown. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), it is shown that an error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, for example, it is detected by the magnetic force detection means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 289) of the pachinko machine 100 In this case, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), the error display by the character display of “Magnet detected” indicating that is performed over the entire display screen. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, the game may not be progressed by not performing a part of processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is shut off, such as not performing a big hit determination. . In addition, when the power is shut off while the error display is being performed, and the supply of power is restored after that, the symbol fluctuation stop command that is being executed when the power is shut off has elapsed and the symbol fluctuation stop command is displayed. For example, “in preparation” may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub control unit 400.

  FIGS. 325 (D1) to (D2) show that the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 325 (D1) to (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (D1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed as being developed into super reach. Further, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that effects are being performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (D1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1) shows that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2. In addition, in the sub display device 208S, the characters “vs Kengo” indicating that it has developed into a Ken-Age reach is displayed, and a fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 325 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is done. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered that the chance up meter CMT is less visible than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, on the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the main character of the main character with a speech balloon in which the characters "Match game" are displayed is displayed.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S as an example of the display means, but it may be overlapped with the chance up meter CMT by other display means. For example, a display unit configured of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp or the like is applicable.

  Further, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but for example, as shown in FIG. 325 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In this example of presentation, although the example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped to another display has been described, it is also applied to the case where the timer advance indication TM1 is overlapped to another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

  FIG. 326 is a diagram for describing a mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

  In FIG. 326, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 326 (A1) to (A9) are the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation announcement. Is shown to be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A2), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. In addition, the operation effective period in the button effect by this navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326 (A3), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A3), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation announcement is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation effective period is started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the bag is partially overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A5), the operation valid period in the speech advance notice is started. The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A5). In addition, the operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation advance notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 326 (A5) to FIG. (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is more than the reduction speed of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is reduced earlier than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A8), as shown in FIG. There are times when the character "is displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Also, on the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "superheat", notifying that the big hit reliability is considerably high. ing. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the rendering according to the button operation result is performed for both the button rendering in the conversation announcement and the button rendering by the navigation character YM by one operation of the rendering button. ing. In addition, the character display of "It is super fever" displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the wolf and the character display of "Extreme heat" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM are also displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed. But may not be displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-1), an operation corresponding to the button effect started earlier. An effect corresponding to the result may be performed. That is, in this example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started earlier than the button effect in the preannouncement of conversation, as shown in FIG. Only the effect corresponding to the operation of (the letter display of “superheat” in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the advance notice of the conversation "The heat is intense" is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-2), when the player performs the second operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 316 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. An effect corresponding to the operation result is performed. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation advance notice (character display of "It is intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the whistle) is performed.

  In this production example, when the production button 136 is operated when the operation effective period is started in each of the two button productions, the production with high priority is given to the button production with a large reduction rate of the gauge in the remaining time display meter. The effect corresponding to the operation of the button 136 may be performed, or the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed by giving priority to the button effect with a small speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter. It is also good.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, the change speed of the display mode of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 is different, but, for example, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the notice image CI2 of the eyelid until a certain time The speed may be the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may change when a certain time is reached. .

  Moreover, although the operation effective period which concerns on notice image CI2 of eyebrows was made into 5 seconds in this example of production, for example, it prepares in the case of 5 seconds and the case of 10 seconds, and the remaining time display meter at the speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation effective period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM becomes the same. In this case, when the operation effective period relating to the preliminary preview image CI2 of the eyebrows is selected to be 5 seconds, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is selected to be 10 seconds.

  Further, in this example of the effect, "It is intense heat in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when" Extreme heat "is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier. If the "" is displayed, the jackpot is more reliable, which makes it easier to be displayed when the notice displayed later is a big hit, and the notice displayed later is displayed more easily. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying while the attention level is lowered relatively. In addition, "It is intense heat" is displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when "Extreme heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier In the case, the jackpot reliability may be lower or the jackpot reliability may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 326 (B1) to (B11) show that both the timer advance notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is being developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current is The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. It is shown that when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, and the player has a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B2), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the sabothan character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this example of presentation, it can be said that the start of the timer advance presentation is functioning as a notice of the chance up. In addition, “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B4), a balloon with the word "chance up timer advance notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH, and a notice of chance up is made It is informing. On the other hand, the timer display is counted down in the timer advance display TM1, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B4).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 326 (B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B5), “08:81” is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B6), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the second check point CP2. In this example of presentation, the advance of the chance increase (for example, the occurrence of a cut-in) is performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. The letter "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been raised due to the appearance of the preliminary announcement is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the preliminary announcement is shown. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "04:14" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third check point CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, which shows that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 326 (B9), in the timer advance notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, characters of “attention” to prompt attention to the notice are displayed. According to this presentation example, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is faster than the rate (speed) of the change to the whole display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP of character SBH of Sabohani to the final point GP by chance up meter CMT started earlier Can be said earlier.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH. It notifies that the advance notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is not only a notice of the chance up displayed corresponding to reaching the third check point CP3, but also a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. . That is, it can be said that the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of the chance up performed when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 is the same as the notice indicated by the word "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect, for example, the third check in the effect by the chance up meter CMT The notice of the chance up performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice performed as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appeared lever image 136Va with a higher reliability. (For example, it changes from red to gold).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  FIG. 327 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect in stages.

  In FIG. 327, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (2), the appearance of the button effect is shown. In this effect example, six sets of operation promotion informing images, each of which is a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter, are displayed. Specifically, a first operation promotion notification image including a first button image 136a1 and a first remaining time display meter MT1 is disposed at the upper left of the display screen, and a second button image 136a2 and a second remaining time are arranged. The second operation promotion notification image including the display meter MT2 is disposed at the upper center of the display screen, and the third operation promotion notification image including the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. A fourth operation prompting notification image, which is disposed on the upper right and which includes the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is disposed on the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth residual image are displayed. The fifth operation prompting notification image consisting of the time display meter MT5 is disposed at the lower center of the display screen, and the sixth operation prompting consists of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 Notification image is arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (3), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (4), all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 show that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced It is done. In this effect example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation effective period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation effective period for the other operation promotion notification image. The operation validity period is set to pass earlier than earlier. In addition, in this example of production, the length of the operation effective period is the same in all of the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (5), as shown in FIG. 327 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is a character It has been changed to KP, and it is shown that a notice is being made. In addition, the second operation promotion informing image to the sixth operation promotion informing image are not changed. That is, in this example of effect, only one operation promotion informing image among the plurality of operation promotion informing images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, the fifth operation promotion The display mode is changed one by one preferentially in the order of the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. In addition, the order of the operation promotion notification image which changes a display mode is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set suitably. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136.

  In this production example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (the remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the production button 136 is operated). Although the gauge reduction is faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (when the effect button 136 is operated) In the remaining time display meter MT1, the reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation prompting notification image in which the display mode changes with priority given to the third is the other remaining time display meter MT1 , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4b), the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (sixth operation promotion notification in which the lowest priority is given to changing the display mode when the effect button 136 is operated) The reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the image may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Moreover, as a remaining time display meter which accelerates | decreases a gauge reduction, it is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set to an appropriate thing.

  Further, in this example of rendering, although any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image has the button images 136a1 to 136a6 as its configuration, the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4c), the sixth button image 136a6 is used as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, and the sixth operation is to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of may be displayed. In this case, any remaining time display meter of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same reduction rate of the gauge, as shown in FIG. 327 (4c), the sixth The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 is reduced faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images You may make it slow or you may make it slow. With such a configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 327 (4c) is performed, it is promoted to operate the effect lever 136V once after operating the effect button 136 five times. There are times when you can do it.

  Further, in this effect example, the rate of decrease of the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image is displayed for the remaining time display in another operation promotion notification image. Although different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4 d), there may be two or more cases in which the rate of decrease of the gauge of the remaining time display meter is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 327 (4d), the reduction speed of the gauges of the display meters MT3 and MT5 for the remaining time of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. The remaining time meter MT1, MT2, MT4 and MT6 of the image is different from the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image, and the fifth corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image The rate of decrease of the gauge may be larger in the remaining time display meter MT5.

  FIG. 328 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 328, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 328 (A1) to (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 328 (A1) shows that two timer announcement effects are simultaneously started. Specifically, when the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this demonstration example, as described later, since the speed of the countdown of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display, the time until the countdown is completed is completed. It is different. In this example of the effect, among the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed at the upper side is called the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed at the lower side is called the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A2), it is shown that the frame in of two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM2 has a faster countdown speed than the first timer notice display TM1. Although the first timer notice display TM1 counts down as the actual time elapses, the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “09:73”, and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “06:73”. It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notification display TM2 is set to the speed according to the passage of the actual time, The countdown speed of the timer notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, a state where 4 seconds have elapsed since the timer notice display countdown starts is shown. Can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (A5), in the second timer advance notice display TM2, in place of the timer display, the word “attention” is displayed to urge attention to the notice. On the other hand, the first timer notice display TM1 continues the countdown, and the timer display is "05: 87" at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A5). After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the timer countdown of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. The second timer advance notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, a frame out after the countdown is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A6), it is shown that the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed. After that, after the countdown is completed, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, a frame out.

  In this example of presentation, although the case where two timer announcement effects were started simultaneously was explained, two timer announcement effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer announcement effect started earlier. The speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 328 (B1) to (B4), a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for any one timer notice effect is added It shows.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 328 (B1) shows that two timer announcement effects are simultaneously started. Specifically, the timer announcement effect is started when the timer announcement display (first timer announcement display TM1, second timer announcement display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example of effect, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 both count down as the actual time has elapsed. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer announcement display TM1 and the second timer announcement display TM2 are “09: 73”. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be slower or faster than the actual time lapse. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B3), it is shown that the effect of adding the timer by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (B4), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since addition is not performed on the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2, a difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 Is occurring. Therefore, although two timer announcement effects are started, since time is added to one timer display on the way, the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

  In this example, although time addition is performed on one of the two timer notice displays, the time may be shortened (subtracted), or the timer notice effect may be performed. The countdown of any one timer display may be paused to make the time until the countdown is completed different.

  Also, in this example of rendering, the case has been described where two timer preview effects are started at the same time, but two timer preview effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer preview started earlier. After adding the time to the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the timer notice effect started later being completed, the timer notice effect started earlier The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display may be completed. In addition, the time is reduced for the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. Alternatively, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

  Further, in this example, when two timer notice effects are being performed, and the timer overdraft effect is performed, time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display according to any one of the timer notice effects. However, the time display (or shortening of time, temporary stop of countdown, etc.) is performed for the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, and any display mode of the timer notice display is also used. It may be changed.

  Also, after the two timer announcement effects are started, two timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to the respective timer announcement effects are performed, whereby timer announcements pertaining to the timer announcement effects The time addition to the timer display in the display may be performed for each.

  In addition, after the two timer announcement effects are started, three timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one timer announcement effect of the two timer announcement effects A change in timer display may be performed by the two timer addition effects or the like, and a change in timer display by the remaining one timer addition effect may be performed with respect to the other timer announcement effect. In addition, three timer addition effects and the like may be performed, for example, a change in timer display may be performed by only two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only one of the three timer addition effects and the like. A change of the timer display may be performed, or a change of the timer display may not be performed by any of three timer-based effects or the like.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 328 (C1) to (C4), there is a remaining time display timer indicating an operation effective period for each of the plurality of operation means in the effect to prompt operation of any of the plurality of operation means. It is shown that it is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. In correspondence to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL , Remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, a right key image 137aR imitating a right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed corresponding to the right door image DRR, overlapping the right door image DRR, and also below the right key image 137aR. , The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed. Thereafter, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be received.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C2), the operation effective period of each of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 respectively corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR is reduced and the gauge is reduced. The situation is shown. In this rendering example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

  FIG. 328 (C3) shows that the left door is operated by the player and the left door image DRL is selected. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen to be enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. The right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. Thereby, notification that the left door image DRL has been selected is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 328 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and the appearance of the replay symbol RP is shown. Thereby, for example, it is predicted that a pseudo link will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 328 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 328 (C4a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the right door image The door of DRR opens, and a pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekitsu" is added to this pine figure CC, which suggests that the jackpot's reliability has been dramatically increased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a faster decrease in gauge, a notice display with higher reliability is performed, but in any case Or the same display may be displayed. Further, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a slower decrease in gauge, a warning display with higher reliability may be performed.

  Further, in this example of rendering, the operation effective period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation effective period of the right door image DRR, but the lengths of the operation effective periods may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, the operation of the right key is performed while waiting until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0. It may be enabled, or while waiting, the operation of the right key may be disabled.

  FIG. 329 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer announcement effect.

  In FIG. 329, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 329 (A1) to (A12) show how the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and is displayed in a small size when the timer notice display is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. . Here, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of timer notice display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, timer notice display TM1 is large before the display of the countdown is started. The size may be displayed, the size may be displayed, or the display mode itself may be different.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A2), "03:01" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (A3), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the timer advance display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated It is changed to the approximate center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the timer notice display TM1 in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged may be overlapped. Further, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the enlarged display is performed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "03:00", but there may be cases where the enlargement is not made, for example, timer notice When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Moreover, in this example of an effect, when timer advance notice display TM1 is expanded and displayed, a display position was changed, but a display position may not change.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A4) to (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notification display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the enlarged timer notification display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). The timer advance notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol, in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol, moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A11), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 329 (A12), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo link will be executed.

  In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged when the timer display shows "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining in the timer notice effect, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. The color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numeric part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be displayed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal orientation to vertical orientation), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer Another element such as a character or a symbol may be added to the advance notice display TM 1, addition of time to the timer display may be performed, or time reduction to the timer display may be performed. The countdown of the timer may stop, or the speed of the countdown of the timer display may increase, or the timer display may count up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 is split and a new one is displayed. If the plurality of timer notices are displayed, the timer notices may be integrated into one timer notice.

  Also, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes of small size and large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, timer display or When displaying the "attention" character display in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when the timer display or the "attention" character display is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. The size may be displayed. By this, for example, the display mode may be able to be changed according to the reliability of the big hit.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size, but for example, the size may be changed from the small size to the large size through the middle size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from small size to medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", medium size to large size It may be changed in size. Moreover, although it changes from small size to medium size, there may be a case where it does not change to large size.

  Further, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "00:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when displaying the text of "attention", the timer notice display TM1 The size may be changed to a large size.

  Further, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the color of the frame or the background of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made to differ depending on the size of the timer advance notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

  Also, for example, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the color of the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc. ). Also, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the size of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, high reliability in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the shape of the character display of "attention".

  In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, a certain effect may easily appear. For example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the pseudo run symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed. However, even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. May be Here, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily made.

  Further, in this example, at the time when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 starts to count down, the timer notice display TM1 is in the small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or at the start of the display of the timer notice display TM1. The display mode may be large.

  Further, in this example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display The size of may not be changed. Also, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. In addition, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  Also, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. In addition, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed in form by animation, the timer display may also be changed in form by animation. In addition, although the form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the animation, the timer display may not be changed. Further, although the timer display changes in form due to animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 329 (B1) to FIG. 3B (B4) show another example in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “00:31” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Moreover, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being changed and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 329 (B2) to (B3), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B2), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. As described above, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character display of "attention" is performed. In addition, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 330 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer announcement effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 330A1 to 330A3, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, an example in which the timer advance notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode is displayed on another display means It shows. In the effect example shown in FIG. 330 (A1) to FIG. 330 (A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 330 (A1), the timer preview effect is performed, and the timer preview display TM1 is disposed at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as the timer indication, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S in a small size. When the effect of the countdown by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (A2), variation display of the decorative symbol is still performed. In addition, in the sub display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues in the timer advance notice display TM1, and "03: 01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (A2).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (A3), when the timer display is remaining 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is a decoration symbol from the sub display device 208S. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 330 (B1) to (B3), when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, another display means displays the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode. An example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. In addition, at the timing shown to FIG. 330 (B1), the number of pending | holding of the special figure 1 is 1, and the 1st pending | holding icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and on the timer notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as a timer display, and a countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B2), variation display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is in operation, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is positioned on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, while the sub display device 208S is moving up, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The variation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, and the sub display device 208S completes the movement. May be erased after the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased when the sub display device 208S completes moving. Also, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. In addition, the display position of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (B3), when the timer display remains for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decoration symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is displayed from the decoration symbol display device 208 as a sub The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208S, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decoration symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 is displayed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. Furthermore, when displaying the timer notice display TM1 on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer displays on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. .

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 330 (C1) to FIG. 330 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the timer notice display TM1 changes. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C1), the number of reservations in special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 330 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C2), “03:01” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (C3), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer advance display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is disposed inside the circular meter. As shown in FIG. 330 (C3) to FIG. (C6), the display state of this circular meter unit changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases in the clockwise direction from the 12 o'clock position according to the passage of time. Although the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Also, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but for example, the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter part is enlarged when the remaining one second is reached It may be displayed. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be configured only by a circular meter unit, and the timer display may not be performed. In addition, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to be recognized than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a in which the display mode has changed. In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the animation of the change display is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the change display is being performed. When the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed without changing the timer display portion.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 330 (C4) to FIG. (C6), the countdown and the decrease display of the gauge in the timer advance notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this effect example, the effect of the countdown is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter section. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the timer notice display TM1a. When stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 330 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a is changed to the timer display and the pseudo continuous effect is performed. The character "is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo connected effect is to be performed. In addition, character display other than "continuation" may be performed, for example, when it shifts to SP reach as a result of the countdown of a timer display completing, it displays as "SP reach" etc. It may be informed that it will shift. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “notice” may be displayed in order to focus attention on the occurrence of a notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A display is started in which the pseudo linked symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. After that, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo run is executed.

  In this effect example, the character "continuation" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, but for example, a question mark is added to the character "continuation", etc. A display may be performed in which the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when the pseudo-series effect is performed, the big hit may be determined.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the timer indications for the same effect are respectively displayed by a plurality of timer advance notice displays, one timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size, or both may be displayed. The timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size. Also, one of the timer notices is displayed as "03:00", and the other timer notice is displayed in a different manner, for example, roughly displayed as "3 seconds later". Display of countdown may be performed.

  FIG. 331 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another effect of the timer announcement effect.

  In FIG. 331, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 331 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A8), it is shown that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A2), it is shown that the time-based effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "above" is displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time display is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is informed that it will be performed. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 331 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of “05:00” indicating that the timer display is 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display It is changed to the approximate center of the device 208. In the example of the effect, the countdown is interrupted once at “05:00”, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer announcement display TM1 is performed by adding the time to the timer display. Is an enlarged display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. It may be made to overlap with TM1. In addition, the conditions under which the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed are not limited to the addition of the time in the timer display, for example, when the timer display changes such as shortening of the time in the timer display or stopping the countdown. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 331 (A5), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time on the timer display is shown. . The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 331 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 331 (B1) to (B7) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the time of the timer display is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped at the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped at the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the timer advance notice display TM1 has completed the countdown display of the timer display, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. Is displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 331 (B3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the pseudo-connected symbol represented by the middle symbol in the middle pattern is moved at low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo run effect by the pseudo run symbol is continuously performed from FIG. 331 (B3) to FIG. (B7).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (B4), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B5), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately right center of the display screen). Thereafter, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer indication is resumed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the pseudo symbol is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B7), cut-in display is performed, which includes a character of "don't care" and character display of "CONTINUED", and thereafter, the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is performed, and the timer display is "14: 92" at the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B7).

  FIG. 332 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 332, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 332 (A1) to (A8), when the display mode of the timer notice is changed and the rank of the notice is increased, the timer notice is enlarged and displayed. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20: 35” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (A2).

  FIG. 332 (A3) shows that animation display of a duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (A3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 332 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame is changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the jackpot reliability has increased. Then, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 has been ranked up. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be suspended while the enlarged display is performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, and the display mode of the timer announcement display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the big hit. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by being changed to the mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 332 (A6), when the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 332 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the advance notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, a character of "jump" is displayed along with the princess character, which suggests that the jackpot is highly reliable. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), in response to the rank increase of the timer advance notice display TM1, the letter display of “expected large” is added. This makes it more likely to be a big hit than the case where a cut-in display in which the character display of "expected large" is not added is displayed. Note that the character display of “expected large” may or may not be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up. In addition, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on condition that the timer advance notice display TM1 is ramped up, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed without being ranked up. May be In this effect example, the character display of "expected large" is easier to be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also changed to perform advance notice display. The change of the display of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice performed by the timer notice effect may be performed.

  As described above, in this effect example, rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification for indicating that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice is promoted, or the timer notice The rank increase of the display TM 1 may function as a notice of the chance increase. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the expectation for displaying a high notice of a big hit in advance is high in advance.

  Also, in this effect example, the rank up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted, for example, the first decorative symbol It may be suggested that the reach design in may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when reach effect is performed with "decoration 2" in which the probability variation big hit is not determined and reach production is being performed, if the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, the probability variation big hit if it becomes a big hit May be determined, and may change to the reach of "decorative 7" which is likely to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 332 (B1) to (B7) show that the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer advance effect is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “20: 35” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy player, the swordsman, has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 332 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the start point SP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B3).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the sabotary character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 332 (B4), when the boy character BOY appears, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to make the boy character BOY noticeable. That is, by displaying the timer notice display TM1 in a reduced size, it may be possible not to disturb the display of the character BOY of the boy, and it is also possible that the notice of the chance improvement is performed by the character BOY of the boy. It may be easily recognizable. Note that, even if the timer advance display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B4). Note that, while the reduction display is performed, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 332 (B4) to FIG. (B6), the reduction display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is maintained until the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

  In this example of presentation, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size while the advance notice of the chance up is performed, thereby notifying that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. By changing the display mode, it may be possible to achieve the purpose. For example, in addition to the reduction display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the color change of the timer display itself, the change of the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by the change of the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

  FIG. 333 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another effect example of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 333, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 333 (A1) to (A3), a state is shown in which the display position of the timer advance notice displayed at the time of transition to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed to indicate that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 333 (A1), a mode transitioning to a super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A2), the title of Super Reach is displayed, in which the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A3) that follows, an animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. When the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer preview display TM1 changes its display position. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Also, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 333 (A3 '), the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size to make the effect of super reach noticeable.

  In this production example, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the transition to super reach shown in FIG. 333 (A1) is performed The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the display of the super reach title shown in FIG. 333 (A2) is performed. It is also good. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be configured to move again to the original position at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, timing increase of the timer notice advance TM1, etc.), It may be displayed as it is. In addition, even when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, the enlarged view (for example, first displayed at a specific timing (for example, the timing when 3 seconds or 0), the chance advance of the timer notice display TM1, etc.) Display (or display larger than the size initially displayed).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 333 (B1) to (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer advance notice displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed to indicate that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1), a state of transition to the super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “27: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In FIG. 333 (B2), it is shown that the 1st large board behavior character object 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character article 224Gd operate, and overlap in the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “25:34” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 is at least partially overlapped by the second large-screen behavior character item 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd, and the timer notification display is more than in the non-overlapped state. TM1 is considered to be difficult to view.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position so as not to be overlapped with the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior article 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end of the center of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the 1st large board behavior role thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior role thing 224Gd do not operate, it is not necessary to change a display position, but a display position may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 333 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easy-to-see manner. At this time, although the effect image appearing due to the light emission of the light guide plate IL is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed by this. When the light guide plate IL emits light, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 333 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 333 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (right end center portion of the display screen). In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “21: 37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd starts to return to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd has started to return to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be performed. After the start of the movement to the original position, the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may start an operation to return to the initial position.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 333 (C1) to FIG. (C5) show that the positional relationship between the timer advance notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “29: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C2), it is shown that “decoration 7” is stopped at the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “22:04” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C2). Also at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C3), reach effect is started, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved and displayed upward and downward, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. , The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “21: 37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right symbol of the first decoration symbol. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4) shows a state of being developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4), the title of Super Reach is displayed, in which the image of the hostess swordsman is displayed large. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and effects are performed using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 334 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance presentation.

  In FIG. 334, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 334 (A1) to FIG. (A10), it is shown that the display position of the timer advance notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed, which indicates that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A1), a state of transition to the super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A2), a super reach title in which an enemy character sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (word player reach) is shown. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A3), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A3). In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the word "Reduce timer" is displayed. It is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer advance presentation is started, or when the reach state is reached May be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the lower key of operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A4), timer preview display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and the display position is displayed as shown in FIG. 334 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be made non-display. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334 (A5), the characters “enlarge timer” are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the upper key to enlarge the timer notice display TM1. Then, the display is displayed in the original size, and the display position is also notified to return to the original position.

  Thereafter, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A6), as shown in FIG. 334 (A7), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size. , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "17: 81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334 (A7), the guide display in which the characters “Reduce timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is performed, and the player operates the lower key. Thus, it is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 334 (A3), when the upper key of operation key unit 137 is operated when timer advance notice display TM1 is at the default display size and at the default display position, The timer advance notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A8).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (A9), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds is reached, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is erased. It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer advance notice display TM1 can not be changed. The display position and the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. Also, when the timer display changes to "03:00", the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, and if it is displayed in a reduced size, at this timing, the default display size is returned to the default display position. It may be displayed as it is or may be reduced and displayed at the changed display position.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A10), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and it is shown that the countdown is completed.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 334 (B1) to FIG. (B9), it is shown that the timer advance notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the title of Super Reach is displayed, in which the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20: 35” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B2).

  FIG. 334 (B3) shows that animation display of a duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 334 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is 15 seconds remaining, and then FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer advance notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B5), indicate “13:56”. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. In these timer notices TM1L and TM1R, although the color of the frame changes to red, the color of the frame does not have to change, and the direction of the frame changes to red when the color of the frame changes to red. It may be more likely to be a big hit than when the color does not change. Also, the color of one of these timer notices TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 334 (B6), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 334 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R The word "Attention" will be displayed in order to call attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a cut-in display showing that the princess character is saying "Rewrite reach" is being performed. There is. This cut-in display is an effect that is performed when the timer display countdown on one timer notification display (for example, the left timer notification display TM1L) of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1R is completed, and the big hit is trusted. It is reported that promotion to a higher reach effect of sex. Note that the effect may be an effect performed by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in both of the timer notices of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1R.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B9), a state in which it has been developed into an SP Ken-Age reach is shown. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Figure 334 (B9), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-A-Ok reach in that the hero of the hero and the enemy of the sword is facing the same position, but he follows the panda as a helper of the hero of the hero. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B9), a notice display showing that a copanda cheering party KPD composed of three copanda characters is cheering is performed, and SP Kengo reach's It reports that the reliability for the big hit is dramatically high. The copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

  In this production example, the advance notice of the chance up and the development of the reach production are performed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (the development of reach production) corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that, among the developed reach productions, chances-up are being performed.

  FIG. 335 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 335, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 335 (A1) to FIG. 335 (A5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 335 (A1) to FIG. (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed into a super reach (Kenai reach). . Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 "1" shown is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer announcement effect is performed, “15: 47” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (A2), animation of a duel scene is continuously performed. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A2).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 335 (A3), the predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the display region in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “14:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer advance display is divided into two. The timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A4), “13: 56 ”. The timer display continues to count down while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. In this case, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. For example, timer display may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “12:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A5).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 335 (B1) to (B5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 335 (B1) to FIG. (B5), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini display device 208P is provided. The mini display device 208P is provided, for example, at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 289). In this effect example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as LCD, EL, 7 segments, a lamp, a drum and the like may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and can drive the mini display device 208P into the easy-to-see state and the hard-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “18:19” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. The timer display effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6: 19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are being performed in parallel, and the timer display becomes "0" in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. In such a case, a presentation such as a notice of chance up may be performed, and a presentation such as a notice of chance up is also performed when the timer display becomes “0” in the timer advance presentation on the mini display device 208P. There is a case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (B2), the timer notice is displayed at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1, and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time shown on the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The word "UP" is displayed to indicate that the timer display of TM1 is to be added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B4), a time of three seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and updated to "18:00".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (B5), in the timer advance notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the shutter member makes it difficult to visually recognize the display screen. In this effect example, when time addition is performed on the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even when time addition is performed to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P may not end, and thereafter, the timer display may be counted down.

  FIG. 336 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another effect example of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 336, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 336 (A1) to (A10), the appearance of informing by displaying that the timer advance presentation is being prepared before the start of the timer advance presentation is notified It shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice preparation effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice preparation effect is started by the frame of the timer notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. The timer announcement preparation effect is to display an indication that the preparation is in progress until the timer announcement effect starts, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. Nothing is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A2). Note that, for example, display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A3), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, “STANDBY” indicating that the preparation for the timer advance notice effect is in progress is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and this is notified. That is, this effect example is an effect to be performed as one aspect of the advance notice for announcing that the timer advance effect will be performed in the hold state. In addition, it may be the said fluctuation notice which announces that timer notice effect is performed in the symbol display under fluctuation.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 on which the character "STANDBY" is displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and becomes a mini-size display size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may not be changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decor 9-decor 1". At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A7), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”. Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. In addition, the symbol variation display of this time is a thing corresponding to the pending which was the target of the pre-reading.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position is also returned to the original position, and the timer display is started from the "STANDBY" display. It is shown that it switches to the display of "10:00" as. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. When the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, an animation moving while expanding the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged, or the display position may be changed after the enlarged display. Also, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

  After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, "03:00") or the display mode changes, the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 You may change from small size to large size.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 336 (B1) to (B8), a plurality of notice icons MI1 of the clock functioning as the advance notice are stocked, and the timer notice effect is performed as many as the number of the notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B2), a state in which “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. The notice icon MI1 of the clock is added to the “decoration 3”, which indicates that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked. Note that two or more watch notice icons MI1 may be stocked at one time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B3), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decor 9-decor 1". Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the stocked number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 1” indicating that a notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer advance presentation effect by the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. Further, the remaining time displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the notice icon MI1 on the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B4), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, it is shown that a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is also performed. The navigation character preview is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this effect example functions as a prefetch notice that the timer notice effect is performed within the hold state. As described above, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol change display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Also, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. In addition, in the effect performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the "los 4-1-1-7". Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 3” is performed, which indicates that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B6), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B7), it is shown that one of the notice icons MI1 of the three stocked clocks is digested and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed as the timer indication, and it is suggested that a notice of chance up may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Also, in this example, one notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer notice effect is started, but two watch notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. May be performed. Further, in this example of rendering, one preview icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer preview effect is started, but for example, as shown in FIG. 336 (B7 '), the preview icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. The timer announcement effect may be started without being digested.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B8), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position substantially at the center of the right end of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by moving animation. In addition, when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed at the approximate right end center of the display screen from the beginning. .

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 337 to 390. In addition, the effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

  FIGS. 337 to 390 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 337 to 390, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In FIGS. 337 to 390, although the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided. It may be Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 337 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 is showing in steps the continuation of an example of effects shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 337 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 337 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 337 (1), two reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area, and both of the two reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 have default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 337 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 337 (1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. It will be displayed as Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (3), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, the question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character of "chance", which suggests that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (5), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (6), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo consecutive symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A character of "CONTINUED" is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM, and it is informed that a pseudo-link will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (8), after the character “I get” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by pseudo ream is started ing. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 337 (9), “× 2” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which indicates the number of times variable display of the second decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (10), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 337 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the Sabo-Hani group advance notice in which a large amount of Sabo-Hani characters SBHN cross is performed. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a big expectation of big hit. That is, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when the Sabohani group advance notice is performed than when the Sabohani group advance notice is not performed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of SaboHani group notices are provided according to the reliability of the big hit, and a strong SaboHani group notice with the second number of SaboHani characters SBHN, and a first number of SaboHani characters SBHN. Weak Sabohani group announcements may be performed which is (a number less than the second number). The Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 337 (13) is a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (14), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of "SP development" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. It has been informed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 337 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword fighter of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (16), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button advance presentation effect, the button acceptance time meter may be displayed to notify the operation effective period.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (17), as shown in FIG. 337 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 A cut-in image is displayed that includes a balloon image in which the characters are arranged. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not decorated around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the big hit is more than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It is suggested that the reliability of

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) following FIG. 337 (18), the main character of the hero is defeated by the host of the swordsman and the defeated screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed on the middle pattern is displayed, and it is informed that the stop display is to be performed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 338 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 339 is a view showing stepwise an example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 is a drawing showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. is there. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 339 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform display below the decimal point less than one second.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (4), “04: 25” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Make pseudo run" are displayed, and as a result of the timer display being counted down on the timer notice display TM, it is suggested that pseudo run may be performed. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01: 73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00: 52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (7). After that, as shown in FIG. 339 (8), the characters “continuation” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is performed. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (8).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 339 (9), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and “goes” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM at the timing when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. The character of is displayed, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-link is displayed. "2" is displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (11) to (18) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 339 (11) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 337 (10) to (17), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (18), as shown in FIG. 340 (19) following FIG. 339 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the up image of the character A cut-in image is displayed that includes a balloon image in which the characters "match" are arranged in the balloon. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine pieces) of face-to-face are placed around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is It suggests that the jackpot reliability is higher than that displayed. In addition, when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be determined to be a big hit (finally, a big hit symbol is determined and displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 340 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (21), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed. In this example of effect, even if the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, it may be lost.

  FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 341 (1)-the same figure (4) are the same as that of FIG. 339 (1)-the same figure (4), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (5), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that the pseudo-link will be performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (pseudo chain) is not performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the true timer announcement effect is performed than when the false timer announcement effect is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even when a false timer announcement effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (6), a state is shown in which the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-link as a result of the timer advance presentation effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, the character "Sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is deleted.

  After that, a second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 341 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is The display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity, and it is notified that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In addition, in this example of a production, although notice of false ream by timer notice production was false notice, it may be able to be said that it has functioned as notice of reach by having shifted to reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the weak sabothani group preliminary notice is performed, in which the number of savoy hani SBHN is smaller than the above-mentioned strong sabothani group preliminary notice. Although the weak sabothani group warning is more reliable than the case where the sabohani group warning is not given, it is less reliable than the strong sabothani group warning is given.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (10), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into a super reach. It has been informed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 341 (11) to FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 341 (11)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 337 (15)-FIG. 338 (21), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 342 is a view stepwise showing another display example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 342 (1)-the same figure (6) are the same as that of FIG. 339 (1)-the same figure (6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 342 (6), after “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 342 (7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00: The third stop is performed at the timing when it becomes "00", and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. As described above, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, after the timer display in timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed, or after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, the timer display in timer notice display TM1 is "00:00 The symbol may be displayed at the same time as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 342 (8), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and the character "CONTINUED" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed. It should be noted that the character of "continue" may be displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is erased, or the timer notice display TM1 may be erased after the letter of "continue" is displayed, or the timer notice The timing at which the display TM1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the character "continuation" is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (9), the character “Gute” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 342 (7a) to FIG. (9a), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series starts The display may be maintained without erasing the timer advance notice display TM1 until it is done.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 342 (9b), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is made at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo link starts. The character "done" may be displayed on the TM1, and the timer advance notice effect may be successful to notify that the pseudo ream as a certain effect has been started.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer notice display is performed at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link starts. The characters “pseudo chain” may be displayed on the TM1, and the timer advance notice effect may be successful to notify that the pseudo chain as a certain effect has been started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), by displaying the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho on the timer notice display TM1, it is made to produce an indication that a pseudo-run as a certain effect is started It is also good.

  FIG. 343 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 343 (1)-the same figure (3) are the same as that of FIG. 339 (1)-the same figure (3), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed, and it is shown that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "04: 25". Moreover, in this example of presentation, the character of "reach is" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that a reach may occur.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “03:96” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (6), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "01: 73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (6).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 343 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "00: 52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (7).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (9) A notice is given. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that strong sabochani group announcement is performed as a result of timer announcement presentation. In other words, the strong sabothani group announcement can be regarded as an example of a certain effect. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (10) to (17) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 343 (10)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 339 (15)-FIG. 340 (22), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong advance notice is started, the symbol variation display is performed than when the timer advance effect is performed and the advance advance notice is not started. In (the symbol variation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed. In this example of effect, even when the advance notice of the timer is performed and the advance notice of the strong group is started, it may be lost.

  FIG. 344 is a view showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 344 (1)-the same figure (8) are the same as that of FIG. 343 (1)-the same figure (8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 344 (8), even if the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 344 (9), An example is also shown where no advance notice is given. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the notice that the strong Sabohani group notice is to be made is a false (Gase) notice as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM. . In other words, it can be said that it is shown that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group advance notice) is not performed even when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (10), the display of “SP evolution” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the vehicle will develop into a super reach.

  Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (11) to (17) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 344 (11)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 343 (11)-the same figure (17), description is abbreviate | omitted. Although this effect example shows an example in which a big hit may be made even if a timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 is false and a certain effect is not started, there may be a loss.

  FIG. 345 is a view showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 345 (1)-the same figure (8) are the same as that of FIG. 343 (1)-the same figure (8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 345 (8), when the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. Is done. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a notice (weak sabochani group announcement) different from a certain presentation is performed as a result of timer announcement production. In other words, it can be said that when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is shown that an effect (weak Sabohani group advance notice) different from a certain effect (strong Sabohani group advance notice) is performed, This timer advance notice effect can also be referred to as a fake timer notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (10), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the development can be made into super reach. It has been informed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 345 (11) to FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 345 (11)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 343 (11)-the same figure (17), description is abbreviate | omitted. Even in this example of the effect, there is shown an example in which there is a case that a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started because the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 is false, but it is also a loss is there.

  FIG. 346 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 347 shows a step by step an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 346 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1A is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of this timer advance notice display TM1A is a high reliability degree display manner, which indicates that the possibility of being a false timer notice is lower than the default display manner. When timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be performed without fail. Also, when the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode is displayed (the big hit symbol is determined display To make it easy to “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (4), “00: 24” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, a question mark is displayed near the navigation character YM together with the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display being counted down in the timer notice display TM1A, the display mode of the hold icon may change. It is suggested that. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (5), it is shown that the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes "00:00".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (6), the character of "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda, and becomes a read-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1A. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "previous" are displayed, and it is notified that it is highly likely that the symbol variation display to be started next is a big hit. It should be noted that the character display of "destination" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "destination" is performed. The character display of "the first at" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 346 (11), temporary stop due to fluctuation After that, as shown in FIG. 346 (12), in the decoration symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decoration symbols of the "department 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, the character of "previous" displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (14), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character preview is started, the character "Hot me" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. “20:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Moreover, in this production example, the time of the timer display displayed when the countdown is started is as long as "20:00", and the reliability of the big hit jumps more than the case where the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is rising. The countdown in timer advance notice display TM1A is then started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (16).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (17), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “16:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (17).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 346 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “16:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (18).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 347 (19) following FIG. 346 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong sagohani group advance notice is performed. Also, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and “15:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (19). Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the character Sabon of Sabohani constituting the advance notice of the strong Sabohani group. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer notices are displayed in the timer notice effect is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. Then, it suggests that a certain production is started. Further, in this example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later has a shorter time than the timer notice display TM1A displayed first, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later. Is completed earlier than the countdown on the timer notice display TM1A started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later is digested earlier. The countdown in timer notice display TM1 is then started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (20), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continued, display of "SP evolution" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into a super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues and “14:95” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20). In addition, the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later continues counting down, and "4: 25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 347 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. In timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is continued, and "10:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (21). In addition, the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later continues to count down, and “1:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (22), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 started later becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started and the button image It is shown that 136a is displayed in a default manner. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is digested earlier than the timer notice display TM1A which is first started to be displayed. In this effect example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect countdown by the timer advance operation display TM1 which has been started to display later is not the start of the button advance operation effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance operation effect It is considered as a notice effect started as a result of being performed, and in this example of the effect, it is to notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, but it is to notice the occurrence itself of the button advance effect. May be

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (23), as shown in FIG. 347 (24), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 whose countdown has been completed continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated and the cut-in image is displayed. In addition, when the countdown is completed and “0:00” is displayed and the button preview effect is started, it may be deleted. In this example of presentation, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed is false (Gase) as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 started to be displayed later. It can be said that a certain situation is shown. Alternatively, in this example of rendering, it is shown that rendering (displaying the weak cut-in image CI1 b) different from a certain rendering (display of the strong cut-in image CI1 a) is performed as a result of the timer advance rendering. In other words, when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", it is shown that an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed. This timer advance notice can also be referred to as a fake timer advance notice.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (25) shows that the timer notice display TM1 whose display has been started later is erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1A whose display has been started earlier, the countdown continues, and "5:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (26), a screen is displayed in which the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and the defeated game is displayed, and the central symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "3: 77" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (26).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (27), it is shown that the display position of the timer notice display TM1A moves from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. In timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continued, and "2: 50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (27).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (28), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continued, and “1:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (28).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (29), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM 1A becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed while the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and the character BC3 of the bancho character whose clothes are torn along with the characters "is back" appears. In the vicinity, an exclamation mark is displayed, showing that the appearance of the Bancho character suddenly is surprising. Then, three decoration symbols of "decoration 5" are displayed, and it is informed that three "decorations 5" are aligned to be a big hit. That is, in this example of presentation, an example is shown in which a resurrection presentation is performed informing that a big hit will be made as a certain presentation performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by timer announcement display TM 1A.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (31), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 347 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 and the characters of "Yatteze" is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance effect is performed and the resurrection effect is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the symbol fluctuation is displayed than when the timer advance effect is performed and the resurrection effect is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  In this example, when displaying the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode, the time to be displayed first on the timer display is "3:00" or "20:00", for example. When the advance notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode or in the special display mode, the first time displayed on the timer display or the first time displayed on the timer display when the timer advance display is displayed in the default display mode The time (second time) may be longer than the time (first time) displayed on the screen. As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer advance notice display, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a certain advance notice display to be executed.

  FIG. 348 is a view gradually showing another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 348 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (3), it is shown that a timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the character of “hold change”, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, as a result. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice. On the other hand, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "03:00".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 348 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is false (useless) notice. In other words, in this effect example, before the countdown of the timer display in timer notice display TM1 is started, timer notice display TM1 is erased, and a certain effect (change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (6) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that change presentation of the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer advance presentation is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Also, at this time, the character of "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 348 (10), temporary stop due to fluctuation After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the timer advance presentation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 shows a sequence of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 350 step by step. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 349 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. In addition, three or more timer announcement effects may be started simultaneously. These two timer announcements TM1L and TM1R are both default display modes. “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, suggesting that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In addition, “45:00” is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain notice effect is started 45 seconds after the countdown is started. doing. In this example, since two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R simultaneously start to count down, some notice effects are provided both when 10 seconds and 45 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started. It is suggested that be started. Here, the certain advance notice that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and the certain show effect that may be started when 45 seconds have elapsed may be the same. It may be different. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, suggesting that a strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. . It should be noted that the addition of the face icon BCHO of the head of the game may notify that the reliability of the big hit is increased. It should be noted that multiple types of icons to be added to the timer advance notice display are prepared, and the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the type of the added icon, and the type of certain advance notice effect that may be performed May be different.

  After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (4), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is “9: "25" is displayed, and "44: 25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. In addition, in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (5), “9:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (6), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left displays "8:75", In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (7), the characters “open right” are displayed near the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the countdown continues in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and "4:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (7). In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (8), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. In addition, in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (8), “3: 67” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “production activation” are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. As a result, in the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is informed that it is ensured that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this effect example, the appearance of the princess character HME makes it possible to predict that a pseudo-link will be performed as a certain effect. That is, in this effect example, the princess character HME can be said to be a pseudo-announced notice item (sometimes referred to as a "notice icon"). At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, “41:67” is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues also here. The addition of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right may not be performed. In this embodiment, there may be a case where it is possible to boost the effect by the mini game during the countdown by the timer advance presentation effect until the countdown is completed (until "0:00" is reached).

  After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (10), the characters “in preparation for presentation” are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and pseudo-run is performed It is informed that it is a priori. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo run" are displayed, and a notice of anticipation that pseudo run is to be performed is also made here. In the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (10), “1: 33” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (11), it is shown that the countdown in the timer advance notice effect continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed in a mode in which the princess character HME is added, that is, displaying of the notice item of the pseudo run is a visual indication that the pseudo run is performed. It may be easy to understand. Thus, in this presentation example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. In the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (11), “1:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continues, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12). When the countdown is completed, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-replay symbol RP-decorative 6". In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "40:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 349 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Here, after the timer advance notice display TM1L is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series may be started, or after the variation display of the second decoration symbol by the pseudo-series is started, the timer The advance notice display TM1L may be erased, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by pseudo-run may be started at the timing when the timer notice display TM1L is erased. Also, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed, and it is notified by the display of the icon that the pseudo link has been performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown is continued, and “39:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (13).

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (14), a new timer notice display TM1N is started on the upper left side of the display screen, and a new timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N is a default display mode. For example, the frame is in-framed from the left side of the display screen. “10:00” is displayed as a timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example, the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N starts counting down later than the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right where the countdown has already been started, but the timer notice display displayed on the right The countdown will be completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues and “38:15” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (14).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (15), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 349 (15), “9: 25” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is “37: "40" is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side starts.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (16) shows that the second mini game has been started. When the mini game is started, as described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center, and the left and right chest image BXL and the right chest image are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. The BXR and the BXR are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “select with cross key” are displayed. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (16), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays "9:00", In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (17), “8:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the character “open right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (18), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays "4:00", In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (19) continued to FIG. 349 (18), effects are started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and is selected. The left treasure chest image BXL which is not present is erased. And the character of "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R each continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (19), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays "3: 67", In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31: 82" is displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (20), the character BBA of the nephew appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of "Uhihi" is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game is failed. ing. As a result, it is notified that the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1N displayed on the left side is a false timer announcement effect. In the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (20), “1:67” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29: 82" is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (21), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is informed that the notice that a certain notice effect is performed is a false (case) notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", indicating that a certain effect is not performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues and “29:49” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (21). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, and it is informed that the number of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series is two. When the princess character HME is displayed, the display of “× 2” may not be performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (22) shows that the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-link as a result of the timer advance presentation effect is not performed. Further, the countdown continues in the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, and "27:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (22).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (23), “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and “reach” is displayed near the navigation character YM. Is notified that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 350 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Then, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1R is overlapped with the character Sabon of Sabohani constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. It should be noted that a strong advance notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is completed, or a strong advance notice of the strong breakout group is started before the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong advance notice may be started when movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong advance notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R may be started after the strong advance notice of the strong group is started. Alternatively, the strong advance notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and "25:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (24).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (25), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of "SP development" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into super reach. It has been informed. In timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is continued, and “24:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26), it is shown that the display screen is darkened and a blackout effect where lightning crosses is performed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is continued, and “21:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (26).

  When the blackout effect ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the word "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the face icon of the Bancho, and it is shown that a mini-game based on the lottery is being started. Then, it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the face of the bancho added to the timer notice display TM1R moves to the field of the middle and is positioned at the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the face icon BCHO of the face of the bankmaster added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display that the mini game is started by the lottery. In addition, the character of "Select" is displayed below the field, and it is prompted to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon BCHO of the Bancho. . In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues and “21:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (27).

  After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (28), the bancho of the middle position among the three options in the field. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. Further, the countdown continues in the timer notice display TM1R, and “18:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (28).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the field is selected, if the operation effective period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. The production is started. At this time, one of “o” indicating success and “x” indicating failure is displayed at the three end points of the field, respectively. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the middle end, and "o" is displayed at the right end. ing. In addition, the display number of "(circle)" may be 2 or more, and "(circle)" may be displayed on all the end points. Also at this time, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1R, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (29).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 350 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho moves on the line along the rule of the lottery. In timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (30).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (31), it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the master's face has reached the end point on the right side among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this rendering example, while the face icon BCHO of the Bancho reaches the end point on the right side where "o" is displayed, the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, and the mission is successful, and the strong cut-in image It has been notified that it has been determined that the CI 1 a is to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (31).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. Then, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters "Ken-Au reach" are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. Also, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (32).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (33), it is shown that the button preview effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes “0:00” and it is shown that the countdown is completed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RA is the timer notice effect relating to the button effect and is the timer notice effect that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the button effect. . The timer advance notice display TM1RA which becomes “0:00” is maintained until the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be erased before it is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (34), as shown in FIG. 350 (35), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a strong cut-in image CI1a. Thereafter, the timer advance notice display TM1RA is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (37) following FIG. 350 (36), a state in which temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" It is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. The display of the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 can be visually recognized. After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In this production example, the timer announcement production is performed and the pseudo run is started, and further, the timer announcement production is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the big hit design is determined and displayed. However, they are configured to be lost.

  FIG. 352 is a view illustrating the steps of another example of the effect following FIG. 350 (24). In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, although FIG. 352 (25a)-the same figure (28a) are the same as FIG. 350 (25)-the same figure (28), in this example of a production, in the blackout effect in FIG. The difference is that the internal timer notice display TM1R is temporarily hidden.

  When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the field is selected and the operation effective period elapses, the effect shown in FIG. 352 (29a) is displayed. It is started. In this rendering example, three icons are displayed at the three end points of the field at this time. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini game has failed is displayed at the end point on the left side of the three end points, and a center icon indicating that the mini game is successful is displayed at the center end point. Is displayed, and at the end point on the right side, an icon of Sabohani indicating that the mini game has been very successful is displayed. Note that there may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be no bancho icon, there may be two, or all of them may be bancho icons. In addition, there may be no Sabohani icon, there may be two, or all of them may be Sabohani icons. Also at this time, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1R, and “18:22” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (29a).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 352 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho moves on the line along the rule of the lottery. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (30a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (31a), it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the head of the team has reached the right end point of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this production example, the icon of Bach's face BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the SaboHani's icon is displayed, and the characters "strongest cut-in confirmed" are displayed, and the mission is a great success, as will be described later. It is notified that it is decided that the cut-in image CI1v is to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continued, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (31a).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 352 (32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not displayed. Then, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters "Ken-Au reach" are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. Also, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. Furthermore, in this example of a production, the character of "in preparation for the strongest cut-in" is displayed with the character of Sabo Hani below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and notice that the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed It is informing. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (32a).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (33a), it is shown that the button preview effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes “0:00” and it is shown that the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (34a), as shown in FIG. 352 (35a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strongest cut-in image CI1v. At this time, the display of the character of "Sabo Hani" and the character "in preparation for the strongest cut-in" is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes a balloon image in which the character of "match" is arranged in the balloon together with the image of the character of the character of the lord, and a display mode surrounded by a large number of characters of Sabothani. It is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, it may be determined that the big hit. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1RA, the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v which is a advance notice effect more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance effect is performed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain advance notice effect, or may be displayed as a different notice effect than the certain advance notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (36a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (37a), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. The display of the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 can be visually recognized. After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (38a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 353 is a view gradually showing another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 353 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this example of effect, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains “10:00”. Note that the timer advance notice effect in this production example is a timer advance notice effect indicating that there is a possibility that a pseudo-link is performed as a certain advance notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (6). The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (7) displays the character "open right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (8), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “pseudo run stock” are displayed, and the mission of the mini game is achieved. It is informed that it will take place. As a result, in the timer advance notice relating to the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that when the countdown of the timer display is completed, it is ensured that the pseudo-link as a certain advance notice effect is performed. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started. In this effect example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is started.

  Thereafter, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (10), the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1A) It is shown that the jackpot reliability has improved. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 is stepped up by the success of the mini game. Further, at the lower left of the display screen, the princess character HME as a notice item is displayed, and a notice of anticipation that the pseudo ream is to be performed is made. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the notice item is displayed when the mini game is successful. Note that the timer display in timer advance notice display TM1A is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, the decoration symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, and as shown in FIG. 353 (11), temporary combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even during the finalized display of the symbol, and it is also shown that the princess character HME as the advance notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer advance notice display TM1A and the princess character HME is displayed as the advance notice of the pseudo continuous effect. Note that the timer display in timer advance notice display TM1A is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Note that the timer display in timer advance notice display TM1A is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (14), “06:44” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (15), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "03: 96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (15).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (16), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01: 73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (16).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", and the middle symbol is a replay symbol as a pseudo run symbol. It is shown that the symbol RP is stopped and displayed. After that, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started as described above.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  FIG. 354 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 353. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 354 (1)-the same figure (8) are the same as that of FIG. 353 (1)-the same figure (8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (9), a character of “婆” appears on the right treasure box image BXR and a character of “ひ” is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. . As a result, it is informed that the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1 is a false timer announcement effect. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (10), it is shown that the disappearance animation is started in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that although the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the countdown is started, and it is shown that a certain effect has not been performed.

  After that, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decoration symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol as described above, as shown in FIG. 354 (11). -Temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decor 6". After that, as shown in FIG. 354 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. As described above, in this example of the effect, since the mini game has failed, the prefetch notice by the timer notice display TM1 ends in the middle because it is a fake notice, and as a result, the prefetch notice is not performed. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (16), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 354 (17) Is performed, and then the finalized display is made with the combination of the decorative designs of the "deals 5-dec. 6-dec. 6".

  In this example of presentation, even if the mini game fails and the advance notice by the advance notice by the timer advance effect is a false notice, it may be a big hit in the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice.

  FIG. 355 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 356 shows the step of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 355 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (3) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the period when the mini game is started and the selection operation by the player is received. In this example of effect, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "10:00".

  After that, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, the character “open right” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (8), the face icon BCF of the head of the bancho appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “strong cut-in determined” are displayed, and the mini game mission is achieved. It is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 355 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" causes temporary change A stop is made. At this time, the Bancho face icon BCF is reduced in size and displayed (stocked) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. By the stock of the face icon BCF of the head of the bank, the advance notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 355 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this demonstration example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and it is also shown that the icon BCF of the face of the bancho as a notice item is also displayed. . That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1 and the display of the face icon BCF of the master's face are displayed as a prefetch notice. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (11), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (12), the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda, and becomes the display mode of the advance notice. Although the change of the display mode of the change icon h0 is performed by, for example, the hold change animation, the display mode may be changed by the switching display without the hold change animation being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 355 (13), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept at "10:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (14), “9:95” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (15), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", indicating that a certain effect is not performed. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a timer notice display TM1 which is a false notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The timer advance notice by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice relating to the fact that the pseudo run is performed as a certain advance play, that is, the timer advance display TM1 is erased, so that the pseudo run is realized. It may be recognized that it does not occur. In addition, before the disappearance animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, it is also possible to perform a garbled effect to produce that effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (16) shows that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (19) following FIG. 355 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is informed that the reach state has been reached. Ru. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 356 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (21), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and development to super reach is possible. It has been informed. Here, since the Bancho face icon BCF is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of "SP Evolution" is overlapped with the Bancho face icon BCF, and the Bancho face icon BCF is displayed. It is considered more difficult to see than if not.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 356 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (23), it is shown that the button preview effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (24), as shown in FIG. 356 (25), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that the notice has been made by the face icon BCF of the screen leader displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, it can be said that a state is shown in which the result of the mini game is regarded as a prefetch notice of the notice effect performed in the symbol variation display performed later. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game, and is irrelevant to the timer advance presentation started at the same time. That is, it is shown that only the mini game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is a true preview effect, while the mini game and the timer preview effect are shown to be related.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (27), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (28), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Note that, in this example, when the face icon BCF of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a Big hit symbol is configured to be displayed more clearly than when no is displayed, but it may be lost even if the face icon BCF of the face of the ban appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed It is also good.

  FIG. 357 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 357 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of effect, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is added to the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a certain advance notice effect is displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 357 (4), “0: 24” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display being counted down in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It is suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (5), it is shown that the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (6), the character of "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the panda, and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "previous" are displayed, and it is notified that it is highly likely that the symbol variation display to be started next is a big hit.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 357 (11) After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, the character of "previous" displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 358 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance announcement effect shown in FIG. 357. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 358 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 357 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 357 (3) in that the face icon BCHO of the game title is not added to the timer advance notice display TM1. This suggests that the possibility of displaying a certain advance notice effect is lower than when the face icon BCHO of the head of the game is added.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (4), “0:24” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of the timer display being counted down in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It is suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer advance notice effect may be a pre-reading advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (5), it is shown that the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 358 (6), the character of "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

  However, as shown in FIG. 358 (7), in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed from the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, it is indicated that it is a false timer notice effect that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by timer notice display TM1 is not performed. ing. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is false effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. At this time, the character "Sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 358 (11) Then, as shown in FIG. 358 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, the character of "previous" displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

  FIG. 359 is a view gradually showing another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 359 (1)-the same figure (6) are the same as that of FIG. 341 (1)-the same figure (6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 359 (6), the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (7) shows that the erased timer notice display TM1 is recovered and redisplayed. It is shown. Also, at this time, the face icon BCHO of the Bancho has been added, which suggests that the possibility of displaying a pseudo-train as a certain advance notice effect is high. That is, it is shown that the lost timer notice display TM1 is not the timer notice display TM1 relating to the false timer notice effect but the true timer notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up when the redisplay of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. Also, from another point of view, it can be said that a plurality of timer advance notice effects directed to the same certain effect are performed. Here, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is redisplayed, the execution of a certain advance notice effect (pseudo series) performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be decided. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “pseudo-ha” are displayed again. At the timing shown in FIG. 359 (7), "03:00" is displayed as the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, and it is informed that there is a possibility that pseudo-link will occur in 3 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (8), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (8).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (9), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “01:23” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (9).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (10). After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (11), the character of “continue” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (11).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (12), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and “goes” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM at the timing when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. The character of is displayed, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the number of times the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started by the pseudo ream "2" is displayed.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is started, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the pseudo run is not started. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  FIG. 360 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 shows in succession the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 360 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 337 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “25:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 25 seconds after the countdown is started. This effect example shows a timer advance effect that may cause the strong cut-in image CI1a to be displayed as a certain advance effect. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters “SP development by chance” are displayed, and mission effects are started to show that the development of the super reach dramatically increases the expectation of the big hit. Are also shown. In this rendering example, when the mission is achieved, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain preview rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering is performed. Therefore, there are cases where it can be expected that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (4), “23:00” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . That is, it is shown that two seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (5).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (6), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 360 (8) to FIG. 10 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (10).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (11), it is shown that the strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. Strong Sabohanni group notice is the notice with high reliability of the big hit, and it shifts to super reach with high probability. Therefore, the occurrence of strong Sabohani group announcements may dramatically increase expectations for achieving the mission. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Also, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 (11), the character Saboh of the Sabohani constituting the Sabohani group advance notice overlaps the timer advance notice display TM1, but the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the Sabohani character SAHN. May be Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (11).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (12), while the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, the display of "SP development" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into a super reach. It has been informed. This may recognize that a mission is achieved. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "12: 90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 360 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the sword hero of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed to urge attention to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (13).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. As a result, it is informed that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit and the execution probability of a certain advance effect are improved. Note that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may change (demotion) in the display mode in which the reliability of the big hit or the execution probability of a certain advance effect decreases.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display It is shown changing to TM1B) and stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit has dramatically improved. The timer notice display TM1B of this special display mode is a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit is higher than that of the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode, that is, high when the timer notice display of the special display mode is displayed. The jackpot symbol is more easily determined and displayed than when the timer advance notice display of the reliability display mode is displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display of a special display mode is displayed, it may be considered as a big hit decision. Furthermore, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "4: 32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (15).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16). That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mission being achieved. Furthermore, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, it can be said that, in this effect example, the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 360 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (18), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18), in the decoration symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. 362 (1) to FIG. 9 (9) are the same as FIG. 360 (1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and the transition to the super reach is not performed. It is informed that it is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the super reach is not made. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (11), since the transition to the super reach is not made, it is indicated that the timer announcement effect by the timer announcement display TM1 is a false announcement, and the disappearance animation of the timer announcement display TM1 is started. Be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the notice that the advance notice effect is to be performed is false (gasse). In other words, because the mission was not achieved before the timer announcement display TM1 becomes "00:00", it is erased in the middle of the countdown and it is shown that a certain effect is not performed. it can. The timer advance notice by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice concerning that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, that is, the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. It may be recognized that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is not performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 362 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 362 (13), in the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5 The temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative design of "", and then, as shown in FIG. 362 (14), in the decorative design display device 208, the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" It is displayed by the combination of. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this example of presentation, even if the timer advance presentation is finished without developing into a super reach, there may be a case where a big hit occurs.

  FIG. 363 is a drawing showing the steps of another example of the timer preview effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361. FIG. 364 shows the example of the giving effect shown in FIG. 363 by stages. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 363 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 360 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “5:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, this point is different from the effect shown in FIG. 360 (3). This effect example shows a timer advance effect that may cause the strong cut-in image CI1a to be displayed as a certain advance effect. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters “SP development by chance” are displayed, and mission effects are started to show that the development of the super reach dramatically increases the expectation of the big hit. Are also shown. In this rendering example, when the mission is achieved, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain preview rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering is performed. Therefore, there are cases where it can be expected that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 363 (4) to FIG. 36 (13) are performed. In addition, the effect example shown in FIG. 363 (4) to FIG. 36 (14) is the same as FIG. 360 (4) to FIG. 360 except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM 1 remains unchanged at “5:00”. The description is omitted because it is similar to that of FIG.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the big hit has been dramatically improved. Furthermore, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is not yet started, and remains at "5:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 363 (15).

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 363 (16), “4:11” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. . As described above, the timer advance notice in this presentation example does not start the countdown of the timer display when it is started, but starts the countdown of the timer display when the mission is achieved.

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (17). That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mission being achieved. Furthermore, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, it can be said that, in this effect example, the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (19) following FIG. 363 (18), a state in which temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” It is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 365 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance presentation effect shown in FIG. 363 to FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 365 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 363 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and the transition to the super reach is not performed. It is informed that it is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that transition to the super reach is not made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (11), since transition to the super reach is not made, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the notice that the advance notice effect is to be performed is false (gasse). In other words, it appears that the timer announcement display TM1 is started but the mission is not achieved before the countdown is started, and it is erased before the countdown is started and a certain effect is not performed. It can be said that it is shown. The timer advance notice by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice concerning that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, that is, the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. It may be recognized that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is not performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 365 (13), in the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5 The temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative designs of "", and then, as shown in FIG. 365 (14), in the decorative design display device 208, the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" It is displayed by the combination of. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 366 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361 in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 367 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 366 (1)-the same figure (14) are the same as that of FIG. 360 (1)-the same figure (14), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B) Step up is shown, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit has dramatically improved. Furthermore, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 360 (15) in that the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1B is reset to "5:00". At this time, the countdown of the timer display is not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. As described above, in this presentation example, the change in the display mode of the timer advance notice is made easy to understand by resetting the time in the timer display at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display manner of the timer advance notice is changed. ing. In addition, after the mission has been achieved, while the display to step up the display mode of the timer advance notice display to the display mode with high reliability is performed, it is shown that the timer display on the timer advance notice display is reset to the appropriate time again. It can also be said that

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 366 (16), “4: 32” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. . After that, the effects shown in FIG. 366 (17) to FIG. 367 (20) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 366 (17) to FIG. 367 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 360 (16) to FIG. 361 (19), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 368 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 369 shows in succession the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 368 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 339 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (10), for example, as shown in FIG. 341 (5) and described above, in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed. It is shown that the disappearance animation is being performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 368 (11), not only is the timer advance notice display TM1 not deleted, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “22: 35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is revealed that the animation performed in FIG. 368 (10) is not actually a lost animation but is a timer preview addition animation which is an animation similar to the lost animation. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer notice effect is started using the same timer notice display TM1. Further, in this presentation example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer advance notice display. Note that the animation may be completely different between the timer advance announcement animation and the disappearance animation.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed by the pseudo-link. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (12).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (13), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 368 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (14).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 368 (15) to (17), normal reach is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and “15:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (17).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (18), it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (18).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (19) following FIG. 368 (18), the advance notice of the sabo hani group is continuously performed, and “SP evolution” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It has been reported that it will develop into super reach. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "12: 90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (19).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 369 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “timer attention” are displayed to urge attention to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (20).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (21), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is similar to that of the lost animation described above. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation changing the display mode of the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation canceling the timer advance notice display. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

  After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 369 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is default display. A mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B), and a state of stepping up is shown, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. In addition, the timer preview display TM1B in which the display mode has been changed is added with the face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, a countdown is performed, and "4: 32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (22).

  Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (23). That is, it can be said that the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1B in this presentation example is a timer announcement effect about the strong cut-in image CI1a being displayed as a certain announcement effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (25), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In addition, in this production example, the timer announcement production is performed and the pseudo run is started, furthermore, the timer announcement production is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. The timer advance presentation effect is performed to start the pseudo-link, and further, the timer advance presentation effect may be performed to display the strong cut-in image CI1a or may be lost.

  FIG. 370 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 368 to 369, and FIG. 371 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effects shown in FIG. 370 step by step. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 370 (1)-the same figure (9) are the same as that of FIG. 368 (1)-the same figure (9), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (10), it is shown that the disappearance animation described above is performed to erase the timer announcement display TM1 when the countdown in the timer announcement display TM1 is completed. There is. This lost animation is at least partially the same display mode as the lost animation shown in FIG. 368 (10) and described above. As a result, it may be possible to have an expectation as to whether the timer advance notice display is continuously displayed or deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 370 (11), in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (13), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 370 (15) to FIG. 17 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (18), it is shown that the weak sabothani group advance notice is performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (19) following FIG. 370 (18), the advance notice of the sabo hani group is continuously performed, and “SP evolution” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, It has been reported that it will develop into super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 371 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the hostile face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 369 (20).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (22), a screen is displayed in which the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and the defeated image is displayed, and the central symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 371 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 372 is a drawing showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 372 (1)-the same figure (4) are the same as that of FIG. 341 (1)-the same figure (4), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (5), while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, a timer notice addition animation which is the same effect as the disappearing animation is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is similar to the lost animation. It shows that the effect is displayed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the possibility that the advance notice that the pseudo-link will be performed is a false (notice) advance notice. As a result, the player may be able to cause the timer notice display TM1 to be erased and to be considered as a false notice.

  However, as shown in FIG. 372 (6), not only is the timer advance notice display TM1 not erased, but the timer display in the timer notice advance display TM1 is added, and "20:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is revealed that the animation performed in FIG. 372 (5) is not actually a lost animation but a timer preview addition animation which is an animation similar to the lost animation. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is possible to recognize that another certain effect is performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that the pseudo-link is performed as a certain effect. is there. Further, in this presentation example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same as a part of the animation for deleting the timer advance notice display. Note that the animation may be completely different between the timer advance announcement animation and the disappearance animation.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "Hot me" is displayed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed below the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state is reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and “16:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (9).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the weak sabothani group advance notice is performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "13:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (10).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (11), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may be developed into a super reach. It has been informed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (11).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 372 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continued, and "4:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (12).

  Then, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (13). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice relating to the timer advance notice display TM1 in this production example is a timer advance notice concerning that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a given advance notice.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In addition, in this production example, the timer display addition is performed, the timer advance presentation effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed and there is a case where there is a big hit May be

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (14), the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy player, and the defeated screen is displayed, and the central symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped in the middle symbol "Decoration 6" scheduled to be displayed is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6". As described above, even when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect, there may be a display result of the lost.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 373 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 374 shows the step of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 373 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 373 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing hold of the special view 1 is displayed, and three hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. The three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 The second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 move to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and the display position of the second holding icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are respectively framed in from the left and right of the display screen by frame in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is a default display mode, but the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is a special display mode. The timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side also display "03:00" as a timer display, and a notice is given 3 seconds after the countdown is started. It indicates that the production will be started. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a face icon BCHO of the head of the watch, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed. Further, in each of the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the countdown of the timer display is not started, and both of the timer displays are maintained at "03:00".

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the characters “Hime appearance and strong timer activation” are displayed, and the appearance of the princess character from the treasure box causes an advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. It is notified that the timer announcement effect by the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side which is the display is performed. Note that the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL is moved to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (6), the characters “open right” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "attention" are displayed to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (8), a character BBA of a brow appears from the right treasure box image BXR and a character of “bad brow” is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. ing. Further, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and the navigation character YM also reports that the mission of the mini game has failed. Note that the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "here" are displayed, and the right of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1RB, which is an advantageous timer notice. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the screen is erased is started and the timer notice display TM1RB is deleted. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer announcement of the two timer announcement displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed at least. . Note that both of the two timer announcements TM1L and TM1RB may be erased, and the timer announcement effect relating to any timer announcement may not be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. In addition, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 373 (11), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 373 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even while the symbol is displayed. That is, the timer notice display TM1L is displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. Note that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1L is kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Note that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1L is kept at "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (14), it is shown that the disappearing animation for the timer notice display TM1L is started and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that it is a false (gasse) advance notice in which no advance notice effect is performed for any of the two timer advance notice displays due to a failure in the mini game.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (15) shows that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (16), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (17), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (18), the third stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 374 (19) following FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 374 (20), a finalized display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of "Losing 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Be done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this production example, although the mini game has failed and any timer announcement rendering is terminated halfway and finally the lost symbol is displayed, it may be a big hit.

  FIG. 375 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 373-374, and FIG. 376 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effects shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 375 (1)-the same figure (7) are the same as that of FIG. 373 (1)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “I look forward to it” are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. The effect is different from the effect shown in FIG. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "is a chance" are displayed, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game is successful. Note that the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "here" are displayed, and a timer notice which is not the advantageous timer notice of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1RB. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side as the display is erased is started and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer announcement of the two timer announcement displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, in comparison with the effect shown in FIG. 373 (9), the timer preview effect having a high possibility that a certain effect will be performed is performed, thereby improving the expectation for the certain effect being performed. There are times when you can. It should be noted that both of the two timer announcements TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and the timer announcement effect relating to any timer announcement may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Also, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, and as shown in FIG. 375 (11), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, timer notice display TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. Note that the timer display in timer notification display TM1RB remains "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Note that the timer display in timer notification display TM1RB remains "03:00", and the countdown is not yet started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not erased, and the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (14), "02: 76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues and “01:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (15).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00". It changes, and it becomes a display mode of prefetching. That is, in this example of presentation, an example is shown in which the presentation of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain presentation performed as a result of the timer announcement presentation by the timer announcement display TM1RB. Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of the Sabo Hani after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00", or the first After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is " The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when 00:00 is reached. In addition, the hold icon of the display mode of this Sabo Hani has a higher jackpot reliability than the hold icon of the above-mentioned panda. In addition, when the holding icon of the display mode of the safari is displayed, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the holding icon. That is, it may be an advance notice of jackpot determination.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed, and then the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. . In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (19) subsequent to FIG. 375 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. A temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and then, as shown in FIG. 376 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of “Losing 6 – Decoration 5 – Decoration 5”. Be done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 377 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 375-376, and FIG. 378 is a diagram showing the example of the effects shown in FIG. 377 in a step-by-step manner. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. 377 (1) to FIG. 3 (2) are the same as FIG. 375 (1) to FIG. 2 (2), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB differs in that “18:00” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 375 (3 It is the same as the effect shown in). As described above, by differentiating the time indicated by the timer display between the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which notice effect corresponds to a certain notice effect, and the game is made monotonous. In some cases. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 377 (4) to FIG. 3 (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 377 (4) to FIG. 7 (7) are the time shown by the timer display of the timer notice display TM 1 RB displayed on the right with the effects shown in FIG. 375 (4) to FIG. Are the same except that they are different, so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "I look forward to super" are displayed, and the mini game mission is achieved It is shown. Moreover, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 375 (8) in that it is suggested that a special benefit is given by the character display of "Be super expecting". Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "is a chance" are displayed, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game is successful. Of the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left remains "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right is It is assumed that "18:00" remains, and neither countdown has been started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (9), the characters “two are there” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which is not an advantageous timer notice of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1RB. A timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, which is the timer notice display, is erased is started and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer announcement effect relating to the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer announcement of the two timer announcement displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is not erased, and as a result of the timer display selection animation being performed, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the high-reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), showing that stepping up is shown, and showing that the possibility that a certain effect is performed is improved It is done. Further, in the vicinity of the navi character, the characters “both expected” are displayed, and it is suggested that expectation is given to both of the timer announcements of the two timer announcements TM1LA and TM1RB. It is to be noted that none of the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB have started to count down.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 377 (11), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 377 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the character display displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also erased. Note that, in this effect example, two timer announcements TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even while the symbol is displayed. That is, these timer announcements TM1LA and TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol fluctuation display. Of the timer displays in the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left remains "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right is It is assumed that "18:00" remains, and neither countdown has been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Furthermore, in this effect example, the word “focus on the left” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. It indicates that the countdown will start. The timer display in the two timer advance notices TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started to count down.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (14), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is displayed on the timer notification display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notification displays TM1LA and TM1RB. It is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (14), "02: 76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed, and there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the countdown continues and “01:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (15). There is. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 starts from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes "00:00". It changes to the display mode of Sabohani, and becomes the display mode of prefetching. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1LA displayed on the left side. Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of the Sabo Hani after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1LA becomes “00:00”, or the first After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA is " The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when 00:00 is reached. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased as the countdown is completed. After that, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started to count down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (19) following FIG. 377 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 378 (20) In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 378 (21), a finalized display is made with a combination of decorative symbols of "Losing 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Be done. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Note that, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is displayed over three times of symbol variation display. The timer notice display TM1RB is kept at "18:00", and the countdown is not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (22), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Here, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, that is, the display mode of the safohani. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started counting down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (24), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "reach" is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is not yet started, and "18:00" is maintained.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (26), normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is not yet started, and "18:00" is maintained.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (27), “17:75” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1RB. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (28), it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown is continued, and “14:70” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (28).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (29), while advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed, display of “SP development” is performed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and development to super reach is possible. It has been informed. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continued, and "12: 90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (29).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 378 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the hostile face each other. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “timer attention” are displayed to urge attention to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1RB. In timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continued, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (30).

  Then, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes "0:00", a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (31). That is, in this example of rendering, a certain preview rendering performed as a result of the timer preview rendering relating to the timer preview display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". The timer advance notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (33), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “big five” of “decor 5-decor 5-decor 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer advance effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  In this effect example, a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed, and an example corresponding to another different effect is shown.

  FIG. 379 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 380 shows the steps of an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 379 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 373 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (6), the characters “open right” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Further, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “effect activation” is displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and thereby, it is notified that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (9), a countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is informed that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed to urge attention to a change in display mode of the hold icon. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (10).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00". And the display mode of prefetching. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode after the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", or the second After the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold at the timing when “00:00” becomes “00:00”. As described above, in this effect example, the display of the timer notice display TM1 is first started, and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. Then, if the result of the mini game is a success, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and thereafter, the countdown is completed (that is, at "00:00") at a certain timing. It can be said that a pending change presentation as a presentation is being performed. In addition, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above-described one. For example, after the mini game is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 is started and the timer advance notice in the timer advance notice display TM1 starts to count down. The result of the mini game may be derived, and if the result of the mini game is success, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased as the countdown is completed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "button hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has been changed to the button hold display mode.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 379 (13), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 379 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5—decoration 7—decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. The display mode of the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold, does not change, and the display mode of the button hold is kept.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (15), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (16) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the word "hold change chance" is displayed together with the face icon of the Bancho, and it is shown that the mini game by the lottery is started. And, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the field of Amida and is positioned in the middle of the three options. In addition, the character of "Select" is displayed below the field, and it is prompted to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon BCHO of the Bancho. . Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "Do your best" are displayed, showing that the player is encouraged.

  Thereafter, after the mini game based on the lottery is started, it is shown in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (17) that a new timer advance notice effect is started. In this example of effect, the timer informing effect is started by the frame in animation causing a new timer informing display TM1N to be framed in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1N is a default display mode. “05:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1N, which indicates that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1N is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (18), “04: 77” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N. .

  After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (19) following FIG. 379 (18) displays the middle of three options in the field. The Bancho face icon BCHO, which was located at, moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is continued, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (19).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three options in the field is selected, if the operation effective period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. The production is started. At this time, at the three end points of the field, one of “push” for which the button hold operation effect is started and “x” indicating failure are respectively displayed. Specifically, "Push" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "Press" is displayed at the right end point. ing. Note that the number of "push" displayed may be one, or "push" may be displayed at all the end points. Also at this time, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1N, and "03: 88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (20).

  Thereafter, the bancho face icon BCHO moves on the line along the rules of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 380 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the bancho face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of has been reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this production example, it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "Press" is displayed, and the mission is successful, and the operation presentation of button hold is started It is informed that the thing was decided. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continued, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (21).

  As shown in FIG. 380 (22), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00" in response to the result of the mini game, the first hold icon h11 of the button hold display mode is It is notified that the character "press" is added and the operation effect of the button hold is started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yoshaa" are displayed to congratulate the player. It should be noted that after the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, the character “push” may be added to the first hold icon h11, or “press” to the first hold icon h11. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1N may be "00:00" after the letter "" is added, or the first hold at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00" The character “push” may be added to the icon h11. Thus, in this example of rendering, it is shown that a plurality of timer preview effects are performed, and as a result, certain preview effects to be performed are performed on the same holding icon.

  FIG. 380 (23) shows that the operation effective period relating to the operation effect of the button hold is started when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, and the decoration symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the timer advance notice display TM1N is not erased, and when the button is pressed, the characters “hold change” are displayed, and the game is described.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 380 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the button hold to the display mode of the Sabohani In addition, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the characters "super heat hold" are displayed, and it is informed that the first hold icon h11 has become the display mode of high reliability. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “next hot ze” are displayed, which suggests that the expectation for becoming a big hit in the next symbol variation display is high.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance effect is performed and the operation effect of the button on hold is started, the symbol is more than the case where the timer advance effect is performed and the operation effect on the button on hold is not started. In the variable display (the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon for button hold), the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 380 (25), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" causes temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation. A stop is made. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 380 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 381 is a view showing the steps of another example of the effect following FIG. 379 (18). In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (19a) following FIG. 379 (18), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho is positioned on the right side of the three options in the field. There is. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is continued, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (19a).

  Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three options in the field is selected, if the operation effective period elapses, the timing shown in FIG. 381 (20a) The production is started. At this time, “x” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end, and “push” is displayed at the right end. . Also at this time, the countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1N, and "03: 88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (20a).

  Thereafter, the bancho face icon BCHO moves on the line along the rules of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 381 (21a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the bancho face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of has been reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this production example, it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, and the mission fails, and the button hold operation presentation is not started Is notified. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continued, and “00:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (21a).

  As shown in FIG. 381 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearing animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the operation presentation of the button hold as a result of the timer advance presentation is not performed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in timer notice display TM1N, it is informed that the notice that the operation effect of the button hold is performed is a notice of false (Gasse). In other words, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00", and that a certain effect (a button hold operation effect) is not performed. it can.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (23a) shows that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (24a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (25a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the button hold to the default display mode. That is, in this presentation example, since the mini game has failed, it is shown that the button presentation operation presentation is not performed, and the non-delivery has ended. In addition, when the operation effect of the button hold is not performed and is ended without failure, it is likely to be lost in the symbol variation display based on the hold of the target of the button hold, but it may be a big hit.

  After that, the decoration symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, and as shown in FIG. 381 (26a), temporary combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 381 (27a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 382 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 379 to FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 382 (1)-the same figure (7) are the same as that of FIG. 379 (1)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (8), a character of “婆” is displayed from the right treasure box image BXR and the character “Uhihi” is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. . In addition, the character "Sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and thereby, it is informed that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 is false timer advance notice effect. Note that the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is kept at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (9), it is shown that the disappearing animation is started in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that although the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the countdown is started, and it is shown that a certain effect has not been performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (10) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 382 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" causes temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (13), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and becomes a look-ahead display mode. In this effect example, the result of the mini game is a failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a notice effect is not changed by the timer advance effect, but the display mode of the hold icon is not caused by the timer advance effect. Even if the result of the mini game is a failure, the result of the presentation (the hold icon changes to a hold icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as described above with reference to FIGS. 379 to 380, as a result of the success of the mini game, the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the success of the mini game, as shown in FIG. Although it has been made to be more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the display mode of the pending icon has failed but changed, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 382 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" causes temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation. A stop is made. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “next hot ze” is displayed, which suggests that the possibility of becoming a big hit in the symbol variation display performed next is high. After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 383 is a view gradually showing another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 383 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 373 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (3), it is shown that a timer advance notice effect has been started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this example of the effect, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character showing a bancho character and a display showing the appearance of the "1" on the dice are displayed. An indication “hold change if out” is displayed, and it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes when the number “1” of the dice is stopped after the mini game is started. In this mini game, the result is derived without the operation of the effect button 136 being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (5), it is shown that the symbol of the dice starts variable display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 383 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the outcome of “3”, indicating that it did not become the outcome of the mission achievement. ing. Further, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed to notify that the mini game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, it is informed that the advance notice that a certain advance notice effect is performed is a false (Gasse) advance notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased before starting the countdown, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 383 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 receives the result of the mini game, and the disappearing animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is shown to be erased. ing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (8) shows that the timer notice display TM1N has been completely erased.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 383 (9), temporary combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 7-decorative 7" A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 383 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In this example, although the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, the result may be derived by the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game, in this case When a result is derived by the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game, a certain advance effect may be performed rather than the case where the result is derived without the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game. May be high, or the jackpot may be highly reliable.

  FIG. 384 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 384 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 384 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing hold of the special view 1 is displayed, and three hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. The three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this presentation example, a 7-segment display device SEG consisting of 4 segments of 7 segments is shown. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full color LED for each segment, and is configured to emit light in full color for each segment. Also, although the 7-segment display device SEG is provided, for example, on the front frame door 106, it may be provided on the door 108 with a ball storage tray or the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 384 (1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 The second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 move to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and the display position of the second holding icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice is started by the frame advance in of the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen due to the frame in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. “03:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. The timer advance notice display is also started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "0300" is displayed in the white light emission mode.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (5). The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (6), the characters “open right” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both kept "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “effect activation” is displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. In addition, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and thereby, it is notified that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (9), a countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. Also, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is simultaneously started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 384 (9), “02:75” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and “0275” is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that timer preview rendering is performed by a plurality of devices. Here, when the timer advance presentation by a plurality of devices is simultaneously performed, a certain effect may be more easily started than when the timer advance presentation by one timer advance display is performed, and a big hit is relied upon. The degree may be high.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is informed that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed to urge attention to a change in display mode of the hold icon. In timer notification display TM1 and 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown continues, and “01:75” is displayed in timer notification display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (10). “0175” is displayed on the segment display device SEG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 384 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". The display mode is changed from the button display mode to the button display mode, and the display mode is a prefetch mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG. . The display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode after the timer display on the timer preliminary display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00" after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 is from the default display mode to the display mode of the button hold at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. It may change. In this example, two timer notices are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. However, the timer notification is displayed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. There may be cases where In this case, when the timer advance notice is displayed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect is always provided, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG When the timer advance notice display is performed only in any one of the above, a case may be made that a certain advance notice effect is not performed. In addition, the timer advance notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the reliability of the big hit may be increased as the number of the timer advance notice display is displayed. For example, if there is one timer advance notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is easily displayed as a certain advance notice effect, and if there are two timer notice indications, the strong cut-in image CI1a is given as a certain advance notice effect. If the timer advance notice display is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a certain advance notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is also completed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "button hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has been changed to the button hold display mode.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  FIG. 385 is a view showing in steps the other example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 387 is a diagram step by step illustrating an example of the effect shown in FIG. 386. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since FIG. 385 (1)-the same figure (2) are the same as that of FIG. 384 (1)-the same figure (2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (3), a state after the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame in animation and the timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a default display mode, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (3), "09: 75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In this effect example, the time set in the timer advance notice display TM1 is, for example, "10:00". Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer advance notice display has not been started, and is turned off.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this demonstration example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left and right of the center of the display area, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR Are displayed side by side and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with cross key" are displayed, and navigation display is performed by moving the cursor CSL by operating the operation key unit 137 to select a treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed with the countdown continuing, and “09:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (4).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (5). The right treasure box image BXR is shown surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed with the countdown continuing, and "06:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (5). At this time, the timer advance notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "3000" is displayed in the red light emission mode. Here, when the light emission mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed as compared to the white case, a certain advance notice effect is more easily started. In this example of rendering, the timer advance notice by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a prefetch notice, and the target of the notice effect is different from that of the timer advance notice by the timer notice display TM1.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game has passed, in the decorative symbol display unit 208 shown in FIG. It is reported that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box to be opened. In the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued and “04: 03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (7), the effect is started as a result of the mini game, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed at the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is selected. It is erased. In the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character of “effect activation” is displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. It is done. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed, which notifies that a certain advance notice effect to be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started. . In the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (9), it is shown that the variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (9), "02: 75" is displayed. On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (10), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is informed that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “focus on hold” are displayed to urge attention to a change in display mode of the hold icon. In the timer display in timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00". It changes, and it becomes a display mode of prefetching. That is, in the example of the effect, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1.

  As described above, in this example, when the timer advance notice is performed and the effect of the change in display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer advance effect is performed and the change in the display mode of the hold icon is started The jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. In addition, it is suggested that the character of "Hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the symbol variation display performed next.

  After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 386 (13) following FIG. A temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the display of characters displayed near the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are also erased. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (15), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variation icon display area The move icon is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

  Thereafter, the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (16), “2978” is displayed for the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG. ing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (17) shows that the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small at the upper center. Specifically, the word "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the face icon of the Bancho, and it is shown that a mini-game based on the lottery is being started. Then, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the field of Amida and is positioned on the right side of the three options. In addition, the character of "Select" is displayed below the field, and it is prompted to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon BCHO of the Bancho. . In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continued, and "2833" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2580" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (18).

  After that, when the player operates the operation key unit 137 and the left side of the three options in the field is selected, when the operation effective period elapses, the effect of the lottery is started. At this time, one of “o” indicating success and “x” indicating failure is displayed at the three end points of the field, respectively. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the middle end, and "o" is displayed at the right end. ing. In addition, the display number of "(circle)" may be 2 or more, and "(circle)" may be displayed on all the end points. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (19), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho moves on the line along the rule of the lottery. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continued and “2411” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (19).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (20), it is shown that the face icon BCHO of the master's face has reached the right end point of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by the lottery is derived. In this rendering example, the icon of Bach's face BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where "o" is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "I did it" is displayed, and the mission is successful. It is informed that it is decided that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2236" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (20).

  Thereafter, the mini game is ended, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (21), variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of “super-rapid standby” are displayed, and it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2185" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (21).

  After that, “decoration 5” is sequentially stopped and displayed in order of the left pattern and the right pattern, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. "Reach" is displayed on the screen, and it is informed that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2005" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (22).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a strong sabothani group advance notice is performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variation icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and “1927” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (23).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (24), the advance notice of the sabothani group is continuously performed. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from the red display mode to the rainbow display mode which changes from multiple colors. In the timer display of the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than the timer display of the red display mode, and a certain effect is easily started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed, or a certain effect may always be started. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and “1737” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (24).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 387 (25) following FIG. 386 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the hero and the sword player of the enemy character confront Be done. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and “1010” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (25).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (26), the button continuous hitting effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "0500" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (26). Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during execution of the button continuous hitting effect. Although this strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed corresponding to success as a result of the mini-game by Amidakuji, the strongest cut-in image CI1v that is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a is shown in this presentation example. It is displayed, and it is reported that the expectation of the big hit is rising dramatically. Also at this time, the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is performed with the countdown continuing, and “0200” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (27).

  After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "0000", in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the premier notice is being made. Thus, the player is informed that the big hit has been decided. As described above, in this effect example, certain notice effects targeted for the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG differ from each other. Is shown. Further, in this example, although the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is performed in one symbol fluctuation display from the start to the end, the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is the symbol fluctuation twice. It is shown that it is carried out across the display. The target symbol fluctuation display may be different between the timer announcement effect by the timer announcement display TM1 and the timer announcement effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Also, the timer advance notice effect may be performed across the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game. Further, in this example of presentation, as a result of the timer advance announcement by the 7-segment display device SEG being performed, a premier announcement as an advance announcement is made, but an announcement with low reliability of the jackpot which is not an advance announcement is made A false timer announcement effect to be performed may be performed. Also, a false timer announcement effect may be performed in which a certain advance announcement effect is not performed.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance notice is performed and the premier notice is performed, the symbol fluctuation display (the pattern change is made than when the timer advance effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. In the display) jackpot symbols are easy to be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments in order to congratulate the player from becoming a big hit. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed to notify that a premier notice has been made.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (30), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Yatteze” are displayed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happiness 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

  FIG. 388 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a big hit game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 388 (1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 387 (31), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5" continues. It is shown that the display is finalized by.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (2), it is shown that a big hit game is started and a big hit start effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decorative 5" which is a big hit symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a copanda character with a fan is celebrating the big hit at the center of the display screen The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, multi-color display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments in order to improve the decorative effect in the big hit game. At this time, a special effect display may be performed by the 7-segment display device SEG. For example, “7777” may be displayed, or a number string of matching words may be displayed. Such a display may be performed, for example, to give notice of a holding unit where a big hit occurs in the hold, or giving notice that it will be a definite change state after the big hit game is over.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (3) shows that the third round has been started. Then, on the right side of the copanda character, the characters “LED attention” are displayed, suggesting that a notice effect is performed.

  Then, in FIG. 388 (4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off, and then, as shown in FIG. , Mini game is started. In this mini game, it is possible to display the result according to the gaming state after the big hit game, and when the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the definite change state (special figure high probability common figure high probability state), As a result of continuously hitting the button 136, there may be an effect that the mini game succeeds by breaking the clothes of the Bancho. In addition, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for accepting button continuous hit effects is displayed. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, “1000” is displayed, and it is informed that continuous hitting of the effect button 136 for 10 seconds can be received after the countdown (operation effective period) starts. This timer display starts counting down when the operation valid period starts in the fourth round. In addition, although the display mode of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, it may be a mode in which light is emitted in another color, for example It may be different. Also, for example, a timer display (for example, display of a combination of specific numbers such as "9999" and "7777") is performed instead of "1000" indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation valid period. In this case, there may be a premier notice that always succeeds in the mini game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (6), a state of shifting to the fourth round is shown. In the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "continuous hit" along with the button image 136a, and urges continuous hit of the effect button 136. In addition, an operation effective period for receiving the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display in the 7-segment display device SEG is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 388 (6), “0800” is displayed, and it is shown that two seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. As described above, in this effect example, the timer display may function as a timer advance effect, and it is shown that the timer advance effect and the mini game are started at the same time. The timer advance notice effect and the mini game may not be started at the same time.

  FIG. 388 (7) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is "0500", and it is informed that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (8), the characters “Sorry” and “Next time short” are displayed, showing that the mini game has failed. Thereby, it is notified that it does not shift to a definite change state, but shifts to a time saving state (special figure low probability spread figure high probability state) after the end of the said big hit game.

  FIGS. 388 (5a) to 8 (8a) show another example of effect following FIG. 388 (4). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (5a) shows that the mini game described above is started. In this effect example, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that the possibility of success in the mini game is high. In addition, when the mini game is started, a timer ("1000") is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for receiving a button continuous hit effect is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 388 (6a) to FIG. (7a) are performed. In addition, since FIG. 388 (6a)-the same figure (7a) are the same as that of FIG. 388 (6)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (8a), the clothes of the character of the bancho are torn, and the letters “bancho awakening” and “next definite change” are displayed, showing that the mini game is successful. Thereby, it is notified that it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the said big hit game.

  FIG. 389 is a view showing in stages the display example when the error display is displayed in the timer advance presentation executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (1), the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 389 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 389 is a special figure low probability general view low probability state, and the reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 The hold icon representing is displayed. Two reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area, and the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both in the default display mode (round pattern And a white display mode). On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

  Also, in this example of the effect, an error display of "Please remove the ball" (lower tray full error indicator ERR1) is performed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lower tray full error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error notification is performed. When it is detected that the error notification is targeted for the error (for example, when the lower plate full detection switch is turned off and the lower plate full error disappears), the lower plate full error display ERR1 Is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. It will be displayed as Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (2), the lower plate full error is not resolved, and the lower plate full error display ERR1 is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by frame in animation, the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (3), the bottom plate full error has not been resolved yet, and the bottom plate full error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower right error display ERR1, and the visibility of the timer advance notice display TM1 is lowered. Therefore, the player may hurry to remove the ball of the lower plate by viewing this display state.

  Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (4), "04: 25" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. . In addition, near the navigation character YM, the characters "Make pseudo run" are displayed, and as a result of the timer display being counted down on the timer notice display TM, it is suggested that pseudo run may be performed. There is. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (4), the bottom plate error has not been resolved yet, the bottom plate error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the bottom plate error display ERR1. It is done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (5), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "03: 96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (5). Also, even at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (5), the bottom plate error has not been resolved yet, the bottom plate error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the bottom plate error display ERR1. It is done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (6), the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues and “01: 73” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6). At the timing shown in FIG. 389 (6), since the player has removed the ball of the lower plate, the lower plate full error is eliminated and the lower plate full error display ERR1 is erased. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (7) to (12) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 389 (7) to FIG. 12 (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 339 (7) to FIG.

  In the timer announcement effect described above, although the time until a certain effect is displayed is displayed by the countdown of the timer display, for example, when performing the timer announcement effect, the timer display in the timer announcement display is Start from 00:00 ", for example, display such as" may change on hold at "03:00" "or" strong cut-in occurs at "25:00" "and count up timer display A certain effect may be configured to be performed when the designated time is reached.

  Also, in the timer advance presentation described above, although there has been described as an example the pending change presentation, the pseudo continuous presentation, the display of the cut-in image, and the big hit decision notification as a certain presentation, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be an effect of entering into a specific zone of, an insertion of a movie, an announcement effect of next time, or the like.

  Further, in the timer announcement effect described above, the expectation of the big hit is changed by changing the color of the timer announcement display, and in this case, for example, red> green> yellow> blue> white in order If the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer advance notice is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be determined. In addition, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect may be performed without fail. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is blue and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, it has an expectation of a big hit because of blue <white. If the color of the timer advance notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is a big hit. You may increase the reliability of

  Also, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the big hit design is more than the case where the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. There may be a case where the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved by the combination of the color of the timer advance notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG. In addition, the color of the timer advance notice display in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the luminous color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be ranked, and the sum of the ranks may be compared to determine the big hit reliability, for example When the rank of white is 1, the rank of yellow is 3, and the rank of red is 5, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white, and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer advance notice is not displayed and the timer display is performed only on the 7-segment display device SEG than in the case (the former), and in the case where the light emission color is red (the latter), the latter Of the jackpot may be made more reliable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 390, an example of a display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect is started will be described. Here, FIG. 390 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the timer advance notice display.

  FIG. 390 (a) shows an example in which “7: 77” is displayed as the timer display of the timer preview display TM1 when the timer preview effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a combination of a big hit decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (a) starts the timer notice effect. When it is displayed, it can be used as a premier timer display, as a notice that will be a big hit. Also, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (a) is displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the “humpback of“ decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”may be displayed as a notice that is derived Also, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that the hold sequence will occur.

  FIG. 390 (b) shows an example in which "99: 99" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. In the embodiment described above, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is set to a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol, but at least the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (b) The time is longer than the time from the start of display to the stop display of the symbol, and it is a time during which it is recognized that the countdown is not completed while it is fluctuating. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice for becoming a big hit. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  Also, although the timer display shown in FIG. 390 (b) is the largest numerical value that can be represented by a decimal number, as shown in FIG. 390 (c), the largest numerical value that can be represented by a hexadecimal number is displayed. You may do so. Also in this case, the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 390 (b) may be expected.

  FIG. 390 (d) shows an example in which "7: 58" is displayed as the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 when the timer advance notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of the word alignment of "Nagoya", which is the prefectural office location in Aichi Prefecture, and is displayed when the timer preview display TM1 shown in FIG. Can be used as a premier timer display, as a big hit finalization announcement. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  Also, FIG. 390 (e) is a timer display (“2: 23”) reminiscent of the word alignment of “Mt. Fuji”, which is the highest mountain in Japan, and this also causes the timer shown in FIG. 390 (d) to be displayed. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed when the timer notice effect is started, “0” is displayed for all the digits less than one second, but the above-mentioned premiere The timer display is characterized in that a digit of less than one second is also displayed. Note that the timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above, and various ones can be adopted as appropriate.

  FIG. 390 (f) shows an example in which "hit" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may be able to easily recognize that a big hit has been confirmed. When the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (f) is displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice of becoming a big hit. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  FIG. 390 (g) shows a timer notice display TM1 of a display mode that may be changed when the timer notice effect is started or may be changed during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (g) is a rainbow display mode that is displayed while changing to multicolor, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that becomes a big hit decision. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence. In addition, the display mode employable as a premier timer display is not limited to this, It can set to an appropriate color.

  FIG. 390 (h) shows a timer notice display TM1 of a display mode that may be displayed when the timer notice effect is started or may be displayed during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (h) is a display mode in which the character SAHN of Sabohani is added to the four corners, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that becomes a big hit decision. In addition, the character to add is not limited to this, It can set arbitrarily. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice of deciding to shift to a definite change after the end of the big hit game, or a notice of occurrence of a hold sequence.

  In addition, although the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display the timer display within the rectangular frame, it is also possible to display the timer notice display TM1 of display modes having different frame shapes as the premier timer display. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in a mode in which the timer display is displayed within a circular frame may be set as the premier timer display.

  In addition, although the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display listed above may start counting down after starting the display, the timer advance notice effect may be ended without performing the count down. In the middle of the countdown, the jackpot symbol may be determined and displayed, and the timer announcement effect may be ended. In addition, when the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, even if the countdown of the timer display is completed, a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mini game in which the timer announcement effect is true or false is described according to the derivation result, but the mini game applies to any timer announcement effect described above. Can.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 424. In addition, the effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

  391 to FIG. 424 are diagrams showing in stages the modified examples of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 391 to 424, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Moreover, in FIG. 391-FIG. 424, the example which arranged three decorative symbol display apparatuses side by side in a row is shown. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. In the present embodiment, an example in which various images are displayed on each of a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is shown, but all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 391 to 424, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut of a pattern that imitates a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, in FIGS. 391 to 424, the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 are shown, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special view 1 has a square shape. In the variable display of FIG. 1, it blinks, and in the stop display of the special view 1, it lights in the lighting mode of the lost or the lighting mode of the big hit. Also, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the lighting mode of the lost during the stop display of the special figure 2 Or it lights in the lighting mode of the big hit. Moreover, in FIG. 391-FIG. 424, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the presentation buttons 136 and 136z is shown.

  FIG. 391 is a view showing in stages an example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 391 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a fluctuation icon is at the center The h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 391 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all default display modes (white circular display modes). In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the grandchild character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as the tutorial display, a description on the appearing character, a description on a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, you may be comprised so that alerting | reporting of a big hit expectation degree is possible by the display mode (For example, displaying in blue character, displaying in red, etc.) of tutorial display. In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the display being described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this presentation example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 is displayed in priority during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the decorative symbol, but may overlap the display region of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that constitutes the hold icon display area, the variation icon display area, and the tutorial display section TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen to display the stage name and reach name currently being used. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 391 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, an acceptance number display 850 indicating the number of acceptances of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 391 (a), the acceptance count display 850 of the "0 times after" character string image is displayed, and the acceptance count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, below the acceptance number display 850, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 391 (a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. The character of this lord is sometimes called a navigation character. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed. Also, the stage name display unit ST1 or the character may be a display included in the Ui unit UI3, or may be configured such that at least a part thereof is displayed overlapping the front side of the UI unit UI3.

  In addition, a family crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 391 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. That is, the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (display of “under preparation”) is performed in place of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be an in-provision image preview display to be displayed before the display of the in-preparation image RDY described later is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed also when the preliminary display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and the big hit expectation may be configured to be different depending on the display mode of the shutter image. It may be configured such that it does not show the jackpot expectation by itself.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (d), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the in-provision image RDY in which the characters “in preparation” are displayed. In other words, the in-provision image RDY is displayed superimposed on the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 391 (d), the background color of the image under preparation RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d) is the default display mode. . Note that the in-preparation image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the in-provision image RDY starts. After the display is started in the default display mode, the display mode may be changed to another display mode. Further, in the case of the configuration in which the above-described shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY may be associated with the display mode. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red in-provision image RDY may be displayed (probable). In this example of presentation, by displaying the image RDY being prepared, there is a case where a certain presentation (for example, a timer advance notice, a mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is changing from the blue display mode to the gold display mode. In this rendering example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to a gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 of this gold-colored display mode functions as a prefetch notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and not as a notice of a change of the display mode of the hold icon, but as a direct prefetch notice display. You may have to. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to become the default mode before the hold icon (the hold icon to be prefetched) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of success or failure of the prefetch change May be configured to be the default mode after the display indicating (for example, the display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1 with the preparing image RDY displayed, so that the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be noticed There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first pending icon h11, and the first one It is shown that the hold icon h11 of has been hit. At this time, due to the effect EF4, the entire first reserved icon h11 is covered, and it is considered to be in a more difficult visual condition than in a state where it is not covered by the effect EF4. Note that this effect EF 4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 391 (g), the effect EF 4 is placed next to the first hold icon h A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the on-hold change animation performed before the on-hold icon changes functions as the on-hold change advance effect display. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be included in the hold change advance effect display, that is, a series of animation from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change of the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change advance presentation display. In addition, the pending change advance effect display may be performed only by displaying the ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change advance effect display. In addition, even if the hold change animation is performed, the display mode of the hold icon may not change. In addition, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be started after the effect display on the ninja character NJ4. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may not be displayed to cause the image RDY to appear. Also, the arrangement may be such that the ready image RDY appears more easily when there is a pending icon displayed in the pre-reading mode than when there is no pending icon. According to this configuration, a state in which the holding icon changes after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is expected to appear in the preparation of the image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 displays a different type of advance notice (hold It may function as advance notification of an icon change and an object such as an image under preparation RDY, or an object change such as an advance notice and an advance notice.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (h) shows that the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state where the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 391 (h) is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the family crest 224E may emit light in red after the first reserved icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or after the crest 224E emits light in red, the first one The hold icon h11 may start to display in the red display mode, or the family crest 224E may emit light in red at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts to display in the red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 391 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the on-hold change animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". Although the combination of the decoration patterns of this "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of losing, it is also a combination of chance eyes. That is, the advance notice is given by the derivation display of the combination of chances. Although the chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode, the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be In addition, when the chance eye is displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, stop display of the decorative symbol may be sequentially performed, or after the sequential stop display of the decorative symbol is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be deleted. In addition, sequential stop display of the decorative symbol may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown to FIG. 391 (i), you may make it erase | eliminate the fluctuation icon h0 at the timing when the symbol was decidedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 391 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the display of the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11, respectively. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (j), variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, it can be said that the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (k), it is shown that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is considered to be a swing fluctuation, and the middle symbol is displayed at a high speed. The display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI unit UI3 performs the process until the super reach is started. It is designed not to be hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 391 (l) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the image RDY being prepared. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Note that the movement of the household object 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the household crest 224E is started, The movement of the household object 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this presentation example, when transitioning to a specific super reach, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, and the UI unit UI3 may be hidden when at least the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, since the peripheral frame is not displayed when the image under preparation RDY is not displayed, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden in this case. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach is different depending on whether or not the image in preparation RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY during preparation is not configured to make it possible to identify an aspect of a certain advance notice or an effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even if the game is shifted to the sword reach.

  In FIG. 391 (m), it is shown that the swordsman reach has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of only the image RDY being prepared is maintained, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out with the UI unit UI3. That is, the image under preparation RDY has the same display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after the non-display. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the sword strike, or the kana reach may begin after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest 224E. Swordsman reach may be started at the timing when it returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped to the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped to the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that notification is given that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and also that display before the start of a certain advance notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that the display of the effect EF5 has started a certain preliminary display itself. Furthermore, in this example of presentation, the image under preparation RDY can be said to end (become non-displayed) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. Although this mini game is an example of the notice display started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, the mini game may be started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made. In this example of rendering, the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the mini game is started, but the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started. In addition, for example, the characters “iron plate” may be displayed without the mini game or the timer advance notice effect being displayed, or the result of the success or failure judgment may be displayed suddenly. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The target TGT is composed of four divided areas, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the example shown in FIG. 391 (o)) is the area of the hit. By hitting an arrow in the area of the hit, it is possible to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions. Further, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of mini games and timer announcements, a type of mini game or timer announcement may be configured to always go through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini-game or timer advance notice may be configured (configuration 2) not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (p), it is shown that an arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice. The display indicating the result of the mini game may be displayed as a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. 391 (p). Note that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. The display of "iron plate" in the case where a certain advance notice display is a mini game may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (q), the character "iron plate" is displayed on a square background, and an iron plate image TP inclined about 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction is displayed . This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this presentation example, it is possible to say that the advance notice display corresponding to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, the other advance notice display corresponding to the result of the advance notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Also, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, another advance notice may be displayed in the one cushion after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 (for example, the countdown is completed). (Including the start of another notice display immediately before the

  FIG. 392 is a view sequentially showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that at least one of the plurality of other examples may be provided, and conversely, at least one example may not be provided. The same applies to the following figures.

  FIG. 392 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). In the description of this embodiment, although it is illustrated as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 391, the effect may be an effect performed in another scene, or an effect performed only as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 391 It is also good. The same applies to the following figures. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 392 (a1) to FIG. 39 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG. 39 (o), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (a4), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the miniature character MC1 of the domino is deviated from the target TGT and flew to an area different from the target TGT. That is, the situation in which the mini game as the advance notice has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the sword strike is being performed continuously. In this effect example, in the case of only the difference between the failure of the mini game and the success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game is successful. In addition, instead of the mini game, a timer advance notice may be performed. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice that nothing is displayed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the characters "chance" are displayed small somewhere, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 392 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 391 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 392 (b1) to the same figure (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 391 (m) to the same figure (o), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (b4), the arrow thrown by the mini-character MC1 of the tombstone hits the target TGT, but a state of being stuck in the non-hit area is shown. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of "chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this demonstration example, in the comparison of whether the mini game was a success or a great success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed finally in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. .

  FIG. 392 (c1) is also a presentation following FIG. 391 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 392 (c1) to the same figure (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 391 (m) to the same figure (n), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (c3), there is a state where a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY is being displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is also an example of the advance notice that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the mini game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is configured to be more successful when it is started than the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started. The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be easier to succeed. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is started than when the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol with the character of “iron plate” is derived, and it is shown that the mini game is very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and it is shown that the notice effect of the big hit determination is performed.

  In addition, although the mini game was performed in the effect shown in FIG. 391 compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 391, in the effect example shown in FIG. 392, a timer notice effect may be performed, and vice versa . In addition, both timer announcement effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time for counting down may be different.

  FIG. 393 is a view sequentially showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 393 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 391 (m), the image under preparation RDY is not displayed. In FIG. 393 (a1), the variation icon h0 is in the red display mode, and accordingly, the family crest 224E is also in the red light emission mode.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a2) shows that the mini game is started. In this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a3), it is shown that an arrow released by a domino mini character MC1 is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, an example is shown where the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be performed not only during the super reach, but also may be configured to be executable during the super reach or not. In addition, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain advance display (a certain effect) is performed across the first state to the second state. It is also good. In addition, a certain advance notice (a certain effect) to be performed after the third display ends in the first state may cross the next change. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain advance notice (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

  FIG. 393 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 393 (b1) to FIG. 3 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b3), in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed, it is shown that not the mini game but the timer preview effect is started. This timer advance notice effect is also an example of the advance notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 393 (b3), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00". Here, the effects shown in FIG. 337 to FIG. 390 can be appropriately combined as another example of the timer announcement effect. It should be noted that the big hit symbol may eventually be displayed more clearly when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. If the game is started, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed. Note that the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after the timer becomes “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down) , And is configured to perform an iron plate image TP), but after “0:00” indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, “iron plate”) is displayed in the display area in which the timer display is performed. Such as a display that can identify a certain effect display, or a display related to a certain effect display such as a “chance”, and then in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed. You may comprise so that presentation of effects (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Also, although the timer advance notice effect in this embodiment is configured to be displayed until "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down, it is displayed up to "1" indicating 1 second, or , "00: 01" may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display capable of specifying a certain effect display such as “iron plate”, or “chance”) in the display area where the timer display was performed. After performing a display related to a certain effect display), an effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of “1”, may be up to immediately before another effect display is displayed, or may be up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from when the "1" is displayed to when the display of another effect display is started is the same as the time from when the "2" is displayed to when the display of "1" is started (almost the same) It may be different (that is, displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”). When a pseudo run symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing “NEXT” or “continue” may be displayed as another effect display. Also, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is displayed immediately after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, other displays are displayed after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished. The timer display is displayed after the display (for example, a display showing that the timer display is counting up from 0 or a display related to the timer display like “after next chance up”) is displayed. It may be configured such that no other display is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b4), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, the timer advance notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In each of the effect examples shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 393 (c1) to FIG. 3 (c3) are effects following FIG. 393 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer announcement effect shown in FIG. 393 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area other than the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode changes in such a manner that the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes gradually shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the numbers in the timer display and the display in other display modes other than the numbers. First, only the decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds. In this case, the decrease speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. Also, two or more remaining time display meters with different remaining times may be provided, and each may be displayed with a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters with the same remaining time but different lengths. You may display it. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different advance notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Also, two or more remaining time display meters of the same length may be provided, and their reduction rates may be different.

  Further, in this presentation example, presentation may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance presentation presentation is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number of 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Also, the length of the meter may differ depending on the time of timer advance notice. In addition, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant, for example, may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and although the length of a certain meter may be long, for example, as a result of the decrease speed becoming faster from the middle, it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the rate of decrease of the meter does not have to be equal. For example, the decrease rate may be faster or slower in the state in which the numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 394 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 394 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 391 (m), the image under preparation RDY is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 394 (a2) to FIG. 3 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. A pair of translucent button images 136 q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a button effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136 q informs that the button image 136 a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started by uniting. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button preview effect. The pair of translucent button images 136 q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example of rendering, an example in which two translucent button images 136q are merged has been described, for example, a rendering in which four translucent button images 136q are merged may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are used. The button image 136a is materialized and button preview effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the image 136q is performed You may Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet. In addition, even when a deceased button image 136aL to be described later is displayed and a button preview effect is started, united animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or a translucent button image corresponding to the deceased button image 136aL Coalescing animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (a5), a state in which the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity is shown.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 394 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started. When the button preview effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is received, and an animation showing that the button image 136a is pressed is displayed with a character of "Press", and further, the remaining button image 136a The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation effective period. Note that the button preview effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button preview effect is started.

  FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6) show modifications of the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b5). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 394 (b1) to FIG. 3 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 393 (b1) to FIG. 3 (b3), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 394 (b4) shows that the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect. In addition, even if the timer announcement effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the countdown of the timer display may be started according to the start of the combined animation. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to easily specify the notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared while the combined animation is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (b5), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the united animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" at the timing when the united animation is completed.

  FIG. 394 (b6) shows a state in which the combined animation is successful, the decalo button image 136aL is materialized, a button preview effect is started, and an operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca-button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer preview effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer preview effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, for example, an iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 394 (c1) is a modified example of the effects shown in FIG. 394 (b3) to FIG. 3 (b6). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 394 (c1) to FIG. 3 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 394 (b3) to FIG. 394 (b4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 394 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q is overlapped by the effect EF6, and it is more The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 394 (c4), a button advance notice effect by the deca-button image 136aL is started. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 394 (c4) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 394 (b6), the detailed description will be omitted.

  Thus, the presentation example shown in FIG. 394 is also shown for the example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of the super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared is ended and the timer advance notice is started while the introduced animation is displayed.

  FIG. 395 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 395 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit UI3. In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 395 (a). The image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is more likely to finally display the jackpot symbol than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 395 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 395 (a), “jotown” is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest product 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped to the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped to the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of the display of the image RDY being prepared is started. As described above, it can be said that this presentation example shows that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished except for super reach.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (c), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started on the tutorial display section TT1 (that is, the area where the image RDY is being displayed) ing. When the timer advance presentation is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 395 (c), "90:00" is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this example of presentation, it is shown that timer advance presentation is started before developing into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time as "90:00", and it can be inferred that the symbol variation display time is long, and a sense of expectation for a big hit may be improved. As described above, in this effect example, a relatively short time such as "10:00" is displayed when the displayed time of the timer display is displayed in a long time (long time) such as "90:00". Finally, the big hit symbol is configured to be more easily displayed than when displayed in (short time). Further, in this rendering example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is easily started to be long time in the timer preview rendering. Further, in this example of presentation, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 395 (d) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered that the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to be recognized by the family crest 224E being overlapped. In addition, the family crest item 224E also overlaps with a part of the timer notice display in the countdown display of the timer display. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

  FIG. 395 (e) shows a state in which the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Also here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395 (f), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. In this example of effect, the background color of the timer advance notice display is red, and the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may be the same in the case where the timer advance notice display is the default background color and the case where it is the red background color.

  FIG. 395 (g) shows that the combined animation is successful, the deka button image 136aL is materialized, and the button preview effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed, and the operation reception state is started. There is. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it will be for a big hit.

  FIG. 396 is a view showing the step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 396 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 396 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image under preparation RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (a1). The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 396 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 396 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped to the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped to the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The dynamic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hitting area, and hitting the hitting area with an arrow hits the big hit reliability. High notices are to be made. In this presentation example, it is shown that a mini game is being played prior to transition to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a4), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a5), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the fluctuation icon h0. It is shown that the preliminary announcement by is ranked up. In addition, the family crest 224E emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. It should be noted that after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family character 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest 224E may emit red light. After changing to the aspect or the golden light emission mode, the change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the timing when the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode The family crest item 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the displayed display of the mini game is shifted to the state in which the shutter image can not be visually recognized. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change after the closing operation by the shutter image starts. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Moreover, although the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game in this presentation example, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a6), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a7), a state in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state where no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another preview display, a timer preview display, or a mini game may be started. In addition, display may be performed to gray out after the shutter image is released.

  Subsequently, an example showing a state where the mini game is started without displaying the image under preparation RDY will be described with reference to FIGS. 396 (b1) to (b8).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in red, and is displayed in advance. In addition, the hold icon h11 is a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the temple”, and the relationship between the panda character and the temple character is described. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 396 (b1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is made non-display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b3), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini game preview display to be displayed before the display of the mini game described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this effect example, the mini game is shown to be started instead of the explanation display which has been performed until now. It can also be said that a mini game is shown starting without displaying the image RDY being prepared. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 396 (b4) to FIG. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 396 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 396 (a3) to (a7), and thus the description thereof is omitted. In addition, after the mini game is over, the explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or the gray out display may be performed.

  FIG. 397 shows, in stages, a display example in the tutorial display section TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 397 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 397 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 397 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 397 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 397 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 397 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (preliminary display) is performed instead of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) . Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a3), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before notice display displayed before a notice display to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, not the image RDY under preparation nor the mini game or the timer advance notice effect, but the notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” is displayed. The notice display of the "super heat" may be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer announcement effect being performed than when displayed without the mini game or the timer announcement effect. Good. Further, the notice display of the "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before performing the advance display such as “superheat”.

  FIG. 397 (b1) to FIG. 3 (b8) show an example of effect showing how the advance notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 397 (b1) to FIG. 3 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 397 (a1) to FIG. 3 (a3), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, it is shown that a timer notice icon I81 for timer notice appears for notifying that timer notice effect will be performed when the shutter image is released. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect will be performed. Note that another notice icon may appear, for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 81 or 135 (d) may appear.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out of the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b7), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the timer preview icon I81 is kept displayed, and it is notified that the timer preview icon I81 is stocked. Alternatively, they may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the image RDY being prepared. At the timing shown in FIG. 397 (b8), the image under preparation RDY is set as the default display mode. The preparation image RDY is displayed by the timer notice icon I81 being stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance presentation is notified by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the display mode of the image RDY in preparation for notifying of the start of the timer preview effect and the display mode of the image in preparation for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but are different You may In addition, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  FIG. 398 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timings of a certain advance notice display, and the start and end timings of a certain effect are different states among the states into which the second state is subdivided. It may be good or in the same state.

  FIG. 398 (a1) shows an effect following FIG. 391 (l). In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 392 (a1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 391 (m), description is abbreviate | omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 398 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into a super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a2), animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a3), the main character of the main character wins over the swordsman of the enemy character, The combination of the decoration patterns of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "is derived and the fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that a big hit is made is made. In order to congratulate the player from becoming a big hit, the family crest 224E, the eight generations character 224Fa and the generals character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode in which light is emitted in multiple colors.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is made more difficult to recognize than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a6), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is informed that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. Note that the display of the characters "Go" may be performed or may not be performed.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a8) shows that the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the big hit symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. A button image 136a of an aspect may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. In addition, even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (a9), the combination of the decoration patterns of the big hit of the "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" It is changed to the combination of the decoration design of, and it is informed that the definite variation big hit is decided. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  FIGS. 398 (b1) to (b4) show that the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance presentation is started while the animation of the duel scene in the super reach is continued.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b1) shows that animation of the duel scene continues. At this time, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b1), “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display as a timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. In addition, the time when countdown is started may be before developing into super reach, may be after developing into super reach, or may be the timing when developed into super reach, reach It may be before the transition to the state, or may be after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b2), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. . That is, it is shown that the final judge effect is started. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down due to the timer advance production during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. Here, the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 is longer between the length of the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length at which the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is performed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display still continues, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol promotion effect will be performed thereafter. In this example of effect, even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00". This is because, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the resurrection effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Also, conversely, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be zero.

  FIG. 399 is a view showing in stages an example of timer preview effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 399 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 397 (a1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (b), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared is shown. In this preparation example, only one type of display mode is prepared for the image under preparation RDY, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this presentation example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain advance notice and a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain advance notice and a certain effect are to be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (c), it is shown that the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. . In this rendering example, one of a plurality of background colors in the timer advance notice display is selected, and the background color indicates the reliability of the big hit. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 399 (c), the background color of the timer advance notice is blue, which is an aspect with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Before or after the timer countdown starts, the background color of the timer advance notice may change, and an effect may be performed such that the reliability is improved halfway.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, after the timer display becomes "0:00", it may be in the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the timer display may become "0:00", or the timer display is " It may be in the reach state at the timing when it becomes 0:00 ". In this example of presentation, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a correspondence relationship with the display showing that it will be developed into the super reach, and it will always be developed into the super reach.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (e), instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, the character "Go" is displayed, and a certain advance notice is displayed. It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Note that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be in the non-display state after the button preview effect is started, or the button preview effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is in the non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button preview effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, an effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be exhibited.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 399 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has been successful, and the process shifts to super reach (sword reach) as shown in FIG. 399 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  In FIG. 399 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out with the UI unit UI3. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (k), it is shown that a cut-in image HCI of a princess is displayed. The princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without passing through the button announcement effect, the timer announcement effect, or the mini game, and the reliability is low. However, the button announcement effect or the timer announcement effect or It may be displayed as a result of the mini game being played. Moreover, it may change to the cut-in image HCI of a princess, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 400 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 400 (a) to (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 399 (a) to (c), so the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 400 (d), it is shown that an animation in which a character of a lord as a navy character is throwing a bomb is being performed. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "It's still." This bomb is displayed on the first decorative symbol display from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb travels to the tutorial display section TT1 in which the timer display is being counted down and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display section TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (e), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the ready image RDY is displayed again. When this timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is "10:00", and the timing at which the button advance notice effect is started is notified, but that timer notice effect is interrupted. It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button preview effect. It should be noted that the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed when the interruption presentation of the timer advance announcement production by the navigation character is performed than when the interruption presentation of the timer announcement production by the navigation character is not performed. It should be noted that if the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, the time of the timer display is increased and the time until the countup is extended is extended. Good, and the countdown speed may be slower. Also, for example, the timer advance notice has the advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, and that is why it is possible to know the future by the end timing of the image RDY under preparation There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 400 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has been successful, and the process shifts to super reach (sword reach) as shown in FIG. 400 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide.

  In FIG. 400 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (k), the image in preparation RDY is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is resumed. Specifically, the timer notice display after resumption is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Further, in FIG. 400 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). In addition, start timing of timer notice production is taken as appropriate timing, for example, before start of super reach, after start of super reach, before reach state, after reach state, after super reach start Also, the timing may be started before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance presentation effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and for example, may be started from "9:00" indicating the time of interruption.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the advance notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 399, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice production is not the development to the super reach, and as a result of the timer notice production being extended, the cut-in image displayed during the super reach As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this example of the effect, the countdown is “0:00” at a good place in the super reach, and an example in which a good effect is performed is shown. In addition, as the end timing (the start timing of a certain advance notice display) of the image RDY being prepared is later in a certain fluctuation, the expectation of the big hit is higher.

  FIG. 401 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 401 (a) is the same as that in FIG. 399 (a), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (b), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared is shown. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image under preparation RDY is displayed, and it is shown that the timer announcement effect is performed twice. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image RDY being prepared, or may be displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It may be assumed that it will be performed once, but actually it will be performed twice. Here, instead of the display of “TIMER × 2”, for example, two in-provision images RDY may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (c), it is shown that the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. . The background color of the timer preview is blue, which is an aspect of low reliability. Here, the default display mode of the timer advance notice may be green. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is informed that the first timer announcement effect has been digested and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by the display of the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In addition, the display of "TIMER × 2" may be displayed without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of under-provisioning displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display regarding the under-provisioning display is once hidden after the first under-provisioning display ends.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (e), instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, the character "Go" is displayed, and a certain advance notice is displayed. It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may seem that there is no stock of the timer advance notice effect. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer announcement effect is started, but when the in-provision image RDY is displayed again, the first in-provision image RDY is displayed. Is displayed larger than when it is displayed. Therefore, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 or the decorative symbol may be overlapped by the image RDY during preparation. As described above, there may be an effect of causing more attention by temporarily non-displaying the image RDY during preparation and further overlapping.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and as shown in FIG. 401 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, super reach shift Display takes place and develops into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). In addition, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged preparation image RDY, and is considered to be less visible than the state where it is not overlapped by the family crest 224E. Note that the image under preparation RDY may be overlapped with the family crest 224E only when enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when not enlarged. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  In FIG. 401 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. In addition, since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. In this way, the prepared image RDY enlarged and displayed may also be displayed during execution of the super reach. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (k), it is shown that the in-provision image RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is improved. Further, in FIG. 401 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "3:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). Further, in this example of the effect, the size of the timer advance notice display is the same size as the size of the ready image RDY displayed in the enlarged view, and when the timer advance notice display is displayed in the enlarged view, the big hit The symbol is easily displayed. In addition, when the background color of the timer advance notice display is gold, the display may be always enlarged. In addition, even if the background color of the timer advance notice display is a color other than gold, the display may be enlarged. Further, in this rendering example, the background color of the second timer preview rendering is higher in reliability than the first timer preview rendering, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the time displayed on the timer may be longer in the second timer announcement effect than in the first timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by being notified in advance that the timer advance effect is performed twice.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the number of clothes under preparation RDY is displayed, when one under preparation picture RDY is digested, all the preparation under image RDY is displayed on the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

  FIG. 402 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 402 (a1) to FIG. 402 (a2) are the same as those in FIG. 398 (a1) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a3), it is shown that the long press effect by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, an area in which a character of Tonosama is drawn is arranged at the upper side, an area in which a character of swordsman is drawn is arranged at the lower side. The size of both areas is displayed so as to relatively fluctuate. The image RDY is being displayed even when the long-press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a4), it is shown that acceptance of the long press operation by the long press effect is started. That is, it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started. In this long press effect, although the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Also, in FIG. 402 (a4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "5:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this example of presentation, the operation valid period and the time of the countdown of the timer display coincide with each other. Note that they do not have to match completely. Note that the timer advance notice may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the play button 136 may be started after the timer advance effect is started, The timer announcement effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 402 (a5) shows that the player performs a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a5), the timer display in the timer advance display is "4:00".

  FIG. 402 (a6) shows that the player continues to perform the long press operation of the effect button 136. At this time, in the long-press effect display, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and the area in which the character of the sword superior placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Is shown to be dominant. It is suggested that this is likely to be an advantageous result. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a6), the timer display in the timer advance display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a7), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is finished, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed in the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Moreover, in the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn further expands, and the area where the character of the sword master placed below is drawn smaller accordingly. It is shown that your character is by far the dominant. Note that the long press effect may be ended after the “Go” character is displayed, or the “Go” character may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, “Go The long press effect may be ended at the timing when the character of “is displayed. Also, the operation effective period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, or the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, “Go The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character of “is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a8), the characters "one blow" are displayed, and the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button preview effect is started. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance presentation effect can be said to be an example of button operation presentation performed subsequently to the long press presentation. In other words, it can be said that an example in which a plurality of (types) button effects are continuously performed is shown. Here, the operation effective period to be set may be set again after the operation effective period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously to the operation effective period in the long press effect May be

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a10), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy character. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. At this time, the family crest item 224E, the eight generation character item 224Fa and the general character item 224Fb emit light in the light emission mode of the rainbow so as to congratulate being a big hit.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, the preparation display ends with the long press part and the countdown of the timer display is started, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or at the end of the long press part “0:00” is given, and an example is shown in which the button effect to be performed in the next part is good.

  In FIG. 402 (b1) to FIG. (B5), it is shown that the long press effect is performed in the sword strike, but the timer advance effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that a long press operation is being performed. In this example of presentation, timer advance presentation is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 402 (b2), the long-press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long-press, a character in the upper position is drawn The area is reduced, and the area where the sword character placed below is drawn is enlarged, and it is shown that the Tonosama character is inferior (the character of the enemy character is dominated by the sword sword). . It is suggested that this is unlikely to be an advantageous result.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b3), the character of “one blow” is displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. It is shown that the operation has been started and the operation effective period has been set again. As described above, when the timer announcement effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca-button image 136aL is difficult to be displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is easily displayed. When the long-press effect is performed and the timer advance effect is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative patterns of the lost 5-decoration "4" is derived to start the fluctuation. In addition, it may be a flow which may be a case where it does not go through a mini game or a timer advance notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 403 is a view showing in stages an example of button continuous hitting effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 403 (a), "Panda is a master of the temple" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (a), the button continuous hit production is started, and the explanation of "Please turn the meter to MAX in time by the button continuous hit" is performed. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged vertically is displayed on the left side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (a), it is before the start of reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation effective period, and the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of "prepare" displayed above the button image 136a corresponds to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button continuous hit effects). It should be noted that, when the button continuous hit effect is started, the decorative symbol which has been variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 403 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 403 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (b), it is shown that the reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has been started. Specifically, the character "ready" displayed above the button image 136a switches to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation valid period is started. And the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button continuous hit effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed to decrease in accordance with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (c), "5" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the end of the operation effective period is 5 seconds. Since a certain advance notice effect may be performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it is possible to say that the effect of the countdown display by the countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

  FIG. 403 (d) shows that the player has started the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (d), "4" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it is four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 403 (e), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, one memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is red according to the number of times of the continuous hitting operation. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (e), "3" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it will be three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 403 (f), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (f), "1" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 403 (g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes “0”, and the operation valid period is over, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is finished. The memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red in three modes, that is, it indicates that the button continuous hit effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, it may be switched from red to white at the end of the operation effective period, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button continuous hit production fails, "Sorry ..." is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (h), and it is notified that the button continuous hit production has failed. In addition, in this demonstration example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown indication effect other than the timer advance notice, a certain advance notice display may not include this countdown indication display.

  FIG. 404 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 404 (a), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 404 (a). The function of the first preparing image RDY is similar to that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 404 (a) is in the default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this rendering example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and a plurality of preparing images are simultaneously displayed. For the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2, corresponding effects (timer announcement effect, mini game, etc.) are performed. Note that these in-provision images (the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2) all function as pre-reading notices. In addition, the background color of all the images in preparation is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be simultaneously started to be displayed, or one may be started to be displayed after the other is started to be displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 404 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 404 (b) shows that the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 404 (a) is ended and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It is placed on the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon is displayed and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon that was at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal Do. In addition, the fluctuation display of the decoration design is started. It should be noted that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (c), the first in-provision image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "5:00", and it is informed that there is a possibility that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this rendering example, when one of the plurality of in-provision images is activated (digested) to start rendering, all the other in-provision images are also digested. In addition, although the image in preparation is completely digested in one symbol fluctuation display, the advance notice icon may be carried over and displayed until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display.

  In FIG. 404 (d), the timer display in the timer preliminary display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is “0:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 404 (e), the word "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer advance notice corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 was displayed, and the timer advance effect related to this timer notice is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding advance notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (f), the characters "Go" are erased together with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward and moves to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 391 (f) is changed. It may be a character. In this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may be started after the leading start previewing effect is started, or the leading start previewing effect may be started after the image moving animation in preparation is started, The in-provision image moving animation may start at the timing when the preceding start preview effect starts. The ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 404 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2 but may overlap the second preparing image RDY2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a thuriken toward the fluctuating icon h0 and shows that it hit the fluctuating icon h0. It is done. At this time, the whole of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the visual recognition state is set as compared with the state where the fluctuation icon h0 is not covered by the effect EF4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (h), as a result of the on-hold change animation being performed, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change advance notice is started.

  In FIG. 404 (i), after “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state, transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the second ready image RDY2. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of presentation, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In FIG. 404 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (k), it is shown that the second under-provisioning image RDY2 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. The timer notice is displayed as a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Also, in FIG. 404 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display is a default display mode at the start of display and may be promoted display such as changing to a golden background color after start of display (for example, after the countdown is started). It is also good.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer preview effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the preview display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain preview display. In this example of presentation, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 405 is a view showing in stages an example of effects according to the explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 405 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 391 (a), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 405 (a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 shows that “Panda is the master of the lord” is changed to “the lord is the Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when switching the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1, the above-described opening and closing display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed. In this effect example, it is shown that, in the symbol variation display of one, when switching the explanation display, the switching display between the explanation display is performed without performing the open / close display by the shutter image.

  FIGS. 405 (b1) to (b3) show how opening and closing display is performed by the shutter image when switching the explanation display. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 405 (b1) to the same figure (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 391 (a) to the same figure (b), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 405 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "donately is Yatsushiro general" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preliminary display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. By performing such an effect, it was expected that the advance notice display would be started, but by making the player disappointing that the advance notice display was not started and the explanation display was carried out, the shutter image was opened and closed. There are times when it can be made to have expectations.

  FIG. 406 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIGS. 406 (a1) to (a3) show another example of effects following FIG. 391 (e). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 406 (a1) to the same figure (a2) are the same as the example of the effects shown in FIG. 391 (f) to the same figure (g), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 406 (a3), it is shown that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged from the default display mode although the effect EF4 is erased. . As described above, even when the on-hold change animation described above with reference to FIG. 391 is performed, a failure effect may be performed in which the display mode does not change. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may differ depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

  Although the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI unit UI3 in the above-mentioned change-on-hold animation, for example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI unit UI3 to display the UI. It may be made not to overlap the part UI3. In this case, in the on-hold change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI unit UI3.

  FIG. 407 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 407 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 407 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 407 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 407 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the roulette board RR formed in a circular shape is divided into three equal parts. An area of a rose is arranged above the three sections, an area of a princess is arranged at the lower left, and an area of a small princess is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each of the areas in red, and a notice display corresponding to the area which is finally lit in red is prepared. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display in which the in-provision display and the like end may be the same or different. In addition, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol fluctuation display in which the symbol display is performed may be the same as the symbol fluctuation display in which the UW display etc. is finished. It may be. According to the combination described above, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a3), it is shown that all areas are lit in red as a result of the fluctuation display of the roulette effect. That is, it has been notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the advance notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character are respectively prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a4), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the display of the image in preparation is accompanied, the character is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Little Princess moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner portion of the third preparation image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a6), it is shown that an animation is being performed in which the character CHM of Princess Little is throwing an object toward the variation icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is the notice display due to the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a8), display in a mode in which the eyelid character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 disposed adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the character of “superheat” is derived, suggesting that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is performed by deriving the character of "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not the effect of changing the display mode of something, but the effect of giving a big hit advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a11), display in a mode in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is started. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to be overlapped on the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a12), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown is started. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 407 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 and notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the display of “Go” described above and shown in FIG. 404 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a14), super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into super reach (sword reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the character HME of the princess corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Also, although not shown, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moreover, in this example of presentation, the background color of the super reach transition display is set to gold, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of super reach, for example, iron plate image TP is displayed A mini game to be played or timer announcement effect may be performed.

  FIG. 407 (b1) shows that in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 407 (a2), only the region of the eyebrow of the three regions is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character, only the notice display corresponding to the whale character is prepared. It has been informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (b2), the third in-provision image RDY3 is displayed in such a manner that the dark blue character GII is adjacent. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only the mini game by the drum DRM is played.

  FIG. 408 is a view showing the step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 408 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a3), but “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen The third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the black character GII is adjacent, and two tiny princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. In the case where a plurality of effects are prepared by the insult character GII and the princess character HME, for example, two same characters can be displayed on one in-progress image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, one first in-provision image RDY1 is displayed, and two princess characters HME can be displayed. Conversely, a single character may display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a3), the character CHM1 of one of the two princess princess characters moves upward and moves to the lower left corner of the third preparation image RDY3. An overlap is shown. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display among the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a4), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM1 of Princess Little is thrown toward the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display by the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Little Princess is started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a6), the character CHM2 of the other Little Princess of the two Little Princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3 It is shown that parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a7), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM2 of Princess Little is thrown toward the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi is notified that the preliminary display by the fluctuation icon is ranked up.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red advance notice to the display mode of the gold advance notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIGS. 408 (b1) to (b4) show another example of effect following FIG. 408 (a3). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 408 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 408 (a4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of the little princess reaches the change icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen turns dark. Is performed, and the portion where the effect EF 7 is displayed glows white, and a display in which light is extended in the horizontal direction from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily made non-displayed due to the darkening of the display screen. You may In addition, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only a part of images in preparation is temporarily hidden. You may Thus, the state in which the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. Then, in this presentation example, the first state in which the hold icon is displayed with the UI unit UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is not displayed with the UI unit UI3 is the first state. The state may be changed to the fourth state, and the first state may be changed to the second state, or the first state may be changed to the second state. The first state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the second state may be set.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF 7 was displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  After that, when dark display is finished, as shown in FIG. 408 (b4), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 408 (b4) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 408 (a5), the description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 408 (c1) to (c3) show another example of effect following FIG. 407 (a6). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 408 (c1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 407 (a7), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (c2), the display in a mode in which the indigo character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparation image RDY3 is displayed, “Go” is displayed. The characters are displayed to notify that the mini game is to be started. Note that the display of “Go” may be started after the キ ャ ラ ク タ character GII starts to vibrate, or the G character GII may start to vibrate after the display of “Go” is started, The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the scarlet character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to approximately the center of the display screen, and the effect by the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this example of effect, it is shown that the area in which the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area in which the image under preparation is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after the "Go" display is made may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without the "Go" display. . In addition, the case where the mini game is enlarged may be more likely to be a big hit if the mini game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image under preparation to the start of the mini game, timer advance notice effect, etc. may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain advance display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the places where the first display and the second display are performed are different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand There is a case to play the effect.

  FIG. 409 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the effect display on the left side is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the effect display on the right side is performed may be different display devices. In that case, a third display (some notice display) may be made on the display device 2 in some cases.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 409 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 409 (a). In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 409 (a) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two on the left and right, and the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, the display of “Chibi princess is participating in SP reach participation in annihilation” is performed, and the Chibi princess has a mission of having Chibi princess to annihilate a large number of minions performed, and the right notice In the display area CUR, a display of "To win the victory in SP reach participation" is performed, and drinking comparison is performed between the coffin and the coffin, and the comparision of drinking is performed with a mission that the cowards win the drinking comparison. In this production example, the construction is such that transition to super reach is achieved when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Princess Musou rendering and the mission in the drinking and the rendering is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. It is done. It should be noted that after the Chibi princess musou rendition is started, the drinking and comparing performance may be started, or after the drinking comparison rendition is started, the Chibi princess and musk reversion may be started, and both of the renditions are started at the same time It may be done. Further, in this example of production, if at least one of the mission in the Chibi-Himeka Musou effect and the mission in the performance compared to the drink is achieved, it may be made a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during execution of both the Chibi princess insane effect and the drink comparison effect. There is. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (d), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the character of “chance” is displayed in the left notice display area CUL in which Chibi Princess Musou rendition is performed is displayed Thus, it is reported that the mission in the little princess princess musou rendition corresponding to the area where the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed is facilitated to be achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area where the image RDY being displayed is displayed does not match the area where the advance display is performed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and improve interest. . The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right notice display area CUR in which the effects are compared compared to drinking, or the chance is raised in both the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed because the mini game has ended.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (f), it is shown that the child is completely eliminated in the little princess princess musou rendition displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL, and the mission is achieved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (g), the letter “Annihilation” is displayed in the left notice display area CUL together with the indication of Princess Chibi up, and the mission in the Chibi Princess incomparable effect is achieved Is reported. In the right advance notice display area CUR, effects are continued compared to drinking.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (h), it is shown that the master has won the eyebrows and the mission has been achieved in the compared effect displayed in the right advance notice display area CUR.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (i), the character of "winning" is displayed together with the display of the close-up in the right advance notice display area CUR, and it is informed that the mission in the drinking comparison effect is achieved. It is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (j), it is shown that the sword strike is started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this example, since the mission in the drink comparison production is achieved, the swordsman reach is started, and since the mission in the Chibi princess musou rendition is achieved, the Chibi princess has appeared as a friend of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the comparition to drink is achieved and the mission in Chibi princess musou rendition fails, it will shift to swordsman reach, but the chibi princess will not appear, the mission in chibi princess musou rendition will be achieved and the comparition will be compared If you fail in the mission in, transition to Super reach for Chibi princess. That is, in this rendition, the contents of rendition to be developed thereafter differ depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess, in which the characters "chance" and the princess character are displayed, is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is improved, but it is not the high reliability, not the notice display started from the mini game started from the image RDY under preparation or the timer notice effect. ing.

  FIG. 410 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect shown in FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 410 (a)-the same figure (b) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 409 (a)-the same figure (b), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (c), a state is shown in which both the Chibi princess incomparable effect and the drink compared with the effect are performed. In this presentation example, the display of the image RDY being prepared continues, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice display corresponding to the image in preparation RDY is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 410 (c) to FIG. (E). In FIG. 410E, the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 410 (f) to FIG. 410 (j) are performed. It is to be noted that the effects shown in FIG. 410 (f) to FIG. 410 (j) are that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 for the effects shown in FIG. 409 (f) to FIG. The description is omitted because it is the same except for the above.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends, and the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared It is notified that it is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (m), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, an iron plate image TP is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high advance notice.

  FIG. 411 is a diagram showing the step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 411 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 407 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a2), “reach when caught” is displayed, and it is shown that a chasing effect is started, which is a mission that you have to catch Echigoya. There is. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (a1) (main display) Is displayed. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a3), a state is shown in which the lord is closing the distance to Echigoya. On the other hand, in the subwindow WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a4), it is shown that the lord has caught Echigoya and the mission has been achieved. Thereby, it is notified that it will be reach. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that preparation for the reach occurrence is in progress. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the advance notice is generated by stocking the advance notice corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a5), the chase effect is finished, and the main display displayed in the subwindow WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the "decoration 4" reaches a reach. The situation is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase presentation. When the main display is displayed on the full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display is full screen display, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  FIGS. 411 (b1) to 411 (b2) show another effect example regarding the display of the sub-window during execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 411 (a1) to 411 (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 411 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 411 (b1). In the upper left portion of the display screen, a third preparing image RDY3 is displayed. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 411 (b1) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (b2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display (main display) related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (b1) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chase effect) is performed. Although the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions not overlapping in this example, the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3. It may be made to overlap.

  FIGS. 411 (c1) to (c2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 411 (b1) to (b2). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 411 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 411 (b1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (c2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (c1) (main display) Is displayed. In this example, the third preparing image RDY3 of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the sub window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub window WP3, and the first in-provision image RDY1 displayed in the position displayed so far is erased.

  FIG. 411 (d1) to FIG. 411 (d2) show the display mode of the image in preparation when the background display is displayed in an inclined manner. In addition, since the example of an effect shown to FIG. 411 (d1) is the same as the example of an effect shown to FIG. 409 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (d2), a shake vision effect is performed in which the background display is reduced to about 3/4 and the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display.

  FIG. 412 is a diagram showing in stages an example of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 412 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 407 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted and displayed is shown. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a3), it is shown that a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take strikes in the bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a4), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a5), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a6), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  FIG. 412 (b 1) to FIG. 412 (b 8) describe another example of effect of the step-up notice. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 412 (b1) to FIG. 412 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 412 (a1) to (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB is lifted from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and lifts the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is displayed in the same way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this presentation example, the mission is more likely to be successful if the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than on the mini game played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the mini game is successful in the second step up display unit SUB than when the mini game is successful in the first step up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b4), it is shown that a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, in the mini game display area, a message of "CUP IN" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is performed. That is, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b5), it is shown that the character of the lord put on and the golf ball moves toward the cup.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started . It should be noted that the image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is notified that the jackpot reliability is high.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, although the bowling chance game and the golf game have been described as being successful, for example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins did not fall down is displayed to notify of a mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a message indicating that the player did not cup in may be displayed to notify of a mission failure. Also, in this example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but another character may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appeared It may indicate that the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case.

  FIG. 413 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 413 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 412 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3 and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted and displayed is shown. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, something in the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. The explanation display may be deleted after the display of the first step-up display unit SUA starts, or the display of the first step-up display unit SUA may be started after the explanation display is deleted. The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step up display unit SUA starts display. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 413 (a3) to FIG. 413 (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 413 (a3) to (a5) are the effects shown in FIGS. 412 (a3) to (a5) and the instruction display is not performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and The same is true except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a6), the situation in which the mission is achieved is continuously shown.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the change icon h0 remain non-display.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a8), it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is redisplayed in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice and is redisplayed. Alternatively, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed before the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes and is redisplayed, and a mini game, timer advance notice effect, or the like may be made.

  FIGS. 413 (b1) to (b3) show other display modes of the step-up notice effect. Although the effect shown in FIG. 413 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 413 (a1), it differs in that four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (b2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed despite the movement of the hold icon h11 to the upper side of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, it overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. Is shown. That is, it can be said that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain display (pending icon h11) is not moved is shown even if the UI unit UI3 is moved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L of FIG. 413 (b3), it is shown that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 414 is a diagram showing the step-by-step another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 414 (a), one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 414 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 414 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (a), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 414 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 414 (b) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (c) shows that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 414 (d) to FIG. 414 (f), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not framed out with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 414 (f).

  In FIG. 414 (g), it is shown that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (i) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (j), it is shown that the character of the tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (k), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (l), the in-preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started Be done. Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, FIG. 414 (l) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and frames out. At this time, the image under preparation RDY is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 414 (m), at least one of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed until the frame out is completed. It is considered that the department is difficult to see.

  FIG. 415 is a view showing the step-by-step another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 415 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 415 (a1). In the first preparation image RDY1, the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 415 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a1), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 415 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 415 (a2) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a3), it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 415 (a4) to FIG. (A6), the UI unit UI3 performs a frame out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first preparation image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 415 (a6), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with the display position lowered. As for the first preparing image RDY 1, the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  In FIG. 415 (a7), it is shown that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can. Further, the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparation image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be moved up, and the first preparation image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a9) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first preparing image RDY 1 and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a10), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels to ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a11), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started Is notified. That is, when a new in-progress image is displayed when a certain number of in-provision images are displayed in a certain area, the new in-progress image is displayed in another area. Can. The third in-provision image RDY3 has a green background color, which is a default display mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 415 (a12) to FIG. (A13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and goes out of the frame.

  FIGS. 415 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. FIG. 415 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 415 (a3). Moreover, since the effects shown in FIG. 411 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 415 (a4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (b2), it is shown that the sword strike is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this presentation example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered. That is, it is shown that even when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 416 is a diagram showing in stages an example of a pseudo-simulation effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 416 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 416 (a1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 416 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, “decoration 6” in the left symbol and “decoration 7” in the right symbol. It is shown that the display is stopped. In addition, the middle symbol is in the display of variation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a3), the variation speed of the middle symbol is low, and it is shown that the pseudo-connected symbol composed of the pattern of Tonosama scrolls in from above the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a4), a state is shown in which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a5), a pseudo run symbol stop animation for producing whether or not to start a pseudo run is started. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variation icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI unit FO animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this example of rendering, the UI unit UI3 is shown as non-displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo rendering rendition or when pseudo rendering is established. When the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo run symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 416 (a5) to (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a6), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded and overlaps with the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a7), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo run pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of the dummy run pattern is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. In addition, the pseudo run pattern is overlapped also with stage name indicator ST1 which is indicated in 2nd decoration symbol display device 208M, acceptance frequency indication 850 and stock button picture 852, furthermore, 3rd decoration symbol display device It is also overlapped with the character of the lady displayed on 208N and the second number of reservations display. Also, at this time, the family crest 224E starts to rise, and overlaps a part of the pseudo-series symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 416 (a8), the family crest 224E is rotated, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Don", and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is to be performed.

  FIG. 416 (a9) shows that the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends and the pseudo run symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and that the UI unit UI3 is frame-in with frame in animation (UI unit FI animation). It is done. Note that the UI unit FI animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the UI unit FI animation may be started before the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo run symbol stop The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, as for the decorative design, it is temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation with the combination of the decorative design of “decoration 6-pseudo consecutive design-decoration 7”, after that, fluctuation indication of the decoration design of the second time by the pseudo ream is started Ru.

  FIGS. 416 (b1) to (b3) show examples of display before and after the stage change effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 416 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 416 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 416 (b2), the stage effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N perform dark display respectively, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. It is shown that the approximate center glows and the light rays extend from there in the left and right direction. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this rendering example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. Further, in this example of rendering, it is also shown that the image RDY being prepared is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may be ended, and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 416 (b3) shows that the stage change effect is finished. In this effect example, after the completion of the stephen effect, the same display as that before the start of the stephen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it is a false stephen effect that neither mode transition nor stage change is performed.

  FIG. 417 is a view showing in stages an example of button preview effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 417 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 417 (a). Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 417 (a) is in a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (a), it is shown that the sword strike is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during execution of a sword strike.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the sword reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (b), the united animation is started, and a pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, Are moving. Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 417 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q overlaps with the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. FIG. 417 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. Note that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is framed out, or the effect is performed at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (d), the combined animation is successful, the deca-button image 136aL is materialized and the button advance notice is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed and the operation acceptance state is It is shown that it was started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at least during a period in which a button advance notice effect by the button image 136a (decay button image 136aL) is being performed.

  FIG. 418 is a view showing in stages an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 418 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 418 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (a1), the first special view display device 212 displays stop with a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L causes the loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. The stop display is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols. Also, the special figure 1 fourth pattern 284a1 is also lit in the display mode of losing. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 416 (a1) is in the advance notice display mode displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 418 (a2), the situation during stop display of the symbol is continuously shown. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a3) displays the UI wipe display portion WP4 covering the entire UI portion UI3. The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle is framed in from the left side of the UI wipe display portion WP4, and as shown in FIG. 418 (a3) to FIG. . That is, in this effect example, in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the advance notice display mode to the default display mode, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed, and effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. There are cases where it is possible to naturally change the display mode in the UI unit UI3. Note that, for example, when returning to the original display due to a super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered by the wipe display unit, and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a6), it is shown that the effect by the character of the lady in the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is finished, and the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that has been h0 and the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, a display of "Tomonashi is a general Yatsushiro" is performed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In the example of the effect, the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be performed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is performed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the displaying of the preparing image RDY is performed. The game may be ended and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIGS. 418 (b1) to (b4) show an example of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 418 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in gold and is the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. The family crest 224E also emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 418 (b1) is not displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 418 (b1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 418 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (b2) to FIG. (B4), in the tutorial display section TT1, a character of swordsman scrolls in from below and moves the line of sight continuously from the top of the head to the foot It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled by. Further, as shown in FIG. 418 (b4), after the foot of the sword character is displayed, the sword character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight moves continuously from the foot to the top of the head. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top and the foot of the sword character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, an example of displaying the entire character by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling on the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

  In this effect example, for example, in a state in which the explanation display is not resumed or in a state in which only the hold icon is hidden (a state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display is performed using a certain portion of the UI unit UI3. It can be said that an example to do is shown.

  FIG. 419 is a view showing the example of another effect that can be applied to this embodiment in a step-by-step manner. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 419 can be applied can be divided into, for example, the first special drawing starting opening and the second special drawing starting opening per one starting opening, and the symbol in the normal gaming state There is a so-called MAX8 machine (sometimes referred to as an eight-in-one machine) that can hold eight variable displays. Here, the MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement and four pedestals are formed in a staggered arrangement so that eight reserve icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 419 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 are held, so seven holding icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the holding icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 419 (a1), "Panda is a master of the temple" is displayed, and the explanation display line is displayed. It is In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 419 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 419 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-retentions display, at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (a1), four special figures 1 are reserved and it is reported that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  Further, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 419 (a2), it is shown that the game ball has won in the second special view starting opening and the number of reservations of special views 1 and 2 is eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to 7th hold icon h7 and the fluctuation icon h0 which are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyelid that imitates the face of the eyelid. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pong" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 and the effect example in which the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are simultaneously changed are shown when the hold is full. In this presentation example, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon in which the display mode of the eyebrows is displayed may be notified.

  FIG. 419 (b1) shows that the sword strike is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 419 (b1), the second holding number display is displayed, and according to the second holding number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (b1) Four are reserved, and it is notified that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  In FIG. 419 (b2), it is shown that the game ball has won the second special view starting opening and the holding of the special view 1 and the special view 2 has become eight in total. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special views 1 are suspended and four special views 2 are suspended, and the speaker 120 Then, a voice "pong" is output to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 419 (b3) shows a state in which the super reach has become a loss, and the production of the sword strike has ended and the display of the castle town stage has returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. In addition, since the display is full during execution of the sword strike, the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. In this rendering example, when the display is full while the UI unit UI3 is hidden due to the super reach, when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed. It is shown about the example of presentation which changes a display mode.

  FIGS. 419 (c1) to (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 419 (b1) to (b3). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 419 (c1) to FIG. 4 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 419 (b1) to FIG. 4 (b2), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 419 (c3) shows a state in which the super reach has become a loss, and the production of the sword strike has ended and the display of the castle town stage has returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. Also, in this example of rendering, the game was full during execution of the Swordsman reach effect, but the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 and the suspension icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full suspension is achieved. The letter "MAX" indicating that the change is made is displayed at the top of the variation icon h0. Thereafter, the symbol is fixedly displayed in a state where the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 does not change.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 419 (c 4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move onto the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419 (c4), variable display of decorative symbols is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and an explanatory display is performed.

  FIG. 420 is a view showing in stages the other example of the effects applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 420 (a1) to FIG. (A3) and FIG. 420 (b1) to FIG. (B2) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 420 (a1) to (a3) and 420 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a reserved icon display area, a tutorial display area TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is displayed integrally with the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, also in this demonstration example, when it becomes super reach, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, display is performed without frame out. You may leave it alone. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Further, in this presentation example, the image in preparation can be displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 420 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 420 (a1), a reserved icon display area is formed at the center. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and variation icons are displayed in a mode of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 420 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is disposed on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 420 (a1), "Preliminary icon digest ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Jojo town stage" is displayed, It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Toku 1 and Toku 2 is also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224F and a general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (a2), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is switched to the first preparation image RDY1 is shown. The first preparation image RDY1 has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (a3), a state is shown in which the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparing image RDY4. The fourth preparation image RDY 4 has a green background color and is a default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the image under preparation is displayed in each of the plurality of explanatory display parts.

  FIGS. 420 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing another example of effect following FIG. 420 (a1). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 420 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 420 (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (b2), the fourth preparation preparation image RDY 4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST 2 while the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST 2 is continuously displayed. It is shown that the image is displayed at a position shifted upward more than that. That is, it is shown that the image in preparation overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

  FIGS. 420 (c1) to (c7) are diagrams showing another aspect of the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 420 (c1) is an effect following FIG. 140 (c). In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 420 (c1)-the same figure (c 4) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 140 (d)-the same figure (g), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 420 (c5), the manner in which the family crest 224E descends to the initial position is shown. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 420 (c6) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1, and the display of the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display area TT1 explodes is performed. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to have an expectation that the tutorial display section TT1 performs preliminary display and the reliability to the big hit may become high.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (c7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is considered to be the default display mode. In this effect, in place of the image RDY being prepared, the timer advance notice may be displayed and the timer advance notice may be started, the mini game may be started, or the advance notice may be displayed. .

  FIG. 421 is a view for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. 154 (b-1) to FIG. 154 (b-5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this effect example, a reserved icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, which respectively constitute a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), four pending icons are accommodated in each frame in the pending icon display area, and the second of the first pending icon h11 to the fourth pending icon h14 is displayed. The hold icon h12 is a display mode (for example, a display mode lit in blue) of the prefetch notice, and the other hold icons are set as the default display mode. Further, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and during the symbol variation display, the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area. Here, the area where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In this example of presentation, none of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the family crest item 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (a2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. The enlargement display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually enlarged. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a2), the hold display frame containing the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded mode. Further, in the example of the effect, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the holding display frame, but the image under preparation RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display unit TT7 is separated and displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen. At this time, the image under preparation RDY may overlap a part of the holding display frame and the holding icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a3), the luminescent color of the household object 224E emitting blue changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 421 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the second hold icon h12 displayed in an enlarged manner is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol variation display required for the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 421 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the display mode is returned to the default. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually reduced. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this manner, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this presentation example, the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears due to the reduced display of the reserved icon display area is displayed in such a manner that the image RDY being prepared is accommodated.

  FIGS. 421 (b1) to (b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIGS. 421 (a1) to (a5). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 421 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (b2), a state in which the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 421 (a2) is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 421 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. Although the UI unit UI2 is not displayed in the display in the sub-window WP3, it may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  Subsequently, a display example of a warning display in the case where a ball removal error has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 422 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball extraction error display, FIG. 423 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball extraction error display, and FIG. 424 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball extraction error display. FIG. In addition, although the display position of the warning display of the ball extraction error (hereinafter referred to as “ball extraction error display”) is taken as a fixed place, it can be appropriately set which position is used as the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including variations of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is to be erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated to cancel the bottom plate full tank condition and the ball removal error is removed. Further, in the example of effect shown below, although the display example of the ball removal error display is shown, it is also applicable to, for example, a door opening error or the like that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, when the ball removal error display is performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 422 (a1) to (a2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 (c) to (d) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (a1), it is shown that a part of the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image is displayed so that the ball extraction error display ERR1 is overlapped. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, the message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to urge the player to produce the game balls stored in the lower tray and cancel the lower tray full-tank state.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (a2), a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the image RDY is displayed. It is shown that it is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to withdraw the ball when the display of the image under preparation RDY is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image under preparation RDY.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 422 (b1) to FIG. (B2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 393 (c1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (b1), a state is shown in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball pullout error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is resolved, and the remaining time display meter The MT4 is in an easy-to-see state. As a result, it may be possible to notice the remaining time display meter MT4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b5). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (c1), the ball pullout error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the swordsman of the enemy role, but overlaps with the translucent button image 136q related to the united animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, it is also possible for the ball removal error display ERR1 to overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the merging animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422 (c2), when the translucent button image 139q approaches, a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the united animation by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is finished by simultaneously viewing the removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 422 (d1) to FIG. 422 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 401 (f) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422 (d2), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer announcement effect is started, but the in-preparation image RDY is redisplayed. Sometimes, the first preparing image RDY is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped by a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 which has not been overlapped in the tutorial display part TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the magnified image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to open the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball extraction error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 422 (e1) to FIG. (E2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 402 (a5) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (e1), a part of the unballoon error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the sword character is drawn, but the character of the maroon is drawn Areas do not overlap.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 422 (e2), as a result of the player performing a long press operation on the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and when A part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped with the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman character of the enemy role by looking at the display without the ball. In addition, it may be possible to notice an error indication ERR1 of the open ball error by looking at the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman of the enemy character. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. At the same time, give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the character between the character of the lord and the character of the sword sword of the enemy is finished by simultaneously viewing the merits of the error ERR1 of the ball and the character of the sword sword of the character of the enemy. There are times when you can.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 404 (e) to (f). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (f1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second preparing image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the character "Go" is displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY was displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (f2), the character "Go" is erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display unit TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation to move up. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. In addition, it is not necessary for the ball extraction error display ERR1 to overlap the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second ready image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it is possible to give an opportunity to pull out the ball when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished by simultaneously looking at the ball removing error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. There is a case.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 423 (a1) to FIG. 42 (a2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 407 (a3) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (a1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the image RDY1 under preparation in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 is overlapped for a part of the plurality of images in preparation. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of in-provision images (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by viewing a plurality of images being prepared. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image under preparation is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 423 (b1) to FIG. 42 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 407 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (b1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the dark blue character GII is adjacent. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 423 (a2), since the image under preparation (Chibi princess character CHM) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, the ball extraction error display ERR1 displays either It is not overlapped even against.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 423 (c1) to FIG. 42 (c2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 409 (b) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 409 (b), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed approximately at the center of the left notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 409 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image RDY in preparation displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the chance up cut-in image WCI. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to drop the ball when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 423 (d1) to FIG. 42 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 411 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (d1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 411 (b1), it is shown that the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (d2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 423 (d2) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 423 (e1) to FIG. 42 (e2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 411 (d1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (e1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 411 (d1), it is shown that the ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3⁄4, and the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. It is shown that it is being done. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not change the display position even when the shake vision effect is performed, and does not tilt, and the display state is maintained. At this time, when the background image is inclined, the margin is black. Then, when a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps with the margin, for example, when the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin and a part is It may be difficult to view.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 423 (f1) to FIG. 42 (f2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 412 (a1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (f1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 412 (a1), it is shown that the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3 and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted and displayed is shown. It is done. At this time, the at-a-glance error display ERR1 at least partially overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the UI unit UI3 rising. That is, as the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice occurrence of effects in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing that the UI unit UI3 lifts. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect in the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 414 (d) to (e). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (a1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 414 (d), a state in which a part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped on the upper part of the tutorial display section TT1 It is shown. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this presentation example, it is shown that the overlap state of the unballoon error display ERR1 with the UI unit UI3 is canceled while the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward by the UI unit FO animation.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 424 (b1) to FIG. (B2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 418 (a3) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 418 (a3), a state in which a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part wipe display part WP4 It is shown. At this time, the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI wipe display unit WP4 does not overlap with the character of the lady.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lady on the bike has moved to the right end of the UI wipe display portion WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character on the motorcycle with the UI wipe display WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the effect display in the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI wipe display unit WP3.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 424 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 421 (b1) to (b2) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 421 (b1), the ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part is over the decorative symbol. It is shown how to wrap. In addition, it does not overlap to other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (c2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 424 (c2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the subwindow WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. At this time, a part of the extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the subwindow WP3 and another part overlaps the reserved icon display area. The pop-up error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, it may be possible to notice a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged and displayed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. Also, at the same time as watching the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the ball withdrawal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area, give a trigger to open the ball when the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area is finished. There are times when you can.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 424 (d1) to (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d1), the display of “Please remove the ball” is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is made transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be considered to be difficult to view.

  The unballooning error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d3) is another display mode of the unballooning error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d2). It is considered as the aspect represented by.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described, but the decorative symbol display device It goes without saying that the invention is applicable even to a pachinko machine 100 provided with only one. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

In the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, timer notification effect in timer notification display TM1 shown in FIG. 310 (1)],
The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 308 (11) to FIG. 12 (12) or a notice display due to a change in display mode of the fluctuation icon h 0 shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device, etc., the lever effect shown in FIG. 309 (c2), the notice by the stop display of the pine symbol CC as the chance symbol shown in FIG. 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a display for notifying the timing when the effect display using the mini display device 208P is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer overlay effect shown in FIG. 310 (2) to FIG. 5 (5)],
The second display is a display for predicting that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [e.g., in the timer-over effect shown in FIG. 310 (2) to FIG. "Overlay" or "+10 seconds" displayed on the balloon of character YM, etc.]
The second display may be displayed while the first display is being displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (2) to FIG. When the game is being played, timers are added, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, even if the time until the start of a certain effect is notified by the first display, it is notified that the time notified by the second display changes. In addition to waiting for the time until a certain effect to start, it has the expectation that the time may change, and the first display also enjoys There are times when you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the first display and the second display. . Moreover, the display means may display the first display and the second display without fail, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing when a certain effect is performed. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, the second display may give notice that only the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, or may give notice that other than the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one. In addition, the second display may always give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, and may not give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one.

  In addition, only the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Also, the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or the second display may not be displayed while the first display is displayed.

  Note that the start of the timer advance notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed) It may be that the countdown display of the countdown display has been started. In addition, the end of the timer advance notice display may be that the first display has become non-display, or that the countdown display has become non-display (for example, the numbers are erased, and "the attention" is Displayed state may also be included), countdown by countdown display may have ended (for example, 0 is displayed), display displayed on the first display after countdown has ended It may be that (for example, the character display of "attention") is hidden.

Also, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 310 (2) to FIG. (5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time display on the timer display is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to notice a change in the display mode of the first display.

  Here, only the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of displays other than the above may also be changed. In addition, the display mode of the first display may be changed without fail after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display is displayed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured such that it may not change.

  In addition, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display is only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the line of sight of the player may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but the second display means is also displayed on the second display means. In some cases, it is possible to focus on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight on only the first display means.

  Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be composed of display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It is also good.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means or may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be displayed on the second display means or may not be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, the second display unit is disposed on the front side of the first display unit [for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the sub display unit 208S is on the front side of the decorative symbol display unit 208). Placed on the side etc],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display [eg, as shown in FIG. 314 (A2) to FIG. (A3) , And the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S in which the timer addition effect is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second display may cause the second display to be focused and a certain effect may be started by the fact that the second display may overlap the first display while the second display is being displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to recognize that the time to change may change.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first display means is overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display means displays the second display Display means other than the first display means may be overlapped depending on the display means. In addition, the first display means may always be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, and the second display means displays the second display. One display means may not be overlapped.

  In addition, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means in which the second display is displayed, or the second display in which the second display is displayed The first display means may be overlapped also by display means other than the means.

Also, “first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B1), etc.]” and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. The second display means is configured to be movable between a position at which the front side substantially at the center of 208 overlaps, and the like.
The second display means is a display means which overlaps the first display means at the second position [eg, as shown in FIG. 314 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device In the overlapping position on the substantially central front side of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of may also be configured to be movable. Also, the second display means may be configured to move necessarily between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may be arranged between the first position and the second position. It may be configured such that it may not move.

  Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, or may be configured other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

  Also, the second display means may be capable of overlapping with the first display means only at the second position, or may be capable of overlapping with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be Also, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. It is also good.

In addition, “the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 308 (2) to FIG.
The countdown display is a display for performing the timing until the certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, as shown in FIG. 308 (2) to FIG. (7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may include only the countdown display or may include displays other than the countdown display. In addition, the first display may include the countdown display without fail or may not include the countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be performed by counting down only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect may be performed by a countdown. . In addition, the countdown display may always be performed by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or even if the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by counting down. Good.

Also, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even in the state in which the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even in the state in which the second display is displayed, it is continued other than the countdown by countdown display There may be one. In addition, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. It is also good.

  Moreover, the countdown by countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, and the countdown by countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. It is also good.

Also, while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. In addition, while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the second display, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even during the display of the second display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of a character of“ attention ”in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 308 (8)],
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display not included in the certain effect,
The third display is displayed when the first display is a display indicating 0. [For example, as shown in FIG. 308 (7) to FIG. When the display becomes 0, the "notice" character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the third display can be further enhanced by the countdown by the first display.

  Here, when the first display is a display showing 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display becomes a display showing 0, a third display Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be necessarily displayed, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display indicating 0, and the first display may be a display other than a case where the display indicates 0. Three displays may be displayed.

Also, in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the second display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation by the display of the second display.

  In addition, when the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed finally in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 308 (9) to FIG. 12 (12)],
The certain effect is a effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is effect display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include displays other than the fourth display. In addition, a certain effect may include the fourth display or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [e.g., the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd shown in FIG. 309 (d3),
The certain effect is a effect including the first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be executable other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing operations other than the first operation. In addition, the effect movable means may always execute the first operation or may not execute the first operation.

  In addition, a certain effect may include only the first action, or may include actions other than the first action. Also, a certain effect may include the first action or may not include the first action.

Also, in the case where the certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol is finally more likely to be finalized and displayed than in the case where the certain effect is not performed [eg, FIG. 308 (11) to FIG. 12) When the pseudo run shown in is started, it is easier to be a big hit than when the pseudo run is not started, etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the end, or even if a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It is also good.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays may be a fifth display [for example, a conversation notice shown in FIG. 304 (9) to FIG. (14), and FIG. 308 (9) to FIG. The pseudo-sequence effect shown in Figure 3 and the notice display etc. of the chance up shown in Figure 317 (4) and Figure 13 (13),
In the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, the fifth display may be started to be displayed.
The fifth display is a notice display,
In the case where the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally more likely to be finalized and displayed than in the case where the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIG. 304 (9) to FIG. (14) It is more likely to be a big hit if the conversation notice shown in is given than if the conversation notice is not given, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the fifth display to be displayed in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display. is there.

  Here, in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, only the fifth display may start to be displayed, or the first display In the period from the display start to the display start of the second display, the display other than the fifth display may be started. In addition, during the period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may be always started, or after the first display is started The display of the fifth display may not be started in the period until the display of the second display is started.

  In addition, the fifth display may start to be displayed only during a period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, or the first display may be displayed. The display of the fifth display may be started also in a period other than the period from the start to the display start of the second display.

  In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or even when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is not finally displayed. There may be.

Also, “The game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [eg, as shown in FIG. May be displayed during the period
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18), etc.]
The period display is a display for notifying a first timing [for example, timing shown by check point CP3 at which advance notice by lever effect is started shown in FIG. 317 (18)],
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start.
The display of the period may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 321 (A1) to FIG. (A2), If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 321 (A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the first timing of the period display is known while the period display is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing approaches. Here, the display means can be made to look at the display means in order to see the period display even before the first timing when the period display may be hidden before the first timing comes. There is a case.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to be drawn into the game from the display of the period display to the first timing.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Also, a plurality of types of display may be displayed without fail, or there may be cases where a plurality of types of display are not displayed.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the period before the first timing starts after the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before.

  The displayed period may be displayed during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, during the demonstration display, during the symbol stop display, or the like, regardless of reach.

  Also, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed in the case of long reach but may be displayed in the case of SP reach. Also, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach but may be displayed in the second half of the SP reach. Also, it may be displayed in the first half of SP reach and not displayed in the second half of SP reach.

  Furthermore, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter starts to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. Moreover, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the effect such as the reach effect where the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing when the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed. Also, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is ended. It may be. In addition, when display / non-display of the chance up meter is configured to be possible by the operation means, the start of the period display means the timing at which the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operation means.

  In addition, from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed is displayed) to the start of the period display until the period display effect is ended (for example, the chance up meter May be displayed until the display that suggests that it can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden).

  Further, the term period display includes not only those displayed until the first timing is reached, but also those erased before the first timing is reached.

  Moreover, there may be two or more in a period in which the reach effect display is performed for a certain period. At this time, the period display may start and end at each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as display may start and end.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a second effect display [for example, a display of an eyelid cut-in shown in FIG. 321 (A2), a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2 b), etc.] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 321 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. 321 (A2 b), the chance up meter In the effect by CMT, there is a case where the display of the eyelid cut-in shown in FIG. 321 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2 b) are performed before the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. Etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing when the display of the second effect display starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 321 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b) In the effect by the up meter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 321 (A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2 b), etc. are not notified],
During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 321 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b), it is shown in FIG. When the display of the cut-in of the eyebrows or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing by displaying the display not notified by the period display, so before the first timing comes There are also cases where you can have hope.

  Here, there may be a case where only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing comes, or before the first timing comes, effect displays other than the second effect display are also displayed There may be cases. In addition, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing comes, or the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing comes There may be.

  In addition, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or there may be cases where the notification of the second effect display is not notified other than the start of the display May be In addition, the period display may not necessarily notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

  Moreover, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, and the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be erased during the second effect display.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only while the second effect display is displayed, or the period display may be erased other than during the second effect display.

  In addition, instead of the effect display, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, or a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of the prepaid card may be used. Further, as an aspect of the effect display, a display that appears by light emission by an LED, an operation by an effect movable means, or light emission by a light guide plate may be used.

  Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, “the second effect display is a second advance display [for example, an advance display by the display of the cut-in of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 321 (A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2 b), etc.] is there,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the fact that the second effect display is displayed before the first timing can indicate that there may be a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, it is possible to give the player expectations even in the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, in the case where the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally likely to be finalized and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, finally the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed, or even if the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation [for example, the operation of the first large-screen behavior player 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd shown in FIG. 321 (A3 b),
The second operation is a rendering operation,
While the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), etc.] is being displayed, the second operation may be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of being executed other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  In addition, while the second effect display is being displayed, there may be a case where only the second operation is performed, and while the second effect display is being displayed, an operation other than the second operation is also performed. May be In addition, the second operation may be performed while the second effect display is displayed, or the second operation may not be performed while the second effect display is displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of operations may be performed as the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 303 (E1) to FIG. 303 (E2), and FIG. 303 (F1) The movement of one thousand box box work item 224 H, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, after the period display is deleted, the period display is displayed again [eg, as shown in FIG. 321 (A2a) to FIG. (A3a), the princess character After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in indication, when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is again displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have expectation for redisplay of the period display.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, the displays other than the period display may be displayed again. It may be configured. Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be

  Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display has been erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display has been erased. It is also good.

Also, after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [eg, as shown in FIG. 321 (A2) to FIG. (A5) After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in character of the wolf character, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, until a certain period elapses. The display other than the period display may be configured not to be displayed. In addition, after the period display is erased, the period display may not necessarily be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period until the certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

  Also, only after the period display is erased, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or other than after the period display is erased, a certain period elapses. Until the period display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, the period display is performed in the first certain period after the period display is erased in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when the second certain period after the first certain period starts. In addition, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

Also, “the certain period is a period during which Super Reach is in operation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [for example, a notice of a Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. 317 (4), a statue of Dull shown in FIG. 317 (13) It is a notice of the chance improvement by the display of the cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The period display indicates a second timing [for example, the timing indicated by the check point CP1 at which the advance notice of the Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boyy shown in FIG. 317 (4) is started; It is a display which may also notify [the timing etc. which are shown by check point CP2 by which the advance notice of the chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started],
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may start.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may notify other timings than the second timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

  In addition, the second timing may have a possibility that only the display of the third effect display may be started, and the other than the display of the third effect display may also be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started in some cases.

  The timing displayed by the period display may be three or more.

  In addition, if a certain reach occurs, effect display is always performed three times, and if another reach occurs, effect display is always performed twice, so it is possible to fix places where effect display is performed according to reach. When there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed three times, and when there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed such that the effect display is performed only once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be more likely to deviate. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Also, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit.

  Also, the second timing may be timing after the first timing, and the second timing may be timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the first timing. The two timings may be the same timing.

In addition, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one type of display among the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least part of the first display is difficult to see" is "when at least part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"Display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means.
The first display means is a means which may display the period display,
The second display unit is a unit that may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

  Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display other display than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display or may not display the period display.

  Further, the second display means may perform only the rendering operation, or may perform an operation other than the rendering operation. In addition, the second display means may always perform the rendering operation, or may not perform the rendering operation.

  In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means, or in the case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means There may be. In addition, at least a part of the period display may always be overlapped by the second display means, or at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. It is also good.

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, effects by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A1) to FIG. (A9)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 326 (A4) to FIG. (A9),
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The display mode of at least a portion of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A1)] has a first speed [eg 10 It may change by the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.
The display mode of at least a part of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 326 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds It may change by the speed etc.
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In recent years, many displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who starts the game with his / her model does not know where to look. In this gaming table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, the player is naturally induced to gaze at the display with a fast (slow) display at which the display mode changes, and the player who has the above problem There are also cases where you can be entertained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the first timing after the period display starts. Before the period display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before.

In addition, “the first display is a display including time display [for example, display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326 (A1), etc.],
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 326 (A4), etc.]
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period etc.] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. As for the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4), the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the speed of change of the display mode may be easily recognized.

  Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. Moreover, the first display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  Further, the second display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. In addition, the second display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  In addition, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes in accordance with other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be Also, the time display may be such that the display mode necessarily changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. It may be.

Also, in some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 326 (A4) to FIG. (A7), a button for the balloon of the navigation character YM Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed, and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the whistle in the conversation announcement, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the presentation may be made lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

  Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be displayed other than both the first display and the second display. It is also good. In addition, both the first display and the second display may be necessarily displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, character display of“ superheat ”in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A9), etc.]”
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display of "It is intense heat, etc. in the conversation image CI2 of a whistle shown in FIG. 326 (A9),"
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,
The first display is a display capable of changing at least a part of display modes until a first time [for example, 10 seconds etc.] elapses,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of display modes can be changed until a second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses,
The third display may be displayed when the first time elapses after the display of the first display starts.
The fourth display may be displayed when the second time has elapsed since the start of the display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may change only at least a part of the display mode until the first time passes, or at least a part of the display modes until the first time passes Other display modes may be changeable. In addition, the first display may change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least the display mode changes until the first time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the second display may be such that at least a portion of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a portion of the display mode other than the second time elapses The display mode of may be changeable. In addition, the second display may change at least a part of the display mode until the second time passes, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the display start of the first display, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the display start. As time passes, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to display, the third display may be displayed without fail, or when the first time has elapsed after the first display has started. The third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may start after the second display is started. As time passes, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to display, the fourth display may be displayed without fail, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display has started. , The fourth display may not be displayed.

  Note that the third display and the fourth display may be the same display mode or may be different display modes.

  In the third display and the fourth display, the fourth display may have a higher or lower reliability of the jackpot. Also, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

Also, “the first display is a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown in the timer display of the first timer announcement display TM1 shown in FIG. 328 (A1), etc.]”
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the display of the countdown in the timer display of the second timer announcement display TM2 shown in FIG. 328 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for notifying of a timing until a certain effect [for example, a display of pseudo connected effect and the like] is performed [for example, a first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 328 (A1). And, the second timer notice display TM2 reports the time until the occurrence of the pseudo run by a countdown display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always notified, or the timing before a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
The first display is an operation effective period display,
The second display is the operation effective period display,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be operated by the player without fail, or may have a habit of not being operated by the player.

  In addition, the operation effective period display may indicate only the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may indicate other than the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The operation effective period display may always indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may not indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, a first chance up meter CMTa or the like shown in FIG. 323 (A1)],
The second display is the period display [for example, a second chance up meter CMTb and the like shown in FIG. 323 (A1)],
The period display is a display for notifying of a first timing [for example, a timing at which an advance notice of a chance increase by a character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. 323 (A2) is started],
The first timing refers to a certain effect [for example, FIG. 323, in a first period [for example, a period in which an animation of a duel scene in the sword reach shown in FIG. 323 (A1) to FIG. (A2) is performed]. This is the timing when there is a possibility that the display of the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi shown in (A2) may be performed,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may start to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may also start to be displayed in the first period. It may be possible. In addition, the first timing may be one in which the sixth display is always started in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started in the first period. May be

  In addition, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. A thing other than timing may also be alert | reported. In addition, the first timing may be notified before the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified after the start of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

  Also, the first timing may be notified only between the start and the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified before and after the start of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change only at the first speed, and according to the passage of time, the second display At least a part of the display modes may change at a speed other than the first speed. In addition, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, or according to the passage of time, at least a part of the second display The display mode may not change at the first speed.

  In addition, depending on the passage of time, only the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed, or according to the passage of time, at least the second display may be changed. Things other than some display modes may change at the first speed.

"When at least a part of display aspects of the second display changes at the second speed than when the display aspect of at least parts of the second display changes at the first speed In the end, the big hit symbol is easier to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the display mode of at least one part of the second display changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or at least a part of the display of the second display Even when the aspect changes at the second speed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

In addition, “the first display is effect display [for example, effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A1) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second display is effect display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 326 (A4) to FIG. (A9)],”
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1)],
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown of a timer display in the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display for giving a notification by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed [eg, as shown in FIG. 329 (A1) to FIG. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
While the countdown display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the small size of the timer advance notice TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), etc.] It may change to an aspect [for example, the display mode of the large size of timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A3), etc.],
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Also, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include displays other than the countdown display. Also, the first display may include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, or the first display may not be a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be In addition, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or when the timing until a certain effect is performed is not notified by performing a countdown. There may be

  In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only, and the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to the display modes other than the second display mode. In addition, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, and the display of the first display may be performed while the countdown display is displayed. The aspect may not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  The countdown display may be a timer display.

  The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is finished before the symbol variation display is completed [for example, as shown in FIG. 308 (1) to FIG. (7) The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and is ended during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the countdown display for informing the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, the effect may not be redundant.

  Here, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol change display, and only the countdown display may be ended before the symbol change display is ended, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol change display, The display other than the countdown display may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended. In addition, the countdown display may be started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the countdown display may always be ended before the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the symbol The countdown display may not end before the end of the variable display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended only by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol The countdown display may end other than the end of the variable display.

Also, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, small size etc.],
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [eg, large size etc.],
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display size of the countdown display becomes large, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (make the user pay attention to the countdown display whose display size becomes large).

  Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be a display mode being displayed. In addition, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size There may be a display mode.

  In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The display mode may be selected. In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size There may be a display mode.

  In addition, the size of the display size may be the same, for example, the display size may be the same, but the color or the shape of the frame or the character may be different.

  Also, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Also, when the display of the countdown display is started [eg, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 308 (3), etc.], The display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. Display modes other than the one display mode may be displayed. Also, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first There may be cases where the display mode is not displayed.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, when the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 308 (2), when the frame-in of the timer advance display TM1 is started, etc.], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. In addition, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Also, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, shown in FIG. 329 (A2) to FIG. 3 (A3) Thus, while displaying the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation that the display mode changes during countdown display.

  Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode, or during the display of the countdown display, the first display is the first The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed, and the first display may be changed to the second display mode other than the display of the countdown display. You may change from one display mode to a second display mode.

Also, “the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it is easy to finally display the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the first display to change to the second display mode.

  In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed in the final display, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, the first display is a display in which the display position may be changed [for example, as shown in FIG. 329 (A2) to FIG. (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device The display position changes from the approximate right center to the approximate center of the display screen of 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display position of the first display changes, a visual change may be given to improve the rendering effect.

  Here, the first display may change only the display position, or may change other than the display position. In addition, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 329 (A2) to FIG. 3 (A3) As shown in), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the approximate right center to the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to make the first display pay attention.

  Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display from the first display mode If it changes to a 2nd display mode, things other than the display position of a 1st display may also change. In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, or the first display may change from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may change also in the case other than the case of changing from the second display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, “the first display is a display in which movement display [for example, display of animation of enlarged display of timer notice display TM1 etc.] may be performed,
By performing the movement display, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 329 (A2) to FIG. 3 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed by the animation of the enlarged display. Zoom in and change the display position etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since visual change can be given by the movement display of the first display, the rendering effect may be improved.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display may be performed, or may be one in which display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  Further, only the display position of the first display may be changed by performing the movement display, and the display positions of other than the display position of the first display may also be changed by performing the movement display. It is also good. Further, the display position of the first display may be changed by moving display, or the display position of the first display may not be changed by moving display. .

  Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only by performing the movement display, or even if the display position of the first display is changed due to other than the movement display being performed. Good.

Also, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even during the display of the movement display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even during the display of the movement display, other than the countdown display by the countdown display may be continued. In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than the display of the movement display.

Also, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display, or something other than the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display. In addition, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted except when the movement display is displayed.

“The countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 329 (A2) to FIG. (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the countdown display may perform only the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform other than the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [eg, shown in FIG. 329 (A7) to FIG. 3 (A8) As such, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and it is informed that the pseudo-link will be performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that only a timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. The thing other than the timing to which a certain effect is performed may also be notified. In addition, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be always notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, In some cases, it may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

  Moreover, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come only by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Also, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased [eg, as shown in FIG. 329 (A7) to FIG. (A11), After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the effect may not be redundant by erasing the countdown display after the countdown is completed.

  Here, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the display other than the countdown display may be performed. May also be configured to be erased. In addition, after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication may be necessarily erased, or after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is erased. It may be configured such that it may not.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and the countdown display may be performed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a character of“ focus ”in timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A8), etc.]
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be deleted after the second display is displayed [eg, FIG. 329 (A7) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" is displayed, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, there are cases where it is possible to improve the effect on the erasure of the countdown display.

  Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Also, the second display may be included in an effect.

  In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be erased when the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be necessarily erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. May be configured such that the countdown display may not be erased after the second display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed only when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be erased only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased when the second display is displayed.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [e.g., a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [e.g., as shown in FIG. 330 (A1), Timer preview display TM1 of the size is displayed on the sub display unit 208S, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode. When is displayed, the first display may also be displayed on display means other than the first display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means without fail, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Also, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means also in cases other than the above case.

Also, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIG. 330 (A2) to FIG. (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol Displayed on display device 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display means displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be possible to visually improve the rendering effect in an entertaining manner.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means The first display may be the second display when the first display of the first display displayed on the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on other display means. Moreover, when the first display is always displayed on the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be displayed on the second display means. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be It may be displayed on the display means of.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, the countdown display demonstrated so far may be a display performed only during execution of the said symbol fluctuation display, and may be performed as a prefetch notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In addition, when the countdown display is performed as a preview advance notice, the countdown display may be displayed in a period between the symbol change display and the symbol change display to be performed next. In that case, while the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by the countdown display may be stopped / suspended / canceled (for example, the time of the timing of the decision stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop displayed (however, the countdown If the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by countdown may be continued, or the symbol countdown may be internally performed. You may stop the countdown internally during symbol stop display.

  In addition, when the countdown display is displayed as the pre-reading notice, the countdown display is not performed when there is a hold (for example, a hold with a fluctuation time indefinite) in which the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds. It is also good. This is because there is a possibility that it will not be clear at which timing the countdown will be 0 if the symbol variation display time is indeterminate, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (simulation, reach, In the case of development etc.), it is preferable to carry out only in the symbol variation display.

  On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed also when there is a pending with the fluctuation time being indefinite. In this case, for example, a presentation that causes no problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the reserved icon, a presentation such as round promotion during a big hit, etc. The present invention can be applied to the case where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed before the end of the object's detention. In addition, when there is an effect that needs to be synchronized (such as the start of the symbol variation display on hold that has been pre-read target) n, such as effect to force the time to match the time is performed It is also good.

  Also, the countdown display may be displayed during a big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the inter-round interval. Here, since the period of one round is indeterminate during the big hit game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately, for example, whether or not the countdown display is not generated in the final round, or during the big hit end interval (final If the big hit end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or if it becomes a certain round, the book edge is forced The combined time (for example, "00:00" is forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display, etc. may be displayed).

  Further, the time until the simultaneous effect or the effect by the RTC starts may be notified by a countdown display.

  In addition, the display device may be configured of transmissive liquid crystal, and further, rendering means such as effect moving means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. These may be configured to be visible through the. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state in which the rear side can be viewed and a state in which the transmissive liquid crystal can not be viewed by the liquid crystal shutter.

  In addition, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as a bonus may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by countdown display.

  In addition, it is a display that announces that it may give an effect that affects the countdown display itself (for example, addition / subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of countdown display, change of color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect such as saying that something may occur due to a mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may occur in the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character comes out, an effect such as always performed something May be performed, and effects may be performed such that something is always performed when another character comes out. At this time, for example, the larger the number of appearances of the character, the easier it will be for the jackpot.

  In addition, when there are a large number of display of the countdown display, it may be easy to become a big hit in the end, or it may be easy to become a big hit if a notice of chance increase is given.

  In addition, with regard to the chance up meter, even if a part or all of the meter is enlarged / reduced or a promotion effect (for example, a color or shape changes or a character or marker indicating the current position is changed) is performed. Good.

Also, in the above description,
A game console provided with “display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 etc. shown in FIG. 339 (3)],
The timer display is a display including a display of time [for example, a timer display on the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 330 (3)],
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a pseudo ream shown in FIG. 330 (9), a strong sagohani group notice shown in FIG. 343 (9), a revival effect shown in FIG. Or, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350 (35), the effect of the change of the display mode of the reserved icon shown in FIG. 346 (6) to FIG. Is configured to
Even when the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect may not be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 341 (5) to FIG. Although the advance notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and some effect is not performed, etc.],
The certain effect is started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time being for a certain time [for example, the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 becomes "00:00" etc.] If the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” as shown in FIG. 339 (9), for example, as shown in FIG. Etc.],
If the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than the case where the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed, the big hit symbol is determined display in the symbol variation display Easy to be
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Conventionally, display effects on display means tend to be colorful. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game console, a game console characterized by display means can be realized.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be possible to have an expectation for the start of a certain effect by the start of the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display or may not display the timer display.

  Further, the timer display may include only the display of time, or may include the display other than the display of time. In addition, the timer display may include the display of time or may not include the display of time.

  Also, it may be configured that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, or effects other than a certain effect also start after the display of the timer display is started It may be configured as it may be. In addition, it may be configured that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, or there is a case that a certain effect is not started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

  Also, it may be configured that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started other than after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be the case.

  Moreover, even after the display of the timer display is started, only a certain effect may not be started, or even after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect Other effects may not be started either. Moreover, even after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, or even after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect is started. May be configured to be

  In addition, it may be configured that only a certain effect may be started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time becoming a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started It may be configured such that effects other than certain effects may be started in response to the display of time being at a certain time. Also, it may be configured that a certain effect is always started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time becoming a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started at some time after the display of.

  In addition, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time has come to a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started It may be configured such that a certain effect may be started in response to the display of time being performed other than that the certain time has come.

  Also, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol change display, or the big hit symbol may not be displayed. May be configured.

Also, there may be a case where the certain effect is started when the display of the time reaches the certain time after the display of the timer display is started [eg, FIG. 339 (3)- As shown in FIG. 9 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" after the timer advance notice effect is started, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started etc],
After the display of the timer display is started and the display of the timer display ends before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [for example, FIG. 342 As shown in (3) to (6), after the false timer announcement effect is started, if the timer display on the timer announcement display TM1 is erased before "00:00", the pseudo-train Variation display of the second decoration pattern is not started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to notice that the timer display reaches a certain time.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started, when the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, when the display of time reaches a certain time, there may be a case where a production other than a certain production is also started. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, when the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may always be started, or after the display of the timer display is started. When the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

  Moreover, after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only when the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. A certain effect may be started also later than when the time display has reached a certain time.

  In addition, when the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, it is not necessary to start only a certain effect, or the timer If the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the display is started, the effects other than the certain effect may not be started. In addition, when the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, If the display of the timer display ends before the display of the time has reached a certain time after the start of the display of the display, a certain effect may be started.

  In addition, it is not necessary for a certain effect to be started only when the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, and the timer display The effect may not be started except in the case where the display of the timer display is finished before the display of time reaches a certain time after the start of the display of.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 353 (3) to FIG.
If the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure box image, etc. shown in FIG. 353 (9)] is derived as a result of the display of the mini game, the display of the time is When a certain time is reached and the certain effect is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 353 (9), when the princess character HME appears from the treasure box image, it is shown in FIG. 353 (17) As such, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variable display of the decoration symbol by the pseudo-link is started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to enliven the trend of the timer advance notice by the mini game.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game, or may be capable of displaying other display than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

  In addition, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the mini game As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and to start an effect other than a certain effect. In addition, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may always be started, or the display of the mini game As a result, when the first result is derived, it may be configured such that the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

  In addition, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, or the display of the mini game may be performed. As a result, the display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time and start a certain effect even when the first result is derived.

In addition, “the display means can display a notice item [for example, a princess character HME or the like displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 353 (10)]”.
According to the result of the display of the mini game, the notice item may be displayed [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 353 (5) to FIG. When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 353 (10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item at the lower left of the display screen, etc.],
The notice item includes a display indicating that the certain effect is to be performed [for example, by displaying the princess character HME as a notice item, a notice is notified that a pseudo-link will be performed, etc.] ,
After the advance notice item is displayed, the display of the time is configured to reach the certain time and start the certain effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 353 (10). After the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-run is started when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00”, etc.] ,
When the preview item is not displayed, the display of the time is configured not to reach the certain time and start the certain effect [eg, in FIG. 354 (5) to FIG. When a whale character BBA (10) appears from a treasure box image in a mini game shown, a notice item is not displayed as shown in FIG. 354 (10), and a pseudo link is not performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the display of a notice item.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to recognize that a certain effect by the timer display is started by the notice icon as the result display while making the mini game pay attention to the mini game.

  Moreover, according to this game console, there are cases where it is possible to build up effects during a period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the preview item, or may be capable of displaying items other than the preview item. Further, the display means may display the notice item without fail or may not display the notice item.

  In addition, depending on the result of the display of the mini game, only the preview item may be displayed, or the items other than the notification item may be displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game. It may be configured as it is. In addition, the notice item may be always displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game, or the notice item may not be displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game. Good.

  In addition, the advance notice item may include only a display indicating that a certain effect is to be performed, or may include a display other than a display indicating that a certain effect is to be performed. In addition, the advance notice item may include an indication indicating that a certain effect is to be performed, or may not include an indication indicating that a certain effect is to be performed.

  Also, the display of the time may be configured to arrive at a certain time after the display of the preview item is started, and only a certain effect may be started, or after the display of the preview item is started, The display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time and to start an effect other than a certain effect. Also, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time so that a certain effect is always started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed. It may be configured such that the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

  Also, the display of the time may be configured to arrive at a certain time and start a certain effect only after the display of the preview item is started, or after the display of the preview item is started. Also, the display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time to start a certain effect.

  In addition, when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of the time may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is not started, and when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of the time may be It may be configured such that a certain time is not reached and any effect other than a certain effect is also started. In addition, when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of time may be configured to arrive at a certain time so that a certain effect is not necessarily started, and when the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of time may be It may be configured such that a certain effect may be started upon reaching a certain time.

Also, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the display of the time starts to change [for example, FIG. As shown in Fig. 353 (14), after the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed, as shown in Fig. 353 (9) before the countdown of the timer display in the timer announcement display TM1 starts. , The result of the mini game display is derived, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate attention on the result of the mini game display.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to impress the relevance of the timer display and the mini game.

  Here, after the display of the timer display is started, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the display of the time starts to change, or the display of the timer display may start After being displayed, the display of the display of the time may be configured to derive other than the result of the display of the mini game before the display of the display changes. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, it may be configured that the result of the mini game display may not be derived before the display of the time display starts changing.

  In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the display of the time starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. Thereafter, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts changing.

  Alternatively, the result of the mini game display may be derived before the display of the time display starts changing only after the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, the result of the mini game display may be derived before the display of the time display starts changing.

In addition, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. As shown in 349 (4), after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12). Before completion, as shown in FIG. 349 (9), the result of the display of the mini game is derived, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate attention on the result of the mini game at the time of voting.

  Here, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time. After the display starts to change, it may be configured to derive other than the result of the mini game display before the display of time reaches a certain time. In addition, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be necessarily derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the display of the time After the start of the change, it may be configured that the result of the mini game display may not be derived before the time display reaches a certain time.

  In addition, after the display of the display of the time starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the display of the time After the start of the change, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the time display reaches a certain time.

  Also, the display of the time display may be configured such that the result of the mini game display is derived before the time display reaches a certain time only after the display of the time display starts to change. The result of the mini game display may be derived before the display of time reaches a certain time other than after the change start has started.

Also, the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 355 (3) to FIG. Mini games have been started etc before
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display of the mini game is started, it is not possible to know whether the timer display is started or not, so it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini game.

  Here, there may be a case where only the display of the mini game is started before the display of the timer display is started, or the display other than the display of the mini game is started before the display of the timer display is started. The display may also be started. Also, the display of the mini game may always be started before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may not be started before the display of the timer display is started. It is also good.

  In addition, the display of the mini game may be started only before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game is displayed before the start of the display of the timer display. It may be started.

  Moreover, the display of the mini game may be started before the display of only the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game is displayed before the display of other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

Also, in some cases, a second result [for example, as a result of the appearance of the icon BCF of the face of the bancho from the treasure box image shown in FIG.
The second result is a result not related to the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 355 (8), when a result in which the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears is derived from the treasure box image, It is not related to the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 355 (4), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 356 (25), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to notice whether or not the result of the mini game display relates to a certain effect.

  Here, only the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or even a result other than the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game. Good. In addition, the second result may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.

  In addition, the second result may not be related to only a certain effect, or may be not related to any effect other than a certain effect. Also, the second result may not necessarily be related to a certain effect, or may be related to a certain effect.

Also, in some cases, a first notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 346 (6) to (7), etc.] may be executed as the certain effect.
The first notice is a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to expect that the timer display is displayed and the advance notice is made.

  Here, only the first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the first notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the first notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

Also, in some cases, a second notice [for example, a pseudo sequence shown in FIG. 330 (9), etc.] may be executed as the certain effect,
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit by displaying the timer display and extending the execution time of the symbol variation display.

  Here, only the second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the second notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the second notice may be performed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

  Also, the second notice may be such that only the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be long. Also, the second notice may be that the execution time of the symbol variation display is necessarily longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. The execution time of the symbol variation display may not be long.

Also, in some cases, a third notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350 (35), etc.] may be executed as the certain effect.
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display when executed than when it is not executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer display is displayed and the big hit notice is made.

  Here, only the third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the third notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the third advance notice may be performed as a certain effect, or the third advance notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the third advance notice may be one in which only the big hit symbol is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the case where it is executed than when it is not executed, or is executed rather than the case where it is not executed. In the case of symbol variation display, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be easily determined and displayed. In addition, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed rather than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when executed, or the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display when executed. It may be.

Also, in some cases, the fourth notice [for example, the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 347 (30), etc.] is executed as the certain effect,
The fourth notice is a notice notifying that a big hit will be made,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer display is displayed to be a big hit.

  Here, only the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the fourth notice may be performed as a certain effect. In addition, the fourth notice may be performed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be performed as a certain effect.

  In addition, the fourth advance notice may notify only that a big hit will be made, or may notify other than being a big hit. In addition, the fourth advance notice may always notify that it will be a big hit, or may not notify you that it will be a big hit.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a bottom plate full error display ERR1 or the like shown in FIG. 389 (1)],
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in the pan full error state [eg, the bottom pan full error state, etc.],
The timer display may be overlapped with the ball pull-out error display [For example, as shown in FIG. 389 (3), the timer notification display TM1 overlaps with the bottom error error display ERR1. Being done etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where it is possible to motivate the player to quickly release the error condition in order to see the effect by the timer display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball out error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball out error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display or may not display the ball removal error display.

  In addition, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the pan full error state or may be displayed in a state other than the pan full error state. In addition, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the bowl full error state or may not be displayed in the bowl full error state.

  In addition, the timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball pullout error display, or the timer display may be configured to overlap with the display other than the ball pullout error display. May be Also, the timer display may be configured to always overlap with the ball pullout error display, or may be configured so that the timer display may not overlap with the ball pullout error display.

In addition, “the timer display is a display displayed in any of a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect shown in FIG. 348 (3), etc.]
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [for example, the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 346 (3)],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The certain effect is more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to have an expectation that a certain effect is started by the mode of timer display.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected by the mode of timer display. That is, first, the player expects the player to expect the success of the mini game to expect a certain effect to be executed, but the mode of the timer display being started halfway is indirectly started earlier. In some cases, it is possible to give expectation to the result of the game display. That is, there are cases where it is possible to cause the player to have an interest by acting as an advance notice (timer display) of the effect started later, as a notice of the effect (mini game etc.) started earlier.

  Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. Good. Further, the timer display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

  In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects, or may be entirely different aspects.

  In addition, it may be configured that only a certain effect is more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. In the case where the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the effect other than a certain effect may be more easily started than in the case where the display is displayed in the first mode. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode, a certain effect may be always started, or the timer may be configured. In the case where the timer display is displayed in the second mode rather than the case where the display is displayed in the first mode, a certain effect may not be started.

  Moreover, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be always started, or when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the certain effect May be configured so that they may not start.

  The timer display may be changed to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or may be changed to the first mode after the timer display is started to be displayed in the second mode. Good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured not to change to the second mode, and when the timer display is started in the second mode, It may be configured not to change to the first aspect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of the third aspect [for example, the timer display of“ 7: 77 ”shown in FIG. 390 (a),“ 99: 99 shown in FIG. 390 (b) Timer display and the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 390 (g), etc.],
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the big hit symbol is configured to be displayed in symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to give the player expectations at the start of the display of the timer display.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for being displayed in the third mode.

  Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be entirely different from the first aspect.

  Also, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be entirely different from the second aspect.

  Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, The symbols other than the jackpot symbols may be displayed in a fixed manner in the symbol variation display. Moreover, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode The symbol variation display may be configured such that the big hit symbol may not be displayed.

  In addition, the big hit symbol may be configured to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, except when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Also in the case of the symbol variation display may be configured to be determined display of the jackpot symbol.

In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, a state different from the jackpot game played in response to the display of the jackpot symbol being finalized and advantageous for the player The “first state” is configured to be given)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the timer display may be able to further enhance the sense of expectation for the third aspect.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the first state may be provided, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, A state other than the one state may be configured to be given. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be provided without fail, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be added. It may be configured that the state of may not be given.

  Further, the first state may be provided only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or in the case other than the case where the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Also, the first state may be configured to be given.

Also, “the first state is a positive change state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that the power variation state may be provided as the positive change state, or the power assistance state may not be provided. The definite change state may be a definite change state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or even if it is a definite change state (ST) in which the state ends when a certain number of symbol variation displays are performed. Good.

  Moreover, it may change to a definite change state and may be a power support state (special figure low probability spread figure high probability state).

In addition, “the first state is a holding unit”,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, the reserve runso may be a reserve runso that a definite change big hit is determined, or may be a reserve run so that a big hit not a definite change big hit is decided.

Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display. Is configured as
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the player can be expected even if the timer display does not reach a certain time.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, only the timer display is configured to be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. When the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display of time is not changed in the symbol variation display, and the display other than the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is always erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol variation display. If the timer display is displayed in the third display, it is possible that the timer display may not be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol change display. It may be configured.

  In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased only before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol variation display. If the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display may be erased except before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

  Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the display of time in the symbol variation display. Even if the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

  Alternatively, the timer display may be configured to be erased before the time display changes to reach a certain time.

Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is determined without the start being performed even if the display of the time reaches the certain time. Configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, advantageous development can be expected even when a certain effect is not started.

  Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started but only a big hit symbol is determined and displayed. When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started, and a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is also displayed. It may be configured to be finalized. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started but the jackpot symbol is definitely displayed. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of time reaches a certain time, if a certain effect is not started but the big hit symbol is not displayed May be configured to

  In addition, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started but the jackpot symbol is determined and displayed. It may be done. Also, even when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display has reached a certain time, a certain effect is not started but the big hit symbol is displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, the display of time may arrive at a certain time, a certain effect may be started, and it may be comprised so that a big hit symbol may be determined and displayed.

In addition, “the first aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time [for example, a timer display of“ 5:00 ”, etc.]”
The second aspect is an aspect [for example, timer display of "20:00", etc.] in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second time,
The third aspect is an aspect [for example, timer display of "7: 77", etc.] in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the third time,
The second time is longer than the first time and the second time,
The third time is different from the first time,
The third time is different from the second time,
The third time is a time displayed only when the first state is given,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to notice the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

  Here, the first mode may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is only the first time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first The aspect which becomes time other than time may be sufficient. Also, the first aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is necessarily the first time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first It may be an aspect that may not be time.

  The second aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is only the second time, and the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second The aspect which becomes time other than time may be sufficient. The second aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is necessarily the second time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second It may be an aspect that may not take time.

  Also, the third aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is only the third time, or the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the third The aspect which becomes time other than time may be sufficient. The third aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is necessarily the third time, and the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the third It may be an aspect that may not take time.

  In addition, in the first time and the second time, the second time may be always longer, or the second time may not be longer.

  Further, the third time may be a time different from only the first time, or may be a time different from other times than the first time. Also, the third time may be a time that is necessarily different from the first time, or may be the same time as the first time.

  In addition, the third time may be a time different from only the second time, or may be a time different from the time other than the second time. Also, the third time may be a time that is necessarily different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

  Further, the third time may be a time displayed also in cases other than the case where the first state is given, or a time always given when the first state is given It may be time which may not be given when the first state is given.

Also, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and a display following the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer advance display shown in FIG. 339 (3) In the timer display in TM1, it is also possible to display the decimal part etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to recognize that the player is the premier timer at a glance.

  Here, the display of the time first displayed in the timer display may be a display of the number of seconds, and may be configured to be able to display only the display after the decimal point. The display may be a display of the number of seconds, and may be configured to be able to be displayed other than the display after the decimal point. In addition, the display of the time first displayed in the timer display may be configured to be the display of the number of seconds and be sure to display the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display The display of may be configured to be a display of a number of seconds and may not display a display following a decimal point.

In addition, the display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display makes a notice,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to recognize that the player is the premier timer at a glance.

Here, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and a display following the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer notice shown in FIG. 339 (3) In the timer display on the display TM1, the decimal part can also be displayed, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, “effect display means capable of executing effect display [eg, 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 384, etc.]” is provided,
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display,
When the timer display is displayed on any one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “first case [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG If the timer advance notice is being displayed only at
In the case where the timer display is displayed by both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “second case [for example, as shown in FIG. 384 (3) to FIG. (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 If both of the timer announcement effect according to and the timer announcement display on the 7-segment display device SEG are performed, etc.] are configured.
In the case of the first case, the certain effect may not be started.
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to be started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the start of a certain effect may be expected depending on the number of timer display being performed for one certain effect.

  Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only effect display or may be capable of executing display other than effect display. Further, the effect display means may always execute the effect display or may not execute the effect display.

  Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only timer display, or may be capable of displaying other display than timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display or may not display the timer display.

  Further, in the first case, only a certain effect may not be started, or in the first case, any effect other than a certain effect may not be started. It is also good. In the first case, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, or a certain effect may be started.

  In the second case, only a certain effect may be started, and in the second case, a effect other than a certain effect may also be started. In the second case, a certain effect may be always started, or a certain effect may not be started.

  In the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means among the effect display means and the display means than when the timer display is displayed only by the display means among the effect display means and the display means, Finally, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be easily displayed. In addition, the case where the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means is finally a big hit when the timer display is displayed by only the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means. The symbols may be configured to be easily displayed.

  In addition, when timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either one of the effect display means and the display means may end halfway.

  In addition, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and when one timer display of the effect display means and the display means reaches a certain time, a certain effect is started. It may be done.

“The timer display is a display in which the display of the time is counted down. [For example, as shown in FIG. 339 (3) to FIG. Being etc],
The certain time is 0 [for example, timer display of “00:00” shown in FIG. 339 (9), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be easily recognized that a certain time has been reached.

  Note that a certain time may include 0 including decimal places, and may be, for example, a display of “0.00” or “00.00”, “0:00”, or the like. "00:00" may be displayed.

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of types of display may be a first display [for example, change effect display (display change of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 391 (f) to FIG. 39 (g) Advance effect display etc.]
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [eg, a red display mode holding icon shown in FIG. 391 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 391 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display representing waiting for the start of display of a certain advance display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. 39 (p)],
After the display of the first display is started, the display of the second display may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 391 (f) to FIG. (H), the ninja character NJ 4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc., after the hold change prior presentation display due to
In the first state, the third display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), under preparation in a state where the UI unit UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed] Display of image RDY is started, etc.],
In the second state, the display may be ended in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d) to FIG. The image under preparation RDY whose display is started when the unit UI3 is displayed is such that display is ended when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state [eg, FIG. 391 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in a non-display state, etc.]
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect [eg, display of iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), etc.] may be started [eg, FIG. 391 (o) ̃FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, an iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice about a symbol change display being executed [for example, an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q) is a notice display notifying that a big hit is confirmed, etc.]
The second state may occur after the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (l) to FIG. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in the sword reach].
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [eg, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]”.
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is in the non-display state, the hold is not displayed. Icon is not displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display [see, for example, FIG. As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the ready image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d) And the display position of the image under preparation RDY shown in FIG. 391 (m), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [eg, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is easy to be determined and displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in a gold display mode, the display mode of the holding icon is likely to change. , Big hit symbol is easy to be decidedly displayed etc. in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of pre-reading, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [eg, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is easily started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the red display mode hold icon is easily displayed. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

Also, at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [eg, as shown in FIG. 391 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed on the UI unit UI3. Overlapping etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may also overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured to Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

Also, “the first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap. For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap, or even if the displays other than the first display and the sixth display are not configured to overlap. Good. Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (swords reach) shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started, and for example, the super reach shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG. And so on), etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed [for example, a state in which super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. 39 (p)],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, display of an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), etc.,
The certain advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the certain effect is to be started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. Notices the display of the steel plate image TP by sticking to the area around the target TGT, etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain advance notice may give notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give notice of something other than the fact that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain advance notice may always give notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give notice of a certain effect being started.

  In addition, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display, and a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display. Also, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain advance notice.

  Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or displays other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Also, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. 391 (eg, i) As shown in (j) of the figure, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

Also, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. 391 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display in a certain symbol variation display may be The started first display may be erased other than before the start of the symbol variation display to be started next. In addition, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display may be started in a certain symbol fluctuation display. The first displayed display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [eg, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the character of “superheat” Notice display consisting of may be displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [for example, the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 394 (b1) to FIG. (B6), the deca-button image 136aL is prepared The display is started after the display of the image RDY is started, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6), an iron plate Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 394 (b1) to FIG. (B6), the image RDY being prepared Is displayed before the display of the decal button image 136aL starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 394 (b4) to FIG. (B5), etc.],
The eighth display is a display for previewing that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 394 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 401 (a)],”
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, two images in preparation RDY1 and RDY2 may be displayed as shown in FIG. 404 (a)],
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is completed [for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the in-provision image RDY displayed enlarged overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [eg, in FIG. 401 (b) to FIG. (K) As shown, the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in the tenth display [for example, FIG. 391 (a) Description display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (a), the instruction display is on the tutorial display unit TT1 Etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), the image under preparation RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a character relating to the first display [the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (the hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. 391 (f) to FIG. Character of ninja shown in), etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, the hold icon of the red display mode shown in FIG. 391 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [in preparation display, for example, an preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d)],
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display may be a notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. 39 (p) or FIG. 393 (b 3) to FIG. It is a display showing that it is waiting for the display start of the timer announcement effect etc. shown in
It is configured that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and then the hold icon is displayed after the hold change advance effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the display mode of the advance notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (f) to (h), the first hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 is changing from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
The third display may be started in the first state, and the display of the under-provisioning display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (d). As shown in, when the UI unit UI3 displaying the suspension icons h11 and h12 is displayed, the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, etc.],
The third display whose display has been started in the first state is configured such that the display may end in the second state, and the display is started when the hold icon is displayed. In the preparation display, the display ends when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (d) to (n), the display is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The display of the image under preparation RDY is terminated when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display is finished in the display state, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (n) to the drawing (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is After the completion, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 hidden, or as shown in FIG. 393 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared. After the display is completed, the timer announcement effect is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the certain advance notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, a display of an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q) or a button advance notice etc. by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. Is configured so that the notice is started when the display result of the mini game is a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, for example, in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. As shown, when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIG. 394 (c1) to FIG. 3 (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice is completed. Button preview effect is started by Deca button 136aL, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
It is configured to be in the second state after the first state, and may shift to a state in which the hold icon can not be displayed from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in (l) to (m), when transitioning to swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is made non-display, and transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the non-display state Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [e.g., the state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc., before the transition to the sword reach ”,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [eg, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is made non-displayed in the sword reach, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, the third display whose display is started in the first state may end the display in the third state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Also, it is configured that a certain effect may be started after the certain advance notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, a certain preliminary announcement display may not be a true preliminary announcement display, but may be a false preliminary announcement display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Also, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  In addition, the character is not limited to a person, but may be a display of a mini item system such as a notice item.

  Also, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", "the second display after the display of the first display is started. The display to start the display of may be made ". Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Moreover, "it is comprised so that it may become the said 2nd state after the said 1st state" may be "the said 2nd state following the said 1st state." It may be configured as ".

  In addition, after the first state, there may be a transition to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through the other state (for example, the 3rd state or the 3rd state) after the 1st state, it may shift to the 2nd state. In addition, in a state where one symbol variation display is made, there may be a case where the first state shifts to the second state.

  Alternatively, a certain effect may fade in while a certain advance notice fades out.

Further, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a hold icon display area, for example, a UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
In the state where the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable, and the hold icon may be displayed in a state where an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (m As shown in), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol in change.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the display of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the display of the third display, a display of a part different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative symbol May be

  The sixth display may also include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

  Also, the sixth display may include the display of the base of the variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and the hold icon is displayed. In the above state, a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is overlapped with the display in preparation and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), the image in preparation RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. It is displayed overlapping on the display unit TT1, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the display under preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed The display position of the display under preparation in the position and the non-display state of the hold icon is the same, for example, the display position of the image under preparation RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d) and the image in preparation shown in FIG. The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, eg, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is configured to be easier to be started [The display of the hold icon is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the preview preview, the hold icon of the display mode of the preview preview is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 391 (e) When displayed in the golden display mode, the red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured such that the display of the second display is more likely to start, "in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when no change occurs. "" May be.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, eg, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed display [The hold icon display is displayed than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, it is likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode , The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, so that the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the pre-reading There, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, “in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth display does not change. "" May be.

Also, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display. [At least a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (f), a part of the UI unit UI3 is over the ninja character NJ4 as shown in FIG. 391 (f). Being wrapped etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, the display may be configured such that at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping only the first display, or the display of at least a portion of the sixth display is It may be configured such that displays other than the first display may be displayed overlapping. In addition, the display may be configured such that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that it may be overlapped and not displayed on one display.

  In addition, only at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or the display other than at least a part of the display of the sixth display The display may also be configured to be displayed overlapping with the first display.

  In addition, the display of a part of the sixth display may be configured to be displayed overlapping the first display, or all the displays of the sixth display may be displayed on the first display. It may be configured to be displayed overlapping.

  Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. The image including the pending icon display area is displayed in a state in which both the image relating to the image including the pending icon display area and the character relating to the change effect display (the pending change advance presentation display) of the pending icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the character NJ4 of the ninja, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1). Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with any display other than the first display. May be configured. In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. When both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  Also, even if only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be done. Also, even if only the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state other than the state in which both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be configured.

  Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (swords reach) shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG. (Q), etc.] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. 391 (m) to the same It is a state etc. before the super reach shown in Figure (q) is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG. Reach is being executed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

  The first state may be a reach state before developing into an SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is in progress in the certain change.

  Also, the first state is a state before developing into an SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reaching state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state of reach execution.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a timer notice display [for example, a display of a timer notice effect shown in FIG. 394 (b3) to FIG. 3 (b5), and the like],
A game stand that features. "
I also explained about

  The timer advance notice may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of types of timer advance notices, it may be a certain kind of timer advance notice.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) to FIG. 39 (q), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Also, when there are multiple types of mini games, it may be a type of mini game.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button advance effect by the deca-button 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6), etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be In addition, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), etc.]”
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fifth display may be displayed as an effect, or an indication other than the fifth display may be displayed as an effect. May be Further, the fifth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or may be configured so that the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, or when the fifth display is displayed. If the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed.

  Also, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display aspect and a certain advance display aspect is displayed only in a certain aspect There may be.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started. [The display under preparation whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (i) to FIG. (J) In preparation, the image RDY is being displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [a certain symbol The character relating to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has been started in the variable display is erased before the next symbol fluctuation display is started, for example, FIG. As shown in (h) through (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, It may be configured that the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased other than before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started. In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or a certain symbol variation The first display whose display is started in the display may be configured so that it may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  Note that a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. In addition, a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state).

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed [the notice is performed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), a preliminary display may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image RDY is being prepared, and the warning display consisting of the letters "excessive heat", etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [a button or a lever, for example, effect button 136 etc.]" is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [display of an image of a button or a lever, for example, a deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts to be displayed after the third display is started, and the display of images of buttons and levers is started to be displayed after the display in progress is started, For example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6), the Deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the display of the image RDY being prepared, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started, and when the button (or the lever is operated during the display of the image of the button or the lever, the notice is given) The iron plate image TP is displayed, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG.
The third display is a display which is ended before the display of the seventh display is started. [In preparation display is ended before the display of the button or the lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 394 (b1) to FIG. 3 (b6), the image under preparation RDY is such that the display is ended before the display of the decal button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

  The seventh display may be a big button image among the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the deca-button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the deca-button image is displayed.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the button image of the normal color is displayed and when the button image of the special color is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more easily determined when the button image of the special color is displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and in the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the big hit symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 394 (b4) to FIG. (B5), etc.],
The eighth display is a display for previewing that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 394 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 401 (a)],”
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the third displays may be displayed. [The two in-provision displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 404 (a), two in-provision images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done etc],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes [the display of the display in progress of one of the two displays in progress The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [In preparation display in which the display mode has changed overlap with the fluctuation icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), The displayed preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [two in preparation displays are displayed. In this case, all are digested in the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (b) to FIG. (K), two in-provision images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the display of the plurality of types is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example,“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a). It is the displayed explanation etc.],
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed, and [an explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, , As shown in FIG. 391 (a), the instruction display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [In preparation display is displayed in a specific display area where an explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (d As shown in), the in-provisioning image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc. where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “display indicating that the display start of a certain advance notice display is waiting” means “character display in preparation [for example,“ in preparation ”in preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d) Display of letters etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eleventh display [ball drop display, for example, ball drop error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 422 (a1), etc.]”.
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball extraction error display ERR1, the character display of "Please pull the ball" is prompted to open the ball, etc.,
In a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display At least a part of the in-provision display is overlapped with the in-progress display in a state where both the in-provision display and the out-of-ball display are displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 422 (a2) In preparation, the image RDY is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or a display prompting other than the game ball to be ejected. Further, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

  Further, the eleventh display may be a display prompting to discharge only the game balls, or a display prompting to discharge other than the game balls.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display without fail May be displayed, and in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, displays other than at least a part of the third display are overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. And in a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of a part of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. May be

In addition, in a state in which both the certain advance notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain advance notice display is overlapped and displayed on the eleventh display. When at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice is overlapped with the ball withdrawal display in a state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball withdrawal display are displayed, for example, As shown in 422 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped only with the eleventh display. The display may be configured, and in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh by all means. Or at least a part of the notice may be displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh in a state where both the notice and the eleventh display are displayed. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both of the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state other than the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. It is preferable that all the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh when both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed. May be

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a pachinko machine [ball-and-ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a slot machine [rolling-type game machine],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Although the hold icon may be used as a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is held, this can be realized according to this game console.

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
An image display means,
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Means of notification that can execute multiple types of notifications,
A game console equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice icons.
The said hold display is a display displayed on the hold display area in the said image display means,
The said pending | holding display is a display according to the number (henceforth "the pending | holding number") by which the action | operation of the said symbol fluctuation display is suspended,
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display unit,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
The first preview icon among the plurality of types of preview icons is larger than the first number during the period during which one of the symbol variation display is being executed. It is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if two numbers are digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing false notice in the same manner as the notice mode,
The notice means is means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be disjointed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number, wherein the number of preview icons to be displayed in the preview icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A hold display unit capable of executing display according to the number of holdings;
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 5,
The hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Equipped with a pre-reading notice that can carry out pre-reading notice,
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be pre-read is executed, the notice icon may be digested a fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) to be executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth The number may be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is being held in a period during which the first symbol change display is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 10)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 9,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) to be executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation is performed The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the display period.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, wherein
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
It has a production means that can execute multiple types of effects,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the first announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is a second announcement,
The first notice is a different notice from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 15)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the display types is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol fluctuation display") displayed after the first symbol fluctuation display, the first symbol not displayed during the display of the first symbol fluctuation display The notice icon of is configured to be digestible,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game console described in Appendix 15 or 16,
The first notice icon may be started to be displayed during display of the first symbol variation display as pre-reading notification of the second symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During the display of one symbol variation display, the jackpot is larger when the second number of the first preview icons are digested than when the first number of the first preview icons are digested. Easily
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the symbol variation display digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice may be displayed as the notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 21)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 20,
One of the display types is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first false notice may be displayed as the false notice.
The display mode of the first false preview display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first preview display,
In the symbol variation display where the first false notice display is displayed, it is configured to be a gap,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 26)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Equipped with presentation control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 28)
It is a game console described in Appendix 27,
Main control means,
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 30)
First display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Second display means,
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number (hereinafter referred to as the "number of reservations") in which the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended,
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display unit,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested;
During a period in which one of the symbol variation display is being executed, the second number digest which is larger than the first number is a big hit when the notice icon is greater than the first number. It is configured to be easy to
The second display means is provided in the notice icon display area as a preview notice, prior to the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) which is the target of the prefetching. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 31)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 32)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode,
The second display means can display the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a good display means,
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means configured of a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 34)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 33,
One display unit of the plurality of display units is an image display unit,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number on the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon on the notice icon display area,
The game stand characterized in that the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.

(Appendix 35)
It is a game console described in Appendix 34,
The hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 36)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 37)
30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 36, wherein
The notice icon may be digested a fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) to be executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth The number may be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 38)
30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 36, wherein
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be read.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 38, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game console described in Appendix 39,
The notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed that is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 41)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 40, wherein
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 41, wherein
It has a production means that can execute multiple types of effects,
As the notice icon, a first notice icon can be displayed,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display,
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The game stand characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is performed.

(Appendix 43)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 42, wherein
Main control means,
Effect control means,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 43, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 45)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the notice icons among the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first effect display is displayed as the effect display by digesting the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as the "first number of notice icons") in one pattern variation display. Are configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon,
The game console, wherein the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by display.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the first effect display may be displayed until one of the first number of icons is displayed and the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit by making the number of notice icons appear as a symbol change prior to the suspension to be read ahead.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon may be displayed. A corresponding effect display B may be performed, or a effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. You may

  Also, only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be newly added. It may be displayed on the screen.

(Appendix 46)
It is a game console described in Appendix 45,
The first effect display is configured not to be displayed even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "the second number of notice icons") are digested in one pattern variation display. Yes,
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including the notice icon of one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons not including the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol change display. Since the first effect display is not displayed if b is not digested, it may be possible to give a player a sense of superiority to the player who could see the first effect display.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  The first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Also, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  In addition, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of advance notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or all of the first effect display may be displayed.

  In addition, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of the preview icons that have been digested, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same.

  In addition, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be always digested.

  In addition, even when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested, and the second number of notice icons are digested. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

(Supplementary Note 47)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 45 or 46,
One of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
By digesting the third notice icon, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect and enhance the effect.

  The third notice icon may be one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  Also, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 45 to 47,
In the case where the lost symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol fluctuation display") which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the fourth symbol fluctuation display is started after the third symbol fluctuation display is started. The plurality of notice icons may be digested before termination.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy it until the change of the pending for pre-reading is over.

  In addition, it is digested from the first symbol fluctuation display or the third symbol fluctuation display to the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching in the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching is a big hit and it is a loss The maximum number of preview icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, it is digested from the first symbol fluctuation display or the third symbol fluctuation display to the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching is a big hit and it is a loss The minimum number of preview icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, one pattern which is performed before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol fluctuation display) The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the target of the pre-reading is a big hit or when it is lost It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, one pattern which is performed before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol fluctuation display) The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the target of pre-reading is a big hit or when it is lost It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) to be prefetched in the state in which the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended The same may or may not be the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading is a big hit and the case where it is lost.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) to be prefetched in the state in which the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended The same may or may not be the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading is a big hit and the case where it is lost.

(Supplementary Note 49)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 48,
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of advance notice icons are displayed from the start of the third symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display There is a case,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a lower jackpot, so it may be possible to enjoy it until the change of the reserve to be read ahead is over.

(Appendix 50)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 45 to 49,
Equipped with a hold display means,
The suspension display means is a means capable of displaying the number of suspension displays corresponding to the number of times the start of symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as “the number of suspension”).
A game stand characterized by

  The hold display unit may be an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting unit such as an LED, or a movable unit.

(Appendix 51)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings according to the number at which the notice icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix 52)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 53)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 54)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;
The display of one of a plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to a notice icon,
The display of one of a plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a preview notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or the light guide plate may be lens cut and the pattern may appear by irradiating it from the side with a light source. , And may be configured by light emitting means such as an LED, or may be configured by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to stocking of the notice icon, may be a display related to digesting the notice icon, or notice of stock of the notice icon It may be a display, or may be an effect display that is executed when the advance notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
It is a game console described in Appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Note that one preview icon may be displayed anew.

  In addition, an effect that the notice icon is digested may be performed by the second display means.

(Appendix 56)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display indicating that the preview icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that "a display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. May be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 54 to 56, wherein
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 58)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 54 to 56, wherein
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 59)
Display means,
Movable means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as "notice icon digest effect") is performed,
There may be a case where an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as "first movable means effect") is performed as the advance notice icon digestion effect.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, although the effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, the movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may be performed. In this case, the corresponding notice icons may be displayed for each of the movable means effects, or the notice icons corresponding to the movable means for which the effects are performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
It is a game console described in Appendix 59,
When the twenty-first notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the twenty-first notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may not be performed, or when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, the first movable means must be taken. Means presentation may be performed.

  In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, there may be a case where an effect different from the first moving means effect (effect different in operation) may be performed.

  In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, effects may be performed by movable means different from the first movable means, and the twenty-first notice icon is digested. And, the effect by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Supplementary Note 61)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 59 or 60,
When the second notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed, and when the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) May be performed.

(Supplementary Note 62)
It is a game stand according to any one of Appendices 59 to 61,
Equipped with operating means,
The movable means is the operation means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operation means changes from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "change" has a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and movement.

(Supplementary Note 63)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 59 to 62, wherein
A second movable means,
The movable means is a first movable means,
An effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed as the advance notice icon consumption effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 64)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a warning icon increase indication display,
The notice icon increase indication display is a indication indicating that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase indication display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that even when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed, or when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be always displayed.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note 64,
In the symbol variation display performed prior to the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, the change which the display of a prior art icon increase suggestion display complete | finish may be a 2nd symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 64 or 65,
The one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase indication may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display that suggests that the notice icon is increased by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not be increased.

  Further, the notice icon increase indication display may be a notice of a case where the notice icon does not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display that suggests that a plurality of notice icons are increased. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Also, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Supplementary Note 67)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 64 or 65,
The notice icon of a twelfth number of the notice icons of the eleventh number suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means,
Holding display means,
A game console equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the hold,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold display") of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol change display") to be pre-read is displayed, the first Between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be digested,
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. May be
The first symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 69)
It is a game console described in Appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a prefetch display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 70)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth hold display”) of the lost symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth symbol change display”) to be pre-read is displayed, the third The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 71)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in a second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing a current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the change frequency of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a generation frequency of one-shot notification effect change There is a mode to make it

  In addition, the display position of the preview icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the preview icon is displayed, or the preview of the display position of the intermediate animation may be displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

  In addition, here, "the notice icon" may be only one notice icon or may be only a part of notice icons among a plurality of notice icons, or all of a plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon of. Also, the "notice icon" may be only the notice icon displayed first of the notice icons, or a part of the notice icons including the notice icon displayed first. It may be an icon.

  Also, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely coincide, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  In addition, a notice icon may be displayed in the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. Also, the notice icon may be displayed in the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Also, the second display and the advance notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed simultaneously.

  In addition, the frequency at which the display is performed may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, gaze guidance of the notice icon May be easier. Further, the sizes may be different between the first display area and the second display area, or the roles may be different between the first display area and the second display area. For example, although advance notice display is not performed in the first display area, notice display may also be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 73)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The preview icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as "first part"),
Once the preview icon is digested, the overlap of the second display to the first portion is resolved.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it on the second display area where the explanation about the notice icon related to the present and the subsequent symbol fluctuation display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, it may be possible to newly expect the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display is digested.

  The entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first part.

  In addition, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display, or may be digested in a symbol variation display which is an object of pre-reading.

  Further, the notice icon may be always digested in the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading.

  Also, the advance notice icon may be configured to be displayable only in a single manner, or may be configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of times. Here, when displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icons may be able to be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or even if the upper limit number is not set, the notice icons may be displayed without limitation. Good.

(Appendix 74)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The display of the second display may be started while the preview icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 75)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the second display is not started.

(Supplementary Note 76)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 75, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Supplementary Note 77)
70. A game console according to any one of appendices 71 to 76, wherein
The second display area is an area divided by lines.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 78)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
"The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed", as described in appendix 71, "the notice icon" Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 79)
70. A game console according to any one of appendices 71 to 78, wherein
In the case of the symbol variation display which is a big hit, the number of the notice icons is digested more than the symbol variation display which is a loss.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 80)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanatory display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One of the description displays of the plurality of types of description displays is a first description display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case of the big hit change, the number of the notice icon is more digested than the lost change,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 81)
It is a game console described in appendix 80,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”) in which the first explanation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 82)
It is a game console described in appendix 81,
When the preview icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanatory display is not displayed in the first explanatory display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 83)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 80 to 82, wherein
One of the description displays of the plurality of types of description displays is a second description display,
The second explanatory display is a display indicating the current stage of rendering,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”) in which the second explanation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 84)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 83,
Even when the preview icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 85)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 80 to 84, wherein
The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of types of preview icons”) as the preview icons,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 86)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display means,
The game console according to claim 1, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.

(Appendix 87)
It is a game console described in Appendix 86,
The first display is not displayed when the preview icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 88)
It is a game console described in Appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 89)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 88, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 90)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 89, wherein
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 91)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 90, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The above-mentioned notice icon is an icon which may be displayed also in the above-mentioned 2nd display field, A game stand characterized by things.

(Appendix 92)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 91,
The third display is not displayed in a state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area,
A game stand characterized by

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining the character displayed on the second display means.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to an effect display in progress.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating a probability change expectation.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the hit probability of reach.

  Also, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the jackpot expectation of the character.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first preview display.

(Supplementary note 93)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons;
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The display area where the advance notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including one notice icon (hereinafter referred to as "first notice icon") of the plurality of notice icons,
The second display is a display including a display in which the first preview icon is represented in a large size,
After the second indication is made, the first indication may be made,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged view of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 93,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The first display is a display indicating that the first preview icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 95)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 93 or 94,
The third display is a display that can not be overlapped with the first display,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped to the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 96)
Appendices 93 to 95 according to any one of the game consoles, wherein
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 97)
Appendices 93 to 96 according to any one of the game consoles, wherein
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Supplementary Note 98)
The gaming machine described in appendix 97,
The second display is a display that is also performed when the first preview icon is digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 99)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is obtained, the notice icon obtained along with at least a part of the already obtained notice icon is enlarged and displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 100)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a display of a decoration pattern,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 101)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note 100,
The display of the position of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is configured to be displayable in a portion of the second display that is expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “extended portion”),
The extension part is a part not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 102)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 101,
The effect display is a prefetch notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 103)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 101 or Supplementary Note 102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable;
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 104)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 100 to 103, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of speech notices,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 105)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to symbol variation display,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 106)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 105,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is configured to be able to overlap and be displayed in a portion of the second display that is expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “extended portion”),
The extension portion is a portion which is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 107)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 106,
The effect display is a display of a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 108)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 106 or Supplementary Note 107,
The effect display is a display for changing the display mode of the icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 109)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes 106 to 108, wherein
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the extension portion.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 110)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes 106 to 109, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of words,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extension.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 111)
It is a game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 110, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extension portion, the sixth display is configured to be able to overlap and display;
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 112)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 111, wherein
The icon is a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 113)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 112,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the pending icons corresponding to the number of pending start of symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 114)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 114, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a1)
Operation means,
The first area,
A game console equipped with
The first area is an area where game balls can enter.
The number of times of receiving the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of acceptance") can be increased or decreased,
If the game ball enters the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix a1,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"),
In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed,
Even if the number of times of acceptance is 0, the second display may be displayed,
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a4)
The game console described in Appendix a3,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be performed in parallel,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a5)
It is a game console according to the a3 or a4.
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”) in the first button effect.
The display means can display an image (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”) imitating the operation means in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a5, wherein
When the operation means is operated, the number of times of acceptance may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a6, wherein
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a7, wherein
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a8, wherein
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which game balls can pass,
The game ball having passed through the second area may enter the first area,
If the game ball enters the second area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b1)
The first area,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The first area is an area where game balls can enter.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"),
When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first indication is not overlapped with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note b1,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe indication does not overlap the second indication,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b3)
It is a game console described in Appendix b2,
The wipe display is displayed in a partial area of a display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b4)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The first display is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b5)
It is a game console described in Appendix b4,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein
The display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b6, wherein
When the game ball enters the first area while the first display is displayed, the first display is continuously displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b7, wherein
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which game balls can pass,
The game ball having passed through the second area may enter the first area,
If the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b10)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol fluctuation display") after symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol fluctuation display"). Yes,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first variation icon") can be displayed,
The icon displayed as the first variation icon is configured to be able to be displayed as a notice icon in the second symbol variation display,
The area where the advance notice icon is displayed is an area different from the area where the first variation icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c2)
The game console described in the appendix c1,
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second variation icon") can be displayed,
Both the second fluctuation icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayable.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c3)
The gaming machine according to the appendix c1 or c2, wherein
The icon displayed as the hold icon can be displayed as a change icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon associated with a change in display mode of the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c4)
The game console described in appendix c3,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon associated with a change of the display mode of the variation icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c5)
It is a game console as described in appendix c3 or c4,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon associated with a change in display mode of the hold icon,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon associated with a change in the display mode of the variation icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c6)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c5, wherein
The display mode of the advance notice icon is different from the display mode of the change icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c1 to c6, wherein
It is possible to display an animation including the movement of the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c8)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c7, wherein
The display means is configured to include an image display device.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c9)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c8, wherein
In the non power saving state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c10)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third display") prompting the player to continuously hit the operation means.
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is continuously hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed and held,
The second display is a display that is easier to be started when the operation means is continuously hit than when the operation means is long pressed.
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be received (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
The light emitting means is a means which is turned on in the first state;
The light emitting unit is a unit which is turned off in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means which emits light in a first light emission mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that emits light in a second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d3, wherein
It has symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d4, wherein
The second display is a display that is not started only by the long press on the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d5, wherein
When the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display can be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d6, wherein
The long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as "first display"),
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode,
The second display is performed a second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than in the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It is a display that is easier to start if you
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
The second number is a number greater than one,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display"),
The third display mode is a display mode for prompting the user to operate the operation means continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be received (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d9)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d8,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means which is in a light emitting state in the first state,
The light emitting means is a means which is in a non-light emitting state in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d10)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d8,
Equipped with light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means emits light in the first light emission mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emission mode,
The second light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d11)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d9 or d10,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d11, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d12,
The second display is a display that is not started only when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d13, wherein
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d15)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d14,
In the case where the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second period of time, the operating means is artificially regarded as having undergone the first number of operations in the first operating mode. The display of is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d15,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d16,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Reproduction means capable of executing multiple kinds of renditions,
A game console equipped with
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
In the second effect, a second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It is a production that is more likely to be started if
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d19)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d18,
It has symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operating means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d20)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note d18 or d19,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d21)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d20,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as the operation means is artificially operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. It is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d18 to d21,
The second effect is an effect that is not started only when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d18 to d22,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a first state in a state where an operation for starting the first effect by the operation means can be received,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state in a state where an operation for starting the second effect by the operation means can be received,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d24)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d23,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d25)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d23,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in a second mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d26)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d25,
The first aspect is a first color,
The second aspect is a second color,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d23 to d26, wherein
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d18 to d27,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display of a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as "first display"),
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display"),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations by the operation means is performed in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display,
The fourth display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is the operating means in the first operation mode, compared to the case where one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the fourth display. The image is more likely to be selected if the second number of operations is performed by
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d30)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d29,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display different from the first display,
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d31)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d29 or d30,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display"),
The third display mode is a display mode for prompting the user to operate the operation means continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d32)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d31,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means which is in a light emitting state in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d29 to d32, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d29 to d33, wherein
The first image is an image which is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d29 to d34, wherein
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d36)
In the game console described in Appendix d35,
In the case where the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second period of time, the operating means is artificially regarded as having performed the first number of operations in the first operating mode. The first display is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d37)
Supplementary note d29 to d36 of the game console according to any one of
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d38)
Supplementary note d29 to d36 of the game console according to any one of
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 39)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Reproduction means capable of executing multiple kinds of renditions,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first selection display,
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image has the first operation mode in which the first selection mode is performed, compared with the case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the first selection display is performed. The image is more likely to be selected if the second number of operations is performed by the means.
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d40)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d39,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d41)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d39 or d40,
It has symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operating means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d41, wherein
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d43)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d42,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as the operation means is artificially operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. It is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d44)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d42 or d43,
During execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time or more, one operation is performed by the operation means Configured to be
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d45)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d44, wherein
The first image is an image which is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d45, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second selection display,
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The second image is an image that can be selected when a third number of operations are performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the second selection display is being performed.
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d47)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d46,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d48)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d47, wherein
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a first state in a state where an operation for starting the first effect by the operation means can be received,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 49)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d48,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d50)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d48,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in a second mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d51)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d50,
The first aspect is a first color,
The second aspect is a second color,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d52)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d51, wherein
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d53)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d51, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 54)
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;
A game console equipped with
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as "first display"),
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may be started while the symbol variation display is displayed,
The second display is a display that may be started while the symbol variation display is displayed,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third display") prompting the player to hit the operating means continuously.
The first display is a display that may be started when the operation means is continuously hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display for prompting the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only when the operation means is pressed once for a long time after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 55)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d54,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting states
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
One of the plurality of light emission states is a first light emission state,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of receiving an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d56)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d55,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state,
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is a light off state,
The light emitting means being in the lighted state represents a state in which the operation of the operation means is received,
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation of the operation means is not received.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d57)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d55,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state,
The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode,
The second light emission state is a light emission state in a second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d58)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d57, wherein
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d59)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d58, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “selection display”) instructing to select one of the plurality of options,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display (hereinafter referred to as a “fifth display”) displayed when the first option among the plurality of options is selected,
The fifth display is a display that may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only when the operation means is pressed once for a long time after the display of the selection display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d60)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d59,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number after the display of the selection display is started,
The first number is two or more.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d61)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d60, wherein
After the display of the third display is started, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the display of the first display may be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d62)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d61, wherein
The long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d63)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d62, wherein
One of the plurality of states for receiving the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One of the plurality of states for receiving the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d64)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d63,
The first state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the first display is received.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d65)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d63 or d64,
The second state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the second display is received.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d66)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d63 to d65, wherein
The first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first state was reached,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d67)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d63 to d66, wherein
The second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d68)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d67, wherein
The second display is a display in which display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a second number of times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second number is two or more.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d69)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d68, wherein
The third display is a display including a first image,
The first image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d70)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d69,
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images;
The second image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d71)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d70,
The second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d72)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d71, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d73)
The first operation means,
Second production means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
If the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d74)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d73,
The “demonstration performed by the second rendering means” described in Appendix d73 is “a presentation performed by the second rendering means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d75)
It is a game console according to adjunct d73 or d74,
Equipped with first presentation means,
The first effect means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 76)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d73 to d75, wherein
Equipped with a third presentation means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is means provided to the third effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d77)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d76,
The third effect means is an image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 78)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d73 to d77, wherein
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 79)
It is a game console provided with a first operation means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
If the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is an effect performed by a second effect means,
The second effect means is a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d80)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d79,
"The effect performed by the second effect means" described in the supplementary note d79 is "the effect performed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode".
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d81)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d81,
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode,
The first light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 82)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d81, wherein
Equipped with first presentation means,
The first effect means is a first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 83)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d82, wherein
Equipped with a third presentation means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is means provided to the third effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 84)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d83,
Equipped with a fourth presentation means,
The fourth effect means is a second image display means,
The fourth effect means is means provided to the third effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 85)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 79 to 84, wherein
It has symbol display means that can display symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display,
The second effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d86)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d85, wherein
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 87)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d86, wherein
The “operation in the first operation mode” described in the supplementary note d79 is a “multiple operation”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 88)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d87, wherein
The “operation in the second operation mode” described in the supplementary note d79 is a “long press operation”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 89)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d88,
The long press operation is an operation in which the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 79)
It is a game console provided with a first operation means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
If the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is a back button effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d80)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d79,
Equipped with first presentation means,
The first effect means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d81)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d80,
The “demonstration performed by the first rendering means” described in the supplementary note d80 is “a rendering performed by displaying the first display by the first rendering means”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 82)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d81, wherein
The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 83)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 82,
The “effect performed by the first effect means” described in the additional statement 82 is “effect performed by the first effect means displaying the second display”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 84)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d81, wherein
Equipped with a second presentation means,
The second effect means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d85)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d84,
The “demonstration performed by the second rendering means” described in the supplementary note d84 is “a presentation performed by the second rendering means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d86)
The first operation means,
Second operation means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be started,
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second display is not started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 87)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d86,
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 88)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d86 or d87,
The second display is a display that is displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a mini game,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display”) is a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”). And
The effect display related to the mini game (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "the second operation promotion display"). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in a first period,
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in a second period,
The first display and the second display are at least partially overlapping periods (hereinafter referred to as “third period”),
The result of the first effect display is to be carried out as a notice (hereinafter referred to as the "first notice"),
The result of the second effect display is to be given as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e1,
When the operation means is operated in the third period, the first notice according to the second notice is performed after the second notice is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e3)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e1,
When the operation means is operated in the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is performed,
The first notice may change according to the second notice after the second notice is made,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e4)
The game console according to any one of appendices e1 to e3, wherein
In the third period, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The second effect display is a display including a display of an effective period of the operation means related to the mini game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e5, wherein
The first notice is a notice that can be performed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
In the case where the first notice is performed in the second mode than in the first mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
When the mini game is started, the first notice is more likely to be performed by the second mode than the first mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e7)
It is a game console described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be implemented in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
When said 2nd notice is carried out in said 4th mode, it is constituted so that a big hit symbol may be finally displayed finally,
The second notice is configured to be performed in the fourth aspect when the first notice is performed in the second aspect,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e8)
It is a game console described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be implemented in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol may be finally clearly displayed when executed in the fourth mode than when executed in the third mode,
In the case of the first case than in the second case, the jackpot symbol is configured so as to be more likely to be finally displayed,
In the second case than in the third case, the jackpot symbol is configured so that it is likely to be finalized and displayed finally,
In the third case than in the fourth case, the jackpot symbol is configured so that it is easy to be finally displayed.
The first case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The second case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the third mode.
The third case is a case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first mode, and the second notice is executed in the third mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e9)
It is a game console described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be implemented in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol may be finally clearly displayed when executed in the fourth mode than when executed in the third mode,
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the same as in the case of the first case, or the first case is configured so that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed easily Has been
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the second case is configured so that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed. Has been
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the third case is configured so that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed. Has been
The first case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The second case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the third mode.
The third case is a case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, and the second notice is performed in the third mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The number of times the operating means is operated for the result of the first effect display to be performed, and the number of times the operation means for the result of the second effect display to be operated is operated Is different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e10,
In the case where the mini game is played and the first notice is given, it is likely that the big hit symbol is finally determined display than in the case where the mini game is not played and the first notice is given. Is configured to
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e12)
A gaming table provided with display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Multiple types of mini games are configured to be executable,
One of the multiple types of mini games is a first mini game,
One of the plurality of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a display area,
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e13)
It is a game console described in appendix e12,
Equipped with a means of notice that can carry out multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given,
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result suggesting that the second notice is to be made (hereinafter referred to as "the second result"),
One of the results of the second mini game is the second result,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e14)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note e12 or e13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
When the first mini game is performed, the first effect is more easily performed than the second effect,
When the second mini game is performed, the second effect is more easily performed than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e15)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e14,
The appearance rates of the plurality of mini games differ between the non-power support state and the power support state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e16)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e15, wherein
The first mini game is a mini game in which a first character appears and is played.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character is played.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e17)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e13,
The first mini game is a game that may be played with the appearance of a first character,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be played with the appearance of the first character,
The first mini game is a mini game that may be played with the appearance of a third character,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be played with the appearance of a fourth character,
In the first mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears.
In the second mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e18)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e17,
Another effect display (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") is performed when the mini game is not displayed in the display area.
The third effect display is erased when the mini game is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e19)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e18,
The display area is divided by a frame,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e19,
The certain display area is a display area set in advance.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e21)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e20, wherein
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a display area preset in relation to the start of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e22)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e23)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
It has a display means (hereinafter referred to as "second display means") other than the display means, and
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e24)
A means of notice that can carry out multiple notices,
Display means capable of displaying a mini game,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
In the case where the second notice is given rather than the first notice, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
The mini game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared,
One of the plurality of results is a first result,
One of the plurality of results is a second result,
The notice is a notice that is executed according to the result of the mini game,
When the second result is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than when the first result is derived,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 25)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e24,
Before the result of the mini game is derived, the fact that the result of the mini game is the second result suggests that the second notice is likely to be made.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e26)
It is a game console according to the remarks e24 or e25,
Equipped with presentation means capable of executing the first presentation,
The effect means is display means,
The first effect is an effect to be performed in relation to the decorative symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared,
One of the plurality of rendering results is a first rendering result,
One of the plurality of rendering results is a second rendering result,
Before the result of the first effect is derived, it is suggested that the result of the first effect will be an advantageous development as it becomes the second effect result.
It is easier for the player to be given an advantage advantageous to the player in the second effect result than in the second result.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 27)
The game console described in appendix e26,
If the second rendering result is derived, a big hit is awarded,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 28)
It is a game console according to the remarks e26 or e27,
The mini game is a game that can be performed in a first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be performed in a second period,
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 29)
The game console according to any one of appendices e26 to e28,
In the one decorative symbol variation display, the mini game is started earlier than the first effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e30)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e29, wherein
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived.
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived.
If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is easier to be given than the second notice,
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is easier to be given than the first notice,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e31)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e30, wherein
Even if the second advance notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter referred to as the “first case”), the first advance notice is executed if the result of the mini game is not derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e32)
It is a game console described in appendix e31,
It has hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon being displayed,
In the first case, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon if the result of the mini game is not derived.
In the first case, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon when the result of the mini game is derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e33)
It is a game console described in appendix e31,
It has hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon being displayed,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol Changing from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display started later than the change display
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e34)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e29, wherein
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
In the mini game, the same result is derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 35)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e34, wherein
The mini game is started before reaching
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 36)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a mini game,
The configuration is such that the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means,
The result of the mini game is changed according to the operation situation of the operation means,
The result of the mini game may include a result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") that is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 37)
The gaming machine described in Appendix e36,
The mini game is a game aiming to achieve a certain task,
Depending on the operation status of the operation means, whether or not the certain task is achieved changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 38)
It is a game console as described in appendix e36 or e37,
It has decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
The mini game is a game that is started in a first period (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended,
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 39)
It is a game console described in appendix e38,
The automatic operation of the operation means is configured to be executable,
In the mini game in the first case, the auto operation is configured to be inexecutable.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e40)
It is a game console as described in appendix e38 or e39,
The mini game may be started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
The second period is a period including execution of the decorative symbol variation display and execution of a big hit game,
The first result is more easily derived as a result of the mini game in the first case than in the second case.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 41)
It is a game console described in appendix e40,
The second period is a period not including the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e42)
It is a game console according to the remarks e40 or e41,
In the second case, as a result of the mini game, a result related to the result of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second result") is more easily derived than in the first case. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 43)
The game console described in Appendix e42,
The second result when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a prefetch notice.
The second result in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game is a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e40 to e43,
The types of mini games differ between the first case and the second case,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 45)
The game console according to any one of appendices e40 to e44, wherein
In the mini game of the first case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first effective period display”) is configured to be displayed,
In the mini game of the second case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second effective period display”) is displayed.
The first effective period display is a meter display,
The second effective period display is a meter display,
The rate at which the meter decreases is different between the first lifetime indication and the second lifetime period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e46)
The game console according to any one of appendices e40 to e45,
In the mini game of the first case, a display for prompting the user to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first operation promotion display") is displayed.
In the mini game of the second case, a display for prompting the user to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second operation prompting display") is displayed.
The first operation prompting display comprises a first number of display patterns,
The second operation prompting display comprises a second number of display patterns,
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 47)
The game console according to any one of appendices e38 to e46,
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini game,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 48)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display;
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The second effect display is an effect display of a mini game,
The first effect display is an effect display in which a big hit advance notice (hereinafter referred to as "first notice") may be executed,
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice”) related to the first notice may be derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 49)
The game console described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-indication,
The pseudo chain display is a display in which temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop indications of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-series display increases.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e50)
The game console described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-indication,
The pseudo chain display is a display in which temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo continuous display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 51)
The game console described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-indication,
The pseudo chain display is a display in which temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop indications of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-series display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f1)
The first operation means,
Second operation means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
The first effect can be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The second operation means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states in which the first effect is being performed (hereinafter referred to as "first state"),
A game stand characterized by

  The first effect may be a preliminary effect. The second operation means may be an operation means larger than the first operation means or a small operation means.

(Appendix f2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f1,
The first state is a state in an entire period in which the first effect is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note f1 or f2,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
If the second effect is started when the second operation means is operated within a second period, and if the second effect is not started even if the second operation means is operated Is configured to be
The second operation means is an operation means that may vibrate when the second operation means is operated within the second period.
A game stand characterized by

  The second operation means may be an operation means that always vibrates when the second operation means is operated within the second period.

(Appendix f4)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f3,
The second operation means is configured to vibrate also in at least a part of the states in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as "second state"),
The first state is a state in which the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
When the first operation means is operated within a first period, the first effect is started, and when the first operation means is operated, the first effect is not started Is configured to be
The second operation means is an operation means that may vibrate when the second operation means is operated within the first period.
A game stand characterized by

  That is, even in a state where the first effect is not performed, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate or may be configured to vibrate.

(Appendix f6)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f5,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notification,
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification for prompting operation of the first operation means,
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period,
A game stand characterized by

  That is, the second operation means may be an operation means that may vibrate when the second operation means is operated in a state where the first notification is being performed, or the vibration may be always generated. It may be an operating means.

(Appendix f7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f6, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect,
According to the operation of the first operation means, any one of the first effect and the third effect can be started.
The second operation means is configured not to vibrate when the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f7, wherein
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f9)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f10)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is configured to start a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) in response to the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g1,
The first preliminary display is a display including a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note g1 or g2,
The first preliminary display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first preliminary display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g3,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "third notice display"),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third preliminary indication is started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g4,
The third preliminary display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period,
The first preliminary display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The first display is a display on which the first preliminary display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display on which another notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second notice display”) is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g7)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g6,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a second display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fourth display mode,
In the case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode than in the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the method according to the third display mode is performed. The first notice display is configured to be easily displayed,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the first preliminary display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preliminary display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g6,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be displayed in a sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The first notice by the third display mode is more likely to be displayed in the sixth display mode than the operation prompt display is displayed in the fifth display mode. The display is configured to be easily displayed,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the first preliminary display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preliminary display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g8,
The first notice display is a display displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a third period,
The period during which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period,
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is a shorter period than the third period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g10)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g9,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g11)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying the first display;
A game console equipped with
The first display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The first display is configured to start a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "first notice display") in response to the operation of the operation means.
The first preliminary display is a display including a display regarding an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g12)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g11,
The first preliminary display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first preliminary display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g12,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "third notice display"),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third preliminary indication is started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g13,
The third preliminary display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period,
The first preliminary display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g14,
The first display is a display on which the first preliminary display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display on which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g15,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation prompting display is a notice display that may be displayed in a sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The case where the operation prompting display is displayed in the sixth display mode is more than the case where the operation prompting display is displayed in the fifth display mode is the first display using the third display body sulfur. It is configured to be easy to display the notice of
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the first preliminary display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preliminary display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g16,
The first notice display is a display displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a third period,
The period during which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period,
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is a shorter period than the third period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g18)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g17,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g19)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display related to an effect,
The second display is a display related to the certain effect,
The first display is a display that may be displayed temporarily as a display constituting at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of the decorative symbols,
The first display and the second display are at least partially different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g20)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g19,
The certain effect is an effect started after the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g21)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note g19 or g20,
The first display is a display provided with a first number of patterns,
The second display is a display provided with a second number of patterns,
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g22)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g21,
The first number is one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative patterns is three,
The certain effect is an effect that is started when the three first displays are displayed once as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the display modes of the three first displays may be the same, or some or all of them may be different from each other.

(Appendix g24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative patterns is three,
The combination of the decorative symbols is configured to be displayed once in sequence,
The certain effect is a effect to be started when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily at the end of the combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g24,
The display means is a means that may display a notice display for giving a notice that the first display may be once displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is configured to be more easily displayed when the preliminary display is displayed than when the preliminary display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g26)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g25,
The decorative symbol variation display is configured such that a combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the judgment of acceptance is displayed after the variation of the decorative symbol is started,
The first display is a display that is not displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
The certain effect is a effect using the operation means,
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The first display is a display that does not include a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display regarding an operation valid period of the operation means in the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g 28)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g27,
The first display is a display displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
The operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state,
One of the plurality of states is a second state,
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first display is a display provided with a display pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first display pattern") corresponding to the operation means in the first state,
The second display is a display pattern (hereinafter referred to as “the display state corresponding to the operation means in the second state.
It is called "second display pattern". Is a display equipped with),
The second display is a display provided with the first display pattern,
The second display is a display provided with the second display pattern,
A case where the second display is displayed in the second display pattern in the certain effect after the first display is displayed in the first display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”). There is)
The operation means in the first case is configured to be more likely to be in the second state than in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Appendix h1)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying a time until a certain effect is performed,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display that may give notice that the time until the certain effect is started changes.
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "a certain effect" may be an effect by display or effect moving means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, a light guide plate, etc.).

(Appendix h2)
It is a game stand described in appendix h1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Also, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix h3)
It is a game console according to the remarks h1 or h2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h4)
It is a game console described in Appendix h3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h5,
After the timer reaches 0, a different display than the second one is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h7)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a jackpot than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
The display of one of the multiple displays is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the above-mentioned substitute sign is the effect display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect moving means is a means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations,
One of the plurality of types of motion is a rendering motion,
The certain effect is the effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, operations other than the rendering operation may be executed, and there are, for example, an operation at the time of power on, an initial position returning operation, or a retraction operation as an operation other than the rendering operation. Also, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on the frame (front door), for example.

(Appendix h10)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h9,
It is easier to make a big hit if the above-mentioned certain effect occurs than if it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h10,
A hot effect display may be displayed between the display of the first display and the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h14)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the displayed period of the period display is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or jackpot. Also, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix h15)
It is a game console described in appendix h14,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third effect display,
There may be cases where the timing at which the third effect display is displayed is not notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of a prepaid card, light emission by an LED, a rendering operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix h16)
It is a game stand described in appendix h15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h17)
It is a game console described in appendix h16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol change (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol change") in which the result of the pass / fail judgment is an off-state,
The big hit symbol variation is configured to have a higher frequency at which the third effect display is displayed than the lost symbol variation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h15 to h17,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect movable means is a means which may perform an effect operation,
While the display of the third effect display, the power-out movable means may perform the effect operation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h19)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h14 to h18,
After the period display is not displayed, the period display is in an easily visible state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h20)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h21)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h14 to h21,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "2nd timing") which displays a 2nd effect display.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance up is notified in response to the reach may be fixed, such as always reporting the chance up three times when a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs, the same reach When it is, the part which reports a chance up may be made to fluctuate so that it may notify three times and may notify only once once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be easy to lose. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit.

(Appendix h23)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h14 to h22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means which may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means which may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h24)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h23,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h25)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h26)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h27)
It is a game console described in Appendix h26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which the display mode of at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 28)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h26 or h27,
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 29)
The game console according to any one of appendices h26 to h28,
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Also, the third display may have a higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have a higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix h30)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h26 to h29,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a display of a first type,
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix h31)
It is a game console described in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a timer advance display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer advance notice display is a notice for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h32)
It is a game console described in appendix h30,
Equipped with operating means,
The display of the first type is the display of the operation effective period,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h33)
It is a game console described in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The said period display is a display which may alert | report the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 2nd effect display may be displayed in a 1st period,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h34)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h26 to h33,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h35)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be performed,
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in a first display mode,
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h36)
It is a game console described in Appendix h35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h37)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h35 or h36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h38)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h37,
When the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed than when the first display mode is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 35 to 39, wherein
The start and end of the countdown display is performed within a period of one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h41)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h40,
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h42)
It is a game console described in appendix h41,
Even during the movement of the countdown display, the notification of the time by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h43)
It is a game console described in appendix h41,
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h44)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification is given indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is performed by the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 45)
It is a game console described in appendix h44,
When the time until the certain effect is performed is 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h46)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h45,
There is also a case where it does not change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h47)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes h35 to h46,
The display means comprises a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
In some cases, the countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h48)
It is a game console described in Appendix h47,
The second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 49)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h50)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h51)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying a first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the first display starts.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h52)
It is a game console described in appendix h51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the third display starts.
During display of the third display, the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h53)
It is a game console described in appendix h52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h54)
It is a game console described in appendix h53,
In the case where the third display is displayed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when the third display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 55)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h52 to h54,
It is equipped with effect moving means capable of performing multiple types of motions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation,
The first operation may be performed while the third display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h56)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
The first display is configured to be displayed again after the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 57)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h51 to h55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time elapses.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h58)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
The first display is configured to be redisplayed before the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h59)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h58,
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h60)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h61)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h60,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h62)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification in which the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display.
The display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h63)
The game console described in appendix h62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 64)
It is a game console described in appendix h63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h65)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 64, wherein
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h66)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h67)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier for the final display of the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h68)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h67,
The display of the first display is started and ended during execution of one pattern variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h69)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h68,
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h70)
It is a game console described in Appendix h69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a game console.

(Appendix h71)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h69 or h70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display is changed by the movement display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h72)
It is a game console described in appendix h71,
Even during the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is continued,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h73)
It is a game console described in appendix h71,
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h74)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h62 to h73,
The countdown display is a display of a countdown of time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h75)
It is a game console described in appendix h74,
The timing notification is a notification that indicates that the timing at which the certain effect is performed is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 76)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h74 or h75,
After the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h77)
The gaming machine described in appendix h76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased after the second indication is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h78)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 79)
It is a game console described in Appendix h78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h80)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h81)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h82)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a time display,
It is configured that a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started,
Even if the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect may not be started, and
The certain effect may be started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the time display becoming a certain time,
If the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h83)
It is a game console described in Appendix h82,
If the time display has reached the certain time after the timer display has been started, the certain effect is started,
If the time display does not reach the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is not started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h84)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h82 or h83,
The certain effect is at least one kind of notice among a plurality of kinds of notices,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the first announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is a second announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the third announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the fourth announcement,
The first notice is a prefetch notice.
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed,
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized in the symbol variation display when executed than the case where it is not executed, and the fourth notice is a notice that can notify that the jackpot will occur. Is
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first notice may be a hold change notice, a prefetch mode, or a continuous notice.

  Further, the second notice may be a pseudo-sequence or a notice effect by inserting a movie.

  Further, the third advance notice may be a notice of cut-in or may be a next notice.

  Also, the fourth advance notice may be a big hit notice.

(Appendix h85)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h82 to h84,
One of the display types is a mini game display,
The time display reaches the certain time according to the result of the display of the mini game, and the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h86)
It is a game console described in Appendix h85,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item,
The preview item may be displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game,
The notice item includes a display indicating that the timer display starts to be displayed.
The time display is configured to reach the certain time to start the certain effect after the preliminary item is displayed.
If the preview item is not displayed, the time display does not reach the certain time and the certain effect is not started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h87)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h85 or h86,
It is configured such that the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 88)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h85 or h86,
After the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time, the result of the display of the mini game is derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 89)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h85 to h88,
As a result of the display of the mini game, a result not related to the certain effect may be derived.
The display of the mini game is configured to be started before the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h90)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h89,
The timer display when the certain effect is not started is configured such that the time display is erased without displaying the certain time.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h91)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h90,
The timer display is a display started to be displayed in any of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The certain effect is more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 92)
It is a game stand described in appendix h91,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is configured to be finalized,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the big hit game performed in response to the big hit symbol being displayed in a definite manner, and a state advantageous to the player is given. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h93)
It is a game console described in appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is configured to be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h94)
It is a game console described in appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without the certain effect being started. Is configured to
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h95)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h92 to h94,
The first aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a first time,
The second aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a second time,
The third aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a third time,
The second time is longer than the first time and the second time,
The third time is different from the first time,
The third time is different from the second time,
The third time is the time displayed only if the advantageous condition is granted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 96)
It is a game console described in Appendix h95,
The time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and is also configured to be able to display a display following the decimal point,
The display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
The display of the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is other than 0.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h97)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h95 or h96,
The display of the first time as the time display initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display of which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the second time as the time display initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the third time as the time display initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display of which the timer display gives notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h98)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h82 to h97,
Equipped with effect display means capable of executing effect display;
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display,
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on any one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
In the case of the first case, the certain effect may not be started.
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 99)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h82 to h98,
The timer display is a display on which time display is displayed,
The certain time is 0.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h100)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The first display is one of display related to a notice,
The second display is a prefetch notice display performed by displaying the hold icon in a certain mode,
The third display is one of the displays for notifying that the execution of the effect will be started (display showing that the execution of the effect is waiting),
The fourth display is a notice display of one of notice displays different from the second display,
The display of the first display may start before the display of the second display starts,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state in which the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be ended.
After the display of the third display ends in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
It may be configured to be in the second state after the first state,
The first state is one of states in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h101)
It is a game stand described in appendix h100,
In the case of the next symbol variation display, the display may be ended in the next symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h102)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note h100 or h102,
The display of the position among the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of the background on the hold icon,
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed;
The fifth display is configured not to be displayed in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed,
The second state is a state in which a certain reach effect is being performed,
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h103)
The game console described in appendix h102,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display performed by displaying the fifth display in a certain mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h104)
It is a game console described in the remarks h102 or h103,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h105)
It is a game console described in the remarks h102 or h103,
The area in which the first display is displayed is configured not to overlap the area in which the fifth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h106)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol variation display may not be continuously displayed in the next symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 107)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h108)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The first indication is an indication at least suggesting that the second indication may be initiated,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display for informing that execution of a certain effect is started,
The fourth display is a notice display relating to the symbol variation display being executed,
The fifth display is a display indicating that at least a hold icon is displayed,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the display of the third display may be started,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state, in which the third display whose display is started in the first state may end.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
After the first state, the second state may occur.
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed,
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed together with the hold icon,
In the second state, the fifth display is configured not to be displayed together with the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 109)
The gaming machine described in appendix h108,
The third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h110)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h108 or h109,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the fifth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 111)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the fifth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Big hit symbol is easy to be displayed in symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h112)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the fifth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect , It is easy to start the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 113)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the fifth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h114)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
The first display and the fifth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h115)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h114,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the next started symbol fluctuation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h116)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
The fourth display is displayed in an area where the third display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h117)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The sixth display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the sixth display, the display of the fourth display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is ended before the display of the sixth display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h118)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note h117,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display for notifying that the display of the sixth display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is terminated while the seventh display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h119)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h118,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above third displays may be displayed.
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is finished,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the eighth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h120)
It is a game console described in appendix 119,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h121)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h120,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display,
The ninth display is an explanatory display,
The ninth display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h122)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 108 to h121,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h123)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that the display start of a certain preliminary display is awaited.
The fourth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the third display may be started,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state, in which the third display whose display is started in the first state may end.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state,
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
After the first state, the second state may occur.
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable.
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed,
The first state is one of states in which the sixth display can be displayed,
The second state is one of states in which the sixth display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 124)
It is a game console described in Appendix h123,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The certain advance notice display is a notice to notice that the certain effect is started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 125)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h123 or h124,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h126)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h123 to h125,
The third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h127)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h123 to h126,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the sixth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 128)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Big hit symbol is easy to be displayed in symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 129)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect , It is easy to start the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h130)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h129,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 131)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 123 to h130,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h132)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h131,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the next started symbol fluctuation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h133)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h132,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 134)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h133,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display whose display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 135)
It is a game console described in appendix h134,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for predicting that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h136)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h135,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above third displays may be displayed.
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is finished,
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 137)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note h136,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 138)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h137,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display,
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display to be displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h139)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h123 to h138,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h140)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that the display start of a certain preliminary display is awaited.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the third display may be started,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state, in which the third display whose display is started in the first state may end.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state,
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
After the first state, the second state may occur.
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 141)
It is a game console described in appendix h140,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable.
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h142)
It is a game stand described in appendix h141,
In the first state, the display of at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display,
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h143)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Big hit symbol is easy to be displayed in symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 144)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect , It is easy to start the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 145)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h146)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 147)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h146,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h148)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h147,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The certain advance notice display is a notice to notice that the certain effect is started,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 149)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h148,
The third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h150)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h149,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the next started symbol fluctuation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 151)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h150,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h152)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h151,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display whose display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h153)
It is a game console described in appendix h152,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for predicting that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 154)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h153,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above third displays may be displayed.
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is finished,
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 155)
The game console described in Appendix h154,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 156)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h155,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display,
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display to be displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 157)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h156,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

  FIG. 425 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 425, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  In addition, a mode may be adopted in which the display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289 and described above, and further, a mode in which the display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. May be That is, the touch panel provided in the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect relating to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation or long press operation with the touch panel, or in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is being continuously touched. In addition, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function. In addition, in a part of the effects, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less . Further, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel and the effect is performed by the touch panel, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured to be ineffective in many cases, or may be configured to be less. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 425 is used by enclosing a sphere and circulating the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, wherein the enclosed sphere is used as a launch sphere and the balls are dispensed May be implemented by credit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 426, a slot machine (rotary gaming machine) as a game console applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 426 is an appearance perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 426 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 426) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted from the medal insertion port 1041 (insertion operation). It is. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the number-of-payouts display 1027 are formed of seven-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop button 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of the operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiver 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , The effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 427 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of embodiment, a modification, and an appendix described above, the component may be applied to other embodiments, a modification, and an appendix.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 speaker 136 production button 208 decoration symbol display device 212 1st special view display device 214 2nd special view display device 224 production movable body 246 shielding device 300 main control part 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 game board lamp 542 game stand lamp

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display ,
One display of the previous SL a plurality of types of display is a third of the display,
Before Symbol third of the display is a display that includes a certain character display,
The certain character display is a character display indicating that preparation is in progress,
May display the third display before the execution of certain reach demonstration is started is started,
Wherein the display displays has been of the third start before the execution of certain reach demonstration is started, there is a case where the display during execution of the certain reach demonstration is completed,
Wherein after the display of the third display is completed during the execution of certain reach demonstration, you may want to see the timer display is started during the execution of the certain reach demonstration,
By counting down the timer display, the timing at which a certain effect is performed is notified,
After the timer display is displayed, the certain effect is started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
There are cases in which two of the third indications (hereinafter referred to as "two third indications") are displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
In the first case, the display of one of the two third displays ends and the countdown of the timer display (hereinafter referred to as "first timer display") corresponding to the one display. Is started, and after the display of the first timer display is finished, the other display of the two third displays starts the movement display, and the other display after the movement display ends. May end and the timer display corresponding to the other display may start to count down.
It is characterized by

Although the hold icon may be used as a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is held, this can be realized according to this game console.
Also, in the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [in preparation display, for example, a first preparation image RDY1 or a second preparation image RDY2 shown in FIG. 404 (a)],
The third display is a display including a certain character display [for example, character display of "in preparation", etc.]
The certain character display is a character display indicating that preparation is in progress,
The display of the third display is performed before execution of a certain reach effect [specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 404 (i) to FIG. 404 (n), etc.] is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 404 (a) to (i), the first ready image RDY1 and the second ready image RDY2 are displayed before the sword reach is started. Etc.],
The third display, which has been started before the start of execution of the certain reach effect, may end during execution of the certain reach effect [eg, in FIG. 404 (k) As shown, the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is finished, etc., during execution of the sword strike.
After the display of the third display is finished during the execution of the certain reach effect, the display of the timer display may be started during the execution of the certain reach effect [during the execution of a certain reach effect] The timer display started to corresponds to the third display. For example, as shown in FIG. 404 (k), the second ready image RDY2 to the second ready image RDY2 during execution of the sword reach The corresponding timer notice display has been switched, etc.],
When the timer display is counted down, the timing at which a certain effect is performed is notified [for example, as shown in FIG. 404 (k) to FIG. For example, it is reported that a notice effect (for example, display of an iron plate image TP) will be performed after 10 seconds),
After the timer display is displayed, the certain effect [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 404 (n), etc.] is started.
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
Two of the third displays (hereinafter referred to as "two third displays") may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") [e.g., shown in FIG. 404 (a) So that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 may be displayed, etc.]
In the first case, the display of the display of one of the two third displays [for example, the first preparing image RDY1 etc.] is ended, and the timer display corresponding to the one display (hereinafter referred to as “ After the countdown of the first timer display [for example, the timer advance display shown in FIG. 404 (c) to FIG. 404 (e)] is started and the display of the first timer display is completed, The display of the other of the two third displays [for example, the second ready image RDY2 etc.] starts the movement display, and after the movement display is finished, the display of the other display is finished, In some cases, the countdown of the timer display [for example, the timer advance display shown in FIG. 404 (k) to FIG. (M) etc.] corresponding to the other display is started,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.
Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a reserved icon display area, for example, a UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 404 (a), etc.]”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, and [the hold icon can be displayed in a state where an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, the hold icon is It can be displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 404 (j), When the UI unit UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping the third display [in the state where the hold icon is displayed, an image including a hold icon display area A part is displayed overlapping in the preparation display, for example, as shown in FIG. 404 (a), the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc. ],
The display position of the third display is the same before and after the execution of the certain reach effect is started. [Display position of the display under preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed and preparation in the non-display state of the hold icon The display position of the middle display is the same, for example, the display position of the second preparing image RDY2 shown in FIG. 404 (h) and the display position of the second preparing image RDY2 shown in FIG. 404 (j) are the same. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a reserved icon for the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, a reserved icon for the red display mode shown in FIG. 391 (h), etc.]] Yes,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example,
, The default display mode etc. shown in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a)],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is easy to be started [The image including the reserved icon display area is the default rather than the case where the image including the reserved icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. When the display mode is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the preview notice is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode In the case of an error, the red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, eg, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 391 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Big hit symbol is easy to be displayed in symbol variation display [Image with default icon display area is default rather than the case where image with default icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the preview status of pre-reading notice] If the display mode is changed to the display mode of pre-reading advance notice, it is likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in a gold display mode as shown in FIG. 391 (e) The aspect is likely to change, and thus, the big hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed etc. in the symbol variation display based on the suspension corresponding to the suspension icon which is the target of the prefetching, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button advance effect by the deca-button 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6), etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), etc.]”
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started [in a certain symbol variation display The preparation display in which the display has been started is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (i) to FIG. Are displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed. In the area where the in-provision display is displayed, the advance notice is performed, for example, FIG. As shown in), a preliminary display may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image RDY is being prepared, and the like, and the word "excessive heat".
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also, in the first case, the display of one of the two third displays ends and the first timer display [eg, FIG. 401 (c) to FIG. (E) After the countdown of the first timer display is completed, the other display of the two third displays is once erased, and then the other display is displayed. May be displayed enlarged [for example, as shown in FIG. 404 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged when re-displayed, etc.],
The other display enlarged and displayed overlaps the fluctuation icon [The preparation display enlarged and displayed overlaps the fluctuation icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), Image in preparation RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “one of the display of the plurality of types is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example,“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a). It is the displayed explanation etc.],
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed, and [an explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, , As shown in FIG. 391 (a), the instruction display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [In preparation display is displayed in a specific display area where an explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (d As shown in), the in-provisioning image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc. where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eleventh display [ball drop display, for example, ball drop error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 422 (a1), etc.]”.
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball extraction error display ERR1, the character display of "Please pull the ball" is prompted to open the ball, etc.,
In a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display [Preparation In the state where both the middle display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display is overlapped with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. Is overlapped to the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, in a state in which both the timer display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the timer display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display [mini game In the state where both the timer advance notice and the ball withdrawal indication are displayed, at least a part of the mini game or the timer advance notice is overlapped with the ball withdrawal indication, for example, as shown in FIG. 422 (b1) Time display meter MT4 is overlapped with ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, "" After the timer display is displayed, the certain effect is started, "means that" after the display indicating 0 in the timer display is displayed, the certain effect is started, [For example, as shown in FIG. 404 (l) to FIG. 404 (n), the iron plate image TP is displayed after the timer display in the timer advance display becomes “0:00”. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In addition, “the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [balloon gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Claims (25)

A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that the display start of a certain preliminary display is awaited.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the third display may be started, and
The third display whose display is started in the first state is configured such that the display may end in the second state,
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state,
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect is configured to be started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
Configured to be in the second state after the first state;
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable.
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein
In the first state, the display of at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display,
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect , Configured to facilitate the start of the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
The display of at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
The sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display in a state in which both the first display and the sixth display are displayed; Yes,
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is:
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein
The certain advance notice display is a timer notice display.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein
The certain warning display is a display of a mini game,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The third display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is configured to be continuously displayed even after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by 14. A game stand according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is configured to be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by 15. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display whose display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 16, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for predicting that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein:
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above third displays may be displayed.
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is finished,
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display,
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 18, and
When two of the third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by 20. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display,
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display to be displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein:
The "display representing waiting for the start of display of a certain advance notice display" according to claim 1 means "character display in preparation",
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eleventh display,
The eleventh display is a display prompting to eject the game ball,
In a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display It is configured,
A game stand characterized by 23. A game stand according to claim 22, wherein
In a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein:
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein:
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by